Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on Hbrary shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http : //books . google . com/|
Sc.lS.o/^.l^')
ftnrtarJ CoIIfBt lUraro
/■;jlay/i'^; -/Ajla« JSrjr
SCIENCE CENTER LIBRARY
vAI>Ui^ . oJ^ C^H^
THE
Technology Quarterly
AND
Proceedings of the Society of Arts.
VOLUME X.
BOSTON :
MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY.
1897.
^\4
:. /s:io, 130
J
The Massachusetts Institute of Technology held its first
meeting on April 8, 1862. By the act of incorporation, which
was accepted at this meeting, the Society of Arts was created
as a part of the Institute coordinate with the School of Industrial
Science.
The objects of the Society are to awaken and maintain an
active interest in the sciences and their practical applications,
and to aid generally in their advancement in connection with the
arts, agriculture, manufactures, and commerce. Regular meet-
ings are held semi-monthly from October to May.
The Society discontinued the publication of the Abstracts of
Proceedings in 189 1, and since then has published its proceedings
and the principal papers read at its meetings in the Technology
Quarterly. The present volume contains the proceedings from
October, 1896, to May, 1897, inclusive.
The Quarterly contains, also, the results of scientific investi-
gations carried on at the Institute, and other papers of interest
to its graduates and friends. /
Neither the Massachusetts Institute of Technology nor the
Society of Arts assumes any responsibility for the opinions or
statements in the papers.
CONTENTS.
Sodcty of Arts. List of Officers
By-Laws
List of Mem1>ers
Proceedings of the Society of Arts
Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories (VII and VIII) . .
Index to the Results of Tests, Parts I to VI, 1894-96
^▼iew of American Chemical Research I9
Slimmer School of Architecture for 1896, in South-
em England, Normandy, and Tourame . . Eleazer B. Homer . .
Viscosity of Mercury Vapor <A.A, Nayes . . . .
\ H. M, Goodwin . . .
ScientiBc Work of the Boston Party on the Sixth
Peary Expedition to Greenland, Report A . . G. R. Putnam . . . .
Analytical Investigation of the Hydrolysis of (" George W. Rolfe . . .
Starch by Acids ( George Defren . . .
Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of
Cupric Oxide George Defren , . .
Micro-Organisms and Sterilizing Processes in the ( Samuel C. Prescott . .
Canning Industry \^' Lyman Underwood
Minutes Adopted by the Corporation and by the
Faculty on the Death of President Francis A.
Walker
Tribute to the Memory of Brevet Brigadier- Gen-
eral Francis Amasa Walker Thomas L, Lwermore
Scientific Work of the Boston Party on the Sixth
Peary Expedition to Greenland. Report B George H. Barton
Note on Some of the Requirements for a Sanitary
MUk-Supply William T. Sedgwick
A Flavor-Producing Micrococcus of Butter . . . Simeon C. Keitk^ Jr
Some Fundamental Propositions Relating to the
Design of Frameworks Frank H, Cilley
Some Data on the Heating Error in Resistance
Coils Frank A, Laws
Cave Hunting in Yucatan H. C. Mercer .
Odors and Tastes of Surface Waters, with special r
Reference to Anabaena, a Microscopical Organ- I D. D. Jackson
ism found in Certain Water Supplies of Mas- ] J. W. Ellms
sachusetts
Books Received
. . . lU
. . . ix
. I, 201, 277
294. 372
348
51, 108, 186
7
46
«33
167
} '83
206
209
245
247
250
283
353
410
275
MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY.
of %ttsi.
, 1 897-1 898.
President of the Institute.
James M. Crafts.
Secretary of the Society of Arts.
Robert P. Bigelow.
Executive Committee.
George W. Blodgett, Chairman,
Edmund H. Hewins. Desmond FitzGerald.
Frank W. Hodgdon. The President.
The Secretary.
Board of Publication.
William T. Sedgwick, Chairman,
Charles R. Cross. A. Lawrence Rotch,
Dwight Porter. Robert P, Bigelow.
Editor of the Technology Quarterly.
Robert P. Bigelow.
BY-LAWS.
Objects of the Society.
The objects of the Society are to awaken and maintain an active
interest in the practical sciences, and to aid generally in their advance-
ment and development in connection with arts, agriculture, manufac-
tures, and commerce.
The Society invites all who have any valuable knowledge of this
kind which they are willing to contribute to attend its meetings and
become members. Persons having valuable inventions or discoveries
which they wish to explain will find a suitable occasion in the Society
meetings, subject to regulations hereafter provided ; and while the
Society will never indorse, by vote or diploma or other official recog-
nition, any invention, discovery, theory, or machine, it will give every
facility to those who wish to discuss the principles and intentions of
their own machines or inventions, and will endeavor at its meetings,
or through properly constituted committees, to show how far any
communications made to it are likely to prove of real service to the
community.
Section I. — Administration.
The immediate management and control of the affairs of the
Society of Arts shall be exercised by an Executive Committee, con-
sisting of the President of the Institute and the Secretary of the
Society (who shall be members ex officiis), and five other members,
who shall be elected by the Society of Arts at each annual meeting,
to continue in office until other persons have been chosen in their
place.
Sect. II. — Duties of the Executive Committee.
The Executive Committee shall elect its chairman, prescribe his
duties, and, with the concurrence of the Treasurer of the Institute,
fix his compensation when the interests of the Society require that
• • f
111
iv By-Laws,
he should be paid for his services ; they may invite any person to
preside at any ordinary meeting who is well versed in the subjects
to be discussed ; they shall appoint the days and times of meeting,
when not fixed by the Society, and determine the subjects to be con-
sidered at the meetings and the mode of conducting the discussions ;
they may, with the concurrence of the President of the Institute,
make such arrangements for reporting and publishing the proceedings
of the Society as they may deem best suited to advance. its interests;
they may receive moneys in behalf of the Society in aid of its objects,
by subscription, donation, or bequest ; they shall make a report of
their doings to the Society at its annual meeting and at such other
times as a report may be called for by a majority of the members pres-
ent at any meeting ; they shall also make a report of their doings to
the President of the Institute prior to the annual meetings and at such
other times as the Corporation may require it. Three members shall
constitute a quorum for the transaction of business.
Sect. III. — Duties of the President and Secretary.
1. It shall be the duty of the President of the Institute to preside
at the annual and the special meetings of the Society, and also at its
ordinary meetings when the Executive Committee does not invite a
special chairman to preside.
2. It shall be the duty of the Secretary of the Society to give
notice of and attend all meetings of the Society and of the Executive
Committee ; to keep a record of the business and orders of each meet-
ing, and read the same at the next meeting ; to keep a list of the mem-
bers of the Society, and notify them of their election and of their
appointment on committees ; and generally to devote his best efforts,
under the direction of the Executive Committee, to forwarding the
business and advancing the interests of the Society. He shall also
record the names of the Executive Committee attending each meeting.
Sect. IV. — Funds of the Society.
All the fees and assessments of members, and all moneys received
by subscription, donation, or otherwise, in aid of the Society, shall be
paid into the treasury of the Corporation, to be held and used for the
objects of the Society under the direction of the Executive Commit-
By-Laws, v
tee, and shall be subject to the order of its Chairman, countersigned
by the President of the Corporation.
Sect. V. — Meetings of the Society .
1. The annual meeting of the Society shall be held at the Insti-
tute on the second Thursday in May. The ordinary meetings shall be
held semi-monthly, or whenever deemed expedient by the Society or
by the Executive Committee, excepting in the months of June, July,
August, and September.
2. If from any cause the annual meeting shall not have been
duly notified or held as above required, the same shall be notified and
held at such time as the Executive Committee may direct.
3. A special meeting of the Society may at any time be called by
the Secretary on a written request of ten members. Twelve members
of the Society shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business.
Sect. VI. — Members and Their Election.
1. Members of the Society of Arts shall be of three kinds —
Associate, Corresponding, and Honorary Members.
2. Candidates for Associate Membership shall be recommended by
not less than two members, whose signatures shall be affixed to a writ-
ten or printed form to that effect. Each nomination shall be referred
to the Executive Committee, and when reported favorably upon by
them, and read by the Secretary, may be acted upon at the same
meeting; the election shall be conducted by ballot, and affirmative
votes to the number of three fourths of the votes cast shall be neces-
sary for an election.
3. Corresponding and Honorary Members may be elected in the
same way, on nomination by the Executive Committee.
4. Associate Members shall pay an admission fee of three dollars
before being entitled to the privileges of membership, and an annual
assessment of three dollars on the first of October of each year, this
sum to include subscription to the Technology Quarterly and Proceed-
ings of the Society of Arts.
An Associate Member who shall have paid at any one time the
sum of fifty dollars, or annual assessments for twenty years, shall
become a member for life, and be thereafter exempted from annual
assessments.
vi By-Laws,
A member neglecting to pay his annual assessment for six months
after being notified that the same is due shall be regarded as having
withdrawn his membership, unless otherwise decided by the Execu-
tive Committee, which shall be authorized, for cause shown, to remit
the assessments for any one year ; and which shall moreover be em-
powered to exempt particular members from assessments whenever
their claims and the interests of the Society make it proper to do so.
Sect. VII. — Election of the Executive Committee and of
THE Secretary.
1. At an ordinary meeting of the Society, preceding the annual
meeting, a nominating committee of Jive shall be chosen, whose duty
it shall be to nominate candidates for the Executive Committee, to post
a list of the names selected in the office of the Secretary, and to fur-
nish printed copies thereof to the members at or before the time of
election.
2. At a meeting at which an election is to take place the presiding
officer shall appoint a committee to collect and count the votes and
report the names and the number of votes for each candidate, where-
upon he shall announce the same to the meeting.
3. A majority of the votes cast shall be necessary to an election.
4. In the first organization under these By-Laws, the Executive
Committee may be elected at an ordinary or special meeting.
5. Vacancies in the committee occurring during the year may be
filled by the Society at an ordinary meeting.
6. The Secretary shall be elected by the Society, on nomination
by the Executive Committee, at each annual meeting of the Society,
or, in case of a vacancy during the session, at such other time as the
Executive Committee may appoint ; and he shall be reeligible in the
same way at the pleasure of the Society.
7. The compensation of the Secretary shall be fixed from year to
year by the Executive Committee with the concurrence of the Treas-
urer of the Institute.
Sect. VIII. — Committees of Arts.
I. The Members of the Society of Arts may be enrolled in divi-
sions, under the following heads, according to the taste or preference of
By-Laws. vii
the individual ; each division to constitute a committee upon the sub-
jects to which it appertains :
(i) On Mineral Materials, Mining, and the Manufacture of Iron,
Copper, and other Metals.
(2) On Organic Materials — their culture and preparation.
(3) On Tools and Implements.
(4) On Machinery and Motive Powers.
(5) On Textile Manufactures.
(6) On Manufactures of Wood, Leather, Paper, India Rubber, and
Gutta Percha.
(7) On Pottery, Glass, Jewelry, and works in the Precious Metals.
(8) On Chemical Products and Processes.
(9) On Household Economy ; including Warming, Illumination,
Water-Supply, Drainage, Ventilation, and the Preparation and Preser-
vation of Food.
(10) On Engineering, Architecture, and Ship-building.
(11) On Commerce, Marine Navigation, and Inland Transporta-
tion.
(12) On Agriculture and Rural Affairs.
(13) On the Graphic and Fine Arts.
(14) On Ordnance, Firearms, and Military Equipments.
(15) On Physical Apparatus.
2. Any member may belong to more than one of the above-named
Committees of Arts, but shall not at the same time be eligible as chair-
man in more than one.
3. It shall be competent for each Committee of Arts, of ten or
more members entitled to vote, to organize ; to elect annually in Octo-
ber, or whenever a vacancy shall occur, a chairman ; to appoint its own
meetings ; and to frame its own By-Laws, provided' the same do not
conflict with the regulations of the Society of Arts.
Sect. IX. — Amendment and Repeal.
I. These By-Laws may be amended or repealed, or other pro-
visions added, by a vote of three fourths of the members present at
any regular meeting of the Society ; provided that such changes shall
have been recommended and approved in accordance with the By-Laws
of the Corporation (see extract from By-Laws of Corporation as
viii By-Laws.
printed below) and presented in writing at a preceding meeting of
the Society.
2. These By-Laws shall take effect immediately after their ap-
proval by the Corporation and adoption by the Society, and all previous
By-Laws are hereby repealed.
As amended December p, iSgy,
Extract from the By-Laws of the Corporation.
Sect. VL — There shall be a Committee on the Society of Arts
consisting of five members, appointed at the annual meeting of the
Corporation, to hold office for one year, who shall have the general
charge and supervision of the organization and proceedings of the
Society, subject to the approval of the Corporation. It shall be their
duty, in connection with a committee chosen by the Society, to frame
By-Laws for the government of the Society, which shall take effect
when adopted by the Society and approved by the Corporation.
February^ i8g4.
LIST OF MEMBERS.
December, 1897.
Members are requested to inform the Secretary of any change of address.
LIFE MEMBERS.
Addicks, J. Edward Wilmington, Del.
Atkinson, Edward 31 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
I
j Beal, James H 104 Beacon Street, Boston, Mass.
j Bowditch, William 1 28 State Street, Boston, Mass.
j Breed, Francis W 1 1 1 Summer Street, Boston, Mass.
I Billiard, W. S 3 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Cummings, John 60 Congress Street, Boston, Mass.
Dalton, Charles H. . . 33 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Davenport, Henry ... 59 West 38th Street, New York, N. Y.
Dewson, F. A 53 State Street, Boston, Mass.
Eastman, Ambrose 53 State Street, Boston, Mass.
Endicott, William, Jr. 32 Beacon Street, Boston, Mass.
Foster, John 25 Marlborough Street, Boston, Mass.
Gaffield, Thomas 54 Allen Street, Boston, Mass.
Grffin, Eugene 323 State Street, Albany, N. Y.
Guild, Henry 433 Washington Street, Boston, Mass.
Haven, Franklin .... 97 Mount Vernon Street, Boston, Mass.
' Henck, J. B Montecito, Santa Barbara Co., Cal.
Hewins, Edmund H 625 Tremont Street, Boston, Mass.
iz
X Society of Arts,
Johnson, Samuel .... 7 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Lee, Henry Brookline, Mass.
Lincoln, F. W Boston Storage Warehouse,
Massachusetts Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Little, James L Goddard Avenue, Brookline, Mass.
Little, John M Hotel Pelham, Boston, Mass.
Lowe, N. M 88 Court Street, Boston, Mass.
Mack, Thomas .... 269 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Matthews, Nathan 145 Beacon Street, Boston, Mass.
May, F. W. G 127 State Street, Boston, Mass.
May, John J Post-Office Box 2348, Boston, Mass.
McPherson, W. J 10 Clarendon Street, Boston, Mass.
Norton, Jacob 6y Carver Street, Boston, Mass.
Ordway, John M \ . New Orleans, La.
Pickering, E. C. . Harvard College Observatory, Cambridge, Mass.
Pickering, H. W 249 Beacon Street, Boston, Mass.
Prang, Louis 16 Centre Street, Roxbury, Mass.
Pratt, Miss Watertown, Mass.
Ross, Waldo O. ..... . i Chestnut Street, Boston, Mass.
Runkle, John D. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Sawyer, Edward Newton, Mass.
Sawyer, Timothy T 319 Dartmouth Street, Boston, Mass.
Sayles, Henry 42 Beacon Street, Boston, Mass.
Sears, Philip H 85 Mount Vernon Street, Boston, Mass.
Sherwin, Thomas Revere Street, Jamaica Plain, Mass.
Shurtleff, A. M 9 West Cedar Street, Boston, Mass.
Sinclair, A. D 35 Newbury Street, Boston, Mass.
Stevens, B. F 91 Pinckney Street, Boston, Mass.
Sullivan, Richard 35 Brimmer Street, Boston, Mass.
Tufts, John W 27 Concord Square, Boston, Mass.
Vose, George L Paris, Me.
List of Members, xi
Ware, William R Columbia College, New York, N. Y.
Watson, William .... 107 Marlborough Street, Boston, Mass.
Wentworth, Arioch 332 Beacon Street, Boston, Mass.
Whitaker, Channing Lowell, Mass.
Wing, Charles H. ... Ledger, Mitchell County, North Carolina.
ASSOCIATE MEMBERS.
Adams, Henry S Arlington, Mass.
Alden, Charles H., Jr. . . . i024Tremont Building, Boston, Mass.
Alden, George A 87 Summer Street, Boston, Mass.
Alden, John Lawrence, Mass.
Allen, C. Frank . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Allen, Samuel E 6"/ Chauncy Street, Boston, Mass.
Allen, Walter S 34 South 6th Street, New Bedford, Mass.
Allen, William Henry . 291 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Andrews, Clement W John Crerar Library, Chicago, 111.
Appleton, Charles B. . . 207 Aspinwall Avenue, Brookline, Mass.
Atwood, Frank W 98 Commercial Street, Boston, Mass.
Baker, J. B 602 Centre Street, Newton, Mass.
Bardwell, F. L. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Barnes, Herbert H Hotel Brunswick, Boston, Mass.
Bars tow, George E 27 Union Street, Lynn, Mass.
Bartlett, Dana P. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Bartlett, Spaulding Webster, Mass.
Barton, George H. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Barton, Howard R Englewood, N. J.
Bassett, William H New Bedford, Mass.
Batcheller, Robert . . 55 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Bigelow, Charles H Salem, Mass.
Bigelow, Otis Avenel, Montgomery Co., Maryland.
Bigelow, Robert P. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Binney, Amos .... Room 416, 53 State Street, Boston, Mass.
Birkholz, Hans Care E. P. AUis Co., Milwaukee, Wis.
Bixby, George L Foxboro, Mass.
Blackmer, Adelaide Sherman . . 31 Devon Street, Roxbury, Mass.
Blodgett, George W. . . Boston and Albany Railroad, Boston, Mass.
xii Society of Arts,
Blood, Grosvenor T 125 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
Blood, John Balch . . . 22-A Equitable Building, Boston, Mass.
Bowen, Stephen i Elm Hill Avehue, Boston, Mass.
Brackett, Dexter 3 Mount Vernon Street, Boston, Mass.
Bradlee, Arthur T Chestnut Hill, Mass.
Braley, Samuel T Rutland, Vt.
Brophy, William . . . .17 Egleston Street, Jamaica Plain, Mass.
Bryden, George W . 33 Pearl Street, Portland, Me.
Burns, Peter S. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Burton, A. E. . . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Caldwell, Eliot L 3 Head Place, Boston, Mass.
Cameron, J. A Forge Village, Mass.
Carson, Howard A 20 Beacon Street, Boston, Mass.
Carter, Henry H Hotel Ludlow, Boston, Mass.
Carty, J. J 18 Cortlandt Street, New York, N. Y.
Chandler, F. W. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Chandler, S. C Cambridge, Mass.
Chase, Charles H Stoneham, Mass.
Chase, F. D Versailles, Pa.
Clark, John M 47 Court Street, Boston, Mass.
Clifford, H. E. . . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Cody, Lewis P. . . 9 South Division Street, Grand Rapids, Mich.
Coffin, C. A General Electric Co., Boston, Mass.
Coffin, F. S 152 Congress Street, Boston, Mass.
Collins, R. B Box 237, Dedham, Mass.
Crafts, James M. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Craig, J. Holly 69 Broad Street, Boston, Mass.
Crosby, William O. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Crosby, William W 8 Court Street, Woburn, Mass.
Cross, C. R. ... Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Curtis, Henry P 94 Mount Vernon Place, Boston, Mass.
Cutter, Louis F Winchester, Mass.
Dana, Gorham 41 AUerton Street, Brookline, Mass.
Davis, Frank E. . . Care Washburn & Moen Co., Worcester, Mass.
Day, Nathan B 280 Newbury Street, Boston, Mass.
DeLancey, Darragh Rochester, N. Y.
DeWolf, John O. . . .33 Hampshire Street, Cambridgeport, Mass.
List of Members, xiii
Doolittle, Orrin S 445 Oley Street, Reading, Pa.
Drown, Thomas M. . . . Lehigh University, South Bethlehem, Pa.
Dudley, P. H 80 Pine Street, New York, N. Y.
Dunn, Edward H 30 South Street, Boston, Mass.
Dutton, Edgar F Newton Centre, Mass.
Dwelley, Edwin F 25 Baltimore Street, Lynn, Mass.
Ellis, John Lonsdale, R. L
Ely, Sumner B 11 West 88th Street, New York, N. Y.
Eustis, W. E. C 55 Kilby Street, Boston, Mass.
Eustis, W. Tracy 950 Beacon Street, Brookline, Mass.
Evans, Robert D 114 Bedford Street, Boston, Mass.
Fales, Frank L 3 Mount Vernon Street, Boston, Mass.
Farnham, Isaiah H 125 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
Faunce, Linus . . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Fiske, J. P. B 164 Devonshire Street, Boston, Mass.
FitzGerald, Desmond Brookline, Mass.
FitzGerald, Francis A. J. . Carborundum Co., Niagara Falls, N. Y.
Flinn, Richard J West Roxbury, Mass.
Forbes, Eli Clinton, Mass.
Forbes, Howard C 31 State Street, Boston, Mass.
Foss, E. N 8 Everett Street, Jamaica Plain, Mass.
Freeland, J. H Hotel Brunswick, Boston, Mass.
Freeman, John R 4 Market Square, Providence, R. I.
French, E. V 31 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
Fuller, George W Louisville, Kentucky.
Fuller, William B 57 Lumber District, Albany, N. Y.
Gaylord, W. K Pasadena, Cal.
Gilbert, F. A 74 Ames Building, Boston, Mass.
Gill, A. H Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Gilley, Frank M 100 Clark Avenue, Chelsea, Mass.
Good ell, George H Susquehanna, Pa.
Goodspeed, Joseph H. . 382 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Goodwin, H. M. . .. Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Goodwin, Richard D 28 Summer Street, Boston, Mass.
Gray, Joseph P 31 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
Greenleaf, Lewis S. ." . 42 Farnsworth Street, South Boston, Mass.
xiv Society of Arts.
Grover, Nathan C Maine State College, Orono, Me.
Guppy, Benjamin Wilder Melrose, Mass.
Hadaway, William S 14 Edson Street, Boston, Mass.
Hadley, F. W Arlington Heights, Mass.
Hale, Richard A Lawrence, Mass.
Hall, William T Adams House, Boston, Mass.
Hamblett, George W. . 506 Lowell Street, Lawrence, Mass.
Hamilton, George Wymari .... 28 Court Square, Boston, Mass.
Hamlin, George H Maine State College, Orono, Me.
Hardy, W. B 63 Franklin Street, Boston, Mass.
Harrington, Francis .... 5 Mount Vernon Street, Boston, Mass.
Harris, William A Exchange, Liverpool, England.
Hart, Francis R., Old Colony Trust Co., Ames Building, Boston, Mass.
Hawkes, Levi G Saugus, Mass.
Hayes, Hammond V. . 42 Farnsworth Street, South Boston, Mass.
Hazen, Allen 220 Broadway, New York, N. Y.
Hicks, C. Atherton Needham, Mass.
Hobart, James C 610 BaymuUer Street, Cincinnati, Ohio.
Hobart, John D Maiden, Mass.
Hobbs, Franklin W Brookline, Mass.
Hodgdon, Frank W Arlington, Mass.
Hofman, H. O. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Hollingsworth, A. L 64 Federal Street, Boston, Mass.
Hollingsworth, Sumner .... 44 Federal Street, Boston, Mass.
Holman, G. M 52 Pleasant Street, Fitchburg, Mass.
Holman, S. W. . Hotel Ilkley, Huntington Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Holton, Edward C 100 Canal Street, Cleveland, Ohio.
Holtzer, Charles W Brookline, Mass.
Hood, George H 9 Otis Street, Boston, Mass.
Hopkins, Arthur T 9 Flint Avenue, Somerville, Mass.
Hopkins, Prescott A Drexel Institute, Philadelphia, Pa.
Hopkins, William J Drexel Institute, Philadelphia, Pa.
Horton, Theodore 17 Everett Street, Melrose, Mass.
Howard, A. P 13 Pearl Street, Boston, Mass.
Howard, L. Frederic 142 P. O. Building, Boston, Mass.
Howe* Henry M 27 West 73d Street, New York, N. Y.
Howe, Horace J Chestnut Street, Medford, Mass.
Hunt, Edward M 22 Beckett Street, Portland, Me.
List of Members, xv
Hunt, Harry H 202 Equitable Building, Boston, Mass.
Hutchings, James H. . . 1672 Washington Street, Boston, Mass.
Jackson, Daniel D., Mt. Prospect Laboratory, Flatbush Avenue,
and Eastern Parkway, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Jackson, William 50 City Hall, Boston, Mass.
Jacques, W. W 125 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
James, Frank M 51 North Broadway, Haverhill, Mass.
Jaques, W. H. . . . 1204 Bowling Green Offices, New York, N. Y.
Jenkins, Charles D 32 Hawley Street, Boston, Mass.
Jenks, William J .120 Broadway, New York, N. Y.
Johnson, Jesse F. . . Care Hamilton Powder Co., Montreal, Canada.
Johnston, William A. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Jones, Jerome 51 Federal Street, Boston, Mass.
Kales, William R. ... 495 Giddings Avenue, Cleveland, Ohio.
Kastner, Charles . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Keith, Simeon C, Jr. ... 8 North Market Street, Boston, Mass.
Kendall, Edward . . .139 Magazine Street, Cambridgeport, Mass.
Kendall, Francis H Court House, East Cambridge, Mass.
Killilea, James J Tufts Wharf, East Boston, Mass.
Kimball, Fred M. 58 Main Street, Winter Hill, Mass.
Kimball, Joseph H West Newton, Mass.
Knapp, G. Frederick . . .1110 Harrison Building, Philadelphia, Pa.
Knowles, Morris, 2d City Hall, Pittsburg, Pa.
Koehler, S. R Museum of Fine Arts, Boston, Mass.
Kunhardt, L. Henry ...... 31 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
Lanza, Gaetano . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Laws, Frank A. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Leach, Albert E Newtonville, Mass.
Lee, Elisha Tioga Centre, N. Y.
Lee, John C Mountfort Street, Brookline, Mass.
Leeson, J. R Post-Office Box 2221, Boston, Mass.
Leighton, Marshall O. . . 127 Clairmont Avenu/e, Montclair, N. J.
Libby, Henry F 687 Boylston Street, Boston, Mass.
Lincoln, G. Russell Hingham, Mass.
Little, Samuel 556 Warren Street, Roxbury, Mass.
Lodge, H. Ellerton .... 4 Post-Office Square, Boston, Mass.
xvi Society of Arts,
Lodge, Richard W. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Lothrop, Thomas M 13 Carlton Street, Brookline, Mass.
Loud, Joseph Prince . . .135 Mount Vernon Street, Boston, Mass.
Lovejoy, Frank W Kodak Park, Rochester, N. Y.
Low, John F Chelsea, Mass.
Lowell, A. Lawrence . . 171 Marlborough Street, Boston, Mass.
Lowell, Percival 53 State Street, Boston, Mass.
McQuarrie, James L 40 East 46th Street, Chicago, III.
Main, Charles T 53 State Street, Boston, Mass.
Mandell, Samuel P. . . 302 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
March, Clement 344 State Street, Bridgeport, Conn.
Martin, Henry South Gardiner, Me.
Metcalf, Frederick . American Ship Windlass Co., Providence, R. I.
Metcalf, Leonard ^ Concord, Mass.
Miller, Edward F. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Miller, Franklin T. . . Auburndale, Mass.
Mixter, S. J 180 Marlborough Street, Boston, Mass.
Moody, Burdett . . Homestake Mining Co., Lead, South Dakota.
Moody, Frederick C. . Care Bell Telephone Co., Philadelphia, Pa.
Moore, Alexander 3 School Street, Boston, Mass.
Moore, Fred F South Framingham, Mass.
Morse, Henry C 2 Union Park, Boston, Mass.
Morss, Everett 79 Comhill, Boston, Mass.
Morton, Galloupe ... 2 Westervelt Avenue, New Brighton,
Staten Island, N. Y.
Moseley, Alexander W., Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Mosman, Philip A Colorado Smelting Co., Pueblo, Col.
Mumford, Edgar H 39 Cortlandt Street, New York, N. Y.
Munroe, James P 179 Devonshire Street, Boston, Mass.
Newbegin, Parker C. . . Bangor & Aroostook Railroad, Houlton, Me.
Niles, William H. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Norman, George H Newport, R. I.
Norris, Albert P. . . 760 Massachusetts Avenue, Cambridge, Mass.
Noyes, Arthur A. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Ober, Arthur J West Medford, Mass.
Osborne, George A. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
List of Members, xvii
Paine, Sidney B Newton Centre, Mass.
Parce, Joseph Y., Jr Denver, Col.
Park, Franklin A Winchendon, Mass.
Patterson, George W., Jr. . . . 14 South University Avenue,
Ann Arbor, Mich.
Peabody, C. H. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Pickert, Leo W. . . American Sugar Refining Co., Boston, Mass.
Piper, Walter E Boston Rubber Shoe Co., Fells, Mass.
Pitcher, Franklin W 63 Franklin Street, Boston, Mass.
Pollock, Clarence D 333 State Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Pope, Macy S 31 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
Pope, T. E Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Porter, Dwight . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Prescott, Samuel C. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Puffer, W. L. . . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Read, Carleton A. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Reed, Walter W 38 Floyd Street, Waltham, Mass.
Reynolds, Howard S Randolph, Mass.
Richards, Ellen H. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Bpston, Mass.
Richards, R. H. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Ritchie, Thomas P Newton Highlands, Mass.
Roberts, George L 95 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
Rolfe, George William, Mass. Institute of Technology. Boston, Mass.
Rollins, William Herbert . 250 Marlborough Street, Boston, Mass.
Rotch, A. Lawrence 53 State Street, Boston, Mass.
Rowell, Henry K 141 Dale Street, Waltham, Mass.
Royce, Frederick P 256 Newbury Street, Boston, Mass.
Royce, H. A 256 Newbury Street, Boston, Mass.
Safford, Arthur T 66 Broadway, Lowell, Mass.
Sanborn, Frank E Tufts College, Mass.
Sawyer, Albert H 19 Pearl Street, Boston, Mass.
Sawyer, Alfred H. . . . 237 West Newton Street, Boston, Mass.
Sawyer, Joseph ... 31 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Schwamb, Peter . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Schwarz, F. H Lower Pacific Mills, Lawrence, Mass.
Sedgwick, W. T. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
«
xviii Society of Arts.
Shattuck, A. Forrest . . . Care Solvay Process Co., Detroit, Mich.
Shaw, Henry S. . . . 339 Commonwealth Avenue, Boston, Mass.
Shepard, F. H 227 East German Street, Baltimore, Md.
Sherman, George W. . . 149 Austin Street, Cambridgeport, Mass.
Shuman, A 440 Washington Street, Boston, Mass.
Skinner, Joseph J. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Slater, H. C Post-Office Box 423, Milwaukee, Wis.
Slawson, Fred G., Burton Brewery, cor. Heath and Parker Streets,
Roxbury, Mass.
Smith, John W. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Smith, W. L. . . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Snow, F. Herbert City Engineer, Brockton, Mass.
Snyder, Frederick T Keewatin, Ontario, Canada.
Sondericker, Jerome . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Stantial, F. G. . . . Care Cochrane Chemical Co., Everett, Mass.
Stearns, Frederic P. . . . 108 Gushing Avenue, Dorchester, Mass.
Stoddard, Arthur B LaSalle, 111.
Stone, Charles A 4 Post-Office Square, Boston, Mass.
Sully, John M. . Chickamauga Coal & Iron Co., Chickamauga, Ga.
Swain, George F. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Swan, Charles H 25 Wabon Street, Boston, Mass.
Sweet, H. N 4 Spruce Street, Boston, Mass.
Talbot, Henry P. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Talbot, Marion University of Chicago, Chicago, 111.
Taylor, R. R. . . Normal and Industrial Institute, Tuskegee, Ala.
Tenney, Albert B 35 Fremont Avenue, Everett, Mass.
Thompson, George K. . 42 Farnsworth Street, South Boston, Mass.
Thomson, A. C Sumner Road, Brookline, Mass.
Thomson, Elihu 26 Henry Avenue, Lynn, Mass.
Thorndike, Sturgis H 6j City Hall, Boston, Mass.
Thorp, Frank H. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Tinkham, S. Everett 65 City Hall, Boston, Mass.
Tolman, James P 115 Congress Street, Boston, Mass.
Towne, Walter 1 125 Milk Street, Boston, Mass.
Tucker, G. R City Hospital, Boston, Mass.
Turner, E. K 53 State Street, Boston, Mass.
Tuttle, Joseph H Post-Office Box 11 85, Boston, Mass.
Tyler, Harry W. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
List of Members, xix
Underwood, George R Peabody, Mass.
Underwood, W. Lyman Belmont, Mass.
Vaillant, George W i Broadway, New York, N. Y.
VanDaell, A. N. . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
VanEveren, Grace A. . . . 841 Jefferson Avenue, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Very, Frank W 507 Morris Avenue, Providence, R. I.
Vogel, Frank . . . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Walker, Charles R. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Walker, Elton D 16 Gillespie Street, Schenectady, N. Y.
Warner, Charles F. . . 46-A Trowbridge Street, Cambridge, Mass.
Wason, Leonard C 199 Harvard Street, Brookline, Mass.
Webster, Edwin S 4 Post-Office Square, Boston, Mass.
AVeeks, G. W Clinton, Mass.
Wells, Webster Lexington, Mass.
Wendell, George V. . 860 Massachusetts Avenue, Cambridge, Mass.
Weston, David B Watertown, Mass.
Whipple, George C. Mt. Prospect Laboratory, Flatbush Avenue
and Eastern Parkway, Brooklyn, N. Y,
Whitaker, S. Edgar 58 Oliver Street, Fitchburg, Mass.
White, J. Foster Box 76, Brookline, Mass.
Whitman, William 78 Chauncy Street, Boston, Mass.
Whitney, Willis R. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Wiggin, Thomas H 154 Mountain Avenue, Maiden, Mass.
Wigglesworth, George 89 State Street, Boston, Mass.
Willcutt, Levi L Post-Office Box 5239, Boston, Mass.
Williams, Francis H 505 Beacon Street, Boston, Mass.
Williams, Henry J 161 Tremont Street, Boston, Mass.
Williams, Roger J Canton, Mass.
Wilson, Fred A Nahant, Mass.
Winkley, W. H West Medford, Mass.
Winslow, Frederic I., City Engineer's Office, City Hall, Boston, Mass.
Winton, Henry D Wellesley Hills, Mass.
Wood, Henry B City Hall, Boston, Mass.
Woodbridge, S. H. . Mass. Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
Woodbury, C. J. H 61 Commercial Street, Lynn, Mass.
Woodward, Edward O. . . . 29 Copeland Street, Roxbury, Mass.
Wrightington, C. Nelson Box 7, Ludlow, Mass.
Technology Quarterly
AND
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS.
Vol. X. MARCHf-ta3»77^77?^j>^ No. i.
PROCEEDINGS OF TlfE'^ SOCIETY .OF /ARTS.
THIRTY-FIFTH YEAR, j8g6^^.
Thursday, October 8, 1896.
The 488th regular meeting of the Society of Arts was held this
day at the Institute at 8 p.m., the President in the chair.
The record of the previous meeting was read and approved.
Messrs. Louis F. Cutter, of Winchester, R. R. Taylor, of Tuske-
gee, Alabama, Frank M. James, of Haverhill, Horace J. Howe, of
Medford, Charles H. Chase, of Medford, and Frank Vogel, of the
Institute, were duly elected Associate Members of the Society.
The following papers were presented by title :
" Hydrolysis of Ferric Chloride," by H. M. Goodwin.
" An Improvement in the Sedgwick-Rafter Method for the Micro-
scopical Examination of Drinking Water," by D. D. Jackson.
" Experience with the Sedgwick-Rafter Method at the Biological
Laboratory of the Boston Water Works," by G. C. Whipple.
" Instruction in Theoretical Chemistry," by A. A. Noyes.
"Origin of Pegmatite," by W. O. Crosby and M. L. Fuller.
" Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of Cupric Oxide,"
by George Defren.
2 Proceedings of the Society of Arts,
"The Viscosity of Mercury Vapor," by H. M. Goodwin and A. A.
Noyes.
Before introducing the speakers of the evening, the President
made a few remarks calling attention to the recently issued double
number of the Technology Quarterly and to the excellence of
the work of the Institute as reflected in its pages, especial mention
being made of the Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Labora-
tory and of the Review of American Chemical Research.
Professor William T. Sedgwick then read a paper on " The Milk-
Supply Problem." The value of milk as food was first spoken of, and
then the process by which a large city is supplied was described in
detail. The difficulties in the way of cleanliness and the danger of
infection were pointed out. The mixing of milk by the dealers was
declared to be the worst feature of the system in Boston, owing to
the greatly increased chance for the spread of infection. Pasteurizing
was suggested as a partial solution of the problem of pure milk sup-
ply of large cities.
Mr. Samuel C. Prescott then read a paper, of which he is joint
author with Mr. W. Lyman Underwood, on " An Investigation of the
Causes of Spoiling in Certain Kinds of Canned Foods.*' The authors
found eight species of bacteria in spoiled cans of lobster and clams.
It was found by experiment that the old method of heating in the
water bath was not sufficient to insure sterilization of cans inoculated
with these bacteria, but heating in retorts with steam under fifteen
pounds pressure, giving a temperature of 250° F., was always suc-
cessful. Specimens of several of the species were exhibited, together
with both good and spoiled cans of clams and lobster.
The President thanked the speakers for their very interesting
papers, and the Society adjourned.
Thursday, October 22, 1896.
The 489th meeting of the Society of Arts was held at the Insti-
tute this day at 8 p.m., Mr. Blodgett in the chair.
The record of the previous meeting was read and approved.
There being no further business, the President introduced Profes-
sor E. B. Homer, of the Institute, who read a paper on " A Bicycle
Tour Through Surrey, Normandy, and Touraine." The paper was an
Proceedings of the Society of Arts, 3
account of the excursion made by the Summer School of Architecture
of 1896. The students under the direction of Professor Homer,
traveled on bicycles through the countries named and made sketches
and photographs of the many interesting works of architecture upon
their route. The lecture was illustrated by over a hundred views
made from photographs taken by members of tlie party. The paper
is published in full in the present number of the Technology
Quarterly.
The Chair thanked Professor Homer for his very interesting paper,
and the Society adjourned.
Thursday, November 12, 1896.
The 490th meeting of the Society of Arts was held this day at
the Institute, President Walker in the chair.
The record of the previous meeting was read and approved.
Messrs. Louis J. Schiller, of Boston, and J. P. B. Fiske, of Auburn-
dale, were duly elected Associate Members of the Society.
The Society then proceeded to the consideration of the paper of
the evening "On the Scientific work of Last Summer's Expedition
to Umanak Fiord, West Greenland," by Professor A. E. Burton and
Assistant Professor G. H. Barton.
Professor Burton spoke of the general plan of the expedition. He
described the apparatus used in making the pendulum and magnetic
observations, and the stations in which they were set up, such stations
being established at several points on the coasts of Labrador and
Greenland.^ The motion of the ice in the Karajak Glacier was
studied. A thermaphone made especially for the expedition by Mr.
A. M. Ritchie was used for the determination of the temperature of
deep crevasses, and proved to be very serviceable. A trip on the
inland ice was described, and the speaker closed with a comparison of
the natives of Greenland with those of Labrador.
Professor Barton spoke briefly of the geological work of the expedi-
tion. No evidence of present waning of the ice sheet could be found.
The crevassing of the glaciers extends far back into the inland ice.
This, with the vertical edges of the ice cap, makes the approach to the
inland ice very difficult. Ample evidence was obtained that the ice
sheet had extended at some former period much farther than at
' See this volume, pp. 56-132.
4 Proceedings of the Society of Arts,
present in Greenland, and evidences of glacial action were observed
also in Labrador.
At the close of Professor Barton's remarks the President thanked
the speakers, and the Society adjourned.
Wednesday, November i8, 1896.
A special joint meeting of the Society of Arts, with the Boston
Society of Civil Engineers was held this day in Chipman Hall, Tre-
mont Temple, with Professor Swain, President of the Society of
Civil Engineers, in the chair.
There being no business, the President introduced Mr. E. L. Cor-
thell, of New York, who read a paper on "The Tampico Harbor
Works, Mexico, with some remarks upon the Mouth of the Missis-
sippi River."
Mr. Corthell began by referring to a paper that he had read ten
years ago before the Society of Arts, and he reaffirmed his opinion
that the Edes Tehuantepec ship railway is practicable. He then spoke
of the importance of Tampico as a seaport, and of the hindrance to
its development caused by the dangerous bars at the entrance to its
harbor. In this connection he described the country through which
the railroad had been built from the Mexican Central Railroad to
Tampico, and paid a high tribute to the daring and skill of the
engineers who constructed it. Turning to his own work at Tampico,
Mr. Corthell described the harbor works, and the method of their
construction. The works consist of two jetties, 1,000 feet apart,
running parallel for a mile and one third into the Gulf of Mexico,
one from each side of the mouth of the Rio Panuco. The first
operation in the construction of the jetties was to build a double
track railroad trestle along the line of each jetty. From these
trestles the mattresses composing the jetties were sunk. The mat-
tresses were peculiar. They were built while suspended under the
trestle, above the reach of the waves. They were 60 feet long, 84
ieet wide, and about 7 feet thick. First a strong frame was con-
structed, then the brush was added, and then when all was firmly
bound together, the mattress was lowered to the surface of the water,
and quickly sunk by stones dumped from cars upon the trestle. The
slopes of the jetties were steeper inshore, and more gradual further
out. The effect of the jetties was seen very soon in the deepening
Proceedings of the Society of Arts, 5
of the channel, and the disappearance of the dangerous bar. In clos-
ing, Mr. Corthell spoke of the beneficial effects of the Mississippi
jetties, and of the danger which now threatens those works from their
being out of repair. The paper was illustrated with many beautiful
lantern views.
At the close of the paper Professor Swain thanked the speaker in
the name of the two societies, and the meeting was adjourned.
Thursday, December lo, 1896.
The 492d meeting of the Society of Arts was held this day at
the Institute, Mr. Blodgett in the chair.
The records of the last two meetings were read and approved.
The Secretary read a letter from the Pasteur Monument Commit-
tee of the United States, asking the cooperation of the Society of
Arts in its efforts to obtain subscriptions for the erection of a monu-
ment to Pasteur in Paris.
The chair then introduced Mr. Henry C. Mercer, Curator of the
Museum of American and Prehistoric Archaeology in the University
of Pennsylvania, who read a paper on *' Cave Hunting in Yucatan."
The speaker began by showing how caves furnish the key to the state
of culture of prehistoric people, and then spoke of the country and
present inhabitants of Yucatan, and of the remains of former civili-
zation there. The caves of Yucatan differ from those formerly inhab-
ited by man in Europe and North America, in that they open from the
top. They probably would not have been inhabited if it were not
that they often contained the only supply of water. Excavations in
over twenty caves led to uniform results. The stratum forming the
floor of the cave is about a foot thick, and was found to contain
fragments of charcoal, pottery, and bones of recent animals. The
red earth under this contained some remains of animals, but excava-
tions through to the solid rock beneath showed no trace of the pres-
ence of man. The prehistoric culture of Yucatan was not developed
there, but came from abroad. At the close of the paper Mr. Mercer
showed a large number of views of caves in Europe, the United States,
and Yucatan.
The President thanked the lecturer for his very interesting paper,
vid the Society adjourned.
Robert P. Bigelovv, Secretary,
\psE OF St. Sauveur, Caen.
1 pholt^rajih by Mieusenieiii.
The Summer School of Architecture,
THE SUMMER SCHOOL OF ARCHITECTURE FOR 1896 IN
SOUTHERN ENGLAND, NORMANDY, AND TOURAINE.
By ELEAZER B. HOMER, S.B.
Read October 22, 1S96.
As the great steamer Cestrian backed slowly from the East Boston
pier the Technology yell awoke the echoes among the wharves and
elevators, and for a time rivalled the deep voice calling for right of
way into the harbor channel. The first section of the M. I. T. Sum-
mer School of Architecture had at last started on its way across the
Atlantic, and its one thousand miles of bicycle travel in Europe.
A new departure for American schools was being attempted, and ex-
cellent results were expected from the proposed combination of study
and healthful exercise. But only in the method of moving the party
of students from town to town, was the attempt a new one.
The making of short excursions to interesting buildings and towns,
has long been considered an essential part of an architectural student's
education. Years ago, when books were few and methods of photo-
graphic reproduction unheard of, technical knowledge could only be
acquired through personal visits to existing buildings, and through
laborious effort .s, with pencil or brush, in transferring upon paper the
student's impressions of the masterpieces of architecture.
To-day the necessity for travel and close observation does not
seem, at first sight, as imperative as in times gone by ; for the foreign
masterpieces are now brought within the reach of every one, through
our public and technical libraries and the modern processes of illustra-
tion. The careful examination of books and photographs alone, how-
ever, gives only a limited idea of the true appearance of a building,
for the more or less correct representation upon paper necessarily
fails to express the real values of scale, broad surfaces, and detail,
values that can only be understood by inspection of the buildings
themselves.
The Summer School of Architecture was accordingly established
at the Institute, in order that its work might supplement the regular
winter courses. This out-of-door study has proved to be of the great-
Eleaser B. Homer.
* " " i
- 3|g
° =
s g
£ I ^ l|li
X Q t^ C ui
< < U O W
> * X U. U
s E J -i i^
The Summer School of Architecture. 9
est value, for, aside from the spirit of good fellowship that always
adds so much to the pleasure of the traveler, one learns to appreciate
architecture as it exists in solid form, and soon gains a clear idea of
the relative proportions and importance of the works visited.
In past years the summer work has been confined to the study of
buildings and details of the Colonial architecture of our New England
States. We possess much that is original and beautiful in the simple
dwellings of our old seaport towns, and as these buildings are rapidly
disappearing we have made an attempt to preserve at least a small part
of the best material by means of measured drawings, sketches, and
photographs. But such study, although of great benefit, has hereto-
fore been mainly limited to wooden buildings of comparatively small
size, and does not give the broad knowledge of style that all students
of architecture should possess. The history of Architecture includes
the buildings of America, as the application of older forms to the new
conditions of a new country. As such, our American work cannot be
perfectly understood until one has become at least partially familiar
with European architecture.
An important step, therefore, was taken last spring when it was
decided to change the scene of our summer's work from New England
to a limited section of France, and to supplement the winter's indoor
studies by an excursion among the interesting buildings of the south
of England, of Normandy, and Touraine.
Our party included twenty students from the third and fourth
year classes, in charge of two instructors. The journey was made
on bicycles, partially on account of the expense of railway travel, but
principally in order to afford an opportunity for intimate acquaintance
with local architecture. By this means a little over 950 miles were
covered during our fifty days on land, and much was seen that is not
revealed to those who travel by rail alone.
The route was arranged to include the principal towns of Normandy
and Touraine, two of the most interesting architectural sections of
France, while a short excursion in England was planned in order to
give a comparative view of the architecture of the two countries. De-
tailed maps, covering the proposed route, were imported early in May,
and the selection of the roads from town to town, with the plotting of
the route upon the English Government Ordnance maps and the
thirty-nine sheets of the Carte de la France, consumed quite a little
time in the way of preparation. These maps were taken with us, and
10 EUazcr B. Homer.
through their assistance the selected route was followed with very little
difficulty or need for variation.
We were unusually fortunate in having only a few days of bad
weather, so that engagements made with hotels were kept without
a break throughout the entire trip. Good hotel accommodations for
a party of twenty-two can be obtained in few towns without due warn-
I ing of from two to ten days, but the advance letters sent to all hotels
from America, and the telegrams despatched a few days before our
arrival, not only secured as comfortable quarters as could be had, but
also insured much lower rates than the regular charges for transient
guests. It was not possible, however, to obtain room for the entire
party on one steamer, so the first section sailed from Boston June 3,
on the Leyland freighter Cestrian, and the second section, June 6, on
the Gallia, of the Cunard line.
Both parties traveled by rail to London, where the actual wheeling
tour began, and Liverpool, Chester, Shrewsbury, and Oxford were vis-
ited on the way. Every one visits Chester, and the city is so accus-
tomed to receiving Americans that its buildings have a prosperous and
ready-for-visitors air that suggested the intentionally picturesque
appearance of the World's Fair Plaisance. It being Sunday, we
seemed to meet all the young people of the town during our morning
walk around the walls, but in the afternoon the beautiful choral service
in the old cathedral gave us an entirely different impression of the
modern life of the town.
Shrewsbury, also, possesses much of its old-time half-timber archi-
tecture, which does not offend by the presence of too much fresh paint,
and therefore seems older and more attractive than the more ambitious
buildings of Chester. The hill on which the old town is built is sur-
rounded on three sides by the picturesque Severn, and along its shores
the great rows of lime trees form promenades that far excel those of
the famous English gardens at Rambouillet, or any others that I have
seen of similar character. We were comfortably housed at The
George, and after our evening tramp through the old part of the town,
were well satisfied that our quarters were quite superior to those
offered by either the String of Horses Inn or The Headless Woman,
although these houses displayed signs of far greater antiquity.
At Oxford, all the students were particularly charmed by the quiet
dignity of the college buildings, but, much to our regret, our short
stay only gave us a glimpse of the outward side of English college life.
The Sumvicr School of Architecture. ii
Meanwhile, our American bicycles had been journeying by steamer
directly to London, where, after five days of interesting but tiresome
sightseeing, the wheels were unpacked and put together. Bundles of
wearing apparel and drawing and photographic materials were then
securely strapped on, and all was ready for the start. The morning
of the 19th saw the party on board one of the Thames steamers en
route for Putney. This proved to be a good way of leaving the city,
as the busy London streets were avoided, and we began riding in com-
paratively open country.
On this first day, lunch was obtained at Kingston on Thames, and
Hampton Court Palace was visited. After looking through the great
palace, its extensive picture galleries and gardens, sketches were made
of interesting doorways, chimneys, and bits of brick detail. It was
found that permission to sketch should have been obtained from the
Board of Public Works in London, but the courteous superintendent of
the palace gave permission for outside sketching, also accompanying
the party to the old Cardinal Wolsey kitchen, and the famous tennis
court, pointing out many interesting things that we should not other-
wise have seen.
Before leaving Hampton Court a photograph was obtained of
eighteen of the twenty-two members of our party, the enlarged
photograph on page 8, giving a very good idea of the way in
which we traveled and the amount of baggage carried. It is particu-
larly pleasant to look back to this picture, taken on our first day out,
for it shows that all the members at one time possessed coats, bicycle
lamps, and a few other things that were afterwards discarded. It is
also unique in that it shows thirty-six American tires without a sin-
gle puncture. Six days after, we counted ten punctures on one tire
alone.
On this and the following day we traveled over the famous old
Portsmouth coaching road, leaving it after passing Guildford, to make
a side trip to the little Norman church at Compton. At Guildford we
climbed the steep incline of the High Street, passing under the great
overhanging clock of the Town Hall, and visited Archbishop Abbot's
Hospital, a building similar in style to much of the brick work at
Hampton Court. We enjoyed our rest in the ancient dining room or
kitchen, seated around an old tradesman who told us stories of the
customs of the place. Tempted by the good coast down High Street,
we rode too far down, and then climbed the wrong hill in search of
12 Eleazer B. Homer.
Guildford's old Norman castle, now situated in the public garden of
the town. The ancient keep of the castle rises about seventy feet
above the surrounding ruins, and is built of regular courses of herring-
bone work, flints, and sandstone that can all be clearly identified.
After a time, finding the right way out of town, we passed through a
delightful bit of English country, bowling along over splendid roads
Hh;h Street and Town Hali, Girii.nFoRD.
PhoiDgnphcd by E. B- H,
until the cobblestones of Godalming were reached. All the way along
the route we passed picturesque cottages, thatched and half-timbered,
that repeatedly tempted our amateur photographers. A comfortable
night at the hospitable Angel at Godalming closed our second day.
The following morning sketches were made of the picturesque court-
yard of the inn, our landlord's strawberries didy appreciated, the Town
Hall visited in company with the senior alderman of the town, and
then wheels were brought out for the ride to Compton, Elstead, and
Waverley Abbey, on the way to P'arnham.
The Summer School of Architecture. 13
The little church at Compton possesses a particularly intert'sting
Norman interior, and wc secured a few sketches of capitals, and pho-
tographs of the primitive timber roof. The Itind old lady who showed
us the church could not understand why we did not know her son who
had gone to America, but at last, finding that he was located some-
where in Kansas, we tried to explain a little United States geography,
The V11.1.A11F, CfiuHCii, Compton.
but with only indifferent success. After our lunch at Elstead, where
our landlord of the Golden Fleece, who also dealt in grain, hay, and
coal, personally waited on table in his shirt sleeves, we climbed the
long grade to Crooksbiiry Common, and, later on, descended into the val-
ley of the River Wey, stopping to visit the ruins of Waverley Abbey.
The remaining walls of the abbey are scattered over broad meadows,
in which the haymakers were busy at the time of our visit, and show
that the ancient Cistercian monastery must have been very extensive.
Little now remains, although the vaulting under the chapel is still in
fairly good condition.
Our way for the next day ran almost parallel with the Alton
14 E leaser B. Homer.
branch of the London & Southwestern Railroad, and, as expected,
passed through open, rolling country quite in contrast to the pictur-
esque portion of Surrey just passed. But at the village of Chawton
we had a diversion, and cameras were brought out to photograph a lit-
tle Italian boy and lively monkey. The thatched roofed houses of this
village were particularly attractive. Taking the wrong fork of the
road, we had to inquire our way of one of the bright little fel-
lows of the village school just out for recess, and then journeyed on
through Abbotsford and the Worthy's, down the beautiful valley of
the winding Itchen, until toward evening we rode into the ancient
town of Winchester.
The following morning we visited some of the buildings of the
famous old town, and, after looking through the cathedral, were partic-
ularly fortunate in obtaining permission to climb the long ladder lead-
ing to the nave roof, where the obsolete form of roof truss is being
The Summer School of Architecture. 15
replaced by a stouter modern construction. The old roof does not all
date from the eleventh century, but the great tie beams, upon which
the two men are sitting, have been retained from the earlier truss
work of the time of William the Conqueror, and will be carefully pre-
served in the new roof. As they are too short for the present form of
tniss, and are also worm-eaten and decayed at the ends, only the mid-
dle part of solid wood is to be saved. Bits of the old oak and the
DouBLe Akch at St. Ckoss Hospital Chvrch,
large wrought-iron rails that fastened the lead covering were quite in
demand by members of our party, but few relics survived the Nor-
mandy hills and fewer still are now treasured in America.
As we walked through these trusses, above the great recesses of
the fourteenth-century stone vaulting which forms the true ceiling of
the interior, we could hear the organ beginning the morning service,
and therefore had to descend long before we had finished our notes
1 6 E teaser B. Homer,
and researches. We had intended to spend more time in this city,
but an extra day in London had to be made up by cutting at Winches-
ter, so we were obliged to leave without doing it justice, as far as sight-
seeing was concerned. But we remember very pleasantly our stop at
' St. Cross Hospital, founded 1136, just outside of Winchester, where,
after entering the quiet quadrangle, surrounded by the houses and the
church buildings, we were shown through the church by a delightful
old gentleman, one of the thirteen old men who live at the hospital.
The church has remarkably rich late Norman decorations in the
interior and also has a unique double arch in an angle at the rear.
As can be seen, the original doorway under this arch is now filled in.
The attractions here were so great that we arrived at Romsey at quite
a late hour. After an unsatisfactory dinner, we spent a short time at
Romsey Abbey, then some of the party took train for Salisbury, while
the others, with a strong wind behind, quickly covered the eleven-mile
ride to Southampton.
Taking the night boat from Southampton across the Channel, we
found, after a quiet passage and good night's rest, that we were well
into the harbor of Havre, and by eight o'clock wewere all through the
custom house and searching for breakfast. Our party attracted much
attention at Havre, and we were all kept busy answering questions
while waiting for money and letters.
Our English Cyclists' Touring Club badges served us well at Havre,
for, after showing them, we were permitted to pass the cu.stom house
without any question as to duties. We also found in England that
the Touring Club discounts were readily given at all the hotels, and
that our tickets made quite a saving in our daily expenses ; in some
cases as much as twenty-five per cent, on the regular rates.
But trouble had already begun with our bicycles, as our American
tires were not heavy enough to stand the flint roads. For this reason
our first few days' riding in France was absolutely discouraging. In
spite of the splendid surfaces of the roads so many flints were encoun-
tered that among our twenty-two men we counted thirty punctures
during the four days' riding between Havre, Rouen, and Lisieux.
Only a few of the party escaped without striking the sharp flint edges.
In fact, several new tires had to be ordered from Paris, for some of the
old tires were beyond even the most careful treatment. But shortly
after leaving Lisieux we were thankful to find that the flints had dis-
appeared, and we only encountered them again as we neared Paris.
The Summer School of Architecture. 17
Stopping at noon on our first day in France at Lillebonne, we
were surprised to see the extent of the Roman theater and to find that
so much of the Roman masonry remains in apparently good condition.
On the opposite side of the theater one of the arches still stands, the
restored portion on the right clearly showing its construction of tile
and rubble work. After mounting the steep side of the valley
through which the River IJolhec flows we traversed the rolling upland,
following an excellent third-class road. Here, on the steep, winding
descent to Caudebec, the first bad tumble occurred, one of the men
failing to make a three-quarter curve because of too much speed, but
AHCH in KUMAN THEATEK, LlLLEbONHE.
PhMographtd by E. B. H.
[urtiinately no bonei; were broken, A new rim was fitted on over
light and all was right again in the morning.
Caudebec is exceedingly quaint, having many little crooked streets
snd old timber houses, but its church rises above the architectural
levL'l of the other buildings and is an excellent example of the rich
flamboyant style. After breakfast we watched the " Mascaret," the
grtat tidal wave, sweep up the Seine ; and then, with the genial pro-
prietor of the Hotel de la Marine as guide, rode out to St. Wandrille
Abbey, where we saw many bits of late Gothic and Rococo architec-
ture under the guidance of a courteous and well-informed priest ; then
<m to Jumifeges Abbey, whose magnificent arches and masses almost
oserpowered us. Jumifeges, founded in the 7th century, is one of the
bi'st examples of the early heavy Norman style, and one rarely find^
Eleaser B. Homer.
St, Ouen, Roum
The Summer School of Architecture. 19
such an imposing group of ruins. Returning over the branch road
about three kilometers, we followed the main road around a wide bend
of the Seine, and at last came in sight of the abbey towers of St.
Georges-de-Boscherville. There we spent some two hours sketching
and studying the interior of the church. This is a fine example of
late Norman design and construction, but, as with all the recently re-
stored churches in France, the interior seems a little cold because of
the freshness of the stone and too great care in jointing the stone-
work. We arrived near Rouen just before sunset, in time to have a
magnificent view of the entire city, with its great amphitheater of sur-
rounding hills, from the heights of Canteleau.
Rouen was crowded, in preparation for the great horse races that
were to be held the next Sunday afternoon, but good accommodations
were found at the Hotel de France on the quay. As expected, it was
impossible to do any drawing here, for there was so much to be seen
during our short stay that our time was fully occupied in tramping
about the city and trying to appreciate the rich Gothic and Renais-
sance architecture for which Rouen is so justly famous. St. Ouen
impressed all by the magnificence of its south transept, rich lantern,
and grand interior. The trip around the triforium and over the roofs
was particularly interesting, the unconsciously mysterious and impres-
sive manner with which our guide pointed out the beauties of the
building adding greatly to our enjoyment.
Our ride to Elbeuf, Brionne, and Bernay proved to be a hard day's
journey. We crossed several rivers and the hills lying between, but
notwithstanding many punctures and consequent delays, we all arrived
in time for dinner. After sipping our coffee and singing songs in the
court of the hotel, all were glad to retire early.
Lisieux was reached on the following day, and there we remained
for two days, making sketches of the old timber houses and of the
interior of the cathedral. This quaint town is full of woodwork of
the fourteenth to sixteenth centuries, and one cannot walk in any
direction near the Grande-Rue without finding splendid examples of
the carpentr)' of this period. One well-known house in this street is
particularly attractive, and has the reputation of drawing a sketch from
every artist or architect who visits the town. It is needless to say
that we all felt its influence. The most picturesque street is, perhaps,
the Rue au Fevres, where we found the famous " House of the Sala-
mander," built in the time of Francis I, and having the richest carved
front in the town.
Eleaser B. Homer.
Old House, GraniiE'Kue, Lisikux.
On leaving Lisiciix wc arranged to lunch at the village of Creve-
coeur, but arriving there we found a village fair in full swing and the
hotel unable to accommodate all its patrons. After two hours' patient
waiting we at last obtained a miserable lunch and departed firmly re-
solved to make future arrangements only in the larger towns, for even
a village fair loses its attractions when one is really hungry.
The excellent road leading to Caen was then passed over in the
face of a hard head wind, the last member of the party arriving just
in time to escape the heavy rain that continued all that night and the
next day. This is a very good example of the national roads of this
section (see next page), for though running for miles through the
open country they are kept in perfect condition, the surfaces being
even superior to many of our park roads. Our day at Caen was wet
The Summer School of Architecture. 21
and uncomfortable, but while sketching in the interior of the church
of the Abbaye aux Dames the morning passed quickly. St. Nicholas,
of the eleventh century, and St. Stephen, built by William the Coo-
On THE National Road HnwKKN Lisikux and CAtn,
FIiotogniAed by £. B. H.
queror, were visited, and notes made in St. Stephen of the peculiar
sexpartite vaulting of this transitional period.
St. Nicholas is now used as a government storehouse for hay and
grain, and visitors are not admitted ; but it was found that a franc used
in the right way removed all barriers. In the same city the ruined
Old Church of St. Etienne is also now turned into a storehouse, and
many fine bits of stone detail are deposited there for the Caen Anti-
quarian Society. Several drawings of these fragments were secured
during the time it was necessary to remain under cover. The delicate
late Gothic apse of St. Sauveur is one of the most graceful Gothic de-
signs with which I am acquainted, but it is only one example taken
from many beautiful and impressive buildings that enrich this Norman
city.
Eleazer B. Homer.
The Summer School of Architecture. 23
We finally started for Bayeux with clearing skies, and after a de-
lightful run along the by-roads leading to the villages of Norrey and
Audrieu, a little south of the main road, spent the night in the city
still famous for its old tapestries. At Bayeux we changed our daily
program, deciding to do our sketching in the morning and ride in
the afternoon, as the fatigue of riding prevented the best work. This
arrangement was followed for the next few days, and St. L6, Cou-
tances, Granville, and Avranches were in turn visited, the distances
between these towns requiring only a small part of each afternoon.
The Fourth of July was spent at St. L6, and there on the Place in
front of the cathedral, high above the city, we sang patriotic songs by
the light of a small bonfire of straw and leaves and tried to think that
we were helping America celebrate her noisy day.
All eyes were now turned toward Mont St. Michel, and we hoped
to see the great rock from the top of the cathedral at Coutances, but
as the horizon was hazy the first glimpse was obtained two days later,
as we passed over the hills at Genets on the northern shore of the bay
*
on the way to Avranches. We could, however, see Granville from the
top of Coutances Cathedral directly over the tower of St. Pierre, and
late in the afternoon, after a quick ride over excellent roads, we ar-
rived in time to take a refreshing afternoon bath in the blue waters
of the Atlantic.
At Mont St. Michel, after wheeling along the causeway and pass-
ing the gauntlet of hotel criers, we were comfortably housed at the
Poulard Aine, taking the whole of the Maison Blanc for our quarters.
A delightful two days was spent in this famous place. Thanks to our
permits from the French Government, the keys of the monastery were
given us and we could wander at will from the dark dungeons cut in
the solid rock to the rich flying, buttresses of the Gothic church.
Sketches were made in the Salle des Chevaliers, and during the quiet
afternoons many bits of picturesque stonework were transferred to the
drawing paper. In the evenings long walks were taken on the sands,
as it was the season of low tides. The magnificent effects of the
setting sun on the ancient walls, and the glorious views of the sunsets
from the walls themselves, will long be remembered. Mont St.
Michel was a climax to which we had unconsciously looked forward,
and our parting cheer for the Poulard Ain^ closed a very pleasant sec-
tion of our summer trip.
The country south of this resting place is, for architectural stu-
24 Eleazer B. Homer.
denis, somewhat bare and uninteresting. With the exception of occa-
sional bright spots it was passed over without incident. Fougferes
possesses an enormous castle of which the outer walls alone remain ;
but its high walls and numerous towers, and the surrounding old por-
tions of the town, are very picturesque. The greater part of the
mediaeval walls are now destroyed, but in the lower part of the city the
old gate is one of the few remaining fragments of this ancient and
strongly fortified town.
But as a town Vitre is far more interesting than Foug^res, its
splendid chateau and fine old houses making it even more attractive
than Lisieux, While possessing several streets lined with picturesque
wooden houses, it also seems to be a very prosperous modern place,
quite in contrast to the slumbering towns visited in Normandy. The
chateau entrance is very striking and original. One passes over the
drawbridge spanning the wide moat and enters a fairly spacious open
court, containing at the farther end a picturesque little building deco-
rated with a good oriel window of Renaissance design. We tried to
The Summer School of Architecture. 25
obtain a measured drawing of this window, but as it is just back of
the modern prison wall we found that the city authorities had to be
consulted. The red tape encountered proved to be too much for our
short visit. At Vitr^ the hot weather seemed to set in in earnest and
we again changed our riding hours, avoiding the hottest part of the
day.
On Sunday, after attending service for a short time at Notre
Thk Castle Entrance. Vitr£.
Dame, a Gothic church with a beautiful outside pulpit, a small party
wheeled over to the little village of Champeaux, and felt well repaid
for the hot ride while visiting the chateau and church formerly belong-
ing to the Chevalier de I'Epinay. The chateau still possesses its wide
moat, but the surrounding walls have almost entirely disappeared and
the whole place is overgrown with trees. Although the church is
about one mile away, tradition says that the buildings are connected
by an underground passage used by the family in troublesome times.
EUaser B. Homer.
Oriel in Court of Castle. VitrS.
We certainly saw the top of stone vaulting in the driveway of the
chateau, and were told that a hole in the wall, in the crypt of the
church, was the other end of the tunnel, but the deep valley and rocky
hills lying between the two buildings made us sceptical about the
connecting links.
Leaving Vitr4 early on the morning of the 13th we soon reached
The Summer School of Architecture. 27
the Chdteau ties Rochers, famous as the residence of Madame de S^-
vign^, and for its gardens planned by Le Notre, the most famous land-
scape gardener of the seventeenth century.
We now had two of our longest rides before us, through a coun-
try that presented little that was interesting in the way of varied
scenery. Village after village was passed on our morning ride to
28 Eleazer B. Homer.
La Guerche, where we rested during the hottest hours of the day.
The afternoon run would have been uneventful if we had not unex-
pectedly seen the fa9ade of the church at the little village of La Roe.
This was our first taste of the rich Romanesque architecture of
Anjou and gave us a good idea of the dignified designs common to the
southwestern part of France. There are, undoubtedly, some draw-
backs to touring by bicycle, but the finding of this architectural gem.
West Facade ok Church Ar l.A KuE.
PholDgnplied by E. B H.
in such a little, out-of-the-way place as the village of La Roe, made up
for all the inconveniences of our ride on that very hot day.
We then pushed along, up and down the rolling hiiis and even
grades of the great national road, traveling due east in a straight line
until Chateau Gontier was reached. In fact, so accustomed to regular
and monotonous leg work did we become, that some of us ran through
the town and five kilometers beyond before realizing that we had
passed our stopping-place for the night. That was the hottest day and
The Summer School of Architecture.
Tower of Chatbau at ChekawI.
30 Eleazer B, Homer.
the longest ride of the trip, but we felt quite refreshed after a swim
in the sluggish and not too clean waters of the Mayenne.
The 14th proved to be about as hot as the preceding day. Mak-
ing an early start the party divided, some taking the direct national
road to Angers and others going on a venture about five miles out of
the way to see the chateau at Chemaze. We were amply repaid for
the side journey, for this chateau possesses some of the best early
Renaissance detail. It was our first building of this character and we
were soon busy with our cameras. Although we arrived at eight in
the morning, and the owner was then at home, we easily obtained per-
mission to visit the larger rooms, thoroughly enjoying our glimpse into
the well-arranged half-modern, half-ancient interior. The square tower
is particularly beautiful in detail and, combined with the transitional
dormers, makes an unusually rich facade for a country house. We
climbed the winding tower staircase, admiring the delicate interior
carvings as we went, and from the top obtained a fine view of the wide
rolling country across which we were traveling.
Leaving Chemaze with many regrets, we wandered through the
winding country roads, surprising numerous flocks of geese as they fed
by the roadside, until we at last met the great national road. Then it
was push up hill and coast down the other side, mile after mile, riding
directly south under a broiling sun, until at last we reached the down
grade that told us we were in the valley of the Loire and that Angers
was not far off.
Our arrival at Angers closed a period of fatiguing riding. We had
traveled ninety-six miles in two days, pushing our heavily loaded
wheels along monotonously straight roads that seemed to reflect an
enormous amount of heat from their white surfaces. We were there-
fore glad to rest for a day or two at the comfortable Cheval-Blanc,
even although Angers did not prove to be as rich in ancient and inter-
esting architecture as we had hoped. The photograph clearly shows
the splendid surface of this great road and the rolling, almost level,
character of the country. It was taken about ten miles from Angers.
The distance from the turn near the horizon to the top of the hill in
the foreground was exactly six kilometers, according to the govern-
ment measurements indicated on the kilometer stones at the side of
the road, and it ran over five hills in that space of three and three
fourths English miles.
Among the modern buildings of the prosperous city of Angers
The Summer School of Architecture.
National Koad neak Angers.
PhDlographed by F.. B. H.
only a few relics of the older time still remain. The ancient Tour St.
Aubin, now standing alone among the commonplace houses of the
modern streets, was once a part of a great monastery which covered a
large section of the city. Another fragment of the monastic build-
ings was discovered some years ago when a wall in the Prefecture was
torn down. To-day this mutilated arcade, enriched with early almost
barbaric sculpture, is perhaps one of the richest examples of decora-
tive work of the Romanesque period, and is carefully treasured by the
city and national authorities. In contrast to this primitive work, the
delicate Renaissance detail of the Hotel Pinc^ ('535) furnishes the other
extreme. Situated in the business part of the city, near the post office
and theater, it still retains its small garden, which pushes it back from
the general line of the shop fronts. Its delicate carvings now seem
entirely out of place with its changed surroundings.
But the most interesting building in Angers, from a constructional
point of view, is the Cathedral St. Maurice, commenced in the i ith cen-
tury, as it is one of the transitional examples showing the beginning
ol the change from the domical vaulting found in cities a little far-
32 E leaser B. Homer.
ther south to the developed vaulting of the northern cathedrals. Sev-
eral photographs were taken to illustrate the peculiarities of its inte-
rior, but on account of the uncertain light they were not entirely suc-
cessful. Angers also possesses a few quaint streets and old modern
houses, but much has long been destroyed by the fires that from time
to time have swept the town.
Our stay at the Cheval-Blanc was so thoroughly enjoyable, after
the indifferent hotels of the towns through which we had passed, that
Hotel PcncS. Angers.
Photognphed by E. B. H.
about half the party decided to remain in safe quarters, and later on
take the shortest road instead of running the chance of a wetting by
starting early in the morning of the i6th. The adventurous half
only succeeded in reaching the outskirts of the city when the rain
descended and the floods came upon us. But we were fortunate
enough to escape a thorough drenching by taking refuge in a large
modern church, storing our bicycles in an old corn mill near by.
After a tiresome wait we donned our rubber capes for the first time
The Summer School of Architecture.
V Treves-Cunault.
34 Eleazer B. Homer,
and ventured to ride through the flooded streets, quite enjoying the
experience until the mud thrown by the rear wheels began to creep up
our backs and over our heads, as mud will fly even with careful riding.
The sun coming out we were soon forced to discard our capes on
account of the heat and travel slowly until the roads were fairly dry.
We then had a delightful run over the winding country roads, through
vineyards and wet fields, on the way from Brissac to Gennes.
Lunching at Gennes and afterwards climbing the side of the valley to
look at its old prehistoric dolmen, a little way out of the town, we were
soon running over a smooth and almost level road along the left bank of
the Loire. That was a most remarkable afternoon's ride, for the numer-
ous small villages passed, each with its old Romanesque church and
quaint old houses stretching along the river banks, gave us a foretaste
of the rich architectural treasures of the Loire Valley. Cunault is
perhaps the richest of these churches, since it possesses a beautiful
tower or primitive spire that is quite in contrast to the plain walls of
the other parts of the church. The capitals and paintings of the
interior are also particularly quaint and grotesque.
Some three miles before reaching Saumur we discovered a large
party of horsemen to the left of our road, and found that the students
of the famous Saumur Military School were preparing to cross a branch
of the river without boats, and that their instructors and friends were
in attendance to witness the attempt. To effect the crossing fodder
bags were filled with hay and fastened together by light sticks, and
upon these frail rafts saddles and bridles were placed. Not more than
four men could sit upon the pile at one time and succeed in keeping
their immaculate clothes dry while pulling across the stream. The
horses were driven into the river and after more or less encourage-
ment swam across.
Without staying long at Saumur we continued our ride up the
beautiful Loire Valley, stopping at noon at Chinon. Another bad
tumble occurred on this run, for one of the men ran into a flock of
sheep ; or, to be more accurate, the sheep and dog ran into him, and
completely ruined his front wheel. Fortune again favored us, how-
ever, for although quite a distance from any village an accommodating
Frenchman arrived upon the scene in his English dogcart, and, seeing
our plight, kindly carried the wounded rider and broken wheel all the
way to Chinon. We had a delightful ramble among the ruins of the
three castles that crown the hill far above the quaint old houses of
The Slimmer School of Architecture, 3 j
this town, and stood for a time within the walls that once formed the
hall where Joan of Arc had her audience with Charles VII. The Cha-
teau of Chinon is full of surprises, its towers, bridges, deep moats, and
underground passages affording endless opportunities for the venture-
some traveler. The view of the valley, as we stood upon the edge of
the projecting tower with the Vienne far below us, was most extensive
and very beautiful in its combination of soft colors, but the view was
entirely beyond our cameras.
After climbing the valley and leaving Chinon we encountered the
worst stretch of road that I ever tried to ride over. The maps show
a third-class road running directly from Chinon to Azay-le-Rideau, but
I wish to warn any one from attempting that route, for the road is not
only abominably hilly but for miles is covered with loose gravel and
broken stone. Riding sometimes in a narrow rut, sometimes on the
grass and little side paths, it was a wonder that our machines were not
completely disjointed by the constant wrack and strain. Azay was
finally reached and the rough experience soon forgotten in the interest
awakened by the charming chateau.
The homelike, comfortable character of Azay is in marked contrast
to the more formal appearance of the larger Renaissance chateaux, and
our day spent in sketching this delightful building is one of the pleas-
antest that we remember. We were fortunate in gaining admission to
the interior and in having an opportunity to see some of its rich his-
torical treasures. The large salon on a lower floor, and the bedroom of
Francis I directly above, were two of the most interesting rooms. The
views from the windows of this room also showed the work of the land-
I
scape gardener to the best advantage. The great amount of interesting
Renaissance detail that this chateau possesses is especially attractive,
the delicate treatment of doors, windows, and dormers adding greatly
to the charm and beauty of the building. Riding on up the wide
vallev, close to the banks of the Loire, we crossed the splendid stone
Pont de Tours and were at once in the prosperous modern city.
One needs to know Tours thoroughly in order to locate its remain-
ing historical buildings among the host of modern houses. Henry
James's little book was here far more useful to us than our guide-
books, and thanks to its directions, we discovered a very delicate frag-
ment of Renaissance design near the modern church of St. Martin.
Only five or six of the beautiful arches of the arcade of this convent
now remain, and these are in a mutilated condition ; but as the ** Lit-
Eleaser B. Homer.
tie Tour in France " justly states : " Such a piece of work is the pur-
est flower of the French Renaissance ; there is nothing more delicate
in all Touraine."
Leaving Tours Sunday noon, we had another delightful ride
through the valley of the Indre, where we were many times forced
to stop and gaze at quaint pastoral scenes along the banks of the
0.
W
)
-£r.
-XT
3
Os 5\
•
6d
0
J-
<
wr?)
"n;
t
3
?l
0
The Summer School of Architecture, 37
river. These river roads are particularly attractive. Always bordered
by green fields or the welcome shade of tall trees, their winding sur-
faces are in marked contrast to the monotonous national roads which
traverse the open hills without variety.
Loches was reached without further incident, and the following
day we visited the quaint Church of St. Ours, the castle, and the
One ok thr Arches in thb Cowvbnt neai St. Martins Church. Tours.
Pholocnptatd by B, B. H.
palace. St, Ours has two peculiar conical vaults over the nave that
give the church a very unusual appearance. Viewed from the street
the roofs are picturesque and perplexing, but seen from the top of
the castle walls the whole arrangement of the church is at once ap-
parent. This castle is not only used as a prison to-day — the guide
locking the door after you have entered — but possesses some of the
38 Eleaser B. Homer.
strongest and darkest subterranean dungeons of any of the castles of
the Middle Ages. In its famous Martelet Tower, Ludovico Sforza,
Duke of Milan, was confined for nine years.
The first break in our numbers occurred at Loches, for one of the
students was obliged to set out for Germany, and later on another,
who was too sick with an attack of malaria to enjoy riding, decided to
cover the remaining ground by train. At the departure of the even-
CuuRcii OK St. Ours. Lochks.
PhDlographed by E It. H.
ing train the students stirred up the town, tramping to the station to
the inspiring tune of " Marching thro' Georgia," played upon cornet,
cymbals, snare, and bass drum, all hired from a neighboring cheap
theater for the sum of five francs. The departing student marched in
state, with bicycle and valise carried in front, and arriving at the sta-
tion was promptly assisted by the guard into a first-class compartment,
for which he had to pay excess fare upon arriving at Tours, as he
could only show a third-class ticket.
-''^I~:'
The Summer School of Architecture. 39
Leaving picturesque Loches behind, we crossed the hills to
Chenonceaux, racing before a coming storm at a scorching pace;
but the storm which we could see behind us passed down the valley
that we had just left and we arrived at Chenonceaux without the
expected wetting. We were here allowed to go all about the grounds
and make sketches of the exterior of the chateau, but permission could
not be obtained to visit the interior or the great picture gallery which
extends almost across the river. The whole building stands upon
Chateau of Cubndhceaux.
piers built in the bed of the Cher, and entrance is obtained only by
the drawbridge in front of the picturesque tower that serves as an
advance guard for the main building. Around the chateau the walks
through the woods are very carefully laid out, but the large garden
is too symmetrical and conventional to be pleasing.
Before leaving Chenonceaux we discovered that we had not money
enough in the party to pay the hotel bill, our expenses through this
section being about 250 francs, or 5150, each day, so as some of the
party wished to go on to Amboise six of us made a night ride, one
40 Eleazer B. Homer.
starting by train for Blois early the next morning, obtaining the
necessary funds, and returning in time to settle all accounts before
the hotel people discovered that the treasurer had barely enough
money to tip the waiters. Carrying our money by letter of credit
and American Express notes, we should have fallen by the wayside
quite often if each man had been obliged to look out for himself, but
united we were strong enough for any emergency.
Vallbv of the Loire from the Top of the Great Tower, Chateau of Auboise.
Photognphtd by £. B. H.
The chateau at Amboise is now undergoing extensive restorations,
so that we could not clearly see the whole building. In the center of
the walls, overlooking the river, rises one of the massive towers 130
feet high, containing the great spiral plane by which horses and car-
riages reach the level of the courtyard of the chateau. From the
street of the town this tower rises far above the surrounding houses,
while from its top a fine view is obtained of the wide valley ; but the
black and white of the photograph does not do justice to the pano-
rama, since it leaves out all the soft effects of green foliage and blue
water which the painter alone could suggest.
The Summer School of Architecture.
St. Hubert's Chapel. Amboise.
PhotcgiapliFd by F. B, Hnlhnun.
The gem of Amboise is the little chapel of St. Hubert, perched
high on the southwestern side of the wall. To reach it one passes
through the great inclined tunnel in the angle of the wall, and arrives
by various passages on the general level of the chateau grounds. The
commanding location of the chapel is seen best from the top of the
large south tower, the enormous sub-structure of the walls lifting the
terrace high above the houses of the town. This little building, with-
out any reservation, is externally one of the most beautiful examples
of Gothic design, for although attached to the massive stonework of
the wall it shows a delicacy and refinement that is almost marvelous.
The rich doorway, with its bas-reliefs illustrating scenes from the life
o( St. Hubert, is also one of the gems of Gothic sculpture.
Eleaser B. Homer.
PhDlographcd by E. B. H.
Crossing the river on leaving Amboise, we took the road under the
hills on the right bank of the Seine and found many charmingly situ-
ated chateaux of a smaller type. Of these, Du Plessis was one of
the most interesting. Turning off this road at Onzain, we crossed
the wooden bridge over the Loire and leaving our wheels at the hotel
climbed the long walk to the chateau of Chaiimont. The courtyard
of this vigorously designed building commands a wide view of the
valley that rivals the view at Amboise. The rooms to which we were
admitted were very richly hung with tapestries and full of souvenirs
of Dian de Poitiers and Catherine de Medici. Remaining on this
left side of the river we soon covered the distance to Blois, and pass-
ing over the highly crowned stone bridge were soon at our hotel
near the famous chateau, the principal building of its class in France.
So much has been written about Blois that I will not attempt here
to describe its beauties. The Francis I wing is justly famous for its
exterior, and for its richly carved court fa9ade with its elaborate spiral
staircase. But to me the quieter Louis XII side of the court is far
The Summer School of Architecture. 43
more pleasing and more thoroughly graceful in architectural effect.
It is one of the few buildings that one wants to sit down before and
quietly let it tell its own story.
After two days at Blois, principally spent in the chateau, we jour-
neyed on, spending a short time among the complicated roofs of the
vast, barren chateau of Chambord. The night was spent at Orleans,
Pbotognphed by E. B. H.
and from there began the most fatiguing ride of the trip, the thirty-
five miles to Chateaudun, through monotonous grain fields, against a
heavy head wind. That all were well tired is shown by the fact that
our party of young men, hardened by forty days' continuous riding,
turned in for a nap directly after obtaining a much-needed lunch.
The old, deserted castle of Chateaudun was wandered over late in the
afternoon and all were impressed by the desolate character of its great
rooms. This castle possesses a donjon of the I2th century, having
a remarkably substantial timber roof, and also shows much rich
Renaissance detail around the interior courtyard.
The Loire is here quite small and unimportant, although very
pretty just as it enters the town near the base of the chateau, but
it is hard to think that the beautiful river at this point is particu-
larly filthy. The washing stands seen by the riverside everywhere
in France are quite common in this town. There is, however, such
a suggestion of sewage in the discolored waters, that one wonders
how the laundry can come home as clean and fresh as it always
appears.
44 Eleaser B. Homer.
Lunching at the village of Bonneval, where it seems that Ameri-
cans are rarely seen, we later on reached Chartres, There we spent
our time principally in the magnificent cathedral, the most imposing
Gothic building in France ; but I can only very briefly mention its
grand interior, beautiful towers and porches, or its wealth of magnifi-
cent stained glass.
Main Avenue of the GARCEtts. Palace of Versailles.
Along the valley of the Villette we had our last picturesque ride,
and at the charming chateau at Maintenon obtained permission to
enter the gallery of the Noailles family portraits. Leaving this beau-
tifully situated place we had a hard journey to Rambouillet, over a
military road two thirds cobblestones and one third rough gravel and
mud.
We were now within a short distance of Versailles and Paris,
where our journey was to end. Reaching Versailles, the magnificent
exterior of the great palace could not fail to impress us, but one at
first feels out of place in the midst of so much cold, monumental
grandeur, and our short trip through the galleries and gardens gave us
all the impression that a great amount of money had been lavishly
expended with questionable success. It is needless to say that many
of the little village scenes through which we had passed were more
picturesque and effective and could be more quickly grasped.
The Summer School of Architecture, 45
A quick afternoon ride from Versailles led us through the Bois
de Boulogne, past the Arc de T Etoile, down the crowded Champs-
Elysees, to the little comfortable hotel in the Rue de Bac, and our
Summer School of '96 was ended.
During our stay abroad much information was gained in regard to
the European styles of architecture. In fact, so great an advance in
the appreciation of good architecture was made, that all who took part
in the tour look back upon it as completely enjoyable and profitable.
At this distance, our days of monotonous riding and all our difficul-
ties are forgotten.
46 A. A. Noyes and H, M, Goodwin.
THE VISCOSITY OF MERCURY VAPOR,
By a. a. noyes, Ph.D., and IL M. GOODWIN, Ph.D.
Received October 6, 1896.
The uncertainty which attaches to the specific heat ratio of gases
as a means of distinguishing between monatomic and polyatomic mole-
cules has been recently made evident by the extended discussions of
the significance of that property in connection with the atomic weights
of argon and helium. It is, therefore^ of great interest to investigate
other properties which may be expected to be related to the atomicity
of the molecule. Of such properties those dependent on the volume
or cross-section of the molecules seem most promising. We have,
therefore, undertaken the investigation of one of these, the viscosity
or internal friction, in order to determine whether a marked differ-
ence in its value exists in the case of gases with monatomic and those
with polyatomic molecules. To this end we have made comparative
measurements of the viscosity of hydrogen, carbon dioxide, and mer-
cury vapor at the boiling temperature of the last named substance.
According to the Kinetic Theory of Gases the viscosity coefficient r\
has the theoretical significance expressed by the following equation :^
?/ = — N in L c
IT
in which N is the number of molecules in the unit of volume, m the
mass of a single molecule, L the mean free path, and c the mean
velocity. Moreover the mean free path L is dependent solely on the
number of molecules iVand the mean cross section ^ of a single mole-
cule, or of its sphere of action : ^
I
L = —r-=-
*0. E. Meyer. Kinetische Theorie der Case, ist ed. pp. 130, 139.
' O. E. Meyer. Kinetische Theorie der Case, pp. 206, 218. The symbol Q used by the
author represents the total cross section of all the molecules in the unit of volume, and is,
therefore, evidently equal to iV^.
The Viscosity of Mercury Vapor. 47
whence it follows that
I mc
V =
or for any two different gases :
VI • 72 • • •
But, since for any two gases at constant temperature :
the above proportion may be simplified to the following equation :
£1^ _ ^ /^ (I)
q% ^1 \«^2
irom which it is evident that the relative mean cross sections of the
molecules of the two gases are readily calculated from their molecular
weights and viscosity-coefficients. It was thought by us that mona-
tomic molecules might prove to be much smaller than polyatomic
ones, since it seems a priori not improbable that the spaces between
the atoms of the latter are large in comparison with the dimensions
of the atoms themselves. The experiments to be here described
show, however, that no marked distinction exists between moiiatomic
and polyatomic gases in this respect.
Experiments on the viscosity of mercury vapor, and especially on
the eflFect of temperature upon it, have been made already by S. Koch,^
who calculated that at 300° the volume of the mercury molecule is 4.4
as great as that of the hydrogen molecule. As this calculation was
not based on direct comparative experiments made by passing the two
gases through the same capillary, but was an indirect one involving
the measurements of different experimenters and the dimensions of
the capillaries used by them, it seemed desirable to subject the matter
to further investigation in the direct manner indicated. Moreover, the
author does not discuss the significance of his result in its bearing on
the relative magnitude of atoms and molecules.
The method used by us in determining the relative viscosity con-
sisted in measuring the quantities of the different gases which, under
a constant diflFerence of pressure, passed in a given time through the
• Wied. Ann. Phys. Chem. 19, 857 (1883).
48 A. A, Noyes and H. M. Goodwin.
same capillary kept at a definite constant temperature. O. E. Meyer'
has derived the following formula for calculating the viscosity coeffi-
cient i; of a gas from its rate of flow through a capillary tube :
^ i6" X />! Fi
where X is the length and R the radius of the tube, t the time, p\ the
pressure at which the gas enters, p^ that at which it leaves the tube,
and V^ the volume of the transpired gas measured at the pressure p^.
In the case of comparative experiments made with the same capillary
on two different gases, the following proportion holds true :
^^,^^,AP^-P.^\hAP^^-P.^\h ,,j
«i «a
in which «i, «a, represent respectively the number of gram molecular
weights of the two gases transpired (since « is proportional to the
product / V).
The apparatus and experimental method that
we employed were necessarily quite different from
the usual ones, and they wilt, therefore, be briefly
described. The capillary used in the most complete
series of experiments consisted of a glass tube about
74 cm. in length, and 0.34 mm. in internal diameter
(determined by measuring the volume of a known
length by means of mercury). A smaller capillary
about 49 cm. in length and 0.22 mm. in diameter
was used in a preliminary series. The capillary was
bent in the manner shown in Figure i, except that
as actually constructed, it was made much more com-
pact. To its ends were fused pieces of ordinary
glass tube as shown in the figure ; one of these was
provided at the point A with a ground glass joint.
The capillary was placed in a vertical position in a
^^^- "■ heavy steel cylinder (see Figure 2), 30 cm. high, 2.8
cm. internal diameter, having a small orifice at the side, through which
the ground joint protruded for a distance of about one centimeter. The
*Pogg. Ann., laj, 169.
The Viscosity of Mercury Vapor.
49
capillary was held in position in the orifice by packing with loose as.
bestos. Although the capillary was vertical, the influence of gravity was
eliminated by reason of the fact that the ascending and descending parts
were made equal in length. The top of the cylinder was closed by an
iron plate screwed down with a nut N; the nut and the plate were
perforated in the center, and into the latter was welded an open iron
tube B projecting upwards, 25 cm. in length, and i^ cm. in diameter.
The cylinder was covered, except on the bottom, with a jacket of asbes-
tos about 5 cm. thick, and the projecting tube B, which was to serve
as a condenser, was wound with spirals of copper wire to increase the
tail
Fig. Z
cooling surface. Pure mercury was placed in the cylinder and boiled
vig-orously by means of a number of lamps beneath. The capillary
was thus kept at the boiling temperature of mercury under atmos-
\i\vetic pressure. No regard was paid to the variations of temperature
ansing from changes in barometric pressure, as their effect would evi-
dently be entirely negligible.
Any desired difference of pressure at the two ends of the capillary
was attained by inserting a tube in the ground joint and connecting it
with a large air reservoir R which was itself connected through the
cock 5 with a suction pump, and with an open mercury manometer M.
The gas or vapor entered at the other end of the capillary, always un-
50 A. A. Noyes and H. M, Goodwin,
der atmospheric pressure. The whole apparatus in the form used for
measuring the rate of transpiration of the mercury vapor is shown in
Figure 2.
In making the experiments, the rate of flow of the mercury vapor
was first determined in the following manner : While the cylinder was
being heated, carbon dioxide was forced through the capillary to pre-
vent the condensation in it of liquid mercury and the formation of its
oxide. After the mercury was boiling actively, and its vapor entirely
enveloped the capillary as shown by a mercurial thermometer inserted
in the tube B, Figure 2, it was connected with the suction pump and
mercury vapor drawn through for half an hour. The carefully ground
end of a weighed bulb W was then inserted in the ground joint and
its other end being connected by means of a clamped rubber tube C,
with the air reservoir, in which the desired reduction of pressure had
been produced. At a definite moment the clamp C was opened and
the time noted. As the volume of the condensing bulb J'Fwas very
small compared with the volume of the air reservoir^ no sensible
change in the pressure was thus produced. The mercury vapor was
found to be completely condensed in W about two to three centime-
ters from the ground point. It was found that a slight and unavoid-
able leakage^ through the ground joint occurred, and it was, therefore,
necessary to readjust the pressure occasionally. It could easily be
. maintained constant to 0.2 or 0.3 mm. or even closer. After a suffi-
cient time, usually sixty minutes, the clamp was closed, and at a noted
instant the bulb removed and subsequently weighed. Check experi-
ments were made in this way at each of two or three other different
pressures.
The capillary was now removed from the cylinder, and the opening
B (Figure i) carefully closed by fusion. A glass tube, long enough to
project beyond the upper end of B (Figure 2), was also fused onto the
end C, and the capillary was then ready for the experiments with car-
bon dioxide and hydrogen. It was replaced in the cylinder as before,
and the glass tube projecting through B connected through suitable
wash-bottles with the gas generator. The carbon dioxide was made
' In the case of the mercury experiments, no error could arise from this source, as the
leakage was inward. In the case of those with carbon dioxide and hydrogen, it was proved
by blank experiments that the amounts of carbon dioxide and water which leaked in were less
than I per cent, of the total weight.
The Viscosity of Mercury Vapor, 5 1
in a Kipp generator by the action of dilute sulphuric acid on lumps of
pure fused sodium carbonate, and was dried by passing through two
Allihn gas wash-bottles containing strong sulphuric acid. The hydro-
gen was prepared from pure Bertha zinc and dilute sulphuric acid, was
washed with caustic soda solution and dried by sulphuric acid as in th^
case of the carbon dioxide. In order to maintain the gas entering the
capillary at atmospheric pressure, a T tube was inserted between the
wash-bottles and the capillary, and its perpendicular arm was turned
downward and caused to dip into sulphuric acid barely below its sur-
face. The cock of the generator was opened sufficiently to cause the
gas to bubble out steadily through the sulphuric acid.
The transpiration measurements were made as in the case of the
mercury. The carbon dioxide, flowing through in a definite time, was
determined by absorption in weighed tubes filled with lumps of soda
lime. The hydrogen was burnt by passing it over hot copper oxide
contained in hard glass tubes from which the air was previously dis-
placed by carbon dioxide, and the water collected in weighed calcium
chloride tubes.
The results are presented in the following table : In the first col-
umn is given the symbol of the substance ; in the second, the atmos-
pheric pressure /i; in the third, the difference in pressure (/i — p^\
in the fourth, the time / expressed in hours ; in the fifth, the weight w
in grams of the substance weighed ; in the sixth, the mean weight
transpired in one hour as computed from the separate check experi-
ments, and in the last, the quotient obtained by dividing this weight
by the molecular weight m of the substance, the time, and the pres-
sure function {p-^ — p^) ^ (See expression (2) on page 48. As
the headings indicate, the first of these two series of experiments
was made with the smaller, and the second with the larger capillary.
It will be seen that in the second series two sets of determinations
are given for mercury vapor ; the first of these was made before, and
the second one after the experiments with carbon dioxide and hydro-
gen, and their agreement shows that the capillary had undergone no
change by stoppage or otherwise, during the course of the experiments
with it.
' In the calculation of this quantity the same mean value of p\ was used in all the experi-
ments of each series, namely, 760 for those with the smaller capillary, 765 for those with the
larger.
52
A, A. Noyes and H. M. Goodwin,
SERIES I. (SmaU Capillary.)
/i
A -A
/
w
Wit
w X io««
^««(/i*-A*)
Hg . .
•
753
753
756
200
i!
0.738
0.740
0.745
0.494
93.6
755
755
300
0.685
a686
0.686
93.6
754
754
400
0 834
0.831
0.833
92.9
COj . .
752
752
752
200
u
0.237
0.239
0.357
0.238
205
759
759
766
300
0.329
0.327
0.324
0.327
203
766
766
759
400
0.400
0.396
0.396
0.397
202
SERIES II. (Large Capillary.)
A
A-A
i
m
Wit
WX io««
'"•(A'-A*)
Hg. . .
769
769
150
1.548
1.548
1.548
374
769
769
769
300
2.763
2.764
2.739
2.755
373
COs . .
756
765
150
0.704
0.706
0.705
774
765
765
300
1.267
1.264
1.265
779
H] .
766
766
150
0.557
0.557
0.557
1517
766
766
300
1.009
1.006
1.006
1495
Hg. . .
766
766
764
300
2 728
2.746
2.743
2.739
371
The Viscosity of Mercury Vapor, 53
\ Attention may be first called to the agreement of the values of
\ the last column in the case of the transpiration of the same sub-
stance under different differences of pressure, thus proving that the
effect of pressure is in close accordance with that required by the
formula, and consequently that the capillaries are of sufficient length
and small enough bore to give the true values of the viscosity coeffi-
cients.
Of the two series of experiments, the first one made with the
smaller capillary is to be regarded as less reliable by reason of the
fact that owing to an accident to the capillary check experiments with
mercury vapor after completion of those with carbon dioxide could not
be made as in the former case, in consequence of which it is not cer-
tain that a stoppage did not occur in the course of the series. While
there was nothing to indicate that such was the case, yet on account
of its extremely small bore it was much more liable to stoppages than
the larger capillary. We consider the experiments with the latter to
be certainly accurate within 2 per cent.
Nevertheless, the agreement between the results of the first and
second series is perhaps as close as could be expected with capillaries
so different from each other in character. The relative viscosity
coefiScients of the different gases were calculated from the values of
the last column in the table by means of formula (2). The results
are as follows :
First series,
^«^ = 2.17.
^co.
Second series,
^ = 2.08. ^ = 4.04. ^' = 1.94.
The relative values for mercury and carbon dioxide agree within
about 4 per cent. That of the second series is, however, more relia-
ble, for the reason above stated, and will be used in the subsequent
calculations. It may be noted that the value of the ratio 1;^^ : t)^ at
ordinary temperature is 1.72,^ somewhat smaller than that found by
us at 357^, a result which is in accordance with the greater tempera-
ture coefficient of carbon dioxide established by several investigators.
• O. E. Meyer. Kinetische Theorie der Ga«e, 142.
54 A. A. Noyes and H, M. Goodwin.
The corresponding values of the relative mean cross-sections as
calculated by formula (i) are:
?H« = ,.o2. ^ = 2.48.
That is to say, the average cross-section of the mercury molecule or
atom is very nearly the same as that of the carbon dioxide molecule,
and is about 2\ times as large as that of the hydrogen molecule.
This last result does not differ very greatly from that (2.68) corre-
sponding to the relative molecular volumes of mercury and hydrogen
as calculated for 300° by Koch.
These results indicate that atoms and molecules are of the same
order of magnitude and that the spaces between the atoms within the
molecule, if any exist, are not large in comparison with those occupied
by the atoms themselves. And consequently the viscosity of gases,
or any other property which like it is dependent only on the siie or
form of the molecules, is not adapted for distinguishing between mona-
tomic and polyatomic molecules.
In considering the significance of the above values of the cross-
section, the different masses of the various molecules, to be sure, ought
not to be entirely disregarded. The mercury and carbon dioxide mole-
cules have, as we have seen, the same cross-section, and, therefore, as-
suming both to be of the same general form, they occupy the same vol-
ume. The mass of the former is, however, 4.55 times as great as that
of the latter. The density of the mercury molecule is consequently
greater in this same proportion. But this difference is not marked
enough to make it necessary to attribute it to free spaces within the
carbon dioxide molecule. For it is not improbable that the inherent
density of massive atoms, like those of mercury, may be considerably
greater than that of light atoms, such as those of carbon and oxygen.
In closing, we desire to point out that the principle here estab-
lished that atoms and molecules are of the same order of magnitude,
and that no considerable free interatomic spaces exist within the mole-
cule, is in accordance with the remarkable fact that the molecular cross-
section of most comparatively simple molecules is approximately an
additive property calculable from certain constant values of the atomic
cross-section.^ This fact would be unintelligible, were the principle
' See O. £. Meyer. Kinetische Theorie der Case, 209.
The Viscosity of Mercury Vapor, 55
not correct ; for if considerable spaces existed between the atoms, it
is not to be supposed that those spaces would be the same in entirely
dissimilar molecules — that, for example, the space between the hydro-
gen and chlorine atoms in hydrochloric acid would have any relation
to the space between the atoms in the elementary gases hydrogen and
chlorine.
Rogers Laboratory of Physics.
StpUmber^ i8q6.
56 A, E, Burton.
THE SCIENTIFIC WORK OF THE BOSTON PARTY ON
THE SIXTH PEAR V EXPEDITION TO GREENLAND.
I.
Introductory Note.
On the 29th of April, 1896, the undersigned received a letter from Lieutenant Robert £.
Peary, Civil Engineer U. S. N., inviting him to organize a small party to carry on some line
of scientific research in Danish Greenland, this party to be quite independent in its organiza-
tion and equipment from the main body of the expedition, but to be transported to and from
its destination by Lieutenant Peary's steamer. A similar proposition was made to Professor
Ralph S. Tarr, of Cornell University. These two separate parties of six men each were to
be landed with boats and camp equipments at different points on the west coast of Danish
Greenland, there to remain and to carry on their investigations until the return of Lieutenant
Peary*s steamer in the latter part of the season, when they were to be taken on board and
brought back to the port of sailing. This plan was a variation from former expeditions, and
was designed to enable the members of these parties to prosecute their studies uninterrupt-
edly for five or six weeks at localities affording the best opportunities for their chosen lines
of work.
Both parties were organized and equipped, and they sailed with Lieutenant Peary from
Sydney, Cape Breton, on the steamer Hope, July 16, 1896. Lieutenant Peary had obtained
permission from the Danish home, government for the landing of these parties on the Green-
land coast. The entire plan as proposed was carried out almost without a single deviation.
Each party was landed and called for on scheduled time, and too much praise cannot be
given to Lieutenant Peary and Captain Bartlett, of the steamer Hope, for the excellent ar-
rangements made for the comfort and safety of their passengers.
Through the kindness of the Secretary of the Treasury and of the Superintendent of
the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, the Boston party was fortunate in securing the
detail of Assistant G. R. Putnam with full instrumental equipment for making pendulum and
magnetic observations. The other members of the party were college professors and stu-
dents. The expenses of the party were mainly borne by the members themselves. The
undersigned, however, wishes to express his sincere gratitude to Mrs. Francis H. Williams,
Mrs. John C. Phillips, Mr. George Wigglesworth, and others, for their aid and financial asr
sistance, without which the work of the party would have been seriously hampered. To
Mr. A. M. Ritchie, of Brookline, the party is indebted for the gift of a complete thermo-
phone outfit for the determination of air, ice, and water temperatures, and to the Institute of
Technology for the loan of scientific instruments.
The Boston party wishes to acknowledge with hearty appreciation the courtesy and
generous assistance extended to them throughout their work by the Danish officials, and
especial thanks are due to Inspector Andersen, of Godhavn, and to Governor Knuhtsen, of
Umanak.
The account of the scientific work accomplished will be given in the following reports
by the members of the expedition.
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition, $7
Report A, Magnetic and Pendulum Observations, .by Mr. G. R. Putnam, Assistant
United States Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Report B,* Observations of Gladal Phenomena, by Assistant Professor G. H. Barton,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Report C* Measurements of the Motion of the Great Karajak Glacier, by Professor
A. £. Burton, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Report D.* Studies of the Eskimos of Baffin's Land and Umanak Fjord, Their Cos^
tumes and Habitations, by Mr. Russell W. Porter, a student, Massachusetts Institute of
Technology.
Although the two remaining members of the expedition, Mr. John C. Phillips, a student
of Harvard University, and Mr. A. M. Dodge, a student of Harvard Medical School, do not
submit written reports of their work, it should be said that much of the success of the plans
of this expedition is due to their hearty cooperation in the work, and to their practical knowl-
edge of camp life. Messrs. Porter, Phillips, and Dodge, by their skill in the use of the cam-
era, enabled the party to obtain a most excellent photographic record of the expedition.
A collection of furs, native costumes, kayaks and implements of the chase was made,
and much of it has already been presented to various museums and public collections.
Alfred £. Burton, S. B. ,
Professor oj Topographical Engineerings Massachusetts Institute of Technology^
In charge of the Boston party.
* Owing to lade of space, reports B^ C and D will be pubUdied in the next number of the Tbchnologv
QUAKTBBLY.
58
G, R, Putnam.
Report A. Magnetic and Pendulum Observations in Connec-
tion WITH THE Greenland Expedition of 1896, Under Charge
OF Professor A. E. Burton.^
By G. R. PUTNAM, M.S.,
Assistant U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Received Janiury i8, 1897.
Table of Contents.
Section
Section
Section
Section
I.
2.
3-
4-
Part I. Introduction.
Scope and object of work ....
Narrative of the expedition
Description of stations ....
Geographical positions and elevations
PAGB.
59
61
^S
70
Part XL Magnetic Observations.
Section 5. Magnetic instruments and constants 73
Section 6. Magnetic observations and computations 75
Section 7. Results of magnetic observations 76
Section 8. Comparison with earlier magnetic observations 84
Section 9.
Section la
Section ii.
Section 12.
Section 13.
Section 14.
Section 15.
Section 16.
Section 17.
Section 18.
Section 19.
Section 20.
Section 21.
Section 22.
Section 23.
Section 24.
Part III. Pendulum Observations.
Instruments for the measurement of the relative force of gravity 88
Methods of observation with pendulum apparatus 90
Time observations and chronometer rates 93
Reduction of pendulum observations 95
Results of pendulum observations 97
Comparison of periods at Washington 106
Notes on the historical development of pendulum apparatus . . 107
Notes on the progress of research in terrestrial gravity measurements no
Part IV. Examples of Observations and Computations.
Latitude observations at Umanak, Greenland .
Computation of longitudes, from chronometer 1823 (sidereal)
Observations of sun for azimuth of mark, and for time
Observations of magnetic declination ....
Observations of magnetic dip ......
Observations of horizontal intensity of earth's magnetism
Time observations in connection with pendulum work
Pendulum observations
"7
120
121
123
124
125
128
132
' Published by permission of the Superintendent of the United States Coast and Geo-
detic Survey.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations, 59
Part I. Introduction.
Section i. Scope and Object of Work, — Among the objects of
research included in the plan for the expedition to the west coast
of Greenland organized by Professor A. E. Burton in the summer
of 1896, were magnetic and pendulum observations, and the writer
was invited by Professor Burton to undertake this part of the work.
On the recommendation of the Superintendent of the United States
Coast and Geodetic Survey, permission was granted by the Secre-
tary of the Treasury for the writer to accompany the expedition, and
to take with him the necessary instrumental outfit belonging to the
Survey, on the condition that the Survey should bear no part of the
expense. The party was to be transported to and from its destination
by Lieutenant R. E. Peary, United States Navy, the well known Arc-
tic explorer, who combined the transportation of several such scientific
parties with the other objects he had in view in planning this northern
expedition. As Lieutenant Peary proposed to make a number of
intermediate stops both going and returning, it was the plan of the
writer to make observations at all such places as time and circum-
stances would permit, and thus accumulate as much data as possible
in regard to these branches of terrestrial physics, in regions not fre-
quently visited. In the recently publish^ report ^ of Professor Hel-
mert to the International Geodetic Association on gravity determina-
tions made in various parts of the world, no observations are shown in
the region covered by this voyage, so that pendulum observations here
will help to fill a gap in the investigation of the variations of the force
.of gravity over the earth's surface, which is among the lines of research
undertaken by the various countries represented in that association.
One of the objects of these investigations is the study of the figure
of the earth, as to which evidence is furnished by the variations in the
force of gravity from the equator to the poles ; and the fact that com-
paratively few such observations have been made in the polar regions
where they have g^eat weight in this problem, renders additional data
there of especial importance. The study of the local variations of grav-
ity is also of much interest, furnishing evidence of the differences of
' " Bericht iiber die relativen Messungen der Schwerkraft mit Pendelapparaten," by Pro-
fessor Helmert, in *' Verhandlungen der elften allgemeinen Conferenz der Intemationalen
Erdmessung," at Berlin (1895). ^^^ ™^P ^^* 7*
6o G. R, Putnam.
density near the earth's surface, and affording one of the few experi-
mental means of investigating that important problem of terrestrial
physics, the condition of the earth's so-called crust.
Magnetic observations have been made from time to time by vari-
ous expeditions to these regions. The repetition of such observations
at identical stations after suitable intervals of time, has long been con-
sidered an object of prime importance in the study of terrestrial mag-
netism, as by this means only can the changes constantly in progress
in all the magnetic elements be intelligently studied. The direct prac-
tical bearing of these observations in connection with navigation and
surveying, is the knowledge they afford of the variation of the com-
pass from true north, and the possibility of predicting what the vari-
ation will be for at least a few years in advance. It was fortunate
that at a number of places it was possible to reoccupy the stations of
earlier magnetic observers, in two cases the identical points being
found. The advantage of this, of course, is that the local variation
which exists in the vicinity of many points is eliminated in dedu-
cing the rate of change of the magnetic elements from successive
observations.
On account of the ready portability of the magnetic instruments
it was possible to take advantage of nearly all the stops of the ship
to make magnetic observations. The pendulum apparatus, however,
being much more elaborate, and requiring the obtaining of star obser-
vations for time on at least two nights, could only be set up where the
longer stops were made, and complete observations were obtained only
at the points of starting and destination, with partial observations at
two intermediate places. Because of the diversified interests com-
prised in the various expeditions on the ship, the short time available,
and the exigencies of Arctic voyaging, the stops could not be arranged
either as to time or place, to especially accommodate the magnetic and
pendulum observations, but the convenience of this work was consid-
ered by Lieutenant Peary in arranging the plans, and the work pro-
moted in every way practicable.
The present report on this work includes many details and illustra-
tive examples of observations, and historical reference to former work,
which are embodied here with the purpose of giving a more complete
idea of the methods and objects, as well as of the actual results ob-
tained ; to do this it is evidently necessary to repeat some data that
have been published in earlier reports.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations, 6 1
Section 2. Narrative of the Expedition as Relating to these Ob-
servations,— The starting point of the steamship **Hope/' which was
to carry the parties north, was Sydney, Cape Breton. In order to per-
sonally see to the transfers en route of the valuable instrumental outfit
I left Boston by boat on July 4, 1896, reaching Halifax, Nova Scotia,
on July 6. Here by permission of the British officers in charge, I
made magnetic observations at the Naval Dock Yard, which is one
of the most valuable secular variation stations in North America, the
series of magnetic declination observations in this vicinity extending
back nearly three centuries. Leaving Halifax July 8, on the steamer
" Harlow," and passing through the remarkable Bras D*Or lakes, Syd-
ney was reached on July 10. Magnetic, pendulum, and astronomical
instruments were set up the same day, and work commenced that
evening. Complete observations were obtained at this point, the
instruments being located in the yard and basement of the Sydney
Hotel, through the courtesy of Mr. J, P. Fairbanks. All the parties
and outfit were embarked at this point on board the "Hope," a stanch
Newfoundland sealing steamer of 322 tons, full rigged and especially
adapted for work in the Arctic regions, and under the command of
Captain John Bartlett, an experienced Arctic voyager. Professor Bur-
ton's party comprised, besides the writer, the following persons : Pro-
fessor A. E. Burton, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, in charge,
Professor G. H. Barton, geologist, Mr. R. W. Porter, artist, both also
of the Institute, Mr. A. M. Dodge, Harvard Medical School, and Mr.
J. C. Phillips, Lawrence Scientific School. The writer is indebted to
these gentlemen for much assistance in preparing stations and for
helping in other ways. Professor Burton, besides making the topo-
graphical sketches at several of the points, constantly facilitated and
encouraged the work.
The "Hope" sailed from Sydney on July 16, our course being
across the Gulf of St. Lawrence, through the Straits of Belle Isle,
and along the Labrador coast. On July 20, a few hours' stop was made
at Turnavik, where magnetic observations were made over the exact
spot occupied by Lieutenant Very, United States Navy, fifteen years
previously. For most of the distance along the Labrador coast floe ice
was encountered, which became so heavy in the vicinity of Cape Chud-
leigh as to seriously impede the progress of the ship. Hudson Strait
was entered on July 23, and found comparatively free from ice. Our
party was landed at Ashe Inlet, Big Island, on July 25, and the various
instruments were set up in the vicinity of the partially destroyed house
62 G. R. Putnam.
marking the site of the Canadian meteorological station established
ten years ago, in connection with the Hudson Bay expedition under
Lieutenant A. R. Gordon, Royal Navy. Magnetic, pendulum, and one
night's time observations were made here, but the second night's time
observations were prevented by an easterly gale and rain which also
interfered with the magnetic work. The " Hope,** which had gone to
the mainland, called for our party on July 27, and no further time was
available at this point. We passed out of Hudson Strait on July 29,
and were prevented from entering Cumberland Sound, as planned, by
heavy ice which apparently blocked the whole width of the entrance.
On July 3 1 the course was changed for Greenland, the coast of which
was sighted on the evening of August i. Steaming northward along
that coast we entered the harbor of Godhavn on the evening of Au-
gust 2, and were cordially welcomed by the Danish officials. By per-
mission of Mr. Andersen, the Inspector of North Greenland, I made
magnetic observations the next morning in a location . between the
Inspector's and Governor's houses, and probably very close to the
former stations, which are referred to as being in the Inspector's gar-
den, or near the flagpole. Later the magnetometer was taken across
the harbor to the west side of Watson's Bay, and a few observations
made there. This is thought to be in the vicinity of the "Discovery's"
station of 1875. Leaving Godhavn on the afternoon of August 3, the
** Hope " steamed through the remarkable passage inside of Disco
Island, known as the "Vaigat." Entering Umanak Fjord on August 4,
our destination at Umanak settlement on the little island of the same
name was reached on August 5, and our party was disembarked, and
the "Hope" proceeded on her more northern voyage. By the cour-
tesy of Mr. Hjalmar Knuhtsen, the Governor of the Danish district
of Umanak, an unused house known as the " Gamle Praestebolig "
(old parsonage) was placed at our disposal, for storage and living pur-
poses. Throughout our stay here the Danish officials were most cour-
teous and hospitable, and facilitated our work in every way. The
pendulum apparatus was set up in a corner of this house, and the
meridian telescope and magnetic instruments in tents close by. By
August 2 1 the observations at this point had been completed, and du-
plicate records prepared, which as a precaution were sent to America
by the last Danish ship of the season, the "Peru" of the Royal Green-
land Trade. After this the writer accompanied one of the several ex-
peditions which were made by the party to the glaciers and the edge
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations. 63
of the inland ice, at the heads of the fjords. Because of the limited
transportation facilities available, it was considered inexpedient to
attempt to include pendulum or magnetic observations in the plan
of these exploring trips, which were made in small boats. The party
returned to Umanak on September 8, and on the following day the
"Hope" arrived on her homeward journey, and all were reembarked.
The same general course was followed on the return trip, omitting the
voyage into Hudson Strait. The afternoon of September 1 1 was spent
at Godhavn, and magnetic observations were again made at the same
point in the village. A northerly gale was encountered that night,
and on the 12th, in crossing Davis Strait. On the evening of the
13th the "Hope" ran into floe ice above Cape Mercy, which proved
so heavy that practically no progress was made except the drifting
with the floe until the i6th, when, the pack loosening, the ship was
worked out and steamed into Cumberland Sound, which was found
quite free of ice. On September 17 we reached the whaling station
at Umanaktuak, or Blacklead Island, in the midst of a gale and snow-
storm, so that difficulty was encountered in procuring an Eskimo pilot
from shore. We then proceeded to Niantilik, or Winter Harbor, where
the ship remained at anchor for about thirty hours. The magnetic,
pendulum, and astronomical apparatus were set up on a low promontory
on a small island just west of the anchora!ge. Magnetic and pendulum
observations were made, but no star observations for time could be
obtained because of a snowstorm, and the shortness of the stay. This
point and Ashe Inlet were the nearest of this series of stations to the
magnetic north pole, distant approximately 850 miles (1,370 kilome-
ters). Leaving Blacklead on the morning of the 19th, a clear and
favorable passage was had across to and along the Labrador coast,
and again through the Straits of Belle Isle to Sydney, which was
reached on September 26, after an absence of seventy-two days and
a voyage of about 5,cxx) miles (8,000 kilometers). A few additional
observations were made this day at Sydney, at Lieutenant Very's sta-
tion of 1 88 1, in the rear of the English Church. The instnunents
were then shipped to Washington, where the periods of the pendulums
were carefully determined, October 15 to 17. They had been deter-
mined at Washington just previous to starting on this expedition, on
June 22 to 24. The mean period of the three pendulums in October
differed only .0000001 of a second from that determined in June, a
very satisfactory test of the constancy of the pendulums and their
G. Ji. Putnam.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
65
freedom from injury on this journey. In this brief outline of the his-
tory of this expedition, only such details are referred to as affected
these particular lines of work.
Section 3. Description of Stations. — There were in all eleven
magnetic stations, in seven distinct localities. There were five pen-
dulum stations (including the base station at Washington), at two of
which the observations were incomplete. The route of the expedition
and the points of observation are shown on the accompanying map^
Figure i, and the local positions of the various points on the sepa-
rate sketches Figures 2 to 8. For further identification, the follow-
ing brief description of
the various points is
added :
Washington, D. C.
Pendulum station, in
pendulum room in
southwest comer of
basement. Coast and
Geodetic Survey Office
on Capitol Hill.
Sydney y Cape Breton^
Nova Scotia. Pendulum
apparatus in front part
of basement of Sydney
Hotel. Magnetometer
(station 1896) in open
lot belonging to Syd-
ney Hotel, and between
it and Post Office.
Sydney J Cape Breton,
Nova Scotia. Magnetic
station of 188 1, about
188 meters north, and
43 meters east of pre-
ceding. This station
was occupied by Lieu-
tenant S. W. Very, United States Navy, in 1881, and the wooden post
left by him was found. It is in the rear of the Church of England,
Figure 2.
G. R. Putnam.
C-.><^^
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
67
Tumavik, Labrador, Magnetic observations were made at the
identical point occupied by Lieutenant Very, in 1881, on West Tum-
avik Island, in the midst of the small fishing settlement under charge
of William Bartlett. This station is marked by a deep drill hole in
the bare rock about half way between Bartlett 's house and the house
in which his men live, Figure 3.
Fig. 4A. Sketch of Ashe Inlet, Hudson Strait.
Fran Admiralty Chart No. laai. (i8S8.) Soundings inftUtuntUy htighU m/t€t.
Observation Spot: Lat, 63° 3a' 44" N. ; Long., 70^ 34' 50" W.
Ashe Inlets Big Island, north side of Hudson Strait, Pendulum
apparatus in low stone and turf hut northwest of Hudson Bay Expe-
dition house on east side of Inlet. Magnetometer 23 meters west,
and 5 meters north of house. Position of latter marked by drill hole
2 cm. in diameter in bed rock, Figures 4 and 4^.
G. R. Putnam.
«»»
Godfiavn, Disco Island, Greenland. Magnetometer was located
between the Inspector's and the Governor's houses, on slope of rocky
, ledge. It was quite
HMBM i jj^^^ jjjg flagstaff and
/ ^^\ garden probably re-
' ' ferred to in descrip-
tion of previous sta-
tions. Position marked
by a hole 2 cm. in diam-
eter drilled in bed rock.
Figure 5.
Watson's Bay, God-
havn Harbor, Green-
land. This magnetic
station was located
across the harbor from
Godhavn, on a slight
promontory on west
side of Watson's Bay as shown on Admiralty plan No. 2,382. Posi-
tion marked by a hole 2 cm. in diameter drilled in bed rock. Figure 6,
Umanak, Green-
land. At Umanak
village on the small
island and in the
district of the same
name. Pendulum
apparatus on ground
floor of building
known as " Gamle
Pr^stebolig." Mag-
netometer in open
space south of
church. Position
marked by hole 2 cm.
in diameter drilled in
outcropping ledge
of rock. The north
and south meridian
stations at Umanak
were on the cliffs
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
69
in the meridian of the meridian telescope, 194 meters and 105 meters,
respectively, north and south of the principal magnetic station, and
were each similarly marked by drill holes in the rock, Figure 7. (For
general vicinity see Admiralty chart No. 276).
Nianiiliky Cumberland Sound, On a small island on the south-
west side of Cumberland Sound, and lying just west of the anchor-
age known as Niantilik or Winter Harbor, and about eight kilometers
UMANAtC
(five miles) south of the whaling station and Eskimo settlement at
Umanaktuak or Blacklead. Pendulum apparatus was located in a tent
on a low rocky point projecting from near the center of the southeast
side of the island, and nearly south of the little sailors' cemetery by
which the island may be identified. Magnetometer about 22 meters
southeast of pendulum station. Latter point marked by hole 2 cm.
in diameter drilled in gneiss rock, Figure 8. (For general vicinity
70
G. R» Putnam,
see map by Dr. Franz Boas, in Petermann's Mitteilungen, Vol. XVII,
No. 80, 1885, Figure %a.)
Section 4. Geographical Positions and Elevations, — The adopted
values for the latitude, longitude, and elevation of the stations are
given in the final tables of results (E and K). Except for Niantilik
and Umanak, the latitudes are taken from the best available sources,
such as records of previous observations, or from charts. At Nian-
tilik, the latitude is from an adjustment of morning and afternoon sun
9iitTem9iipmt9Loamett i ,•'
M*€itKTtCMMO PKMOVtMm 9TA7tOMM
N/ANrtUH om WiNr£R HARBOf^
A£3ttHon
observations for azimuth, checked by a rough sun observation at noon.
At Umanak, observations of four pairs of stars on two nights were
made with Meridian Telescope No. 13, using Talcott's method. The
details of this determination are given in Section 17.
The longitudes of all the intermediate stations have been computed
from the three chronometers. Numbers 1,823, 1,842, and 177, which
were carried on the expedition, and are based on Sydney, Cape Bre-
ton, as a starting point, and Washington, D. C, as an ending point.
The stationary rates were determined at Sydney, Umanak and Wash-
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
71
ington, and the traveling rates computed for the balance of the time.
The local time for comparison with the chronometers was obtained at
Ashe Inlet and Umanak, from star observations with the meridian tele-
scope» and at the other points from the sun observations made with
the theodolite magnetometer. The longitude results cannot be con-
sidered as very reliable for several reasons ; the longitude of Sydney
is uncertain, probably by a second of time; the chronometers were
Fig. 8a. Sketch of a Portion of Cumberland Sound, Showing Vicinity of
Magnetic and Pendulum Stations of 1896.
From map by Dk. Franz Boas, PtUrmaunU Miiteilungen^ Vol. 17, ErgHHMmttgske/t No. 80, 1885.
subjected to a considerable variety of temperature and other condi-
tions, including the jarring effect when pushing through the ice during
many days ; there was a long railroad journey from Sydney to Wash-
ington before they were last rated ; and the magnetometer theodolite
time determinations may be uncertain by several seconds. Neverthe-
less, the results by the three chronometers are fairly accordant, and
agree well with previous values except for the two Greenland stations.
The following table (A) gives the results by the three chronometers,
72
G, R. Putnam,
and a comparison with previous values. Because of its unsatisfactory
performance, a weight of only one third is given to the results by
chronometer 177. It will be noted that the discordances at the two
Greenland stations between different authorities are considerable. At
these two, the values determined in 1896 have been adopted, while at
the other points the means of the present and earlier results have
been used. In Section 18 is given as an example the computation
of the longitudes by one of the chronometers.
The elevations of the pendulum stations were determined by hand
level, using a Casella pocket alt-azimuth instrument. This instrument
was found very convenient for the approximate leveling which fully
answers the requirements of this work. Using as a base the height
of the eye above the ground, picking up some natural object in the
same horizontal plane, and following up grade in this manner, the dif-
ference in elevation to the nearest foot of points not distant may be
obtained by one person almost as fast as he can walk between them.
The mean sea level to which the elevations are referred was obtained
by rough tidal observations, the mean of succeeding high and low
waters being taken.
TABLE A.
Summary of Results for Longitude and Comparison with Previous Values.
Reference point.
LoNGiTVDB Wist op Grbbnwich.
Station.
Chronometer.
Previoos val-
ues of
longitude, t
i8a3.
Weight 3.
1843.
Weight 3.
177.
Weight I.
Weighted
mean.
Turnavik, Labrador ....
Ashe Inlet, Hudson Strait . .
Godluvn, Greenland ....
Umanak, Greenland ....
Niantiiik, Cumberland Sound.
Sydney, Cape Breton.* . . .
Magnetic station.
Meridian telescope.
Magnetic station.
Meridian telescope.
Magnetic station.
Magnetic station, 1 88i.
h. m. s.
3 57 aa.2
4 4a M-5
3 34 04.8
3 a8 34.0
4 as »7-6
4 00 43.8
h. m. s.
3 57 ao.6
4 4a a4.o
3 34 05- a
•
3 b8 32.8
4 as aa.a
4 00 45.8
h. m. s.
3 57 84-5
4 4a 26.3
3 34 03.0
3 a8 33.a
4 as 13.3
4 00 a8.8
h. m. s.
3 57 ai.8
4 4a a3.7
3 34 04.7
3 a8 33.4
4 as 190
4 oo4a.x
h. m. s.
3 57 ao.4 (0
4 4a 18.6 (a)
3 33 36.5 (3)
3 34 48.0 U)
3 a7 55-8 (5)
3 39 00.0 (6)
4 as «7-6 (7)
4 00 46.9 (8)
* Sydney is included here only as a check. These longitudes are baaed on Sydney as a starting point, and
Washington as an ending point.
t References for the previous values given.
Numbers x, 2, 4, and 6, from British charts and plans.
Number 3. Bowditch, Practical Navigator.
Number s> Meddelelser om Gr&nland, 4th part.
Number 7. Dr. Franz Boas' map.
Number 8. U. S. Hydrographic office chart.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations, 73
Part II. Magnetic Observations.
Section 5. Magnetic Instruments and Constants, — A portable
magnetic outfit was used, consisting of dip circle and magnetometer
belonging to the Coast and Geodetic Survey. The dip circle (No.
4,655 by Casella) was of the ordinary Kew pattern, suited for work in
high latitudes, with the supports for the needle horizontal, so as to
permit of reading dips near 90°. It is shown in Figure 9. Its dimen-
sions were horizontal circle 12.2 cm., vertical circle 14.4 cm. The
magnetometer (No. 19) was one of the new instruments constructed
at the Coast and Geodetic Survey Office in 1893, and is shown in
Figure 10. It is of the general form long used in this country, and
differing somewhat from the Kew magnetometer. It is a combination
magnetometer and theodolite ; the magnet box and attached small the-
odolite may be quickly removed from the base and horizontal circle,
and replaced by the theodolite for determining the azimuth from the
sun or otherwise. These new instruments have a horizontal circle of
II. 2 cm. diameter, and vertical circle 9.8 cm., and have several im- '
provements in detail greatly increasing the convenience of their use.
The magnet is octagonal in shape, and is held in a similarly shaped
stirrup, thus facilitating its reversal to obtain the axis. The suspen-
sion fibers (usually two fine silk fibers) hang from the adjustable tor-
sion head at the top of the glass tube above the magnet box, and
are attached to an arm extending upward from the stirrup. By this
method the point of* suspension is so high above the center of gravity
of the magnet that the latter is little affected by dip, and will hang
sensibly horizontal in ordinary latitudes. The principal magnet (19L)
is a hollow steel bar about 7.4 cm. in length, and i.i cm. between
opposite faces. It has a graduated scale in one end, and in the other
a lens of such shape as to bring the scale into focus in the small
observing telescope when the latter has the proper focus for a distant
mark. This telescope is mounted eccentrically on the same support
as the magnet box, and is provided with coUimation and wye adjust-
ments. The terrestrial reference mark may be observed with this
telescope directly through the box, by lowering the magnet out of the
way, turning aside the glass window at the further end of the box and
lowering the light reflector outside. The hood between the end of
the telescope and the magnet box enables the latter to be entirely
closed against air currents when the magnet is being observed, and at
74 G, R, Putnam.
the same time renders it possible to observe both magnet and mark
without looking through glass windows of any sort. For removing
the torsion of the suspension fiber, a brass bar of the same weight as
the magnet is provided. To support the magnet when it is used as a
deflector, there are arms (not shown in the illustration) which are in-
serted beneath the magnet box, and which have a slider which sup-
ports the deflector at the height of the auxiliary suspended magnet,
and at any desired distance.
The constants of this magnetometer and of magnet 19L were deter-
mined by the writer in December, 1893, as follows (in C. G. S. units) :
Scale Talue magnet (19L) 1 division == 2/00 of arc.
Corrected distance on deflecting bars, at mark 35 cm. = 35.020 cm.
Corrected distance on deflecting bars, at mark 49 cm. = 49.020 cm.
Temperature coefiicient q = 0.00049 for 1° C.
Induction coeflicient h s= 0.0125.
Distribution cbefficient /* = — 4.55.
Moment of inertia at 10.°5 C. M= 178.38.
These values were used in the computations, excepting that for P,
This coefficient was computed from the present series of observations,
with the result /* = — 3.80. The mean of this and the preceding
determination, or P = — 4.18, was used.
For fear that the great dip in these high latitudes might affect the
horizontal force determinations by drawing the oscillating magnet out
of the horizontal plane, in some of the observations at Ashe Inlet,
Godhavn, and Umanak, the south end of magnet 19L was weighted
with a small copper balancing ring, whose weight was 0.349 graros,
outer radius 14.0 mm., inner radius 12.0 mm., length 0.9 mm. At
Ashe Inlet and Godhavn the distance from center of ring to center of
magnet was 20 mm., and at Umanak 22.5 mm,, the endeavor being to
so place it as to make the magnet horizontal. For the first distance^
the moment of inertia was computed to be 1.693, and for the second,
2.064, using the formula I=W[\ {x^ + ^2^1 + ^1^) + \ {r^ + n^)],
where r^ is outer radius of ring, r^ inner radius, x^ distance center of
oscillation to outer end of ring, and xi to inner end. Where the bal-
ancing ring was used, its moment of inertia must of course be added
to that of the magnet and stirrup, in the formula for time of oscilla-
tion. A comparison of results for the horizontal component of the
earth's magnetic force {H) from observations on the same day, made
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations. 75
with and without the balancing ring, indicates that the error due to
lack of horizontality is at least ver}' small.
ReaulU for H (in dynes).
With ring. Without ring.
Godhavn, August 3 0.0619 0.0619
Umanak, August 14 0.0783 0.0782
Umanak, August 15 0.0783 0.0782
Umanak, August 18 0.0791 0.0792
Besides the magnetic instruments proper, the chronometers and
other auxiliary instruments belonging to the pendulum apparatus were
used when required. The observing tent, which was suitable for astro-
nomical or magnetic work, was used for the latter purpose at only one
point (Umanak). At the other points the magnetic instruments were
in the open air, either because the time was too short, or the tent was
otherwise employed. Several times this arrangement was not satis-
factory because of the high winds and otherwise unfavorable weather.
Section 6. Magnetic Observations and Computations, — For the
complete determination of the three magnetic elements, declination,
dip and horizontal force, the system generally employed in the field
work of the Coast and Geodetic Survey with portable instruments
was followed. Illustrative examples (taken from this season's work)
of each of the steps involved, both in the observations and computa-
tions, are given in Part IV of this report. Sections 19-22. Complete
instructions for such observations, adjustments of instruments, etc.,
are given by Mr. Schott in Appendix No. 8 of the Report United
States Coast and Geodetic Survey for 1881. The theory of the vari-
ous corrections involved (with the exception of that for induction ^) is
given by Professor Nipher in his little volume on the " Theory of Mag-
netic Measurements."
The operations included in a complete day's observations were as
follows, about in the order named : i. Early in the morning, reading
of the horizontal magnet at intervals of about fifteen minutes to ob-
tain the easterly elongation, which occurs between 7 and 9 a. m. in
ordinary latitudes, but is quite variable in these northern regions.
The positions of the magnet were of course referred to some terres-
* For this, refierenoe may be made to Report Coast and Geodetic Survey for 1869, App.
No. 9, p. joo; also Proc Royal Society of London, 26, p. 221 ; also Lament's " Handbuch
des Brdmagnetismiis," p. 152.
76 G, R. Putnam,
trial mark which was observed before and after the magnet readings.
2. Observations of the sun's azimuth and altitude (near the prime ver-
tical if possible) to obtain the azimuth of the mark, usually made dur*
ing some interval of the declination observations. * 3. Determination
of the axis of the magnet by alternate readings in direct and inverted
position. 4. Determination of the time of oscillation of the magnet.
5. Measurement of the angle of deflection of the auxiliary magnet, as
caused by the principal magnet at right angles to it, usually two sets
at different distances, and followed if time permitted by another set of
oscillations. 6. Determinations of the dip, complete sets with two in-
dependent needles. 7. Commencing about noon horizontal magnet
readings, repeated at intervals of about fifteen minutes, to obtain the
afternoon westerly elongation which occurs in ordinary latitudes from
I to 2 p. M. 8. Sun observations for azimuth repeated late in the after-
noon, for the reason that a combination of morning and afternoon azi-
muths eliminates the effect of an uncertainty in latitude.
Weather conditions and the limited amount of time available, ren-
dered changes and curtailments of this program necessary in some
cases. In others the plan was enlarged, the observations extended to-
two or three days, and the declination observations continued at some-
what irregular intervals throughout the day. At the northern stations
it would have been of interest to continue the latter throughout the
twenty-four hours to study the daily changes in declination, but this
was not practicable with the other work on hand. At Umanak the true
meridian was derived from a meridian line laid out with the meridian
telescope. At Turnavik, Ashe Inlet, and Niantilik (second observa-
tion) only oscillation observations were made to determine the hori-
zontal force. These were treated relatively, comparing the time of
oscillation of the magnet at each of these stations with that at both
the preceding and following stations where the force was completely
determined, and allowing for the progressive change in the magnetic
moment of the magnet. The rates of the chronometers for reducing
the oscillation observations were obtained from the star observations
with the meridian telescope in connection with the pendulum work at
Sydney and Umanak, and for the remaining stations were derived from
the intermediate traveling rates of the chronometers.
Section 7. Results of Magnetic Observations, — The results of
the magnetic observations for the different elements separately and
for each day of observation are given in Tables B, C, and D, and a
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations. jj
general summary of all the results is given in Table E. In Table B,
when the extreme declinations observed were assumed to be the elon-
gations for the day, they are indicated by an asterisk (*), and in such
cases the mean of the two elongations is taken as the mean declina-
tion for the day. When because of lack of time it was impossible to
obtain these elongations, the declinations have been reduced to the
mean of the day from such comparative data at other stations as was
available, the references being given in the footnote. Where the decli-
nation observations were made more or less continuously, covering any
considerable part of the day, the average declination for this interval
is given in the table, this average being obtained graphically by plot-
ting the observed values. For five days, on each of which the read-
ings covered an interval of about twelve hours, the results are shown
in the diagram (Figure ii), plotted to the same scale for the different
places. The diagram for Niantilik indicates a considerable magnetic
disturbance on the date of observation, as was also very apparent when
the observations were in progress, for the needle would frequently
move out of range of the telescope, necessitating the changing of the
azimuth circle. There was a change of over three degrees in twenty
minutes; at 7 h. 35 m. a.m., the needle pointed 60^ 35' W. of N.,
while at 7 h. 55 m., it pointed 63** 50' W. of N., and the total range
for the day was over four and a half degrees. Such disturbances,
however, are not unprecedented in Arctic experience.^ An inspec-
tion of the magnetograph records * of the United States Naval Obser-
vatory at Washington, for the dates corresponding to those on which
observations were made at the northern stations, shows that there were
no considerable magnetic disturbances at these epochs, excepting on
September 18, 1896. On this date there was an unusual magnetic
storm, the extreme range in declination at Washington being 38' for
the entire day, and 19' for the portion of the day corresponding to
*In The Manual of Natural History, Geology and Physics of Greenland (London, 1875),
it is stated that McCllntock observed a change of 15^ and Sir Edward Belcher noted a dis-
turbance of 27.^ accompanying an aurora.
' Copies of these records for the dates in question were furnished by Commodore Phy-
thian, Superintendent of the Naval Observatory.
G. R. Putnam.
Fig. II. DniKNAL Chances in Maoketic Dkclinatioh.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
79
the interval during which observations were made at Niantilik. The
tracing for this latter interval is shown in Figure iia, reduced to the
same scale as is used in Figure 1 1, and there is also given the curve for
part of a more normal day, July 26, the date on which observations
were made at Ashe Inlet. It will be noted that the range in declina-
tion at Niantilik was nearly fifteen times as great as at Washington
during the same interval. As the diagrams for the northern stations
are plotted from individual observations at irregular intervals, they are
of course not comparable in detail with the continuous Washington
records. The last column in Table B gives the diurnal range for the
r\
Wkah.
r^tx)f
.S^pi
J8JI
96
,1
TV
MM
7
NMMTWI
TMIK
10
II
a
IPM.
a
)
•
»
Wa,^
'li^tOt
.%/ul)
:26ja
96
-
i
j,«
II
12
•/•* -.
t
>
«
»
7
r*""
i
\
Fig. iia. Diurnal Changes in Declination at Washington, D. C.
days on which elongations were obtained. These ranges cannot be
considered as average values for the respective localities, being pos-
sibly affected by abnormal conditions on these particular days, as is
evident in the case of Niantilik. At Umanak, Godhavn, and Sydney,
declination observations were made at two or three neighboring points.
At Sydney, the difference between the station of 1896 and Very's
(1 881) was insignificant for dip as well as for declination. At Uma-
nak ^ the westerly declination increases about half a degree in going
' A considerable number of compass observations of declination were made about Uma>
nak Fjord by Danish officers (Assistant Steenstrup and Lieutenant Hammer) in 1878 and
187^ The following passages translated from " Meddelelser om Gronland," 4ih Part, p. 177
(Copei\hagen, 1883), &^^ some instances of the irregularity of the declination noted by them
8o G. R. Putnam.
m
from one to two hundred meters either north or south from the princi-
pal magnetic station. Near Godhavn the declination is slightly greater
across the harbor at Watson's Bay than in the village, though the dif-
ference is not so great as was indicated by the English observations in
1875, which may have been made in somewhat different localities.
The total force {F) in the last column of Table E is derived from
the horizontal force {H) and dip {0) by the relation F= 3- All
the results for H^ F, and m are stated in C. G. S. units.
in this region : ** It is a familiar saying that the magnet needle on these shores is nearly dead,
and that the magnetic declination, especially in trap rock regions, is so variable that for geo-
graphical measutements it is necessary to determine it for every bearing, for it changes with
every setting up of the compass. Thus a small movement, only some few feet, effected on
the Shades Islands a change of 5^ in the measured declination ; indeed, at Igdiorsuit upon
Ubekjendt Island a movement from the houses up to the top of the mountain about 1,500
feet high, lying about 2,000 feet away, was sufficient to change the declination from 74.^0 to
34.^9. ... In gneiss regions the local effect is not near so strong, but while the trap gener-
ally causes greater declinations than one would expect from the geographical position, gneiss
on the contrary not unusually appears to give less declinations." It is further remarked that
normal conditions can often be found only upon the ice.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
-gsp nam pndopv
oop«i 0j Dotiaujo^
t i
P
s Iff x'i.ziss^zsiiiss s
7 f ^ ;
r ill
1 1
S 3 3 S S .
I
II HI
V ft i - % » i t i •_
e;; a 3 : s
: 1 1 J t * II II I J II j I
s J s
iiiJiiilllinj:
-11
.11
■I
is
82
G, R. Putnam.
TABLE C.« Summary of Results of Magnetic Dip Observations.
Station.
Date.
1896.
Epoch.
Local mean time.
Magicbtic Dip.
Needle No. 1.
Needle No. a.
Mean of two
needles.
Difference.
Na i-No. 3.
I. Halifax
a. Sydney. (Sta. 1896.)
Sydney. (Sta. 1896.)
Sydney. (Sta. 1896.)
3. Turnavik .
4. Aahe Inlet.
5. Godhavn .
7. Umanak
Umanak
Umanak
Umanak
5. Godhavn .
10. Niantilik .
11. Sydney. (Sta. 1881.)
July 6
. uly II
July 13
Mean.
July ao
July 26
Aug. s
Aug. 14
Aug. IS
Aug. 18
Mean.
Sept 1 1
Sept. 18
Sept. 86
h. m.
5 36 P.M.
II 50 A.M.
II 16 A.M.
II
la
5
6
II
9
19 A.M.
09 P.M.
14 A.M.
54 P.M.
16 A.M.
36 A.M.
4 34 P.M.
10 43 A.M.
4 5a P.M.
73
74
74
53.3 N.
40.8
37.a
74 39.0
79 3*. 9
83 54.0
81 47.3
83 03.3
83 04.0
81 55.6
83 00.9
81 40.3
83 55-0
74 35-8
73
74
74
s
81
83
83
81
81
83
74
54.9 N.
40.0
36.4
74 38.a
38.8
59.6
46.5
01.7
00.5
55-9
81 59.4
41.0
54.5
38.3
73 54.0 N
74 40.4
74 36.8
74 38.6
79
83
81
8a
83
81
30.8
56.8
46.8
03.4
03.3
55.8
83 00.1
81 40.6
83 54-8
74 37.0
—1.7
.8
.8
fei
+4.t
+3.5
—0.8
— a.4
TABLE D. — Summary of Results op Horizontal Force Observations.
Station.
Date, 1896.
Epoch.
(Local mean time.)
Horizontal mi^netic
force H.
Magnetic moment of
magnet 19L.
m at I60.7 €••
I. Halifax
Halifax
Halifax. (Means.) .
3. Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney. (Means.)
3. TumaTik
Turnavik
Tunmvik. (Means.) .
4. Ashe Inlet t . . . .
5. Godhavn
Godhavn
Godhavn. (Means.) .
7. Umanak
Umanak
Umanak
Umanak
Umanak
Umanak ...*..
Umanak
Umanak
Umaoak (Means.)
5. Godhavn
10. Niantilik
Niantilik
NUntilik. (Means.) .
i
uly 6
uly 6
July II
July II
July 13
July 13
July 30
July 30
July 36
Aug. 3
Aug. 3
Aug. 14
Aug. 14
Aug. 15
Aug. 15
Aug. 15
Aug. 18
Aug. 18
Aug. 18
Sept II
Sept. 18
Sept 18
h. m.
4 34 P.M.
4 30 P.M.
10
II
9
9
10
6
7
7
10 35 A.M.
10 33 A.M.
9 48 A.M.
10 08 A.M.
10 44 A.M.
11 48 A.M.
II 34 A.M.
3 58 A.M.
3 31 A.M.
33 A.M.
18 A.M.
17 A.M.
33 A.M.
14 A.M.
35 P-M-
13 PM.
36 P.M.
3 15 PM-
6 47 A.M.
3 57 P.M.
Dyne.
0.163 1
o'633
a 1633
0.1548
0.1546
0.1548
0.1548
0.1547
0.1074
0.1074
0.1074
0.0637 1
0.0819 1
0.0819
0.0819
0.0782
0.0783 X
0.0783 i
0.0779
0.0785
0.0793
0.0791 X
0.0790
0.0786
0.0825
ao653
0.0668
0.0660
418.5
418. 1
418.3
416.3
416.5
416.6
4'6.4
416.4
413.6
4»37
4»3.6
413.1
4ia-3
411.7
410.0
411-9
410.5
411-5
4H.I
411.5
413.6
41a I
*The magnetic moment of this magnet as determined in December, 1893, soon after the completion of the
instrument, and before iu use in the field, was 491.3 at 16. ^^7 C.
t Only a portion of a set of oscillations was obtained at this station.
X In the observations marked thus, the south end of the magnet was weighted with a small balandog ring.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
83
as
o
>
M
CO
o
c
•<
O
O
s
CO
I
M
•J
PC
<:
•y 'Mao| i»jox
*>/ 'aoio] inaoziioif
•e*d!a
'ootnniipap
-iioiiva!p»ci
-iasqo tXep |o 'o^
V
I
O
* * i S
£: J I §:
o o
*8
"% 2
2
8
^ 00 00 00
9 s ^
^ o
o « o
• • ■
r« 00
m *A
^ •*» w
00 00 00
^ N
s -8
0 o
■ • • ■ ■
00 M m o !>•
to •• * 0 tn
>6 «0 O w
O 'T
to 00
•n 00
m to
* o
M n
>n
CO « ♦ ••
M «
M M m
<
00 ^
8
S. ^ ^ "S. ±» ►•
w »-»»-» to »-, i-»
M n *■ M
M M H W M
« -
JO }s»M 9piU]8aoq
'ipioa '9piut)vq
I
iS
CO
00 eo 00 M M o^
O O O vo t<» M
^ t/t ir> (A «n in
t^ <5
s g. a
00 o
• •
>8 ^
O m '^ tO «• w)
• ■•••■
O Q O ▼ * w
m
O
8.
'O o «^
O lA *
lA
O ^ wi
:t *S "S
I
•I I
s «
c o
J* M
I S
s s
d^ 00
•c
w J
I!
M "
!<» «
0
s
o
CO
a
<«
s a
"§ I
en
S •§
•s C
I §
lA
o ♦
s 1^
a 0
o o
*C '.CS
CO CO
a o ft
o o -n
«i s 8
PQ » ^'^
(3 3 :z
5* *» ^
O 0 ss
CO CO X
•" « ••
84
G. R. Putnam.
Section 8, Comparison witk Earlier Magnetic Observations. —
In Table F is given a collection of former magnetic observations made
at or in the vicinity of these stations,* For many of these points it
is probable that this data is quite incomplete, for results of this nature
are published in a wide range of local literature often difBciilt of ac-
cess. With the exception of Halifax and Godhavn the observations
are scarcely complete enough, nor do they cover a sufficiently long
interval of time to give satisfactory analytical expressions for the secu-
lar variation of the declination and dip. For most of the stations,
however, the data is sufficient to clearly indicate the present tendency
in the change of the magnetic elements. It appears that at all these
points (omitting Niantilik, for which no earlier information was found)
' Tfae writer is indebted to Dr. L. A. Bauer, editor of " Tsrrestrial Magnetisui," for iii>
lonDation in regard lo some eulier observation!.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations, 85
the westerly declination is diminishing, the northerly dip is diminish-
ing, the horizontal force is increasing, and the total force is decreasing.
Analytical expressions for the change of declination and dip for
Godhavn and Halifax ^ were derived from the results given in Table F,
after applying an estimated correction to the observations at Whale-
fish Islands to refer them to Godhavn. With these formulas the dec-
lination and dip were computed for each tenth year, and the curves
shown in Figure iiB plotted, representing the motion of the north
end of a freely suspended needle (half length 61 cm. or 24 inches) as
viewed by an eye at the center of the needle. This method of repre-
sentation shows the movements in declination and dip in their proper
relation. For both these stations the motion of the needle is in a
clockwise direction, thus agreeing with the general law deduced by
Dr. L. A. Bauer.^
' Mr. Schott has derived the following expression (which was used) for the change of the
magnetic declination at Halifax : Z>= -f i6°.i8 + 4°* 53 sin (i^'.o m + 46**.!) where D is the
declination at a desired time, t expressed in years and fractions of a year (-}- for westerly dec-
lination), and f» s=/ — 1850.0 (Report U. S. C. and G. Survey for 1888, App. No. 7, p. 224).
For 1896-7 this formula gives D = 20® 42' W., differing only 3' from the observed value.
'"Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Wesens der Sacular- Variation des Erdmagnetismus,"
Berlin, 1895; also "On the secular motion of a free magnetic needle," Physical Review,
Vol. IJ, No. 12, Vol. Ill, No. 13.
G. R. Putnam.
ill
■3 '1:1
ii if I
!| I
\i i
d. -si
m
J II
j|:r
I I if I If
li
1
11
\ !
; :
si
: 8
■ <3
- a =
..1 .^
■liiili 6 II
I : i i i : ■ ; E I II \\
^ SffJS.S-i.
3 I '
-I'-
ll
JJ
_ § a _
II
litllill I u I III
ill
LIS, Genbral View.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
87
a
I
t
u
u
O
«Q
2
O
^*
H
-<
H
CO
i
o
OB
as
o
<
>
H
CO
A
o
o
<
Ob
o
z
o
i
•J
o
u
I
t
6
e
li
O"
3
1
o
fl 9
t S
H H
^ ^
0< 0.
••■ ^-
J? <3
Q. Q.
t
^ Z
d
II*
s
1 •& ;
M
e 0 «
^
-• — w^
f
•• « ■"
ft 0 ?
CO
^ »^ eo
■0
III
s
M
s
'0^9
0
ci
CO
2
•
«
•*
Otf
(W 0, Otf
<
ld<ii
>0«
1
I
CO
88
m a
b «« W
«> 9 a
o
o
?
^
•A
CI M O
Qdd
I??
Odd
as
^ «o -
* mm
I
3
8-
«
^w *
dd •
o
I
9
M M
dd
?
o o^r«>
In 1^ h»
^15 g
%%
n
00 d
S
8.
a
•o
CO
n
« f»»m
n M «
lilfl
'8111
atScoco
I
■s
•• • «•••••• <B •#■ • • • •mM^^QQ
• • ••■••■• ^ •Da* **^0 ^^00
• • ••••••• I/I ■ ^ ( • t ■ M^ I/) I/)
'd d'-'dddd
• • • ■ • ■ *
• • • ••■••••00 ••••••OOkAM
• • • ••••••■ ^ ••••••t^in too
d d d d
moo tn IN 00 0« 0> ^
* ^ * «*»
hs r<k t« tN
O iAOOO>0 o
•A «o m M mm
m M f« N fo^e fN »s IN
. . O •• •A'O in m
J ; m Mwio m*
a «
'0000 »M M o
o
N
S o
>
o
<S d
MM
n mocT M •>
x^O 04 r« '<''>0 ^O* ^ o d d >d tftco 00* m" m -; rCoo tC. A N Oso ^ (?: .To
— fl
M fl
•• «
m ^ tn«o is«0 O^ o •« n «^ ^ v\<c tN«o o^ O *« n
MMMHMHMMMMNNN
88 G. R, Putnam.
Part III. Pendulum Observations.
Section 9. Instruments for the Measurement of the Relative
Force of Gravity, — The apparatus belonging to the Coast and Geo-
detic Survey used for this purpose, was nearly the same as was em-
ployed in recent work in the United States, and more particularly in
the trans-continental series of observations in 1894. It comprised
the following :
Meridian Telescope No. 13 (Figure 12), aperture 5.1 cm.; focal
length, 65.8 cm. ; magnifying power, 46. This is a very portable com-
bination instrument with folding frame, and is suitable for either time
altitude or azimuth observations.
Chronometers Nos. 1,823 (sidereal), 1,842 (mean time), and 177
(mean time). All were provided with electrical break-circuit attach-
ments, for use with the pendulum flash apparatus ; also with con-
densers to prevent sparking.
Pendulum apparatus "-^" (Figures 13 to 22) comprising three in-
variable half-second pendulums -^4, A^, and A6y one dummy or tem-
perature pendulum, an air-tight brass case, thermometers, manometer,
air pump, flash apparatus, dry cells, and weight, pulley and microscope
for measuring flexure. There was also a small astronomical observing
tent in which the meridian telescope was mounted. At one point a
small circular tent was used for the pendulum apparatus.
The essential requisite in pendulum observations for the measure-
ment of the relative force of gravity, is the determination of the
period of oscillation as precisely as may be, and also of all the vari-
able conditions that affect that period. Because these conditions can
thus be controlled very much better, this apparatus includes an air-
tight case in which the pendulums are swung. The pendulums are
made of an alloy of copper and aluminum, weighing approximately
1,200 grams each, and having a length of about 248 mm. from center
of bob to point of suspension (the three in the set are intentionally
slightly different in length). Their shape is such as to give them
strength, and small resistance to the air in oscillating. They have
an agate plane set in the head which rests on the agate knife-edge on
which they are swung. This so-called knife-edge is formed by care-
fully ground planes meeting at an angle of 1 30°, thus insuring greater
permanency than could be expected with a sharper edge. The knife-
edge is set in a solid metal plate {jn Figure 15) which is secured to
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
89
the shelf n in the pendulum case. As a check in case of injury there
are two such knife-edges with this apparatus, marked / and //, each in
its own plate, either of which may be set in the case. Pendulum A4
was always swung on knife-edge //, and A^ and A6 on knife-edge /,
the advantage in using several distinct knife-edges as well as distinct
pendulums being that by the relation between the independent results
thus obtained, a continual check on the constancy of the instruments
is furnished. The pendulum may be lowered on to the knife-edge or
lifted from it without opening the case, by means of the screw q which
presses against the arm 0. This arm is rigidly attached to the frame
/ which carries two points on its extremity which lift the pendulum off
the edge, fitting into corresponding sockets in its head. The pen-
dulum is set in oscillation or brought to rest by the arm r, which is
controlled by a lever arm on the outside of the case. There is a scale
below the pendulum, and a telescope (not shown) mounted on the side
of the case for reading the arc of oscillation. The case is supported
by three large foot screws resting on heavy foot plates which are to
be cemented to the foundation. The case is leveled in the plane of
oscillation by the pendulum itself as shown by the reading of the tip
of the pendulum on the scale beneath. In the transverse plane it is
90 G, R, Putnam,
leveled by a small level mounted in a short pendulum (Figure 20)»
which may be reversed on the knife-edge. On the opposite side of
the case and parallel with the swinging pendulum, there is hung a
<* dummy '* or temperature pendulum (Figure i8), so held that it can-
not oscillate. This dummy is of the same material, mass, and general
shape as the pendulums, and has mounted on its stem a thermometer
whose bulb is buried in the stem near the bob, being packed with
metal filings to bring it into close contact, the endeavor being in this
way to obtain as near as possible the actual temperature of the swing-
ing pendulum. Near the dummy is also placed a free thermometer
and a mercury manometer which shows pressures from lo cm. down.
The case is provided with windows on three sides for observing pur-
poses, and with a removable cover which forms an air-tight joint, with
a little oil and tallow rubbed on the carefully ground contact surfaces.
The air is exhausted through stop cocks on the side of the case. With
the new portable air pump, weighing only about 6 pounds (2.7 kilo-
grams), the pressure in this case may be reduced to the standard
(about 6 cm.) in two or three minutes.
The flash apparatus (shown in Figures 13 and 14) is used in observ-
ing coincidences between the pendulum and a break-circuit chronom-
eter, from which coincidences the time of oscillation is obtained in
terms of the chronometer. The break-circuit chronometer has attach-
ments so that it can be included in an electrical circuit, and is pro-
vided with mechanism that will break that circuit at the end of each
second (or sometimes each even second). The chronometer is made
to throw a flash of light every second by means of the electro-magnet
a^ the armature ^/, and the two shutters carried by the end of this
armature and shown in the enlarged sections (Figures 16, 17). When
the circuit is broken, the spring h causes the armature d to rise, and
for an instant the slits in the shutters / and v are in line with the
slit in the front of the box z (as in Figure 16), and a flash of light is
thrown, this light being reflected by the mirror b from a lamp mounted
on the side of the box ; when the circuit is closed the shutters in de-
scending so interfere as to cut off the light (as shown in Figure 1 7)
so that the slit is only illuminated for a brief instant at each break of
the circuit. The flash apparatus carries above it a telescope e, and is
mounted at a convenient distance from the pendulum case in such
position that the illuminated slit may be seen in the telescope as re-
flected from a mirror which is carried on the head of the pendulum,
Figs. iS-22.
Fig. 18. Dummy or Temperature Pendulum with Thermometer.
Fig. 19. Pendulum and Knife-edge Plate, showing mode of suspension.
Fig. 20. Leveling Pendulum.
Half-second Pendulum, side view.
Half-second Pendulum, front view.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations, 91
and which is seen through the window / in the front of the case.
There is also a fixed mirror g attached to the knife-edge plate, but
adjustable in position. This is so adjusted that the image of the slit
as seen in the telescope, reflected from the fixed mirror, shall be in
the same horizontal line and slightly overlapping that reflected from
the pendulum mirror when the pendulum is hanging freely at rest.
When the pendulum is swinging, the image as reflected from the pen-
dulum mirror will change its position relatively to that of the fixed
mirror as seen in the field of the telescope, because of the fact that
the pendulum makes a double oscillation in a little more than a side-
real second, and hence will be found slightly behind its former position
at the end of each second when the flash is thrown. The moving im-
age will, therefore, appear to travel up and down across the field of the
telescope by successive jumps, and coincidences are observed by noting
the time when the two images are in the same horizontal line. It is
evident that in the interval between two occurrences of this phenom-
enon the pendulum has made one less than twice as many oscillations
as the chronometer has beat seconds, and that in an interval of time
between the first and last of a number of coincidences, the number of
oscillations of the pendulum will be twice the number of seconds (s)
less the number of coincidence intervals (if), so that the time of a
single oscillation is readily derived from the relation P = — The
elegance of the coincidence method lies in the fact that a small error
in noting the time of coincidence has little effect on P, At the
northern stations the period of the pendulums was so shortened be-
cause of the increased force of gravity, that it closely approached the
sidereal half second, so that the coincidence intervals would have been
inconveniently long. Mean time chronometers were therefore used at
these points. The pendulums are faster than the mean time half sec-
ond, and therefore gain one oscillation in a coincidence interval, and
s
the formula for the period becomes P = - — : —
^ 2s '\' n
Section 10. Methods of Observation with Pendulum Appara-
tus, — The plan proposed to be followed in this work was the same as
that used before, to begin the swings of the pendulum immediately
after star observations for time were obtained, and to end them after
star observations forty-eight hours later, or in case these failed, to
continue until time observations were obtained. This plan permit-
92 G. R. Putnam,
ted of the making of six swings each eight hours in length, each of
the three pendulums being swung in reversed and direct positions.
Unfavorable weather and other conditions, of course, modified this
plan ; thus at Umanak and at Washington in June the swings were
continued for four days because the time observations were lost on
intermediate nights, and at Ashe Inlet and Niantilik but three swings
covering a single day were made, and no complete time observations
were obtained. An example of the observations and computations for
a single swing is given in Section 24. The pendulums were swung
under as nearly uniform conditions as possible at the various stations.
The pressure in the case was reduced to about 60 mm., the total arc
of oscillation to commence with was about 53', falling off to about 20'
at the end of the swing, and the apparatus was mounted on stable
foundations, and when practicable in places where the variations of
temperature would be small. In general, two chronometers were used,
coincidences being noted alternately with each by means of a suitable
switch arrangement. Only sufficient coincidences were observed at
the beginning and end of the swing, so that the total number which
had occurred might be correctly estimated. Intermediate coincidence
and temperature observations were made when the variations in condi-
tions were large. Since with the small arcs used the movement of the
image from second to second is slow, the times of contact and separa-
tion between the moving and fixed images were noted, and the mean
taken for the time of coincidence. To eliminate possible errors of
adjustment, coincidences were observed with the image moving in
opposite directions, "up" and "down," and all results are based on
a combination of these. The flexibility of the support was measured
statically by noting with an independently supported microscope the
movement of a scale mounted above the knife-edge when a horizontal
force of 1.5 kilograms was applied in the plane of oscillation of the
pendulum. This force was applied by having a weight suspended by
a cord running over a pulley, the other end of the cord being attached
immediately behind the knife-edge. The movement of the scale in
microns was noted when the weight was alternately applied and re-
lieved. The following table gives the support for the pendulum case
and the flexure at the various stations, the values for Ashe Inlet and
Niantilik being estimated by comparisons with similar conditions else-
where. The flexure in all cases was quite small, due to the low and
solid supports.
J
Magnetic and Pendtilum Observations, 93
Flexure
Station. Support. microns.
Washington, D. C Massive brick pier with capstone 1.0
Sydney, Cape Breton . . . Low brick and cement pier against foundation wall . 1 5
Ashe Inlet, Hudson Strgit . Bed rock [1.0]
Umanak, Greenland .... Low brick and cement pier on stone floor 20
Niantilik, Cumberland Sound, Bed rock [1.0]
Section ii. Time Observations and Chronometer Rates, — The
chronometer corrections were determined by star observations with an
astronomical transit instrument set in the meridian, the transits across
the meridian of about eight stars each evening being observed, half in
each position of the instrument. An example of one night's time
observations and the computation is given in Section 23. At Wash-
ington a large longitude transit was used and the observations recorded
on a chronograph. At the northern stations a smaller meridian tele-
scope was employed, and the observations made by the eye and ear
method, that is, the beats of the chronometer were noted by ear while
the eye followed the movement of the star across the lines of the
telescope. The latter instrument was set in the meridian by use of
a table giving the azimuth and altitude of Polaris for any hour angle.^
By setting the telescope at the given altitude and moving it slowly
near the supposed position, Polaris could be readily found, even before
sunset, and then the angle of its azimuth set off on the horizontal arc
provided for that purpose. Of course only one chronometer was used
in the time observations, and the comparisons with the others were
obtained by noting by ear the coincidences of beats between mean
time and sidereal chronometers. This is an accurate and convenient
method, such coincidences coming at intervals of a little over th!ree
minutes, because of the gain of sidereal on mean time.
As already mentioned, the time observations at Ashe Inlet and
Niantilik failed because of unfavorable weather and the limited length
of stay. The adopted rates at these points were obtained by combin-
ing the rates at the preceding and following stations and the traveling
rate, giving equal weight to the chronometers. In each case it is esti-
mated that the adopted rate is uncertain by at least a second of time,
which would correspond to an uncertainty of about -^■^\-^ in g (or .025
dyne or cm.). As the temperatures at Ashe Inlet and Niantilik were
lower than the average, and chronometers usually run slower at low
temperatures, it is probable that these adopted rates are too fast, and
' See Appendix 10, Report U. S. C. and G. Survey for 1895.
94 G. R. Putnam.
that consequently the periods of the pendulums are too small, and the
resulting force of gravity too large for these two stations.
The rate at Ashe Inlet was derived as follows :
CnronoiDdtefite
1823 S. T 1842 M. T. 177 M. T.
S S Sa
Rate at Sydney, July 10-12 -|-1.62 — a24
Traveling rate July 16-October 3 (omitting Umanak), -f-2.51 +2.17 +3.70
Rate at Umanak,. August 7-August 20 +2.29 +1.43 +4^2
Means +2.14 +1.12 +4.26
Rates of mean time chronometers, derived from above
average rate of 1823, and comparisons before and
after pendulum observations +0.80 +4.20
Adopted rates (weighted mean giving half weight to
latter values, so as to give equal effect to all three
chronometers) +1.01 +4.24
The rate at Niantilik was derived as follows :
1833 S. T. 1842 M. T.
8. S.
Rate at Umanak, August 7-20 +2.29 +1.43
Traveling rate, July 16-October 3 (omitting Umanak), +2.51 +2.17
Rate at Washington, October 6-15 +1.91 +1.59
Means +2.24 +1.73
Rate of 1842 derived from above average rate of 1823 and com-
parisons before and after pendulum observations +(X82
Mean, adopted rate +1.28
Table G gives a summary of the rates of the chronometers which
were used directly in the pendulum observations at the different sta-
tions. In some cases two chronometers were employed, and in others
only one. At Sydney one mean time and one sidereal chronometer
were used, and at the other three northern stations mean time chro-
nometers exclusively were used in the pendulum observations directly.
This became necessary because the increase in the force of gravity so
diminished the period of the pendulums that it approached closely to
the sidereal half second, and the coincidence intervals with a sidereal
chronometer would have become inconveniently long, but the pendu-
lums were enough faster than a mean time chronometer to give con^
venient coincidence intervals with it. The rates are all referred to
sidereal time by adding +236.555 to the mean time rate, as expressed
in mean time seconds on mean time, after reducing the latter to side-
real seconds by adding the necessary small correction from Table III
of the American Ephemeris,
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
95
TABT,K G.
— Summary op Chronometkr Rates
Daily Rats on Mean
TiMB.
Daily Ratb on Sidbsbal Timb.
Station.
m
(H- losing —gaining.)
(+ losing — gaining. )
ChroaoiBcter number
•
Chraoometer number.
1842
177
1842
^77
1824
1823
1829
Washmiiou
1896.
Jnne aa-June 26
s.
• • • •
■ • • •
8.
• ■ ■ •
s.
« • • ■
8.
• • • •
+••9$
STdaey ....
July 10- July II
—0.29
• • • •
+236.26
• « • •
+1
59
Sydney ....
July 11- July 12
—0.18
* ■ « •
-N36.37
• • ■ ■
+1
.66
Aibe Inlet . . .
July as-July 26
H-i.oi
+4. 14
+•37.57
+240.81
> •
Umanak . . .
Aug. 8-Aug. II
+i.4«
+4.8X
+a38.<H
+•41.38
• • 4
•
Uoianak . . .
Ang. ii-Aug. 12
-h».53
+4.88
+a38.o9
+•41.45
• •
•
Nlaatfllk . . .
Sept. 17-Sept. 18
-fi.aS
• « • •
+•37.84
• • • •
• •
i «
WiiIuiikIob
Oct. 15-Oct. 16
* • ■ «
■ ■ • •
* ■ • •
« « • •
+0.82
+ «
•74
Waahington . .
Oct. 16-Oct. 17
■ • ■ •
■ • • •
• • • •
• • • •
+0.67
+1
.60
Section 12. Reduction of Pendulum Observations, — The total
number of seconds between the first and last coincidences in the
swing is divided by the approximate number of seconds in a coinci-
dence interval as given by the first and last coincidences observed.
Then reversing the process, the total number of seconds {s) is divided
by the total number of coincidence intervals, to obtain the average
number of seconds in one interval. The uncorrected period {P) is
then obtained from the relations P =
or P =
ac-
2S — I 2S + I
cording as the pendulum is slower or faster than the half seconds of
the chronometer, or according as a sidereal or mean time chronometer
IS used. So as to make them comparable at different stations, the
observed periods of the pendulums are next reduced to what they
would have been under certain standard conditions. These conditions,
which are arbitrarily adopted for convenience, are : arc infinitely small,
temperature 1 5° C, pressure 60 mm. of mercury at 0° C, true side-
real time and inflexible support. The corrections to the observed
period in seconds are as follows :
PM sin (<l> + <t>') sin (6 — A')
Arc correction = -— , ^^. J^ , ^\ .; S where P i
32 log sm <p — log sm <f>'
period, M is modulus of common logarithmic system, if> and 0' are
initial and final semi-arcs. This is a formula based on theoretical con-
is
96 G, R. Putnam,
ditions and on the supposition that the arc of oscillation diminishes in
geometrical ratio as the time increases in arithmetical ratio. Actual
experiment has proved that the dimunition of arc follows this law at
least very closely.
Temperature correction = + o.cxxxx)837 -P (15° — 7^°), where P
is the period and T the temperature in degrees centigrade. This
coefficient was determined experimentally at Washington by swinging
the pendulum at different temperatures. The errors of the thermom-
eter used were carefully determined and corrections applied. Where
more than two readings were made during a swing, they were weighted
according to the intervening intervals.
Pressure correction = + 0.000000 10 1 I 60 — — -jr ^ y,o l>
where Pr is observed pressure in millimeters, and T^ is temperature
in degrees centigrade. This coefficient also was determined experi-
Pr
mentally. The expression — -— -~ is simply a reduction of
I + .00367 T
the air pressure to a temperature of 0° centigrade.
Rate correction = + o.ooooi 1574 R P, where P is period and R
is daily rate on sidereal time in seconds (+ if losing, — if gaining).
The coefficient is simply the relation of one second to the number of
seconds in a day, or -ff^^THF-
Flexure correction = — 0.00000065 D, where D is the observed
displacement of the knife-edge in microns when force of 1.5 kilo-
grammes is applied horizontally in the plane of oscillation. This
coefficient also was determined experimentally by swinging the pen-
dulums at Washington on supports of different degrees of flexibility.
On a very flexible support the simultaneous movement of the heavy
metal case was quite plain in the microscope, even when the pendulum
was swinging in a small arc.
The periods, having been thus corrected, were next compared to
deduce the relation of the force of gravity at the stations. The theo-
retical length of these pendulums is unknown, and it cannot be com-
puted or measured with any satisfactory degree of accuracy for pendu-
lums of such form. The pendulums were considered to be of the
same length, however, at all stations, after applying the corrections
above, and to prove their invariability they were swung at the base
station at the Coast and Geodetic Survey Office in Washington, before
and after this expedition. From the simple law of the pendulum we
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations. 97
have for Washington P^ = tt -y — , and for any other station
P^ z=z IT \ — , where P is the period, / the length of the corre-
sponding simple pendulum, and g the force of gravity. Squaring and
PJi
dividing we have g^ = -^^ g^. For g„ at Washington the value
980.098 dynes per gramme, force of gravity (=980.098 centimeters
acceleration of gravity, or 32.1554 feet in English measure) has been
provisionally adopted. This is based on several absolute determina-
tions, which, however, do not give very accordant results. In fact,
relative measurements of gravity can be made with much greater
facility and accuracy than absolute determinations, and it is fortunate,
therefore, that the uncertainties in the latter have no effect on the value
of relative measurements in connection with the question of the figure
of the earth, or the condition of the earth's crust. To obtain the cor-
responding value of g at any other station, it is only necessary to
multiply this value of g„ by the ratio of the square of the period at
Washington {PJ^) to the square of the period at the other station {P^)*
This was done, using the results with each pendulum separately and
with the mean of the three pendulums, and taking for Washington
the mean of the periods determined before and after the expedition.
Section 13. Results of Pendulum Observations. — In Table H
are given the details of the observations and reductions. For each
swing the average number of seconds in one coincidence interval is
given, the average temperature corrected for thermometer errors, the
pressure reduced to 0° C, the uncorrected period and the various cor-
rections depending on the correction formulas already given. The
final corrected periods are those reduced to the standard conditions,,
as already explained. In Table I are collected the mean corrected
periods for each pendulum and station, and the difference of each pen-
dulum from the mean. These differences are a check on the observa-
tions and on the constancy of the pendulums, as theoretically they
should be almost constant. The small variations that appear are prob-
ably in large part due to diurnal irregularities in the chronometer rates.
From these mean periods gravity at the various stations was computed
PJ^
from the relation g^ = -5^ g^y gravity at Washington, Coast and
98
G, R, Putnam.
TABLE H. — PsNDULUM Observations and Rsductions.
i
•
Ok
•
1
0*
i
c
Date, 1896.
CoiNaoBNCB Intbkval.
Total Akc.
f
1
8
9
Chronomoter.
1
•
■
1
1829.
1
I
II
a
la
3
10
4
9
5
8
6
7
I
3
3
4
5
6
Washington, D. C.
A4
R
II
A4
R
II
A4
D
II
A4
D
II
As
R
As
R
As
D
As
D
A6
R
A6
R
A6
D
A6
D
June 22.
ft.
292.86
June 26.
294.67
June 23.
292. so
June 26.
»94-49
June 23.
366.29
June 2S.
369.26
June 23.
366.13
June 2S.
369.21
June 24.
587.24
June 2s<
389.63
June 24.
387.96
June 24.
389.00
Sydney, Cape Breton.
A4
R
II
A4
D
II
As
R
As
D
A6
R
A6
D
July II.
July II.
July ti.
July II.
July 12.
July 12.
Ashe Inlet, Hudson Strait
184s M. T.
372.26
37a.o6
296.20
295.09
282.95
283.62
1823 S. T.
365.65
366.12
486.06
490-75
528.52
5»5.«7
t
1
53
20
56
21
20
21
21
«9
19
21
ao
20
21
«9
53
ao
55
22
52
20
Sa
20
52
20
5*
«9
OC.
22.63
mm
58
31.41
61
22.65
60
21.38
58
22.78
61
21.55
58
22.53
60
21.75
59
22.33
61
21.83
59
22.18
57
21.98
60
17.81
60
17-75
60
17.90
6j
»7.S7
62
17.50
6a
18.10
58
I
A4
R
II
July 25.
339.49
326.45
53
»9
4-7«
60
2
As
R
I
July a6.
198.49
»95-57
53
19
4.87
69
3
A6
R
I
July 26.
192.30
189.93
53
>9
4.75
62
I
II
3
13
3
10
4
9
5
S
6
7
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
TABLE H. — PsiTDirLUM Observations and Rxductions. — Continuid.
99
•
1
Pbuod UNCOKKBcnin.
CoRKBcnons. (rth dfldmal place.)
Pbriod CoRRBcncn.
6
s
c
ChraixMneter.
<
V
1
Rate.
Flexure.
Chronometer.
1
09
1S39.
1899.
1839.
Mean.
Waahingtoii, D. C.
a.
.5008551
8498
8568
8504
6834
6779
6836
6780
6464
6424
645a
6435
-8
— jao
—9
— a68
^9
—331
-9
-.67
—8
— 3»6
—9
— a74
—8
— 316
— «
-.83
—8
—307
—8
— a86
—8
— 301
—8
— J9a
-H
+«7i
— I
-f-«7-
0
+'7«
H-a
+'7«
— I
+i7«
+a
H-«7«
0
+171
+«
+«7i
— I
+«7«
+«
+171
+3
+«7«
0
-f«7«
« • • ■
184a.
•4993393
3290
1574
>543
1181
X30I
Sydney, Cape Breton.
1833.
.5006846
6S38
5149
5099
4735
4765
Atbe Inlet, Hadaon Strait.
.4989139
.4988984
—8
+430
7436
7«49
—8
+423
7933
' 6871
—8
+4«8
+«37«9
+»37«5
+«37>4
+13906
+13902
+1390*
—6
.5008390
s.
* • • ■
-6
8385
-6
8397
-6
8395
—6
6664
-«
6663
—6
6677
—6
6655
-6
6313
—6
6396
-6
6311
—6
6300
.5007121
—8
-II7*
0
1842.
+13654
1833.
+92
—9
—115
0
+'3654
+92
—8
— 121
—3
+'3649
+92
—8
— 107*
— 2
+13656
+96
-8
— 104*
-2
+y655
+96
-«
-I29»
+2
+»365S
+96
10
1842.
.5006812
1823.
.5006802
.5006807
10
6810
6796
6803
10
5081
S099
5090
10
5071
5067
5069
10
47"
4706
4708
10
47"
47'5
47«3
.5005533
•5005531
•5005532
.5003262
»55«
"59
.500x991
.5003304
»55«
1184
.50020x2
.5003283
«55«
"f2
.500200a
*T1ila conecikm to be increased by one unit (7tli dednud place) for chronometer 1,823.
ICX)
G, R. Putnam.
TABLE H.— Pendulum Observations and 'Rxxmcnov^, ^ Continued,
I
I
•
1
•
0<
1
Date, 1896.
CoiNaoBNCB Intbsval.
Quononeter.
1843 M. T.
177 M. T.
Total Abc
9
I!
&
a
H
I
7
a
8
3
9
4
10
5
II
6
la
I
a
3
Umanak, Greenland.
A4
R
II
A4
R
II
A4
D
II
A4
D
II
As
R
As
R
As
D
As
D
A6
R
A6
R
A6
D
A6
D
Aug. 9.
a.
309.36
Aug. II.
309.48
Aug. 9.
aii.47
Aug. II.
aio.ss
Aug. 9.
18s. 13
Aug. II.
184.77
Aug. 10.
184.49
Aug. la.
183.76
Aug. la
«78S4
Aug. la.
178.49
Aug. 10.
178.40
Aug. la.
178.8s
%.
ao7.07
ao6.i9
307.99
306.49
183.58
181.58
i8i.8s
180.78
176.16
176.39
176.18
176.77
#
#
»c.
53
«9
laSs
53
31
lais
S3
"7
II. 71
53
19
10.73
53
ao
13.41
53
aa
11.73
5>
19
11.66
5»
ao
10.86
5a
«9
10.70
53
«9
10.87
55
a3
«o-57
S3
31
ii.6a
Niandlik Harbor, Cumberland Sound.
A4
R
II
As
R
I
A6
R
I
Sept. 17.
Sept 18.
Sept 18.
ai8.6i
189.09
18S.33
53
31
3.01
53
30
1.33
5«
3»
3.S8
Waihington, D. C.
61
64
6a
59
6a
60
66
57
66
63
S8
56
63
64
6s
A4
R
II
•
Oct 15.
1833 S. T.
399.65
1834 S.T.
397.69
53
31
16.41
60
A4
D
II
Oct. 16.
398.89
397.06
53
31
16.63
59
As
R
Oct. 16.
375-33
373.48
53
«9
16.93
58
As
D
Oct 16.
376.11
37^95
53
30
16.97
60
A6
R
Oct. 17.
396.87
393.84
5«
«9
17.03
60
6
A6
D
Oct 17.
396.03
393.63
53
"7
17.IS
60
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
lOI
TABLE H. — Pendulum Observations and Reductions. — Concluded,
I
3
3
Jl
PuiOD Unookrbctbd.
CoRRBcnoNS. (7th decimal place.)
Pbsiod Corrbctbd.
1
Qironometer.
<
1
Ratb.
1
Chronometer.
1
184a.
«77-
1843.
177.
184a
177.
Mean.
Unaoak, Greenland.
8.
.4988087
s.
•4987957
«094
7904
8ao6
81SS
793a
6ssa
6345
6506
6970
6485
6390
10
6433
6309
6q37
5849
XI
6oj3
5859
6
6096
5850
13
6a6x
S897
-«
+174
— 1
+'3743
-8
+ao3
—4
+13743
—7
+137
-a
+'3743
—8
+«79
+1
+13743
-8
+X08
-a
+13738
—9
+«36
0
+«3738
—8
+»39
-6
+13738
-8
+>73
-hj
+i374«
-8
+180
-6
+I3737
-«
+174
— 3
+»374o
—9
+185
+a
+«3737
•^
+«4i
+4
+13740
+13936
+13936
+13936
+13936
+1393 «
+1393 «
+1393 »
+«3935
+«3930
+13934
+13930
+13934
a.
.5001983
a.
.5003045
a.
.5003014
3015
3018
3016
3064
3060
ao63
3057
3017
3037
0355
0361
0358
0358
0315
0336
0335
0333
0334
0338
0399
0314
.49999»7
.499993a
.4999930
9934
9944
9934
9938
9945
9936
9925
9955
9940
.5000766
.5000769
.5000768
NiantOik Harbor, Cnmberland Sound.
.49S8590
68x3
65#7
— 8
+54*
—3
+'3734
• • • «
—6
.5003849
• • 0 •
— 11
+575
—4
+»37a9
■ • • •
—6
1096
• ■ ■ •
— XX
+518
"*
+«37a8
• • ■ ■
—6
0774
• ■ 0 •
• ■ ■ ■
.5001573
WaaUngton, D. C.
XS33.
.5008357
1834.
.500841a
— 8
—59
0
1823.
+101
8378
8430
— 8
—68
+"
+10X
6670
6731
— 8
—81
+a
-f-ioi
6656
6713
— 8
-83
0
+ 93
6307
6356
— 8
-«5
0
+ 93
<^X
6376
— 11
—90
0
+ 93
1824.
+48
—6
1833.
.5008385
1834-
.5008387
.5008386
+48
-6
8398
8397
8398
+48
—6
6678
6676
6677
+39
—6
6653
6654
6653
+39
—6
6301
6396
6398
+39
—6
6307
6308
6308
.5007130
.5007130
.5007130
102
G, R, Putnam.
TABLE I. ^Summary of Corrbctbd Pb&iods.
StatiM.
Date.
Pbuoos.
<
§
•3
8
I
e
I!
>6
<
e
a
3
g 1
1^
DifferencM froin
(7th deciiiud pUoe.)
A4.
As
A6.
Wtafaington
Sydney . .
Aehe Inlet .
Umaaak
Nfaatilik .
Waahington
1896.
June aa-Jone 94.
July 1 1- July la.
July as- July «6.
Aof. 9-Aug. la.
Sept 17-Scpt 18.
Oct is-Oct. 17.
.SOo8s9>
s.
.5000005
06805
5080
03183
«55«
oaosa
0336
oa849
1096
0839a
6665
t.
.5006305
4710
117a
•499993S
•5000774
6303
8.
.5007131
05532
oaooa
00768
01573
07130
+1371
-4S6
+1373
— 45«
+1381
-HS«
+1364
-^««
+1376
^477
+1373
-^55
—816
—^3
-«|o
-8l3
—799
—817
TABLE J. — Values of g Computed from Each Pendulum.
Station.
£■ in dynes or centimetcn.
Pendulnm
A4.
Pendalom
As.
Pendulum
A6.
Mean of three
pendulunu.
Differences from
{3d decimal place.)
A4.
As.
A6.
Washington. (CandG.S.)
Sydney
Ashe Inlet
Uroanak
Miantilik
980.730
983.101
983.593
983.371
980.7x9
983.104
983.581
983.38a
980.733
983.110
983.597
983.367
[980.098]
980.730
9^.105
983.590
983.373
0
+«
+4
+'
-a
+9
+i
-^
-K
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
103
•J
<
s
o
M
^ s
u &
0<
o
g
CO
a
p
la
I-
^ w
I: u
^ o
O
O
s
CO
a
a
06
-oj^tj
•V— »^
•0/ 'p^^nd
-moo anicA iv9pai09i|j,
<<
M
CO
O H
M
* V 'ponnuo
on) iio;p«x)iY
'V 'mil
sJ9n9n
-jo| s^;
in
Ofl
<
M
?
k
o
t
D
a
•uopoujod
fvnqacilodox
DopMiny
w>HtA«ia
IMAMtqc >
p -Xtjiiisp wcjjms
•^ 'aoptAaia
|o 9ta^) -apniiSuo^
(•<nj»H) •pmnn
I
'jaqoinf^
- ? 5* ff 5*
O 5 0 ? 6
+ I + I +
<♦ 0
M M
0 0
+ r
? ? ?
+ r +
i 8
Hi
8 ff = 8 -fe
i i i i i
2 R ? 1 s
i i 4 i i
§ §
•
H n M
8 § 8
+ 44
M M
8 8
f r
§ 8 8
1" f r
? r 5
444
1 8
• ■ »
*& 4 *!
• •
« « <o
• • •
n n n
N -
y s •-
5 a 1^
- 8 =
0 j:: 5
0 M H
A N m
•n «o o>
m 0 M
a s> «
^ to CO « O «
- irt ^ w ♦ »n
0% 'i 5 g. ^
•« n
m
I
I04 G. R, Putnam,
Geodetic Survey Office {gj) being taken to be 980.098 dynes or cen-
timeters, as already explained. The results for^ computed separately
for each pendulum and station, with the mean and differences from
the mean, are given in Table J. At Ashe Inlet and Niantilik the re-
sults can only be considered as approximate because of the failure to
obtain sufficient time observations, as referred to under the head of
chronometer rates. In Table K is given a general summary of the
results, with geographical positions and elevations of stations, esti-
mated surface densities,^ reduction to sea level, and comparison with
a theoretical formula. The reduction to sea level is given by two dif-
ferent methods following the plan adopted in the last report of the
International Geodetic Association,^ first using Bouguer*s formula, and
second, omitting the attraction term in this formula. Bouguer's for-
2gH ( ih\
mula is ^ = -f- V ^ ~ Ta" r ^^^'"^ ^S ^^ ^^ correction ta
observed gravity, g is gravity at sea level, H is elevation above sea
level, r is radius of the earth, h is density of the matter lying above
sea level, and A is mean density of the earth. The first term takes
account of the distance from the earth's center, and the second term
of the vertical attraction of the matter lying between the sea level and
station, on the supposition that the latter is located on an indefinitely
extended horizontal plain. Wherever the topography about a station
departs materially from this condition of a horizontal plain, a third
term must be added to the above formula, being a correction to the
second term or to observed gravity on account of such irregularities.
This is called the topographical correction, and will always be positive,,
as the effect of all deviations from the horizontal plain, whether hills
or mountains rising above the station, or valleys or canyons lying
below it, will be to diminish the force of gravity.* This correction
is not important at any of these stations, but has been approximately
' These estimates of the average density or specific gravity of the masses above sea level
underlying the respective stations have been furnished by Mr. G. K. Gilbert, of the U. S.
Geological Survey. The character of the rocks is as follows : Sydney, sandstone, shale ;'
Ashe Inlet, gneiss ; Umanak, gneiss ; Niantilik, gneiss ; Washington, sand and clay.
"'Bericht iiber die relativen Messungen der Schwerkraft mit Pendelapparaten, voik
Professor Helmert," Verhandlungen der elf ten Conferenz der Intemationalen Erdmessung,
Berlin, 1895.
' For formulas for this correction see Report U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey for 1894.
App. I, pages 22 and 23.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations, 105
«
estimated from the very scanty knowledge of the surrounding topogra-
phy for those stations where it is thought to be appreciable.
Although the attraction of the mass above sea level at any station
must be a real quantity, yet the omission of this correction, the sec-
ond term of Bouguer's formula, has been advocated on the basis of
certain theories of the condition of the earth's -crust, as for instance,
that it is in a state analogous to hydrostatic equilibrium, and hence
that all elevations are compensated by deficiencies in density beneath,
and the results of the pendulum observations themselves have in gen-
eral, though not in particular, tended to confirm this position. This
question will be referred to again. Various other methods of reduc-
tion have been proposed. As has been remarked by Professor Hel-
mert, the reduction to sea level will also depend on the application to
be made of the results. If they are to be used in connection with the
problem of the figure of the earth, the normal force of gravity at the
sea level will be required ; if, however, it is desired to study the irregu-
larities in density below sea level, it seems quite proper that the real
attraction of the mass above sea level as represented by the second
term of Bouguer's formula should be subtracted. These different
methods of reduction need not be considered as necessarily conflicting,
therefore, as might appear at first sight.
The values reduced to sea level in Table K are next compared with
an assumed theoretical formula g = 978.066 (i + .005243 sin^ lati-
tude) which is based on Clairaut's theorem, Clarke's figure of the
earth (1880), and the assumption that gravity is normal on the eastern
coast of the United States ; the values of g by this formula being com-
puted for the latitude of each of the stations.^ Such comparisons are
useful in showing the differences between the observed results and
those based upon values for the flattening of the earth derived from
other sources, and to develop the local anomalies in the force of grav-
ity. The results of this season can be added to the constantly accu-
mulating store of information to be used in future discussions of pen-
' The most generally used theoretical formula for the variation of the force of gravity
with latitude is that derived by Professor Helmert from an elaborate discussion of pendulum
observations in various parts of the world, £- = 978.000 (i + '0053 10 sin' latitude) centi-
meters, which corresponds to the value for the flattening of the earth. " Die mathe-
2993
matischen und physikalischen Theorien der hoheren Godasie," Vol. II, p. 241. This discus-
sion was made in 1884, and is based on pendulum observations at 122 stations, which is but
a small proportion of the data that is now available.
io6 C. R. Putnam.
dulum observations either with respect to the figure of the earth or
otherwise. Their principal value will be in their combination with
results in other parts of the world.
The possibility of an interesting application of pendulum observa-
tions suggested itself to the writer in connection with future explo-
ration in Greenland. The remarkable ice cap covering this great
island rises to an elevation of about lo^ocx) feet (3,000 meters), but
what proportion of this elevation is ice and what land, is an unsolved
and most interesting problem. It is very probable that a comparison
of pendulum observations on the bare coast with others on the ice cap
would throw considerable light on the subject, although it might not
settle the question definitely.
Section 14. Comparison of Periods at Washington. — The con-
stancy of the periods of pendulums being a most important matter in
connection with the use of those of the so-called invariable type in
relative measurements of the force of gravity, it is of interest to com-
pare the periods of these three pendulums as given by various deter-
minations at the base station at Washington during the past three
years. Table L gives the corrected periods at Washington resulting
from ten determinations from April, 1894, to October, 1896. The val-
ues for 1894 differ slightly from those previously published, because in
order to render them strictly comparable with the later results, a cor-
rection of '.0000013 was subtracted from the period of ^4 to allow
for the fact that it was swung on a different knife-edge, and a correc-
tion of '.0000003 was added to the periods of all three pendulums to
allow for improved values in the thermometer corrections. The total
range in the mean period of the three pendulums for these ten deter-
minations is only '.0000008, and the means for the separate years
differ by only '. 000000 1. When it is considered that these pendu-
lums during this interval of two and one-half years have been swung
at fifty stations (including Washington) and have been transported
many thousand miles by rail and ship, the permanency of period is
certainly satisfactory. •
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
107
TABLE L. —Summary op Periods at Washington.
Date.
Approximate average
temperature.
CoxsscTBo Pbsiods.
DlFPBSBMCBS FItOM MbAN.
(7th dedmal place.)
1
a
as
4
<
•i
1
•
<
8
1
•
<
a
s
1
1
Mean of three
pendulum*.
A4.
A5.
A6.
1894.
Apr. 35-Apr. 37.
16
.5008396
a.
.5006665
s.
.5006303
.5007122
1274
457
819
May lo-May 12.
»9
8394
0669
6307
7123
1271
454
816
May 3 1- June 2.
«7
8398
6667
6305
7123
1275
456
818
June 23- June 25.
S3
8398
6665
6305
7123
1275
458
818
Oct- 31-NoT. 2.
17
8390
6659
6309
Mean for 1894.
7120
1270
461
811
7122
1805.
Jan. ii-Jan. 13.
II
8396
668t
6298
7125
127 1
444
827
Aug. 2 -Aug. 4.
1896.
Jan. ji-Jan. 23.
21
II
8380
8383
6662
6668
6310
Mean for 1895.
6315
7117
1263
X261
455
454
807
7121
7122
807
Jnne ss-Jnne 24.
22
8392
6665
6305
7121
1271
456
816
10
Oct. is-Oct. 17.
«7
8392
6665
6303
Mean for 1896.
7120
1272
455
817
7121
Section 15. Notes on the Historical Development of Pendulum
Apparatus} — The laws of the motion of a pendulum were first an-
nounced by Galileo in 1629. It is a disputed question as to whom
belongs the honor of the discovery of isochronism, that important
property of the pendulum by which it oscillates in different small
arcs in nearly equal times, though tradition attributes this to Galileo,
who is said at the age of twenty to have noticed the isochronism in
the swinging of a chandelier in a church at Florence. This property
appears to have been known as early as 1589, which epoch may be
taken as the beginning of the history of the pendulum. In 1641, a
year before his death, Galileo had conceived the idea of the applica-
' The historical data in this and the following section are taken largely from " Collection
de M^moires relatifs a la Physique publics par la Soci^t^ Francaise de Physique, Tome IV,
M^moires sur le Pendule *' (Introduction Historique, C. Wolf); also "Account of the Op-
erations of the Great Trigonometrical Survey of India/* Vol. V, *'The Pendulum Opera-
tions *' (Appendix, ''Notes for a history of the use of invariable pendulums*'); also Ver-
handlangen der siebenten Conferenz der Europaischen Gradmessung/* Rome» 1883, " Rapport
sur la determination de la pesant^ur a Taide de diff^rents appareils, par M. Theodore von
Oppolzer.'
»i
io8 G, R. Putnam.
tion of the pendulum to clocks for time-keeping purposes, but he did
not develop nor publish it. The Dutch philosopher Huyghens made
known and patented a pendulum clock in 1657, and thus appears to be
entitled to the honor of the first practical application of the pendulum
for this purpose. Huyghens also did much towards developing the
mathematical theory of the pendulum. In 1644 Mersenne made the
first determination of the length of the seconds pendulum. The effect
of changes of temperature on the period of a pendulum was noted
by Picard in 1669, and the resistance of the air to the motion was first
studied by Newton in 1686. In 1735 Mairan first employed the
method of coincidences in determining the period of a pendulum,
noting the times when the clock and pendulum were together at the
extremity of the arc instead of when they pass through the vertical
together, as was the later method. The correction to pendulum obser-
vations on account of loss of weight because of being in air, was first
applied by Bouguer in 1 749, to whom also is due the reduction to sea
level known by his name. Boscovich, in 1785, first proposed the sec-
ond atmospheric correction due to the retardation of the pendulum
because of the air dragged with it, and also gave the theory of the ball
and wire pendulum, but made no application of it. In response to
the request of the Commission of Weights and Measures, Borda in
1792, at the Observatory of Paris, made elaborate observations with
the ball and wire pendulum, introducing all the improvements that had
been suggested up to that time. The Academy of Sciences had de-
cided that the length of the pendulum beating seconds at Paris should
be determined at the same time with the other measurements neces-
sary to the establishment of the metric system. In 1792 Prony pro-
posed a rigid pendulum with three parallel axes in same plane as cen-
ter of gravity of the pendulum. In 1798 he proposed the pendulum
now known as the reversible, but did not construct one. In 181 7,
without knowledge of Prony's work. Captain Kater, charged by the
Committee of Weights and Measures of the Royal Society of Lon-
don to measure the length of the seconds pendulum, developed his
method and constructed the pendulum known by his name, a reversi-
ble pendulum with movable weights, and hence called convertible. The
theory of the reduction to a vacuum, and of the effect of air on a pen-
dulum, has been studied elaborately by Bessel, Buat, Poisson, and
Stokes. Laplace in 18 16 first called attention to the influence that
the form of the knife-edge would have on the true length of the pen-
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations, 109
dulum. On account of the complicated atmospheric effects, and the
uncertainty of the knife-edge, Bessel concluded that it was impossible
to accurately measure the length of the seconds pendulum by means
of the simple ball and wire. Because of its lack of symmetry Kater's
pendulum also failed to eliminate the atmospheric effects. In 1827
Bessel elaborated the conditions necessary for the reversible pendu-
lum, the most important being the external symmetry of the two ends
of the pendulum, but an instrument following these ideas was em-
ployed for the first time by Plantamour in 1866, as constructed by
Repsold. Various modifications of this type of pendulum have been
widely used since that time, more particularly in absolute measure-
ments of the force of gravity. In his well-known experiments at
Konigsberg in 1826, Bessel first introduced a differential method in
determining the length of the seconds pendulum ; a ball and wire
pendulum was used, the length of the wire being varied by an amount
exactly equal to a standard toise. Only the difference of the length
of the two pendulums was required, and the differential method was
supposed to eliminate many of the constant errors in the effect of the
suspension and otherwise. Although this source of error had previ-
ously been suspected, Peirce in 1875 first proved that the time of
oscillation of a pendulum was affected by the flexibility of its support,
and he investigated this question both experimentally and mathemat-
ically. About 1887, Defforges introduced in the "Service Geograph-
ique " of France a differential method of determining the absolute
force of gravity, using two symmetrical reversible pendulums of the
same weight but of different lengths, with interchangeable knife-edges.
The variation of the rate of clocks, when transported from place
to place, early suggested the use of the invariable pendulum to meas-
ure the relation of the force of gravity at different points. The first
instrument designed for this purpose seems to have been that of
Graham, a celebrated clock maker of London, who in 1731 used an
invariable pendulum connected with wheel work arranged to register
the number of oscillations. This was rated in London and in the
island of Jamaica. This instrument was used by Sabine as late as
1820, although it was unsatisfactory on account of the variable effect
of the wheel work on the pendulum. Bouguer and LaCondamine
used an entirely free invariable pendulum of such mass that it would
oscillate an entire day, on the expedition of 1735 to 1743 to measure
the Peruvian arc. Malaspina, on a Spanish expedition from 1789 to
no G, R. Putnam.
1 794, employed a pendulum having a wooden rod, steel knife-edge and
copper lenticular bob. About 1817 Kater constructed an invariable
pendulum which he used at various stations of the Ordnance Survey
in England. Many copies of this pendulum were made, some of which
were employed at wide intervals of time and up to a very recent date.
They are simple in design, consisting of a flat brass bar over five feet
in length, having a large flat circular brass bob and a hard steel knife-
edge. A radical change in invariable pendulums was introduced in
1882, when Von Stemeck employed a half second pendulum in Aus-
tria, together with an elegant electrical arrangement for observing
coincidences -between a clock or chronometer and a pendulum. When
it is considered that a half second pendulum is only about one-fourth
the length of a seconds pendulum (which was previously the almost
universal length) and that the older methods of observing coincidences
could not be used with a chronometer, the important eflFect of this step
on the facility of gravity research may be realized. In 1890 a form of
half second pendulum apparatus, difiFering in important respects from
that of Von Stemeck, was designed by Mendenhall, who also in 1894
designed a quarter second pendulum apparatus, the most portable in-
struments of the kind yet constructed, the air-tight case in which the
pendulums are swung being only 17 cm. (6.7 inches) high. A pendu-
lum which is called " reversible inversible " was designed by DeflForges
and first used in 1890. It is a symmetrical reversible pendulum about
a half meter in length and is provided with interchangeable knife-edges
and weights.
Section 16. Notes on the Progress of Research in Terrestrial
Gravity Measurements, — To obtain some instrument with which the
force of gravity could be more conveniently and simply measured than
with the pendulum, has been a problem that has long engaged the at-
tention of physicists, and was considered of sufficient importance for
the appointment of a special committee by the British Association
for the Advancement of Science a few years ago. Various devices de-
pending principally on the compressibility of gases, and the elasticity
of metals, have been proposed from time to time, but nothing has yet
been found to give sufficiently reliable results. Pendulums as they
have been used in gravimetric research may be divided into three gen-
eral classes : the ball and wire, the reversible and the invariable. The
ideal simple pendulum to which the law / = tt -y — applies consists
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations. 1 1 1
of a weight concentrated at a single point and suspended from its cen-
ter of oscillation by a weightless thread. The nearest approach to
this possible in practice is the ball and wire pendulum, which in early
days was much used, but which was an instrument only suited for labo-
ratory experiments, and even then was subject to serious difficulties in
eliminating various sources of error. With this instrument the mo-
ments of inertia of the various parts must be considered in computing
the length of the pendulum. The reversible pendulum, which has been
very generally used in modem absolute measurements of the force of
gravity, depends on the principle that in any compound or material
pendulum swung from a point which may be called the center of sus-
pension^ there is a reciprocal point situated on a line passing through
the center of gravity, called the center of oscillation, about which the
period of the pendulum will be the same if it is reversed ; and further,
that the period of the compound peijdulum will be the same as that of
a simple pendulum of length equal to the distance between the center
of suspension and the center of oscillation, and known as the equiva-
lent simple pendulum. This principle was first applied by Kater in
his convertible pendulum, an unsymmetrical pendulum with movable
weights, so that the center of gravity could be shifted until the con-
dition of equal periods about the two knife-edges was obtained. Fol-
lowing Bessel's idea, the reversible pendulum as used in recent years
has had a symmetrical form and fixed center of gravity, but with one
end heavy and the other light. It is so designed that the periods of
oscillation shall be approximately equal about the two knife-edges.
When this condition is reached, the period of the equivalent simple
hfi — h' t'^
pendulum is given by the relation T^ = — , , ^ — , where / and f
are the times of oscillation about the knife-edges, whose distances from
the center of gravity are respectively h and h!; g may be determined
from this relation (remembering that A + A' is the length of the equiv-
alent simple pendulum whose period is T) when the periods in the twa
positions are ascertained, and the distance between knife-edges, and
the approximate distance from each knife-edge to the center of grav-
ity. The determination of the absolute force of gravity is an opera-
tion of more importance to physics in general than to geodesy. Nev-
ertheless, in order to be able to express results in absolute measure,
a number of such determinations have been made in connection with
geodetic operations. The following table (M) gives some of the more
112
G. R. Putnam.
important determinations made either in this connection or otherwise,
with results referred to Washington by means of relative connections
that have been made.^ Some of these results are now principally in-
teresting from an historical point of view. Even the determinations
apparently the most reliable do not show a satisfactory accordance.
TABLE M. — Absolute Determinations op the Force of GRAvmr, with Results
Reduced to Washington, C. and G. S. Office (Not Reduced to Sea Level).
Observer.
Date.
PUee
of detennl-
lUdon.
Appuatoi.
Results reduced to WasluDg-
ton. Coast and Geodetic
Survey Oflice.
Length sec
pendulum.
Gravitjr.
I
a
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
lo
IX
Borda
Kater
Bessel .
Sabine .
Plantamoor
Pelroe
VonOrff
MendenhsU
Oppolser
Lorensoni
Defforges
1791.
1817.
1826-37.
1829.
1865-71.
1876.
1877.
1880.
Z884.
t886.
1893.
Paris . . .
London . .
K&nigsbeis,
Greenwidi .
Geneva . .
Paris . . .
Munidi . .
Toldo . .
Vienna . .
Padua . .
Washington,
Ball and wire
Kater convertible pendulom . .
Ball and wire, a lengths, di£Eerentiai
Kater convertible pendolnm . .
Beaael reversiUe pendulom . .
Bessel reverrible pendulum . .
Repsold reversible pendulum . .
Ball and wire
Repsold reversible pendulum . .
Repsold reversible pendulum . .
Two reversible pendulums, differential.
cm.
99.310a
.3236
.3031
.3005
.3oa8
.3109
.3088
.3114
.3085
.3007
.3115
Dynes or
980.153
.385
.073
.056
.079
.«59
.138
.164
•135
.058
.165
In the study of the variations of gravity over the earth's surface^
with which geodesy and terrestrial physics are principally concerned,
the invariable pendulum has been largely used and appears to be the
most convenient form on account of its greater simplicity both in its
construction and manipulation. The development of this instrument
and its various types has already been referred to. Reversible pen-
dulums have also been used to a considerable extent in this connec-
tion, and even the ball and wire pendulum was so employed in the
earlier work. The first experimental proof of the variations of gravity
with latitude was furnished by the famous observation of Richer, who
in 1672 measured the length of a seconds pendulum at Cayenne near
the equator, and found that it was i^ line (= 2.8 mm.), or about the
g|y th part shorter there than at Paris. Many astronomers attributed
* For a more complete list see App. No. i, Report U. S. C. and G. Survey for 1894, p. 48.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations. 113
this difference simply to the effect of the wanner climate on the iron
standard of length, but its reality was soon confirmed by observations
made in other parts of the world under the auspices of the French
Academy, as well as by the theories of Newton, published in 1687, as
to the flattening of the earth at the poles. In 1743 Clairaut published
his famous theorem establishing a relation between the force of grav-
ity and the flattening of the earth, which may be stated as follows :
a — b 5 ^ g^ — ^e ,
= — — where a and b are the equatorial and
^ ^ gt g^ ^
polar semi-diameters of the earth, g^ and g^ are the polar and equato-
rial forces of gravity, and c is the centrifugal force at the equator.^
" In his demonstration, Clairaut makes no assumption of original fluid-
ity ; he supposes the strata to be concentric and coaxal spheroidal
shells, the density varying from stratum to stratum in any manner
whatever ; it is assumed however that the superficial stratum has the
same form as if it were fluid, and in relative equilibrium when rotating
with uniform angular velocity. Professor Stokes in his demonstration
of Clairaut's Theorem, in two papers published in 1849, showed that
if the surface be a spheroid of equilibrium of small ellipticity, Clair-
aut's Theorem follows independently of the adoption of the hypoth-
esis of original fluidity or even of that of any internal arrangement in
nearly spherical strata of uniform density." * In the early part of this
century a number of expeditions were sent out partly or wholly for
the purpose of making pendulum observations, among the more im-
portant of which may be noted those of Kater, 18 18-19; Sabine,
1819-24; Foster, 1828-31; Liitke, 1826-29; Freycinct, 1817-20;
Duperrey, 1822-25, and Biot and Mathieu, 1808-24. With the meth-
ods then in use, however, but a comparatively small number of points
could be determined, and these were almost entirely confined to the
sea coast. The subject was then almost entirely neglected until 1864,
when, in connection with the Great Trigonometrical Survey of India,
an extensive series of pendulum observations, without precedent up to
that time, was undertaken and carried out, yielding most interesting
results. Since that time this subject has been taken up by various
countries engaged in geodetic operations, and has been included in
the scope of the investigations of the International Geodetic Associ-
ation. In the reports of this Association the results are systematic-
' A more rigid ezpression for this formula is given by Helmert, Geodasie, Vol. II, p. 83.
* Clarke's Geodesy, p. 82.
114 G. R. Putnam.
ally collected and published from time to time. Professor Helmert's
elaborate report on the subject at the meeting of the Association in
Berlin, in 1895, included 968 such measurements, more than a third of
which, however, were in a single country (Austria).
The flattening of the earth cannot be computed from Clairaut's
Theorem directly, because thus far it has been impracticable to meas-
ure the force of gravity at the poles. But it has been demonstrated
that the increase of gravity from the equator to the poles wUl be as the
square of the sine of the latitude, or ^^ = ^^ ( i + ^^ ^P sin* 4>^ \
\ g^ J
where g^ is gravity at any latitude ^q, g^ at the equator and gp at the
poles. With this expression g^ and gp may be derived from determi-
nations of g made at two or more diflFerent latitudes. Substituting in
Clairaut's Theorem, the amount of the flattening can then be computed.
As material has accumulated from time to time, a number of such
deductions have been made by combining all available pendulum obser-
vations. Some of these are as follows :
From a table by Professor Harkness, Report C. and G. Survey for 1893, ^^^ ^^> P* ^5^
Date. Authority. FlattMiing = fJli.
1799. Laplace. 335.8
1825. Sabine. 289.1
1830. Airy. 282.8
1834. Baily. 285.3
1880. Clarke. 292.2
1884. Helmert. 299.3
The two most important values of the flattening of the earth
derived from the entirely independent method of arc measurements,
are those of Bessel (1841) — — , and Clarke (1880) — — . The
2992 293.5
pendulum observations, of course, furnish information only as to the
ratio of the axes and not as to their absolute lengths, which are fur-
nished by arc measurements. The flattening as deduced by either
method is subject to uncertainties because of the irregularities in the
earth's surface, both in density and shape and the necessary confine-
ment of measurements to land areas, but the pendulum observations
have the advantage of the possibility of extension to regions that can
never be reached by triangulation.
Early in the discussion of pendulum observations it became appar-
ent that the force of gravity over the earth's surface did not always
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations. 115
follow Clairaut's law when the reduction to sea level was made by
Bouguer's formula, or the attraction of the mass above sea level was
subtracted. As early as 1830 Airy pointed out the fact that gravity
seemed to be greater on oceanic islands than on continents in corre-
sponding latitudes, and the accumulation of later data has clearly
brought out the fact that with Bouguer's reduction there is apparently
an excess of gravity of about ^y^nr^^ P^*^ ^^ oceanic islands as com-
pared with continental coasts, and a defect of similar amount beneath
elevated continental masses. Two causes might lead to such a con-
dition : first, the sea level may be distorted, raised above the mean
figure of the earth under continents, and lowered below in ocean cen-
ters, and thus points at sea level under continents would be at a greater
distance from the earth's center than at oceanic islands ; or second,
the earth's crust may be less dense below continents than under the
oceans. On the theory that the crust of the earth is in a condition
analogous to hydrostatic equilibrium, which was first proposed by Airy
in 1855, it has been computed that the distortion of the sea level
would not be over about 10 feet (3 meters). This theory appears to
be the favorite one, and based on it the differences between normal
and observed gravity, using Bouguer's reduction, have been taken as
a measure of the excess or deficiency in density beneath the sea level.
In discussions of the figure of the earth from pendulum observations
various methods have been proposed of eliminating these local pecu-
liarities. Thus it has been proposed in the reduction to sea level to
omit the correction for the attraction of the mass above sea level, for
the reason that on the equilibrium theory that mass must be compen-
sated by a deficiency of density beneath. This would not help mat-
ters much in the case of oceanic island observations, however, where
the stations are often close to sea level. Faye in 1880 suggested that
while in general the equilibrium condition might be true, it could
scarcely apply to limited areas on the earth's surface ; as, for instance,
that a large plateau might be supported in a condition of equilibrium,
whereas a mountain on that plateau would be supported by the partial
rigidity of the crust, and he therefore proposed that in the reduction
of pendulum observations to sea level the attraction of average areas
should be considered as probably compensated by deficiency or excess
of density beneath, but that the local departures from that average
area should be allowed for. A rough application of this idea to a
number of observations made in this country in 1894, and in other
parts of the world previously, showed that the results gave far greater
Ii6 G. R. Putnam.
accordance on this supposition than on any other. A striking illustra-
tion of this was Pike's Peak, which is a comparatively isolated moun-
tain rising about 2,450 meters above a plateau whose elevation is about
1,840 meters above sea level. When the attraction of the entire mass
above sea level was subtracted, the observed force of gravity appeared
to be about ^^j^th part below normal, but when no correction for this
attraction was applied, gravity appeared about the same amount above
normal. When, however, only the attraction of the peak itself as it
stood above the average elevation of the country was allowed for, the
result appears quite normal. The result obtained at the celebrated
station Mor6 in the Indian series, at an elevation of 1 5,408 feet (4,696
meters) in the Himalayan mountains, is not discordant with this idea.
Here it was found that the defect of gravity with Boug^er's reduction
to sea level was closely equal to the correction for the attraction of the
mass above sea level, but Mor6 is situated in a valley and is shown to
have been nearly at the average elevation of the surrounding region.
The connection between variations in the force of gravity and
deflections of the plumb line was brought out in an interesting man-
ner in the Indian series. As the triangulation approached the Him-
alayas the deflection towards this mountain mass was found to be
less than had been estimated, a fact that was explained when the pen-
dulum observations indicated a deficiency of density beneath. Quite
recently such a relation has been brought out in a striking manner by
a series of gravity measurements made along a meridian line in Ger-
many, at points where the plumb line deflections had been obtained
by a comparison of astronomical latitude observations with geodetic-
ally determined positions. In Professor Helmert's discussion of this
work, he shows that plumb line deflections, in a region where they
would not be accounted for by the apparent surface conditions, have
a distinct relation to irregularities in density beneath, as developed by
the pendulum.^ '
Another application of pendulum gravity measurements has been
in the determination of the mean density of the earth. By comparing
the measured force of gravity at the ordinary surface with that at the
summit of a mountain or the bottom of a mine, it is possible to com-
pute the ratio of the mean density of the earth to the density of the
'"Ergebnisse von Messungen der Intensitat der Schwerkraft auf der Liniie Kolberg-
Schneekoppe, von F. R. Helmert." Sitzungsberichte der Konigltch Preussischen Akad-
emie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin. XVIII. 1896.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations, n/
mountain or the mass between the bottom and top of the mine, which
latter may be estimated from determinations of the specific gravity of
surface specimens. Because of various practical diiRculties this method
cannot compete with refined laboratory methods of recent times, and
is likely to prove more valuable when reversed, that is, in the investi-
gation of the mean densities of mountains. Some of the determina-
tions made by pendulum observations are as follows :
Date.
ObcciTcr*
Place.
Mean deodtY of
the earth.
1821.
Carlini.
Mount CenU, Alps.
4.95
1854.
Airy.
Harton Pit (mine), England.
6.56
188a
Mendenhall.
Fujiyama, Japan.
5.77
1883.
Von Stemeck.
Pribram (mine), Bohemia.
5.77
1892.
Preston.
Mauna Kea, Hawaiian Islands.
5.13
1894.
Putnam.
Pike's Peak, United States.
5.63
Part IV. Examples of Observations.
Section i 7. Latitude Observations at Umanaky Greenland. —
These observations were made by Talcott's method^ with meridian
telescope No. 13, used as a zenith telescope. The method depends
on the micrometric measurement of the difference of zenith distance
of two stars crossing the meridian at nearly equal distances, one north
and one south of the zenith, and at a short interval of time. It is
evident that the mean of the declinations of two stars which crossed
the meridian at exactly equal zenith distances north and south, would
be the latitude of the place, and with this method it is only necessary
to determine a correction to the mean declinations to allow for the
fact that the zenith distances are not exactly equal. The strong point
of the method lies in the fact that it is free from circle readings, de-
pending only on the micrometer, a delicate level, and the computed
declinations of the stars.
For this latitude only three pairs of stars (as given below) were
observed on two nights. The right ascensions and declinations given
are the mean places for 1896.0, computed from the Greenwich (1880),
Safford's, and the Pulkowa catalogues. The second star in each of
these pairs was observed at lower culmination.
' For explanations of this method and of the instruments used, see Report U. S. C. and
G. Survey for 1880, App. 14; also Chauvenet's Astronomy, Vol. II, p. 340; also Doolittle's
Practical Astronomy, p. 478.
Ii8
G. R. Putnam.
Stab Nctmbbk.
B. A. C. catakgnt.
Magnitude.
Right aaoenaioii.
Declinttion.
Apprasionta aaaitli diataaoa
for aetting taleacope.
•
h. m. a.
0 » "
0 '
3983
5«
5.6
30 34 00.09
8 44 4835
--ai 45 oS-47
+63 31 03.53
46 55 S.
46 58 N.
7358
3106
6.5
4-4
30 50 41.39
9 01 33.17
-1-13 19 39.48
+53 01 36.91
57 »« S.
57 «8N.
7403
S«99
4.6
ai '4 34.37
9 33 15.38
-4-43 30 *9a8
-Hi 47 09.14
37 10 S.
37 33 N.
The apparent declinations of the stars for the date of observation
were computed by the independent star numbers, by the formula (see
American Ephemeris, Part II), S = Sq -|" ^ /*' + ^ cos {G + ^o) "^ ^ ^^^
{H + a^) sin Sq + i cos Sq, where a^, 8q are the star's mean right as-
cension and declination at the beginning of the year, t is the fraction
of a year from January i, /*' is the annual proper motion in declination,
and gy G, h, H^ and i are factors given in the Ephemeris for each day
in the year.
The formula for the latitude, when the observations are made in
the meridian, is : <^ = J (* + ^') + i (^— ^0 ^ + — [(« + «')
4
— (j + -f') ] + i (T — ''') where S and 8' are the declinations and M
and J/' the micrometer readings of the south and north stars respect-
ively, R the value in arc of one division of the micrometer, n and s
the north and south readings of the level for the south star, and v! and
J the same for the north star, b the value in arc of one division of the
level, and r and r' the refraction corrections for the south and north
stars. The value of one division of the latitude level was 2".23 ( = ^).
The value of one turn (100 divisions) of the micrometer was determined
at Umanak on August 12, 1896, by observing Polaris near eastern
elongation, setting the micrometer thread at each even turn, and not-
ing the time of transit of Polaris ; ^ giving the result i turn = 79".647.
Table N gives a summary of the observations and reductions. The
resulting value for the latitude of the meridian telescope is 70° 40'
29^.2 N., from which the latitude of the magnetic station (12 meters
south) is 70° 40' 28".8 N., and of the flagstaff (50 meters south) is
70° 40' 27".6 N.
' For explanation and example, see Report C. and G. Survey for 1880, App. 14, pages
51 and 58.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
.1 J + + .1 .1 .
S. S. i & 8. & ■
%
%
■? ? a ? ? ? ,
i « t = y ■=
\
I20
G. R, Putnam.
Section i8. Example of Computation of Longitudes from Chro-
nometer 182J {sidereal).
StsdoQ.
Date.
(OtU local.)
us
u
fl
ll
r
• 0 S
<
I
11
»4
Sydney t
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Turnavik
Aehe Inlet
GodhtTQ
Umanak
Umanak
Ununak
Umanak
Umanak
Umanak
Umanak
Niantilik
Sydney
Wadiingt(m(C and G. S),t
Washington
Washington
Washington
Washington
1896.
July la
Joly II.
Jnly IS.
July i6.*
July ao.
July 35.
Aug. 3.
Aug. 5.»
Aug. 7.
Aug. 8.
Aug. II.
Aug. IS.
Aug. ao.
Sept 9.*
Sept 18.
Sept s6.
Oct 3.*
Oct. 6.
Oct 15.
Oct. 16.
Oct 17.
h.
22
m.
36
21
08
21
08
12
00
IS
43
24
01
8
08
12
00
M
48
>4
3<
n
n
n
33
23
16
"4
00
16
40
4
36
12
00
I
40
4
45
5
22
2
M
n. m. s.
—4 00 52.30
— ^4 00 saSi
—4 00 49.15
— ^3 57 08.30
—4 41 54.90
—3 33 16.30
t— 3 27 40.04]
—3 27 34-25
—3 27 31-64
—3 27 25.65
—3 27 23.30
—3 27 04.65
[—3 26 18.78]
—4 22 4as
—3 57 46.8
—5 04 41.04
— S 04 23.19
—5 04 21.40
— ^5 04 2aoi
s.
—05.33
-«3.74
-02.08
[+03.78I
[+3 14.28]
+3 21.10
+3 38.95
+3 40.74
+3 42.13
s.
• • • ■
m. s.
• • ■ ■
+1.62
■ ■ • •
• • « •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• ■ • ft
+0 14.0
• • • ■
-H>27.6
■ • • •
+048.6
• ■ • •
+0 54.0
■ • • •
» • • •
• • • •
■ • • ft
+2.29
• • • •
■ • ■ •
I ft ■ ft
• • • •
• • ft •
+2 15.3
■ ■ ■ •
+2 37.1
• • • •
+2 56.0
* • ■ •
■ « « •
.+I.9I
/ • • • ■
h. m. s.
3 57 22.a
4 42 22.5
3 3404.S
3 3834.0
3 2834.Z
4 25 17.6
4 00 43.S
The traTeling rate used in the above is deduced as follows :
Correction at Washington on Greenwich sidereal time
Correction at Sydney on Greenwich sidereal time . .
h. m. s.
October 3, at 12.0 -f^ 14.28
July 16, at 12.0 +0 03.78
Loss in 79.0 days -f^ mxso
Lross at Umanak in 35.5 days +1 21.26
TraTeling on ship, 43.5 days 4*> 49*24
Traveling rate per day + 2.51
* These are dates of arrival and departure (on which no time observations were made), and the duronometer
correction is carried out to these dates for each station by using the average rate at that station.
t The adopted lon^tude of the transit at Sydney was 4h. 00m. 47.07 s., and at Washington 5 h. 08m. 02.14s.
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
121
Section 19. Example of Observations of Sun for Azimuth of
Mark and for Time^ with Computations. — Niantilik, Cumberland
Sound, September 18, 1896, p.m. Instrument, Theodolite Magnet-
ometer, No. 19.
Object
Mean*
Su'i
1 fim and upper Hmb . . .
Sob'i
I Mcond and lower Hinb . .
Means
Sob'i
1 wooDd and lower limb . .
Sm'a
Means
Aaimrth nutfk .......
Means
SB
D
R
R
D
i
S ^
h. m. I.
7 39 ao
40 40
41 34
4a 58
44 oi
45 33
HoaizoirTAL Cikclb.
A.
B.
Mean.
7 4> a«.5
7 46 34
47 33
48 31
51 04
53 05
53 a«
7 49 5».3
53 58
>33 55
53
339 46
330 05
19
51 16
33
54
50
53 09
33
38
333 38
5>
333 >3
53
333 56
53 58
53
59
55
44
03
16
>7
33
55
09
36
50
09
58.5
55.0
56.8
45-0
04.0
»7-5
16.5
33.0
545
48.4
09.0
33,5
38.0
37.0
51.0
10.5
383
55-5
58.0
56.8
VSRTICAL ClKCLS.
A.
17 17
XI
06
73
33
33
39
39
46
47
16
• ■
73
50
5«
55
57
74
oa
03
16 16
II
03
16
B.
18
»3
09
>7
13
07
Mean.
«7-5
la.o
07.5
33.0
39.0
46. S
46.4
50-5
56.0
03.5
16.5
la.o
05.0
07.4
1
122
G. R. Putnam,
Computation op Azimuth or Mark.
Fomiala. UnM W = »in (/^ ^)iin(j-- A)
where A = anmath from north.
0 ^ latitude.
A = corrected altitude.
/ ^ polar distance.
Computation op CHXOMOMBm Coskbctiom.
Formnla, tan|/ = cotM ^oJi — A)
cosU— »
where t = hour angle of eon.
Date, 1896.
Chronometer time ....
Correction to i&fa on G. M. T.
Greenwich mean time . . .
Sun't apparent declination
Sun's north polar dirt. := / .
A observed
Correction for parallax . . .
Correction for refraction . .
k corrected
>
0
H*+/H-^) = ' . •. . .
•-^
*-A
*-/
Log sin (« — 0)
Log8ln(* — *)
L<^ numerator
Logcosf
Logcos(«— /)
Log denominator
Log tan* 4^
L<^ un \A
kA
A
Horiontal circle reads . . .
True meridian reads ....
Aiimuih mark reads ....
Mark west of north ....
Sept. 18.
Sept. 18.
P.M.
p. M.
h. m. s.
h. m. s.
7 4* a«.S
-fa 09.8
7 .49 5»-3
+3 09.8
7 44 V-3
i« j6'.9
7 53 01. 1
i^ 36'.8
88° 33'. «
88O S3'.a
x60 46'.4
16° 07'.4
+C/.I
-h>'.i
—3.1
—3.3
16 43.4
16 04.3
88 33"
88 33.a
64 53-5
64 53.5
85 05.0
84 45-4
so II. 5
19 51.9
68 31.6
68 41.3
—3 s8.i
-3 47.8
9.5380a
9- 53 "4
9.96836
9.969*3
9.5o6a8
8.93301
Q.50047
8.96090
9.99920
8.93331
9-999<H
8.95994
0.57407
0.54053
0.38704
0.37036
6.° 41.4'
61O 46.6'
135 33.8
133 33-3
50 48.4
58 s8.a
176 ii.a
176 II. 4
S3 56.8
S3 56.8
laa 14.4
133 14.6
Date, 1896.
Log cot i i4
Log sin (* —A) .
Log numerator .
Logcosd— »
Log tan ^ ^ . .
i/ . . .
/ . . .
/in time
Equation of time
Local mean time
1843 reads . .
Correction on local m. t
SepL 18.
P.M.
9.71396
9.96836
9.68133
9.99990
a^68ao3
51** 3l'.8
b. m« s.
3 as a7a
—6 14.7
3 «9 "-5
7 4« ai-S
—4 23 09.0
Sept. 18.
P.M.
9.7»974
9-969a3
9.69897
9-99904
?:699«n
a60 37'.o
53** «4'.o
h. m. s.
3 3a 56.0
—6 14.8
3 »6 41.3
7 49 5«-3
— ^4 33 10. 1
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
123
Section 20. Example of Observations of Magnetic Declination,
Station, Sydney, Nova Scotia. Date, July 11, 1896. Instrument,
Magnetometer 19. Magnet 19L suspended, scale erect. Line of de-
torsion, 330°.
Local time.
SCALB RSADINGS.
Mean.
A.
Azimuth drde,
B.
11° 04'.
A.M.
Left
RiKbt.
i9i«> 04'-5.
h. in.
d.
d.
d.
7 10
38.8
49.«
43.95
«5
43.2
45-9
4405
.
40
4^3
46.9
4460
East elongation.
57
39.0
47.5
43>25
8 .7
39.0
46.3
43.65
56
35a
48.4
41.80
P.M.
Line of detorelon, 280^.
A.
Aiimuth drde,
B.
io« 58'.
190° 59'.
» 35
3a-4
41.0
36.70
la 45
3a6
40.1
35-35
I %i
a4.8
44.'
34-45
West eloim^tion.
35
»8.3
4«.7
35-00
48
18.1
43.8
35.95
Rkadings or Azimuth Mabk.
At b^inmng of a. m. obiervatlons . . . ilbaP 47'
Atendof A.M. obeenrationa ada 47.5
At bq^naing of r.M. obiei ? atiena ... 362 41
At end of P.M. obaenrationa 263 41.2
3630 44'.3
Dbtbkmination op Axis op Magnbt.
(Magnet obaerred alteroately erect and inverted.)
Scale.
Scale Readings.
Mean.
Alternate
Mean.
Axis.
E
I
£
I
£
I
E
d.
d.
d.
d.
40.S
45- «
43.70
• ■ • •
35a
33.0
29.10
42.70
33.5
51.9
42.70
29.00
38.8
19.0
28.90
42.53
34-7
5ao
4>.35
28.73
39.8
37.3
28.55
43.13
35.8
48.0
41.90
• • • ■
Mean
d.
• • • ■
3590
3585
35.71
35-54
35.34
Mean scale reading of east and west magnetic elongation
Reduction to axis ° +07'. 7 = difference =
Aaimath circle reads 11 01.4
Magnetic south meridian reads 11
Magnetic north meridian reads 191
Mean reading of mark 363
Aaimath of marit S. of N 46
Tme meridiaB rsada 316
a4
39.5*
3.8$
09.1
09.1
44- a
43.7
00.5
51.4 W. of N.
124
G. R, Piitnatn,
Section 21. Example of Observations of Magnetic Dip. Station,
Sydney, Nova Scotia. Date, July 11, 1896. Dip Circle, No. 4,655.
Needle No. 2.
POLARITY OF MARKED END B NORTH.
Circle East.
ClBCLB WbST.
Face East.
Face West
Face East
Face West
S.
N.
S.
N.
S.
N.
S.
N.
0 '
73 59
61
0 '
73 61
60
0 '
74 oa
01
0 »
74 04
0 *
75 35
31
0 '
75 a9
"4
0 '
75 3»
39
0 »
75 »8
36
73 60.0
73 60.S
74 oi.s
74 04-0
75 33.0
75 a6.5
75 30.0
75 a7-o
73 <^>> 74 OS'S
74 oi.s
75 »9.8 75 a8.5
75 a9.a
Mean, 74® 45'.4.
POLARITY OF MARKED ENE
» B SOUTH.
CiRCLB WSST.
CiRCLB East.
Face West.
Face East.
Face West
Face East.
S.
N.
S.
N.
S.
N.
S.
N.
0 '
" II
0 '
74 5a
50
0 *
75 34
33
0 '
75 3«
31
0 '
73 41
40
0 '
73 38
39
0 '
74 «o
18
0 »
74 09
«5
•
74 575
74 5«-o
75 33-5
75 3».o
73 40.5
73 38.S
74 M-o
74 «a.o
74 54*
75
75 3
13.3
3.3
73 39-5
73 5«.a
74 «3.o
Mean, 74O 34'. 7.
Resulting Dip, 74° 40 .0.
h. m.
Local time of beginning 11 38 a.m.
Local time of ending "55 A.11.
Magnetic meridian reads dx^ 16'
DBTBKMINATtON OP MaGNSTXC MsSIDIAN.
Circle in magnetic prime TertkaL
o »
Orde N, Needle N 57 43
Cirde N, Needle S 58 is
Circles, Needle N 64 47
Circle S, Needle S 64 as
Mean 61 16
The above scheme of observation comprises a complete sjrstem of reversals of the podtion of the needle, the
position of the circle, and the polarity of the ends of the needle, with the idea of eliminating all sonroes of error
due to the fonn and magnetiun of the needle, etc
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations,
125
Section 22. Example of Observations and Computation of Hor-
izontal Intensity of Eartfis Magnetism, — The method used depends
on the determination of two relations between the horizontal inten-
sity (H) and the magnetic moment {m) of the principal magnet used.
By using this magnet to deflect another magnet suspended in the
tn
earth's field, the relation -—- is obtained, and by oscillating the prin-
cipal magnet the product mH is determined, and by combining these
two results m and H are found. The observations and reductions re-
quired are shown in the following forms, together with the formulas used.
Deflections with Thbodolitb Magnetometer.
Date, July ii, 1896. Station, Sydney, Nova Scotia. Instrument, Magnetometer 19. Mag-
net 19L, deflecting at right angles to Magnet 19J suspended. Deflecting distance f =3 49 cm.
■
•
1
1
9S
CXRCLB RXAOINGS.
ClKCLB RbADINGS.
s
No.
A
B
Mmd.
No.
A
B
Mean.
E.
W.
£.
I
3
0 t
193 3S-5
>
34
• • « •
35
f
3475
• ■ « ■
36.00
• • • •
3
• • • •
0 /
9
« • • •
16
• • • •
1
t
188 17
16.50
S7
Mean.
193
3538
188
16.50
W.
E.
W.
• • •
7
• • •
• •
38
• •
• • • a
39.00
• • ■ *
6
-
• •
8
188 33.5
33
• •
31
33.75
193 30
•
33-5
33.35
>
Mean.
>93
39.00
188
33.50
Conputadoo :
H
r= ^ r3 sin « (i — ' -i. . . . . )
Bfagnet East, s» =
0
5
5
5
3
18.88
06.50
13.69
36.34
\
Sin»
m
H
Logarithns.
MacnetWest, 3« =
Mean
9-69897
5.071 13
8.65763
_ ^
h.
. 10
10
m. A.M.
30
43
Temperatare .
Temperature .
. OC.
. . 17.3
. . 33.5
0.00070
0.00004
Mean ....
. 10
36
/= ....
. 30.4
3.4*853
P is the so-called distribution ooeffidenL
I + 1^ is the induction correction.
126
G, R, Putnam,
Observations of Oscillations.
Date, July ii, iSgd Station, Sydney, Nova Scotia. Instrument, Magnometer 19. Mag-
8
net, 19L. Chronometer, 1823 (sidereal) daily rate 235.0 gaining on mean time.
Number
of
oflcillatioiia.
Chronometer
time.
Temperatare
Extreme icale reading*.
Time of
100 oedUatiotte.
Right . . . <
Left . . . . <
f
0
10
ao
3X
4»
5«
h. m. s.
9 a8 53.3
a9 44.6
30 37.3
31 34.7
33 37.0
33 19-4
«J-7
18.3
33.9
■ • • •
■ • • •
■ ■ • •
• • ■ •
• • • •
• • • a
■ ■ * •
• a • ■
• • a a
• a • a
34.9
S7.«
34- «
m. t.
Right . . . •
Left .... .
[ too
no
I30
131
'41
.«5'
9 37 36.6
38 29.0
39 »».«
40 19.0
41 11.5
43 03.7
8 44.3
44-4
43*9
44.3
44.5
44-3
(10 h. 14 m. A.M.) Means.
3I.O
»4-
36.
8 44.28
Determination of coefficient of tortion. Value of one ecale div'n = a'.o.
Toraon cirde.
Scale.
Mean.
Di£Ferences.
Logarithmi.
330
34.9
34. »
39.50
1
v = 34
1.50
$400' + *'
3.73*67
60
34.0
38.0
31.00
33.0
33.0
37.50
/
350
5400 (ar. CO.)
6.36761
340
330
M$
36.0
39.35
«-7S
-f
0.00038
Mean v =
1.69
Magnetic and Pendulum Observatiotts,
127
Computation.
r«=r'«(iH-A) (, _(/'_o^)(i + *^
/
where the quantities in the parentheses are respectively the torsion, temperature, and induction corrections, and
T is the corrected time of osdilation.
Obserred time of 100 oscillations
Time of one osdilation . . .
Correction for rate
Correction for arc
= S-»42«
= — 0143
= .0000
T' = 5.2285
.00049
21.0 — 20.4 =r + 0.6
T'
•p'u
«-(/'-/)f
i-\-kH
(ar. CO.) 7- a
T»
M
mH
m
H
Logarithms.
0.71838
1.43676
0.00028
999987
0.00084
<^-t)g
-|- .00029
I— (f-/)^
0.99971
mH= '^^
"p^
»-4377S
where mi = magnetic moment of magnet
H = horizontal force of earth's mag netiam
M-=. moment of inertia of magnet
8.56225
0.99430
2.25145
T — time of oscillation.
1.80800
2.61826
m = 415.2 (at aa.a °C.)
//^= 0.1548
9. 18974
Observations of deflections,
SDate, July 11. Hour, 10 h. 36 m. a.m.
Temperature / = 22*^. 2C.
m
H
3.4»852
mH
m^
1.80800
5.23652
m
2.6x826
128 G. R. Putnam.
«
Section 23. Example of Time Observations in Connection with
Pendulum Work, — In Table P is given an example of one night's
time observations at Umanak, using the star list given in Table O,
The transits of eight stars (four in each position of the telescope)
across the meridian were observed by the eye and ear method, noting
the time of passage across each of five lines. The value of one divi-
sion of the striding level of meridian telescope No. 1 3 (used in these
observations) was i".68 = o*.ii2. To obtain the level error {p) of the
instrument, one-fourth this amount (or o'.028) is to be multiplied into
the sum of the readings west end of level minus sum of readings of
east end. In this form the means of the times are taken for each
star, and the diurnal aberration (AT) and level (Bb) corrections are ap-
plied, and compared with the apparent right ascensions of the stars as
taken from the Berliner Jahrbuch or the American Ephemeris. The
resulting values, a — /, are the chronometer corrections not yet free
from the collimation (c) and azimuth {ci) errors of the instrument. In
Table Q is shown the computation of these errors and the derivation
of the final chronometer correction by the field method of time com-
putation.^ The three stars of small declination (time stars) of each
group are combined and treated as one star by taking the means of
their a — /, C and A respectively. A first approximation to c is found
by dividing the diflFerence between the a — / for the two groups of time
stars (positions E and W^) by the difference of the mean C, Applying
then the collimation correction ( — Cc)^ the quantities a — t — G: re-
sult. The azimuth errors (^g and a J) are next derived by dividing the
diflFerence between a — / — Cc for time stars, and azimuth stars by
the difference in A^ treating each position of the instrument sepa-
rately. The azimuth corrections {Ad) are next applied, and if the
resulting values a — t — Cc — Aa differ for the two positions it indi-
cates that the first value of c may be improved. The difference may
be regarded as the effect of collimation error, and treated as before to
obtain a correction to c. With improved values of ^, a^ and a^ this
method may be continued until the chronometer corrections in the
two positions of the instrument agree. In general where the stars
for observation are conveniently chosen, the first approximation will
be sufficient, as it would be in this example. When satisfactory val-
' This field method of reducing time observations is more fully explained in App. No. 9,
Report C. and G. Survey for 1896 (not yet published).
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
129
ues of c, a, and «. are obtained, the corrections Cc and Aa are applied
to each star separately, and the chronometer corrections (AT") and re-
siduals ( V ) derived. The mean of the former is taken as the final chro-
nometer correction at the epoch of the mean of the right ascensions.
-Sta» List fob Obsk«ting, and Stab Factoks for CoupirrATtON, for
Uhanak, Greenland. Latitude, Ifi) = 70° 40' N.
<3
.
Stai. Factou. 1
.c
1
a
1
1
It
r
B
8
I30
G, R, Putnam,
t
00
bO
<
<
<!
a
H
o
2
O
H«
<
>
OS
H
CO
n
O
OS
H
C/3
H
O
m
n
0
«n
•8
»
n rs
t*>
fO
•*>
o
tn
m
•n o
f»»
0
M
M M
Q
44
4
^*
rf
m
M
4
♦
O M
•A
+
1"
•
•s *
>'
•
CO
.x
%
•
a
^
?
&
?
»
♦
n ix
N fl
M
B
S
S
s
•*>
4
11
•
o
•
o
0
1- fo
" 1
-g
>: <>
n
M
■♦
M
fl
m
0 «n
1
s
(5-
•
«
^
o
•
M
M
00
4
2 i
00
•
o
f
0
00
0
a
0
^
s
•
^!
o
00
•
4
•
a
5-
o
z
o
9
o
« i>N
•« ft
" 1
1
i\
00
00
J?
i<
00
•
lO
•
o
•
en
m 0
•
0 00
ri
o
I"
o
*
H-
•8.
•
M
« *
1
^*
(A
,:
•
a
to
m
00
1*» ♦
M
00
1
M
00
0 Is.
M n
1-
.2S "
00
a
>o
M
M
•
A
O
o
o
== r
«
> <?
o
f>
>o
m
M
•o
tn -
S'S
00
it
i<
n
•
f»»
O
if*
M M
• «
M
•
0
l"
o
•
ma
O^ fl
(5
CA
•J -^
•
B
^
0
« m
o
1
O
to
to n
*8 JT
V-P
S
■
Jjoo
•
•
Q •^
M
3-
•
O
o
o
== 7
»:
•
a
■8
'S
^
o
0
«
•n fq
<£
o
?
H
00
f fo
a
1
o
M
■
4
CO
§
s
d
.X
•
M
II
. o
■
II
•
•
S
.e
■
N
o
•
M
•
00
•8 i
o
m
O
S
+
q6
N
O
• ■
•■ to
8 5?
•• fo
" 1
»
«
1
5^
1^
■
00
•
•i
p
•
n
•
N
m
O
f
5*
M
•
N
lA
S fo
■ •
CJ
&4
»5 .
^
+
a
o
M
n
0
s
;^
S
.fc *:
o>
0
•
poo
n
.«
o
M
o
8 "
^
1
g
► r>
ro
0
o
irt
0
0 0
o
M
y
S
•
8
c
V
.«
5*^
NO
?
«
In.
M
a
^ s
4
r
+
•
5-
d M
•« fO
M
1
5^
O
■
00
•
3-
4
a
•
o
IX
»4
00
M
o
M
o
& 5?
O m
" 1
.pi
d
M
(J
H
V
•
•o
•
(>
ri
•
*
+
•
a
■
M
0
8^
o
o6
M
• •
o
M
8^
M
0
i
•
fO
lA ••
n IX
<u
c
.£: «o
o
N
•
Qoo
M
M
0
o
o
s «
1
1
•s
i
B
t
c
• •
• •
V-
g •
•
•
•
1
m
«
e
*
•
II
•
•
•
II
1
II
II •
1 :
1
b
1
1 i
•J CA
>
»
o
N M
•i
s
1
"g
1
o
8
•S. 1
M
's8u
IP«9i PA
1
3
3
5
3 2
S
•5
s I
Magnetic and Pendulum Observations.
1
1
<
1 + +
II II II
4«?
1 + +
!l II II
J. i ■-. '.
'\ 1 +
1 1 +
1
1
T
r r
f f
r r
I
<i
'f f f f
f f f f
^
a 3
+ 1
+ +
+ 1
19 a
+ +
i
I
Jt ^. % ~
+ 1 + +
? r * »
+ + + +
T
a
f f
f f
•s, ^
f f
H
5
CJ
4111
f??l
iJ
n
1 +
IJ
= s
1" +
8 S. A ■£
r f r F
i ed td I ^ >' » »i
« « I * > I
A u
» »
i ;
1 8
II
132
G, R, Putnam,
Section 24. Example of Pendulum Observations, — Umanak, Green-
land, August 10, 1896. Swing No. 5. Pendulum A 6^ reversed on
knife-edge I.
COINOOBNCBS ObSSKVBD.
•
u
"
<
1
Dummy
momel
Chronometer 1,84a.
Chronometer 177.
II
•<
h. m. s.
Up I 01 17
h. ro. 8.
Down IS 59 35
4.5 mm. = 53'
67.3
oc.
1Z.05
«a|5
Down z 04 18
Up I oa 33
Up I 07 17
Down I 05 31
Down I 10 16
Up z 08 38
Down 8 30 41
Up 8 38 50
Up 8 33 39
Down 8 31 44
Down 8 36 37
Up 8 34 43
Up 8 39 35
Down 8 37 38
z.6mm.^i9'
68.7
10.6
za6
Interval from down ooind-
dencet
7 3a «9
7 33 07
68.0
IOlSs
Interval from up coinci-
dences
7 3a 18
7 33 09
Reduction to
oOC. . .
-».5
65.5
— {
10.70
XlicnDBO
oomctSon.
Mean interval ....
7 3a 18
•
7 3a 08
= 37138 s.
— 37138 s.
Approximate time of two
ooinddenoe intervals
s.
357-5
s.
354-a
Number of coincidence
intervals
«5a
'54
Time in one coincidence
interval
s.
178.54
s.
176.16
The balance of the computation is snmmariied in the tables ol results (HX
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids, 133
AN ANALYTICAL INVESTIGATION OF THE HYDROLY-
SIS OF STARCH BY ACIDS}
By GEORGE W. ROLFE, A.M., and GEORGE DEFREN, M.S.
Received October aa, 1896.
Few problems of commercial analysis have been so complicated
and so discouraging as that of the determination of the components
of starch conversion products. The well-known schemes of commer-
cial analysis of worts and similar products of the action of diastase
are based on the assumption that but two simple compounds are
formed from the starch — maltose and dextrin. In the case of glu-
cose syrups and starch sugars, which are the results of acid hydroly-
sis, it is known that the reaction proceeds farther, as dextrose is
formed from the maltose and dextrin.
Musculus and Gruber^ decided that these reactions went on to-
gether, so that, except at the very beginning or final stage of hydroly-
sis, all of these compounds must be present in solution.
The analysis of acid-converted starch products must, therefore,
take into consideration the presence of the third compound, dextrose.
Much doubt, however, has been thrown on the accuracy of such
analyses, as during the past twenty years the researches of O'SuUivan,
Note. — Among the numerous errors incident to compilation, the authors have bad
their attention drawn to an important clerical error which had been carried through the
calculation of Tables C and E. These tables have therefore been recalculated in this
reprint. While these corrections have changed the carbohydrate values of Table C some-
what and the constants of Table E, the values of IC remain unchanged, and the tabulated
results in Tables I. II, and III are not materially affected. Of the plate, Figure 3 is the
only one affected by these corrections, and as the char^icter of the curves remains unchanged
it was not thought worth the trouble to prepare a new plate drawn exactly to scale, espe-
cially as the correction on a plot of this size is hardly noticeable. In short, the main
results of the investigation remain as originally set forth.
' Reprinted from the Journal of the American Chemical Society, 18, No. 10, October, 1896.
(Received July 3, 1896.)
* BolL Soc. Chim., 2, 3a
134 George IV. Rolfe and George Defren.
Brown, Heron, Morris, Bondonneau, Herzfeld, Musculus, Bruckner,
Fischer, and other distinguished investigators, have shown that not
only the simple compounds referred to can be isolated from starch
products, but also many others of quite distinct optical and chemical
properties. Space will not permit a review of this work, which is in
many points conflicting. The recent conclusion of Lintner and DUU
is that the following compounds result from hydrolysis:^
Hydrolysis with oxalic add. With diastase.
Amylodextrin. Amylodextrin.
Erythrodextrin I. Erythrodextrin I.
Erythrodextrin Ila.
Erythrodextrin lift
Achroodextrin I. Achroodextrin I.
Achroodextrin II. Achroodextrin II.
Isomaltose. Isomaltose.
Dextrose. Maltose.
Others, as Brown and Morris,* deny the existence of the isomalt-
ose of Fischer, Lintner, and Diill, and mention another compound,
maltodextrin, as intermediate between dextrin and maltose.*
In 1885, Brown and Morris* discovered the remarkable law that
at any stage of the conversion of starch by diastase, the total product,
in its optical properties and relation to Fehling solution, behaved ex-
actly as if made up of two components only, maltose and dextrin, so
that it was possible by taking the rotatory power to calculate at once
the cupric reducing power if the total carbohydrates were known.
This law indicated that, however complicated the bodies isolated, they
could be considered as existing in solution as two simple compounds,
and did much to establish the validity of the principles of the usual
commercial analyses of beer worts and similar products.
The method of analysis of glucose syrups and starch sugars im-
plies the assumption of a similar law, but the proof that this law
actually exists under varying conditions of hydrolysis apparently has
not been worked out.
^ Ber. d. chem. Ges., a8, 1 522-1 531.
* J. Chem. Soc, No. 393 (August, 1895).
' A very complete bibliography of the original publications on the carbohydrates is in
ToUen's Handbuch der Kohlenhydrate, i, 331-360 (1888) ; a, 368-398 (1895).
^Ann. Chem. (Liebig), 231, 131.
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids. 135
Our investigations have been made, first, to determine whether
there was any simple constant relation between the optical rotation
and the cupric reducing powers of starch products hydrolyzed under
different conditions ; and, secondly, whether any laws could be found
affecting the three simple bodies assumed to be formed and deter-
mined by the usual methods of analysis.
Incidentally we have collected some data as to the speed of hy-
drolysis, influence of carbohydrates on specific gravity of solutions, and
some looking to the adoption of a more rapid and accurate method of
determining cupric reducing power by Fehling solution. The latter
data are included in a separate paper. The work on specific gravities
is not yet suiBciently complete for publication.
An autoclave of the usual construction was modified in the follow-
ing manner : The thermometer tube was taken out and in its place
was attached a specially constructed valve, by means of which liquor
cooking in a beaker in the interior could be removed at any time dur-
ing the progress of the experiment. This superheated liquor was pre-
vented from vaporizing by passing through a condenser. Excessive
condensation into the beaker was prevented in large part by a well-
fitting lead cap. The illustration sufficiently explains the apparatus.
136 George W, Rolfe and George Defren,
In most of the work, about 100 grams of a good quality of com-
mercial com starch ^ was mixed with a liter of water containing the
hydrolyzing acid. Samples of from 50 cc. to 75 cc. of the liquor were
removed at different stages of the conversion, and immediately shaken
up with a few grams of marble iust. Two drops of tenth normal
sodium hydroxide solution were then added to the sample, which was
cooled and filtered. This method of neutralization, except in cases of
very low converted samples, gave an absolutely clear filtrate, the filtra-
tion being exceedingly rapid, and the removal of the albuminoids being
practically complete. Low converted products often required to be
heated with aluminum hydroxide before filtering.
The samples were tested as follows :
(i) For specific gravity by Westphal balance, corrected to a tem-
perature of 15.5° C.
(2) Specific rotatory power ( [a]^) by a Schmidt and Haensch half-
shade saccharimeter.
(3) Cupric reducing power by means of Fehling solution.
Total So/ids, — Total solids were calculated from the specific grav-
ity of the solution by the factor 0.00386, which was taken to repre-
sent the influence of i gram of the mixed carbohydrates in 100 cc. of
solution. Corrections were made when necessary for the influence
of other substances in solution, not carbohydrates. This factor 386
is practically that of Balling and Brix, and has been found exact for
approximately 10 per cent, solutions of cane sugar, and the balance of
evidence seems to be that it is correct "for starch products.*
We have made several determinations of this factor by drying 10 cc.
of solution on rolls of dried paper at a temperature of 100-105** C.
Our results point to the constancy of this factor 386, even in solu-
tions of low rotatory power, but are not yet complete enough to estab-
lish the value for all rotations.
Therefore, in this work we have adopted the expedient used by
Brown and Morris, and others, and calculated all optical and copper
' An analysis of this starch by the usual commercial methods gave :
Per cent
Starch 89.15
Oil 0.14
Ash 0.12
Albuminoids 0.42
Water 10.21
100.04
* Recent results have modified our views on this point, but as used in our caiculati^ns the
factor 386 is correct.
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids, 137
reduction constants on the assumption that all three carbohydrates in
solution affect the specific gravity like cane sugar when the concen-
tration is approximately 10 per cent. Even if subsequent investiga-
tions show that this view is not ejcactly correct, the relative values of
the constants will not be appreciably affected nor the truth of the laws
as set forth.
To illustrate this method of calculation of constants we give the
foUowing from our own determinations :
10 grams of dextrose dissolved in 100 cc. of water gave a rota-
tion of 30.70° on the Schmidt and Haensch saccharimeter. This
gives [a]j^ as 52.8.^ As the increase in specific gravity per gram of
crystallized dextrose in 100 cc. is 0.00381, \a\^^ is 53.5.
9.751 grams of crystallized maltose anhydride in 100 cc. of water
gave a rotation of 77.40. This gives an absolute specific rotatory
power of 136.6. The specific gravity factor of maltose being 0.00390,
Wd386 ^^ ^35-2*'. No exact figure is known for the influence of crys-
tallized dextrin on the specific gravity of its solution. O'Sullivan gives
0.00385, and the balance of evidence seems to favor this. Hence 195
is probably correct for [al^jg^.^
In like manner the values for K have been reduced to a dextrose
with the factor 386.
Specific Rotatory Power. — All readings were made as nearly as
possible at a temperature of 20° C. in 200 mm. tubes, the mean of
several readings being taken. Corrections for zero error were made
frequently, and the instrument was carefully screened by glass plates
from the heat of the lamps. Comparisons were made with a Laurent
polariscope to determine the value of the division in terms of angular
degrees for sodium light, the accuracy of the quartz wedges having
been verified previously. With standard quartz plates the usual factor
0.346 was obtained, but solutions of commercial glucose of approxi-
mately 10 per cent, gave the figure 0.344, which agrees with the re-
cent work of Rimbach* and other investigators. We have taken^
therefore, the latter factor in our calculation.
' Precautions against bi-rotation were taken in both examples cited.
* Brown and Heron. Ann. Chem. (Liebig), 199, 190-243.
*Ber. d. Chem. Ges., 27, 2282.
138
George IV. Rolfe and George Defren.
TABLE A.
Comparison of Schmidt and Haensch Half-Shade Saccharimeter with that
OF Laurent Polariscope Reading in Angular Degrees.
S. AND H. Saccharimbtsr.
(Using bat-wing burner and lens.)
Laurbnt Polariscopb.
(Sodium flame.)
Test.
M
B
1
1
•|
^w
\m
^
§
■a
- •
•o
t
•J
M
jj
«
V
j5
«
ii
s
V
1^
8
N
U
^
N
u
o
/ = 20— 22)
Quartz A
Quartz A
Quartz A
Quartz A
Glucose A .
Glucose B .
Glucose B .
Glucose C .
Glucose D .
(^=25)
Hydrolyzed starch
products . . .
i
62.965
62.800
62.970
62.836
77.510
76.355
76.355
76.535
76.110
E. 92.73"
F. 24.84
0.300
62.665
21^40/
0
21.666°
0.150
62 650
21° 40^
0
21.666°
0.290
62.680
IV 40.2'
06'
21.660=
0.130
62.706
21° 40.7'
0.6/
21.666°
0.277
77.233
26° 35'
0
26 582°
0.150
76.205
26° 15.3'
0
26.254°
0.150
76.205
26° 14'
0
26.233°
0.150
76.385
26° 18'
0
26300°
a 130
75.980
26° 10.3'
a6'
26.162°
00
00
92.73
24.84
31° 56'
8° 32'
—1'
—1'
31.95°
8.55°
0.3457
0.3458
0.3458
0.3455
0.34*2
0.3445
0.3442
0.3443
0.34f3
0.3445
a3442
Cupric Reducing Power. — Our method is practically that of
O' Sullivan, first published in 1876. The copper is weighed as the
oxide. We have found this method exact and rapid. An analytical
investigation of this process has been made by one of us, and given
in detail in a separate paper.
Plotted Results, — To show the relationship of the copper-reduc-
ing power, and the specific rotatory power of the products formed
during the progress of the hydrolysis of the starch, we have plotted
our results, taking as abscissae the decreasing values of the rota-
tory power, from the amylodextrin stage (195°) to that of dextrose
( Wd 86^^ S3S°)» ^^^ ^s ordinates the cupric reducing power {K^^ tak-
ing that of an equivalent weight of dextrose as 100.* (See Figure 2.)
■ Using Welsbach burner.
'Data given in Table B.
Atialytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids. i 39
140
George IV, Rolfe and George Defren,
<
<
a
as
M
CQ X
CO
o
M
^N
CO
S
o
fits
>
•98C;y
985 «W
'9pixojnddo3
•^aifiin{3oes
•S-Si X)i
•33 J8)«Ak
*33)aiioniy
1
*ina»ao3
•pom
•MiMtajd
Mi9qdfloui)v
-ipjv}« ranuO
*8apioo3
'»lduiw
•on^
• ■ •
ooo
c4 t* eg fo ^ 50 «^ fr*
i-t \O«oe*4Ci0S^
i-H ro "^ »o »o vD t*i
C> C$OOC>OOC>OC>
00
o
s
■ • • • a
00000
00
0\ i-H
• • • •
0000
U) u^ ^
l> l-H ^
»-< -^ O^
eg
o
Ovo
- ^^
c>c>o
_ _ . S OOtOfMOf-HOvvOOH vO f-iSt^«-ii-i O 0^^*»0l> ^ >OC)S
■^ ostein o^ t>.to'^Kt-ioo^oo*^ "^ <SoyD*o»«»o t«- esiot<«NO »o '?•-lC^
rH i-H f-l i-H i-H i-H i-H f-l i-l f-H i^ i^ i-l i^ i^
«l
lO •— ICQ .
Sr^
5i? s *o 3 w^ 00 a:
82^ o c4 <o »o t^ 00 1
O i-H i-H f-< f-< ^H ^H I
^ c>do c> ooddc>oc5oo o
at^OQi
€gc5
odddd
t* Q toobfO"^ sj5 o«Sd
d dodd d ddd
O to»oON fo oor^^oONO'*^^*©*^^ »o ONOpp»o eg r»^ioe4 00 oji>oq
S »o5*PO to oOOTvoS»o^?"^S m lO'^'cnro**^ O t^^O^co 0\ oo5»o
NO Ti'^t^ Qn Q op «o 10 00 00 00 CO fo -^t- t<«iOv^egv3 5*- *QQ»0 Ov ♦O'*
Lo o^t<«to v^ ^ ^ t-4 1-< ^H f«4 f-i eg eg •— t 1-4 1-4 ^-1 i-H o vv oPooooc^i r« cipt<«t<»
S SSS S S3SS38SSS S SSSS5 S SSSS S SSS
• « • ^^
• • • CTk
• • • CT^
• • •
s
8> • ■ • ^p • • •
• • • • ^^ • • •
«H : : : «»H
t p*' • •
• • •
• • •
u
• • • KH
• • . »l4
0 : : : : G : :
W» • • • M • •
• • • • >A4 • •
eg
• eg
eg
eg * • * • eg
« • • ■ ■
o • • • o
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• a •
O lOiOtO to toiOQQQOQOQ to QtoQtOQ to toQQQ cg locgto
i-H i-H i-H i-H I— < eg 04 eg HH
eg ro^
to *-* eg fo '^ to NO t^ 00 ov O ^H cgro^toNO f-^ eg«0'^to eg «o^to
s
fn
I
•8
I
I
I
I
-a
o
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids. 141
<
<
c
<
Z,
C «
M
>
mi
o
>
•98«-y
0.8561
0.9367
0.3329 .
0.5146
0.6421
0.7727
a2877
0.4946
0.5936
0.7348
i
0
i-4eg(sar<^ vO vbt^oooo <-*
<:^<^^<:i d dddd 0
0.3619
0.6255
0.8882
0.8997
d
0.3526
0.4917
d
■98£^»]
70.31
62 34
162 3
137.5
123.4
99.61
180.9
170 6
162.7
157.0
\0 OOvovOO 1-4
toxpvOOO
'^^t^fod
i-ii-i
•
157.7
135.5
143a 2
'apfXDJaddoQ
0.2281
0.2493
0.0890
0.1247
0.1551
0.1863
0.0679
0.1395
0.1617
0.1994
a0344
0.0539
0 0751
0.0828
0.1892
0.2100
0.2369
0.2587
0.2676
0.0329
0.0975
0.1337
0.2272
a2093
d
0.0766
0.1125
75.9 0.1145
*9ii|pcaj J91
••munpovs
So^ ^ o«oo S ^So
t^ OrONOM 0
•-4
OC40000 C4
oov8S5S So
71.2
65.8
-AuSogpodg
SS S SS^i
■ • • • • •
.0327
.0393
.0380
.0380
■
.0341
.0343
.0352
.0308
§ §§§& S3 SSS;^ SS
s ssss s ssss s
.0301
.0318
.0352
1
*»•»*• Ak
• •
. . . •
• • • •
s
•* . • •
• . • .
....
....
450
• • • .
a • . .
....
450
a a . .
• a • .
....
. . a .
0
JO
a .
. «
?
• •
• •
• • •
• • •
a • • •
• a • •
'30)iinoaiy
• •
• •
• •
• •
1000
• • • •
• • • •
• • a •
1000
a • a a
a a • •
a a a a
»
• a . •
• . . ■
....
a . • •
0 . • . • ^)
\fi .... 10
....
. • a .
• • • .
. • . .
....
• • . .
s
. •
a a
a a
8
d
<
1099093
• •
• •
mI^ « • •
^H • • •
c|; : : :
<
....
• as.
^v^::::^y.
a . a a
a a • a
-g
a
"g
TWR!
■
• ■
• •
• •
• • •
0 • • •
a • • •
• 9 •
^4 • • •
u ...
a • • •
0
X
• • • .
a a a .
• • m 9
. • . •
HCl
....
....
....
....
HCl
• • . a
. a • •
• a • .
• • ■ a
0:
■ a
. a
a a
a a
<?
^
■amnajd
• •
•« : ; :
« : . :
e4
. a a a
• • a .
« ::::<>»
a a a a
. . a «
O)
. a
a a
e4
*i|axc)s soreif)
a ■
. a
<^ • ■ •
wA ...
^H . • a
^^ ...
fH ...
1^ ...
a • . .
a a . a
....
^^ . a . a 0
^^ a a a . ^
• ■ a a
....
. a . •
. a a a
s
. a
. a
a a
8
•
9, SS8 » $SR
*o
as;$s
JO
S§ 8
|o JMiuniM
^^
o) ro-^to
•-H e^rO"^
^H
e»jfO"^»n
^ cg«o^»o ^
MfO^u^
•^
CsJfO
e4
im^
»o
>o
00 Ov
8
S
142
George W. Rolfe and George Defren,
<
<
fS
*•*
di
i ^
I .
m g
< fa
H O
CO
en
S
o
Q
•98S;/
•98£ °[0]
'appro jisddo3
•S Si Xii
■33 aaicyMi
'33 )imouiv
Q
<
')U93ao3
•pttra
'Sincsaad
•aiaqdsoimv
'qsjos smuQ
'8ap[oo3
*9|duite8
|o jaqinnj^
•ann
t^Q so
POO fO
e4csi c«4
OO d
^ O^ O^ fO u^il^OOCTk Ovj lO l>. 00
dod d dood d oddo
d ddod
00>O fO
r»fO -^
ON On 00
|>0Q 5 1^
VOOO ON O
^
O OO O O OO o o
■^J-00
oiON
PO OOONVO
ON
ON
vQQpdcS
^OnOOvO
ir- fOvOl>-
^^
s
r>.PO*^ O
c^ooot>.
^•i■«-^0
0\ 0\ u^ t>»
fOiO "«*-PO
On vOio iO
•^00
^
l>» On lo O "^
u-i 1— lOO u^ vr.
r* i-H 1^ ON 00 nO 5^toi-HPo ^ I— It** K) ^ ^ ^^vOpo
t>. lo •—(•—(00 ^ onvqoco s? c*aNi>»i-H 00 ^i-h^opo
f—t I— t I-H I-H f-4 O ■— I f— ( I— t ^H O O «-H »-H I— t •— • I— ( f-H •— I «— I
or* ^
PO»o vO
f— 1 1— t
do
ooo
XXX
o odod d oodo o odod
^ POON CJ
d od d
a\ ooe4 csj ?3
^ 00 "". o o
O .-HOi M <>i
<5 GG C> d
XXX
xxxx
XXXX
voo csa i-io\«>» r* soopot^ ov pocm^"»i- n ooi>.pooo oq -^Tt* -^t-
i-H ^ 00 OOPO^ QN u^i>iu^t>l o 0N"<*-P0NO »o dcau^-^ d •-i»o vo
t^vO 00 POPOPO ON oOvOm^ f-H OOt^vOu^ On ^^popo O ^ po *o
NO »o»o t* -r
t>l SDCN CN O *
00 "C -^ PO "^ ■
ON to
S3
f-H VO
■^ 00 oa 00 »o r*
f-H ^ lO u^ to ^
iC0Q»O O QOOO \0 nQpO »o
^'i>-oc«4 po POPOPOPO ^ ^Jc4 po
33S S SSSS S SSSS S SSSS $ SS S
00 CNO 20 «"•
OO O o
<^ • ■ ■
PO • . •
• • o
. • to
8
PO
- • o
• • to
• • k"j • ■ * ^^ • • ■ ■ ^^ * • • • t^l ■ • • • ^^ • •
• • ^^ • • • ^J • ■ • a ^^ • • • • 1^^ • • • • ^J « •
S. . o
. . lO
o
• • • «
: : : cj
' ' ' X
o
C/D
u
X X
<s
eg
<SJ
PO ^
lO • • . UQ * • ■ • l/^
^O ■ • • \0 ■ ■ • • vj^
^> • • • • ^^ • ^^ ^> • <^
i-H
fO vOt«*ON
^
QvoQiO
c^poooc^a
o
PO
SOCNCQu-j
•— (i-H
-o
I-H
SS!?S
o
f-H
28
o
^H
.-HCM
g 8
—1
PO"*-
^ CO ^to
•—1
csjpoii-to
I-H
cgpo'^to
f-H
CQPO-^tO
I-H
e^po
^H
I-H cQro
CQ PO
s
»
■
s
s
3
s
to
PO
ON
PO
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids, 143
The results point to the remarkable fact that the cupric reducing
power of the total product bears a constant relation to the specific
rotatory power, even when the starch is hydrolyzed under widely vary-
ing conditions. Hence, given the one, the value of the other can be
calculated. To a rotation of about 99°, the plotted results outline with
extraordinary exactness the arc of a circle, the equation of which is
very nearly
^ +y — 758^ + 772.4^ = o»
which exactly intercepts the "zero" and "hundred" points at 195
and 53.5, respectively. The upper part of the curve is not so well
defined, the results showing more discrepancy at the high conversion
stages. This may be due to some decomposition, and the formation
of "reversion" products as stated by Wohl,^ Maercker, Ost, and oth-
ers. Wohl's figures show the maximum amount of dextrose possible
to be 92.7 per cent, of the theoretical quantity. Others give 96 to
97 per cent., the missing dextrose being supposed to be converted into
dextrin-like bodies identical with those variously described as "galli-
sin," " isomaltose," etc. We have experimented but little along this
line, having made but one hydrolysis with this special object, using
T^ hydrochloric acid at four atmospheres pressure, with the follow-
ing results :
Time of cooking. [a]p
60 minutes 55.24
90 minutes 53.09
120 minutes 53.40
150 minutes 54.42
While several of our own results at the low rotations show a cu-
pric reducing power of only about 96 per cent, of that of pure dex-
trose, we do not think that we are justified in arriving at any definite
conclusion with the data at hand.
That the solutions begin to color considerably at rotations beyond
90® is, moreover, a strong indication of such decomposition. On the
other hand, this accounts for much of the discrepancy of the plot at
this part of the curve, as it is exceedingly difficult to get accurate
readings on the saccharimeter of these highly colored solutions.
Obviously, too, slight errors in the readings affect the calculations of
the rotatory power the most at these lowest rotations.
*Ber. der chem. Ges., 23, 2101.
144 George W. Rolfe and George Defren.
Quite as noteworthy are the curves^ plotted by taking the values
of maltose, dextrin, and dextrose as computed for every five degrees of
rotation from the values of K, as given by this curve.
Fig. 3.
In this work we have figured constants for solids estimated from
the specific gravities of solutions by the factor 386, and calculated
percentages by the well-known equations :
g-\-m + d= i.oo
g -\- 0.61m ^ A"
i9Srf+ i3S,2m + 53.Sg=a
Where g is per cent, dextrose,
m is per cent, maltose,
and d is per cent, dextrin.
a+ 141.5^—195
"'="«'« iefi^
Examining these curves we see that the dextrin starting from the
maximum of 100 per cent, gradually falls to zero near the rotation
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids, 145
corresponding to dextrose, while the maltose gradually rises, reaches
a maximum percentage of 46.2 at about 129^ rotation, corresponding
to the usual state of conversion of commercial glucose, and then falls,
disappearing at 53.5°. The dextrose, on the contrary, steadily mounts
to 100 per cent. It will be noted, too, that at the point of maximum
maltose the dextrin and dextrose, as shown by the intersection of the
curves, are present in equal quantity.
Tests with phenylhydrazin acetate show the presence of the dex-
trose distinctly at about 185^, and we had hoped to prove the gradual
rise of the dextrose percentage by means of the dextrosazon. While
copious precipitates of this beautiful compound were obtained, any
attempt of ours to isolate it in anything like quantitative amounts
proved a failure, even in solutions containing a known amount of pure
dextrose. We hope to take this up more fully in a later investigation.
We have also calculated a table (Table C) from the curves, giving
the value of maltose, dextrose, and dextrin within .1 per cent, for suc-
cessive stages of acid hydrolysis represented by each degree of rota-
tion between 195 and 53.5. This table, calculated for the factor
386, makes no allowance for possible decomposition of high-converted
products.
146
George IV. Rolfe and George Defren,
TABLE C.
Calculated Values of Cupric Reducing Powers and Parts of Maltose, Dex-
trose, AND Dextrin per Unit of Carbohydrate for Each Degree of Rota-
tion OF A Normally Hydrolyzed Starch Solution.
•^ ^0386.
-^386.
••386.
fsw.
^386.
195
0.000
0.000
0.000
1.000
194
0.011
0.017
0.001
0.982
193
0.022
0.038
0.001
0.966
192
0.032
0.052
0.001
0.947
191
0.041
0.068
0.002
0.930
190
0.051
0.084
0.002
0.914
189
0.061
0.098
0.002
0.900
188
0.071
0.114
0.003
0.883
187
ao8i
0.128
0.003
0.869
186
0.090
0.143
0.005
0.852
185
0.100
0.157
0.005
0.838
184
0J09
0.170
0.008
0.822
183
0.118
0.183
0.010
0.807
182
0.127
0.195 .
0.012
0.793
181
0.137
0.207
0.014
0.779
180
0.146
0.219
0.016
0.765
179
0.155
0.227
0.019
0.754
178
0.164
0.237
0.022
0.741
177
0.173
0.247
0.024
0.729
176
0.182
0.257
0.027
0.716
175
0.191
0.266
0.031
0.708
174
0.199
0.274
0.034
0.692
173
0.207
0.282
0.038
0.680
172
0.216
0.290
0.042
0.668
171
0.224
0.298
0.046
0.656
170
0.233
0.305
0.050
0.645
169
0.242
0.312
0.053
0.635
168
0.251
0.318
0.056
0.625
167
0.259
0.325
0.060
0.615
166
0.267
0.331
0.064
0.605
165
0.275
0.337
0.068
0.595
164
0.283
0.343
0.073
0.584
163
0.292
0.350
a076
0.572
162
0.300
0.356
0.083
0.561
161
0.308
0.362
0.088
0.550
160
0.316
0.367
0.093
0.540
159
0.324
0.374
0.098
0.528
158
0.332
0.381
0.102
0.517
157
0.340
0.387
0.106
a507
156
0.348
0.392
0.110
0.498
155
0.356
0.397
0.115
a488
154
0 365
0.402
0.120
0.478
153
0.373
0.407
0.125
0.468
152
0.381
0.412
0.130
0.458
151
0.389
0.414
0.135
0.451
150
0.397
0.421
0.140
0.439
149
0.404
0.425
0.146
0.429
148
0.412
0.429
0.152
0.419
147
0.419
0.432
0.158
0.410
146
0.427
0.434
0.163
0.403
145
0.435
0.436
0.169
0.395
144
0.442
0.439
0.175
0.386
143
0.450
0.442
0.183
0.375
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids, 147
TABLE Z.^ConHnuid.
^ ^0386.
-^386.
•*3«6.
^386.
''j86.
142
0.458
0.445
0.188
0367
141
a465
0.448
0193
0.359
140
a473
0.450
0199
0.351
139
0.481
0.452
a206
0.342
138
0.488
0.454
0.212
a334
137
0.496
0.456
a219
0.325
136
a 503
0.458
0.224
0.318
135
0.510
0,459
Q.230
0.311
134
0.517
0.459
0.237
0.304
133
0.524
0.460
0.244
0.296
132
0.531
0.460
azso
0.290
131
0.538
0.461
0.257
0.282
130
a546
0.462
0.264
a274
129
0.553
0.462
0.272
0.266
128
0.560
0.462
0.279
a258
127
0.567
0.461
0 284
0.253
126
0.574
0.460
0.294
0.246
125
0.580
0.460
0.301
a239
124
0.588
0.459
0.308
a233
123
0.595
0.458
0.315
a227
12?.
0.602
0.456
0.323
0.221
121
0 608
0.455
0.331
0.214
120
0.614
0.453
0338
0.209
119
0.621
0.451
0346
a203
118
0.628
0.450
0.354
0.196
117
0.635
0.448
0.361
0.191
116
0.642
0.446
0.369
0.185
115
0.649
0.444
0.377
0.178
114
0 656
0.442
0.387
0.171
113
0.663
0.439
0.395
0.166
112
0.669
0.436
0.403
0.161
111
0.675
0.433
0411
0.156
110
0.681
0.429
0420
0.152
109
0.SS7
0.425
0.428
0.147
108
0.694
0.421
0.436
0.143
107
0.700
0.418
0.445
0.137
105
0.707
0.414
0.453
ai33
105
0.713
0.411
0462
0.127
104
0 719
0.407
0.471
0.122
103
0 725
0.402
0480
0118
102
0.732
0.398
0.489
0.113
101
0.738
0.393
0.498
0.109
100
0.744
0 389
0.508
0.103
99
0.750
0.384
0.518
0098
98
0.757
0.380
0.527
0.093
97
0.763
0.374
0.536
0090
96
0.769
0.368
0545
0.087
95
0.775
0.362
0.554
0.084
94
0.781
0.357
0.563
0.080
93
0 787
0.352
0.572
0.076
92
0.793
0.347
0.581
0072
91
0.799
0.342
0.591
0.068
90
0 805
0.336
0600
0.064
89
0.810
0 329
0.610
0061
88
0 816
0.322
0.620
0 058
87
0.822
0.315
0630
0.055
86
0.828
0.308
0.640
0.052
148
George W. Rolfe and George Defren.
TABLE C. -^ Concluded. '
'■ D386.
-^386.
*'386.
^3«6.
-^,86.
85
0.834
0.302
0.650
0.048
84
0.839
0.294
0.660
O.OH
83
0.844
0.287
0.670
0.043
82
0.850
0.279
0.680
0.041
81
0.856
0.272
0.690
a038
80
0.862
0.264
0.701
a035
79
0.867
0.256
0.712
0.032
78
0.872
0.247
0.722
0.031
77
0.878-
0.237
0.733
0.030
76
0.884
0.228
0.744
a028
75
0.889
0.219
0.755
0.026
74
0.895
0.210
0.766
0.024
73
0.901
0.199
0.778
0.023
72
0.906
0.189
0.789
0.022
71
0.911
0.179
0.791
0.020
70
0.916
0.170
0.811
0.018
69
0.921
a 159
0.824
0.017
68
0.926
0.149
0.835
0.016
67
0.932
0139
0.846
0.015
66
0.937
0.130
a856
aoi4
65
0.942
0.121
0.867
0.012
64
0.947
0.110
0.879
0.011
63
0.952
0.099
0.880
0.011
62
0.957
0.088
0.902
0.010
61
0.962
0.078
0.914
0.006
60
0.967
0.068
0.926
0.006 :
59
0.972
0.057
0.937
0.006 1
58
0.977
0.047
0.948
0.005
57
0.982
0.036
0.960
aoo4
56
0.987
0.025
0.971
0.004
55
0.992
0.015
0.982
0.003
54
0.997
0.005
0.993
0.002
53.5
1.000
0.000
1.000
0.000
It would seem obvious that we are now prepared to determine
whether a sample of glucose is a product of one hydrolysis or is a
mixture of two separately converted products, by comparison of the
actual analytical results with those calculated from the rotatory power.
For testing this method we have made a few analyses of commer-
cial glucoses obtained in open market.
In the manufacture of glucose syrup all the starch is not hydro-
lyzed under strictly the same conditions, as the factory practice is to
pump the starch into the converter which is under steam pressure
and already contains the hydrolyzing acid. As the filling of a con-
verter takes about one-third of the total time of cooking, it is clear
that there is a radical difference in the time of hydrolysis of different
portions of starch. Nevertheless, we have found that samples known
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids, 149
to have been made under these conditions conform to the laws of our
curve, and the evidence seems strong that those which depart widely
from these conditions are mechanical mixtures.
The following determinations of four samples of commercial glu-
cose, giving the cupric reducing power as found and as calculated for
the corresponding rotation, will illustrate the method :
Sample.
''Dsse.
-^386 (obtained.)
-^386 (caloilated.)
L C. Pope Co. (J) ... .
IL C. Pope Co. (M) . . . .
III. RockfordCo
IV. Chicago Co.
131.7
125.4
141.9
137.2
0.520
a578
0.454
a505
•
0.537
0.578
0.457
0.495
Evidently II and III are normally hydrolyzed. IV is possibly a
mixture, while I is undoubtedly so. As this latter is a sample of jelly
goods which in factory practice are often made by mixing two lots, our
conclusion is strengthened.
From the results as a whole we have concluded that the evidence
is strong : (i) That in any homogeneous acid-converted starch product,
irrespective of the conditions of hydrolysis, the specific rotatory power
always represents the same chemical composition.
(2) That but three simple carbohydrates,^ possibly in molecular
aggregates, exist in the solution of a starch product hydrolyzed by
acids.
Determination of the Conversion of Commercial Glucose.
In the manufacture of glucose it is obviously essential to have
a rapid means of determining the degree of conversion of the starch
during the cooking process. The usual factory practice is to control
the conversion by means of iodine color tests. These tests are usu-
ally made by adding a definite number of drops of standard iodine so-
lution to a test-tube of the cooled glucose liquor. The tint at which
' Leaving out of consideration the possible small amounts of products formed by rever-
sion.
150 George W, Rolfe and George Defren,
the conversion is considered complete varies in general practice from
that corresponding to [a]^ =128 to [a]^ ^ I35, the variation being
even greater in some cases, depending on the ideas of the manufac-
turer, and the grade of goods desired.
By daily practice workmen become quite expert in making these
iodine tints, which are usually carried out by crude methods and read
off without comparison with any standard. Nevertheless, the product,
when examined by more refined laboratory processes, shows wide vari-
ations from day to day, which does not appear surprising when we ex-
amine into the errors of such color tests.
Assuming that the test is carried out under uniform conditions of
concentration and proportion of reagent to liquor to be tested, which
is by no means always the case, the other conditions affecting the
color are (i) temperature, (2) turbidity, and (3) illumination.
Uniform temperature can be obtained easily by some simple cool-
ing device, as a stream of running water.
The acid converter liquors are always turbid when tested, as filtra-
tion in this rapid testing is impracticable. The turbidity, however, is
fairly constant. It is the third condition, that of illumination, which
is constantly variable, and which gives rise to the greatest error.
This source of error can be largely eliminated by the use of a com-
parison standard, prepared of the same volume as that used in the
color test, and hermetically sealed in a glass tube of the standard size
used in testing. Mixtures of solutions of iron salts with finely pulver-
ized glass, giving the requisite turbidity when shaken, can be easily
made to exactly match the iodine tint, and will preserve their intensity
indefinitely. When properly adjusted by' means of polariscopic tests,
such standards have served well to fix the point of conversion within
narrow limits, and have done much to insure a uniform product.
It is of course important that there should be in the hands of the
chemist or superintendent of the works a much more exact means of
testing the degree of conversion. This is most naturally accomplished
by determining the specific rotatory power.
We have arranged a table for quickly calculating specific rotatory
power, and found it so useful that we venture to publish it. The fol-
lowing simple calculation will sufficiently explain the principles on
which the table has been worked out :
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids, 151
TABLE D.
Table for Detbrmining Specific Rotatory Power of Solutions of 7.5o°«io° Brix
BT Reading of Ventzke Saccharimeter.
Briz.
per 100 cc
Log "•*•.
Brix.
Specific gravitjr.
per 100 cc.
Log '7 'o.
7.50
1.0298
7.724
0.3477
8.80
1.0352
9.110
0.2760
7.55
1.0300
7.777
0.3447
8.85
1.0354
9.163
0.2735
7.60
1.0302
7.829
0.3418
8.90
1.0356
9.217
0.2709
7.65
1.0304
7.883
0.3388
8.95
1.0358
9.270
0.2684
7.70
1.0306
7.936
0.3359 ,
9.00
1.0360
9.324
0.2657
7.75
1.0308
7.989
0.3330
9.05
1.0362
9.378
0.2634
7.80
1.0310
8.042
0.3301
9.10
1.0364
9.430
0.2610
7.85
1.0312
8.096
0.3272
9.15
1.0366
9.484
0.2585
7.90
1.0315
8.149
0.3244
9.20
1.0368
9.538
0.2560
7.95
1.0317
8.202
0.3216
9.25
1.0370
9.592
0.2536
8.00
1.0319
8.255
0.3187
9.30
1.0372
9.646
0.2510
8.05
1.0321
8.308
0.3160
9.35
1.0374
9.690
0.2488
8.10
1.0323
8.361
0.3132
9.40
1.0376
9.753
0.2464
8.15
1.0325
8.415
0.3104
9.45
1.0378
9.807
0.2440
8.20
1.0327
8.468
0.3077
9.50
1.0381
9.862
0.2415
8.25
1.0329
8.522
0.3050
9.55
1.0383
9.916
0.2391
8.50
1.0331
8.575
0.3022
9.60
1.0385
9.970
0.2368
8.35
1.0333
8.629
0.2995
9.65
1.0387.
10.023
0.2346
8.40
1.0335
8.682
0.2969
9.70
1.0389
10.077
0.2323
8.45
1.0337
8.735
0.2943
9.75
1.0391
10.130
0.2300
a50
1.0339
8.788
0.2916
9.80
1.0393
10.185
0.2277
8.55
1.0341
8.842
0.2889
9.85
1.0395
10.239
0.2252
8.60
1.0343
8.895
0.2864
9.90
1.0397
10.293
0.2231
8.65
1.0345
8.949
0.2838
9.95
1.0399
10.347
0.2207
8.70
1.0347
9.002
0.2812
10.00
1.0401
10.401
0.2185
8.75
1.0350
9.056
0.2786
• ■ • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
Taking the usual formula for the specific rotatory power, a = —
Iw
where a is the angle of rotation of w grams of the active substance
in V CC- of solution observed through a column / decimeters long. If
we make ^z = a, it is plain w is the weight of substance under stand-
ard conditions which will give a direct reading of the specific rotatory
power without calculation. In an instrument reading in angular de-
grees under the usual conditions of z/ = 100 and I = 2, w is therefore
If a is the reading of a saccharimeter with the Ventzke scale,
te; = 50 X 0.344 = 17.20, and the specific rotatory power of any solu-
tion of known concentration of an optically active substance will be
152 George W. Rolfe und George Defren.
'' . The easiest way of finding the concentration of glucose solu-
tes
tions with sufficient exactness for this work is by the Brix (or Balling)
hydrometer, as this instrument is now made of great accuracy.
Brix hydrometers are carried in regular stock of the larger houses
dealing in chemical apparatus for brewers and sugar manufacturers,
with scales having a range of about five degrees and easily read to
0.05 per cent. Thermometers are attached having corrections for tem-
perature marked on the scale. Concentrations of about 10 per cent,
are most convenient for polarizing; hence a spindle will be needed
reading from 5 to 10 per cent.
The method of determining rotatory powers is as follows : The
glucose is diluted to an approximately 10 per cent, solution. An exact
Brix (or Balling) reading is taken, corrected for standard temperature^
and the solution polarized in a 200 mm. tube in any saccharimeter with
1 7 20
the Ventzke scala The logarithm of the factor -Ll — correspond-
w
ing to the Brix reading is then found in the table. Therefore, the
1 7.20
calculation which is, log [a]^ = log -^- — + log ^1 simply requires
finding the logarithm of the saccharimeter reading, and the number
corresponding to the sum of this, and the logarithm given in the
table. This number is the required specific rotatory power.^
Thus a solution of 7.85 Brix having a reading of 51.7*^, Ventzke^
has the rotatory power of its anhydrous carbohydrates determined as
follows :
By the table, the corresponding logarithmic factor is 0.3272.
Log 51.7= 1.713s
Factor 0.3272
2.0407 = log 109.8,
which is the required rotatory power.
In this calculation no correction is made for ash, which, as a rule»
does not affect the results appreciably.
The errors due to the slight variations in the concentration of the
solutions used and changes in the temperature of the laboratory are
' Obviously a table made on the scheme of the well-known Schmitz table for cane-sugar
syrups would do away with all calculation. Such a table is, however, rather bulky for inser-
tion here.
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids. 155
too small to be taken into consideration in factory work or in general
commercial analysis. The method in practice is quite as rapid as the
"quotient of purity" determination of cane-sugar syrups. We suggest
that this, or some similar scheme, be uniformly used for expressing the
results of all polarimetric investigations of honeys, syrups, and simi-
lar indeterminate mixtures of carbohydrates met with in commercial
analysis, instead of merely giving the polarizations, or the specific
rotatory powers referred to the weights of the samples. The advan-
tages are obvious. Such analytical results would be close approxima-
tions to the exact specific rotatory powers of the mixed anhydrous
carbohydrates, and would be convenient of interpretation by inspec-
tion as being directly comparable on what is, for all practical purposes^
an absolute standard, and the one used in all strictly scientific work of
the kind.
The Speed of the Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids.^
The laws of the speed of hydrolysis of the carbohydrates with the
exception of that of cane-sugar have been but little studied. Solo-
mon ^ has collected some data on the action of various acids at boiling
temperature. Welhelmy' showed in the case of the catalytic action
of hydrochloric acid on cane-sugar, that if the amount of acid and the
temperature remained constant the rate of the inversion at any speci-
fied moment is proportional to the amount of unchanged sugar present
at that moment.
That is, M A^ represent the amount of sugar originally present,
X the amount of this sugar changed oyer in any period of time /, and c
dx
the reaction-constant, we have —tt -=- c {A^ — x).
The relative values of the constant ^, of the various acids in their
action on cane-sugar, have been determined by several observers, nota-
bly Ostwald,* who has compared, by means of their constants, the rel-
ative effect of chemically equivalent quantities of a large number of
acids, taking the constant of hydrochloric acid as a standard with the
arbitrary value of 100.
' We are greaUy indebted to Professor A. A. Noyes, of this department, for valuable aid
in calculating the results of this work on speed of hydrolysis.
•J. prakt Chem, (2), 28.
*Ber. d. Chem. Ges., z8, 221 1.
^ J. prakt Chem., 401 (1884).
154 George W, Rolfe and George Defren.
Recent work shows that acids act on salicin,^ one of the glucosides,
in a manner analogous to that of cane-sugar, the speed of hydrolysis
of this body by the different acids bearing the same relation to hydro-
chloric acid.
The observations noted above suggested the possibility that in the
hydrolysis of starch the acids would show the same proportional speed
of reaction. This is an especially interesting problem, because the
starch molecule is exceedingly complicated, the molecular weight be-
ing undoubtedly very high. Starch hydrolysis, however, must be
considered as somewhat different from that of cane-sugar or salicin.
While these are easily soluble in cold water, starch is totally insoluble
at ordinary room temperature. On the other hand, amylodextrin, the
pjroduct of decomposition of starch by boiling water, is somewhat sol-
uble in cold water, its solubility increasing with rise of temperature.
As by the customary procedure in determining speed of hydroly-
sis, it would be necessary to ascertain the exact moment when all the
starch has been converted into the soluble form, a point not conven-
iently determined, we have adopted a method of measurement based
on the following principles :
The conversion products of starch, with the possible exception of
those of very high rotatory power, are easily soluble in water, and can
be looked upon as mixtures of maltose, dextrose, and dextrin.
The starch first changes to amylodextrin. The hydrolysis then pro-
ceeds by successive stages through the so-called maltodextrin, maltose,
and dextrose. ** Reversion,** so-called, may take place to some extent,
a small amount of the dextrose forming dextrin-like bodies, "gallisin,"
"isomaltose,** etc., but this point is not considered in this work. The
dextrin may, therefore, be looked upon as the original substance hydro-
lyzed, and maltose and dextrose as successive products of the reaction.
Further, we have shown that, whatever the condition of hydrolysis
by acids, the specific rotatory power of any conversion product cor-
responds to a definite chemical composition, tables for determining
which we have constructed.
Thus, for instance, a conversion product of i6o° has been proved
to contain 54.0 per cent, dextrin, the remainder being maltose and
•dextrose.
Hence, the time of taking any sample after the contents of the
' Noyes and Hall ; Ztschr. phys. Chem., 240 (1895).
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids. 1 5 5
autoclave have acquired constant temperature, which requires about ten
minutes, can be taken as the initial point for determining speed of
hydrolysis, and all subsequent samples referred to this, as it is obvious
that in any sample we can ascertain the dextrin unacted upon at that
stage of the hydrolysis. The same holds true of maltose.
We have to deal with two reactions, the first being the hydrolysis
of dextrin to maltose.
If A^ is the amount of dextrin at the initial point taken, A^ — x,
the amount remaining at any time, /, and c the constant depending on
dx
conditions of hydrolysis, we get, — — = c (A^ — x).
dt
A I
This, on integrating, gives nat. log -^ — - — = ct, or — nat. log
A — X t
= c, which is the general equation of a first-order reaction.
The second decomposition is that in which maltose is hydrolyzed to
dextrose, and is peculiar in so far as it proceeds simultaneously with
that by which the maltose is formed. As a result of the hydrolysis
of the dextrin, the maltose increases rapidly to a maximum of 46.2
per cent, at a rotation of 129°. It then gradually diminishes, while
the dextrose percentage always increases.
Consequently, the equation expressing accurately the rate of
change in the total amount of maltose present is quite complicated,
and we have, therefore, used an approximate formula, which is suflS-
ciently exact for the work in hand. The formula is derived from the
exact differential equation
which states that the amount of dextrose formed at each moment is
proportional to the amount of maltose present by replacing the differ-
ential quantities by finite differences, which in applications of the
formula must of course be taken small. In the place of M the aver-
age amount of maltose present during the interval of time considered
is also substituted. That is, if Mi and M2 are the amounts of maltose
present at the* time, /i and t^, and Di and D2 the amounts ot dextrose
present at these same times, and c^ is the reaction constant, we get as
a result of the above-mentioned substitutions :
156
George JV. Rolfe and George Defren.
or,
2
The results are contained in the following tables :
TABLE E.
Spesd of Hyd&olysis of Starch.
Hydrochloric acid 0.02 normal zt 2 At ^ 135° C.
^ = 20 ; [a]~ gj = 161 ; A^ = 55.0.
Tune/.
(Minutes.)
1- Jd386.
ilQ ^~ Xt
log* ^^ .
Ao — x
c,.
MTi + m^
a
Q.
10
137
32.5
.2285
.0219
.3286
.0329
20
118
19.6
.4481
.0224
.3225
.0333
30
101
10.9
.7130
.0237
.3417
.0342
40
87
5.5
1.0000
.0225
.3816
.0382
50
76
2.8
1.2932
.0258
.4296
.0430
60
69
1.7
1.5100
.0252
.4134
.0413
70
64
1.1
1.7090
.0271
.4833
.0483
Ci = 0.0242.
Ci = 0.0387.
Sulphuric acid 0.02 normal at 2 ^ / = 135** C.
^o = 20 ; [a]^J§, = 177^ ; ^^ = 72.9.
10
163
57.2
.1053
.0105
.1809
.0181
20
152
45.8
.2018
.0109
.1365
.0136
30
140
35.1
.3174
.0105
.1601
.0160
40
129
26.6
.4378
.0109
.1601
.0160
60
109
14.7
.7954
• .0132
.3518
.0171
80
90
6.4
1.0565
.0132
.4581
.0229
100
77
3.0
1.3856
.0138
.4641
.0232
120
66
1.4
1.7166
.0143
.6524
.0326
Ci = .0121. C, = .0199.
X As it costomary, common logarithms are used in these calculations.
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids. 157
TABLE "E-— Contimud.
Oxalic acid 0.04 normal 2A.2 At
/, = 20; [a]*'^^, =180"; A^
135" c.
76.5.
Tine/.
(Miantes.)
ra>o
L Jd386.
A^'-x.
log -*• .
Aq — X
c,.
A- A
Wti + ««t
a
Cr
20
157
50.7
.1787
.00894
.2970
.0148
40
137
32.5
.3718
.00929
.2684
.0134
60
120
20.9
.5636
.00939
.2617
.0138
80
106
13.3
.7598
.00949
.2653
.0137
100
93
7.6
1.0029
.01003
.3099
.0158
120
82
4.1
1.2709
.01059
.3423
.0171
140
73
2.3
1.5220
.01087
.4101
.0205
Ci = .00980.
C« = .00156.
Sulphuric acid 0.02 normal at 2 -^ / = 135**.
^o = SO ; [a]s>38, = 187" ; ^, = 86.9.
50
179
75.4
.0616
.00123
.0901
.00180
100
172
66.8
.1142
.00114
.0889
.00177
150
165
59.5
.1645
.00109
.0829
.00165
200
159
52.8
.2164
.00108
.0843
.00168
250
151
45.1
.2848
.00113
.0939
.00187
300
144
38.6
.3524
.00117
.0938
.00187
350
137
32.5
.4271
.00122
.0983
.00196
400
131
28.2
.4888
.00122
.0828
.00185
Ci = .00116.
C2 » .00181.
Acetic acid 0.5 normal at2.4/=i3S**C
^o = 50 ; WiV = 170^ » ^o = 64.5.
50
121
37.5 •
.2356
.00*70
.3561
.00712
100
21.4
.4792
.00479
.3225
.00645
150
103
11.8
.7377
.00491
.3058
.00611
200
86
5.2
1.1936
.00597
.4404
.00881
250
74
2.4
1.4294
.00571
.4623
.00924
Ci a- .00522.
Ca = .00755.
158
George IV. Rolfe and George Defren.
TABLE "E.^ Contifmed,
Hydrochloric acid o.oi normal at i /4 / = 121° C.
^o = 40 ; [a]- ^ = 183° ; A^ = 80.7.
Time /.
(Minutes.)
L Jd 386.
A^ — X.
log "*• .
An — X
Cv
A- A
a
Cf
40
168
62.5
. .1110
.00277
.1837
.00459
70
158
51.7
.1934
.00276
.1314
.00438
100
149
42.9
.2744
.00274
.1091
.00364
140
137
32.5
.3950
.00282
.1657
.00414
180
126
24.6
.5160
.00287
.1637
.00409
200
120
20.9
.5860
.00293
.0984
.00492
250
107
13.7
.7702
.00308
.2457
.00491
Ci = .00285.
C« == .00438.
Hydrochloric acid o.oi normal at 2 ./4 / = 135° C.
/^ = 20 ; [a]- 3, = 176^ ; A^ = 71.6.
10
162
56.1
.1059
.0106
1
.1827
.0183
20
148
41.9
.2327
.0116
.1758
.0176
40
128
25.8
.4433
.0111
.2850
.0143
60
110
15.2
.6731
.0110
.2845
.0142
80
93
7.6
.9741
.0127
.3530
.0172
100
81
3.8
1.2751
.0127
.3782
.0184
120
70
1.8
1.6996
.0142
.5475
•
.0294
Ci == .0120.
Cj = .0182.
Hydrochloric acid o.oi normal at 3 ./4 / = 145** C.
^o = 10 J Wv,s6 =174^^0 = 692
5
158
51.7
.1265
.0253
.2076
.0425
10
140
35.1
.2948
.0295
.1855
.0590
15
125
23.9
.4617
.0308
.2242
.0616
20
110
15.2
.6583
.0329
.2677
.0658
30
88
5.8
1.0766
.0359
.5353
.0535
40
74
2.4
1.4599
.0365
.5489
.0549
50
65
1.2
1.7609
.0352
.6116
.0611
Ci — .0323.
Ci = .0569.
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids, 1 59
TABLE Y,.— Continued,
Hydrochloric acid 0.0 1 normal ^X. ^ At — 1 53® C.
^o = 10 5 Wr,86 = M?"" ; ^o = 41.0.
Tine/.
(Minutes.)
L"Jd386.
^0 ""•*■•
Cv
A- A
a
Cf
5
117
19.1
.3318
.0664
.4613
.0923
10
%
8.7
.6733
.0673
.4509
.0902
15
79
3.2
1.1077
.0738
.5351
.1072
20
68
1.6
1.4087
.0704
.5580
.1160
25
61
0.8
1.7097
.0684
.6960
.1392
30
57
0.4
2.0107
.0670
.8847
.1769
Ci = .068a
Cj « .1203.
Hydrochloric acid 0.04 normal at 3 .^ / = 145^ C.
3
115
17.8
0.3921
.1307
.5479
.1826
5
95
8.4
0.7182
.1436
.4329
.2165
7
80
3.5
1.0984
.1569
.5017
.2509
10
66
1.4
1.4964
.1496
.7866
.2622
13
58
0.5
1.9435
.1495
1.0400
.3467
15
56
0.4
2.0404
.1360
.6389
.3195
Ci = .1444.
C, = .2631.
Hydrochloric acid 0.02 normal at 3 /4 / = 145° C.
/^ = 10; [aY-^^ = 148^ ; A^ = 41.9.
5
116
18.5
0.3550
.0710
.4961
.0992
10
%
8.7
0.6827
.0683
.4903
.0981
IS
80
3.5
1.0781
.0672
.4937
.0987
20
69
1.7
1.3918
.0696
. .5343
.1069
25
61
0.8
1.7291
.0692
.7003
.1400
30
56
0.4
2.0201
.0673
1.1070
.2214
Ci = .0688.
Ci = .1274.
i6o
George W. Rolfe and George Defren,
TABLE ^. — CaftclunUd.
Hydrochloric acid o.oi normal at 3 ^ / = 145° C.
^0=5; WiV = 174^ ^o = 692.
Time i.
(Minutes.)
L -Id 386.
Aq — X.
^0 — ' ^
Cx
a
C^
5
158
51.7
0.1265
.0253
.2076
.0*15
10
140
35.1
0.2948
.0295
.2328
.0465
15
125
23.9
0.4617
.0307
.2294
.0+59
20
110
15.2
0.6583
.0329
.2677
.0535
30
88
5.8
1.0767
.0359
.5326
.0533
40
74
2.4
1.4599
.0365
.5489
.aS49
50
65
1.2
1.7609
.0332
.6102
.0610
Ci = .0320.
Ca = .0424.
Hydrochloric acid 0.005 normal at iAt= 145° C.
/^ = 20 ; [a]- 3, = 172° ; ^^ = 66.8.
20
142
36.7
0.2601
.00130.
.3973
.00189
40
113
16.6
0.6047
.00151
.2418
.00121
60
91
6.7
1.0067
.00168
.5020
.00251
80
77
3.0
1.3577
.00169
.4559
.00223
100
66
1.4
1.6787
.00168
.6701
.00335
120
59
0.6
2.0466
.00171
.7595
.00380
Ci = .0159.
Cs « .02497.
At the head of each table are given data as to the concentration
and nature of the acid, the temperature corresponding to the steam
pressure given in atmospheres, and [ajj^jg^ ^^ ^^^ initial time period /^
with the corresponding value of A^. Time values are expressed in
minutes, and the constants ci for the hydrolysis of dextrin, c^ for that
of maltose, are calculated according to the formulas given above.
The results show that the constants in general are satisfactory,
and that, therefore, the reaction like the sucrose inversion follows the
law of the first order. It will also be seen that the values ci are much
more uniform than those of c^^ which is to be expected since ci is abso-
lute, and c^ only approximate. Deviations of c\ may be fairly ascribed
to variations in temperature, which, though slight, are significant,
owing to the high temperature coefficient of the reaction.
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids, i6i
The dextrin values in Table C are consequently correct within the
limits of error of analysis. It will be seen that the values of c% are
much more constant in those determinations in which / is larger, and
the values of \a\^ decrease slowly. This was to be expected from the
conditions of the approximate formula given above for the decomposi-
tion of maltose, these requiring that the amount of substance changed
m a period of time must be small. The question of reversion may
possibly have some influence on the values of c% but as yet we are
not prepared to express ourselves definitely on this subject.
The relative effects are shown in the following table. Table I
shows the influence on the speed of hydrolysis of various acids at the
same temperature, 135° C.
Table II shows the influence of temperature on the speed of
hydrolysis when the same amount of acid is used.
Table III gives the influence of varying amounts of acid.
The mean value of constants is given in column II. Column III
gives the relative value of the constants referred to, that oi -^N
hydrochloric acid at 135° taken as 100. Column IV gives the veloc-
ity constants determined by Ostwald ^ for cane-sugar inversion by the
same acids at half-normal concentration.
TABLE I.
Add.
Coooentntion.
II.
III.
IV.
Hydrochloric ....
Sulphuric
Pzalic
(Oralic)
Sulphurous
Acetic
(Acetic)
0.02 N
ao2 N
0.04 N
(0.02 N)
0.02 N
0.5 N
(0.02 N)
0.0242
0.0110
0.00980
(0.00249)
0.00126
0.00522
0.00021
100
50.0
40.8
(20.4)
4.79
21.5
0.8
100
•
53.6
• ■ • •
18 6
■ • • •
» ■ ■ •
0.4
' Lx)c. cit.
l62
George W, Rolfe and George Defren,
TABLE II.
Acid.
Concentration.
Temperature.
I.
II.
Hydrochloric ....
•
0.01 N
121
0.00283
11.5
Hydrochloric ....
0.01 N
134
0.0120
49.7
Hydrochloric ....
0.01 N
145
0.0323
133.4
Hydrochloric ....
0.01 N
153
0.0688
284.2
TABLE IIL
Add.
Concentration.
II.
III.
Hydrochloric
Hydrochloric
Hydrochloric
Hydrochloric
0.04 N
0.02 N
0.01 N
0.005 N
0.1413 .
0.0678
0.0314
0.0155
596.7
284.3
132.2
65.7
It is seen that the corresponding numbers of columns III and IV
agree fairly well. The relative influence of the various acids upon
the hydrolysis of starch, sucrose, and salicin are, therefore, nearly iden-
tical. It should be noted, however, that the chemical activity of hydro-
chloric acid on starch, as in the case of salicin and cane-sugar, in-
creases in a greater ratio than the concentration, while the electrical
conductivity increases more slowly.
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids. 163
The influence of temperature can be explained graphically by a
curve approximating a parabola. (Figure 4,)^
FW3. 4.
■ Note that the last plot is accideotall; displaced five d
164 George W. Rolfe and George Defren.
Figure 5 shows the influence of the various acids.
Analytical Investigation of Hydrolysis of Starch by Acids. 165
Figure 6 shows the influence of the concentration, or amount of
acid used.
George W. Rolfe and George Dejre.
Figure 7 shows the relative curves due to temperature.
Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of Cupric Oxide, 167
THE DETERMINATION OF REDUCING SUGARS IN
TERMS OF CUPRIC OXIDE}
By GEORGE DEFREN, M. S.
Reoehred July 9, 1896.
It is now approximately fifty years since alkaline metallic solutions
were first used in determining quantitatively the various reducing
sugars. During this period of time many investigators have worked
on the subject, and much has been done towards perfecting the
method of analysis, so that to-day there are several admirable proc-
esses in use for the exact estimation of these carbohydrates.
The quantitative methods of determining reducing sugars may be
divided into two main classes — those based upon the volumetric plan,
and those which depend on a gravimetric estimation of the precipi-
tated cuprous oxide.
Of the first class, many processes have been suggested which have
met with more or less success. The volumetric methods are mainly
used for factory control work, where the progress of some processes
requires a rapid and fairly accurate idea of the stage of manufacture.
In expert hands the volumetric methods are capable of giving excel-
lent and concordant results, and are, therefore, used in the laboratories
of many consulting chemists, and even in scientific institutions.
The main objections to the use of the volumetric methods are that
each freshly prepared quantity of Fehling solution requires accurate
standardization against pure sugar of the same kind as that which is
undergoing analysis. Different dilutions and the time of boiling affect
the results materially. The exact determination of the ** end-point"
also requires considerable practice and skill.
On the other hand, the Fehling liquor used in the gravimetric
' Reprinted from the Journal of the American Chemical Society, 18, No. 9, September,
1896.
1 68 George Defren,
processes need not be made up as accurately as is required for volu-
metric work. The gravimetric methods, however, ordinarily require
more time. A possible loss of cuprous oxide by filtration and an in-
complete oxidation to the higher oxide are also potent factors, though
where the requisite degree of care is exercised these need not cause
anxiety. The same statement regarding dilution and time of boiling
holds true with as much force in gravimetric as in volumetric work.
The gravimetric methods are generally employed for scientific and
accurate analytical work. Here the processes are comparatively few,
all depending upon the oxidation of the total sugar present in an ex-
cess of the alkaline copper solution.
The tables in use for the determination of reducing sugars are
mainly constructed in terms of metallic copper. As the amount of
metal precipitated per gram of carbohydrate is not a constant for all
dilutions of any sugar, specially constructed tables are generally em-
ployed. Several such tables have been prepared, as, for instance,
Allihn's table of reduced copper for dextrose, Wein's table for malt-
ose, and Soxhlet's table for lactose, etc.
Various modifications of the alkaline copper solutions are used for
the determination of the different sugars, each requiring special treat-
ment. Therefore a chemist in determining the amount of malt sugar
in, say beer, must, if he uses Wein's table for maltose, follow exactly
Wein*s method for the estimation of that sugar.
Where a variety of work is carried on in a laboratory it is there-
fore necessary to have several different Fehling solutions on hand for
each special kind of determination. If all the tables for the estima-
tion of the different carbohydrates could have been prepared for use
under uniform conditions, the existing state of affairs would be much
simplified.
In order to supply this need, I have constructed such tables, using
a method which I have employed for some time in determining reduc-
ing sugars. This method, proposed by O' Sullivan^ in 1876, is used
to some extent in England, but as it seems to be not generally known,
I here give the procedure in detail :
To 1 5 cc. of the copper sulphate solution, prepared as given below,
are added 1 5 cc. of the alkaline tartrate solution, in an Erlenmeyer
flask having a capacity of from 250-300 cc. The mixture is diluted
» J. Chem. Soc, a, 130 (1876).
Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of Cupric Oxide, 169
with 50 cc. of freshly boiled distilled water and placed in a boiling
water bath for five minutes. 20 to 25 cc. accurately measured from
a calibrated burette of an approximately one-half per cent, solution of
the sugar to be analyzed are then run into the hot Fehling liquor, and
the whole kept in the boiling water bath for from twelve to fifteen
minutes. The flask is then removed from the bath, and the precipi-
tated cuprous oxide is filtered as rapidly as possible, either through
filter paper or asbestos in a Soxhlet's tube or porcelain Gooch crucible,
and washed with boiling distilled water until the wash-water no longer
reacts alkaline. It is ignited and weighed as cupric oxide, as described
below. The corresponding amounts of dextrose, maltose, or lactose
are ascertained by reference to the tables at the end of this article.
It should be noted that the above directions must be closely followed.
The volume of the Fehling liquor and the added sugar solution should
be from 100-105 cc.
The Fehling solution used is made up according to Soxhlet's for-
mula, with a very slight modification. 69.278 grams of pure crystal-
lized copper sulphate, pulverized and dried between filter paper, are
dissolved in distilled water. It is advantageous to add i cc. of strong
sulphuric acid to this, as recommended by Sutton.^ The whole is then
made up to one liter with distilled water and kept in a separate bottle.
The alkaline tartrate solution is made by dissolving 346 grams of crys-
talline Rochelle salt and 100 grams of sodium hydroxide in distilled
water and making up to one liter. This is also kept in a separate
bottle.
Two methods of filtration of the precipitated cuprous oxide and fur-
ther treatment are generally adopted. In the first, double " washed *'
filter paper is used ; in the other the precipitate is retained by a layer
of asbestos. After washing the precipitate on the filter paper as
above described, it is dried in the usual manner and ignited in a pre-
viously weighed porcelain crucible, taking care to burn the filter paper
<:autiously, heating for fifteen minutes to a red heat, cooling the cru-
cible over sulphuric acid in a desiccator, and weighing as cupric oxide.
Additional treatment with nitric acid has been found of no practical
advantage, the results by direct ignition being very exact, providing
the filter paper is slowly burned. The chief objection to the employ-
ment of filter paper to retain the precipitated cuprous oxide is that
'Sutton: Vol. Anal., fourth edition, 256 (1882).
170 George Defren,
some of the finely divided particles are liable to go through, thus
causing low results.
As a substitute for paper, carefully selected asbestos is often used
for filtering purposes. To insure a layer of asbestos which shall be
kept at constant weight under the action of hot Fehling liquor, it is
advantageous to boil the mineral with nitric acid (1.05-1.10 sp. gr.)
for a short time, washing the acid out with hot water, and then boiling
with a 25 per cent, solution of sodium hydroxide. This is also washed
out with hot water. Reboiling with the above reagents as before
diminishes the liability of leaving any soluble portions. As thus pre-
pared the filtering material may be kept indefinitely under water in a
wide-mouthed bottle ready for use.
The objections of some chemists^ to the employment of asbestos,,
on the ground that it loses weight on using, does not seem to hold
when it is prepared as above. A sample boiled as stated with acid and
alkali three times lost only two-tenths milligram when two " blanks "
of hot dilute Fehling solution, as used in the process above described,,
were passed through the mineral in a porcelain Gooch crucible.
For use, a layer of asbestos, about i cm. in thickness, is placed in
a porcelain Gooch crucible to retain the finely divided precipitate,
which is filtered by means of suction in the usual manner. The
crucible containing the cuprous oxide is then dropped into a trian-
gular frame made of platinum wire, suspended within an iron radi-
ator, or shell, heated to redness. This quickly and thoroughly dries
the asbestos without cracking the crucible. After about five minutes
the crucible is transferred by means of a pair of nippers to a red-hot
platinum crucible, and heated for about fifteen minutes. It is then
quickly transferred to a desiccator near at hand to prevent crackings
allowed to cool, and weighed. As cupric oxide is somewhat hygro-
scopic, it is advantageous to weigh quickly and to keep the balance
case as dry as possible. Prolonged heating in the iron radiatoi;^ would
have changed the cuprous oxide to the cupric state. The advantage
of transferring the porcelain crucible to a red-hot platinum crucible is
that the oxidation is quickly completed, as a much higher temperature
is available.
If pressed for time, another determination can be made in the
same crucible without cleaning it. As a rule, it is, however, advisable
' Killing : Ztschr. angew. Chem., 431 (1894) ; Praeger : Ztschr. angew. Chem., 520 (1894).
Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of Cupric Oxide, 1 71
to wash out the cupric oxide by means of hot nitric acid (1.05-1.10
sp. gr.) and then with hot water. The crucible is then heated, cooled,
and weighed as before. It must necessarily be weighed, because this
treatment with hot nitric acid dissolves some of the asbestos.
If preferred, a Soxhlet's tube may be used to retain the precipi-
tated cuprous oxide. As a porcelain Gooch crucible possessed obvious
advantages over this apparatus, I have used it in all my determinations
with success.
The cupric reducing powers of dextrose, maltose, and lactose were
determined by the method given above. A table for invert sugar was
not constructed, because most invert sugar determinations are made
by double polarization in a saccharimeter.
Dextrose.
The "cupric reducing power" of dextrose was first determined.
This is defined as "the amount of cupric oxide which 100 parts re-
100 W
duce.**^ This may be represented by — — — , in which W is the
weight of cupric oxide obtained by the given weight of any sugar,
and D the weight of cupric oxide formed by an equaf weight of dex-
trose.* Hence, if the amount of cupric oxide formed by i gram of
dextrose be known, the amount of cupric oxide reduced by i gram
of any other substance, calculated upon this number as a percentage,
will represent the cupric oxide reducing power of the substance, which
we denote by the symbol K.
The amount of cupric oxide has been determined by O' Sullivan •
to be 2.205 grams per gram dextrose. The factor for dextrose in
terms of cupric oxide is, therefore, the reciprocal of 2.205 or 0.4535.
This value, 0.4535, was assumed to be a constant for all amounts of
dextrose when used with Fehling's solution in the manner indicated.
As such, it was a very convenient quantity, it being only necessary to
obtain the weight of cupric oxide formed by the action of a dextrose
solution, multiply this by 0.4535, and the amount of dextrose corre-
sponding was obtained. No tables are needed if this assumption be
true. Consequently, the determination of dextrose was indeed a very
simple one.
'J. Chem. Soc, a, 130 (1876).
'}. Chem. Soc, Trans., 606 (1879).
'Loc. cit.
1/2 George Defren,
On an extended investigation of this subject, using various amounts
of dextrose on the same volume of Fehling liquor in each determina-
tion, I find that the value of 2.205, above given as representing the
quantity of cupric oxide obtained by the action of i gram of dextrose,
is not, as was heretofore assumed, a constant for all weights of dextrose
taken, the amount varying from 2.27 grams cupric oxide per gram
dextrose for small quantities of sugar to 2.22 grams cupric oxide for
the largest amount of dextrose permissible. Allihn,* boiling his sugar
solutions with the Fehling liquor and reducing the cuprous oxide to
copper, obtained analogous varying results.
The purity of the dextrose used was first determined, dextrose an-
hydride being employed. 10.008 grams of anhydrous dextrose were
dissolved in distilled water, and the solution boiled to prevent biro-
tation. It was then transferred to a flask, the capacity of which at
15.5° C. was 100.08 cc, thus giving a solution which contained 0.100
gram dextrose anhydride per' cubic centimeter.
The specific gravity of the above solution at 15.5° was determined
in the usual manner by means of a picnometer, with thermometer
attached.
Capacity picnometer (at 15.5°) = 55.2055 cc.
Dextrose solution (at 15.5°) = 57.3083 grams.
On calculating from these values, we find the specific gravity of a
dextrose solution containing 10 grams dextrose in 100 cc. to be 1.03809
at 15.5°.
The specific rotatory power was determined by the usual method,
a Schmidt and Haensch saccharimeter being used in polarizing the
dextrose solution. The polarizations were carried out in a 200 mm.
tube at 20°. To change from the readings of a saccharimeter to the
rotary degrees, it is necessary to multiply the reading observed by
0.344, as shown by Rimbach.^ I have verified this value with con-
cordant results, a Laurent polariscope being used for compiarison.
The rotation of the above solution was 30.7 divisions. This gives by
means of the usual formula — [a]5 = — — a specific rotatory power
Iw
of 52.8^, which is in accordance with that obtained by other observ-
ers.^ The dextrose used was consequently pure.
' J. prakt. Chem. (2), aa, 63.
' Ber. d. chem. Ges., 37, 2282.
' Pribram : Monat. f. Chem., g, 399; Landolt : Ber. d. chem. Ges., ai, 191.
Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of Cufiric Oxide, 173
For the determination with Fehling liquor, 25 cc. of the dextrose
solution at 15.5° were accurately measured from a calibrated burette
and made up to 5CX) cc. with distilled water at the same temperature.
This consequently gave a solution each cubic centimeter of which
contained 5 mg. dextrose. Various quantities of this were then taken
to ascertain the cupric reducing power of dextrose. The results in
detail are given below. In each case the combined volumes of the
Fehling liquor and the sugar solution were made up to 105 cc, as
described above.
MiDigrams
dcxtitMe.
Copric oxide
ODtained.
Cupric oxide
per gram dextrose.
Dextrose
equivalent.
Mean dextrose
equivalent.
25
25
50
50
75
75
100
100
125
125
125
125
125
140
140
0.0283
0.0285
ao5e9
0.0565
0.1129
0.1123
0.1407
0.1403
0.1683
0.1679
0.2233
0.2227
0.2776
a 2782
0.2770
0.2774
0.2777
0.3105
0.3100
2.264
2.280
2.276
2.260
2.258
2.246
2.251
2.245
2.244
2.239
2.233
2.227
^221
2.225
2.216
2.219
2.222
2.218
2.215
0.4416 I
0.4386 J
0.4393 \
0.4425 f
0.4429)
0.4452 S
0.44431
0.4454 S
0.4457 t
0.4467 J
0.4478 \
0.4489 J
0.4503 1
0.4493
0.4512
0 4506
0.4500
0.4508 I
0.4515 ]
0.4401
0.4419
04440
0.4449
0.4462
0.4483
0.4503
0.4511
The foregoing values of the amounts of cupric oxide per gram
dextrose are given graphically in curve Ay Figure i, and the dextrose
equivalents of this in A, Figure 2.
From this we get the amount of dextrose corresponding to a given
weight of copper oxide by means of the formula :
D= {o 4400 + 0.000037 W) W,
in which D is the amount of dextrose, and IV the weight of cupric
oxide.
1/4 George Defren,
The dextrose table given in this article is based on this formula,
the values of W varying from 30 to 320.
Maltose.
The cupric reducing power of dextrose is given as icx>. Using
this as a basis, the reducing force of maltose, as given by O* Sullivan,^
is 65. Brown and Heron ^ place the value somewhat lower, claiming
that 61 is more exact. The results which I have obtained agree very
well with this latter number.
In the case of maltose, as with dextrose, it was found that the
amount of cupric oxide obtained per gram of sugar was not a con-
stant. The cupric reducing power of various amounts of maltose
was, however, found to be almost exactly a constant when referred to
the cupric oxide from equal weights of dextrose. That is, calling the
reducing power of dextrose 100 for different aliquot parts of that
sugar, the cupric reducing power of maltose referred to this standard
was always 61.
The specific gravity of .maltose was determined in the usual man-
ner. 9.7558 grams maltose anhydride were dissolved in distilled water
to 100.08 cc. at 15.5°.
Maltose solution at 15.5° = 57.3049 grams.
On calculating this we find the specific gravity of the above solu-
tion to be 1.03803. For a solution containing 10 grams maltose an-
hydride in 100 cc. it would consequently be 1.03900 at 15.5°.
The specific rotatory power was determined as usual. The rotation
of the above solution at 20° in a 200 mm. tube was 77.4 divisions on
the saccharimeter scale. This gives [a]* = 136.6°.
As maltose anhydride is somewhat diflScult to prepare, the solu-
tions used to determine the cupric reducing powers were made up to
approximately 10 per cent, from the maltose hydrate. The specific
gravity of the solutions was then determined. Subtracting from this
value 1. 00000 — the specific gravity of water — and dividing the re-
mainder by 0.00390, we get the amount of maltose anhydride in
100 cc. of solution.
'Loc. cit.
•J. Chem. Soc, Trans., 619 (1879).
Determination of Redttcing Sugars in Terms of Cupnc Oxide. 175
Fig. I. Graus of Cupkic Oxidk pbk Gkaii of Sugar at Various Degrus
OF DiLDTioH. A, Dextrosi. B, Maltosb. C, Lactose.
176 George Defren.
Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of Cupric Oxide, i yj
Maltose solution at 15.5° = 57.2511 grams,
which gives a specific gravity of 1.037054, or 9.501 grams maltose
anhydride in 100 cc.
The solution for Fehling determinations was made in the same
manner as the dextrose solutions above. Each cubic centimeter of
the diluted maltose solution therefore contained 4.75 mg. maltose
anhydride.
Millignuns
maltooe.
Caprie oxide
oDtained.
Capric oxide
I>er gram maltose.
Maltoae
equiralent.
Mean maltoie
equivalent
23.75
23.75
47.5
47.5
71.25
71.25
95.0
95.0
118.75
lia75
142.5
142.5
190.0
190.0
237.5
237.5
0.0329
00327
0.0656
0.0654
0.0963
0.0979
0.1304
0.1300
•
0.1623
0.1619
0.1940
0.1934
0.2572
0.2566
0.3198
0.3193
1.386
1.377
1.381
1.377
1.380
1.374
1.373
1.369
1.370
1.367
1.361
1.357
1.353
1.350
1.347
1.345
0.7218 I
0.7263 J
0.7243 (
0.7263 J
0.7247 I
0.7278 \
0.7286)
0.7308 J
0.7302 \
0.7336 J
0.7345 \
0.7369 J
0.72841
0.7406 J
0.7429 \
0.7437 J
0.7240
0.7253
0.7263
0.7297
0.7319
0.7354
0.7395
0.7433
The maltose equivalent in terms of copper oxide is shown in B^
Figure 2. From this we get the amount of maltose corresponding to
a given weight of cupric oxide by the formula :
M-= (0.7215 + 0.000061 W) W,
in which M is the weight of maltose, and IV the amount of cupric
oxide obtained. It will be seen that these values make the cupric
reducing power of maltose 0.61 that of dextrose.
Lactose.
Lactose was investigated in the same manner as the preceding.
10.Q08 grams lactose anhydride were dissolved in distilled water,
boiled, and made up to 100.08 cc. at 15.5°.
The above, solution, polarized in a 200 mm. tube at 20®, gave a
rotation of 30.7 divisions. This gives the specific rotatory power of
lactose of 52.8°.
178
George Defren,
The amounts of cupric oxide found by the reduction of known
weights of lactose were determined as in the previous cases, with the
following results:
MilUgrams
lactoM.
Cnpric oxida
oWined.
Capric oxide
per gram lactose.
Lactoee
equivalents.
Mean lactose
eqnivaleots.
20
20
50
50
75
75
100
100
125
125
150
150
175
175
200
200
a0319
0.0317
0.0798
0.0796
0.1188
0.1184
0.1577
0.1570
0.1955
0.1964
0.2345
0.2340
0.2729
0.2724
0.3112
0.3107
1.595
1.585
1.596
1.592
1.584
1.579
1.577
1.570
1.564
1.561
1.563
1.560
1.560
1.557
1.556
1.553
0.6269 \
0.6308 J
0.6266)
0.6282 J
0.6313 \
0.6334 J
0.6340?
0.6369 J
0.6395 I
0.6363 J
0.63971
0.6410 \
0.6412 \
0.6424 J
0.6425 1
0.6436 J
0.6289
a6274
a6323
0.6355
a6379
0.6404
0.6418
a6430
The cupric oxide values per gram lactose are presented graphically
in curve C, Figure i, while the reciprocals of these quantities are shown
in Cy Figure 2. For this latter the amount of lactose corresponding to
the weight of cupric oxide obtained is determined by the following :
L = (0.6270 + 0.000053 IV) Wy
in which L is the lactose, and W the amount of copper oxide. The
accompanying table for lactose is constructed on this basis.
« « « « « « > «
It will be seen from the above results that the amount of cupric
oxide produced by the action of i gram of reducing carbohydrate
on Fehling liquor, in the manner described, is not a constant for all
dilutions.
The cupric reducing power of maltose is 0.61 that of dextrose.
The following tables for the determination of the reducing sugars
in terms of cupric oxide are based on the analytical results presented
above, and can be used in the process outlined in the same manner
as any other table for the same purpose :
Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of Cupric Oxide, 1 79
^^rtM^ppKt
Paita
Parts
Parts
Parts copper
Parts
Parte
Parts
. ooddc
dextrose
maltose.
lactose.
oxide.
dextrose.
lactose.
zo
13.2
21.7
ia8
89
39.4
64.7
56.2
31
13.7
22.4
19.5
90
39.9
65.5
56.8
32
14.1
23.1
20.1
91
40.3
66.2
57.4
33
14.6
23.9
20.7
92
40.8
66.9
58.1
34
15.0
24.6
21.4
93
41.2
67.7
58.7
35
15.4
25.3
22.0
94
41.7
68.4
59.3
3e
15.9
26.1
22.6
95
42.1
69.1
60.0
37
16.3
26.8
23.3
96
42.5
69.9
60.6
3S
16.8
27.5
23.9
97
43.0
70.6
61.2
39
17.2
28.3
24.5
98
43.4
71.3
61.9
-♦0
17.6
29.0
25.2
99
43.9
72.1
62.5
41
18.1
29.7
25.8
100
44.4
72.8
63.2
42
18.5
30.5
26.4
101
44.8
73.5
63.8
43
19.0
31.2
27.1
102
45.3
74.3
64.4
4^
19.4
31.9
27.7
103
45.7
75.0
65.1
-45
19.9
32.7
28.3
104
46.2
75.7
65.7
4e
20.3
33.4
29.0
105
46.6
76.5
66.3
4^7
20.7
34.1
29.6
106
47.0
77.2
67.0
-48
21.2
34.8
30.2
107
47.5
77.9
67.6
-^9
21.6
35.5
30.8
108
48.0
78.7
68.2
50
22.1
36.2
31.5
109
48.4
79.4
68.9
51
22.5
37.0
32.1
110
48.9
80.1
69.5
52
23.0
37.7
32.7
111
49.3
80.9
70.1
53
23.4
38.4
33.3
112
49.8
.81.6
70.8
54^
23.8
39.2
34.0
113
50.2
82.3
71.4
55
24.2
39.9
34.6
114
50.7
83.1
72.0
56
24.7
40.5
35.2
115
51.1
83.8
72.7
57
25.1
41.3
35.9
116
51.6
84.5
73.3
58
25.5
42.1
36.5
117
52.0
85.2
74.0
59
26.0
42.8
37.1
118
52.4
85.9
74.6
eo
26.4
43.5
37,8
119
52.9
86.6
75.2
ei
26.9
44.3
38.4
120
53.3
87.4
75.9
ez
27.3
45.0
39.0
121
53.8
88.1
76.6
63
27.8
45.7
39.7
122
54.2
88.9
77.2
64
28.2
46.5
40.3
123
54.7
89.6
77.9
65
28.7
47.2
40.9
124
55.1
90.3
78.5
66
29.1
47.9
41.6
125
55.6
91.1
79.1
67
68
69
29.5
48.6
42 2
126
56.0
91.8
79.8
30.0
49.4
42.8
127
56.5
92.5
80.4
30.4
50.1
43.5
128
56.9
93.3
81.1
70
30.9
50.8
44.1
129
57.3
94.0
81.7
71
31.3
51.6
44.7
130
57.8
94.8
82.4
72
31.8
52.3
45.4
131
58.2
95.5
83.0
73
32.2
53.0
46.0
132
58.7
96.2
83.6
74
32.6
53.8
46.6
133
59.1
97.0
84.2
75
33.1
54.5
47 3
134
59.6
97.7
84.9
76
33.5
55.2
47.9
135
60.0
98.4
85.5
77
34.0
56.0
48.5
136
60.5
99.2
86.1
78
34.4
56.7
49.2
137
60.9
99.9
86.8
79
34.9
57.4
49.8
138
61.3
100.7
87.4
80
35.4
58.1
50.5
139
61.8
101.4
88.1
81
35.9
58.9
51.1
140
62.2
102.1
88.7
82
363
59.6
51.7
141
62.7
102.8
89.3
S3
36.8
60.3
52.4
142
63.1
103.5
90.0
84
37.2
61.1
53.0
143
63.6
104.3
90.6
85
37.7
61.8
53.6
144
64.0
105.0
91.3
86
38.1
62.5
54.3
145
64.5
105.8
91.9
87
38.5
63.3
54.9
146
64.9
106.5
92.6
88
39.0
64.0
55.5
147
65.4
107.2
93.2
i8o
George Defren.
Parts copper
Parts
Parts
Parts
Parts copper
Parte
Parte
Parts
oxide.
dextrose.
maltose.
lactose.
oxide.
dextrose.
maltose.
hftfwrf.
148
65.8
108.0
93.9
207
92.6
151.8
132.1
149
66.3
108.7
94.5
208
93.1
152.5
132.8
150
66.8
109.5
95.2
209
93.5
153.3
133-4
151
67.3
100.2
95.8
210
94.0
154.1
134.1
152
67.7
111.0
%.5
211
94.4
154.8
134.7
153
68.3
111.7
97.1
212
94.9
155.6
135.4
154
68.7
112.4
97.8
213
95.3
156.3
136.0
155
69.2
113.2
98.4
214
95.8
157.1
136.7
156
69.6
113.9
99.1
215
%.3
157.8
137.3
157
70.0
114.7
99.7
216
%.7
158.6
138.0
158
70.5
115.4
100.4
217
97.2
159.3
138.6
159
70.9
116.1
101.0
218
976
160.0
139.3
160
71.3
116.9
101.7
219
98.1
160.8
139.9
161
71.8
117.6
102.3
220
986
161.5
140.6
162
72.3
118.4
103.0
221
99.0
162.3
141.2
163
72.7
119.1
103.6
222
99.5 •
163.0
141.9
164
73.2
119.9
104.3
223
99.9
163.7
142.5
165
73.6
120.6
104.9
224
100.4
164.5
143.2
166
74.1
121.4
105.6
225
100.9
165.3
143.8
167
74.5
122.1
106.2
226
101.3
166.0
144.5
168
74.9
122.9
106.9
227
101.8
166.8
145.1
169
75.4
1236
107.5
228
102.2
167.5
145.8
170
75.8
124.4
108.2
229
102.7
168.3
146.4
171
76.3
125.1
108.8
230
103.1
169.1
147.0
172
76.8
125.8
109.5
231
103.6
169.8
147.7
173
77.3
126.6
110.1
232
104.0
170.6
148.3
174
77.7
127.3
110.8
233
104.5
171.3
149.0
175
78.2
128.1
111.4
234
105.0
172.1
149.6
176
78.6
128.8
112.0
235
105.4
172.8
150.3
177
79.1
129.5
112.6
236
105.9
173.6
150.9
178
79.5
130.3
113 3
237
106.3
174.3
151.6
179
80.0
131.0
113.9
238
106.8
175.1
152.2
180
80.4
131.8
114.6
239
107.2
175.8
152.9
181
80.8
132.5
115.2
240
107.7
176.6
153.5
182
81.3
133.2
115.8
241
108.1
177.3
154.2
183
81.8
134.0
116.5
242
108.6
178.1
154.8
184
82.2
134.7
117.1
243
109.0
178.8
155.5
185
82.7
135.5
117.8
244
109.5
179.6
156.1
186
83.1
136.2
118.4
245
109.9
180.3
156.8
187
835
136.9
119.1
246
110.4
181.1
157.4
188
84.0
137.7
119.7
247
110.9
181.8
15a 1
189
84.4
138.4
120.4
248
111.3
182.6
15a 7
190
84.9
139.1
121.0
249
111.8
1&S.3
159.4
191
85.4
139.9
121.7
250
112.3
184.1
160.0
192
85.9
140.6
122.3
251
112.7
184.8
160.7
193
86.3
141.4
123.0
252
113 2
185.5
161.3
194
868
142.1
123.6
253
113.7
186.3
162.0
195
87.2
142.8
124 3
254
114.1
187.1
162.6
196
87.7
143.6
124.9
255
114.6
187.8
163-3
197
88.1
144.3
125.6
256
115.0
188.6
163.9
198
88.6
145.1
126.2
257
115.5
189.3
164.6
199
89.0
145.8
126.9
258
116 0
190.1
165.2
200
89.5
146.6
127.5
259
116.4
190.8
165.9
201
89.9
147.3
128.2
260
116.9
191.6
166.5
202
90.4
148.1
128.8
261
117.3
192,4
167.2
203
90.8
148.8
129.5
262
117.8
193.1
167.8
204
91.3
149.6
130.1
263
118.3
193.9
168.1
205
91.7
150.3
130.8
264
118.7
194.6
169.5
206
92.2
151.1
131.5
265
119.2
195.4
169.8
Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of Cupric Oxide, i8i
Parts copper
Parts
Parts
Parts
Parts copper
Parts
Parts
Parts
oxide.
dextrose.
maltose.
lactose.
oxide.
dextrose.
maltose.
lactose.
266
119.6
196.1
170.4
294
132.5
217.4
188.9
267
120.1
196.9
171.1
295
133.0
218.2
189.5
268
120.6
197.7
171.7
2%
133.4
218.9
190.2
269
121.0
198.4
172.4
297
133.9
219.7
190.8
270
121.4
199.2
173.0
298
134.3
220.4
191.5
271
121.9
199.9
173.7
299
134.8
221.2
192.1
272
122.4
200.7
174.4
300
135.3
221.9
192.8
273
122.8
201.5
175.0
301
135.7
222.7
193.4
274
123.3
202.2
175.7
302
136.2
223.5
194.1
275
123.7
203.0
176 3
303
136 6
224.2
194.7
276
124.2
203.7
177.0
304
137.1
225.0
195.3
277
124.6
204.5
177.6
305
137.6
225.8
196.0
278
125.1
205.2
178.3
306
138.0
226.5
196.6
279
125.6
206.0
178.9
307
138.5
227.3
197.3
28a
126.1
206.8
179.6
308
138.9
228.1
197.9
281
126.5
207.5
180.2
309
139.4
228.8
198.6
282
127.0
208.3
180.9
310
139.9
229.6
199.3
283
127.4
209.0
181.5
311
140.3
230.4
199.9
284
127.9
209.8
182.2
312
140.8
231.1
200.6
285
128.3
210.5
182.9
313
141.2
231.9
201.3
286
128.8
211.3
183.6
314
141.7
232.7
202.0
287
129.3
212.1
184.2
315
142.2
233.4
202.6
288
129.7
212.8
184.9
316
142.6
234.2
203.3
289
130.2
213.6
185.6
317
143.1
234.9
203.9
290
130.6
214.3
186.2
318
143.6
235.7
204.6
291
131.1
215.1
186.9
319
144.0
236.5
205.3
292
131.5
215.9
187.6
320
144.5
237.2
205.9
293
132.0
216.6
188.2
Supplementary Table for Glucose Analysis.
The amounts of cupric oxide given above are those obtained by the
use of absolute weights of sugar. The tables are constructed on this
basis. In the case of a mixed product, like commercial glucose, which
may be considered made up of the simple bodies dextrin, maltose, and
dextrose, it is far more convenient to determine the total carbohydrates
present in solution by means of the specific gravity than by drying the
glucose, and obtaining in this way the total solids. For this purpose an
arbitrary value is taken which shall represent the influence of i gram
of a mixture of the three substances above mentioned, on the specific
gravity if dissolved to loocc. in distilled water. Brown and Heron ^
claim that this influence on the specific gravity of i gram starch con-
version product in lOO cc. is 0.00386. This value has been deter-
mined to be correct for solutions of cane sugar, and is much used for
glucose work
^Loc cit.
l82
George Defren,
As above mentioned, the specific gravity of a dextrose solution
containing lo grams dextrose anhydride in loocc. is 1.03809 at 15.5°.
To determine the cupric reducing power of a substance, using the value
3.86 as a divisor, it therefore becomes necessary to change the figures
given in the tables to conform to this new factor ; that is, the dextrose
^86
equivalents must be multiplied by ^1—, which has been done for
venience of reference in the following table :
con-
Copper oxide
obtained.
Dextrose
Copper oxide
Dextrose
Copper oxide
obtained.
Dextrose
equivalent.
obtained.
equivalent
equivalent
5
0.4461
115
0.4502
225
0.4543
10
0.4463
120
0.4504
230
04545
15
0.4465
125
0.4506
235
0.4547
20
0.4467
130
0.4508
240
0.4549
25
0.4468
135
0.4510
245
0.4551
30
0.4470
140
0.4512
250
0.4553
35
0.4472
145
0.4513
255
0.4555
40
0.4474
150
0.4515
260
0.4557
45
0.4476
155
0.4517
265
0.4558
50
0.4478
160
0.4519
270
0.4560
55
0.4480
165
0.4521
275
0.4562
60
0.4482
170
0.4523
280
0.4564
65
0.4484
175
0.4525
285
0 4566
70
0:4485
180
0.4527
290
0.4568
75
0.4487
185
0.4528
295
0.4570
80
0.4489
190
0.4530
300
0.4572
85
0.4491
195
0.4532
305
0.4574
90
0.4493
200
0.4534
310
0 4576
95
0.4495
205
0.4536
315
0.4578
100
0.4497
210
0.4538
320
0.4580
105
0.4498
215
0.4540
110
0.4500
220
0.4542
Thus a solution containing 100 mg. of mixed carbohydrates, using
the factor 0.00386, if it formed 200 mg. cupric oxide by reduction
of the Fehling solution in the manner above described, would have
a cupric reducing power, or K^^^, of 90.68.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
Boston, Mass.
Micro-organisms and Sterilizing Processes in Canning, 183
MICRO--ORGANISMS AND STERILIZING PROCESSES IN
THE CANNING INDUSTRY.
By SAMUEL C. PRESCOTT and W. LYMAN UNDERWOOD.
Read October 8, 1896.
The process of hermetically sealing food materials in jars or cans
and their subsequent sterilization by heat has become an enormous
and most important industry. From a sanitary point of view, canned
foods are of the highest value, because if properly prepared they are
free from all bacteria. The enormous use of these goods testifies to
the high regard with which they are held, and sanitarians cannot fail
to view this fact with satisfaction.
The magnitude of the canning industry at present may be indicated
by figures showing the number of cans packed annually, in the United
States alone, of some of the larger branches.
Sardines, 80,000,000 cans. Corn, 72,000,000 cans.
Salmon, 96,000,000 cans. Tomatoes, 120,000,000 cans.
Oysters (in Baltimore alone), 1,250,000 bushels.
Besides these are packed very extensively, lobsters, clams, meats,
soups, peas, beans, and fruits.
It occasionally happens that deterioration and loss of some food
materials so prepared may result if the sterilization, or as it is known
to the trade, "processing," is not conducted in a thorough and scien-
tific manner. This trouble is not confined to any one class of foods,
but may be encountered in vegetables, meats, fish, oysters, clams, and
lobsters, although it is a notable fact that spiced goods usually keep
indefinitely.
At the suggestion and under the supervision of Professor Sedg-
wick we have made a careful experimental study of one branch of the
industry, viz., the packing of clams and lobsters.
It is generally believed that the canning industry was originated
by Nicholas Appert,^ a Frenchman, who in 1810 preserved fruit by
' Appert: Art of Preserving Animal and Vegetable Substance. (London, 181 2.) Bige-
low: Elements of Technology, p. 499. (1831.) Edinburgh Review, 23, p. 104.
184 Samuel C, Prescott and W. Lyman Underwood.
heating and hermetically sealing in glass jars. Probably the first to
adopt these methods in America was William Underwood, an English-
man, who in 1 82 1 began in Boston to preserve foods according to Ap-
pert's methods. These methods of Appert were followed until about
1840, when glass jars were largely displaced by tin cans. This sub-
stitution, it is believed, originated a year or two before with Charles
Mitchell, a Scotchman, who packed com and lobsters in tin cans near
Eastport, Maine.
The advent of tin cans caused the first great stride in the business,
as it opened a large field for work in the preservation of meat, vegeta-
bles, and fish. Salmon was probably first packed at St. Johns, N. B.,
in 1839, ^^^ shipped directly to the Pacific coast, while at present salmon
packing is confined to the Pacific States. About the same time oysters
shipped in barrels from Baltimore were packed in Boston. Everything
in connection with the process was kept as secret as possible, there-
fore only a few firms were enabled to engage in the business, but
gradually through employees the process became more public. During
the war the trade was given a tremendous impetus through the gov-
ernment's requiring canned food supplies for the army, and since the
war the growth of the industry has been constant and steady.
With the increased demand for canned goods came also the neces-
sity for better methods. The old method of procedure in packing fish
was as follows : After packing and sealing, the cans were heated for
an hour in boiling water, then taken out and "tapped" or vented in
order to expel air and produce a vacuum, sealed again and boiled for
an hour and a half, again tapped and sealed and given a final boiling
of three hours. Thus the total time of heating was five and one-half
hours, and in many cases even more time was given.
It was formerly believed that the vacuum was the principal factor
in keeping the goods, a belief still clung to by many packers. The
vacuum, although unnecessary for sterilization, is necessary for inspec-
tion. Before the cans are put on the market each one is thoroughly
examined to detect any unsoundness, or what is known to the trade
as "swells." This examination consists of inspection and sounding
the cans after "processing," i. ^., sterilization. Sound cans should
show a vacuum, as indicated by concavity of the ends, and should
emit a peculiar note when struck. On the other hand, unsound cans
which have not yet swelled give a characteristic dull tone when struck.
By the difference in the quality of the tones a skilled inspector can
Micro-organisms and Sterilizing Processes in Canning, 185
instantly distinguish between sound and unsound cans. Any cans not
showing a vacuum are rejected, the annual loss resulting from this
source being very large. After inspection the cans are generally put
in stacks, and before leaving the packer are again examined. It some-
times happens, however, that spoiling without swelling occurs. For
the detection of such cases, special methods must be employed. Such
cases are sometimes found in canned clams, and more frequently in
lobster, in the latter case being known to the trade as "black lobster."
Since long continued heating tends to disintegrate and darken the
foods which it is desired to preserve as fresh as possible, it has always
been the aim of packers to reduce the bath time as much as possible.
Consequently there has been a gradual shortening of the time of heat-
ing in the water bath, until at present the average treatment by this
method is from two and one-half to three hours, divided into two
periods.
In 1863 a "chemical bath,'* consisting of calcium chloride, was
introduced to some extent. Owing to the large amount of the salt
in solution and its consequent high boiling point, a temperature of
250° F. could be easily obtained. With this temperature the time
of heating could be greatly lessened, and at the same time steriliza-
tion was assured. In one form of this process a lozenge of sodium
sulphite was fastened on the under side of the cover of each can by
means of fusible metal. The object of this was "to decompose the
air remaining in the can." This method of procedure was found to
be impracticable, owing to the frequent explosions of the cans. This
bath was in use but a short time, being followed by a return to the
earlier methods.
The introduction of digesters or "retorts," about 1870, was the
next and most recent step in the development of sterilizing apparatus.
By their use an actual temperature of 250® F. (127° C.) may be easily
obtained both inside and outside the can ; so explosions are avoided.
The corresponding pressure is fourteen pounds. The only precau-
tion required is to reduce the temperature and pressure cautiously.
They have not been accepted as entirely satisfactory, however, on ac-
count of the darkening of the goods caused by long continued heat-
ing. It is probable that retorts are now used less than formerly in
some quarters, through ignorance of their effectiveness, yet it is well
known that many packers are using them with excellent results.
1 86 Samuel C, Pre scot t and W. Lyman Underwood.
Examination of " Swelled " Cans, and Descriptions of the
Bacteria Found.
As has been stated above, all cans before they are put upon the
market are carefully tested for imperfections, and any showing leak-
age or swelling are rejected, and the annual loss from these sources is
very heavy. Our investigations began with a careful examination of
a large number. of cans of spoiled clams and lobsters. The contents
of such cans were found to be badly decomposed, in some cases almost
entirely liquefied, much darkened in color, and of a very disagreeable
odor. Bacterial examination showed that in every case where spoiling
had occurred, living bacteria were present in great numbers. In sound
cans, on the other hand, no living bacteria could be detected, and the
contents proved to be sterile. As would be supposed in the present
state of bacteriology, there is no reason to doubt that swelling and
decomposition are invariably the result of bacterial action. In some
cases a can contained a culture apparently pure, while other cans
might contain a mixture of several species.
The ordinary bacteriological methods, with some modifications,
served for the separation of these organisms into distinct species,
and made possible their cultivation in pure cultures in artificial media.
Of the nine species of bacteria obtained, two are micrococci, while
the other seven are classed among the bacilli. All of them are
noticeably rapid in their development in an incubator at blood heat
(98° F., 37^° C.) both in liquid and on solid media, while they grow
slowly at a temperature of 70° F. (20° C). They may be readily stained
by the usual staining reagents. In several of the forms endospore
formation has been observed, and these forms are likewise noticeable
for the rapidity with which such sporulation occurs. The following
detailed descriptions will show some of the characteristics of these
species :
Bacillus No. i
Bacillus No, i, Sporf.s.
Micro-organisms and Sterilizing Processes in Canning, 187
BACILLUS NO. i. (Figures i and 2.)
Gknxrai.
Characters.
Shape and arrangement : Long rods with rounded ends occurring singly,
and in chains of varying lengths. Often shows a gelatinous sheath
when grown in liquid culture.
Size: 4-7 fixi.^ft.
Motility : Moves with serpentine motion.
Spore formation : Large oval centrally located spores. Develop with ease.
/^elation to temperature: Grows at both 20° and 37 J®, but better at the lat-
ter temperature.
Relation to air : Aerobe and facultative anaerobe.
Relation to gelatin : Liquefies readily.
Color: Creamy white.
Gelatin.
Stick culture : Growth extends throughout line of puncture. The gelatin
is liquefied, forming a broad trumpet-shaped liquid portion, at the bot-
tom of which is a small amount of fiocculent precipitate. Film formed
on Furface, which breaks up and settles, leaving a layer of clear liquid
at top. Entirely liquid after three weeks.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies : First appear as small white dots. Liquefaction sets in
at once, first appearing as a clear ring of liquid gelatin surrounding the
colony. Under low power there is seen a dark granular center, and an
outer ring of paler threads interwoven and forming a thin, irregularly
circular zone. Fiocculent ppt. at bottom of the saucer-shaped depres-
sion caused by each colony.
Agar.
Streak culture: A moist, creamy white, smooth, shiny growth covering
nearly the whole surface of the agar. Edges appear granular or
"frosty.**
Plate culture :
Surface colonies : First develop as circular shiny colonies with sharp out-
line. An irregular film is soon formed which extends out on all sides,
giving an irregular, somewhat branched appearance ; dot at center, and
faint concentric rings. Submerged colonies small, oval or spherical.
Potato.
A gray slimy growth, extending over large part of the surface. This later
becomes cheesy and rough on surface. Potato darkened.
Milk.
Is coagulated, and later the coagulum is dissolved. Acidity, neutral.
Smith
Solution.
No gas produced. Heavy sediment. Much turbidity, and film on sur-
face. Strongly acid.
Nitrate.
Is reduced to nitrite but slightly.
Bouillon.
Film on surface. Turbid. Heavy sediment of a flaky nature.
i88
Samuel C. Prescott and W. Lyman Underwood.
BACILLUS No. 2.
General
Characters.
Shape and arrangement : Short rods, occurring singly and in chains of
3-6 elements.
Size : 1.5-1.8 /« x .6/i.
Motility: Motile.
Spore formation : Not observed.
Relation to temperature: Develops rapidly at 37i^C., more slowly at 20°.
delation to air: Aerobe and facultative anaerobe.
delation to gelatin : Does not liquefy.
Color: Pale yellow.
Gelatin.
Stick culture: No growth visible until after second dav. On fifth day
hazy growth is shown all along the line of inoculation. Mass of small
rounded colonies on surface.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies : First appear as circular shining droplets almost trans-
parent After two weeks colonies are \f' in diameter, elevated, rough,
with a dot at center, and irregularly concentric rings. Edge of colony
crenated or roughlv scalloped. Submerged colonies, small, circular
and brownish in color.
Agar.
Streak culture : On second day surface is covered with a thin, rough, pale
yellow, shiny layer.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies : Circular grayish white colonies somewhat elevated, and
sometimes slightly scalloped at edges. Surface rather dull. Dot at
center under microscope appears to be shaped like red blood corpuscles,
thinner at center than at rim.
Sub. colonies : Very small, circular or ovaL
Potato.
Growth for several days almost invisible. Later a scanty, moist, pale yel-
low growth, following closely the line of inoculation.
Milk.
Is coagulated, forming a solid mass. Strongly acid.
Smith
Solution.
No gas produced. Turbid throughout. Film on surface. Strongly add.
Considerable sediment.
Nitrate.
Is reduced to nitrite with rapidity.
Bouillon.
Faintly turbid on second day. Solution becomes turbid throughout. Film
on surface, and heavy flocculent precipitate.
J
Mtcr(horganisms and Sterilising Processes in Canning, 1 89
BACILLUS NO. 3.
General
Characters.
Shape and arrangement: Stout rods with rounded ends occurring singly
and in chains.
Stze: 2-3/ix I.7S/*-
Motility : Motion serpentine and rapid.
Spore formation : Oval, centrally located spores 1.8 /x x 1.2^.
Relation to temperature: Growth rapid at 27 \^* slower at 20^.
Relation to air : Aerobe and facultative anaerobe.
Relation to gelatin : Liquefies.
Color: White.
Gbiatin.
Stick culture : Development throughout entire length. Liquefies in trum-
pet shape. Thick film on surface, and heavy fiocculent precipitate.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies. Nearly circular with dot at center, concentric rings.
Liquefaction commences at once, and a veil-like mass collects at the
bottom of the liquefied portion. Under low power the edges of the
colonies appear to be made of bacterial filaments which extend from
the central mass. Submerged colonies very small and spherical.
Agar.
Streak culture : A white, moist, wrinkled growth extending over the whole
surface.
Plate culture : Granular, moist, shiny colonies, dark at center, irregular in
outline ; edges thick and rough. Tendency to spread.
Potato.
Dirty white, moist layer spreading over the whole surface. Potato much
darkened.
Milk.
Is coagulated ; coagulum later dissolved.
Smith
Solution.
No gas produced. Heavy film on surface and much sediment. Strongly
add.
Nitrate.
Not reduced. Film on surface.
Boun.ix>N.
Growth at surface, then a clear layer below, and at bottom a heavy fioccu-
lent precipitate.
190
Samuel C. Prescott and IV. Lyman Underwood,
BACILLUS NO. 4.
General
Characters.
Shape and arrangtment : Rods with rounded ends, occurring singly or in
long threads arranged side by side.
Siu: 3-6 fi X 1 fL
Motility : Very motile ; darting motion.
Spore formaticn : Oval centrally located spores 2/1 z i /i are readily formed.
Relation to temperature: Develop rapidly at yi\^C, but slowly at 20P.
Relation to air : Aerobe and facultative anaerobe.
Relation to gelatin: Liquefies readily.
Color : Pale brownish or grayish.
GEIJiTIN.
StieJk culture : Development quite rapid. Liquefies, giving a liquefied por.
tion having shape of an inverted cone. Film on surface, and flocculent
material in suspension.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies: Small circular white liquefying colonies; under low
power appear irregularly circular, sharply defined and granular. A ring
of liquefied gelatin surrounds each colony almost as soon as the colo>
nies are visible.
Submerged colonies very small ; spherical.
Agar.
Streak culture : Smooth, white, thin layer of dull luster extending all over
surface of the agar.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies : Yellowish white colonies varying in size from small dots
to \" in diameter. Nearly circular, dot at center and concentric rings.
Submerged colonies : Irregular in shape ; very small.
POtATO.
A white pasty, scanty growth at first develops. This later spreads over
the whole surface, forming a dry, much wrinkled brown layer.
Milk.
Casein coagulated ; coagulum dissolved almost completely. Alkaline.
Smith
Solution.
No gas produced. Slightly turbid, heavy sediment. Growth at surface,
neutral reaction.
Nitrate.
Is reduced to nitrite vigorously.
Bouillon.
Turbid throughout ; stringy ; tough film on surface, and heavy precipitate
in lower third of tube.
Micro-organisms and Sterilising Processes in Canning. 191
BACILLUS NO. 5.
Gbnskal
Chakactsrs.
Shape and arrangtmeni : Bacilli with rounded ends, occurring singly and
in chains,
^fs^; 3-5 /i long X 1. 2-1. 5 /t broad.
^i^/rVy; Motion serpentine.
Spore formation : Not observed.
Relation to temperature: Rapid deTelopment at 37i^C., islow at 20^.
Relation to atr : Aerobe and facultative anaerobe.
Relation to gelatin: Liquefies rapidly.
Color: White.
GSLATOf.
Stick culture: Growth throughout whole line of inoculation. Liquefac-
tion sets in about third day, forming a trumpet-shaped liquefied portion.
Film on surface, and flocculent precipitate at lower part of liquefied
portion.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies : White circular colonies which begin to liquefy as soon
as they are of the size of a pin head, and form depressions or cavities
in the gelatin. Under low power they appear to be made up of long
interlacing threads which extend from the edge in hair-like processes.
Submerged colonies, small, brown, and granular.
Agar.
Streak culture : A. pasty thick white growth, rapidly spreading over the
whole surface.
Plate culture:
Surface colonies: Thin spreading colonies often coarsely branched; rather
large, granular, and dull in luster.
Potato.
Watery, white growth, later becoming dry and about the same color as the
potato, and extending over a large portion of the surface.
Milk.
Is coagulated, and coagulum dissolved. Acidity, neutral.
Smith
Solution.
No gas produced. Turbid throughout Film on surface. Much sediment.
Strongly acid.
Nitkate.
Is reduced to nitrite.
Bouillon.
Film on surface which breaks up, forming a heavy flaky sediment.
192
Samuel C, Prescott and W, Lyman Underwood,
BACILLUS NO. 6.
General
Characteus.
Shape and arrangement : Bacilli, occurring singly and in short chains.
Size: 1.5-^x3.5/^
MoHlity: MotUe.
Spore formation : Not observed.
Relation to temperature : Grows readily at 37^^ d less rapidly at 20^ C.
Relation to air: Aerobe and facultative anaerobe.
Relation to gelatin : Liquefies rapidly.
Color: Yellow.
Gelatin.
Stick culture : Development begins at surface. Liquefaction quickly sets
in, and a trumpet-shaped liquefied portion is formed.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies : Yellow, circular, shiny colonies, bluish by transmitted
light. Plate is entirely liquefied on fourth or fifth day. The colonies
float in the liquefied gelatin, appearing as small yellow spheres.
Agar.
Streak culture : A thick, lustrous, moist la3rer covering the whole surface.
Pale orange yellow in color.
Flate culture : Small dome-shaped surface colonies with sharply defined
edges. Yellow. Submerged colonies, very small brownish spheres.
Potato.
Growth at first thin and watery, and pale yellow in color, later becoming
orange yellow, and spreads over the whole surface. Potato is darkened.
Milk.
Is coagulated. Yellow at surface. Coagulum is later dissolved. Neutral.
Smith
Solution.
No gas produced. Solution turbid throughout. Yellow sediment and
yellow growth at surface.
Nitrate.
Not reduced. Turbid.
Bouillon.
Very turbid. Heavy, pale yellow sediment
Fig. 3. Hacii.lus No. 7.
Micro-organisms and Sterilizing Processes in Canning. 193
BACILLUS NO. 7. (Figures 3 and 4.)
GnrxKAL
Characters.
Sha^ and arroMgiemeni : Long slender bacilli with rounded ends, gener-
ally occurring singly.
Siu: j-10 fix I.5/X.
MotilUy: Motile.
Spore formation : Forms drumstick-shaped spores.
Relation to temperature : Develops rapidly at yj\^, slowly at 20^.
Relation to air: Anaerobe and facultative aerobe.
Relation to gelatin : Non- liquefying.
Color: Yellowish white.
GXLATIN.
Stick culture: Development is very slight, and growth takes place slowly.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies : Small, circular, whitish colonies, regular in outline, and
sharply defined. Submerged colonies appear as small spherical dots.
Agajl
Streak culture : Smooth, lustrous layer covering the wh(4e surface of the
agar.
Plate culture: Smooth, circular, rather small white colonies. Outline
sharply defined. No characteristic markings. Submerged colonies
small, spherical, or oval dots.
Potato.
Development very slow and slight Lumpy growth after several days.
Milk.
Not coagulated. Acidity, neutral.
Smith
Solution.
No gas produced. Slightly turbid.
•
Nitrate.
Not reduced to nitrite.
Bouillon.
Turbid throughout Film on surface and sediment
194
Samuel C. Prescott and W. Lyman Underwood.
MICROCOCCUS NO. i. (Figure 5.)
General
Characters.
Gelatin.
Shape and arrangement : Cocci; generally in pairs.
Size: I ^ in diameter.
Motility : Motile ; in pairs, sometimes rotation about center.
Spare formation : Not observed.
Relation to temperature : Rapid development at 37^°. Slow at 20°
Relation to air : Aerobe and facultative anaerobe.
Relation to gelatin : Non-liquefjring.
Color: Yellow.
SticJk culture : Growth first appears at surface. Below surface xlerelop-
ment is very slow. Yellow growth at surface.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies : Circular with sharply defined edges and yellow color.
Under microscope show granular appearance and a deep color at center,
surrounded by a paler ring.
Submerged colonies show no clear markings, but appear as very small
spherical dots.
Agar.
Streak culture: Smooth, lustrous yellow layer covering much of the
surface.
Plate culture : Small, shiny, pale yellow circular colonies, dome-shaped,
and smooth in appearance. Submerged colonies generally ov^ ind
brownish*
Potato.
Development slight, a moist, lumpy growth ai^)earing after several days.
Milk.
Not coagulated. Acidity, neutral.
. , Smith
Solution.
No gas produced. Slight turbidity. Alkaline reaction.
' *' Nitrate.
Not reduced to nitrite.
Bouillon.
- Turbid throughout; film tm surface. Considerable sediment
Micro-organisms atid Sterilizing Processes in Canning. 195
MICROCOCCUS NO. 2.
GSNKXAL
Charactxrs.
Shapt and arrangewunt: Cocci; occurring sometimes singly, often in
groups.
Siue : About .9 fi in diameter.
Motility: Non-motile.
Spare formation : Not observed.
Helation to t^mptrature: Develops quickly at 37 J® C, more slowly at 20°.
Relation to air : Aerobe and facultative anaerobe.
Relation to gelatin : Liquefies slowly.
Color: Yellow.
GXLATHf.
Stick culture : Development chiefly at surface. A yellow film is formed
and liquefaction takes place, a cup-shaped depression resulting.
IHati culture: Small, circular or somewhat irregular colonies, which
under low power appear granular; yellow at center, shading into
white at the clearly marked edges. They appear bluish bv trans-
mitted light. Submerged colonies, spherical or oval, and brownish
in color.
Aga«.
Streak culture: Bright yellow, thick, sticky growth, branching and ex-
tending over the whole surface.
I^ate culture: Pale yellow, raised, circular, shiny, smooth colonies, gen-
erally very small. Submerged colonies, pale, oval, or spherical.
Potato.
Thin, branching, spreading growth of citron yellow, covering much of the
surface of the potato. Later, becomes dry, ridged, and roughened.
Miuc
Not coagulated. Neutral reaction.
Smith
Solution.
No gas produced Slight amount of sediment and some turbidity. Alka-
line reaction.
NiTRATX.
Not reduced to nitrite.
Bouillon.
Very turbid throughout Sediment heavy and viscous.
196 Samuel C. Prescott and W. Lyman Underwood.
It is not to be inferred that these include all the species of bac-
teria which occur in swelled cans even of clams and lobsters. Of those-
which produce the spoiling of fruits and. vegetables, we have as yet
slight knowledge.^
Inoculation Experiments.
If the organisms isolated from decomposing material are the agents
by means of which the decomposition is effected, it should be possible
to reproduce this spoiling at will by inoculation of sterile material with
cultures of the organisms in question, external conditions being the
same in both cases. To determine this point experimentally, sterile
cans have been seeded with pure cultures of bacteria obtained fromt
spoiled cans.
For these experiments cans were tested by incubation at blood
heat until it was demonstrated beyond doubt that no swelling would
result. The outside of these cans was thefi sterilized either by pass*
ing through a flame or by washing in^ mercuric chloride. A small
hole was then made in the top of the can with a hot awl, the can
either being held directly in the flame of a Bunsen burner or the
operation being carried on in a previously sterilized glass chamber*
The bacteria were introduced by means of a platinum needle, and the
strictest precautions against contamination were observed. As sooa
as inoculated the cans were sealed with solder, and, after shaking, were
replaced in an incubator at a temperature of n^ C. (98® F.). A num-
ber of similar cans were similarly treated in every way, except that no
germs were introduced, the object of this treatment being to show
that puncturing the can, thus allowing air to enter, will not cause
spoiling if the operation is carried on with due precautions. To illus-
trate these points more fully a few results are here given:
'A bacterial study of the spoiling of corn, known to the trade as "sour com,"
already been begun, and a number of experiments are now in progress.
J
Micro-organisms and Sterilizing Processes in Canning, 197
Treatment.
Incubated.
Results.
7
Punched, but not seeded.
371° C.
All kept perfectly.
5
Punched, not seeded.
371
All kept perfectly.
5
Punched, not inoculated.
37i
All kept perfectly.
16
Inoculated.
37i
14 spoiled.
3
Inoculated.
37i
All spoiled.
12
Inoculated.
37i
7 spoiled.
5
Inoculated.
37i
All spoiled.
The results, as shown above, prove that spoiling is due to the
action of the living bacteria in the cans. Moreover, the cans in which
spoiling was thus brought about showed, when opened, the black-
ening and liquefaction characteristic of the original spoiled cans, thus
provmg that the bacteria isolated were the specific causes of spoiling.
An investigation was next made of the efficiency of the ordinary
water-bath treatment. Sterile cans were seeded, as above described,
with germs derived from spoiled cans. After seeding, however, they
were subjected to heat in the water bath exactly as is done on a
commercial scale, for a length of time varying from two and one-
half to four hours. This time was divided into two periods, the cans
being tapped between the two heatings. As will be shown by the
following figures, quite a large percentage of the cans treated in this
manner spoiled :
No. of cans.
Time of heating. (Hours.)
Incubated.
Results.
7
1 + 1 + 1
37i° C.
All spoiled.
8
i + ii
371
All spoiled.
7
1 + 1 + 1
20
All spoiled.
8
i + ii
20
All spoiled.
16
i + J + 4
374
14 spoiled.
8
U + lt
374
All spoiled.
3
14 + li
374
All spoiled.
3
i + ii
374
2 spoiled.
63
58
198 Samuel C. Prescott and W» Lyman Underwood.
From these figures it is seen that 92 per cent, of the cans spoiled,
a far greater percentage of loss than occurs in practice. This is to
be accounted for chiefly by the fact that in these cans have been
planted thousands of bacteria of species which have withstood this
temperature in the original spoiled cans, while in the ordinary packing
the admission of these bacteria i$ a matter of chance. Moreover, the
temperature at which these cans ^re incubated appears to be. specially
advantageous for the rapid development of those organisms which have
not been killed by the heat, so the test is unusually severe. It should
be distinctly understood that these results do not necessarily signify
that a large percentage of the cans receiving water-bath treatment
on a commercial scale should spoil if allowed to stand at blood heat,
but are valuable because of the practical demonstration that this proc-
ess is insufficient when such bacteria are present, and is unsafe at
all times because of the possibility of such infection.
Bacteriological examination of cans which have spoiled, as described
above, has shown in all cases the presence of living germs like those
of the species originally put into the cans. Thus, for example, cans
inoculated with a culture of a large bacillus have been found to con-
tain pure cultures of a large bacillus corresponding in every way to
the one originally inoculated into the can.
Sterilization, or ^'Processing" Experiments.
Our experiments carried on to determine the comparative efficiency
of the "dry retort"^ and the water bath as agencies of sterilization
have, without exception, shown the very great superiority of the former.
As indicated above, " processing " in the water bath for two and one-
half hours does not always produce complete sterilization. On the
other hand, there is no reason to doubt the efficiency of the retort
if it is properly used. Of over one hundred cans heated in the
retort, but otherwise subjected to the same treatment as the water-
bathed cans, not one has swelled or shown any evidence of spoiling
even under the severe test of standing in the incubator for a month.
In addition to the water-bath ekperiments above described, a few
' The term *' retort ** b a commercial one, Hod b open to objection, yet no more so than
the term " autoclave, *' whidi is used so much in bacteriology, and is applied to the same
instrument.
Microorganisms and Sterilizing Processes in Canning, 199
tests have been made to show the effect of continuous boiling for
various lengths of time upon the bacteria or their spores. Cans
inoculated with these bacteria have been subjected to continuous
boiling for periods of four, five, six, seven, and eight hours. In
these experiments, mixtures of the bacteria were taken for the in-
oculating material.
No. of cans.
Time of boiling. (Hours.)
Results.
2
4
Both spoiled in 48 hours.
3
3
5
6
( 2 spoiled in 48 hours.
\ 1 spoiled in 64 hours.
( 2 spoiled in 48 hours.
( 1 spoiled in 64 hours.
3
7
2 spoiled in 48 hours.
4
6
All spoiled.
4
7
All spoiled.
4
8
All spoiled.
These results indicate that the organisms here dealt with have
very great resistance to heat — a fact of great interest when taken in
connection with the readiness with which spore formation occurs.
For practical as well as for scientific purposes it is obviously
important to determme with accuracy minimal periods of retorting
required in the various branches of the industry. We have experi-
mented in this direction with highly satisfactory results, and have
found it possible to preserve clams and lobsters with ease, and in
a more perfect condition, with absolute certainty, with much briefer
processing period than is ordinarily used, the only essential being
the proper control of the temperature. An account of our numerous
experiments in this direction is reserved for a second paper.
Biological Laboratory,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
March, 1897.
^
AD VERTiHEMENTS.
pABOT'S QHniGLE
Lreosote OTAINS.
" The Only Exterior Coloring
That Does Not
"Blacken."
For samplei tm wood and book oF sketches >pp>r to
SIIIM CIBOI, 70 BID? Stmt, Boston, Urn., Solo luilkiftinr.
COCHRANE CHEMCAL CO.,
66 KILBY STRKET. BOSTON, IVlASS.
on. VmtlOL, AQUA AMMONIA, ALIilH,
HURIAnC ACID, SULPHATE AMMCHflA, POROUS ALUM,
NITUC ACD, EXTRACT INDHIO, BULPHATB ALUMINA,
ACBTK ACID, OLAUBER'S SALT. CHLORIDE ALUMINA,
AQUA PORTM, SULPHATE SODA. IRON LIQUORS.
TIN CRYSTALS. BISULPHATB SODA, NITRATE IRON,
MURUTB TM, BISULPHITE SODA. NITRATE COPPER,
5TANNATB SODA, aad Mhu Chanlcd*.
■u«iNUS Pounded is4B. Works at Evkrctt. mass.
A. J. WilKiiJsoo &■ Co.,
MacMnery & General Hardware,
Macbinists' & Hanufactnrers' Supplies.
TOOLS FOR WOOD AND METAL "WORKERS.
180, 184p 1S8 Wcuhington 8tr«t*t and
19, sa, 98 DavotuMre Street^
BOSTON. MASS.
\
\
Technology (^QEmRTER ly
AND
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS.
Vol. X. JUNE, 1897. No. 2,
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTR
TKHNOUOGV QUARTS1U.V, Vol X, No. %.
ERRATA.
Page 260, ten lines from bottom, and also fifteen lines from bottom,
for "now superfluous" read "non-superfluous."
Page 266, fifteen lines from bottom, for V-^ read 4
Page 268, seven lines from top, for "intermediate" read "indeter-
minate."
Page 268, eight lines from top, for " volume " read " volumes.
>f
a subsequent meeting. The Chair appointed the following committee :
Colonel E. H. He wins. Professor E. C. Pickering, and Mr. Thomas
Doane.
The Society then proceeded to the election of new members.
Messrs. John D. Hobart, of Maiden, Albert P. Norris, of Cam-
bridge, W. Lyman Underwood, of Belmont, and David B. Weston, of
Watertown, were duly elected Associate Members.
There being no further business, the Chair introduced Mr. Samuel
Cabot, of the Corporation of the Institute, who read a paper on " The
Technology ( O^RTE'RLY
AND
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS.
Vol. X. JUNE, 1897. No. 2,
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS,
THIRTY-FIFTH YEAR, i8g6h^.
Thursday, January 14, 1897.
The 493d meeting of the Society of Arts was held this day at
the Institute, Mr. Blodgett, Chairman of the Executive Committee,
presiding.
The Chairman announced that President Francis Amasa Walker
had died at his home early in the morning of January 5. The Secre-
tary read a letter from the Executive Committee of the Alumni Asso-
ciation of the Institute, inviting the Society of Arts to cooperate
with the Alumni Association in a memorial service. It was voted to
refer this communication to the Executive Committee, with power to
act as may seem best. On motion of Colonel Hewins, it was voted
that a committee of three be appointed by the Chair to draft resolu-
tions in regard to the death of President Walker, and to report at
a subsequent meeting. The Chair appointed the following committee :
Colonel E. H. Hewins, Professor E. C. Pickering, and Mr. Thomas
Doane.
The Society then proceeded to the election of new members.
Messrs. John D. Hobart, of Maiden, Albert P. Norris, of Cam-
bridge, W. Lyman Underwood, of Belmont, and David B. Weston, of
Watertown, were duly elected Associate Members.
There being no further business, the Chair introduced Mr. Samuel
Cabot, of the Corporation of the Institute, who read a paper on " The
202 Proceedings of the Society of Arts,
Study of the Air for Locomotive Purposes." He pointed out that the
study of the soaring of birds forms the basis for the study of the prob-
lem of flight by man. The difficulty of the problem is greatly increased
when it is attempted to construct machines large enough for practical
purposes, the difficulties of starting and stopping being especially great.
The importance of momentum in flight was dwelt upon at some length.
A large Malay kite and a number of small models of flying machines
were exhibited, and the speaker closed with a description of a device
of his own invention for applying power to flying machines, in which
two pairs of wings are caused to revolve in opposite directions upon
a single shaft. A discussion followed, and then after a vote of thanks
the Society adjourned.
Thursday, February ii, 1897.
The 494th meeting of the Society of Arts was held at the Insti-
tute this day at 8 p.m., Mr. Blodgett in the chair.
The record of the previous meeting was read and approved.
Colonel Hewins, Chairman of the committee appointed to draft
resolutions in regard to the death of President Walker, presented the
following report,^ which was adopted and ordered to be incorporated in
the records :
In accordance with the inscrutable purposes of the Ruler of the
Universe, Francis Amasa Walker has been removed by death while
yet in the full vigor of life and in the midst of cherished labors only
partially completed and in some respects only foreshadowed. In this
we realize the frailty of human life and endeavor. The Society of
Arts has lost, not only its learned and accomplished President, but
a man whose vigor and earnestness have greatly promoted its influence.
Whether as soldier, student of social and political economy, as edu-
cator, or organizer, we may look to the example set by General Walker
for encouragement and instruction in order to increase our usefulness
in the world. So may we strive to emulate him according to our abili-
ties and opportunities. Not only has this Society lost its valued head,
but the loss to the community, while felt, cannot be wholly measured
or known. In so far as we may, we would join in the bereavement
of the afflicted family, to whom it must be a material consolation to
remember his far-reaching labors, and that his life has been a benefit
to mankind.
' Resolutions adopted by the Corporation and the Faculty follow, p. 206.
Proceedings of the Society of Arts. 203
There being no further business, the Chairman introduced Mr.
Alvan G. Clark, of Cambridge, who read a paper on " Telescopes, with
Special Reference to the Making of the Yerkes Telescope for the
University of Chicago/* The history of telescope making was out-
lined, and it was shown how the size of lenses has been limited by im-
perfections in the art of glass making. The methods employed in
grinding the 40-inch lens for the Yerkes telescope were then described,
special stress being laid upon the methods of testing and finishing the
glass, for this is the most important part of the work, and requires
truly artistic skill. The paper was illustrated by an exhibition of appara-
tus and specimens of glass. The thanks of the Society were voted to
the speaker, and then the meeting adjourned.
Thursday, February 25, 1897.
The 495th meeting of the Society of Arts was held this day at
the Institute at 8 p.m., Mr. Blodgett in the chair. The record of the
previous meeting was read and approved.
Messrs. George W. Rolfe and Alexander W. Moseley were duly
elected Associate Members. The Chairman called attention to the
" Life and Letters of William Barton Rogers,'* recently published by
Mrs. Rogers, and announced that she had given to the Institute a copy
for each of the libraries.
Professor William H. Niles read a paper on "The Evolution of the
Great Lakes and St. Lawrence Waterway." Attention was called to
the multitude of smaller lakes, which, associated with the larger ones,
constitute a system of lakes rather than of streams. It was noticed
that the features of the streams as well as the number and arrange-
ment of the lakes show that the system still retains many features of
youthfulness. It was not until the close of the mediaeval or mesozoic
era of the earth's history that the hydrographical basin was closed on
the west, and that the first boundaries of the antecedent lake system
were established. During the tertiary period the humidity of the cli-
mate supplied an abundance of water, while the elevation of the lands
gave velocity to the outward flowing streams. The geographic changes
resulted in giving coolness to the climate, which with its humidity
favored the formation of glaciers. When the ice sheet began to
recede from its southern limit, it left large moraines which served
204 Proceedings of the Society of Arts,
to obstruct the valleys and to cause the waters to accumulate between
them and the retreating ice front. It was with these glacial lakes that
the present system was initiated. In the early stages the water cov-
ered considerable areas of what are now dry land bordering on the
lake system. The outlet of these waters was first in the region of
Chicago towards the Mississippi River. Later, when the ice had re-
treated somewhat and the land to the eastward had subsided, an out-
let was formed along the valley of the Mohawk to the Hudson. Still
later tlfe waters flowed southward from Oswego into this channel of
the Mohawk, and at a still later time water flowed through the valley
of Lake Champlain southward to the Hudson valley. It was shown
that these ancient river channels now afford favorable locations for
large canals, and opportunities for the development of waterways
between the Great Lakes and the Atlantic seaboard of the United
States.
It was voted to extend the speaker the thanks of the Society, and
the meeting adjourned.
Thursday, March ii, 1897.
The 496th meeting of the Society of Arts waS held at the Insti-
tute this day at 8 p.m., Professor Cross in the chair. The record of
the previous meeting was read and approved.
Dr. Francis H. Williams read a paper on "Some Uses of the
Rontgen Rays," in which he gave an outline of the results of his
work upon the application of these rays to medical diagnosis. He
pointed out that the permeability of a substance to the rays depends
upon its thickness and upon its chemical composition ; the permea-
bility being less, generally speaking, the higher the atomic weight.
The average for the soft tissues is not far from that of water. Cal-
culi can be detected by means of the rays only when they are com-
posed largely of inorganic material. The difference in permeability
of the organs and tissues produces the contrast which makes them
visible. The method of taking radiographs and the process of exam-
ining patients by means of the fluoroscope were described and illus-
trated. Dr. Williams, continuing, gave an account of the method of
locating a bullet, and then he described the series of observations used
in making a diagnosis of diseases of the chest. It was made clear
that a thorough study of normal subjects by this means is necessary
Proceedings of the Society of Arts, 205
before it can be used successfully to determine pathological conditions.
The paper was illustrated by experiments and lantern views. A
discussion followed, after which the Society adjourned.
Thursday, March 25, 1897.
The 497th meeting of the Society of Arts was held at the Insti-
tute this day at 8 p.m., with Mr. Blodgett in the chair. The record of
the previous meeting was read and approved. Messrs. C. A. Hicks,
of Needham, Dexter Brackett, of Boston, N. C. Grover, of Orono,
Maine, William Jackson, of Boston, A. G. Safford, of Lowell, Fred-
eric P. Stearns, of Dorchester, Charles H. Swan, of Boston, S. E.
Tinkham, of Boston, and F. I. Winslow, of Boston, were duly elected
Associate Members.
The Chairman introduced Professor C. P. Brooks, Director of the
Lowell Textile School, who read a paper on " Technical Education in
Europe." He divided technical schools into five classes, and pointed
out that, of these, the purely trade school has, perhaps, reached its
highest development in Germany, where it has had a most remarkable
influence in promoting the prosperity of the country. The schools
of this class in Germany, France, Belgium, and Switzerland were
described. This was followed by an account of the technical high
schools in Germany, and of the technical universities of England,
which have a similar function. The speaker passed then to a discus-
sion of technical education in England, of which the Combination
Schools of Science, Art, and Technology form the most prominent
feature.
The paper was followed by a discussion, after which, on motion of
Dr. Thorp, it was voted to extend the thanks of the Society to the
speaker for his very interesting and instructive paper. The Society
then adjourned
Robert P. Bigelow, Secretary.
206 Resolutions of the Corporation and the Faculty,
MINUTES ADOPTED BY THE CORPORATION AND BY
THE FACULTY ON THE DEATH OF PRESIDENT
FRANCIS A. WALKER,
The members of the Corporation of the Massachusetts Insti-
tute OF Technology desire to place on their records an expression
of their sorrow at the death of their late President, and their sense of
the loss of one who had contributed so largely to the growth and suc-
cess of the institution with which he was immediately connected, and
to the cause of scientific training and education throughout the whole
country.
General Francis A. Walker was elected President of the Institute
May 25, 1 88 1, at an important period in its history. Barely sixteen
years had elapsed since President William B. Rogers opened the
School of Industrial Science in a few rooms on Summer Street.
The plans of President Rogers were original, the result of long
study and reflection, and formed a new departure in the higher educa-
tion and the application of science to industry.
The process of development had gone on under the guiding hand
of the great founder as rapidly as could have been expected, and was
giving promise of success when age and physical infirmity compelled
him to resign his place.
President Rogers, with a full knowledge of the kind of man needed
for the development of the plans he had formulated, selected General
Walker as his successor. He was in the prime and vigor of manhood.
He had been thoroughly trained as a thinker and administrator, and
had shown his capacity in positions of high importance. He fully
comprehended the scheme, new and far-reaching as it was, and he
believed in its possibilities. He had energy and a force of will that
no obstacles could resist, and an enthusiasm which no discouragement
could chill, and in November, 1881, he entered upon the discharge of
his duties.
He had rare powers of discrimination in the selection of men, as
shown by the character of thbse he called to the different depart-
ments of the institution, and he imparted to them of his own zeal
and enthusiasm.
His labors were untiring, and we are the glad witnesses of the suc-
cess which crowned his efforts.
• During the fifteen years of General Walker's administration the
number of the buildings for the use of the School of Industrial Sci-
Resolutions of the Corporation and the Faculty, 207
ence has increased from one to five ; the number of professors, teach-
ers, and lecturers from thirty-seven to one hundred and fifty-six, and of
pupils from two hundred and fifty-three to upwards of twelve hundred.
These facts are the outward and visible evidence of what General
Walker did for the institution. His greater and real influence is not
to be so measured, and can hardly be described in words. The char-
acter of the men who have graduated from the school, and their work
in every part of the country from the Atlantic to the Pacific, consti-
tute the highest tribute to the worth of our late President.
Combined with all his great qualities as educator, administrator,
publicist and writer. General Walker was a man of the kindest, warm-
est heart and tenderest feelings. He won the affection of his Faculty
and every student as well. All regarded the President as their friend.
His office and his house were alike open to them, where all were wel-
come, and each one knew where to look for sympathy and encourage-
ment when needing counsel or help.
The members of the Corporation will ever cherish the memory of
President Walker, and they tender to his family their warmest sympa-
thy in this their hour of bereavement and affliction.
Francis A. Walker assumed the presidency of the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology in November, 1881, and died in office Janu-
ary 5, 1897. For more than fifteen years he lived and labored
without stint or favor for its highest welfare. Suddenly his singu-
larly varied intellectual and public career is ended.
His life touched the public service at many points. As citizens
we mourn, and as members of the Faculty of the Institute over which
he presided, we desire to express and record our sense of loss in the
breaking of ties which years of his wisdom, sympathy, cooperation,
and good will have formed and bound together.
Among the many qualities which he possessed in eminent degree
we wish to record, in particular :
His leadership.
His remarkable and unusual appreciation of departments of knowl-
edge outside his own special and personal domain.
His delicate and keen perception of the proper relations of the
various courses of instruction assembled under his charge.
His discriminating and forceful interpretation of the needs and
thought of the larger world, gained by a wide range of public service.
His unfailing courtesy, his kind and conciliatory spirit without sac-
rifice of candor or frank expression of strong conviction.
His generous recognition of the independent judgment and action
208 Resolutions of the Corporation and the Faculty.
of the instructing staff in the conduct and development of their indi-
vidual work.
His powerful influence over students for good, by an unconscious
appeal direct to the qualities of manliness and honest endeavor, which
he illustrated by personal example, winning a devoted loyalty and con-
fidence sacredly cherished by him.
In President Walker the Institute was honored wherever he was
known, so wide was the recognition of his energy, his administrative
ability, and his contributions to history, education, statistics, and politi-
cal economy. No man need covet a nobler monument than the record
of his life.
Tribute to tfte Memory of General Walker, 209
A TRIBUTE TO THE MEMORY OF BREVET BRIGADIER
GENERAL FRANCIS AMASA WALKER}
By colonel THOMAS L. LIVERMORE.
Companion Francis Amasa Walker, Commander of this Com-
mandery in 1883-4, ^i^d January 4, 1897, at the age of fifty-six.
At the outbreak of the war, a student of law in the office of Charles
Devens, Jr., in Worcester, he followed the latter into the service and
enlisted under him as a private in the isth Massachusetts Volunteers.
He was appointed Sergeant Major of the regiment in August, and
his brilliant character and liberal attainments brought him promotion
to Captain and Assistant Adjutant General of Volunteers in Septem-
ber, 1861. Taking the field with General Couch, commanding the
1st Division, 4th Corps (afterwards 3d Division, 6th Corps), he made
the Peninsular and Antietam campaigns on the staff of that general,
and was promoted to Major and Assistant Adjutant General, August
II, 1862. When General Couch, in October, 1862, was assigned to
the command of the 2d Army Corps, Major Walker passed to that
corps and was identified with it from that time until he resigned from
the Army in January, 1865. He was regularly assigned to be Assist-
ant Adjutant General of the corps with the rank of Lieutenant Colo-
nel, January i, 1863.
The adjutant of a corps commander is his ear and voice. It is he
who collects, collates and compares the statistics of numbers from day
to day, and detects the increase or diminution of the fighting strength
of the corps, intercepts and digests the countless communications
which ascend from twenty thousand men to their commander, con-
ducts all correspondence and frames all orders. Even in the saddle,
under the enemy's fire, he must, with nerves under control and
patience unruflSed, catch the spirit of commands from a general, some-
times, perhaps, inflamed with the ardor of combat or oppressed with
' Adopted at a meeting of the Massachusetts Commandery of the Military Order of the
Loyal Legion of the United States, Boston, February 3, 1897.
2IO Thomas L, Livermore,
the weight of disaster, and translate them in clear, courteous and
orderly phrase on the instant, for transmission to subordinate com-
manders, and withal he must, in time of need, ride the field and pene-
trate the battle like the youngest aide-de-camp. All these things this
volunteer of twenty-two did as if he had been trained to the duties all
his life. To serve as he did in this intimate capacity with Generals
Couch, Warren and Hancock, soldiers schooled in the severe traditions
of the regular army, who maintained the loftiest view of the dignity
and methods of their profession, was not an easy duty, but Golonel
Walker not only did this, through all the arduous campaigns of 1862,
1863 and 1864, excepting the few months when he was detained from
the field by wounds or in the enemy's prisons, but he also won high
and repeated commendation from these commanders, both for his work
in the bureau and for his valor on the field of battle. He had entered
the war with a New England character and training which led him to
devote himself to his duty with the utmost conscientiousness, whether
at the desk or in the saddle, and he gave to it a scrupulous attention
to detail, an exact observance of formalities and an unremitting labor
which almost excluded relaxation. Of kind heart, with winning smile
and unfailing politeness, he displayed the best qualities of roundhead
and cavalier together.
The intellectual powers which afterwards made him famous in an-
other career, guided by the motives indicated in the conduct which has
been outlined, overcame all the want of military education, and all the
disadvantages of youth, and he began to win high commendation with
his first campaign. His name received honorable mention in the
reports of many battles, including Williamsburg, Fair Oaks, Malvern
Hill, Fredericksburg, Chancellorsville, Bristol Station, Wilderness,
Spottsylvania, Petersburg and Ream's Station. At Chancellorsville
he was wounded, and at Fair Oaks General Couch reported that he
** made a daring personal reconnaissance and had his horse shot under
him." General Warren being temporarily assigned to the command
of the 2d Army Corps, during the absence of General Hancock, found
himself thrown into the intricate and rapid manoeuvres between Bull
Run and the Rapidan, which took place in the latter part of 1863,
with a strange command and a strange staff, a position in which as
corps commander he had every opportunity to appreciate the merits
and to discover the defects of the adjutant general. Praise was not
easily won from General Warren, but in his report of the campaign
212 Thomas L, Livermore,
President Walker imparted to the students was like that which the
successful military leader inspires in his soldiers, and the cheerfulness
with which these students, under his extraordinary influence, submitted
themselves to the severest and most unremitting intellectual labor was
a phenomenon in the history of education. While conducting the work
of his office President Walker did a great amount in other fields. His
writings in his favorite science of political economy created a high
reputation for him in Europe as well as in America, and he was repeat-
edly honored with degrees by foreign universities. His lectures and
addresses were many, and his services on boards and commissions for
worthy public objects, and in associations for the advancement of sci-
ence and the elevation of mankind, were constant. Unmindful of his
personal fortunes, he was prodigal of his voice and pen in all good
works where his aid was sought, and as he approached his prime the
volume of his labors grew to be a torrent, and, with his fine physique
and glowing imagination, he threw himself into his labors as careless
of the consequences to himself as is the young soldier in the hour of
victory.
Amid all the interests which made their demands upon him, his
enthusiasm for the old war times was ever ready to blaze forth ; his
affectionate regard for his comrades in the field was unfailingly awak-
ened with- the mention of any name familiar on the rolls of his old
command. He gloried in his army, in his corps, in the name of vol-
unteer. He knew no discrimination between his comrades excepting
that of merit. It was characteristic of him, in his speech when he
received his honorary degree in Dublin University, to praise in enthu-
siastic terms the valor of his old companions in arms of the Irish
Brigade, regardless of the prejudice which made many of his audience
hostile listeners. The warmth of his affection for the associations of
the war was manifested in his moving oration before the Society of the
Army of the Potomac, in 1890, and in his eloquent eulogies of Sheri-
dan and Devens. His brilliant history of the 2d Army Corps, writ-
ten in hours seized amid a thousand duties, will always stand as a labor
of love, dedicated to the fame of his fellow soldiers.
His genial and kindly presence in our commandery is fresh in our
memories. In sad sincerity we can say, we shall not look upon his
like again.
Tribute to the Memory of General Walker. 21 1
he singled out Colonel Walker, to say of him : " Thoroughly acquainted
with his office duties, so important to the operations of an army corps,
he is equally willing and gallant on the field."
Colonel Walker was by General Hancock's side through the unfor-
tunate action at Ream's Station, August 25, 1864, in his heroic efforts
to retrieve the disaster which had fallen on a corps whose colors had
never before suffered shame, and received honorable mention for his
conduct in General Hancock's report. He there suffered the crown-
ing misfortune of capture. General Hancock said in his report that
Colonel Walker "was sent to the front with an order just before the
troops' were withdrawn, and, owing to the darkness, rode into the ene-
my's lines and was captured." To submit to the hard fate which had
befallen him was intolerable to him, and, with the unfaltering resolu-
tion which characterized his whole military career, he seized the chance
to escape on the march to Richmond, ^nd painfully made his way
by night to the Appomattox River, guiding his steps by the stars.
Exhausted as he was, he plunged into the stream and swam until he
had made the last stroke for which he had strength, only to be again
taken by the enemy as he reached the shore. The hardships of cap-
tivity accomplished what campaign and battle had failed to do, and the
gallant soldier and zealous patriot was compelled by the disability in-
curred in prison to relinquish his commission after his long career of
activity, usefulness and honor. In recognition of his distinguished
services and good conduct in the campaign of 1864 he was made
Colonel by brevet, to date from August i, 1864, and for gallant con-
duct at Chancellorsville and meritorious services during the war he
was made Brigadier General by brevet, to date from March 13, 1865.
After the war General Walker devoted himself to the advancement
of science and the work of education with the same zeal which char-
acterized his military career. Under the National Government he be-
came Chief of the Bureau of Statistics in 1869, Superintendent of the
Census in 1870 and 1880, and Indian Commissioner in 1871. He
became Professor of Political Economy and History in the Sheffield
Scientific School of Yale College in 1872, and in 1881 he was elected
President of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, which posi-
tion he filled during the rest of his life. Under him this institution
grew from a small school of local reputation to a great one of inter-
national fame, and while its numbers increased three-fold, the standard
and scope of its work were greatly enlarged. The enthusiasm which
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition. 213
SCIENTIFIC WORK OF THE BOSTON PARTY ON THE
SIXTH PEARY EXPEDITION TO GREENLAND.
Report B. Glacial Observations in the Umanak District,
Greenland.
By GEORGE H. BARTON, S.a
Read November 13, 1896.
CONTENTS.
PAGB.
West Greenland Topography 214
Relation of Inland Ice to Coast Line 214
Marginal Land Area 214
Umanak Fiord 215
The Inland Ice 216
General characteristics 216
Vertical face 216
Dust holes 216
Transparent bands, or veins 216
Gradient of surface 217
Superglacial streams and lakes 217
Lack of super- or englacial debris 218
Marginal moraine, streams and lakes 218
Karajak Glaciers 219
Crevassed stream extending back into inland ice 219
Gradient 220
Vertical edge 220
Banding or shear structure 221
Marginal streams and lakes 221
Tenacity of ice 222
Lateral moraine 223
Formation of icebergs frotn front of glacier 224
Action of birth of bergs upon waters of fiord 225
Behavior of ice in passing over bowlders and bosses 226
Itivdliarsuk Glaciers 227
General characteristics 228
Crevasses and gradient . 228
Direction of motion 229
214 George H, Barton,
Small Valley Glaciers and Glacial Tongues, or Lobes . . 229
Glaciers of Ekaluit valley 230
Gradient 230
Relation of lateral moraines and streams 230
Terminal moraines 230
Torrential streams from glacier front . 231
Glaciers at Sermiarsut 232
Glaciers and ice -cap on Disko island . 232
Former Extension of the Ice 233
Evidence of diminution of size of all glaciers except at Sermiarsut . . . 233
Old lateral moraines above Karajak and Itivdliarsuk glaciers .... 233
Old lateral moraines in the Ekaluit valley 233
Bowlder pavements and lateral moraines in Itivdlek valley 234
Roches moutonn^es and erratics on Umanak and Ikerasak islands, Karajak
nunatak, Ekinga and Nugsuak ........ 235
Smoothed outlines of all summits when seen transversely 238
Probability that ice once filled Umanak fiord, covered all the land, and passed
out into Bafiin*s Bay 239
Angular characteristics, as in Umanak and Ikerasak peaks, not an evidence of
non-glaciation 240
Evidence of gneiss bowlders on the basalt of Disko island .... 241
Evidences of former glaciation on American side of Baffin's Bay . . . 241
Probability that all of Labrador and Baffin Land were covered by ice-sheet which
moved toward Baffin's Bay and Davis Strait 243
The western coast of Greenland presents the aspect of a plateau
approaching clear to the coast line with no intervening lowlands, with
an average elevation of not less than two thousand feet, and with very
many summits rising from four thousand to occasionally over six thou-
sand feet altitude.
Backward from the general sea line at a distance of ten to sixty
miles lies the frontal edge of the vast ice-cap, which through the ex-
plorations of Peary and Nansen is known to cover the whole of Green-
land except the narrow marginal area along the coast. Very numer-
ous deep fiords intersect this marginal strip, in some places cutting it
completely into islands, as in the vicinity of Godthaab in Southern
Greenland, and in the southern portion of Melville Bay in Northern
Greenland. Many of the fiords penetrate to the edge of the ice-cap
from which great streams of ice pour down, filling the fiords for miles
with glaciers which give birth to the numerous icebergs with which
the Northwest Atlantic is dotted. These glaciers present bold fronts
to the water, often several miles in width and a few hundred feet in
height above the surface of the water. In all cases the fiords present
means of easy access to the margin of the inland ice.
Map
.IGSUAK PENINSVIA IS THE LARCKR BODY OF LAI
OF Umanak is StorOen. Sermjarsut is Of
LUIT IS OPPOSITE IKEKASAK. ACPAT ISLAND
BOAT JOURNEYS A
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expeditioji, 215
Many of the larger islands and peninsulas between the fiords have
their own small ice-caps which are usually detached from the main
mass of the inland ice. The larger portion of the surface of the
islands and peninsulas where not covered by ice is very rough and
broken, being traversed by numerous small streams flowing into the
fiords, which have cut sharp, deep gulches and valleys, thus rendering
travel across country very diflScult.
Umanak fiord is the southern of two large arms of the largest
indentation of the coast, except possibly Disko Bay, a body of water
lying between Swart en Huk peninsula on the north and the great
Nugsuak peninsula on the south, and which is nearly bisected by the
parallel of 71°. Ubekyendt and Upernivik islands separate the two
arms. The highest summits on the former island reach 3,640 feet,
and on the latter, 6,650. The average elevation of Nugsuak is above
3,000 feet on its northeastern side with summits rising to above 4,000
in many cases, and in one to 6,250 feet.
Umanak fiord broadens inward and then is divided into a series of
smaller fiords, the more important of which are the Kangerdluarsuk,
Ignerit, Itivdliarsuk, Sermilik, and Karajak fiords. Between these are
islands and peninsulas with peaks rising to 3,000 and 6,400 feet. The
Karajak fiord lies directly along the northeastern side of the Nugsuak
peninsula, and is bounded on the northeast by the island of Umanak,
which has one single sharp peak rising to 3,720 feet, the remainder of
the island having an elevation of only a few hundred feet ; Storoen
(the great island), whose highest peak is 4,450 feet, the island of Iker-
asak, low but with one isolated peak 2,550 feet, and a peninsula, not
named, with elevations of 3,000 feet. All these islands and penin-
sulas present precipitous faces to the water often nearly vertical, to
a height of 1,000 and 2,000 feet. Each of the fiords mentioned above
extends back to the margin of the inland ice, and their upper portions
are occupied by glaciers which pour down from it. The margin of the
inland ice lies upon land which has an elevation of 1,000 to 3,000 feet,
in consequence of which, as the glaciers pour down from this level to
that of the bottoms of the fiords, the crevassing which is caused by
their drainage from the inland ice extends for many miles inland,
similar to the current in a large body of water when a dam has given
way. Small valleys and narrow gorges pass down from the upper
levels of Nugsuak peninsula, many containing glaciers, some of which
reach the waters of the fiord, but the larger number do not.
2i6 George H, Barton,
Along the margin of the inland ice there are many isolated peaks,
nunataks, rising above the level of the ice, sometimes lying wholly
within and entirely surrounded by the ice, in other cases lying at the
edge of the water and surrounded by varying proportions of ice and
water. None of these lie at any great distance within the ice margin,
as recorded in other places, no instance being noted of a greater dis-
tance than about a mile between these and the main portion of the
land.
Tke Inland Ice, — The edge of the inland ice as it lies upon the
Nugsuak peninsula, upon the nunatak between the Great and Little
Karajak glaciers and upon Ekinga, the point just northwest of the
Itivdliarsuk glaciers, is usually nearly vertical. Its height or thick-
ness varies from lo feet to about 40 feet. In some cases it is
slightly overhanging, in others slightly retreating, but in nearly all
cases showing the edge of the layers of which the mass is made
up. Here usually the layers are inclined toward the margin. In a
few cases the edge has a slope of a sufficiently low inclination to
allow it to be ascended, but is always steep.
The marginal area is penetrated on the surface by numerous holes
varying in size from the fraction of an inch in diameter up to at least
3 feet, and having an average depth of about 2 feet. At the bottom
of each one is a thick layer of dust, which being dark in color causes
the hole to appear to be of great depth. So numerous are these where
most abundant that they occupy nearly one-half the entire surface.
The area occupied by them is perhaps a mile in width, extending in-
land from the extreme edge of the ice. The same area is very rough
and uneven, the surface consisting almost wholly of hillocks or hum-
mocks having much the shape of sand dunes, and an average height
of about 2 feet above the bottoms of the hollows between them. This
makes the dragging of a heavily-laden sledge difficult, but does not in-
terfere seriously with walking. Beyond this area the surface is com-
paratively smooth, and it is hard, solid ice throughout. No drifting
snow was seen in any portion, this latter fact being due to its being
late midsummer.
Between the crevassed areas and the land the ice is traversed by
a series of cracks about parallel in direction to the edge of the ice,
which have remained partially open till filled with water which has
frozen to form a clear transparent vein of new ice with yarying widths
up to 6 and 8 inches. These larger cracks produce a strong effect upon
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition, 217
the drainage, deflecting the smaller streams for a considerable distance
along their own direction and away from the slope of steepest descent
toward the land, till the volume of water becomes sufficiently large to
break across the little divides between the various cracks. Crossing
this series of cracks at a high angle, generally more than 60°, is an-
other series, not so pronounced, however, and seldom showing any
trace of vein ice. These two series of cracks divide the ice into large
rhombohedral blocks, 10, 20, and more, feet in diameter. The general
appearance presented is strongly that of a series of parallel and inter-
secting joint cracks in slate rocks.
From the highest point reached, having an elevation of 2,960 feet,
was obtained a wide range of vision to the south, southeast and north,
but to the northeast and bending toward the eastward the surface of
the ice rising inland shut off our view within a few miles. The gen-
eral topography of the inland ice as here seen is rolling and undulat-
ing, very similar to the surface of the prairies, and indeed reminds one
strongly of them when clothed in snow. The surface of the ice oppo-
site the head of the nunatak between the two Karajak glaciers has
an elevation of something less than 2,000 feet. The highest point
reached, being 2,960 feet at a distance of about fifteen miles inland,
would give an average gradient of about 67 feet per mile, or about
I in 27. Nansen reports i in 23 on the east coast for the same
distance.
Numerous small streams abound, flowing with considerable veloc-
ity down the steeper slopes or becoming sluggish on the gentler
slopes. Those on the slopes directly toward the land fall over the
vertical edge of the ice in picturesque little cascades or cut entirely
through its thickness, emerging from caflon-like walls. In some of
the basin-like depressions the waters from many converging streams
collect, forming large, almost marsh-like areas of shallow waters and
soft snow. In one case a fine lake of clear water was observed hav-
ing an area of several acres. The greater number of the streams are
small and easily crossed, those serving as outlets for the lakes and
marsh-like expanses being the larger, but these are seldom more than
6 or 8 feet broad. The largest stream seen was encountered at the
farthest distance inland. This had a width of nearly 20 feet from
brink to brink, a depth of nearly 1 5 feet to the surface of the water,
and below that a depth of about 5 feet of water. This river was flow-
ing directly toward the interior, its current having a velocity of three
to four miles per hour.
2i8 George H, Barton,
With the exception of the dust found in the dust-holes, no detritus
occurs on the surface of the inland ice or in its mass so far as revealed
by the numerous crevasses or the cuttings of streams. In the case of
the large stream just mentioned the water was absolutely clear and its
walls were of clear, transparent, beautifully blue ice, except a thick-
ness of about a foot at the upper surface, which was more or less
porous and white. Not a trace of detritus was to be seen in the ice
or in the bed of the stream. Along the margin of the inland ice,
best seen on the Nugsuak peninsula where there is no tendency
toward a lateral movement, there is a well-defined moraine made up
of till, which varies in places to sand or clay containing subangular
and rounded fragments. This moraine sometimes lies directly against
the front of the ice, sometimes is separated from it so as to produce
a perfect esker-like ridge. Between the ice and the detached moraine
in the latter case, there generally runs a stream of considerable size
which has apparently caused the retreat of the ice front by the wash-
ing of its current. In only one place was detritus observed upon the
ice far enough back from the edge to be entirely detached from the
moraine in front. At the extreme upper end of the nunatak lying
between the Karajak glaciers, the edge of the ice has a gentle slope
sufficiently low to ascend with little difficulty. Here back sometimes
a hundred to two hundred feet upon the ice rises the crest of a mo-
raine, but there is no moraine in front. This seemed to be simply the
crest of the normal moraine, the snows of the last season or seasons
having buried the remainder in a large drift which also forms the gen-
tle slope of the edge. This view is sustained by the fact of the fresher
appearance of the surface and its much softer character than else-
where. There is no indication that this line of detritus is an accu-
mulation of material along the end of a detritus-bearing layer of the
ice. No such detritus-bearing layers or zones were anywhere observed
in the inland ice or along its edge.
Along the front of the ice in the depressions of the undulating
surface of the country are numerous small lakes walled in by vertical
or overhanging cliffs of ice on one side, and the basin-like slopes of
the country on the other side. The largest of those observed on the
Nugsuak peninsula was perhaps a hundred acres in area. This was
fed by a large torrential stream flowing for a considerable distance
between the moraine and the ice, and formed by the aggregation of
a multitude of the small streams flowing off the ice front. At the
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition. 219
mouth of the stream the delta deposits were forming a typical sand
plain on a small scale. The lake was not of great depth, probably not
over 100 feet, but stood at nearly its highest level, its waters having
reached and overflowed the summit of the divide on the side opposite
the ice. The outlet stream had cut but a short distance downward, so
that the waters had been lowered but little.
Evidently the depression now occupied by this lake had recently
been filled by a lobe from the ice front, as well-defined moraines lie
around its outer margin, and are cut through by the outlet stream.
These lie at different elevations above the lake, so that they could not
have been formed by the shoving of the surface ice of the lake, and
are highest above the waters near the present ice front. The former
extension of the main mass of the ice sheet will be discussed in a later
portion of this paper.
The Karajak Glaciers, — The general direction of the Karajak
fiord as it penetrates the land is southeasterly. Near its inner extrem-
ity it bends nearly at a right angle to the northeast, and there is di-
vided into two unequal arms, one about five miles in width, the other
about two miles, which are separated from each other by a long, low
nunatak. In these two arms lie the Great and Little Karajak gla-
ciers, which in their direction of flow make an angle of about 45°
with the general direction of the front of the inland ice. Of these,
the former, taking its rise far back in the ice-cap at least fifteen or
more miles from its edge, flows down the fiord nearly to the lower
extremity of the nunatak a farther distance of ten or more miles, fill-
ing it with a mass of ice which rises nearly to an average of 5CX) feet
above the waters, and presenting to them the ordinary vertical face of
a glacier terminating in the sea. Throughout the entire length of its
course it is deeply crevassed, its surface consisting of an alternation
of pinnacles and crevasses, so that it can not be traversed at any dis-
tance from its sides except in a bay-like indentation of the nunatak,
where, as Professor Burton has demonstrated by measurements, the
ice is stagnant or has little motion, in consequence of which ablation
predominates over the crevassing and a comparatively smooth surface
results. Here the surface can be traversed for about three-fourths of
a mile, or less than one-fourth the entire width of the glacier, and here
were made the measurements for the determination of the rate of
motion. The elevation of the surface of the inland ice where the
glacier passes from it is about 1,500 feet above sea level, giving a
220 George H, Barton,
descent between this point and its face of i,ooo feet, an average gra-
dient of i,ooo feet in about ten miles, or of i in 52. The gradient of
the upper third of its length, however, is much greater than that of the
lower two-thirds, much of which is quite low.
The vertical character of the edge of the ice is more marked even
in the case of the glaciers than with the ice-cap itself. With the ex-
ception of the single place where Professor Burton ascended by means
of a moderate slope to the surface of the ablation area, the whole
length of the glacier on the side next the nunatak has a nearly verti-
cal face of pure, mostly transparent blue ice, with an average height
of 20 feet, and often of 30 and 40 feet. (See Figure i,^ where the
height is about 20 feet.) Although verticality is the normal rule, the
face is sometimes slightly retreating, sometimes slightly overhanging.
The cause of this vertical character seems to be partially if not largely
due to the lateral streams and waters of the small marginal lakes un-
dermining the edge, blocks from which fall off, the fractures in such
cases being nearly vertical. The low angle of the sun's rays may also
have a share in the work as discussed by Professor T. C. Chamberlin, for
the glaciers farther north. The overhanging faces in many cases are
apparently due to a shearing motion of the upper layers over the lower.
This was indicated quite strongly in one instance, where a layer pro-
jecting slightly beyond the ones above had caught a little detritus as
it rolled down. This same ledge continued from the slightly inclined
face along a portion of the overhanging face, and here still the detritus
remained which had been caught in its descent before the shearing
motion had changed this part of the face to an overhanging one.
A cavern presented a chance for a study of the material forming the
layer upon which the detritus had lodged, and also for several feet
above, showing them to be free from detritus and consequently that
the detritus could only have come from the upper surface and caught
upon the shelf while the face was inclined, and that its present over-
hanging form was due to the shearing motion of the upper portion of
the ice.
The surface of the glacier is much higher toward the central por-
tions than along the margin. No measurements were made to deter-
mine this central elevation, but it could not be less than fifty feet
above the marginal areas.
' The illustrations used in this article, with a few exceptions, are from photographs made
by members of the Boston party, especially by A. M. Dodge.
=1
'I
rl
M
9^
Small Arch r,Ei--i' aktkr Falling of Main Poition of Roof of Shb-
. Stream near EnfiF, of Great Karajak Gij^cier. The Vertical
Face Produced hv the Fallinc. of thk Roof is Seen on the Left.
A ANU MEANL
KKINO ST
EAMS AT THB SiDE OF
The Incunef
EDGE OF
THE Glacier is Seen
T Ascent wa
Madb to
TKE Surface of thk
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition, 221
Numerous small caverns presented an opportunity for the study
of the mtemal structure. In nearly every place so studied the ice
presented a moderately well banded appearance evidently due to shear-
ing, with an inclination of the layers toward the center of the glacier
at an angle of about 30° in the steepest cases, and varying from that
to nearly horizontal. Of the coarser banding or stratification that
might be produced by the seasonal accumulation of snows, nothing
was seen, though in a few instances broad bands darker than the gen-
eral mass of the ice were seen, which possibly are due to this cause.
Numerous small streams flow from the surface of the ice toward
the land over the uncrevassed area. Falling over the vertical face as
in the case of the streams from the ice-cap, they produce a series of
very picturesque cascades, one of which attained a sufficient size to
have the roar produced by its plunge into the lake below heard at a
distance of a half-mile. These small streams give rise to a large lat-
eral stream which in portions of its course flows with torrential veloc-
ity. This flows along the margin of the glacier in varying positions,
sometimes with the vertical face of the ice forming one of its walls.
sometimes bending directly into the ice in caverns of the most beauti-
ful blue color, and disappearing thus for many rods to again reappear
and continue its external course ; again it winds away from the ice
front and flows between the lateral moraine and the land. When near
the ice front or within it the bed of the stream is usually of clear,
transparent ice through which the stream has not cut to the bed rock,
or is often of sands and gravel accumulated upon its ice bed ; but
toward the lower portion of the glacier the ice for long distances does
not rest upon the underlying rock surface, and here the stream flows
directly over the bare rock and is broadened out into a thin, much
broken sheet of water, which sometimes retreats for a long distance
from the edge of the ice below the mass of the glacier. The caverns
formed by the stream have usually low broad arches, rendering access
within them very dangerous, owing to the falling of fragments from
above or the falling of the whole roof, but in a few cases they have
narrow high arches perfectly safe for penetration. It is to the falling
in of these arches that the vertical face of the ice edge is due in most
places. In some cases a small portion of the arch is left, forming
a pillar as shown in Figure 2.
In the numerous bay-like indentations of the coast line of the nun-
atak, the waters of the marginal stream accumulate and swell out into
222 George H, Barton.
the expanse of lakes of various sizes up to an area of many acres.
The largest of these is near the head of the glacier and not far from
the point where ascent to the inland ice was made. This lake is long
and comparatively narrow, as are nearly all those which occur along-
side of the glaciers. Its greatest length may be something over a
half-mile, while its width is nowhere greater than an eighth of a mile.
The detritus washed into its upper end by the large stream flowing
into it has built a broad fan-like delta, over which the waters of the
river meander in a series of small streams. A view of this looking
down stream is shown in Figure 3.
The lake next largest in size, shown in Figure 4, is situated about
two miles from the front of the glacier. Here a broad valley in the
side of the nunatak has permitted the formation of a lake of consid-
erable width, but of which a large part has been drained so that its
waters had fallen to a level about 20 feet below their former surface.
The upper level of the water is shown by the line of melting seen in
the view. Through the large amount of detritus which had accumu-
lated along the margin of the lake, a little stream coming down the
valley has cut its way, nearly keeping pace with the fall of the waters
of the lake. In the little valley thus cut through the detritus, as well
as along the whole margin, wave marks showing the successive stages
of water level are well shown, as seen in Figure 5.
Over the larger proportion of the surface of the glacier there is no
detritus to be seen. The pinnacled area is very clear and white as far
as it could be seen on the surface, and the crevasses show clear trans-
parent blue ice with scarcely a trace of detritus of any size, except
within a very short distance of the sides next the land. On the sur-
face of the bay-like expanse where melting has predominated over
crevassing, sufficient dust has accumulated to cause the whole area to
have a dirty color, but excepting directly along the margin there are
no fragments, and only an occasional pebble or bowlder. The mar-
ginal ice as seen by means of the caverns and tunnels along the
streams is extremely transparent, so that fragments of rock within it
could be seen when imbedded from 8 inches to a foot from the sur-
face. In no place would the detritus held in the ice amount to more
than I per cent, of the total mass. The great tenacity of the ice is
shown in some cases where large fragments held by it project down-
ward from the roof of a cavern. This was shown in one case by a
bowlder fully 3 feet in length, of which only a third was held in the
4-
Lateral Lakr, tn (
VHICH THE Water has
Recently Fallen
FROM A Level
HJT to Feet above ti
IE Present One. Th
E Vertical Edt.e
rs ALSO Shown
AMI
) THE Slope of the
SURKACB FROM THE CK
NTRAL Portions o
F the Glacier
VARD THE !>IDE.
E Marks
Formed at
■ Success 1
.AKE, AND
THE Cumt
)G Made :
THE LaKI
; SUBSCDKD.
A Small Stream ii
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition,
223
Fig. 6. Bowldbr thrbb rsBT long,
HBLD SUSPBNDKD FROM THB ROOF
OP AN IC8 CAVB, SHOWING THB BX-
TRBMB TBNAaTY OP THB ICB.
ice, while the remaining two-thirds projected at such an angle as to
produce a very strong leverage (see Figure 6), yet it was immovable
by any ordinary force that could be applied by the hands.
A lateral moraine of considerable size,
reaching a height in some cases of about
30 feet, borders this glacier throughout
its whole length along the nunatak. The
material of which it is composed consists
of fragments of all sizes up to blocks
having a diameter of 20 feet, and of finer
gravels, sands, and silt. The larger blocks
are almost entirely angular, but the medium in size and smaller ones
are mostly rounded or subangular, more often the former shape. A
coating of very fine silt covers all the surface from which the water has
recently receded as the lakes drained. The outline of the moraine
differs considerably in various places. In some places it is a very
distinct ridge entirely detached from the margin of the ice, and often
then the lateral stream flows between it and the ice. In other cases
it lies directly against the side of the ice, and then the lateral stream
commonly flows between the moraine and the slope of the nunatak.
In still other cases it is very irregular in outline, and perhaps divided
into two prominent ridges. In either of these latter cases the irregu-
larity seems to be due to the morainal matter having covered some of
the ice, causing irregular melting, as shown in Figure 7.
The ice front stand-
ing 500 feet above the
waters of the fiord,
strongly crevassed and
pinnacled, shows no
trace of detritus except
in the portions immedi-
ately marginal to the
land. Owing to the
danger from the waves
produced by the frag-
ments falling from above, or the large masses rising from below, the
ice front can never be very closely approached excepting on the land,
and from here, so far as could be seen with a good glass, the main
mass of the ice is of that clear transparent blue and green that is seen
0rTft>
Fig. 7. Rblation op latbral streams and moraines to
MARGIN OP GLACIRR. a, CAVERN IN WHICH PLOWS AN EN-
GLACIAL STREAM WHICH MAY BE LATBRAL ABOVE AND BELOW
THB POSITION OP THB SECTION SHOWN.
224 George H. Barton.
in the inland ice especially. In the broader crevasses a mass of ice
debris from the falling pinnacles collects to form a conglomeritic or
a brecciated structure presenting a very peculiar appearance when
detached and floating away as a berg, especially when making up the
larger portion of the berg, as it sometimes does.
No streams of any size flow from the front of the glacier above
water level, and those that must flow from it below the surface give
little indication of their presence — a fact which is probably due to the
very numerous fragments of all sizes which completely cover the sur-
face for a long distance from the ice front, and also that the surface is
in a state of almost constant commotion from the falling fragments.
Small fragments are constantly falling with reports like pistol or rifle
shots, and larger blocks quite often, the latter producing a series of
reports like artillery, and occasionally the whole face for a long dis-
tance falls with a tremendous roar that reverberates from the sides of
the fiords. Bergs so produced are sometimes a hundred or more feet
in length, but never very high above the surface of the water, as the
fall and the plunge into the water produce shocks which cause the
large mass to crack into numerous small fragments, sometimes entirely
to a mass of small debris. The larger bergs are produced by the
masses derived from below which are not numerously filled with cracks
originally, and are not subjected to the impact with the water surface,
as is the case with the falling masses. These masses are detached
from that portion of the glacier which projects from the vertical face
of the ice out under the water, and seldom detaches any portion of this
face in their own evolution.
The face of the glacier has an outline as in Figure 8, produced by
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition, 225
the breaking off of the face of the glacier above water level by the
action of gravity on this highly crevassed portion of the mass, and
the constant motion of the glacier itself.^ The lower portion of the
glacier is less crevassed than the upper, is consequently more cohe-
rent, and is not affected by the sun's rays or by gravity. As the
upper portion arriving at the front breaks off and floats away, the
under portion passes out under the water until its buoyancy, increased
by loss of the weight of that part that has broken away above, be-
comes sufficiently great to cause it to crack off in very large masses
and rise to the surface. All the larger bergs observed in the process
of formation had this latter origin. They form immense masses hav-
ing great length and breadth, and rising high above the water, probably
to a hundred feet or more. In rising to the surface they produce dull,
grumbling roars, and a much greater disturbance of the water than in
the case of the blocks falling from above, as the disturbing power is
deeper seated. Although the radiating waves may have died out on
the surface before the shore is reached, so that scarcely a gentle swell
is noticed, yet the water along the beach is churned into foam and
spray dashed into the air a hundred feet in height. Before coming to
rest the bergs must seek a position of stable equilibrium, and before
reaching this they vibrate up and down or revolve over many times,
and often end by the side that rested upon the bottom of the fiord
being largely or completely exposed to view. These bottom surfaces
are smooth and often broadly grooved, but with the exception of those
formed near the shore, free from all detritus, consisting of pure ice
with no discoloration. This implies that the glacier is moving over
a bottom of the fiord that has been cleared of all detritus, that has
become completely smoothed into probably roches moutonn^es sur-
faces, and that the glacier contains no detritus in its mass. Occasion-
ally bergs are seen that are highly discolored with mud or silt, but
these, so far as observed, are detached from portions near the margin
where the detritus has been carried into the ice by the lateral streams.
That animal life is abundant in the waters directly in front of the ice
is indicated, as already shown by Professor Tarr, by the gathering of
'Since the above was written, I. C. Russell's " Glaciers of North America" has been
published, in which the author advocates the same view as here adopted. See pp. 85, 86 of
that work. Reid*s view as presented by Russell, p. 85, would be untenable for the phenomena
as seen in Greenland.
226 George H. Barton.
the gulls about every point of disturbance to reap a harvest of food
from the waves.
Professor Burton has demonstrated that at the place where he
measured the movement of the glacier there is an area which has
little motion, and even that nearest shore being slightly up stream,
while at a distance of about two-thirds of a mile from shore there is a
motion at the rate of 2.4.2 feet per day, and at a distance of 2.4 miles,
a rate of about 19
^^ I _ feet per day. In the
region of slow mo-
tion along the margin
where bowlders and
ledges project upward
into the lower por-
tion of the ice, the
' ' latter after having
HITHIO, J.p'u>wInO IxlWNWAIEUANDSACtLWAItUTO FILLSPAQ paSSCd OVCr thC Ob-
^"vn'T^'iln' '"' '"'^""'' ■^'*"^°" °' """>" """< struction has flowed
backward and down-
ward so as to keep in contact with the lee side of the rock, producing
a fan-shaped structure in so doing, as shown in Figure 9. In cases
where the motion is more rapid, the same tendency to flow backward
and downward with the fan-like structure is marked, but this latter
motion has not been able to keep pace with the movement of the
glacier, and a vacant space
is left on the lee side of the
rock, as shown in Figure 10. -
In this particular case of —
Figure 10 there would seem
to be a variation in the ratio
of the two movements, as the
fan structure shows an exact
mold of the surface of the pio. 10.
rock in its outline, thus indi-
cating that this structure had at one time kept pace with the move-
ment of the glacier, but that more lately the latter movement had in-
creased its rapidity. In those portions where the motion is most rapid
the open space on the lee of the projection is very large, and there
seems often to be no tendency of the ice to flow downward or back-
', ITIVDLIAHSUK Gl.AClER. HKICHT ABOUT JOO-ISO KF.k
(iHEST Portions, {/■ran Naliemd Giegrapkic Atagauiii-i
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition.
227
ward to fill this space (see Figure 11), while in other cases there is a
large area of the radiate structure.
In the region of least motion, generally, the laminae of the ice on
the stoss side end directly against the projecting boss of rock, with no
tendency to curve upward and pass over the obstruction (Figures 9
and 10), while in the region of more rapid motion the laminae very
commonly curve upward and tend to pass above (Figure 11). In no
case, however, was any detritus observed passing upward into the ice
by means of this slight upward flow.
In the region of greatest motion near the end of the glacier, the
ice does not rest upon the rock except upon the larger projections of
the bed, leaving large areas
of open space between the
bottom of the ice and the
rock surface below, so that
one can often penetrate to
a hundred or two hundred
feet beneath the mass.
The height of this open
space varies up to a maxi-
mum of about 3 feet, but
is usually not more than i or 2 feet. Bowlders in this portion are
rolled along without being frozen in the ice, and, striking the project-
ing bosses of rock, are sometimes fractured, sometimes splinter off
portions of the boss ; smaller bowlders caught between the bosses and
the larger bowlders are often crushed to powder.
Smaller Karajak Glacier. — From a well chosen position on the
nunatak between the two Karajak glaciers, the smaller one can be
seen throughout its whole extent from the point where the crevassing
of its current first begins in the inland ice to its frontal face. It is
not more than two miles in width nor over five or six miles in length.
Its gradient is high (see Figure 12), and consequently it is strongly
crevassed in every portion. On the western side there is a large con-
tinuous moraine, but on the eastern side a portion of the nunatak bor-
dering the glacier is very precipitous, and at the foot of these vertical
faces there is no moraine. Along the less precipitous portions and the
valleys there are well-defined moraines. No position was obtained
where the height of the frontal face of this glacier could be estimated.
Itivdliarsuk Glaciers. — About twenty miles north of, and parallel
Fig. II. Upward bbnding op icb laybks on stoss sidb
OF PROJBCTIKG ROCK, S8BN ONLY IN CASBS OF RAPID
MOTION.
228 George H. Barton.
to, Karajak fiord is the Itivdliarsuk fiord, which is a little less in size
than the former. Between the two is the Sermilik fiord, still smaller
than either. The glacier at the head of the latter fiord was not visited,
though numerous bergs were passed which were derived from it.
At the head of Itivdliarsuk fiord its waters abut directly against
the high point of land which lies between this and Sermilik fiord.
Along the northeastern side, just below the end of the fiord, a broad
area of ice enters the water. This is divided by long narrow nunataks
into smaller glaciers, two of which are shown in Figure 13. The
lower one, shown in Figure 13, was visited, while the upper was only
seen from a distance. The width of this as it enters the water is about
three miles, while the height of its face is not above 250 feet. The
broad deep crevasses often reach down to the level of the water,
producing the effect of a much more irregular frontal face than in
the glacier previously observed. (See Figure 14.) Its entire length
is about the same as that of the Greater Karajak, and its width is
nearly constant throughout, about three miles.
The average gradient of this glacier is a little less than that of the
Karajak, probably, but no determinations were made. Not far from
the front the central surface is slightly higher than it is a half-mile
farther up stream. The whole surface is strongly crevassed, even to
the shore. (See Figure 1 5.) The sides are less steep and high, how-
ever, and the glacier was entered for a distance of a few rods at sev-
eral places, though at no place could any great distance be reached.
The vertical character of the edge of the ice is not so marked -in this
glacier, biit it is still prominent. Marginal streams and lakes are also
characteristic, and several large lakes on the surface, winding in and
out among the pinnacles, were seen from a position overlooking the
full width of the glacier. No distinct surface streams were seen.
The general mass of the ice here is also free from detritus. A lat-
eral moraine holds the same relations as before, and is extremely till-
like in its characteristics, containing a very large amount of fine silt,
and when dry having the tenacity of till. A marginal strip of the ice
a few rods in width is highly discolored with fine detritus, but only a
few fragments are present. Near the head of the glacier and not far
from its center lies a small nunatak, which gives rise to a medial mo-
raine as se^n in Figures 16 and 17.
Figures 16, 17, and 18 present views of the inland ice and the
upper portions of the Itivdliarsuk glacier as seen from Mt. Ekinga
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition. 229
just northwest of the glacier. Figure 16 shows the upper third of
this glacier and portions of the nunataks and glaciers to the south-
east. The direction of the motion is shown by the medial moraine
proceeding from the small nunatak. The greater volume of the ice
comes from the eastward of the nunatak, and striking the stream from
the west, deflects it strongly westward into the bay-like indentation on
the Ekinga side. Figure 17 gives a nearer view of the small nunatak,
and presents just the upper point of the larger nunatak on the east
side. This view shows a strong difference in the crevassing of differ-
ent portions of the glacier. The western side of the portion which
flows between the nunatak and Ekinga is highly crevassed and pin-
nacled, while the eastern portion is comparatively much smoother.
Again the lateral portions of that part which flows from the east of
the nunatak are highly crevassed and pinnacled, while the central por-
tions are smoother. These conditions continue nearly to the front of
the glacier. Figure 1 8 presents the extreme upper portion of the gla-
cier between the small nunatak and Ekinga and the edge of the inland
ice stretching away to the northward. The head of the Ignerit glacier
is seen between Ekinga and the first high peak beyond, from which a
long, sharp spur projects into the ice. These three views all show the
surface of the inland ice looking over its vast undulating expanse
toward the interior. The horizon line of ice and sky is considerably
higher, 2^ degrees, than that of our point of view, presenting a fair
view of the gradient of the marginal area of the ice sheet. Figure 19
is tajcen from nearly the same point as the three preceding on the sum-
mit of Ekinga, 3,100 feet altitude, but looking northward and showing
the edge of the inland ice as it lies upon the highlands north of the
region shown in Figure 20. The ice on the extreme left as here seen
is a portion of the local ice-cap lying upon the large peninsula north-
east of Agpat island.
The Small Valley Glaciers and Glacial Tongues or Lobes. — Into
the small valleys and gulches which are sharply incised in the northeast
side of the Nugsuak peninsula, flow streams of ice from the local ice-
cap of Nugsuak, some of which are broad, rounded lobes, some long,
narrow ribbons of ice, while others present the ordinary forms of val-
ley glaciers, which in a few cases reach down to sea level and enter the
waters of the fiords. Nearly all these small valleys and gulches are
practically at right angles to the general trend of the coast. Ekaluit
and Itivdlek are larger valleys which are exceptions, their trends being
230 George H, Barton.
at sharp angles with the coast. The latter of these contains no gla-
ciers ; the former has several which occupy small lateral valleys, but
none of which reach the bottom of the larger Ekaluit valley itself.
As the Nugsuak ice-cap lies wholly upon the south of this valley, the
glaciers are necessarily limited to that side also. The two nearest the
mouth of the valley only were visited, but several others were seen
with the glass. Figure 20 presents a view but a short distance up
stream, and shows the first two glaciers which were visited, and also a
small detached portion of the ice-cap at the upper right of the view.
The first glacier is fully shown in the view at a distance of an hour's
walk. It plunges down through a narrow cafLon with nearly vertical
walls in its upper portion, with a very steep angle of descent which
was not measured ; then broadening, it loses its steepness and flows
for a considerable distance with an average inclination of about 12°,
and then changing again to an angle of 28°, which rises to 35° at its
terminus. The upper and lower portions are strongly crevassed, but
the middle portions only slightly so. The central portion throughout
its whole length is much higher than the sides, the inclination of the
surface from the sides toward the center being sufficient to make a
pike staff necessary for the ascent. Small surface streams flow from
the uncrevassed portions, forming large lateral streams.
As seen in the view the lateral moraines are very broad toward the
lower end. These lie almost wholly upon the ice, and the stream flows
between them and the pure ice of the glacier. The moraines thus
appear to be much larger than they really are. As the stream cuts
down into the ice, the detritus falls into it on the side next the mo-
raine, the result being that the stream constantly encroaches upon the
glacier as the detritus constantly follows and pushes it. Toward the
upper end where the cliffs are nearly vertical, there are no moraines.
At the foot there is a very definite fresh terminal moraine. The ice
of the glacier is firm, compact, and blue in color. The largest stream
from this glacier bursts directly from the foot of the ice and plunges
down the valley in a torrent. The detritus borne by this stream has
been spread out in a broad, low, alluvial fan over which its waters flow
by several divergent branches. The glacier seen to the left in Fig-
ure 20 is not connected with the ice-cap above, but flows from a large
cirque which is indistinctly seen in the view. On the left the walls
are steep and high, on the right they retreat, the narrow valley above
becoming broad and cirque-like. A portion of the glacier flows around
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition. 231
a projecting boss of rock into this cirque, giving rise to a series of very
highly contorted flowage lines much resembling those of basic lavas.
In its first plunge from the cirque the glacier has an inclination of 55°,
this area having large crevasses ; the inclination then changing to 30°
till broadening out to the wide expanse below, it has an inclination of
1 8° with very slight amount of crevassing. The lower portion very
much resembles a huge shell in shape with the edge of the layers sim-
ulating its lines of growth. Lateral moraines are not so marked here,
but the terminal moraine is very large and characterized by many very
angular large blocks. The end of the glacier rests directly upon the
fresh bare rock which forms the bottom of the valley for a short dis-
tance below the foot of the ice, then becoming steeper it sinks below
a large mass of detritus and entirely disappears. The lateral stream
upon the left side is of moderate size, that on the right is lost below the
ice and in the detritus ; these uniting flow down the valley in a foam-
ing torrent which has cut into the detritus above mentioned a depth of
at least 30 to 40 feet without reaching the rock below. A broad, low,
alluvial fan is also formed by this stream. The streams from the vari-
ous glaciers unite to form the Ekaluit River flowing through the large
valley, which in some portions of its course is torrential ; in others it
broadens out into small lakes in which the water is so clear that the
bottom can be plainly seen for long distances from the shore.
The long narrow strip of ice seen at the upper right of Figure 20
is a part of the ice-cap which has been separated from the main mass
by the melting of the thinner portion lying upon the sharp edge of the
plateau. The inclination of its surface is about 25®. Its material is
hard, compact, firm ice. Along its lower edge, which has an altitude
of about 3,000 feet above sea level, is an exceptionally fine example of
a bowlder pavement, the angular fragments being well fitted together,
and the surface being nearly as smooth as an ordinary street pavement.
This was visited during a heavy rain, So that there was no opportunity
to obtain photographs of it.
From Ekaluit to the neighborhood of Sermiarsut the smal> glaciers
are very numerous, some reaching sea level, but the majority only
approaching it. In one case a little valley reaching back to the ice-
cap ends with a nearly vertical face. Over this face the ice falls in
large blocks which break into fragments and melt at its foot without
accumulating to any amount. The vertical face of ice so produced
above the valley shows its thickness to be at least 100 feet. Few of
232 George H. Barton.
these lateral valleys show any cutting below sea level, the streams
from the glaciers coming with torrential velocity to their mouths at the
margin of the fiord. In a very few cases the waters of the fiord enter
the valleys for a very short distance. A small glacier only a few hundred
feet in width at most enters the water in one of these valley inlets.
Just east of Sermiarsut two large glaciers from closely adjacent
valleys not only reach sea level, but push out slightly into the fiord.
A very large amount of detritus has been brought down by the streams
and by the ice, which the glaciers now seem to be over-riding as though
advancing with considerable rapidity. The gradient of both these gla-
ciers is very low as compared with all others of the valley glaciers.
Extremely large lateral moraines come nearly to the very front of the
glaciers, passing out a few hundred feet beyond the fiord margin.
On the island of Disko local ice-caps cover portions of the surface,
which is a plateau of varying elevation, seldom below 2,cx>o feet above
sea level and rising in summits to between 5,000 and 6,000 feet. Just
back of Godhavn the ice-cap comes almost to the edge of the vertical
basalt cliffs. The character of this small ice-cap is very different in
many ways from that of the main inland ice. Its edge is extremely
attenuated, the margin often decreasing to the thickness of an inch or
less, and small detached portions being found at a distance of a few
rods from the main mass. The ice rises to a broad dome-shaped form
with an average inclination of about 13° on the surface. The surface
was soft at this time, August 3, making walking quite difficult, each
step plunging to the depth of six inches to a foot. Occasional narrow
crevasses occur not over a foot in width, indicating a general motion
of the whole mass. West of Godhavn a glacier plunges sharply down a
narrow valley. The source of this glacier in the ice-cap is surrounded
by crevasses which do not extend far back. Northeast of Godhavn
is Blase Dale, whose glaciers have been described by Chamberlin and
Salisbury. Here again the crevassing at their source extends back
but a short distance into the ice-cap. This feature is in marked con-
trast to tfhe great extent of the crevassed areas seen at the source of
the Karajak and Itivdliarsuk glaciers. The lack of crevassing here is
due to the smaller size of the ice stream, and to its sharper precipitous
plunge. It is of interest to note that a spring similar in all character-
istics to the one described and figured by Salisbury^ was found in
strong action on the same glacier.
' Journal of Geology, IV, 1896, p. 809.
Fig. 17. Upper Portion of Lower Itivdliarsuk Gi.aci
Center and the Inland [ck in the Kackcround.
Ekihca.
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition. 233
The Former Extension of the Ice, — With one or two exceptions
all the large valley glaciers, whether terminating in the sea or on the
land, and the glacial lobes, exhibit evidences of diminution in size re-
cently, and also during a long period of time. At Sermiarsut, nearly
opposite the village of Umanak on the Nugsuak peninsula, the two
glaciers as described above have brought down a large amount of de-
tritus, and have projected it into the fiord. The material is all fresh,
not covered with lichens, and the ice is apparently overriding the por-
tions deposited in front, passing out over it for some little distance
beyond the walls of the fiord, but not entering the water, the detritus
bringing it above sea level. Nowhere else was any evidence of advance
observed, and this may be more apparent than real.
Along the sides of the valley of the Greater Karajak glaciers at an
elevation of from 60 to 100 feet above the present lateral moraine,
there is a definite surface at most points but obliterated in others,
marking a former level of the glacier at this height. Below this level
the valley's sides are well covered with morainal material, all of which
is well covered with black lichens except the material of the present
moraine. This upper line can be traced along the whole length of the
valley from below the present terminal face of the ice to the head of
the nunatak, holding approximately the same elevation above the pres-
ent moraine throughout its course.
At the Itivdliarsuk glacier the point of land forming its western
boundary rises at Ekinga to an elevation of over 3,ocK) feet. At the
southwest it is very precipitous from the summit downward till within
a height of 400 or 500 feet above the sea, sending out here a long low
point of about this elevation. Through this point runs a small valley
diverging from the large Itivdliarsuk at nearly a right angle. At a
time when the Itivdliarsuk glacier was larger than at present, it sent
a branch down through this valley which entered the sea two or three
miles farther down the fiord than the main mass. The upper surface
of the lateral moraines formed on either side of this branch are well
preserved. This moraine is also more or less continuous up the large
Itivdliarsuk valley toward the inland ice.
In the valley of the Ekaluit there is no glacier to-day, except the
small ones in the lateral valleys leading into it, but there is good evi-
dence of its being formerly occupied by one. The northeast side of
the valley is precipitous, nearly vertical in places, so that old moraines
cannot be traced easily on that side, though at the foot of the preci-
234 George H. Barton.
pices there is a general mingling in large masses of fresh talus and old
morainal material, the latter being mostly buried, however. The south-
west side of the valley has a comparatively gentle slope, and here the
old moraines are well preserved. In some places the whole side of
the valley from the bottom upward to the foot of the more precipitous
upper portions is covered with a morainal sheet of considerable thick-
ness. The streams issuing from the small lateral glaciers cut down-
ward through this sheet, sometimes reaching its lower surface, some-
times not ; in one case cutting to a depth of at least 30 to 40 feet
without reaching the underlying rock. The material of this thick
sheet is a mixture of rolled or rounded and subangular fragments with
some finer material. Lying more especially at the mouths of the lat-
eral valleys, it may have been derived partly from the terminal moraines
of the small lateral glaciers when they extended farther than to-day.
Between the valleys the underlying rock is often at the surface.
Running along the sides of the valley at a considerable elevation
above its bottom are three very distinct and parallel old lateral mo-
raines. These are practically continuous as far as the valley was seen,
except where cut by the lateral valleys and glaciers, as was done in each
case. All three moraines are sharp, well-defined ridges, maintaining
about the same elevation above the valley bottom all along its course,
dropping as it drops as they approach the sea. The altitude of the
crest of the lower one of the three just seaward of the first lateral
glacier is about 875 feet above sea, and 500 to 600 feet above the val-
ley bottom. The altitude of the second, 1,065, and of the third about
1,150 feet above the sea, or more than 700 and 800 feet above the val-
ley bottom. The depth of the glacier that formed this upper moraine
must have been nearly or quite 1,000 feet. The foot of the present
small glacier in the first lateral valley reaches down to a point about
1,125 f^^t above the sea, just a few feet lower than the crest of this
old moraine. The sides of the lateral valley, where not too steep, also
have old lateral moraines nearly 100 feet above the present glacier,
and distinct old terminal moraines occur at some distance down the
valley below the present ice front.
In the Itivdlek valley bowlder pavements and lateral moraines were
seen, but no observations were made upon them. Back from this val-
ley the edge of the inland ice at Iterpiluak gives evidence of having
quite recently sent a lobe downward to occupy a small shallow depres-
sion which is now occupied by a lake. A moraine extends from the
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition,
235
present moraine of the ice front around the lake at a slight elevation
above its present surface. The larger portion of the material of this
moraine is not covered by the black lichens which cover all old detri-
tus, showing that it is comparatively of fresh formation.
Many of the small glaciers along the Nugsuak coast from Ekaluit
to Sermiarsut have large moraines lining the valley sides high above
their present level and large enough to be distinctly seen from the
sea. Large terminal moraines can also be seen in most of the valleys
far below the present ice front. The valley bottoms are sometimes
well rounded, and in some cases the present stream has cut a gorge
down into the rounded floor, as shown in Figure 21.
Along the more or less precipitous sides
of the Nugsuak peninsula are occasional pieces
of old moraines at various altitudes, some
well defined, some indistinct. The same is
to be seen on the north side of Storoen, es-
pecially well at an elevation of between 500
and 1,000 feet above sea level.
The islands of Umanak and Ikerasak pre-
sent types of topography essentially like each
other, but differing from all others in this
region. Each consists principally of a moderately low surface, not
much if any over 1,000 feet in altitude in its highest portions, well
glaciated, and rounded into roches moutonn^es. Resting upon this
smooth and comparatively broad pedestal rises a sharply angular elon-
gated peak with almost vertical sides and ends too steep for ascent.
No smoothing is apparent above the level of the roches moutonn^es ;
all outline above is due to the effect of frost action. The contrast is
exceedingly marked and striking. The summit in each case is sharply
serrate, but in the case of Umanak when seen from one position a
single cleft with rounded peaks on each side form an outline resembling
the lobes of a heart ; whence the Eskimo name Umay heart, nak^ like.
The peak of Umanak rises to a height of 3,720 feet above sea
level, and that of Ikerasak to 2,550 feet. At the foot of each peak
lies a lateral moraine distinctly marked in each case, but better seen
at Umanak. Figure 22 shows the southwestern side of Umanak Peak
with the moraine at its base. The sharp contrast between the smooth-
flowing outlines below and the angular above is also well brought out
in this view. Figure 23 is a view of the peak of Ikerasak showing the
Fig. 21. Rounded BOTTOM, a a,
OP OLD VALLBYS ALONG NuG-
SUAK PENINSULA, WITH GORGE,
3, CUT BY STREAM FROM THE
RETREATING GLACIER.
236 George H, Barton,
contrast in topography again, but not sufficiently near to show the mo-
raine at its base. The material forming the ridge seen in Figure 22 is
of true morainal character, angular, sub-angular, rounded and striated
fragments with considerable sand and clay intermixed. It is entirely
distinct from the talus which is mostly accumulated on the steep lower
slopes of the peak, though many fragments of the latter have reached
and lie upon the moraine. Most of the morainal material is covered
with black lichens, while the talus material is largely free from them
and fresher in appearance. There is no soil except in sheltered nooks
on these low islands, and practically none at all on the higher islands
and peninsulas. Finer drift material is also very scarce, but coarser
drift is common. The low main portions of Umanak and Ikerasak
islands are liberally sprinkled with bowlders of all sizes up to many
tons in weight, and in many cases they almost entirely cover the
surface.
Gneiss and schists, cut by granite and by numerous dikes of very
dark color and high specific gravity, are the only rocks which form
those portions of the mainland, of Nugsuak peninsula and of the
islands which we visited. The rocks of later age occur farther west-
ward on Nugsuak. The gneiss is very highly folded and contorted.
Figure 22 shows indistinctly an overturned fold. All of these rocks
are abundantly represented among the bowlders on Umanak and Iker-
asak, but no other variety is found. The bowlders of eruptive rock
often show a large amount of decomposition which has taken place
since their transportation, some having crumbled entirely, while in
others the polished glaciated surface has remained as a shell from
which a portion of the remainder has fallen away. The dikes show
no greater erosion by glacial action than the inclosing gneiss, being
ground and polished to the same level only, not below that of the
gneiss, indicating no great preglacial decomposition below their present
surface. The surface of the gneiss, while not generally retaining the
polish and finer striae of glacial action, does retain the coarser striae
and grooves, disintegration having taken place but slightly since the
disappearance of the ice.
On the nunatak between the two Karajak glaciers, the same con-
ditions prevail as upon the lower portions of Umanak and Ikerasak.
Its form is long and narrow, lying parallel to the Great Karajak
glacier, and nearly at right angles to the Karajak fiord. Its highest
summit on the north is 2,245 f^^t, and the one on the south a little
c8
U
If
= S?
u
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition, 237
lower. The most typical roches moutonn^es occur on both summits
with striae and grooves well preserved, and in some cases the polish is
also well preserved, but this is exceptional. The direction of motion
here was transverse to that of the present Karajak glacier and to the
axis of the nunatak, and nearly parallel to Karajak fiord and the Nug-
suak peninsula. Bowlders are numerous over all parts of the nunatak.
So far as seen they are entirely of gneiss, schist, granite, and the same
dark eruptive rock as before noted. Here the eruptive rock, though
showing much decomposition in the bowlders, has resisted erosion
more strongly than the inclosing gneiss, so that the dikes and intru-
sive areas sometimes Stand out in relief above the gneiss. This is
most strikingly shown in an exceptionally fine high roche moutonn^e,
which consists entirely of the eruptive rock with the polish and striae
well preserved on the stoss side, where it is 10 to 12 feet high and 8 to
10 feet broad. On the Nugsuak peninsula between Itivdlek and Iter-
piluak the same general characteristics are found. The bearings of
the striae are quite constantly about parallel to the direction of Kara-
jak fiord, with some local variations.
On the point Anat just west of the Itivdliarsuk glacier, Mt. Ekinga
rises to a height of about 3,iCK) feet. Its summit is finely glaciated,
showing some of the finest roche moutonn6es. The striae and grooves
are well preserved, and in some cases the polish still remains. Here
again the direction of the motion was nearly or quite parallel to the
direction of the Itivdliarsuk fiord, and consequently to Karajak fiord.
This shows a parallel movement over an area of many miles in width
in this region.
Bowlders of gneiss, schist, granite, and the dark eruptive rock are
scattered in profusion over the lower portion and to the highest sum-
mit. In addition, all over this little peninsula, so far as seen, there are
bowlders of limestone slightly f ossiliferous, and of a red sandstone that
so closely resembles the triassic sandstone of the Connecticut Valley
that it could easily be mistaken for it. Neither of these rocks occur
in place so far as a careful search would reveal. Their presence here
as bowlders implies that they do occur in place farther inland under
the present ice-cap. The fragments vary in size all the way from small
pebbles to bowlders of 5 or 6 feet in diameter.
Ekinga was the highest point actually reached, and this in common
with all lower ones gives the strongest evidence of having been over-
ridden by the ice. From this and other high points, as well as from
238 George H. Barton.
the surface of the inland ice, transverse and rear views of higher
peaks were obtained. The general topographical appearance changes
as much on a large scale according to the point of view from which
it is seen, as does one of our smaller roches moutonn6es areas when
seen from the stoss or lee sides, or transversely.
Seen from the west, and especially when seen from the water level,
the general appearance is of strong angularity, so sharply marked in
many cases that it is difficult to believe that it has been overridden
and smoothed by ice action. Seen from the south or north, and
better when viewed from a moderate elevation,' the same region shows
usually a sharply serrate character, but with the peaks shaped some-
thing like the teeth of a circular saw, steep and precipitous on the
west, and with moderate or gentle slopes on the east. This character-
istic outline so strongly marked over the whole region is well shown
in Figure 24, which is a sketch of a portion of the summit of Agpat
Island as seen from the water to the southward between Agpat and
Storoen.
Fig. 24. Sketch op a portion of thb summit op Agpat Island sbbn pkom thb soitthwabd,
SHOWING thb MARKBD STOSS SIDB OF SUMMITS, WHICH APPEAR ANGULAR FROM THB WBSTWABD.
a a, LOCAL ICB-CAP.
Again when seen from the ice-cap to the east, the angularity very
largely disappears, if not entirely so. The Nugsuak peninsula, as seen
from the highest points we reached to the east and northeast, presents
these features so strongly as to convince the writer that its surface
even to its extreme outer point has been overridden, and that the ice
must have passed into the waters beyond. Professor Angelo Heilprin
informs the writer that he has been upon the summit of the outer end
of Nugsuak, and finds that it has been glaciated to its extremity. As
seen from Ekinga, Agpat presents a very smooth surface with well-
rounded outlines, as does all the remainder of the region except the
distant and sharp peaks of Upernavik and Ubekyendt islands, the
higher points of the former rising to 6,850 feet, being the greatest
elevation attained by any summits in this region. Of all the peaks
seen in Greenland, these only left a doubt in the mind of the writer
as to their having once been covered by the former extension of the
inland ice. Professor Heilprin states that he has also been upon the
SSjgS
3?
5 S 5 »
— iS 5 g
5 X > 3
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition, 239
summits of both Upernavik and Ubekyendt islands and found abun-
dant traces of glaciation produced by ice moving westward.
There seems to be strong and abundant evidence that all of the
Umanak fiord region south of the Svarten Huk peninsula which was
not seen, and consequently can not be discussed, has been covered
even above the highest summits with a sheet of ice having a definite
and strong motion in a direction something north of west, about par-
allel to the general trend of the Nugsuak peninsula and of the Kar-
ajak and Itivdliarsuk fiords. That the motion must have been a strong
one is shown by the considerable amount of rounding that has been
impressed upon the topography even to the outermost points, and
by the fact that a large proportion of the bowlders so numerously
scattered everywhere show evidence of transportation for a consider-
able distance in their often well-rounded character. It is unfortunate
that the underlying rocks of the region have the same general charac-
teristics throughout, preventing the determination of the distance of
transportation. The only exceptions to this are the sandstone and lime-
stone bowlders found at Ekinga, and the lateness of the season when
these were found prevented the determination of the limit of their
distribution westward. That the ice passed over the summits of Uper*
navik island nearly 7,000 feet above the sea indicates a great thick-
ness at its maximum over this region, soundings indicating as great
a depth in the fiords as 385 fathoms being given on the chart. With
these facts in view it is difficult not to believe that the present inland
ice sheet once extended over all this portion of Greenland, passing
out beyond the farthest limits of the present coast line into the open
waters of Baffin's Bay. How far beyond the present limits of the
coast line it passed, there are no facts yet known to justify a con-
clusion. Whether it met and coalesced with the ice sheet from the
American side, seems idle speculation for the present. That it evef
passed to the American side is disproved by evidence on that side,
and that view is not now seriously entertained by any glacialist so far
as known.
During its maximum extension the fiords must have been entirely
filled and practically obliterated from the ice topography. As the ice
sheet diminished in thickness, their influence became more marked till
it became dominant in their region. It is probable that at one stage
of the retreat, and that a very long one, confluent glaciers from Kara-
jak, Itivdliarsuk, and other small fiords, united in one large Umanak
240 George H. Barton.
fiord glacier. During this stage the lower portions of the islands of
Umanak and Ikerasak were covered and passed over by the ice, while
the higher portions rose above its surface as nunataks. Probably well
rounded when first exposed, frost action then and since has produced
its results upon them as upon the sides of the fiord, and given them
their present angular outlines as seen in Figures 22 and 23. That
they must have been covered by the ice sheet is proved by the fact
that the higher and nefghboring summits of Nugsuak and of Storoen,
and of the point northeast of Ikerasak are glaciated. It would be
difficult to conceive of the glaciation of these summits by a sheet that
did not cover all the lower summits. If this view is correct, then it
follows that present angular characteristics such as are shown in these
two cases of Umanak and Ikerasak do not preclude the possibility of
previous glaciation, but only that its effects have been obliterated by
later frost action and atmospheric erosion in general.
With this possibility in view the writer would suggest the same
solution as possibly being applicable to the instances cited by Cham-
berlin ^ in the case of Dalrymple rock, and others farther north. This
is merely a suggestion made with diflfidence, as that region has not
been visited by the writer. Indeed, the view of Dalrymple Island as
given by Chamberlin presents a marked stoss and lee side, apparently
in their appropriate positions as related to the mainland topography
seen in the distance. (See Figure 25.)
Disko island, the largest on the coast of Greenland, is essentially
a plateau having an elevation of 2,000 to 4,000 feet above the sea,
with peaks rising to 5,000 and nearly 6,000 feet. It is surrounded on
all sides by precipitous cliffs, which at the south just back of Godhavn
rise vertically from not far above sea level to an altitude of over 2,000
feet. The base of the island is the same characteristic gneiss found
in the Umanak region. This gneiss forms the whole of the low prom-
ontory, probably not exceeding 200 feet in its highest elevation, upon
which is situated the settlement of Godhavn and in which is inclosed
the fine little harbor of that place. This promontory is well glaciated
by ice which had a westward motion, as noted by Chamberlin, and
which the writer would have no doubt came from the mainland, as
suggested by the above authority. The upper portion of the island
consists of a thick cap of basalt resting upon the gneiss together with
'Journal of Geology, 2, 1S94, p. 661.
Ffc 23. The Peak of Ikerasak, showing Anultlaritv, fn Coni'kast with th
Rounded Outi.ikes op the I^jwer and Main Portion of the Island. It 1
Kkueved that this Peak has been Huried ky the Former Kxtension of th
Ice. The Koreground is Occupied by an Ksktmo Church.
-'mS^^^
m
FlC. t$. llALRVMl'LE ROCK, APTKR CHAK
Boston Party on the Sixth Peary Expedition. 241
beds of sandstone which occur farther north, and especially along the
Waigat. So far as known, gneiss does not rise far above sea level at
any point on the island. Bowlders of gneiss, however, are scattered
over the surface of the low promontory, and also in the steep, sharp
valleys cut into the basalt cliffs and even upon the surface of the pla-
teau. Opportunity was not given to search for evidence of the former
extension of the inland ice of Greenland over the plateau surface
of Disko, but if it did cover the Umanak fiord region and the Nug-
suak peninsula, then it must also have enwrapped the whole of Disko
Island, and have filled the Waigat. The bowlders of gneiss on the
Disko plateau have probably come from the mainland, and do not, as
suggested by Chamberlin, indicate a central core of gneiss rising to
the surface in the interior of Disko, and from which they have been
brought by the action of the present local ice-cap. So far as known
to the present writer, however, there are no facts as yet observed on
Disko to sustain either view. The view here presented simply follows
directly in the line of the argument in the preceding pages.
On the American side of Davis Strait and Baffin's Bay the evidence
of former glaciation is generally of the same character as on Green-
land. The coast was closely skirted from the Strait of Belle Isle to
north of Cumberland Sound, and landings were made at Turnavik in
Labrador, on Big Savage Island, and the mainland of Meta Incognita
in Hudson Strait, and on the south shore of Cumberland Sound at
Niantilik harbor.
At Turnavik the rock is completely rounded into roches mouton-
n^es, which near sea level retain a good degree of polish and have the
striae well preserved. Higher above the sea the rock has been more
fully decomposed, and the striae and polish have largely or entirely
disappeared, though Still seen on the highest summit, about 300 feet
in altitude. The general direction of the motion here was about
northeast, or about normal to. the coast* line. Erratics are rare, if not
entirely wanting. The principal rock is a coarsely porphyritic gran-
itoid gneiss cut by numerous dikes, one series of which is closely par-
allel in direction to the motion of the ice. Several dikes of this series
have been eroded by the ice to a depth in some cases of 1 5 to 20 feet
below the inclosing walls, as shown in Figures 26 and 27. In this,
evidence is given of a large amount of preglacial decomposition in the
dike rock as already noted by Professor Tarr. It also indicates a differ-
ence in conditions as compared with those of Greenland, where the
242 George H, Barton,
dikes are not eroded below the level of the inclosing rock. In the lat-
ter case the preglacial decomposition may not have been so great as in
the former, due to a much earlier formation of an ice sheet in Green-
land than in Labrador, or the erosive action of the ice has been greater,
wearing down the whole surface below the limit of greater decompo-
sition in the dike rock.
The coastal region of Labrador from Turnavik to Cape Chidley, as
seen from the vessel, has the general appearance of a well glaciated
region in its rounded contours and flowing outlines. In the vicinity
of Cape Mugford, latitude 58° 30', Table Hill, White Bear Island, and
the Kig-la-pait mountains, 2,000 feet high, all appearance of rounding
is lost when seen directly off shore, only sharp peaks or serrated edges
being seen, giving the impression that the country here has never been
overridden by an ice sheet. However, when seen from farther south
in a direction transverse to the direction of the ice motion if it passed
from the land toward the sea, as the evidence at the points actually
visited proves, rounded outlines are sufficiently distinct to justify the
conclusion that the ice did override this as well as other portions of
the Labrador coast.
On the southern shore of Baffin Land along Hudson Strait the
general rounding effects of glacial action are very apparent, but except
near the sea level, polish and striae have entirely disappeared. The
rock is a very garnetiferous gneiss, sometimes highly ferruginous.
Post-glacial decomposition has acted rapidly upon this rock, so that
the entire surface is coated with its debris. Transported bowlders are
also numerous, among them being many fragments of a finely crystal-
line limestone. Topographically the surface consists of a series of
alternate high, narrow ridges, and deep, narrow valleys running about
parallel with the strike of the gneiss, N-20-30-E (mag.). These valleys
are possibly due to differential erosion of more highly calcareous lay-
ers. A few transverse valleys are apparently due to highly crushed
and jointed areas. The ridges and hills are well rounded, the motion
of the ice having been diagonal to the ridges. Prof essor Tarr ^ has
already called attention to the fact that the principal topographical fea-
tures here are preglacial, and \o the evidence of the slight amount of
glacial erosion here as compared with that farther south. It is also
much less than any seen in Greenland.
'Am. Geol., xg, 1897, 194.
Ai. Action, Inui
V PRKGLACIAL UECOMPC
Boston Party on the Sixth Peaty Expedition, 243
At Big Savage Island the highest elevation visited is about 250
feet above the sea. Along this summit there is a well defined mo-
raine continuing for several hundred feet with an average width of
about 1 50 feet. It consists of fragments varying in size from pebbles
to those 5 feet in diameter, nearly all well rounded. The general con-
tour of the island is well rounded, showing the motion of the ice to
have been southeasterly, but no striae were found. All the valleys
show a series of well preserved raised beaches, the highest being at
an elevation of 250 feet above sea. These have been well described
by Mr. T. L. Watson,^ of the Cornell party. The rock here is a well
banded gneiss, containing no garnets. The erratics are the same as
the underlying gneiss, except a few limestone fragments and some
dike rock. No fragments of the garnetiferous gneiss of the mainland
were found, the motion of the drift having been sufficiently eastward
to carry it north of this island. The limestone occurring in bowlders
was not found in place.
At Niantilik harbor on the south shore of Cumberland Sound the
gneiss is very highly disintegrated on the surface, so that at first sight
there is an appearance of a non-glaciated surface, but rounded con-
tours prevail and transported fragments are numerous. The direction
of the ice motion here was southeasterly, nearly parallel to the axis of
the Sound.
As previously mentioned, post-glacial decomposition is much more
marked in Labrador, Meta Incognita, and Baffin Land, than any ob-
served in Greenland, though, as noted by Professor Tarr in the article
above cited, there are some indications of the comparatively recent
withdrawal of the ice in these regions ; still it was probably long ante-
rior to the withdrawal of the Greenland ice-cap from the summits,
3,000 feet in altitude, or more, in the vicinity of Karajak and Itiv-
dliarsuk fiords. On the latter the striae and polish even are often still
well preserved where the range of temperature is fully as low as in
Baffin Land, and with greater variation between that of summer and
winter, giving at least fully as good conditions for rapid disintegration.
In conclusion, the brief observations made along the Labrador
coast and in Baffin Land would indicate that this whole country was
once buried by a sheet of ice that in general had a motion outward
toward the waters of Davis Strait and Baffin's Bay, and that this sheet
'Journal of Geology, 5, 1897, 17-34.
244 George H, Barton,
retreated from the immediate coastal region at least at an earlier
date than did the Greenland sheet from the region of Umanak fiord.
Though not proved by direct observation that it covered the highest
peaks, yet by what has been seen it seems evident that, could these
peaks be visited, they would furnish evidence to that effect. But as
said in regard to the Greenland ice sheet, to determine how far the
Labrador and Baffin Land ice extended into Davis Strait and Baffin's
Bay, or whether it ever coalesced with the sheet from Greenland,
there is as yet no evidence. Further investigation is needed of this
most interesting problem.
Some Requirements for a Sanitary Milk-Supply. 245
A NOTE ON SOME OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR A
SANITAR Y MILK-SUPPL Y.
By WILLIAM T. SEDGWICK, Ph.D.
Received May lo, 1897.
It is now generally recognized that the milk-supply problem is
one of the most pressing in American sanitation, and I am frequently
asked to give an opinion as to the merits of this or that remedial
measure. I have therefore thought it worth, while to lay down very
briefly, but I hope clearly, the fundamental principles which must be
carefully kept in mind in seeking to introduce sanitary reforms into
this important industry.
The fundamental, indispensable, and all-coatroUing requirement of
a sanitary milk-supply is that milk when consumed shall be as nearly
normal as possible. Normal milk is milk as it flows from the mam-
mary gland of a normal animal, and a normal animal is obviously one
that is healthy and well fed. From such an animal under normal con-
ditions the milk supply of its young passes almost instantaneously,
and without exposure to dust and air, from the milk ducts of the
mother to the stomach of the suckling. Such milk is absolutely fresh,
warm, and free from dirt. It is not only undecomposed, but nearly or
quite free from the germs (bacteria) of decomposition.
Ordinary city milk, on the contrary, is neither fresh, warm, nor
free from dirt, and if not already far on the road towards decomposi-
tion, is always richly seeded with bacteria. It is not always derived
from healthy or well-fed animals, and is seldom drawn under clean and
sanitary conditions, so that even at the outset it may be, and often is,
very far from normal. It is also too often transported over long dis-
tances so that it still further loses its original freshness, and it is fre-
quently manipulated by unclean, and sometimes by diseased, workmen.
By the time it reaches the consujner, therefore, it is not only no longer
normal milk, but usually stale, dirty, more or less decomposed, and
sometimes also diseased.
Some of the steps to be taken in securing a more sanitary supply
are easily deduced from the foregoing facts, and are as follows :
246 William T. Sedgwick.
1. Milch cows should be healthy, well fed, well kept, and well
cared for.
2. Milk should be derived from such cows only, and with all pos-
sible precautions in regard to sanitation and cleanness. Cows as
sources of food should be tended as carefully as, or more carefully
than, horses used only for burden or pleasure. The operation of milk-
ing should be looked after with special care. Above all, the hands of
the milker should be carefully washed just before he begins to milk,
his own personal cleanliness being even more important than that of
the cow.
3. When drawn, milk should be immediately filtered and chilled,
as means of retarding decomposition, and all articles with which it
comes in contact, such as filters, pails, cans, etc., should be scrupu-
lously clean.
4. The milk thus prepared should be delivered, if possible, at
once.
5. If it is impossible to deliver the milk immediately, it will be
impossible to deliver normal milk, and such milk cannot, in fact, gen-
erally be obtained in cities. The best* that can be done, probably, is
to deliver as speedily as possible two kinds of milk, viz. :
(a) The milk thus far described, kept as nearly normal as the con-
ditions will allow.
{b) The same milk CBXtiyiWy pasteurized either (and preferably) on
the farm where it is produced, or at some central point accessible from
a number of farms, or, if this be impracticable, at some good distrib-
uting point in or near the city to be served.
The former {a), which may be called "chilled milk" or "raw milk"
or "ordinary milk," will be preferred by some. The latter (^), which
may be called "pasteurized milk" or "sanitary milk," will be preferred
by many as being certainly free from the germs of infectious disease.
There can be no doubt that any individual or company which hon-
estly strives to displace the present highly objectionable milk-supply
of American cities by a supply such as has been here described, de-
serves, and will secure, the support and the confidence of the more
intelligent portion of the community.
Biological Laboratory.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
May J iSqy.
A Flavor-producing Micrococcus of Butter, 247
A FLA VOR--PRODUCING MICROCOCCUS OF BUTTER,
By SIMEON C. KEITH, Jr.. S.B.
Received May 34, 1897.
In April, 1896, I was studying the effects of various bacteria upon
cream, and in the course of my experiments I isolated from a mixture
of bacteria growing in an agar tube a micrococcus that was found to
produce a decided butter flavor and aroma when grown in milk or
cream. This proved to be a new species, for which I propose the
name Micrococcus butyri-aromafaciens.
It has always been the custom to allow cream to sour or " ripen "
before churning it for butter, because after this process the butter
comes better and more quickly, is of better texture and flavor, and
keeps better than butter made from sweet cream. Lord Lister and
Pasteur, many years ago, showed that the souring of milk and cream
is due to a process of fermentation during which the milk sugar is
converted into lactic acid, and that this is due to the activity of mi-
nute micro-organisms. It remained for Professor Vilhelm Storch, of
Copenhagen, however, to introduce the use of pure cultures of milk-
souring bacteria in butter making. Storch found that several kinds
of acid-producing bacteria are concerned in the normal souring of
cream, and he isolated three species that impart especially fine flavors
to butter under favorable conditions.
A similar line of work was taken up by Professor Weigmann, of
the Agricultural Experiment Station at Kiel, in Germany, and by
Professor H. W. Conn, of Wesleyan University in this country.
Of the bacteria that have been described as producing a beneficial
effect in the ripening of cream. Micrococcus butyn-aromafaciens (Fig-
ure i) most nearly resembles Conn's Bacillus No. ^^ (Figure 2), in its
effects upon milk, but it differs in its morphological and in many of its
physiological characters. It is a micrococcus growing at 37° and 20° C.
It liquefies gelatin slowly, and does not grow well on potato. It may
' Storrs Agricultural Experiment Station, Bulletin 12, and Report for 1894.
248
Simeon C. Keith.
be noted in this connection, however, that recent cultures on gelatin
seem to show that the organism has lost to a considerable extent its
power to liquefy gelatin dur-
ing a year's cultivation in the
laboratory.
The culture of the micro-
coccus for use in creameries
is propagated in bouillon in
Fembach flasks (broad flasks
so constructed that a large
surface of liquid is presented
to the air). When ready for
shipment, the culture is trans-
ferred to sterilized bottles
under aseptic conditions and
hermetically sealed by means
of sterilized corks and melted
paraffine. Put up in this way,
the culture may be kept for
an indefinite time without
danger of infection by any other organism, but in the sealed bottles the
micrococcus loses its vitality
so rapidly that after eight
days it will no longer produce
the best results. Experi-
ments made on a commercial
scale show that cream rip-
ened with the aid of fresh
pure cultures of this organ-
ism produces generally better
butter than the same cream
ripened in the usual way.
The distinguishing characters
of the species are given in
the following systematic de-
scription.
Fig. 2. Bacillus 41, Conn.
magninsd about i,soo diambtbrs.
Drawn from a photomicrograph kindly srnt
BY Prof. Conn.
Fig. I. Micrococcus Butyri Aromafaciens.
Magnifisd z,5oo diambtrrs.
Drawn from a microscopical prbparation
madb from a growth on agar.
A Flavor-prodiuing Micrococcus of Butter.
249
MICROCOCCUS liUTYRI-AROMAFACIENS, Nov. Sp.
Occurrence.
Isolated from a mixed culture growing on agar in April, 1896.
General
Characters.
Shape and arrangement : ^ micrococcus occurring generally in pairs.
Size: 0.5-0.7 fi in diameter, occasionally reaching i/u.
Motility: Non-motile.
Spore formation : No spores.
Relation to temperature: Grows rapidly at 37^ and 20° C.
Relation to air : Aerobic.
Relation to gelatin : Slow liquificr.
Color: Non-chromogenic (white).
Stain : Stains well with carbol-fuchsin.
Gelatin.
Stick adture : Five days. The gelatin is liquefied in the form of a deep
cup f in diameter. The liquefied gelatin remains clear, with a white film
and sediment. The growth below the point of liquefaction is a moder-
ately thick, white dotted line.
Plate culture :
Surface colonies: The colony first appears as a white raised dot which
soon sinks in a pit of liquefied gelatin, and ultimately becomes sur-
rounded by a slight whitish ring along edge of the liquefied gelatin.
Submerged colonies : The submerged colonies occur as smooth spherical
dots.
Agar.
Streak culture: A very white, smooth, shining growth, which is fairly
abundant. The growth is of equal thickness throughout.
Plate culture: Characters of no diagnostic value.
Lactose-litmus-agar : Litmus reddened slightly.
Potato.
There is very little growth on potato. In two weeks it appears as a very
thin, white line, barely visible.
Milk.
Not coagulated. A slightly sourish, pleasantly aromatic, " buttery " flavor.
Slightly acid.
Smith
Solution.
No gas produced. The growth occurs mostly in the open limb of the
fermentation tube, the bouillon of the closed limb being only very
faintly turbid.
Nitrate.
Reduced to nitrite. Recent cultures do not seem to give this reaction
very strongly, although when first isolated it was very marked.
Bouillon.
•
Two days, 25** C. Very cloudy with sediment. One week, no further
change.
Two days, 37** C. Very cloudy with sediment and ring growth on tube at
surface of the liquid.
•
250 Frank H. CilUy,
SOME FUNDAMENTAL PROPOSITIONS RELATING TO
THE DESIGN OF FRAMEWORKS.^
By frank H. CILLEY, S.B.
Received NoTember 27* 1896.
Part I. — The Evolution of the Framework — The Arbitrary
Nature of the Distribution of Stress in Indeterminate
Forms.
In ancient times the builder practically disposed of but two sorts
of material suitable for his purposes — stone and wood. The former,
adapted only to resisting compression, permitted of no higher devel-
opment in construction than the arch ; and the latter, although in
addition well suited to the carrying of transverse loads, was so lim-
ited by its tendency to split and shear, and the consequent difficulty
of making strong connections, that it hardly admitted of a more com-
plex combination than the braced beam. These forms appear to have
been known almost from time immemorial, and it is possible that to
this day we should have remained limited to them had not metal,
with its more extended qualities, come within the range of building
materials. Metal, it is true, had also been known from most ancient
times, but only as rare and costly material. It is the very modem
cheapening in production of certain of its forms, particularly of iron
and steel, which has permitted of its employment for ordinary struc-
tural purposes, and thereby given rise to the numerous forms of con-
struction existing to-day.
These forms, however, did not at once come into existence, but
rather were gradually evolved from the earlier forms in the attempt
'The principal results of this article, viz., the arbitrary nature of the di^stribution of
stress in an indeterminate framework and the economic superiority of statically determined
construction, were obtained in February, 1896, and embodied in a communication of that
date to Professor George F. Swain. In June, 1896, Professor Swain returned the manu-
script of the above communication, advised rewriting it in popular form, and suggested a
second and independent proof of the economic superiority of statically determined frame^
works. The present article, completed in July, 1896, was the outcome.
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks, 251
to utilize with higher economy the still very expensive new material,
taking advantage of its resistance to tension as well as compression,
and of the ease with which it could be given any desired form, and
the strength with which different pieces could be united. Commenc-
ing with mere imitations of the manners of use of the older mate-
rials, it was soon observed that such massive construction in metal
was as unnecessary as uneconomical, and sections such as the T,
the I, the O, and others of great stiffness, with relatively little
material, were developed and employed. With the extensive pro-
duction of malleable metal came the construction of built-up sec-
tions; the plate girder sprang into existence, and was followed by
the more economic lattice girder; then the latticing was gradually
reduced and concentrated in fewer and fewer pieces, thus approach-
ing more and more the typical framework of to-day, in which each
piece is called on to perform but a single definite and simple func-
tion, the support of a direct stress of tension or compression.
Such is, briefly, the history of the evolution of the framework,
at least for Europe. There it resulted simply from the reduction
of the solid beam and arch to a skeleton form in the effort to secure
economy. The new forms were regarded merely as modifications of
the old, and the recognition of the existence in them of a new type
of construction was and is far from universal.
In America the history of this evolution runs somewhat differ-
ently. Here wood was extensively employed in early times, and we
were already thoroughly familiar with the idea of bracing a timber
construction with stiff struts when metal for structural purposes be-
came a possibility with us. The value of its employment for tension
pieces was at once appreciated ; new forms in which it could thus
be utilized were rapidly devised, and the framework of mixed metal
and wood, or all metal, soon became a distinct type of construction.
But evolved, as it had been, in so different a way, it very naturally
differed in many important respects from the European production ;
and our manner of viewing it was also different and more correct,
yet not wholly free from bias, for in many cases the framework had
developed as bracing or stiffening for certain principal members, and
still continued to be regarded only in that light.
In the process of evolution of structures here outlined theory has
played a small, although ever-increasing, part. The arch and beam
in the far past were dimensioned almost wholly from experience,
252 Frank H, Cilley.
with the aid, perhaps, of a little most general and loose reasoning.
The later structures have hardly followed a more royal road. It
was largely through experience and observation that their propor-
tions were at first determined, certain sources of weakness having
been noted in similar existing structures, which it was sought to
remedy through larger dimensions or the introduction of new parts.
Approximate theories based on the comparison with beams were em-
ployed at first, in Europe ; hardly less arbitrary views as to how the
stress was shared were early in vogue here. The fact is, the struc-
tures themselves were in fault, being of such complexity, from an
analytic point of view, as to make their exact solution practically
impossible even by eminent mathematicians of this late day. More-
over, the early forms on which they were based, the beam and the
arch, with all their apparent simplicity, offer analytic problems of
the greatest diflSculty which have not yet received exact solutions.
However, as the structures became more and more complex out-
wardly they had been growing more and more definite in the func-
tions .of their parts ; each part was there for a more and more
definite purpose, and only for that ; the theory was in reality grow-
ing simpler. And when at last came the idea of so constructing
that each part should have but a single definite function — to resist
a push or a pull — the theory was brought within the range of appli-
cation, the idea of the typical framework was conceived, and it became
possible for theory to take the reins and drive where before it could
not even follow.
All the older forms of construction were characterized by a com-
plex interdependence of their inner stresses and strains. A mere
knowledge of the form of such a structure did not suffice for a
determination of the inner stresses due to a given loading. The
elastic nature of the material and its variations had to be consid-
ered; the theory of elasticity, as well as the elementary principles
of statics, was involved, and in a most complex manner; the struc-
tures were highly statically indeterminate. But in the development
of structures this degree of indetermination became less and less,
while what then remained became more and more simply and sharply
definable ; and in the typical framework we can define and determine
all the stresses through simple linear equations without aid of the
calculus. Such a theoretic construction may even be wholly free
from indetermination, that is, statically determined.
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks, 253
The theory of the typical framework, then, may be said to be, not
only possible, but relatively simple. It should therefore be clearly
understood by engineers and others who employ such construction.
They should know just what powers of design lie in their hands and
how they may best use them. Neither prejudice due to older empir-
ical ideas, nor illusions based on imperfect knowledge, should be able
to lead them astray. It is to contribute to this end that the pres-
ent article was written, to make somewhat clearer the general concep-
tion of the nature of these most important structures, and to point
out sharply some very important fundamental propositions concerning
their design commonly overlooked or unknown.
The leading characteristic of the typical framework is, as has been
pointed out, the simplicity in function of its parts. Each member
or bar should be called on to support only pure tension or com-
pression. Such is the ideal condition for which engineers and con-
structors should strive ; for through its attainment alone the highest
degree of certainty in the calculations, and of efficiency in the employ-
ment of material, is possible. In order to attain this end, however,
the framework must be constructed in a certain manner. Its rigid
members (or bars) must be connected with each other only at their
ends and by joints whose resistance to slight changes in the relative
angles of the bars is negligible ; and all external forces, such as loads
and reactions, must be applied practically at the joint points. The
bars are preferably of prismatic form, and their axes should meet at a
point in each joint. Such, in brief, are the most essential require-
ments in the details. As to the general form, that may be defined
simply through the geometric figure of lines formed by the axes of
the bars. In order that our framework should be capable of perform-
ing its function of properly supporting loads it is necessary that its
figure should be defined so fully under the given reaction limitations,
through the lengths of its lines, that no change in its form would be
possible without corresponding change in some of these lengths. The
knowledge of the figure alone suffices to determine the static condi-
tions which the stresses in such a framework must fulfill.
This description of the typical framework is more or less ideal.
The degree of freedom at the joints of actual structures is far from
what it should be. The loads are often applied away from the joints
where they should not be, and in any case, our bars being material
and of more or less considerable dimensions and weight, transverse
254 Frank H, Cilley.
loading from wind and weight is not wholly avoidable. Thus the
absence of other than direct stresses in its members is an ideal con-
dition for a framework, which in practice is never more than partially
attained. Nevertheless, here, for the sake of simplicity and to eluci-
date some characteristics of frameworks, otherwise easily masked by
the complications of a more exact study, we will confine ourselves
chiefly to this ideal case.
At each joint of an ideal framework we have to deal only with
forces meeting at a point, the joint center. These forces are partly
known (loads) and partly unknown (bar-stresses and reactions at sujv
ports), but they must at each joint satisfy the static conditions of
equilibrium of forces at a point — that the algebraic sum of the com-
ponents of these forces (inner and outer) in any three directions (non-
planar framework) shall be zero.
This furnishes us with three equations between the known forces
(loads) and the unknown forces (bar-stresses and reactions) for each
joint, and, if the framework have n joints, this gives 3« such con-
ditions in all, which are statical requirements following purely from
the figure of the framework, and which must in any case be fulfilled.
Let m be the number of bars and r the number of limitations at
the supports of the frame, then we have m '\' r unknown quantities
to determine for each loading of the framework. These may not be
less in number than our 3« static equations if our framework is stable
(of determinate figure). Should they equal in number the static equa-
tions (;« + r = 3/1) the framework may be calculable without further
data, e, g.y statically determined. But should they be in excess of
the number of static equations (w + r > 3«), then other " elastic "
equations will be necessary to complete the determination ; that is,
our framework will be statically indeterminate. It is to this latter
general class of frameworks, of which the statically determined may
be regarded as a limit form, that we will now turn our attention.
In statically indeterminate frameworks, then, we have more un-
known quantities than equations furnished by statics. What follows ^
Usually it is answered, certain further conditions furnished by the
theory of elasticity enable us to complete the solution. But this is
not precisely the truth.
If only the sections of the bars (or, in the case of a new design,
the intensities of stress to exist in them) be given in addition to
the geometrical figure of the framework, and its loading, as usually
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks, 255
is, in fact, the case, the problem remains indeterminate. It is only
when both the sections and the intensities of stress are given for
all the superfluous bars and the sections or intensities of stress of
the non-superfluous bars, or, what is equivalent, the sections and the
exact lengths, center to center of joints, of the unstrained bars are
given, that the problem becomes determinate. The last of these
cases is the one on which calculations are very frequently founded,
yet rather insecurely, as will later be seen. If it is a case of new
design, we will ordinarily have given only the allowable intensities
of stress in addition to the figure of the framework and its loading.
Then, as will now be shown, we can in an infinite variety of ways
fix the stresses in the bars or determine their sections.
First consider the determination of the stresses in this latter case.
In our given data there is nothing which limits the stresses further
than the 3« equations of statics already noted, and which are absolute.
So, if we have k unknowns in excess of these, we have a k^^"^ degree
of indetermination, which admits of 00^ different solutions, as the prin-
ciples of analysis show. Or, to make this more objective, we find
that the stresses in as many bars as are in excess may freely be
assumed, these bars being any such that the remaining bars form a
statically determined framework for the support of the given load-
ing, together with these assumed stresses regarded as outer forces.
Our procedure in calculation is simply to regard these superfluous
bars as removed and replaced by pairs of equal and opposite forces,
acting at their end joints and equivalent to their assumed stresses.
Thus the calculation of the stresses in the remaining bars reduces
to that for a statically determined framework, and may be proceeded
with by any of the usual methods. From the stresses thus found,
and the given intensities of stress, the sectional areas at once follow.
It only remains to insure that these given intensities be attained.
This we may do, at least in theory, by giving to the superfluous
bars suitable primary lengths.
In such a design it is to be noted that primary stresses, that is,
stresses without loading, would exist.
Suppose that instead of assuming the stresses in the superfluous
bars we had assumed their sections, Theace from the given inten-
sities of stress would at once follow their stresses — thence, as before,
the stresses in the remaining bars and their sections.
We must observe, however, that' in no case could we assume
2S6 Frank H. Cilley.
more of the stresses than there were superfluous bars, the require-
ments of statics not permitting of that. And should we assume the
sections of more than the superfluous bars, the intensities of stress
in a corresponding number of bars could (in general) no longer be
as given.
Another way of viewing our power of varying the details of a
design of a framework of given figure, loading, and intensities of
stress is found in the following. Under these conditions we may
design so that the stresses shall be apportioned among the various
bars in any way consistent with the static conditions of equilibrium
of forces.
In all these cases the intensity of stress borne by each bar may
be anything we please (within limits). It may therefore be set at
the maximum allowable value for each bar, so that our infinite vari-
ety of proportions may all be made to fulfill the requirement, that
each bar shall be carrying its maximum allowable load, that is, work-
ing at its maximum efficiency. And in this connection be it noted
that the maximum allowable stress may be set independently and,
if desired, differently for each bar; so that, if bars in certain posi-
tions should be more or less favored than bars in other positions,
or if bars in different positions be of different materials, as wire cable
for tension members and cast metal for compression members, or
even of entirely different substances, as iron or rope tension mem-
bers, and stone or wood compression members, we can employ the
corresponding working stresses and still retain our powers of varia-
tion. That is, these powers hold perfectly for mixed wood and iron
truss construction, or for suspension bridges, whose cables and numer-
ous ties are of wire cable, and the stiffening truss of other material.
Illustrations of Arbitrary Proportioning of a Statically
Indeterminate Framework.
The principles of design expounded in what precedes will be ren-
dered clearer by consideration of the following simple illustrations:
Let it be required to design a square frame ten feet on a side,
with two diagonals, supported by a vertical wall and supporting a
load of icx) tons at its lower outer corner (see Figure i). We are
required to employ a maximum intensity of stress of, say, five tons
per square inch in tension, four tons per square inch in compression
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks. 257
(without regard to post formulae, for simplicity). The material has
uniformly a modulus of elasticity of, say, I4,cxx) tons per square inch.
Let us regard the diagonal from the lower inner corner to the
upper outer corner as the superfluous bar, and we will require it to
take, say, 40 tons compression. Consider this bar removed and re-
placed by a pair of forces of 40 tons. Our frame thus reduces to
99H
•*2B2Btm»
n^t
fOOnmt
a statically determined frame, whose stresses are shown in Figure 2.
The section areas at once follow from the prescribed intensities of
stress, as shown in Figure 3.
It only remains to calculate the primary lengths of our bars which
shall insure the assumed distribution of stress. The primary lengths
of all except the superfluous bars are made simply the dimensions
of the figure of the frame in the unstrained state, as in Figure 4.
But the primary length of the superfluous bar can only be calculated
-«70f
from a knowledge of its length when the frame is distorted by the
stresses shown in Figure 2. There, the intensities of stress being
five tons for members under tension and four tons for members under
compression, tension bars were lengthened ^^^^^, or .000357 of their
lengths, and compression bars were shortened 77:^-3^1 or .000286 of
their lengths, the consequent strains being as shown in Figure 5.
Note that no strain along the wall is assumed. The shortening of
the missing diagonal corresponding to these strains we find most s\m-
ply by application of the method based on the principle of virtual
wort Let us imagine a pair of forces of unity each, applied at the
258 Frank H, Cilley,
end joints of the missing diagonal, then the stresses it would cause
are shown in Figure 6 ; and if we multiply each of these with the
corresponding strain shown in Figure 5 and sum these products alge-
braically, the result will be the work of unity in shortening the dis-
tance along the missing diagonal. This we find to be —
(— .707) X (+.00357) = —.00252 +
(— .707) X (+.00357)= —.00252 +
(+1.000) X (+.00505) = +.00505
(— .707) X ( — .00286) =+ .00202
+ .00707 — .00505 = +.00202 ft. units-
The missing diagonal was therefore 14.1421 — .0020 = 14.1401 feet
long. But this length corresponds to a state of compression of 4 tons
per square inch. The unstrained length would therefore be ^^ X
14.14 feet, or .00404 feet greater, that is, 1 4.1 401 +.0040, or 1 4.1 441
feet, which differs from the length of the other diagonal bar .0020 foot.
To find what primary stresses this design involves we proceed as
follows : Our superfluous bar is designed .0020 foot longer than it
would be were there no primary stress. It must there-
fore be under such compression, and the rest of the
frame under such consequent stress, that the shorten-
ing of our diagonal and the separation of the joint
centers at its ends together amount to this .0020 foot,
i Now one ton tension in our diagonal would cause the
*^ * stresses shown in Figure 6, and the strains corre-
sponding are as in Figure 6a, The shortening of the diagonal dis-
tance calculated as before is —
(— .707) X (—.0000892) = +.0000631
( — .707) X (—.0000892) = +.0000631
(+1.000) X (+.0000498) = +.0000498
(— .707) X (—.0000282) = +.0000199
= +.0001959 ft,
therefore for every ton primary compression in the superfluous diag-
onal its end joints in the frame will separate .000196 foot. But the
diagonal itself, whose section is 10 square inches and length 1 4.1 441
It, . , I X 14.1441
feet, would be shortened — = .000101 foot by every ton
10 X 14,000 ^ ^
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks. 259
of compression it bears. Every ton of compression in the diagonal
therefore corrects (.000196 + .000101) foot = .000297 foot of the
difference of its length and the length for no primary stress. The
whole difference, or .00202 foot, will be corrected by ,^^1^^^ tons, or
6.8 tons, which is the primary stress in the diagonal. The complete
distribution of primary stress is shown in Figure 7.
It is interesting to note with what extreme exactitude the lengths
of the bars must be calculated, and how accurately the construction
would have to be carried out. Moreover, the assumption that the
distance along the wall between the points of support remains inva-
riable, although similar to those usually made in calculation of sta-
tically indeterminate structures, is evidently open to objection. Any
curving of the posts under compression would cause further error,
4JBtwu.
■^MOeNN*
m^ittiw.
H»t9n»
the bar axis shortening from 2^^ to 2.7 d^y where d is the ratio of
middle deflection to length, d = ^^ corresponds to an error of
.7 to .9 ton per square inch.
To illustrate another apportionment of stress than the arbitary
designation of the stress in the superfluous bar, let us take a frame-
work of the same figure as before and so design it that the two
diagonals shall equally share the shear. Then our stresses at once
work out as in Figure 8 ; and with the same allowable intensities of
stress as before, that is, five tons per square inch in tension and four
tons per square inch in compression, the section areas become as shown
in Figure 9. As for the primary lengths in this case, since the
stresses are all of the same intensities and same kind
as in the preceding case, these remain unchanged ; but
the relative areas are no longer the same, so that the
primary stresses necessary to account for the .0020 foot
excess of length of the superfluous diagonal will pre-
sumably not be as before. We find for this case, in
Figure 6^, the strains corresponding to one ton tension
OMOOSaSH
26o ' Frank H. Cilley.
in this diagonal (see stresses in Figure 6). The shortening of the
diagonal distance, calculated as before, is —
(— .707) X (—.0000505) = +.0000357
(— .707) X (—.0000505) = +.0000357
(+1.000) X (+.0000714) = +.0000714
(— .707) X (—.0000404) = +.0000286
= +.0001 7 14 ft,
for every ton tension in the superfluous diagonal, or the same increase
for every ton compression. The diagonal itself would be shortened
I X 14,1441 c ^ c L ^ • T.. •
— — or .000057 foot for each ton compression. Its pri-
17.68 X 14,000 .00202 .00202
mary stress must therefore be given by .000171 + .000057 " 1^^S^%
= 8.8 tons. The complete distribution of primary stress is shown
in Figure 10.
As a final case in design, which only too frequently is met in
practice, consider that in which the exact primary lengths of all bars
are given in advance. Usually in this case these
lengths are given by the requirement that there shall ^
be no primary stresses ; but then, as previously noted, |
under loading as many intensities of stress as there |
are superfluous bars cannot be set in advance, but
will be determined through the intensities assumed
to exist under loading in, say, the now superfluous ' n^io
bars. The stresses or sections of our superfluous
bars, however, remain, as before, wholly within our control. Let
this be illustrated with the same framework as before, and suppose
the same distribution of stresses as in Figure 8 assumed. The inteji-
sities of stress in the now superfluous bars being the same as before,
we know the superfluous diagonal will have been shortened .0020
foot, which corresponds to an intensity of stress of * —
= 2 tons per square inch ; therefore, since this bar carries 70.7 tons,
70.7
its section area must be made — -^ = 35.35 square inches. All other
sections remain as in Figure 9. This gives our superfluous bar dou-
ble the area and volume it had in the preceding illustration, showing
clearly the loss of efficiency which may result from insisting on the
condition of no primary stress in the framework.
In this, as in the preceding two illustrations, we could have assumed
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks. 261
the section areas instead of the stresses in the superfluous bars ; but
should we assume the section areas of all the bars, as well as a con-
dition of no primary stress, then all stresses and stress intensities
would thereby be determined and no longer within our control. And
such is, perhaps, just what most frequently occurs with present methods
of design as well as in the calculation of existing structures. Usually
in design all the sections are tentatively assumed (in an existing struc-
ture they are given), and the supposition of no primary stress being
made, often unwittingly, the problem becomes wholly determinate. In
an existing structure the supposition of no primary stress will be more
than questionable, and in a design it will be a foolish limitation, for
the intensities of stress should be as prescribed, and should deter-
mine the design — not be determined by it.
To illustrate the results and one method of calculation for this
case, suppose we were given the framework, with sections as in
Figure 9, but subject to no primary stresses. Regard the same
*A "^mmKxn
%/2
diagonal, as before, as superfluous, and let x be its stress ; then the
stresses in our frame would be as shown in Figure 11. The con-
sequent changes in lengths of bars we find, as usual, by multiplying
these stresses by the bar lengths and dividing by the areas and mod-
ulus of elasticity, the result being as shown in Figure 1 2. Now the
shortening of the line of the superfluous diagonal calculated from the
strains of the other bars by aid of Figure 6, as before, is —
(— .707) X (—. 0000505:1:) = +. 00003 S7;r
(— .707) X (—.0000505.^) = +.oooo357;r
(+1.000) X (+ .01010 -f .00007i4;r) = +.00007140: + .01010
( — .707) X ( — .00571 — . 0000404;!:) = +.0000286;i: + .OO404
= +.0001714^ + .01414
= — .0000571:1: (see Figure 12), the sAortening of the diagonal itself.
— .01414
Thus X =
.000171 + .000057 .000228
— .01414
= — 62.0 tons, and the
262
Frank H, Cilley.
actual distribution of stress under these circumstances would be as
shown in Figure 13. There is by no means an equal division of
shear between the two diagonals. As for the intensities of stress,
they are as shown in Figure 14. It is seen that the tension diag-
onal and the lower horizontal are both overstrained, and the. re-
maining bars bear less than their fair loads if we keep to the earlier
criterion of $ tons allowable for tension and 4 tons for compression.
The results are some 12 per cent out. If this were a design it
^^aaiMg
/ly/i
might be attempted to improve these results by correcting the sec-
tions, but with little satisfaction so long as primary stresses were
excluded. The system is, in fact, one of design by blind trial, and
well illustrates the general lack of acquaintance by designers with
what are really very elementary principles of the distribution of stress
in frameworks.
Part II. — Economic Considerations — Inferiority of Indeter-
minate Frameworks.
At first it would seem as if our power of varying the distribution
of stresses and so distribution of material in our framework, as set
forth in the preceding part, was almost unlimited, but a little closer
observation will show that in reality it only extends to as many options
as there are superfluous bars, thenceforth all being fixed and determi-
nate. Moreover it must be noted that the power of variation only
extends over such parts of the frame as are affected by the stresses in
the superfluous bars, that is, the statically indeterminate portions of
the framework.
Further, in order to make use of even this power with which the
designer is invested, exceedingly exact and laborious calculation of all
elements in the design is absolutely essential, in particular it being
necessary to calculate very exactly the lengths, center to center of
joints, of the unstrained bars, and it is equally essential that the con-
J
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks, 263
struction should be exactly carried out in order that the supposed
conditions of the calculation be fulfilled. How very exact work this
means, will be appreciated from the fact that errors of a thousandth of
a foot in lofoot bars are far from negligible, involving errors in stress
as .great as 30 to 35 per cent., the allowable stress. Moreover it is
seen that the calculation should properly take into account the yield-
ing, both permanent and elastic, at the reactions, and at the joints and
splices. And aside from the excessive accuracy necessary, the (often
considerable) primary stresses we may find it desirable to introduce
may create difficulties. In the face of these and other real and very
important objections to the employment of statically indeterminate
frameworks, objections from which statically determined frameworks
are wholly free, it may well be asked why should indeterminate frame-
works be employed ; what real advantages do they possess }
It has already been pointed out how the evolution of the frame-
work was an outcome of experience, rather than theory. And expe-
rience is a very slow teacher. But many will follow in her tracks
alone, paying little heed to the straight path to their goal which theory
points out to them. Thus the early frameworks having been statically
indeterminate in their figures, as well as departing from the ideal in
other respects, such as in the fixtures of the bars at intermediate
points as well as at the ends, and the use of stiff joints, all these
defects have been perpetuated even in modern constructions. And
the constructor, to whom these features are pointed out as defects, is
apt to question the theory on which the criticism is based. He may
even have a theory of his own which proves to his satisfaction the
superiority of these very features. And as the theory of such struc-
tures is exceedingly difficult and complicated — so much so that closely
approximate single solutions have only been attained by the most mod-
em methods of calculation, and these in but very few instances — the
difficulty of correcting these delusions by an analysis that is both gen-
eral and exact may be imagined. Only for the typical framework are
we in a position to make such an analysis which shall be fairly general,
and at the same time even approaching exactitude. This we will now
undertake.
Three of the most important claims urged in favor of frameworks
with superfluous bars are that they are stiffer, that they are safer, and
that they are more economic in material used. Let us examine these
claims.
264 Frank H, Cilley,
The deflections of a frame under a given loading are absolutely
determined by the intensities of strain in the bars of the statically
determined portion left after eliminating the superfluous bars. If the
bars of this portion have a determined maximum stress, therefore
strain under load, the deflections are also determined, whatever the
number of superfluous bars. Only by a reduction in the intensities of
strains, that is, in the efficiencies, can increased stiffness be secured,
and this is independent of the use of superfluous bars. The first
claim, therefore, is unfounded for a fair basis of comparison, fixed
intensities of strain.
The rupture of a bar of a framework with superfluous bars will not
less surely cause its downfall than in the case of a framework every
bar of which is necessary, unless the ruptured bar chances to be one
which may be regarded as superfluous. The ratio of such bars to the
whole gives a rude measure of the extent of this possible security.
But its true value depends on whether such a bar being ruptured,
the rest of the bars are strong enough to bear the load alone, espe-
cially when we consider the probable accompanying shock of rupture.
A certain degree of additional security undeniably exists, but what ?
There remains the claim of superior economy. But before making
a more exact examination of this, let us ask on what is such a claim
based. And to which of the innumerable designs of frameworks of
a given figure supporting a given loading, which have been shown in
Part I of this paper to exist, does it apply } We may answer that the
claim is based on practically nothing except the fact that the continu-
ous girder and the arch are more economic than simple girder spans.
And this unfair comparison may now be set aright by the introduction
of the really comparable statically determined forms, the cantilever
and the three-hinged arch. As to the second of the above questions,
the partisans of frameworks with superfluous bars, being for the most
part unaware of these possible variations, could give no answer. We
will, then, answer for them. A design in which the stresses of as
many bars as are superfluous are zero, that is, a statically determined
framework whose figure is included in the given figure, will be the
most economic. This, a direct contradiction in terms, of the claim of
superior economy of an indeterminate form, we will now prove.
Suppose we have given any one of the possible designs by its bar-
sections, and the stresses in the bars under the given loading. Let us
determine the effect on the quantity of material employed, of varying
J
Fundamental Propositiofts in Design of Frameworks, 265
this distribution of stresses and material without varying the external
loading or the intensity of stress in any bar. For the sake of sim-
plicity we will suppose that the intensities of stress in question are
simply the mean intensities obtained by dividing total stress by area
of section. And we will suppose the mean strain to be proportional
to the mean stress, that is, the shortening due to possible curvature of
a bar to be negligible. The first assumption which neglects the effect
of post formulae on design we will correct later. The second assump-
tion is usual in all calculations, and since the shortening of the axis
due to bowing of a bar is between 2d^ and 2,7 d^ of its length, d being
the ratio of deflection to length, this supposes no deflection exceeding,
say, 1/200 the length which would correspond to a shortening of from
.00005 to .000067 the length, and with a modulus of 14,000 tons would
be equivalent to the effect of an intensity of stress of from .7 ton to
.9 ton per square inch. It may be objected that these and even larger
defiections are both possible and probable, and that it is unfair to neg-
lect them. This may be true, but since this supposition alone makes
the calculation of frameworks with superfluous bars possible, it will at
least not be objected to by the partisans of such construction.
We assume, then, our external forces invariable, our bars always
straight, and the sections varying in the same proportion as we vary
the stresses, so that the mean intensities of stress are maintained con-
stant. Let our given frame have m bars, of which k are superfluous
under the given reaction conditions. Let any such k of the bars as
may be regarded as superfluous be selected out leaving us with a stat-
ically determined framework of m — >t bars which we will denote by
the numbers i to m — k inclusive. Consider in connection with this
statically determined portion any one of the superfluous bars which we
will denote as the bar m — k-\- 1. Now suppose under the given load-
ing and the stresses in the remaining superfluous bars, maintained
constant by the unvarying mean intensities of stress in our bars i to
nt — k, we vary the distribution of stress between these m — k bars
and the bar m — >& + i, varying the sections correspondingly, and note
the eflfect on the quantity of material employed. Let e denote any
one of the bars i to m — k, S^ its stress, /^ its length, and a-^ its
(constant) mean intensity of stress. And let 5'^ denote the stress
(tension) that would be caused in the bar ^ by a tension of unity in the
bar m — it + i, all other superfluous bars being removed. Then any
increase in tension dS^ . , in the bar m — ^ + i, since the stresses
266 Frank H, Cilley,
in the other k — i superfluous bars are kept constant, will simply be ac-
companied by the corresponding changes in stress dS -=3 dS
in each bar e of the remaining bars. Their corresponding changes in
section will be dA^ — s _ ^e^-^m-k + , and in volume will be
e e
dV^^=^ l^dA^ = J 2 """'' + ' or for the whole frame, summing
^e
over all w — -* + i bars, and putting / for i to w — k -^ \ and
m — k-fy
>.
^l
It is to be observed here that /. is always + and <r. and 5'. either
+ or — , according as they are tension or compression.
Now the expression for dV\.\i\x% formed will in general be either +
or — , according to the sign we give ^»5ni-k + 1 (unless very exceptionally
m — k + i
>
/:5':
(T.
be zero), so that by suitably choosing the sign of dS^_^j^^ we can in
general effect a saving in material through our variation in distribution
of stress. . But during this variation the quantities /'. and 5'. remain
unchanged whatever its range, and the cr. can only change through
the stress in some bar becoming zero, that is, through our m — ^ + i
bars reducing to a statically determined combination of tn — k bars
bearing the same outer loading and the same stresses of the remain-
ing superfluous bars, and having the same intensities of stress as
before. It follows, therefore, that we can so vary our distribution of
stress as to eliminate one bar of our m — ^ + i bars, arid leave the
remaining bars performing the same function under the same condi-
tions, but with the use of less material (exceptionally with the same
quantity of material).
In the same way we may now treat these m — k modified bars to-
gether with one of the remaining superfluous bars when we shall again
find that we may eliminate a bar to advantage, and so, successively
eliminating bar by bar, we eventually arrive at a statically determined
Fundamental Propositiofis in Design of Frameworks. 267
framework of m — k bars in all, so modified in section that they bear
alone the whole original loading with stresses of the same kinds and
intensities as those in the corresponding bars of the given framework,
and with the employment of less material (or by exception the same
amount).
Thus, under the limitations of our analysis, it appears that
No given design of a framework with superfluous bars may support
a given loading with more economy of material tfian some statically
determined framework whose figure is included in the figure of the
given framework y and whose stresses are of the same kinds and intensi-
ties as those in the corresponding bars of the given framework.
And since thi§ is true of any design of a framework of a given
figure and loading, it follows that (under our limitations)
The framework which will support a given loading most economi-
cally vtfill always be statically determined.
Another very simple and much more objective proof of the same
proposition is the following, subsequently suggested by Professor
George F. Swain, to whom the author is indebted for his early train-
ing in the statics of structures, and also for a review of .the present
article and much valuable advice in connection with it. To Professor
Swain's steadfast support of statically determined construction was
due the author's interest in this subject, leading to the study whose
outcome was the general demonstration of its economic superiority,
here given, it is believed, for the first time. We may hope that this
superiority, hitherto frequently claimed for indeterminate construction,
will henceforth be recognized universally as an attribute of determi-
nate construction.
Suppose we have given any framework with superfluous bars, and
its loading, stresses, intensities of stress, etc., and that we have found
a series of statically determined frameworks, whose figures are in-
cluded in the figure of the given framework, all of the bars of the
given framework being represented in these separate frameworks, and
in each of which the given loading would cause the same kind of stress
in the bars as in the corresponding bars of the given framework. It is
evident, then, that if to each of these statically determined frame-
works we assigned a suitable fraction of our given loading, the stress
in any bar of the given framework would be equalled by the arithme-
tic sum of the stresses in the corresponding bars of the statically
determined frameworks ; and further employing the same mean inten-
268 Frank H. Cilley,
sities of stress in the design of all corresponding bars of these stati-
cally determined frameworks and the given framework, the section
area of any bar of the given framework would be equalled by the
arithmetic sum of the section areas of the corresponding bars of the
statically determined frameworks, since all stresses in all correspond-
ing bars are, by supposition, of like kind. It follows that the total vol-
ume of material in the given intermediate framework is also equalled
by the arithmetic sum of the volume of material of all our statically
determined frameworks. Therefore, the efficiency of our given frame-
work, measured, if we please, by the quotient of its total loading
divided by its total volume of material, will lie between the efficiencies
of the most and the least efficient of our statically .determined frame-
works, which may in a way be regarded as elements into which our
given framework has been decomposed. It follows, therefore, since
the given framework cannot be more efficient than the most efficient
of these elements, that the given framework cannot be more efficient
than some statically determined framework^ whose figure is included in
the figure of the given framework^ and the stresses in whose bars are
like in kind and intensity to the stresses in the corresponding bars of
the given framework, (Q. E. D.)
It may occur that we are not able to find the necessary statically
determined forms whose figures are included in the figure of the given
framework, and the stresses in whose bars under the given loading are
like in kind to those in the corresponding bars of the given frame-
work. If there be k superfluous bars, we see that ^ + i such static-
ally determined frameworks are necessary in order that each bar of
the given framework should have a corresponding bar in at least one
of these.
Suppose, now, that we could not find a statically determined frame-
work under our conditions which should include a certain bar. It can
readily be shown that we can at least always find some one statically
determined framework fulfilling our conditions, and so, by supposition,
not containing this bar. Then the introduction of this bar, with stress
of the amount and kind it must have in the given framework, into
this statically determined framework, clearly must simply increase the
stresses (therefore correspondingly the section areas) of all bars of
this framework which are affected at all thereby, and our bar forms
with our statically determined framework a statically indeterminate
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks, 269
framework with one superfluous bar, whose stresses are like in sign
and intensity those in the corresponding bars of the given framework,
but which, supporting only the same loading as our first or primary
statically determined framework, while containing more material, is less
efficient than this primary. Thus, we can always find a series of stat-
ically determined frameworks and of indeterminate frameworks with
one superfluous bar derived from these primaries, whose figures are
included in the figure of the given framework, among which each bar
of the given framework has at least one corresponding bar, and in
each of which the given loading would cause the same kinds of stress in
the bars as in the corresponding bars of the given framework. Then,
providing the primaries corresponding to the indeterminate frame-
works of one superfluous bar are among our series, all the same con-
sequences as before follow, and the given framework cannot be more
efficient than the most eflScient among these elements. But among
these elements the statically determined primary frameworks are
always more efficient than the derived frameworks with one super-
fluous bar; therefore the given framework cannot be more efficient
than one of its statically determined elements. (Q. E. D.)
Our first preceding proof was given under one limitation (merely
for the sake of simplicity), which was quite unnecessary. We sup-
posed the sections to vary simply as the stress, but it suffices that
under the rule of design (post formula) actually employed, the rate
of increase in supporting power of a member does not at any time
diminish as the area of section is increased. Such is the case for the
usual formulae (for all of the Gordon-Rankine type), so our conclusion
holds for designs under the usual rules of dimensioning of members.
In such designs the relation between area and stress for each bar hav-
ing been put in the form 5. = <^j {A^ we would find for the change in
S\dS _. .
area corresponding to a small change in stress dA.^ = — * 7>j\
whence the change in volume would be expressed by
dV = dS^ --fi Zl ^'i(^i)
= dS^_y^.^ /i
4>\ {A^ replacing cr. of the simple formula. In order that this expres-
sion which now contains the variables <}>\ (/i.) should not change sign
270
Frank H, Cilley.
during variation, at least until some bar stress reduces to zero, it suf-
fices that <^'i(^i )should in no case diminish numerically as A.^ increases,
the analytic expression of our preceding statement. This holds, as
mentioned, for formulae of the Gordon-Rankine type, and also for the
even simpler forms 5 = trA — Cand S ^= <rA — K^ A — C, which
the author believes may find sufficient recommendation for introduc-
tion into practice as safe and simple substitutes for the unprofitably
complicated, if more correct formulae.
Illustration of Economic Effect of Variation of Propor-
tions OF Statically Indeterminate Frameworks.
To render more clear the significance of the preceding analysis
and its application, consider the following simple illustration in which
for simplicity we neglect post formulae and employ the simple rule,
stress = constant working stress X section area. Consider the design
previously discussed whose stresses are shown in Figure 8, and whose
*900tmM
UHhttu
section areas are shown in Figure 9 (both reproduced here). Through
the employment of primary stress this design was made economical in
character, since all intensities of stress are the maxima allowable. The
quantity of material in each of its bars and the total quantity are as
/200
-^J9r
VyTctQl SXOetLOt.
riy/5
shown in Figure 15. Taking the same diagonal from the lower inner
corner to the upper outer corner as the superfluous bar, as before, the
stresses 5' of our formulae are those given in Figure 6 (reproduced
here), and our formula becomes
j
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks, 271
dV=dS
( — .707) X 120 in. _
5
, ( — .707) X 120 in. _
5 ~
, (+ i.ooo) X 169.7 in.
5
, ( — .707) X 120 in.
. (+ 1,000) X 169.7 in.
— 17.0
— 17.0
= + 34.0
= + 21.2
— 4
— 42.4
+ 55.2 — 76.4 J
+ 55-2
— 21.2
dS X { — 21.2) that is, dV is negative when dS is positive. So by
increasing the tension (that is, diminishing the compression) in our
superfluous diagonal we decrease the amount of material necessary at
the rate of 21.2 cubic inches for every ton reduction in our superfluous
diagonal, and this rate of saving we may maintain until the stress in
some bar reduces to zero. But this happens simultaneously to the
superfluous diagonal, the vertical and the upper horizontal, the stress
^ *5Mt»ni
fiyie
4
Vff/Kctf nc; -4200MI
9
n^n
*A TttJLdSOOtMJUK.
in the superfluous diagonal having diminished 70.7 tons with the conse-
quent saving of 70.7 X 21.2 = 1,500 cubic inches in material, and our
frame having reduced to the simple statically determined frame (tri-
angle) shown in Figure 16. As this frame requires but 7,800 cubic
inches the original frame required ^'^%Vo^o'^^^> ^^ nearly 20 per cent
more material. By Professor Swain's method we should have found
the elementary frames (Figures 17 and 18), which together would be
equivalent to the given framework (Figures 8 and 9). The efficiency
for Figure 17 is .00093, for Figure 18 is .00128, while for the given
framework it was j;^^ = .00107 or intermediate. Clearly, Figure 18
is a more economical form.
2/2 Frank H. Cilley.
The amount of saving shown in this illustration need not be in-
sisted on. With frameworks of other proportions or figure, differences
as high as 50 per cent, have been found, while in other instances they
were but a few per cent. Employing post formulae in design the sav-
ing comes out slightly greater. The main point to note is that the
indeterminate forms, that is, those with superfluous bars, do not em-
ploy less material than some included statically determined design of
like stresses in kind and intensity.
We may make a very interesting extension of our result. Suppose
the bars to be of different materials, so that not the quantities but the
values of change in material employed, are of interest. Let a. be the
/ c
value per cubic unit of the material of the bar /, then -^-^ — -* ^'^m — k + i
^\
would be the increased value of material employed in the bar 1 as a
result of the increase dS^_^^^ in tension in the bar m — >& + i, and
for the whole framework
dC
= dS^_^,^ /\
a, /j 5'j
+ 1 / ' <T,
would be the increase in cost of material employed. If a, be taken con-
stant, this would result as before in a statically determined form being
cheaper, with these same materials in its corresponding bars. This
applies particularly to construction in different materials, such as wire
cable and cast metal, or different substances, as iron and wood. The
result is very general and conclusive in negating the claim of a supe-
rior economy for construction with superfluous bars, at least for the
support of one definite loading.
We might, theoretically, consider further the modifications of cost
of abutments, accompanying the changes in the reaction forces during
our variations, but practically this would hardly be feasible. However,
if, in the process of reducing from an indeterminate to a determinate
form, we find it possible to reduce the number of reaction limitations,
we may be suf e that the cost will only be favorably affected thereby.
One feature of our result should be particularly noted, that in each
case we can find a more economic statically determined framework
among those whose figures are included in the figure of the given in-
determinate framework, and whose stresses in its corresponding bars
are of the same intensities and kinds. Therefore, nothing need be
Fundamental Propositions in Design of Frameworks. 273
altered in the manner or material of construction of such a frame-
work which could employ the same materials in its bars as in the cor-
responding bars of the given framework. However, if we were seek-
ing the most economic framework whose figure was included in that of
the given framework, and in which we could employ, as we found most
advantageous, any materials employed in the given framework, then
these limitations would disappear. And it follows from our preceding
result that we would only need to seek among the statically deter-
mined forms for that furnishing the most economic design.
Thus far we have treated only the case of a single definite loading,
and shown that for that the claim of superior economy of material on
the part of statically indeterminate construction is untenable. There
remain, however, the cases so common in practice, of frameworks
which are called on to support a number of different loadings.
Before considering these further, there are certain facts that it
will be well to note. Frequently, perhaps usually in practice, some
one loading or combination of loadings determines the dimensions of
almost all the principal members of the framework, the members not
thus determined affecting the total quantity of material employed but
slightly. This is particularly the case for large structures in which
dead weight plays a leading part, and where the total quantity of mate-
rial employed is so large that economy in this direction is particularly
desirable. In such cases one loading virtually rules the economic
design, and our foregoing results hold approximately true. The con-
sideration of the effects of changes in loading in these cases, although
of great importance as far as strength of the structure goes, is of
wholly secondary significance from our economic point of view.
It may happen, however, that loadings of comparable importance
but widely different character are to be supported. For such cases it
no longer necessarily holds that a single statically determined frame-
work can be found whose figure is included in that of a given frame-
work, and which will more economically support these several loadings
than the given framework. We must here employ several of the stat-
ically determined forms in combination.
For example, a weight W could most advantageously be supported
by a vertical post, thus | ; a horizontal pull P, by a triangular truss,
^hus .,^1!^^^ ; but the weight being much larger than the pull, a static-
ally indeterminate frame of the form ^/^^ would support either of
274 Frank H, Cilley.
these loadings (not both united) more economically than any of the
statically determined forms obtainable by eliminating a bar, as
y\ y\ Ik • But here two statically determined forms taken
together will even more economically perform the two functions. We
have only to design a triangle ,„^^^ sufficiently strong to bear the
horizontal pull. For the vertical load we calculate how much this
triangle will carry, and then design a free vertical post, merely for the
balance. In this way there is no interference such as occurs in the
indeterminate form, where the diagonals are not permitted by the post
to carry their full share of the vertical loading. All parts contribute
with their full efficiency.
For other cases we would find similar solutions. For multiple load-
ings, multiple statically determined forms ; such is the dictate of max-
imum economy. Statical indetermination in a structure is always to
be regarded as self-intetference with efficiency.
Hitherto we have gone on the supposition that it is fair to compare
statically determined and indeterminate frameworks, on the basis of the
same working stresses. But this is by no means the case. The uncer-
tainty that the conditions of calculation will be fulfilled in construction
(we have noted the exactitude as to the lengths of the bars, and the
effects of curvature under stress on this), the uncertainty that they
will remain as designed (permanent deformation, settlement of abut-
ments, etc.), uncertainties which do not affect statically determined
designs, certainly demand much larger factors of safety in the design
of statically indeterminate than in determinate construction. Add
to this the frequently enormous stresses introduced by temperature
changes in indeterminate designs, from which the determinate designs
again are free, and all doubts as to with which economy as well as most
other virtues lie, will disappear.
We may sum up with the conclusion, that in all cases the best, the
most economic results will be obtained through the use of statically
determined construction. Let us hope that this may soon be univer-
sally recognized, that no more avoidable indeterminate structures such
as two-hinged arches and indeterminate suspension bridges will be con-
structed, and that statically determined construction will become the
engineer's ideal.
Onset, Massachusetts.
Books Received, 275
BOOKS RECEIVED,
Talbot, Henry P. Introductory course of quantitative chemical analy-
sis. New York. Macmillan. 1897.
LeBlane, Max. Elements of electrochemistry. Translated by W. R.
Whitney. London. Macmillan. 1896.
Gill, Augustus H. Gas and gas analysis for engineers. New York.
Wiley. 1896.
American Type Founders Co. One hundred years, anniversary vol-
ume. Philadelphia. 1897.
Bailey, F. H., and F. S. Woods. Plane and solid analytic geometry.
Boston. Ginn. 1897.
Thorp, Frank Hall. Inorganic chemical preparations. Boston. Ginn.
1896.
Borehers, W. Entwicklung, Bau und Betrieb der elektrischen Ofen
zur Gewinnung von Metallen, Carbiden und anderen metallurgisch
wichtigen Produkten. Halle a. S. Knapp. 1897.
EneyclopaBdia Britannica. New American supplement edited by Day
Otis Kellogg. New York. Werner. 1897.
Baldwin, James. Guide to systematic reading in the Encyclopaedia
Britannica. New York. Werner. 1897.
Oettel, Felix. Elektrochemische Ubungsaufgaben. Halle a. S.
Knapp. 1 897.
Rogers, William Barton. Life and Letters, edited by his wife with the
assistance of W. T. Sedgwick. Boston. Houghton, Mifflin & Co.
1896.
Johnson, J. B. Materials of construction. New York. Wiley. 1897.
ADVERTISEMENTS.
TtJE EDWARD P. ALLIS COMPANY,
MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN.
© Reynolds Corliss Engines,
\ wa coNimsiNG, comND, or tsipli ejiphnsiiiii,
For Any lOnd of Service. Highest Efflcleooy Gaanmteed.
man duty pumping engines.
HEAyY HOISTING ENGINES.
BLOWING ENGINES.
<m COMPRESSORS.
ROLUNG MILL ENGINES.
yERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL BOILERS.
AD VERTISEMENTS.
nmn ohihgle
L/REOSOTE OTAINS.
" The Only Exterior Coloring
Tbat Does Not
'Blacken."
For sanplM or wood and book of sketchet apply to
SlIDEL CiMT, 70 Blbj Stnet, Boston, lasi., Soil luolketini.
COCHRANE CHEMCAL CO.,
55 KILBY STREET, BOSTON, NIASS.
Oa. VITRIOL, AQUA AMMONIA, ALUM,
MURIATIC ACID, SULPHATE AMM(miA, POROUS ALUM,
MTRK ACID, BXTRACT INDIOO, SlAJ>tfATB ALUMINA,
ACETIC ACID, aLAUBER'3 SALT. CHLORIDB ALUMINA,
AQUA FORTIS, 5ULPHATS SODA, IRWI UQUORS.
TIN CRYSTALS, BISULPHATB SODA, NTTRATB IRON.
MURIATE TIN. BISULPHirB SODA, NITRATE COPPER,
STANNATB SODA, and «UMr ChaHlcala.
BUSINESS FOUNDED 1S49. WORKS AT EVERETT, MASS.
A. J. WilKipsoo G" Co.,
Machinery & General Hardware,
Machinists' & Mannfactnrers' Sapplies.
TOOLS FOR WOOD AND METAL WORKERS.
180, 184, 188 WoBhtngton Street, ana
19, Z3, SS Devotuhtre Stnetf
BOSTON, MASS.
Technology Quarterly
AND
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS.
Vol. X.
SEPTEMBER, 1897.
No. 3.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS.
THIRTY^FIFTH YEAR, i8g6^.
Thursday, April 8, 1897.
The 498th meeting of the Society of Arts was held at the
Institute this day at 8 p.m., with Mr. Blodgett in the chair.
The record of the previous meeting was read and approved.
Messrs. Frank L. Fales, of Boston, Levi G. Hawkes, of Saugus,
F. Herbert Snow, of Brockton, Otis Bigelow, of Washington, D. C.>
George W. Fuller, of Louisville, Kentucky, and Miss Grace A. Van
Everen, of Brooklyn, New York, were duly elected Associate Mem-
bers.
The Chairman introduced Mr. L. H. Parker, of Schenectady, New
York, who read a paper on "Heavy Electric Railway Service." The
paper opened with an account of the development of the electric mo-
tor, and then descriptions were given of various devices used in elec-
tric railway service, such as the electric brake, the automatic circuit
breaker, magnetic fuse box, conduit plow, regulating devices, and
switch boards. Then the advantage of electric power over steam for
elevated roads was discussed, and its superiority was attributed to the
more rapid acceleration which it allows. The use of the third rail
was spoken of as applied to both surface and elevated roads, and the
2/8 Proceedings of the Society of Arts.
speaker closed with a description of the electric locomotive of the
Baltimore & Ohio Railroad. The paper was illustrated by models
and lantern views.
Professor Swain and others took part in the discussion which fol-
lowed. It was voted to thank Mr.^ Parker for his very interesting
paper. The Society adjourned.
Thursday, April 22, 1897.
The 499th meeting of the Society of Arts was held this day at
the Institute, at 8 p.m., with Mr. Blodgett in the chair.
The record of the previous meeting was read and approved.
The Secretary presented a report from the Executive Committee
recommending that the By-Laws of the Society be amended by strik-
ing out the word "four" in the last sentence of Section II, and in-
serting in its place the word "three," so that the sentence shall read.
Three members shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business,
A letter from the Secretary of the Corporation was read, showing that
•
this amendment had been approved by a vote of the Corporation,
March 10, 1897. The amendment was then laid upon the table, as
required by the By-Laws, to be considered at the next meeting.
On motion of Colonel Hewins it was voted that the Chair appoint a
committee of five to nominate the Executive Committee for 1897-98.
The Chair appointed Messrs. James P. Monroe, E. K. Turner, Charles
A. Stone, A. E. Burton, and Charles T. Main.
There being no further business, the Chairman introduced Mr.
George B. Francis, resident engineer of The Boston Terminal Com-
pany, who spoke on *< The Engineering Problems of the New South-
em Station." The history of the project was sketched briefly, and
then a number of the problems involved were stated, and it was shown
how it is proposed to solve them. In order to provide separate plat-
forms for baggage, the number of stub tracks had to be reduced to 2Z^
only 3 more than the aggregate of the present southern stations. But
electricity as a motive power and the growth of suburban traffic had
to be taken into account. The necessity of providing larger facilities
under these conditions leads to the introduction of one of the most in-
teresting features of the plan. This is the underground suburban loopi
Proceedings of the Society of Arts, 279
consisting of two tracks with a radius of 262 and 242 feet, respect-
ively. In order that there shall be no steps in the approaches, it waS
necessary to put the loop tracks 2 feet below high-water level. The
waterproofing presented the most difficult problem. Gravel concrete
is used to avoid cutting the waterproof material. The drainage area
of the roof of the train shed is 12^ acres. The tracks will require
the largest interlocking plant in the world. There are at present 650
trains daily leaving and entering the southern stations, of which about
400 are suburban. The loop track will give double the capacity of any
existing station.
During the discussion which followed Mr. Francis said that borings
show that the foundation is blue clay, overlying strata of clay, sand, and
gravel. The waterproofing consists of courses of felt with tar, etc.,
and the concrete is used to hold it in place. The roof is to be so
strong that the snow may be allowed to remain upon it.
On motion of Colonel Hewins it was voted to extend to the speaker
the thanks of the Society. The Society then adjourned.
Thursday, May 13, 1897.
The 3Sth Annual Meeting (500th meeting) of the Society of
Arts was held at the Institute at 8 p.m. on this day, Mr. Blodgett in
the chair.
The record of the previous meeting was read and approved.
Messrs. John Balch Blood, of Boston, George H. Hamlin, of
Orono, Maine, Everett Morss, of Boston, Thomas M. Lothrop, of
Brookline, Henry K. Rowell, of Brunswick, Maine, were duly elected
Associate Members of the Society.
The Secretary read a communication from the Committee on Nom-
inations, in which the following gentlemen were named as candidates
for the Executive Committee : George W. Blodgett, Desmond Fitz
Gerald, Thomas Doane, E. H. Hewins, and F. W. Hodgdon. Ballots
having been cast, it was found that a quorum was not present, and all
business appertaining to the Annual Meeting was laid on the table.
The following papers were presented by title :
" A Tribute to the Memory of Brevet Brigadier General Francis
Amasa Walker," by Thomas L. Livermore.
" Claims of Modern Life on Education,'* by William T. Sedgwick.
28o Proceedings of the Society of Arts,
*' Some Data on the Heating Error in Resistance Coils," by F. A.
Laws.
" Studies of the Eskimos of Baffin Land and Umanak Fiord, Green-
land," by R. W. Porter.
" Formation of Diacetylenyl (Butadiine) from Copper Acetylene, "^
by A. A. Noyes and C. W. Tucker.
" A Note on Some of the Requirements for a Sanitary Milk-Sup-
ply," by W. T. Sedgwick.
The Chairman introduced Captain John Bigelow, Jr., loth United
States Cavalry, Professor of Military Science at the Institute, who
read a paper on " Military Education." He said that from the point
of view of the soldier, a man consists of three parts — physique, mo-
rale, and intellect. The various qualities of each of these parts should
be developed by a military education. He gave an outline of the
course of instruction at West Point, and pointed out how far this
meets the requirements of a complete military education. Post in-
struction and service schools were then spoken of as valuable features
of the American system. The paper closed with an argument for
special schools for staff officers where they could receive instruction
of a university grade.
A discussion followed, after which a vote of thanks was extended
to the speaker for his valuable paper, and the Society adjourned.
Thursday, May 27, 1897.
The 50 1 St meeting of the Society of Arts was held this day at
8 P.M., Professor Richards in the chair.
The record of the previous meeting was read and approved.
By unanimous consent the other business of the evening was post-
poned until after the reading of the papers.
The following papers were presented by title :
** Velocity of Reaction between Ferrous Chloride, Potassium Chlo-
rate, and Hydrochloric Acid," by A. A. Noyes and R. S. Wason.
" Some Fundamental Propositions Relating to the Design of
Frameworks, a Study of Primary Stress in Indeterminate Frame-
works, and Demonstration of the Economic Superiority of Statically
Determined Frameworks," by Frank H. Cilley.
Proceedings of the Society of Arts. 281
"A Flavor-producing Micrococcus of Butter," by S. C. Keith, Jr.
Mr. Timothy W. Sprague was introduced and read a paper on
"Application of Electricity to Mines," in which he gave a history of
the progress made in employing electricity in various mining opera-
tions, such as hauling, hoisting, drilling, coal cutting, and pumping.
He closed with some remarks on the electrical transmission of power
to mines.
A discussion followed, after which it was voted to extend to the
speaker the thanks of the Society.
The unfinished business from the Annual Meeting was then taken
up. The following report was presented by the Executive Committee r
Annual Report of the Executive Committee.
With the close of this thirty-fifth year of its existence the Society of Arts will have
passed its five hundredth meeting. During the present year there will have been held four-
teen meetings, at which fifteen papers will have been read. One meeting was a special one
held jointly with the Boston Society of Civil Engineers to listen to a paper on " The Tampico
Harbor Works," by the eminent engineer, Mr. E. L. Corthell. Three notable papers have
been presented showing the summer work of the Institute. One of these was by Professor
Homer, on the " Summer School of Architecture in Europe." The other two were by Profes-
sors Burton and Barton, on the " Scientific Work of the Boston Party on the Sixth Peary
Expedition to Greenland." All three of these papers will be published in the current volume
of the Technology Quarterly, and, in addition to these, an exceptionally valuable article
on the "Pendulum and Magnetic Observations** has been contributed by Mr. Putnam, a
member of the Boston party. Another paper that deserves special mention, both because
of its intrinsic value and because it embodied the results of original work done by a mem-
ber of the Society, and largely in the laboratories of the Institute, is the paper read by Dr.
Williams on " Some Uses of the Rontgen Rays.*'
The endeavor has been made, as far as possible, to publish the papers presented before
the Society in the Technology Quarterly, but some papers have been crowded out or
have been much delayed owing to lack of space. As it is, the size of the last two numbers
of the Quarterly has been much greater than the finances of the Society will warrant, and
future numbers will have to be smaller, even if that necessitates the omission of valuable
contributions. The " Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories ** are regarded
as an especially valuable feature of the Quarterly, and, although a source of very consid-
erable expense, they will continue to be published as presented.
The most momentous event in the history of the Society during the year is the death of
President Walker, which has been felt more keenly, perhaps, by the members of the Execu-
tive Committee than by the other members of the Society, for their duties brought them into-
closer personal relations with him, and they have been better able to observe the thoughtful
interest and wide knowledge of affairs that General Walker brought to the aid of the Com-
mittee in its efforts to guide the course of the Society.
At the time of the previous Annual Meeting the Society had 67 Life Members. Eight of
these have died during the year, leaving 59 as the present number. The number of Associ-
ate Members a year ago was 289; 3 have died and 11 have resigned. This loss has been
more than offset by the election of 35 new members, making the present number of Asso*
ciate Members 3x0. i
282 Proceedings of the Society of Arts,
The Life Members who have died during the year are Thomas T. Bouv^, George O. Car-
penter, William O. Grover, Henry D. Hyde, G. F. H. Markoe, O. W. Peabody, John Rug-
gles, and George W. Wales; the Associate Members, are Henry A. Craigin, James H. Stan-
wood, and Francis A. Walker.
Respectfully submitted,
George W. Blodgett,
Percival LX)WELL,
Robert P. Bigelow,
For the Executive Committee.
The election of officers being next in order, ballots were cast and
the candidates for the Executive Committee presented at the previous
meeting were declared duly elected. Mr. Blodgett reported that the
Executive Committee had nominated Dr. Robert P. Bigelow for Secre-
tary for the ensuing year. The Society proceeded to ballot for Secre-
tary, and Dr. Bigelow was duly elected.
Mr. Elisha Lee, of Port of Spain, Trinidad, was elected an Asso-
ciate Member. It was then voted to adjourn.
Robert P. Bigelow, Secretary.
Some Data on the Heating Error in Resistance Coils, 283
SOME DATA ON THE HEATING ERROR IN RESIST-
ANCE COILS.
By frank a. laws, S.B.
Received January 27, 1897.
In spite of the fact that Wheatstone bridges and resistance boxes
of precision are in common use in our laboratories, there seems to be
a lack of reliable data as to the heating error that is likely to occur
under the ordinary conditions of use ; and I am not familiar with data
which will allow one to form a just estimate of the error likely to
occur when a coil of a given resistance and of a specified size of
German silver wire, wound on a wooden bobbin and inclosed in the
neighborhood of other coils in the ordinary closed box, is subjected to
a specified current for a stated time.
It was with a view to supplying some of the important data men-
tioned above that the following experiments were undertaken. They
were performed under my direction at the Rogers Laboratory of Phys-
ics, by Mr. K. A. Pauly, in connection with his thesis during the spring
of 1896.
The box tested was a Wheatstone bridge, the coils of which were
wound with double silk-covered German silver wire of the sizes recom-
mended by Professor Holman in his Physical Laboratory Notes ; Part
II J Electrical Measurements.
The coils were wound on wooden bobbins 7. 5 cm. long ; the diam-
eter of the core was i .0 cm. They were supported in the box in the
usual manner by brass rods 0.5 cm. in diameter. The coils were
paraffined by immersion in hot wax under the bell jar of an aspirator,
and were well drained so that there was no excess adhering to the
outside. The inside dimensions of the closed box containing the coils
were 36.5 x 20. x 13.5 cm. For the determination of the increase of
resistance a special Wheatstone bridge was arranged as indicated in
the sketch, where it is shown without the complications of the other
necessary connections.
284
Frank A, Laws.
Nominally equal resistances were unplugged in Br and X, and
an exact balance obtained by the slide wire. If the extension coils,
which are of equal value, be properly proportioned to the resistance of
the slide wire, one turn may be
e AT tmiiON Coai,
$Liuyi/me..
made to represent a given per-
centage change in X^ in our
experiments -j^ per cent. The
boxes X and Br, as well as the
extension coils, were all placed
in a large constant temperature
tank. The galvanometer circuit
was kept closed, and that of the
battery made and broken by the
•special switch shown in the accompanying sketch (Figure 2), the clos-
ing of which, besides making the battery connection, transferred the
coil under test from the heating circuit to the bridge without loss
of time. The action of the switch is evident from the drawing and
the diagram of the entire apparatus (Figure 3). The mercury cups
Fig. I.
19
TTEnr
TTiKt
BHIS&B
n
\
U
-J
Fig. 2.
(well amalgamated) forming the bridge connections were placed on rub-
ber cusliions, so that a good contact would be obtained and no irreg-
ularity introduced in consequence of variations of contact resistance.
When the low resistance coils were under test, it was found that
the heating of the coil introduced thermo-electric disturbances, in
some cases of suiflScient magnitude to send the spot of light off the
Some Data on the Heating Error in Resistance Coils. 285
scale. This was remedied by compensation, by an opposing P. D. in
the galvanometer circuit. The effect increased as the heating pro-
gressed, so that at every reading it was necessary to adjust this P. D.
anew, but by a little practice the observer was able to anticipate the
change, so that this adjustment was a matter of only a few seconds.
The heating currents were measured by Weston ammeters, and as
instruments of the proper range were not always obtainable, the bridge
under test was shunted with another, the ammeter being placed in
series with it and the heating current calculated by the law of shunts.
The accompanying sketch (Figure 3) shows the arrangement of the
entire apparatus.
At E, F, R are seen the resistances for controlling the heating
currents which were derived from the iio-v. lighting circuit of the
laboratory. C is the compensation arrangement before mentioned ;
R S the reversing switch in the circuit ; 5 the galvanometer shunt ;
S IV the slide wire which is wound on a cylinder ; K the combined
coil, changing switch and battery key mentioned above ; .^j and R^ the
extension coils. S' is the shunt used in connection with ammeter A'
for measuring the heating current when ammeter A in direct circuit is
286 Frank A, Laws.
not available. For the purpose S^ is the plug for cutting out S and
A^ when the coil is being measured. B is the bridge under test, and
^3 the resistance box forming the fourth side of the special bridge.
The galvanometer used was a 7-ohm Thomson, having a very carefully
prepared astatic suspended system. The balancing could be effected
to within y^^^j^ of a per cent, except in the case of the coils of very
high resistance where the precision was considerably less.
The procedure during the tests was as follows : The coil to be
tested was allowed to remain at a constant temperature for a time
sufficient to allow the temperatures of its various parts to become
the same; a balance was then obtained and a reading of the slide
wire taken. A measured current was then sent through the coil,
and the balancing repeated every five minutes until the resistance
came to its permanent state for the particular heating current em-
ployed. The results of the experiments will now be given in the form
of plots, and for greater convenience the same scales of time, percent-
age change, and ultimate change are used throughout. The scale of
heating currents is varied to suit the case in hand. The plots of cur-
rent and ultimate change enable one to design a coil of a specified
resistance, to be made of the size of wire here used, which will carry
a given current indefinitely and not increase in resistance more than
an assigned percentage, provided the increase be less than ^^ of one
per cent.
To use these curves it is, of course, necessary to wind the coils of
the same diameter as those tested, and to vary the resistance by alter-
ing the length of the coil. The dimensions of the coils are only
approximate, as no attempt was made to wind them in layers ; this is
especially true of some of the smaller coils which were very loosely
wound.
I hope shortly to be able to furnish more complete data which will
avoid the necessity of winding the coils to a specified diameter. In
addition to the tests on the bridge coils, measurements were made on
one of the later forms of standard ohms as furnished by Elliot Broth-
ers, C. L., No. 205. The results of these tests are given in Plot XV.
Same Data on the Heating Error in Resistance Coils. 287
Plot I.
tip
'
Ave
.4f ,«-
A»9
-^
<C^
V
k
./to
^
liSjt^"
/
u
• ^•f
./40
/
<^
,^
f^
./vo
i
y
r'^
J^
«
^
^
./lO
/
1
¥
./»•
K
,^
k
h
.^♦r
.ffip
/^
V
<4
4
,•4*
^'
J
^
«
.♦/«
^
Jj:^ — ■
.0tC
^^
^' '
.5«r
>^> ^^
K
«<•
f^^r-t
JL-I
£— »
« *
r_-
./•J
H£ArmfC Ci/nhtNTS.
One- ohm coil in rheostat
No. 18 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of core i .0 cm. ; same for all coils.
One layer + of wire.
Resistance per linear centimeter 0.15 ohm.
Plot II.
He^
'/A/6
Jt,C
Cyn.1
KMT
.110
/
.m-
■
.ilQ
^
J
--r^
Ife
m
,^
t^
^^
1 1
7/f
<
.g%»
.
J
I
/
^.i'*''
%•
k
^
<
•^
K
.04«
«/1
/y
^
/
'^'^
//
y(^
^
/
^Vft
5
.•«f/ 1
..k:
^^
\P
r^
'0^
tf
7«
ir
10 3
t
M
^f
r> rr
2 J ;y 5*^.7
•t .t
One- ohm coil in balance arm.
Composed of two 2*ohm coils in parallel.
No. 16 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coils 2.3 centimeters.
Resistance of each coil per linear centimeter 0.33 ohm.
288
Frank A, Laws.
^xjort III.
.a»«-^
t
^
wrA
df^
/
c^H,/ir
./^
.14^-
^
$
.-^
/
./♦•_
/
r
/
1
./t«-
1^
/
/
s
f
1
i_
.M9i
r^**^"/
^
9
V
/
5:
4
.•4#-|
/
/L
JM-
.•%•-
y
/
^-^
#1^ ^
1/
4
i
i
r-
r/«
F.
r^'f
^ $• t
r 1
• I
f 9
• J
r t* «
r
y J J * i- A
Two-ohm coil.
No. i8 B. & S. ^age German silver wire.
Diameter of coil 1.5 centimeters.
Resbtance per linear centimeter 0.29 ohm.
Plot IV.
tw
I
/
rA"
y/«^
,««''
>
^
y
7^
.**•
,/
^
/
t^c
/
/
/
/h4>
/
/
/
.(to
< i
/
/
X
VI
J 10
In /
« /
fc*/
^
'
.if«y
1
«u
1
^
^ '
•i«?
^
I<i0
_r-^ '
'vie
>
<^
J
r
/
/^
/
.2/^
-**• / y
JL.-1
^
"^
r^
1^
CIO
/
/
^
^
it
T/M
If
jr
V«
♦r
.Off
w
.f JZ ^
Mm Arm c CuAM^^rs
Five-ohm coil.
No. 18 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coil 2.2 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 0.69 ohm.
Some Data on the Heating Error in Resistance Coils.
Plot V.
ifSATPfitC
289
.«fc«
J
r^mM^Ai'tL \ 1
r*"^"^
'■'"^
.14/«
•
la?..
y
,1U
_>
4^
J"
/
/
./1i
/
/
rl#f
Hi
lk»
•
/
i^
^
■
' '
jHa
J
[^
■
Jl»
/
7
1
i
4/
/
/
./«'t
^
^
-I— T "^
4
>%•
/
y
^
,^
/
4
.•««
/
/
^
.//J
/
"
—
I^^f
^
t-^
f
/#
l€
1$
TtA
If
tr
ir
v«
H€
«
• y .2 .J
He ATS NO. CyRHSAlTt.
Ten*ohm coils.
No. 30 B. & S. gsigc German silver wire.
Diameter of coU 2. i centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 1.3 ohms.
Points marked -|- on the ultimate change curve are from the coil in the baUance ann.
Plot VI.
.110
/frATiNd
CunkeAfry
;
.%••
/
!%•
Hi
/
/
/«^
^
./io
5
^
-7^
/v«
<
>
^
^^
7
./!•
/
1
J**
V
9
0U
/
1
:
•
/«/
^
.di»
^
y
02 •
/
r^ —
/
'
L
*
.0frO
^i
If
!• If
u
9r
v*
♦r
ftf
i^r.
Twenty-ohm coil.
No. 22 h. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter o£ coil i .9 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 2.7 ohms.
290
Frank A. Laws.
Plot VII.
a
K
•4
.100
i
1 1
'■ 1
1
1
J\t
%
1
1
"^
h"
yo**-
JM
i
j
^
Jio
«
/
-/
JJO
i
•H ^
/
/
.up
V
J
— '
•
f
_^
' ,.«>*
.0\0
I
J
^
1
,^9
/
t
-^
'^
rOkf
A
f
.0X0
r
f
/O
'f
«•
E.
10
;f._
y«
♦r
r«
rr
A^#>i r/^« CifM M€A/ r f
Fifty-ohm coil.
No. 24 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coil 2 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 7.1 ohms.
Plot VIII.
•
.JV«
/
1 HeAimt
CuAILMMll.
r-
•1*1
.
.310
.A'
.cf»
tlos.
y
^
7
J^6
/
/
/
./40
I* /
/
/
r
Ji9
/
710
/
/
Vl
./*«
to
/
' — '
^
.0(7
c
^
/_,^>-^
5
.oi«
V ■
^
7
^
.PU
/
)r-
/
1
/
/i
.ou
k
' "
^
If /.
/r
io
If
Vtf
♦r
f»
^^.
HgATiNQ. Ci/nngNrs
.yoo
One hundred ohm coil.
No. 26 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coil 1.8 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 13 ohms.
Some Data on the Heating Error in Resistance Coils,
Plot IX.
291
HSATINC
9
<4
Two hundred ohm coil.
No. 28 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coU 1.6 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 27 ohms.
Plot X.
.U9
ffe
ATffV
t
.A^«
J
>
cv
IKBM
.02ti
rf
A.
1
./t»
*
/
.fSif
*
V*
^
7
•
JIO
?
«
/
/
ffV
=/
{
/
.oT#
r
J
r ,
V .0/*^
'
.04«
/
y
/
•••/f
/
/
PK»
<
n
/*
u
7"/^
7«
J*"
^#
Hf
f$
*-^
Five hundred ohm coil.
No. 50 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coil 1.8 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 67 ohms.
292
Frank A, Laws,
TU>T XI.
•^w
\
1
1
1
l^/ftAT^M^ 1 1
f _1 —^
— -
OXK\
T
.1H9
y
n
f-^
.11*
/
/
\
,U9
/
\
-r^
^ /
.«10
«
.IM
1/
1
\
-^
-^
s
•
,/•»•
j
ri]
no
/
/
1
In.
J99
tu /
a/
/
—
^
e^
.fiUL_
/^
/
'
»0^
V
-i
,0,.'
/
/
,010
r
J
It
ft
to
Xf
r/Af
%0
t#
♦r
«
^f
•«/ .«& .0}
One thousand ohm coil.
No. 32 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coil 1.7 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 134 ohms.
Plot XII.
.1^0
./M
tf
*fc7^
J
,0/^
«w
" '
F7
r
<r
t»^^
jvf
1
•/
Ai**
'^
J
du
III
^k
r
■
,/••
ii
/^
y
.o//t
.of*
1^
r
U
-^
'5
/
*
^*<<
• •
J,
.•09
r ■
?
,A l^
, — ^
s
/^
>j
7
)
'■ f
y
/i
ft
.0«t
3
•"•1 ^
— ^ ^
,
ir /#
i€
LO
r/
JO
ir
Y*
vr
«
rr
.HBArif^Q-cvnKeNT
Two thousand ohm coil.
No. 32 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coil 2.1 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 273 ohms.
Some Data on the Heating Error in Resistance Coils. 293
Plot XII I.
Five thousand ohm coil.
No. 34 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coil 2.1 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 694 ohms.
Plot XIV.
jcp
K
•
f
»
,oU
<
^^
-— ^"^
.
^
►
.04*
u
0
J
^
r-^
•
.•V0
5
^
4
i
•
^
r
/«
f .
!•
5
9*
ir
Vi
Vf
ft-
<r
«•
Ten thousand ohm coil.
No. 34 B. & S. gage German silver wire.
Diameter of coil 2.7 centimeters.
Resistance per linear centimeter 1330 ohms.
Plot XV.
J'
J ^ S JL .'^ %
u a
\
Standard Ohm C. L., No. 205.
(Coil in flattened receptacle, tested in cooling bath.)
Rogers Laboratory of Physics,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
January^ i8gy.
294 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
RESULTS OF TESTS MADE IN THE ENGINEERING
LABORATORIES,
VII.
RecetTcd May ao, 1897.
Applied Mechanics.
Timber Trusses.
Tests of the Strength of Ten Triangular Trusses of Yel-
low Pine.
The rafters, and the tie of one (No. 494) of the trusses were each
8" X 10" in section, while the rafters and ties of the other nine were
each about 6" x 8" in section. These nine trusses may be classified,
according to the style of framing joint used, into three series, A, B,
and C.
Series A consisted of two trusses (Nos. 519 and 533), the inclina-
tion of the rafters to the tie being 30° in each.
Series B consisted of three trusses (Nos. 520, 522, and 535), the
inclination of the rafters to the tie being 45° in No. 522, and 30° in
each of the others.
Series C consisted of four trusses (Nos. 517, 518, 523, and 524),
the inclination of the rafters to the tie being 30° in Nos. 517 and 518,
and 45° in Nos. 523 and 524.
The detailed dimensions and the style of each joint are shown in
the accompanying cuts, and the manner of failure in each case is
shown in the photographs of the fractures. In every case the load
was applied at the top of the truss, and, except in No. 535, the sup-
ports were directly below the intersections of the center lines of the
rafters with the center line of the tie.
Timber Trusses,
295
Inasmuch as the results of these tests do not furnish sufficient
data to determine completely the distribution of the stresses in the
different members, and as more tests are needed to show even the line
of direction of the stress in each rafter, which is, probably, not coinci-
dent with the center line of each rafter, it seemed best to figure at
present only a few of the stresses, stating the assumptions on which
this figuring is based, and bearing in mind that these assumptions may
be proved true or false by future experiments.
There are given in each case the total breaking load, the manner
of failure, the load causing the second failure (for, in all cases, after
certain portions had given away, certain other fastenings came into
action), the manner of the second failure ; and, in most cases, the
shearing resistance per square inch of the timber under the first
breaking load (the maximum in the majority of cases). This shearing
resistance is figured on the assumptions, i, that the resultant of the
stress in each rafter acts along the center line of the rafter; 2, that
the shearing resistance is uniformly distributed over the area sheared ;
and 3, that the additional fastenings (bolts or straps) did not act until
the shearing resistance had been overcome.
Whatever may be shown to be true by future experiments in re-
gard to the first and second assumptions, the behavior of the trusses
under test would seem to show that the third is either true in all cases,
or at least in most cases.
YELLOW PINE TRUSS, No. 494. Figures 1-4.
r/fUSS A/0. '494
AIL BOLTS /LVA
Fig. I.
2g6 Results of Tists Made in the Enginccnng I.aboratxrics.
At a load iif 68,000 pounds the iron began to draw out of the
wood at the point marked a.
Tlic loading was continued till a maximum was reached at 106,000
pounds.
For some time before complete failure the bolts had been shear-
ing through the tie; finally the bolt marked {b) broke by tension and
bending.
Maiinium compressigii ]>er square inch in rafters 1,3C0 lbs.
Maximum tension per square inch in lie 1,150 lbs.
Timber Trusses.
298 ResNlts of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Timber Trusses.
299
HARD PINE TRUSS, No. 519. Series A. Figures 5 and 6.
r/H/ss Na s/s.
Fig. 5.
In this test downward deflections of the tie were noted for each
5,000 pounds increase of load.
Load.
Deflection.
• • • •
Load.
Defleciioii.
5.000
.35.000
• • • *
10,000
.024''
40.000
.021"
15,000
.019"
45,000
.021"
20,000
.016"
50.0C0
.027"
25,000
.016"
55,000
.033"
30,000
.017"
60,000
.035"
35,000
.018"
65,000
1
1
.045"
The maximum load was 80,000 lbs.
Maximum compression per square inch in rafters 1,600 lbs.
Maximum tension per square inch in tie 1,390 lbs.
The truss failed by the crushing of the foot of the rafter where it
bore against the vertical lip of the iron shoe, and by the breaking of
the through bolts. The cut does not show the manner of failure very
clearly.
300 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Timber Trusses.
HARD PINE TRUSS, No. 533.
This truss is practically the same as that shown by the cut of
No. 519. The total length of the bottom tie is |" greater than in 519,
and the distance between the supports is i" less than in 519. The
supports were placed at the intersection of the center lines through
the members.
load on iruss was 82,900 Iba.
ipression per square inch in rafters 1,730 lbs.
ion per square inch in lie 1,500 lbs.
302 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Timber Trusses.
HARD PINE TRUSS, No. 510. Series t
T^iUSS NO- J20
At a load of 48,400 pouiKls the tic sheared at D.
At a load of 49,255 ]>ouncis the tie sheared at E.
At a load of 53,625 jwiinds the inner bolt at jVcnd broke. The
outer bolt at this end gave way at a load of 47,085 jwiinds on the
truss.
"''iri"rh"T""'"
Maximum leiision pe
Neglecting boUa, Ihe
iiaximum shear [lar squar
inch a
t end D ,
470 lbs.
Negleelirg bolU. the
maxinium shear jjcr squar
e inch a
t end li .
+S0 lbs.
304 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering; Laboratories.
Timber Trusses,
3o6 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
HARD PINE TRUSS NO. 522. Series B. Figures 12-15.
^7H/SS A/QyS22
iBOLT
'2i\ M^
Fig. 12.
At a load of 102,300 pounds the tie sheared at JFend. The tie
then cracked by tension at this end, where the section was reduced by
the recess made to take iron washer.
At 105,800 the east end of the tie sheared, and the bolt at this
end gave way.
Maximum compression per square inch in rafters 1,560 lbs.
Maximum tension per square inch in tie 1,100 lbs.
Neglecting bolts, shearing force per square inch at time tie sheared
at W end 900 lbs.
Neglecting bolts, shearing force i)er square inch at time tie sheared
at ^ end 930 lbs.
Timber Trusses.
3o8 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Timber Trusses.
3IO Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
HARD PINE TRUSS No. 535. Series B. Figures 16 and 17.
Fig. iC.
At a load of 47,900 pounds tie sheared at end marked D,
At 56,600 pounds both bolts at this end gave way.
Maximum compression per square inch in rafters 1,180 lbs.
Maximum tension per square inch in tie 1,020 lbs.
Neglecting bolts, maximum shear per square inch at D at time of
shear 480 lbs.
It will be noticed that the supports were not at the intersection of
the center lines of the members.
Timber Trusses.
312 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
ty
HARD PINE TRUSS, No. 517. Series C. F'igures 18 and 19.
r/K/ss NO ^/7
Kicj. 18.
At a load of 56,700 pounds tic sheared at E end, causing load to
drop off considerably. The loadin<;- was continued till at 37,650
pounds the strap at the E end gave way at both corners.
MaximuiTi compression per scjuarc inch \\\ rafters 1,180 lbs.
Maximum tension per square inch in tie 1,040 Ihs.
Neglecting strap, maximum shear per square inch in tie at time of
shear 570 Ihs.
Tintbcr Trusses.
3 1 4 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
HARD PINE TRUSS. No. 518. Sektes C. Figure
l"liis truss was an exact <Ui])licate of No. 517.
At a load of 55.800 pmnicis tlio tic sheared at E end, as in Nii. 517.
The loading was continued after this shear, but di<I not a_i;ain reach
55,800 pounds. At 49,300 the strap at the end which had sheared
gave way at one corner.
Timber Trusses,
315
HARD PINE TRUSS. No. 523. Serifs C. Figures 21-24.
TRUSS Na ^zs.
Fig. 21.
At a load of 93,600 pounds tic sheared at C. After the shear,
continued loading till the strap at this end gave way at 79,200 pounds.
Maximum compression per square inch in rafters 1,380 lbs.
Maximi m tensio p. t square inch in tie 900 lbs.
Negleiting strap ma imuni shear per .square inch in lie at time of
shearing 820 lbs.
3l6 Results of Tests Made itt the Engineering Laboralorifs
Timber Trusses.
31 8 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Timber Trusses.
-•\KV. TKISS. Nu. 52J.
Vu:. 25.
This truss was uxactly tlic sanic as truss No. 523. At a load of
105,900 pounds tic sheared at W end. After shear, continued load-
ing till strap at JFeiid gave way at 87,100 pounds.
Maximum compression ;>er square inch in rafters 1,560 lbs.
Maxiroum tension per square inch in lie 1,100 lbs.
Maximum shear per square inch in tic at time of shear 930 lbs.
320 Results of Tesls Made in the EngiHcering ^Laboratories.
Ti7nber Headers. 321
Tests of Hard Pine Timber Headers.
The object of this investigation was to find the strength of timber
headers loaded through tail-beams framed into the headers by tusk and
tenon joints.
As the test was to be one of the headers and not of the tail-beams,
these were made quite short. In some of the tests the headers were
framed to the trimmers by a double tenon, and held by a joint bolt ;
in others the headers were held by a stirrup iron and joint bolt.
I beams were used to distribute the load equally between the tail-
beams. The upward pull on the top I beam was taken by the weigh-
ing system of the testing machine. By screwing up the jacks on
which the trimmers rested, loads were applied. The tusk and tenon
joints were all the same as those .shown by Figure 2.ja.
Cuts of Nos. 482, 483, 484, 490, and 500 show the arrangement by
means of which the loads were distributed between the tail-beams.
323 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
HARD I'INE FRAMED HEADERS, No. 482. Figures 27 and 28.
Size of header 6" x 12", 6'-%" long. Number of tail-beams,
(4) 16" on centers.
At a load of 30,380 pounds the north header gave way, starting at
the lower tenon at the trimmer on east side (see Fig. 28).
H€ADCa A/O. '4as.
<--¥--=^,
<-4
Timber Headers.
324 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
HARD PINE FRAMED HEADERS, No. 483. Figure 29.
The frame of this header was the same as No. 482, with broken
north header and west tail-beam replaced by sound sticks. At 40,380
the north header gave way, failing as in the previous joint.
Timber Headers.
HARD PINK FRAMED HEADER, No. 48^. FJgar
Five tail-beams 16" centers used in this case. Header 6" x 12",
-o" long. Failed at south header at load of 29,740 pounds.
326 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
HARD PINE FRAMED HEADERS, No. 485. Fjgur
This was an exact duplicate of No. 484. Failed at north header
at a load of 31,300 pounds on scales, making, including the weights of
the I beams used for loading, 32,090 pounds.
Timber Headers.
I!ARI> PINE FRAMED HEADERS. No. 4S6. Flgur
Same general frame as No. 483, with north header of 483 replaced
by sound stick. At 33,500 pounds on scales or 33,850 on tail-beams,
the north header gave way.
328 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
HARD PINE TIMBER HEADERS, No. 487. Figure 33.
HL'ad^rs were 6" x 12" 9' — 4" long. Thc-rt; wcru six tail-beams
spaced 16" on centers. The load was distributed by an arrangement
of the I beams similar to that shown in tiie cut of No. 493.
At a load of 37,220 pounds, the south header failed throughout its
entire length.
Timber Headers.
HARD PINE TIMBER HEADERS, No. 490. Figures 34 and 35.
Headers were 6" x 12", 10' -8" long. There were seven tail-
beams spaced 16" centers. At 27,810 pounds the north header failed,
followed almost immediately by the south header.
33° Resuils of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Timber Headers.
HARD PINE TIMBER HEADERS, No. 492. Figures zdmAyj
Headers Nos. 492, 493, and 500 were held to the trimmers by
stirrup irons instead of by double tenons and joint bolts. Header
No. 492 was of the same general dimensions as Nos, 483 and 486.
The headers were 6" x 12", 6' -8" long.
There were four tail-beams 16" on centers. At 25,590 pounds the
south header failed, soon followed by the north header.
332 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Timber Headers.
HARD PINE TtMllER HEADERS, No. i
Same general dimensions as No. 487. Header 6" x 12", g' - 4"
long, held to trimmer by stirrup irons. At a load of 26,020 pounds,
the north header failed completely.
334 Results of Tests Made in ike Engineering Laboratories.
HARD PINE TIMBER HEADERS, No. soa Fig. 39.
Fig. 39. Header i\o. 500.
Same general dimensions as Nos. 484 and 485. Headers were
6" X 12", 8'-o" long, held to trimmers by stirrup irons. Five tail,
beams spaced 16" on centers. Maximum load at failure, 32,740
pounds. Failed at the north header as shown by the cut.
Cast Iron Water Pipe.
335
CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
Summary of Tests.
•
aximam outside fiber
stress calculated from
maximum load, assum-
ing each half of pipe
as a beam fixed at the
ends.
•
1
1
•
i
e
J
RlMAKKS.
■J
Ji
•
a
o
"3
5
1
r
f
•
55
w
•<
<
<
s
a
Ids.
Ins.
Ins.
Ins.
Lbs.
Lbs. per sq. in.
1
lO
9.97
40
•S4
19,000
13,800
Broke at A and A'.
a
13
11.96
43
.63
25.000
14,600
Broke at A and A'.
3
lO
a98
4»
.54
33,500
«4.5<»o
( Sp4got end.
\ Broke at A'.
4
48
48.14
29
1. 14
18,100
17,800
Break started at A.
S
13
I3.03
4a*
.61
34,300
14,600
( Spigot end.
1 Break sUrted at A'.
6
13
11.96
36I
.69
33,500
17,900
( Spigot end.
\ Broke at A.
7
10
9-93
36I
.64
41,000
31,600
( Spigot end.
(Broke at A'.
8
16
16.00
3«
■79
35,000
19,600
Broke at A.
9
16
16.06
*1
35*
.80
35.700
19,700
Broke at A'.
lO
16
1606
•75
35.300
38,500
32,300
Broke at A'.
II
30
19.88
37
.83
17,800
18,300
Broke at A.
la
30
19.91
36
:g
38,100
Broke at A'.
>3
30
19.79
36J
,
40,000
36,300
Broke at A'.
»4
24
33.84
39
■
.90
33.800
10,600
18,300
Broke at A'.
»$
M
a3-9S
4»
■
.87
30,700
Broke at A.
i6
a4
a3.89
40
■
.90
33.600
10,300
18,700
Broke at A.
«7
30
39.84
34
■
1.15
36,300
Broke at A,
i8
6
6.10
31
i
:??
26,500
21.800
Broke at A. . .
«9
8
7.96
30
37,700
26,000
Broke at A.
20
6
6.07
31
.48
30,500
30,300
Broke at A and B.
31
8
7-94
31
•59
37,000
35,800
33,700
Broke at A'.
33
6
6.08
32
.50
33,000
Broke at A'.
as
8
7.90
31
.63
30,100
32,600
Broke at A'.
•4
6
6.09
21
•49
37,000
36,000
Broke at A.
as
8
7 93
Ml
>59
31,900
16,300
Broke at A.
36
6
6.09
36I
•49
38,700
31,600
Spigot end.
Broke at A'.
a7
8
7.89
36I
.63
40,300
18,300
Spigot end.
Broke at B.
38
48
47-95
as
1.46
35,800
17,900
Spigot end.
Broke at A.
*9
36
36.05
34
1.07
34,300
17,300
Broke at A.
JO
48
48.(»
3>i
1*43
32,300
18,300
Spigot end.
Broke at A.
31
48
47.90
34
1.25
34,500
17,000
Spiflrot end.
Broke at A'.
In tests Nos. 1, 3, 3, 4, 5, 6, 38 the load was applied on a space of 15" in the middle of the length of the pipes.
In remaining tests the load was applied on the entire length of the specimens. In all of the tests the loads
were applied to the specimens through iron platforms. As these platforms were rigid, the load was applied along
an element.
336 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Fig. 4o. Diagrams of cast iron water pipe, transverse and longitudinal
SECTIONS. The arrows indicate the direction of pressure ; the letters A A\ B B',
etC| the diameters upon which the deflection was measured.
No. 4. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 14, 1897.
Thickness.
Insiob Diambtbr.
Length.
End No. I.
End No. t.
End No. 2.
A
1.20
19"
B
1. 12
AA'
48.06
48.13
C
1.19
D
i.og
BB'
48.19
48.19
A'
I.I3
•' • • ■ • • •
1. 16
c
X.I4
D'
X.II
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
o
5,000
10,000
15,000
18,100
AA'.
1.08
.87
.60
.26
End No. 1.
BB'.
I.OO
1.24
1.50
1.80
cc.
.98
I 01
1.03
1.06
DD'.
.97
I.OI
1.03
1.04
AA'.
.90
.67
•44
.09
Maximum load. Cracked along A' A'.
End No. 2.
BB'.
.96
1. 21
1.42
« 74
CC
.99
1.05
1.09
DD'.
.99
1.03
1.04
1.05
AVBRAGB DlFPBRBNCB.
— .220
— .250
—.345
BB'.
CC.
DD'.
• « ■ •
• • • -
• « • •
.245
.045
.040
•ass
.010
.015
.310
.035
.010
Size of pipe 48" Maximum outside fiber stress calculated
Average inside diameter 48.14" from maximum load, assuming each
Average length 29'' half of pipe as a beam fixed at the
Average thickness i>i4" ccds i7j8Qolbs.
REMARKS.
Spigot end.
Load applied on space of 15" along center of length.
Lip on End No. 2 about f" wide and i^ thick.
Nick at C End No. i. Length at nick 28". Length at A' A' 29".
Cast Iron Water Pipe,
337
No. 8. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March i8, 1897.
THICKNBSt.
1
InSIDB DlAMBTBlt.
LSNGTIf.
End No. I.
End No. 3.
A
B
A'
B'
•75
.87
.74
.81
i6.oo"
36"
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
DiFLECTioK Measurements.
Loads.
o
SfOoo
10,000
15,000
ao,ooo
35,000
30,000
35.000
End No. t.
AA'.
16.70
16.67
16.66
16.65
16.60
16.58
1655
Maximum load.
BB'.
16.68
16.71
16.73
16.76
16.79
16.81
16.83
End No. a.
AA'.
16.60
16.60
16.58
16.56
16.54
16.51
16.47
BB'.
17.14
17.13
1715
17.17
17.20
17.30
17.33
AVBKAGB DiFFBRBNCB.
AA'.
.015
.015
.015
.035
.025
.035
BB'.
.010
.020
.035
.030
.010
.025
Break started at A, End No. 1, cracked nearly whole length of pipe.
Second break started at A' A' and B'B' simultaneously.
Sixe of pipe 16"
Average inside diameter 16.00"
Avenge length 36"
Average tfaickneas .79"
Maximum outdde fiber stress calculated
from maximum load, assuming each
half of pipe is a beam fixed at the
ends 19,600 lbs.
REMARKS.
Load applied along whole length of specimen.
33* Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
No. 9. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 19, 1897.
A
B
A'
B'
Tkicknbss.
Eod No. I.
.79
•74
.87
Insiimi Diamstbx.
16.06
BB
B'B'
LSMGTH.
li*"
Dbflkction Measurements.
Loads.
o
$,000
10,000
iS,ooo
20,000
35,000
35i7«>
End No. i.
AA'.
16.74
16.71
16.69
z6.66
16.63
16.59
BB'.
16.84
16.86
16.90
169a
16.94
16.98
End No. a.
AA'.
16.49
16.47
16.4a
16.39
16.39
16.35
BB'.
16.41
16.45
16.46
16.50
16.51
16.55
AvBiAGB Dirmontcs.
AA'.
— .oas
—.035
— .030
—.015
—.040
BB'.
.030
.oas
.030
.015
.040
Mazimnm Load. Cracked the whole length at A' A' ; then broke at A A ; then broke at B'B';
then broke at BB.
Sixe of pipe 16" Mazimam outaide fiber streas calculated
Average inaide diameter 16.06" from maximum load, aaauming each
Average length 3S|" half of pipe aa a beam fixed at the
Average thickneaa .80" enda 19^700 Ibc
REMARKS.
Spigot end.
Load applied along whole length of apedmen.
Lip on End No. a about {" wide and i" thick.
Cast Iron Water Pipe.
339
No. la TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 20^ 1897.
A
B
A'
B'
TmacNSss.
End No. I.
•7«
•7*
•77
.81
End No. a.
■75
.74
AA'
BB'
Imsidb Diamstkr.
End No. I.
16.11
16.03
End No. a.
16.08
16.03
Lbngth.
3$*"
3S.300
Deflbction Measurements.
End No. i.
End No. a.
AVBKAGB DiPPBRSNCB.
Loads.
AA'.
BB'.
AA'.
BB'.
AA'.
BB'.
0
16.74
17.00
16.74
16.44
• • ■ •
5/»«>
16.73
17 oa
16.7a
16.48
—.015
.030
10,000
16.70
17.05
16.68
16.50
—.035
.oa5
15,000
1666
17.10
16.65
16.54
—.035
•045
ao,ooo
16.6a
17.13
i6.6a
16.56
—.03$
.oao
35,000
16.60
17.14
16.60
16.59
— .080
.oas
30,000
16.56
17.18
16.56
16.61
— .040
.030
Maximum load. Broke along A' A'; then broke along A A.
Sise of pipe 16"
ATerage inside diameter 16.06"
Arerage length 35I"
Average thiocneaa 75"
Maximum oatside fiber stiess calculated
from maximum load, assuming each
half of pipe as a boim fixed at the
ends aa,3oolbs.
REMARKS.
Load applied along whole length of specimen.
No. II. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 32, 1897.
A
B
A'
B'
Thicknbss.
End No. I,
.81
.83
.85
End No. a.
.76
.84
.84
.80
AA'
BB'
Insidb Diaubtbr.
End No. I.
End No. a.
19.89
19.86
19.86
19.89
AA
BB
AA'
BB'
Lbngth.
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
o
5,000
10,000
15,000
a8,5oo
t8,ooo
End No. 1.
AA'.
ao.aa
ao.ao
ao.17
ao.ia
Maximum load.
BB'.
ao.34
ao.38
ao.40
ao.45
End No. a.
AA'.
ao.40
ao.34
ao.a7
aai4
BB'.
ao.6:
ao,
ao.74
aa8i
1.63
.68
Avbragb Dippbrbncb.
AA'.
.040
.050
•090
BB'.
•045
.040
.060
Broke at AA: then broke at A' A'.
Broke at B'B' and BB.
Sxut of pipe ao"
Arerage inside diameter 19.88"
Arerage length 37"
Average thidcaess 8a"
Maximum outside fiber stress calculated
from maximum load, aasuminx each
half of pipe as a beam fixed at the
ends i7,8oolbB.
REMARKS.
Load applied along whole length of specimen.
340 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
No. 12. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 23, 1897.
A
B
A'
B'
Thicknbss.
End No. X.
End No. 2.
x.oo
.96
•93
97
I.OI
■94
.90
.90
AA'
BB'
Insiob Diambtbk.
End No. I.
19.91
19. S8
End No. a.
19.95
19.93
AA
BB
A'A'
B'B'
Lkngtk.
36
35
f
Deflection Measurements.
LOAZ>S.
o
5,000
10,000
15,000
aOfOoo
38,100
End No. i.
AA'.
20.13
20.10
20.06
20.03
20.00
BB'.
20.57
20.58
20.63
20.65
20.67
End No. 3.
AA'.
30.2O
30.18
30.14
30. 13
30.09
BB'.
30.54
30.57
30.59
20.61
30.63
AVSKACS DiFFSSBNCB.
AA'.
—.035
— .040
— .025
—.030
BB'.
.030
.030
.025
.020
Maximum load. Broke on A'A'. Second break on AA and BB.
Size of pipe 20'' Maidniuni outside fiber stress caJculated
Average insUe diameter i9'9i" from maucimum load, assuming each
Average length 36" half of pipe as a beam fixed at the
Average thickneu .95" ends iSyjoolbs.
REMARKS.
Load applied along whole length of specimen.
No. 13. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 24, 1897.
A
B
A'
B'
Thicicnbss.
End No. I.
.81
.8x
.85
.80
End No. 2.
.83
.76
•73
.78
AA'
BB',
Insidb Diambtsk.
End No. I.
"9-75
19.80
End No. 2.
19.80
19.80
AA .
BK .
A'A' .
B'B' .
Lbmgtr.
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
o
5.«»
10,000
15,000
20,000
40,000
26,800
End No. i.
AA'.
20.88
20.84
20.79
20.76
2a 72
Maximum load.
BB'.
30.5
30.5:
30.61
20.65
20.69
End No. a.
AA'.
3a23
ao.3o
30.16
30. 13
30.09
BB'.
«>75
30.76
30.80
30^83
30.87
AVBRAGB DtPrBKBNCB.
AA'.
.035
.045
.035
.03s
BB*.
.030
.035
.035
.040
Broke at A'A' ; next broke at AA.
Broke at BB.
Size of pipe 3o" Maximum outside fiber stress calculated
Average inside diameter 19-79" from maximum load, assuming each
Average length 36]" half of pipe as a beam fiixed at the
Average thickness 80" ends a6,3oolba.
REMARKS.
Load applied along whole length of spedmen.
Cast Iron Water Pipe.
341
33.800
20y000
No. 14. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 25, 1897.
Thickness.
InSIDB DlAMBTBK.
T.BWr^TU
End No. I. End No. 2.
End No. 1. End No. 2.
A
B
A'
B'
.87
•84
•99
%
•93
•93
mm^^ ....
BB ....
23.92
23.78
23.84
23.81
^m^* ■ • • •
oH » • • •
A A • • • •
B B • « • •
40"
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
End No. i.
End No. a.
AVRRAGB DlFFSRRNCS.
AA'.
BB'.
AA'.
BB'.
AV.
BB'.
0
5.000
10.000
15,000
2494
24.93
24.90
24.86
24.52
24.54
24-57
24.62
24.87
24.83
24.76
24.69
24.72
24.78
24.83
24.89
— .025
—.050
—.055
• • • •
.040
.040
.055
Maximum load. Broke on A' A' ; next broke on A A.
Broke on BB and B'b'.
Size of pipe ....
Averase inside diameter
Average length . . .
Arenge tbidcnesa . .
24"
Z9\
Maximum outside fiber stress calculated
from maximum load, assaming each
half of pipe as a beam fixed at the
.90 ' ends 19,600 Ibe.
REMARKS.
Load applied along whole length of specimen.
'I
No. 15. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 26. 1897.
A
B
A'
B'
Tmicknsss.
End No. I.
.84
.84
.94
.92
End No. 2.
.83
.84
.86
.88
AA'
BB'
Insidb Diambtbr.
End No. I.
23.84
23-95
End No. 2.
23.98
24.02
AA
BB
A'A'
B'B'
• • • •
Lbngth.
j:f
:■■»"
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
o
5,000
10,000
15.000
20,000
30,700
28,400
20,800
End No. i.
AA'.
24.74
24.71
24.67
24.63
24.57
Maximum load.
BB'.
24.69
24.72
24.76
24.81
24.87
End No. 2.
AA'.
24.63
24.56
24.50
24.43
2435
BB'.
24.58
24-64
24-70
24.76
24.84
Avbragb Diffbrbncb.
AA\
—.050
— .050
—.055
— .070
BB'.
.045
.050
.055
.070
Broke at AA, beginning at End No. i.
BrY>ke at A'A'.
Broke at BB and B'B'.
Size of pipe 24" Maximum outside fiber stress calculated
Average inside diameter 23.95" from maximum load, assuming each
Average leneth 4i|" half of pipe as a beam fixed at the
Average thickness . .^ .87" ends i8,2oolbt.
REMARKS.
Load applied along i^ole length of specimen.
342 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Na Id TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 29, 1897.
A
B
A'
B'
THicKinas.
End No. I.
.93
•94
End No. a.
.87
.84
%
AA'
BB'
Insidb DiAftonm.
End No. I.
a3;83
33.86
End No. X.
«J.9»
»3-97
AA
BB
A'A'
B'B'
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
o
5,000
IO|O0O
i5K»o
30,000
33 f 600
38,600
30,700
End No. i.
AA'.
34.46
S4-43
34.40
S4-34
34.39
Maximum lond.
BB'.
34.66
34.70
a4-73
»4-77
34.80
End No. 3.
AA'.
a4.47
34.41
»4.37
3439
34.a5
BB'.
3466
34.71
34.76
34.83
34.88
AVSXAGB DimXBNCS.
AA'.
.045
•035
.070
•<M5
BB'.
•045
.040
•055
.040
Broke on AA, whole length.
Broke on A'A'.
Broke on B'B' and BB.
Size of pipe 34" Maximum outside fiber
ATerage inside diameter 33-89" from maximum load.
Average length 40I" half of pipe as a beam
Arerage thickness .90" ends
REMARKS.
Load applied along whole length of specimen.
No. 17. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
March 30, 1897.
calculated
Ing each
fixed at the
19,300 lbs.
A
B
A'
B'
Thickn;
End No. I.
1. 10
I.30
1.13
1. 16
End No. 3.
1. 13
1. 16
i.iS
1. 17
AA'
BB'
Insidb DiAinTsa.
End No. I.
30.03
39.31
End No. 3.
30.03
30.00
AA
BB
A'A'
B'B'
Lbngth.
34
34
34
34
'I
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
o
5,000
10,000
15,000
ao,ooo
36,300
33»9«>
37,400
End No. i.
AA'.
30.97
30.93
30.87
30.80
30.75
Maximum load.
BB'.
30.38
30.41
30.47
30.53
30.58
End No. 3.
AA'.
30.45
30.38
3031
30.36
30. X7
BB'.
3089
30.94
30.99
31.06
31.13
AVKRAGB DirraKBNCK.
AA'.
-.055
-.065
'.060
-.070
BB'.
.040
■055
.060
.065
Broke at A A, whole length.
Broke at A'A'.
Broke at BB.
It
Size of pipe 30
Average inside diameter >9*84"
Average length zax
Average ddd^ness i.ii"
Maximum outside fiber stress calculated
from maximum load, assuming each
half of pipe as a beam fixed aa the
ends 18,700 lbs.
REMARKS.
Load applied along whole length of spedmen.
Cast Iron Water Pipe,
343
No. 28. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
April 15, 1897.
A
B
C
D
A'.
B'
C
D'
Thicxnsss.
End No. I.
37
43
40
48
52
50
52
45
AA' . .
BB'. . .
CC . . .
DD'. . .
Inside Diambtbr.
End No. I.
End No. 2.
48.08
48.04
47.86
47.77
48.02
47-9«
47.91
47-97
AA .
BB .
CC .
DD .
AA'
BB'
DD'
Length.
"Si"
as
24I
25
Mi
as
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
End No. i.
End No. a.
AVBRAGB DlPPBRBNCE.
AA'.
BB'.
CC.
DD'.
AA'.
BB'.
CC.
DD'.
AA'.
—.160
—.175
—•235
BB'.
CC.
DD'.
0
5,000
10,000
15,000
25,800
aa,8oo
48.26
48.1X
47.94
47.64
Maxim
48.15
48.29
48.47
48.64
um load.
48.26
48.27
48.30
48.33
Broke
Broke
48.10
48.11
48.10
48.11
at AA, ^
at A'A'
48.37
48.21
4803
47-86
rhole len
and B'B^
48.07
48.20
48.39
48.55
Sth.
48.13
48.13
48.16
48.16
48.20
48.21
48.21
48.21
• • ■ •
.185
.165
• • • ■
.005
.03P
.015
• • • •
.010
—.005
.005
Siae of pipe 48" Maximum outside fiber ttrtsa calculated
Average inside diameter 47-95 ' iroax maximum load, awuming each
Arerage length 35" half of pipe as a beam fixed at the
Arenge thickoeaa 1.46" ends i7i90o lbs.
REMARKS.
Spigot end.
Lip on End No. 2 about I" wide and li" thick.
Load applied on apace of 15" along center of length of specimen.
344 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
No. 29. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
April 17, 1897.
A
B
A'
B'
Thickness.
End No. I.
1.02
1.05
1.09
1.09
End No. a.
1.04
1. 13
1.07
1. 10
AA'
BB'
Insidb Diambtbr.
End No. I.
36.05
36.08
End No. a.
36.00
36.03
AA.
BB .
A'A'
B'B'
Lbhcth.
It
M«:;
Deflection Measuremeni*s.
LOACtt.
o
5,000
10,000
15,000
30,000
34,300
18,600
16,300
8,300
End No. i.
AA'.
36.3 X
36.33
36.10
3599
35.84
Maximum load.
BB'.
36.35
36.36
36.43
36.54
36.64
End No. 3.
AA'.
36.2a
36.13
35-97
35-85
35- 7i
BB'.
36.35
36.40
36.50
36.64
36.80
Broke on A A, whole length.
Broke on A'A', whole length.
Broke on BB, whole length.
Broke on B'B', whole length.
Avbracb Difpbkbncb.
AA'.
.090
.130
.115
.140
BB'.
.130
.085
.135
.130
Size of pipe 36" Maximum outside fiber stress calculated
Average inside diameter 36.05" from maximum load, assuming each
Average length 34" half of pipe as a beam fixed at the
Average thickness 1.07" ends 17,300 lbs.
REMARKS.
Load applied along whole length of specimen.
Casf Iron Water Pipe,
34S
No. 30. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
April 22, 1897.
A
B
C
D
A'
B'
C
Thicknsss.
End No. I.
1.46
1.46
1.47
»-37
».34
145
1.41
1-47
AA'
BB'
CC
DD'
Insidb Diambtbk.
End No. I.
48.14
47.81
48.03
4783
End No. a.
48.14
48.06
48.14
48.0a
AA
BB ,
CC .
DD .
AA'.
BB' .
CC .
DD'
Length.
32J"
32
3a
33"
32'
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
10,000
15,000
3».3<»
a7.9oo
AA'.
4844
48.41
48.31
48.19
48.04
End No. i.
BB'.
48.aa
4838
48.36
48.47
48.57
Maximum load.
CC.
4838
48.37
48.38
48.38
DD'.
48 28
48.28
48.28
48.17
AA'.
4852
48.48
48.3s
48.20
48.06
Broke on AA.
Broke on CC and dQ'.
End No. 2.
BB'.
48.0a
48.07
48.20
48.31
48.43
CC.
48.34
48.25
48.24
48.24
DD'.
4^.33
4834
4825
48.24
AVBRAGB DiFFBRBNCB.
AA'.
.035
.125
.125
•»4S
BB'
.055
.105
.110
.110
CC.
DD'.
000
000
000
010
005
010
(Break at CC 'about 6" way from marks, toward AA.)
Sixe of pipe 48" Maximum outside fiber stress calculated
Average ixnide diamieter 48.02" from maximum load, assuming each
Arerage length 33|" half of pipe as a beam fixed at the
Arerage thickness x.43" «nds 18,200 Iba.
REMARKS.
Spigot end.
Lip on End No. 3 about i" wide and x}" thick.
Load applied along whole length of spedmen.
(i) Pipe resting on B'B'.
(3) Pipe suspended from BB.
346 Results of Tests Made in tfie Engineering Laboratories.
No. 31. TEST ON CAST IRON WATER PIPE.
April 27, 1897.
A
B
D
A'
B'
Thicicnsss.
End No. X.
28
22
20
13
33
34
AA'
BB'
CC
DD'
Insidb Diambtbr.
End No. I. End No. 2.
4784
4778
47.83
47.84
47-95
48.05
47-97
47-97
AA .
BB .
CC .
DD .
AA'.
BB .
CC .
DD'
Lbngth.
I
I
Deflection Measurements.
Loads.
End No. i.
End No. 2.
AVBKAGB DiPFBRBNCB.
AA'.
BB'.
CC.
DD'.
AA'.
BB'.
CC.
DD'.
AA'.
BB'.
CC.
DD'.
5,000
10,000
15,000
24.500
20,300
48.19
48.16
47-99
4782
47.60
Maxim
48.07
48 10
48.24
48.40
48.57
um load.
48.19
48.18
48.18
48.18
48.18
Broke
Broke
4800
48.08
48.0S
48.08
48.07
on A' A'
on AA.
4840
48.37
48.25
48.07
48.85
through
48.30
48.36
48.50
48.64
48.81
whole lei
48.33
48.34
4835
48.36
48.37
igth.
48.24
48.25
48.24
48.24
48.27
— .030
—.145
—.175
— .220
• • • ■
.045
.140
.150
.170
.000
—.005
.000
.000
• • ■ •
.000
.005
.005
.005
Sixe of pipe 48" Maximum outside fiber stress calculated
Average inside diameter 47 90" fro^ maximum load, assuming each
Average length 34" half of pipe as a beam fixed at the
Average thickness 1.25" ends 17,000 lbs.
REMARKS.
Spigot end.
Lip on End Na a about i" wide and if" thick.
Load applied along whole length of specimen.
(i) Resting on B'B'.
(2) Suspended from BB.
Cast Iron Water Pipe,
347
SUMMARY OF TRANSVERSE TESTS ON BARS CUT FROM CAST IRON
WATER PIPE.
.A
■
•
•
1
•■-I
z
1
8*
i
s
"8
4
1
3
d
s
8*
a
a
^ S
"S
Z
>
^
s
0
s
Ins.
Ins.
Ins.
Lbs.
Ins.
Lbs. per sq. in.
I
«-99
.50
ao
570
.370
34,400
1
2.00
•52
20
635
•443
38,100
t
a.oo
.48
20
635
.440
40,700
a
1.99
.50
20
655
.518
39,5«>
3
a.oi
.57
20
730
85s
•345
33,100
3
1-99
.56
30
.470
40,500
4
2.0a
i.oS
a4
2,035
.305
31,100
5
a.oa
.56
30
700
.530
S3,ioo
5
1.99
•5«
30
710
•503
4»,200
6
3.01
.73
24
1,170
•594
39.300
38,100
7
2.00
.62
30
975
.538
8
a.oo
•79
a4
',315
538
37,900
8
2.C0
.79
20
1,665
.430
39.900
9
2.01
.7«
a4
1,110
.610
39,400
9
2.01
•7«
30
1,115
•?25
33,000
lO
2.01
•74
a4
«,3So
.680
44.aoo
lO
2.00
.73
30
«,5»o
.485
42,500
II
a.oi
.76
a4
1,305
■5!e
37,400
II
2.00
.73
30
1,250
.360
35,200
la
2.01
•90
a4
1,352
.340
29.900
la
2.00
.87
ao
'.655
.370
32,800
«3
2.0a
.7«
a4
>t455
•5»5
51.400
»3
2.00
•74
30
1,650
43"
45.200
M
2.01
.89
24
«,645
•447
37,200
14
a.oo
.86
30
1,830
.396
37,100
»S
3.00
•77
a4
1,275
.450
38,700
i6
2.00
a.oa
2.00
.81
30
a4
ao
1,810
1,644
1,785
.348
.442
.305
41,400
37,500
34,600
«7
2.01
I. II
a4
2,272
•395
33,000
■z
2.00
1.13
30
2,745
.285
32,200
i8
2.01
.56
30
770
.619
36,600
«9
2.0i
.61
30
930
• ■ • •
37,300
ao
2.00
.50
30
S55
.460
38,700
at
2 00
•59
30
880
.540
37,900
22
2.0s
■5«
3C
735
.640
43,300
»3
a 01
•7«
30
1,340
■560
36,700
»4
2.00
•53
30
725
.483
38,700
»5
a.oi
.64
30
I,030
•549
37,200
36
2.01
•50
30
595
.670
35,500
a6
2 00
.46
30
560
.783
39,700
38,400
a?
2.02
.56
30
600
.360
»7
2.0a
55
ao
^
.410
32,400
a8
3.00
1.41
24
3.685
•342
33.400
*9
2.01
1.02
24
1,830
•395
3i,}oo
»9
2.00
.96
ao
2,235
.366
36,400
30
2.03
>-37
24
3.445
.308
32,600
3*
3.00
1.24
24
2,492
•244
29,200
3»
3.00
1.22
30
3,215
.305
32,400
NrvTB. — These bars were cut from the broken specunens of the water pipe, the numbers incicatinf the
pipes from which the samples were cut
348 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Index to the Results of Tests Made in the Engineering
Laboratories. Parts I to VI. ^
Aluminum: Tension. VII (i) 149; VIII (iii), 248.
Aluminum Alloy : Tension. IX (v), 202, 209.
American Hemp Rope: Tension. VIII (iii), 251 ; IX (v), 234.
££AMS: Hemlock. VII (i), 165; VIII (ui), 253.
Longitudinal shearing tests. VII (i), 173.
Maple. VIII (iii), 253.
Oak. white. VII (i). 167; VIII (iii), 252.
Pine, Norway. IX (v), 195.
Pine, white. VII (i), 166.
Pine, white, western kiln-dried. VII (i), 165.
Pine, yellow. VII (i), 162-164.
Spruce. VII (i), 157-161 ; VIII (iii), 253; IX (v), 195.
Time tests: spruce. VII (i), 168-170, 172.
Time tests: yellow pine. VII (i), 171.
Belting: Horizontal belt machine tests. VIII (ii), 21, 29-32; VIII (iii), 260; IX (vi), 311.
Boiler Plate: Tension.
Steel. VII (i), 135, 136, 139, 140; IX (v), 181, 182, 202.
Wrought iron. VII (i), 141.
•Boiler Tests: Steam boiler tests. VIII (ii), 22, 36-45; IX (iv), 87, 89; IX (vi), 280, 293.
Bolted Joints: Tension. IX (v), 171-180, 184, 185.
Brass : Tension. IX (v), 202, 207, 208.
Torsion. IX (v), 219, 231.
Bronze Alloy: Tension. IX (v), 202, 210.
Cast Iron: Tension. VII (i), 146-147.
Compression. VII (i), 148.
Cement: Portland.
Compression, neat. IX (v), 198.
Compression, sand. IX (v), 197.
Tension, neat. IX (v), 199.
Tension, sand. IX (v), 197.
Columns: Oak. VIII (iii), 231.
Oak, oak bolsters. VIII (iii), 237, 238, 244.
Pine, yellow. VIII (iii), 231, 232, 234-236.
Spruce. VIII (iii), 220-231, 233.
Spruce, maple bolsters. VIII (iii), 241, 242.
Spruce, oak bolsters. VIII (iii), 239, 240, 243, 245, 246.
Spruce, yellow pine bolsters. VIII (iii), 247.
•Common Iron Wire: Tension. VIII (iii), 250; IX (v), 212.
» Published in Technology Quarterly, Vols. VII 10 IX (1894 to 1896). The Roman numerals in the
index refer to the volume of the Quarterly. The numerals in parentheses indicate the part of the Ttsts.
Index. 349
Composition : Tension. VIII (iii), 24S ; IX (v), 202, 207, 209.
Torsion. IX (v), 219, 230.
Compression : Cast Iron. VII (i), 148.
Portland cement, neat. IX (v), 198.
Portland cement, sand. IX (v), 197.
Timber across the grain. IX (v), 20a
Wrought Iron. VII (i), 148.
Condensers : Wheeler condenser tests. VIII (ii), 22, 33.
Davis Plunger Pump Tests. VIII (iii), 256.
Duplex Pump: Blake duplex pump tests. VIII (ii), 20, 27.
Ejector Tests. VIII (ii), 19, 24.
Engine Tests: Charlestown. IX (vi), 280.
Chestnut Hill. IX (iv), 72-115.
Triple expansion. IX (vi), 312.
Flow of Steam Tests. VIII (ii), 20, 28; VIII (iii), 254, 255.
-Galvanized Iron Wire: Tension. VII (i), 150, 151.
•GiESE Wire: Tension. IX (v), 212, 214-216.
Hancock Inspirator Tests. VIII (ii), 21, 34, 35; VIII (iii), 258, 259; IX (vi), 317.
Hard Drawn Copper Wire: Tension. VII (i), 153; VIII (iii), 251 ; IX (v), 212.
Hemlock: Hemlock beam tests. VII (i), 165; VIII (iii), 253.
Horizontal Belt Machine Tests. VIII (ii), 21, 29-32; VIII (iii), 260.
Hydraulic Ram Tests. VIII (ii), 23, 46; VIII (ui), 257 ; IX (vi), 320.
Injectors: Hancock inspirator tests. VIII (ii), 21, 34, 35; VIII (iii), 258, 259.
Mack injector tests. VIII (ii), 21, 33.
Iron: Cast iron compression. VII (i), 148.
Cast iron tension. VII (i), 146, 147.
Wrought iron compression. VII (i), 148.
Wrought iron pipe columns. IX (v), 186-194.
Wrought iron tension. VII (i), 141-145; VIII (iii), 250; IX (v), 202.
Wrought iron torsion. VII (i), 154 ; VIII (iii), 252; IX (v), 222-227, 232.
JLONGITUDINAL SHEARING TESTS OF TIMBER BeAMS. VII (i), 1 73.
Manila Rope: Tension tests. VII (i), 155, 156; VIII (iii), 251 ; IX (v), 234.
Maple Beams: Tests on. VIII (iii), 252.
Norway Pine Beams: Tests on. IX (v), 195.
Oak : White oak beams. VII (i), 167 ; VIII (Ui), 252.
White oak columns. VIII (iii), 231.
White oak columns, oak bolsters. VIII (iii), 237, 238, 244.
Prlton Water Wheel. IX (vi), 318.
Phosphor Bronze Wire : Tension tests. VII (i), 148.
Piano Wire: Tension tests. IX (v), 212, 214, 215.
Pine : Norway pine beams. IX (v), 195.
White pine beams. VII (i), 166.
White pine beams, western kiln-dried. VII (i), 165.
Yellow pine beams. VII (i), 162-164.
Yellow pine columns. VIII (iii), 231, 232, 234-236.
Pulsometer: Tests on. VIII (ii), 19, 25, 26; VIII (iii), 257; IX (vi), 308.
Pumping Engines. (See engine tests.)
Pumps: Blake duplex pumps. Tests on. VIII (ii), 20, 27.
Compound Marsh. IX (vi), 321.
Davis plunger pump. Tests on. VIII (iii), 256; IX (vi), 310.
Hydraulic ram. Tests on. VIII (ii), 23, 46; VIII (iii), 257 ; IX (vi), 320.
JUm : Hydraulic ram. VIII (ii), 23, 46; VIII (iii), 257 ; IX (vi), 320.
3 so Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Rope: Tension of American hemp. VIII (iii), 251 ; IX (v), 234.
Cotton. VII (i), 156; IX (v), 234.
Manila. VII (i), 155, 156; VIII (iii), 251 ; IX (v), 234.
Russian hemp. VIII (iii), 251 ; IX (v), 234.
Sisal. VIII (iii), 251 ; IX (v), 234.
Russian Hemp Rope: Tension. VIII (iii), 251; IX (v), 234.
Sisal Rope: Tension. VIII (iii), 251 ; IX (v), 234.
Soft Brass Wire: Tension. IX (v), 212.
Sorr Copper Wire: Tension. VII (i), 153; VIII (iii), 251.
Spruce: Spruce beams. VII (i), 157-161 ; VIII (iii), 353; IX (v), 195.
Spruce columns. VIII (iii), 220-231, 233.
Spruce columns, maple bolsters. VIII (iii), 241, 242.
Spruce columns, oak bolsters. VIII (iii), 239, 240, 243, 245, 246.
Spruce columns, yellow pine bolsters. VIII (iii), 247.
Steam: Flow of. VIII (ii), 20, 28; VIII (iii), 254, 255; IX (vi), 309.
Engine, Cbarlestown. IX (vi), 280.
Engine, Chestnut Hill. IX (iv), 72-115.
Engine, Triple expansion. IX (vi), 312.
(See also boiler tests.)
Steel: Tension. VII (i), 135-140 ; VIII (iii), 249; IX (v), 181-183, 202, 204-206^
Torsion. VII (i), 154; VIII (ui), 252; IX (v), 219-222, 228, 229, 231.
Steel tape, tension. IX (v), 202.
Steel wire, tension. IX (v), 212.
Steel wire, torsion. IX (v), 218.
Tension: Aluminium. VII (i), 149; VIII (iii), 248.
Aluminium alloy. IX (v), 202, 209.
Bessemer steel. VII (i), 135-140; VIII (iii), 249.
Bolted joints. IX (v), 171-180, 185.
Brass. IX (v), 202, 207, 208.
Bronze alloy. IX (v), 202, 210.
Cement, neat IX (v), 199.
Cement, sand. IX (v), 197.
Composition. VHI (iii), 248 ; IX (v), 202, 207, 209.
Iron, cast. VII (i), 146-147.
Iron, wrought. VII (i), 141-145 ; VIII (iii), 250; IX (v), 202.
Iron, wrought^ refined. VH (i), 141-145; VHI (iii), 250.
Iron, wrought, Norway. VII (i), 141-145.
Iron, wrought, boiler plate. VII (i), 141-145.
Machine steel. VII (i), 137-140; VIII (iii), 249.
Miscellaneous steel. VII (i), 135-140; VIII (iii), 249; IX (v), 182, 183, 202, 204-206.
Open hearth steel. VII (i), 137, 138.
Steel boiler plate. VII (i), 135, 136, 139, 140 ; IX (v), 181, 182, 202.
Tool steel. VII (i), 137, 138.
Wire: Annealed iron. VII (i), 151, 152; VIII (iii), 250; IX (v), 212.
Common. VIII (iii), 250; IX (v), 212.
Bessemer spring steel. IX (v), 212.
Bright iron. VII (i), 151, 152 ; VIII (iu), 250.
Galvanized iron. VII (i), 150, 151.
Giese. IX (v), 212, 214-216.
Hard drawn copper. VII (i), 153; VIII (iii), 251 ; IX (v), 212.
Phosphor bronze. VII (i), 148.
Piano. IX (v), 212, 2x4, 215.
Index. 35 1
Soft brass. IX (v), 212.
Soft copper. VII (i). 153 ; VIII (iii). 251.
Timber : Compression of timber across the grain. IX (v), 200.
Transverse tests. (See beams.)
Time tests. (See time tests.)
Tims Tests of Timber:
Spruce beams. VII (i), 168-170, 172.
Yellow pine beams. VII (i), 171.
Torsion : Brass. IX (v), 219, 231.
Composition. IX (v), 219, 230.
Iron. Refined, Norway, Swedbh. VII (i), 154; VIII (iii), 252; IX (v), 219, 222-227, 232*
Steel. VII (i), 154; VIII (iii), 252; IX (v), 219-222, 228, 229, 231.
Wire. IX (v), 218.
Wire, common iron. IX (v), 218.
Wire, spring brass. IX (v), 218.
Wire, Bessemer spring steel. IX (v), 218.
Wire, hard drawn copper. IX (v), 2x8.
Transverse Tests. (See beams.)
Water Wheel: Pelton. IX (vi), 318.
Wire: Tension.
Annealed iron. VII (i), 151, 152; IX (v), 212.
Common iron. IX (v), 212.
Bessemer spring steel. IX (v), 212.
Bright iron. VII (i), 151, 152.
Galvanized iron. VII (i), 150, 151.
Giese. IX (v), 212, 214-216.
Hard drawn copper. VII (i), 153; VIII (iu), 251 ; IX (v), 212.
Phosphor bronze. VII (i), 148.
Piano. IX (v), 212, 214, 215.
Soft brass. IX (v), 212.
Soft copper. VII (i), 153; VIII (iii), 251.
Wire: Torsion.
Bessemer spring steel. IX (v), 218.
Common iron. IX (v), 218.
Hard drawn copper. IX (v), 218.
Spring brass. IX (v), 218.
Wrought Iron: Tension. VII (i), 141-145; VIII (iii), 250; IV (v), 202.
Compression. VII (i), 148.
Pipe columns. IX (v).
Torsion. VII (i), 154; VIII (iii), 252 ; IX (v), 219, 222, 227, 232.
j
A D VERTlHEMENTS.
PABOT'S CHIHGIE
Lreosote OTAINS.
" The Only Exterior Coloring
That Does Not
"Blacken."
For samples on wood and book of sketches apply to
SAina CABOT, 70 RilDy Stmt, Boston, Iiss., Soli Huntactinr.
COCHRANE CHEMCAL CO.,
55 KILBY STREET, BOSTON, NlASS.
Ill
AQUA AMMONIA,
SULPHATfi AMMONIA.
EXTRACT INDiaO.
GLAUBER'S SALT.
SULPHATE SODA,
BISULPMATE SODA.
BISULPHITE SODA,
STANNATB SODA, aoa ntber Cbi
ALUM.
POROU5 ALUM,
SULPHATE ALUMNA,
CHLORIDE ALUMINA,
IRON LIQUORS.
NI'^RATB IRON,
NITRATE COPPER,
•■Ictii.
Business founded ims.
WORKS AT evehett, hi
A. J. WilKiosoo & Co.,
Machinery & General Hardware,
Machinists' & Mannfactiirers' Supplies.
TOOLS FOR "WOOD AND METAL -WORKERS.
iSO, 184, 188 Washington Street, and
19, S3, 35 Devonshire Strectf
BOSTON, MASS.
r
Ill the
Siem
I de Yui
Opichen.
'I'he in
imense i
darkness, i
IS lit fr
■om abo-
roots of al.
a mo tr<
:es on th
ous chasm
lothe
cave fl<K
coHlact of
light ,
ind air, :
have been i
inscribed by tht
the human
eyes, r
lose, anc
)ut two ami a half leagnes westward from
underground room, reached after a long clamlier in Ihe
above through a skylight in the middle of its ceiling. Tlie
the right hang downward from the brink of this lumin-
from which remarkalile stalagmilic forma, linlet! by
e on all sides. Several of the prominent surfaces
ncieni cave visitors with dots and circles suggesting
louth, and the outlines of animals resembling deer.
Technology Quarterly
AND
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS.
Vol. X. DECEMBER, 1897. No. 4.
CAVE HUNTING IN YUCATAN
By HENRY C. MERCER.
Read December lo, 1896.
Introduction.
Cave Hunting Explained.
Two years ago the Corwith expedition of the University of Penn-
sylvania (under the kind auspices of Dr. S. Weir Mitchell, and named
after its generous donor, Mr. John W. Corwith, of Chicago) set out at
rather short notice to open, it seemed, a new field of archaeological
research in Yucatan. We were going to hunt in caves for evidence
of man's antiquity. We asked how long man had inhabited Yucatan,
and under what circumstances he had first arrived there. Not that
the question had not been asked before by Stephens, Waldeck, Char-
nay, and other explorers, who had speculated upon the age of the ruins
of Central America ; but we thought that we were possessed of a way
of getting at the question that was quicker, surer, and more conclusive
than theirs. We were going to test the antiquity of the man that built
the wonderful ruins, and gauge his original state of culture, not by the
ruins themselves, but by the traces of his presence left by him in
caves ; and we were the more confident of success from the fact that
the caves, abundant as they were in the region, had never before been
354 Henry C. Mercer,
searched. We were the first upon the field — the first to attempt to
translate their hidden contents.
But why search caves } Why go under ground ? Why leave the
daylight and all the beauty and wonder of the ruins to delve in damp,
dark holes, where at most we proposed to find a few broken pieces of
pottery, a few fragments of bone or chips of flint upon which the
visitor at a museum might scarcely bestow a glance.
On the answer to this question hangs the whole justification of our
attempt, and that answer is, that science has shown that if you want
to get to the bottom, to the beginning of the human story, you must
hunt in a cave. Science has shown that most if not all primitive
peoples, when confronted by caves which were accessible, light and
dry, at some time or other entered them. When they did it has ap-
peared that they built fires on their floors and scattered the bones of
cooked animals near by, until caked deposits of rubbish were trodden
down upon the foothold, and until these, when interbedded with bands
of loam or leaves or stalagmite, proving intervals of time when the
cave was vacant, presented us with a series of epoch-denoting layers
resting upon the cave floor, one upon another, the oldest on the bottom
and the latest on the top. Science has thus shown that before arti-
ficial houses were built, man entered these natural houses prepared for
him by an ancient geological process before his coming, and outlasting
his day, and that there, where the rock walls and the limit of light and
darkness compelled all cave visitors to inhabit the same area, the
whole problem of sequence, of who came first and who came last,
layer upon layer was buried at one spot. For these reasons a great
number of caves were excavated in England, Belgium, France, and
Germany, and a large amount of evidence collected, which over and
over again repeated the same story.
Where does the word prehistoric gain its significance } What sig-
nifies this classification in ages and epochs of man's culture in the
last fifty years .^ What justifies us in saying that during a series of
millenniums before Herodotus and Pliny, before the dawn of history,
man had bronze before he had iron ; that older than bronze was pr'
ished stone ; and that older than polished stone was chipped str /
that with bronze and polished stone man had domestic animal' at
with chipped stone, none ; that during the bronze and polisher /)ne
time animals were recent, while during the older chipped ston Aoch
they were of species now extinct t Let it be said again, in f er to
Cave Hunting in Yucatan, 355
these questions, that nothing has so well established us in this new
knowledge, now not over fifty years old, as the investigation of layers
in caves.
No doubt that these cave layers are often missing. No doubt that
they are often disturbed, and that there is often much confusion in the
record ; but as far as Europe is concerned, that man was present and
left his footprints in available caves, there can be no doubt. From the
man of history to the man with bronze, from the man with bronze to
the man with stone, from the recent man to the fossil man, as far as
Europe is concerned, all have left their traces in caverns and rock
shelters. Now, if science has shown this in Europe, what shall it
show for America.^ When we come to look shall we find that the
same rule of superposed epoch-denoting culture layers holds good
here } Can we dig down into the subterranean floors and find fossil
man here as we found him there } These are questions which I began
to ask four years ago, and am still asking, and all that I have yet to
present is a narrative of how, in one way or another, I have found
the evidence in American caves scanty and shallow, and of how up
to date I have failed to find fossil man.
What if we continue to fail to find him } What if we find that
he does not exist anywhere in the caves of America } What if we go
down the Ohio and Kanawha and Delaware and Susquehanna, as I have
done for the last three years, preferring the great waterways and
passes where savages would have crossed the Appalachian barrier from
east to west, or west to east, and find that this earlier fossil savage,
who should have been a contemporary of the extinct animals, is always
missing } What if as against all the culture layers of Europe we here
find only one — always find the Indian and nothing but the Indian,
represented by a characteristic rubbish band composed of familiar
arrowheads, potsherds, and bone needles on the floors of all these
caves ; and what if beneath this in the ancient red or yellow cave earth
we dig again and again to the mother rock, to find sometimes the
bones of bats or rabbits, or the remains of snails, sometimes the ver-
tebrae of the great sloth, the teeth of the tapir, or the jaws of the
mylodon or peccary, but never a trace of humanity }
Such is the kind of evidence thus far gleaned by us from the
American caves ; but before trying to draw a conclusion from it, it
remains to be asked, have we gone far enough } Have we searched
enough caves to warrant us banishing fossil man from the eastern
356 Henry C. Mercer,
region or setting a geological limit to human existence in the New
World? Have we investigated regions where we might expect to find
man older than elsewhere? And our expedition to Yucatan was a
reply to this by pushing the research into a district where it seemed
that man should have been old if he was old anywhere on the continent.
Yucatan Promises to Solve the American Problem.
Judged by the test of written language, the old inhabitants of Yuca-
tan might reasonably be placed at the head cff all the people found by
Columbus in the New World. The Peruvians had quipus, tally-knots
on thongs or strings, by which something previously learned by heart
was suggested to the expert reader. The Mexicans had picture writ-
ings more or less symbolic. But the Mayas whom the Spaniards
found in Yucatan used hieroglyphics where a symbol comes to stand
for the object, and the mind prepares itself to invent an alphabet. The
Peruvians were master masons in the massiveness of long and high
walls built of immense hewn blocks. The Mexicans were lofty mound
builders, and the people of the Ohio valley constructors of such great
and elaborate earthworks as you see at Marietta, or at that poetically
beautiful fair ground at Newark ; but the carved palaces of the Mayas,
overloaded with mysterious symbolism whose ruins still astonish the
traveler in the forest of Yucatan, exceeded everything. We had a
notion of a sort of civilization older than that of Mexico buried away in
the wilderness, of something that even the Indians had themselves for-
gotten when the Spaniards came, of something more ancient, more
\ elaborate, more marvelous in Yucatan than anywhere else from Behring
1 Straits to Patagonia ; and when we learned from Professor Heilprin
that in the very midst of all these awe-inspiring ruins described by
Stephens and Waldeck, by Charnay and Maler, there were abundant
dry and spacious caverns which none of these travelers had explored, it
seemed as if we had the question of man's antiquity in America pre-
sented to us in a nutshell. There where man had reached the highest
point of semi-civilization or barbarism in the new hemisphere
seemed as if all the doubts as to his antiquity could once and f'- i
be set at rest. If he was old anywhere he was old there. ne
American problem could be settled anywhere it could be se* i in
Yucatan.
Cave H tinting in Yucatan, 357
The American Problem.
But what is the American problem, and why settle it ? Has it not
been settled before ? Do we not know how old the Indians are ? Have
we not the Calaveras skull and pestles and mortars excavated from the
bottom of gold mines? Have we not the Trenton "turtle backs"
chipped by human hands and gathered from a bank of gravel on the
Delaware River, which, by the last of the geological time estimates,
should be about 32,000 years old ? Dr. Koch's spear-heads, with mas-
todon remains, chipped blades from the beds of fossil lakes, and a
dozen other evidences of man's great antiquity — do they not prove
that long before the Indian as we know him, we may look back into
the geological past and behold humanity here as in Europe, a con-
temporary of the mammoth and the mastodon, the saber-toothed tiger,
and the fossil horse .^ Let it be answered that in spite of all thus far
presented on the subject, we are still in doubt if not darkness. Let
him who supposes that all these things described and recapitulated in
the introductions of recent text-books and histories are proved and
settled, try to investigate them for himself. When he does he finds
that what he had regarded as well-fixed facts fade away like stories of
ghosts and haunted houses at near approach. He learns that while
in Europe it is an easy matter for you or me to step upon a railway
train and go to any one of a score of sites where human remains can
be found at short notice with the bones of extinct animals, here, on
the other hand, we may assert that no explorer will venture to lead us
to-morrow or next week by a journey long or short (which some of us
would willingly take) to any point whatsoever east of the Mississippi,
where he can guarantee us a sight of fossil man or of one of his im-
plements in place. As far as America is concerned, homo fossilis is
desperately hard to find.
This, then, is the problem of man's antiquity. in America ; we do
not know how long man was here. The red man was found here, but
we have not yet accounted for him. Let alone the question of the
Indian's predecessor if he had one, we do not know where the Indian
came from. We cannot say whether his development of language, of
architecture, and varying customs, whether his dissemination of maize,
his apparent domestication of the dog and the llama, whether all this
is an affair, geologically speaking, of modern times, or of a longer
epoch ; of the time represented by the forest loam under our feet that
358 Henry C. Mercer,
grows western wheat without manure, of the present existing plants
and animals, and of the outlines of the country as we now know them,
or of a time denoted by a race of animals that is extinct and measured,
according to Spencer's late work at Niagara Falls, by a lapse of 32,000
years. This is the question at the bottom of American archaeology.
This is the question that we went to Yucatan to settle, and to settle
by means of hunting in caves.
Marvelous as were the ruins, interesting as were the Indians them-
selves, the descendants of the builders of the ruins, we turned away
from them to dig under ground, for there we ventured to believe that
the truth might be demonstrated for the first time. Somewhere, very
deep in the cave earth under the crusts of refuse left by the builders
of Uxmal and Labna, we must find the trace of fossil man if he had
existed in the region. Well might the sites of the known ruins ex-
cavated to their full depth fail to reveal his presence, but here, if his
footsteps had ever trod the peninsula, he could not escape us.
Such, then, was the promised glimpse of a new knowledge hidden
in a dark chamber of which we had the key, that thrilled us with ex-
citement as we set sail for Yucatan. And this is the only considera-
tion, perhaps, that warrants me in coming here to describe our jour-
ney as a thing at all memorable, or different from the ordinary experi-
ence of travelers who visit the mysterious and little-known land of
which I shall speak.
The People of Yucatan.
So hurried had been our packing up and departure that we had
hardly had time to imagine the kind of people and country that we
were to see. We knew that there was a semi-tropical forest, and we
imagined orchids and birds of gay plumage. We knew of the marvel-
ous ruins hidden in thickets, where, as in the fairy tale of the "Sleep-
ing Beauty," you cut passages with axes to see deserted palaces that
lie concealed only a few yards away. We had been warned against
snakes ; and to wade through the jungle, as we imagined it, we had
taken leather leggins made nearly waist high, and I was prepared to
invent better ones and cooler, of fine wire netting, that I thought seri-
ously of having patented. We had heard stories of treachery, and that
it would be unsafe to wander away alone with Indians. Hence pistols
Fig. 2. Cave of Loltun. {//Mi of Flotiitrs.)
Probably !he mqst beautiful cavem in Yucatan. Situated in a forest soli-
tude near the hacienda of Tabi. Its several spacious rotundas connected by
dark passages are lit fTom above by skylights fringed nilh forest. Uelow
colored stalactites a graceful - underground vegetation charms the eye, and
there, water, ever precious in the parched land, drips from shadowy ceilings
into ancient dishes of stone. In the charcoal-blackened floors the sought-for
proof of human presence was found, which, it is believed, has thrown for
the first lime the light of reasonable surety upon the antiquity and culture
of the ancient peoples of Yucatan; setting limits to future speculation, and
preparing the way for a just interpretation of the grotesque ruins, the strange
mural decorations, and the hierogly[)hs, still unread, that Stephens and Waldeck
described to astonished hearers half a century ago. The view is taken in the
second or largest rotunda. The Indians are sitting on the edge of trench No. i,
beyond which the dark passage on the right leads to the entrance.
Cave Hunting in Yucatan, 359
were a necessity. In the rock pools beset with bacteria we were
warned not to bathe, much less dared we drink the water, full of fever
germs as it was, without previously boiling it. But the first sight of
Yucatan suggested another danger against which we had taken pre-
cautions in the form of a supply of quinine — namely, fever.
The water rippled by a gentle wind looked green where we lay at
anchor one morning, after a seven days' sail from New York, and the
shore three miles away seemed yellow and very low. At one spot
there were outlines of buildings, and some palm trees raised their
graceful fronds through a stratum of vapor. Mr. Armour, whose yacht
lay near, and who kindly helped us through the custom house, came
aboard and warned us against the feverish place, Progresso by name,
advising us to lose no time in leaving it for ^erida, forty miles inland.
His expedition had been confronted with danger and difficulty. Uxmal
was certain malaria ; Tuloom was held by hostile Indians who had just
murdered the Spanish governor; members of his party had been
driven to desperation by wood lice, and their botanist was ill. The
prospect looked discouraging; but once ashore, the responsibility of
our long list of bags and boxes, the novel and reassuring look of the
place and people, drove doubts to the dogs.
And it was these Maya people who first and last attracted us, while,
indeed, a great deal depended on them. If they were to be dirty, surly,
cheating, avaricious, or treacherous, if they were to refuse us permis-
sion to dig into the remains of their ancestors, we were at their mercy.
But in all respects we were most agreeably disappointed with them ;
and in the first place, I think I may say that they gave the impression
of being the cleanest people I ever saw, my own countrymen not
excepted.
The white muslin that dazzled the eye in the sun seemed always
white ; faces, often smooth-shaven in the Spanish fashion, were clean,
and hair well brushed and cut. Where the water came from for the
ablutions was a mystery, in a land where it was so scarce. But in this
respect our cook, Pastor Leal, put us to shame. On sweltering days,
after long walks through the woods when we looked and felt likjs re-
pulsive vagabonds, he in his white muslin jacket was apt to present
the appearance of a very elaborate bartender at some very luxurious
hostelry, with a rose in his buttonhole.
No stabbing in the back in Yucatan. No muffled figures lurking
around corners with machetes as in other parts of Mexico and Cuba.
360 Henry C, Mercer,
An overseer told me, strange to relate, that when the Indians fought,
they fought with their fists. So we put away our pistols as useless
things, and when after weeks of experience with open doors, and with
our rooms scattered with valuables that were never found missing but
once, we were ready to admit the truth of Professor Heilprin's ex-
pression, that the only thief he had met in Yucatan had come from
Philadelphia.
But how was this to be explained ? Who were these people ? Why
were they so much more attractive and gentle than any one else?
Why different from the Cubans or Mexicans ? Were they not Span-
ish with a little Indian blood in their veins ? The answer to these
questions seemed to lie in the important fact that they were rather
Indians with a little Spanish blood in .their veins. A very few of the
important families were pure Castilians. All the rest were mixed, and
the darker they were, it seemed the kindlier, the cleaner, and the more
good-natured.
What an important fact to realize, that the Maya people, who built
the great ruins of Central America, have not been stamped out of
existence like our Eastern Indians. There they are still to be studied,
and I will add, liked by any one who goes to Yucatan. Comprising
four-fifths of the present population, they still speak one of the most
interesting of the languages of ancient America, and the only one
that ever was written. Like many a conquered race, they seem to be
absorbing their conquerers.
Their kindness smoothed our way everywhere. The Bishop of
Yucatan, to whom we had a letter of introduction from Dr. Brinton,
presented us to the large landed proprietor, Seflor Escalante, and he to
Sefior Duarte and to the governor. It so happened that a line of
great plantations (haciendas) lay along the hills in our way, and we
were to travel to and from them. Instead of camping in the forest,
we were to sleep under their shelter, and when we found what the
forest was on the one hand, and the haciendas on the other, we thanked
our stars.
Not soon shall I forget our first impression of a hacienda at Chal-
cetok. A tram car awaited us at a wild little spot called San Ber-
nardo, and piling our baggage upon it, a single mule whisked us at a
rufi through the evening air. Across broad fields of the hemp cactus
called Hennequin (Agave sisalensis) we rattled. Then came a smoke
stack in the distance, then a village of thatched huts built of mud and
\
Cave Hunting in Yucatan. 361
wattle, where at each door you saw half-naked children, figures in
white dress, against the characteristic outline of the swinging ham-
mock, and at last the court surrounded by graceful buildings and
round arches supported on pillars. By these picturesque galleries
under the palm trees, white-robed figures came and went. From a
chapel near by a bell rang, and we heard the sing-song of children's
voices repeating a prayer. Then the overseer received us, and going
in, our party of five, Mr. Corwith and myself, with our secretary, assist-
ant, and two cooks, took possession of three large bare rooms, one of
which was a kitchen. While the hammocks' were being hung on ham-
mock pegs I walked out on the terrace and looked about. Somehow
the scene reminded me of Egypt. The walls, the palm trees, the blue
scarves in the twilight were oriental, but the forest seemed strange.
I saw it beyond upon the hills, and it stretched away into the horizon,
surrounding us with mystery, and shutting off the spot from the nine-
teenth century and the world. Behind {he hemp mill there were gar-
dens, beautiful orange groves hanging heavy with fruit, and birds that
sang all day. There were large water tanks and channels of masonry
where artificial streams flowed as you see them in gardens in the
Levant. After the coming of night and by the rise of the moon, we
desired but little to go to bed and lose sight of a reality stranger
than fiction. Rather might we have sat up all night imagining our-
selves in a land of Lotus or some garden of the Arabian Nights.
Tabi was another hacienda^ and Yokat another even more beauti-
ful, each of which we left with regret, and each of which vied with the
other in hospitality. Sometimes villages lay near us, whither, if not
too tired, we might walk of an evening to some public entertainment
or a meztiza dance. In Merida we had been to an opera and seen the
" Huguenots," where all the ladies, seated in boxes, considered it their
duty to put on their best French dresses and sit through the perform-
ance more or less bored to death. What a contrast was the nocturnal
scene that confronted us in the open air at Opichen !
Round about us among flickering torches stood little thatched
booths where they cooked cocoa in open fires, or made you strange
salads and highly seasoned dishes, and where you smoked highly
flavored cigars to the echoes of music half Spanish, half Maya, played
on fiddles and flageolets. The strains came from a large shed open on
the sides and f«il of dancers. But Imust say the dance was a disap-
pointment ; that it lacked the action, the spice that I expected. When
362 Henry C. Mercer,
one of the Meztiza girls so celebrated for attractiveness danced, she
danced alone, and to our minds spoiled her appearance by putting on
a man's hat. Several times with stiff solemnity her partner circled
about her, and then the two separated, she going one way and he the
other. I had heard no loud talking in Yucatan, and here, where demon-
strative conversation seemed out of fashion, met no exception to the
rule. No audience at a temperance lecture could have taken matters
more seriously than did these people during the solemn intermissions.
But at these times outside the shed the hospitality which we had met
with everywhere was clearly shown. We appeared to be guests of the
village, and could pay for nothing. Indians that we had never heard
of before forced expensive cigars upon us again and again. It was no
use to cry " Hold, enough." I went away with my pockets full of
costly "puros" done up in lead foil.
In our many wanderings into the woods with the Maya Indians, in
our long diggings with them in subterranean depths where we were
not rarely at their mercy, we found them faithful, gentle, and kind.
Incapable of handling a shovel correctly, they would pile the blades
full of earth with their hands, strike absurd blows, and work with the
wrong end of the pickaxe. Yet these were laughing matters. They
were children always ; you could no more scold them than you could
beat a delightful puppy who nibbles the corner of a favorite book.
But a dreadful accident that overtook our party at a cave brought
us nearer to them, perhaps, than anything else, and I doubt if any
civilized people could have behaved with more dignity and refinement
when confronted by sudden and tragic death. We were in a deep,
well-like rotunda, where for hours we had been at work. Seated on a
mossy rock I was writing my notes while the boughs of several trees
that grew from the floor through the skylight rustled overhead. In
their high tops two barefooted Indians who had followed us were
climbing from bough to bough like monkeys, as with their knives they
cut green branches for their cattle at home. Throwing these upon the
neighboring ledge at the chasm's brink, one of the men stepped across,
seized a pile of the twigs and began to tie them into a bundle. He
had pulled them together, and kneeling with his head in the leaves was
straining with outstretched arms to bring the mass within reach of a
string, when, pushing too hard and too far, the brink betrayed him.
I heard a great rattle, saw the fluttering boughs, and then the figure
in mid-air, dashed in an instant head foremost upon the cruel rocks at
Cave Hunting in Yucatan. 363
my feet. In a few seconds he had ceased breathing, and his comrades,
laising him gently, felt his last heart-beats. Till all was over they
looked solemnly on. Then one went away to appear in an hour with
a band of friends, who, cutting boughs with their knives and tying
them into a litter with a blanket stretched across it, laid upon it the
body which we had meanwhile lifted from the cavern with a rope.
Last of all one of them descended the chasm, and carving a cross upon
the tree, scattered earth upon the fatal stains. This done we marched
away in solemn procession to reach home at nightfall, when piteous
wailings echoed through the village of Yokat, and we learned that the
night which followed had witnessed a wake, a baloria differing a little
from the weird ceremony so familiar in Ireland.
I believe it would be so easy to become fascinated with the ruins
of Yucatan and an investigation of its past glories, as to look with too
great unfriendliness upon the influence brought to bear by Europeans
upon the Indians, and for that reason I cannot agree with Stephens,
who continually refers to the present Mayas as a lost, degraded, and
ruined race. Our observations, I admit, were superficial, and we made
no careful analysis of the people. But when all is summed up, I im-
agine that, living as they now live, whether rooted by a sort of vassal-
age upon the plantations, or revolted and run wild in forests, they are
better off in the scale of human development than when, at the head
of aboriginal American culture, they were yet ignorant of the more
useful metals and domestic animals, and stained with the cruelty of
horrible human sacrifices. I would rather believe that they have a
future, and are working it out by one of the most potent of all means,
namely, blood alliance with the conquering race.
The Forest of Yucatan.
So much for the people ; but what of the conditions of travel in
Yucatan ? The roads, they were abominable. You jolted over bowl-
ders, rock seams, and ledges, at a run in carts with enormously heavy,
tired wheels, squirming in swinging boxes on mattresses of vegetable
pollen, and tossed like dice in a dice-box. The food } That we car-
ried with us and cooked ourselves. Black beans ; rarely meat when a
bull was killed ; cocoa, red wine from France, and ham from the United
States ; rice and potatoes, sometimes delicious fruits that we had never
tasted before, and oranges. What would we have done without them
J
364 Henry C. Mercer,
to quench our thirst after long tramps, when we rolled bags full of
them upon the floors of caves where there was no water ? But most
of the danger and much of the difficulty of exploration in Yucatan are
embodied in one fact, and that fact is the existence of the forest. I had
expected to see a luxuriant Amazonian tangle, to stumble over the roots
of enormous trees festooned with orchids, to feel the damp touch of suc-
culent leaves where serpents lurked and insects swarmed, to wonder at
the color of butterflies and parrots. Instead, I saw a stunted, leafless
thicket thickly tangled with thorns, not more striking in appearance
than some dry swamp overgrown with alder and blackberry bushes in
the United States in December. There were no large trees, no patches
of grass, no colors ; there was no noise of insects and no superabun-
dance of birds. Under foot lay withered leaves, dry, loose stones, and
ledges of yellow rock.
In this wilderness the traveler loses his way. Fever attacks him.
The explorer, devoured with wood-lice, fails of heart. And where are
you going to dig, among the stones, dead leaves and briers.^ In certain
places where the thin, red soil has collected lie haciendas with flelds of
hemp, sugar cane, or maize. But elsewhere from Chiapas to Belize,
from the Gulf on the north to the Cordil-dil-lieras on the southwest,
this tangled, thirsty thicket covers everything. Revolted Indians hid-
ing away in it, and using it as a bulwark against their enemies, hold
their own in its depths. I do not believe the rumors of temples and
cities still flourishing in it unknown to white men, but I am sure that
Maler has found many structures buried in its recesses that escaped
Stephens, Waldeck, and Charnay,* and that no one ever heard of be-
fore, though those known to us, like Uxmal, Labna, and Chichenitza,
are wonderful enough.
Not yet, owing to the difficulty of digging in the stones and briers,
or of cutting down the thicket, and building scaffolds so as to even see
or photograph them, have they been adequately excavated or studied.
And there they stand, rapidly vanishing, it must be said, because of
their imperfect construction. And because their walls rest on no true
arches, because the joints are not bound nor the stones squared, and
because the facing is not linked to the heart, they crumble to pieces
more rapidly than the ancient • buildings of Egypt and Assyria, Rome
and Greece.
Some are easy to reach. You might sail from New York and see
Uxmal in ten days, but I am half glad that stories of fever and snakes,
I Dwarf's House *
Cave Hunting in Yucatan, 365
heat and thirst, have frightened away the horde of tourists who, rush-
ing in, would rob the region of its unconscious charm. So let the
ruins remain in solitude. Let them disappear in silence surrounded
by all the mystery of the forest.
At Uxmal these marvelous structures are set on high mounds and
platforms that look like natural hills as you catch glimpses of them
from the distant sierra. The so-called House of the Dwarf stands
upon the highest mound of all, and you climb to it on a stone face by
narrow and steep steps, where a fall would be no less sure death than
a slip on the sides of the great Pyramid at Gizeh. The wind blew
fiercely when we stood there for the first time, and fortunately for us,
heavy clouds drifted across the sky, darkening the strange waifs below
us, that rose out of the thicket. The wilderness stretched away to
the hills. As we had seen it often before from the sierra, it had as-
sumed again that day its tint of deceitful blue. It seemed as if there
were cool places where rivers flowed, and where the cloud shadows fell
upon it, pleasant lawns and high trees. But these mirage-like allure-
ments were the false wiles of the ever-present forest, here as parched,
shadeless, and thirsty as ever.
In the tangle of thorns below, all sign of communication between
building and building, all traces of smaller dwellings, of aqueducts or
roads, seemed to be lost. But who had yet had the strength or cour-
age to search for these things in this most feverish of places, where
at one time even the cattle died ; where I was told that Indians did
not survive two generations } Hard enough was it to penetrate the
curtain of briers and mantle of rubbish about the sides and walls of
the great buildings, as Charnay and LePlongeon had done, so as even
to photograph or study them. The House of Turtles, the Casa-del-
Gubernador, the Nunnery ; what significance had these names invented
by the Spaniard, as we walked through a false arch into an immense
courtyard, and saw walls on every side covered with a symbolism in
stone that antedated the coming of the European } Monstrous masks,
projections like the trunks of elephants, grotesque tongues, great eyes,
rows of teeth, rising suns, phallic signs, and above all the great rattle-
snake with plumed human head-dress confronted us with a meaning
that was lost. It came upon the mind in a sense of something ma-
levolent; something symbolic of horrible and bloody themes of sac-
rifice ; of torture and awful ceremony in the native manuscripts. It
seemed to rise from the forest and haunt the memory of our journey in
366 Henry C. Mercer,
the wilds. Were we in the nineteenth century ? Were we looking at
things that had existed, or were we wandering in a land of dreams ? In
these strange impressions, never known before, we felt the fascination
of ancient America so potent to encompass the searcher in the tierra •
caliente and lead him astray. So often had it betrayed him with
strange fancies, that counting up the names of well-known explorers
who have become disturbed or distressed in this study, which I pray
you to excuse me from doing here, the French have invented a phrase
of sinister meaning when they say : Toutes les Americanistes devant
fous. All the students of ancient America go mad.
Caves.
But what of the caves which had occupied our thoughts continu-
ously from the first } Did we succeed in exploring them, or the chief
group of them that lay scattered among and between the ruined cities.^
Were they what we expected, and did they contain the evidence we
sought } In answer to which questions let me say that our first look
at the caves brought disappointment. Instead of being what I had
expected to find them, they were unlike any caves I had ever seen
before. Caves that contain the remains of men or animals in the
United States or Europe generally open into the sides of cliflFs or
escarpments of rock. But these yawned down into the ground like
wells, sloping inward like the sides of an ink-bottle. The fact was,
there were no cliffs in Yucatan. No rivers had cut across beds of
rock, thus laying bare caves in cross section. But erosion had pro-
ceeded directly downward till holes opened in the cave ceiling. Some-
times piles of stones had fallen into these skylights, almost reaching
their overhanging edge. Often trees grew up to their brink. But ;
you generally had to climb down on rude sapling ladders made by '
Indians, on trees or byxopes, and so difficult was it to get into many
of these caverns, that they would have been ruled out of an explorer's
consideration in other countries. Savage peoples preferring more ac-
cessible shelters would have avoided them, and so doubtful was it that
many of them would contain all or any considerable part of the evi-
dence we sought, that it seemed as though our expedition had already
failed ; as if, as far as cave hunting was concerned, we had come to
Yucatan in vain. And for a time the prospect was discouraging in the
extreme, until an overlooked consideration restored the caves to all
Cave Hunting in Yucatan, 367
their importance. It was the consideration embodied in the word
agua^ water, one of the first and last words a traveler hears in Yucatan.
Broadly speaking, the peninsula is waterless. A few exceptions con-
front us in the muddy, stagnant pools called aguadaSy and a few stony
channels on the northeast coast only active in the rainy season. But
with these allowed for, there are no streams, springs, or lakes in the
region. To get water you must go under ground for it. You must
bore wells, or find it in caves where it drops from the roof. The
ancient Mayas lived on rain water collected in the rainy seasons, and
stored in cemented cisterns which now form one of the most impor-
tant features of the ruins. But what did they do before the cisterns
were built, before they had established themselves in the region and
constructed the cities } The important answer to this question is, that
the caves supply water, and that since the early immigrants could not
bore wells in regions where there were no aguadaSy they must needs
have ransacked the caves for water or perished. And the evidence
soon showed that from the time of their first coming they had entered
the caves by ladders when necessary, and halted for a while near the
refreshing pools or dripping stalactites.
So after all, the whole story of man's life in Yucatan was in our
hands and lay buried in the caves. The lowest film of trodden earth,
of charcoal, ashes, and pottery, marked the advent of the first comer,
the uppermost that of the last, and when once we reajized this, our
work flourished. But the trouble of it was to get the right cave — a
cave where the floor rubbish had not become mixed by sliding, where
great blocks had not fallen from the ceiling to obstruct work, where
we could dig to the living rock at the bottom without blasting or im-
possible expense ; and at last we found it.
At a wild place in the hills called Oxkintok in the midst of a group
of little known ruins, not half a mile from a stone mound that con-
tained a complex series of passages described as a labyrinth, within
walking distance of our headquarters at Sefior Escalante's hacienda
of Chalcetok, Mr. Corwith chanced upon a cave, which when we came
to examine it promised to answer all our expectations.
Like all the other caves it was entered through an orifice or sky
window. But the fallen rocks had so choked the entrance that ingress
was easy. And one of the chief desiderata for the exploration of all
caves was fulfilled when we found that even then in the midst of the
dry season it dripped water, and that ancient stone dishes hollowed
368 Henry C. Mercer,
from blocks of limestone lay about the floor or stood full of water un-
der the stalactites. More than this, at the base of the skylight which
lit the chamber at its farther end, lay a heap of stones which proved to
consist largely of dressed blocks, chips, and partly worked water dishes
left there by the ancient builders of the ruins, who were thus shown
at the first glance to have come to the cave not only to get water, but
to get stone. A few small crannies leading away from the spacious
room had been walled up by the Indians as blinds for shooting doves.
But it was the only room, and its smooth earthen floor presented the
only place to dig. As sure as it was that the people of the surround-
ing ruins had visited this place to get water, so sure was it that proof
of their presence in the form of layers of ashes, charcoal, and pot-
sherds, of chips of stone or implements of bone, together with the
remains of contemporary animals, lay under foot. No rocks obstructed
us, and there was no chance for land sliding or disturbance. Directly
in the middle of the chamber in the dim light of the roof window,
we had found the place to settle the question of man's antiquity in
Yucatan.
It was not light enough where we stood to blow out the candles by
whose aid we had come stumbling onward for some distance through
the darkness and over loose rocks. The Indians took off their san-
dals and set down the shovels and pickaxes, and the large round bas-
kets supported by straps across their foreheads. We spread their
contents — specimen bags, tape measures, monocular level, India-ink
and pens — upon the ground, and then marked with trowels a rec-
tangle to include the area of our trench, about 20 feet long by 4 broad
across the middle of the cave floor.
No common curiosity, no desire to unearth beautiful vases, figure-
ines of jade, or ornaments of obsidian, inspired us as the Indians be-
gan to dig. All these things lay above ground and around us in the
mounds and cisterns, and in the rubbish near the ruins. We were
hunting for a few broken potsherds and bones. But they were to
tell us more than all the rest. They would answer the unanswered
question, how long had man lived in Yucatan } — a question which
here in the heart of prehistoric America we proposed to test for the
first time, by searching for the earliest footprints of humanity in the
earth beneath our feet.
We held the candles downward as the Indians turned up the lumps
of earth with the pickaxes, and saw the ground caked thick with pot-
Cave Hunting in Yucatan, 369
sherds and the bones of the deer. When we had dug a great hole 2
feet deep, we had passed a surface layer of human rubbish which we
studied well, to find under it a band of comparatively undisturbed
earth. When we had gone 5 feet another subdivision of the rubbish
layer was plainly visible, some 1 5 inches thick, lying still deeper. The
discolored earth was full of broken potsherds of various colors and
makes, and intermixed with the bones of still existing animals, while
in it and below the surface we found no trace of the Spaniard.
Very certainly we were working among the leavings of the builders of
the ruins, but we soon left the rubbish behind us and dug downward
into the unknown. The earth was red and comparatively soft. The
pit grew to the depth of 7, 10, and 12 feet. Days passed as we toiled
on. At each new digging we clambered down to go over the bottom
inch by inch with trowels and candles. We built props against the
side so as to scrutinize them in the gloom for traces of layers. The
small snail shells and bat bones continued, but the charcoal and ashes
had stopped, and with them all traces of man. What would come
next }
How shall I describe the intervals when I walked about the cavern
as the work went on ; while I looked at the colors of the tinted sta-
lactites overhead; while the weird rustling of the banana trees that
rose from the cave floor through the skylight, and beat the crusts with
their boughs, filled the cave with echoes, or slanting sun gleams fell
upon our heap of oranges till they glowed in the twilight like tongues
of flame. The fact that we were upon the track of a new knowledge
inspired us. If man were to intervene between us and the living rock,
he was the predecessor by a long interval of the ruin builder ; perhaps
a stone chipper ignorant of the art of polishing stone, perhaps an
undeveloped or ape-like savage who struggled for existence with the
megatherium, the fossil bear, or the formidable saber-toothed tiger of
Port Kennedy.
Smeared with clay, weary, full of misgivings of the caving in of
the trench or some unexpected obstruction, we toiled on by candle-
light ; the more thrilled with excitement the deeper we dug, until at
last all anxiety ended when the pickaxe clanged on solid rock. We
were done. It was over. We had penetrated for the first time this
region of discovery to its uttermost limit, and had found, in the thick
red interval below the culture layers of the surface, nothing but bats,
snails, and rabbits. Here, where the primitive savage must have left
370 Henry C. Mercer.
his sign if he existed, there was no primitive savage, no trace of
humanity. The human evidence began and ended with the layers
above. They stood for the builders of the ruins — a people who, judged
by the potsherds of the layer, had arrived equipped with the art of
making pottery, who had not, therefore, developed their culture in
Yucatan, but had brought it with them from somewhere else. They
represented an invasion of the peninsula fairly in accord with the
Maya annals — something about a thousand or fifteen hundred years
old ; modern as compared with humanity in Europe, that was all. It
had been suspected, but we had presented direct evidence on the sub-
ject for the first time.
This, then, was the testimony of the cave at Oxkintok. Let it
stand for all the twenty-nine caves explored; since all, one after an-
other, expressed the same fact more or less clearly as they were more
or less fit for excavation. For the reasons stated in my book, " The
Hill Caves of Yucatan,'* ^ we were satisfied ; with this proof in our hands
the work was done. Defeat would have been to , fail to find caves
favorable for excavation. But we had found them. We had been
eminently successful ; and though to make assurance doubly sure we
pushed on, and continued to examine caves that always repeated and
never contradicted what we had already learned, the work had lost its
zest. What remained were glimpses of rare and wondrous beauty that
rewarded us at these places ; such a sight as we saw at Actun Xpukil
(cave of mice), where rotunda after rotunda, lit from above and over-
grown with banana groves, opened downward by what seemed subter-
ranean valleys and mountains ; as at Xabaka (cave of the coal-black
water), where the dark pool lay in the gloom of an immense chamber
reached by a chasm overhung with trees and ferns, and yawning from
several sunny little recesses haunted by bees ; like Xkokikan (the cave
of serpents), where Indians told of intertwined masses of snakes writh-
ing at the bottom of a gulf ; or like Actun Benado, where the tinted
walls of an immense rotunda, lit from above, rose about you like the
complex vaultings of a gothic cathedral on whose walls Indians had
carved the figures of animals.
But of all the fair sights of Yucatan, fairest of all and last to be
forgotten, is beautiful Loltun. Rock of flowers indeed ! where, like the
* The Hill Caves of Yucatan ; or, A Search for Evidence of Man's Antiquity in the Cav*
erns of Central America. Philadelphia : J. B. Lippincott Co., 1896.
Fig. 5. Actum Xpukiu {Cane of Mict.)
Actun Xpukil {Cavi vf Afiet) is in the mountains, two milet west of the
haeitnda o( Chalcetok, Yucatan, and four miles from the ruined dty of Oxlcin-
t(^; one of the largest and most beautiful caverns in Yucatan, containing fifty-
nine stone water-dishea and many relics of the builders of the neighboring
ruins. View from the lirst rotunda into the second rotunda, showing the effect
of the skylight upon vegetation underground. Palm trees flourish in the cooler
air. Alamo roots reach the cave floor from the brink of ihe skytighl eEghty
to one hundred feet above.
'paiaA03sip seu sjooi »[)
JO Mvi) o}j 'Euini 3uiioqi|3iau sqi }a U3i[cin aiji Xq 3uip[inq |[gil ioj aienbi
pMSajp iO >SJE|iOlll JO Eai|C!p-J3)IM JOJ p311O[[0l| UMq 3AEI( q31t(» JO ^UKin
■siuamSBij 9uoissui[i U3[|e} jo dv»q « uo 8upttOjS »i( saaii eusueq aqj,
TcoxMiMXO 'IO aAVO aaxvjvi shx hi xhoiiaxs "9 f>'A
(.
Cave Hunting in Yucatan, 371
enchanted garden that Aladdin saw, doomed to vanish at an ill-chosen
word, groves rustled under ground, and by the quiet light of the sky
windows fringed with forest, it seemed always afternoon. A bluish
reflection made the air appear like liquid. By the great vaults where
cool drops fell, we seemed to be walking under the sea at places where
enormous fish, not stranger in shape than the stalagmites, might swim
from labyrinths of coral. Here we were neither in the heavens above,
or on the earth beneath, but by the waters under the earth ; and the
airs that drew cool through the underground gardens were one of the
delights of Paradise upon those scorching days.
When the cavern had yielded its secret after ten days of toil, as
we were about to say farewell to it for thie last time, its superhuman
beauty came irresistibly upon us. Then the great chasms and gal-
leries leading into an unknown blackness had lost their terror. Then
stalagmites, that rose in forms of men and beasts from the floor,
seemed to wear gentle smiles. In the pleasant air the birds chirped
alluringly from about the skylights, while from under the blue arches
seemed to come a rustle of leaves that repeated the whisper — here is
rest. A vague regret, a confusion of motives stirred us. We felt the
power of an enchantment potent to beguile us, like the lotus eaters, to
forget the way home. •
We have been told that our expedition was a failure because. we
did not contrive to bring back a store of vases painted with hiero-
glyphs, remarkable objects of jade, bladjss of obsidian, or even naanu-
scripts. Forgive us if we did not retiurn laden with these things,
if, in the first place, we did not goVto Yucatan to find them.
Neither did we go there to find fossil maiv but the truth. To defend
our work from the charge of failure is to say that we have cited for the
first time the evidence of caves to set a limit to the speculations of
archaeologists in Yucatan ; that by a newly applied test of much im-
portance we have . fixed a reasonable antiquity for the ruins and the
builders of the ruins, and that by proof rather than guesswork we
have shown that the culture of the Mayas was not developed in Yuca-
tan, but brought from abroad.
As far as the geological antiquity of the human race is concerned,
shall we not infer that Yucatan, that center of archaeological interest,
has been fairly eliminated from the field of search, and that from our
labor it may be concluded, not unjustly, that if you would find fossil
man you must look for him elsewhere.^
372 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
RESULTS OF TESTS MADE IN THE ENGINEERING
LABOR A TORIES,
VIII.
Received May 20, 1897.
Applied Mechanics.
Tests on Bolted Joints.
The fourteen tests on bolted joints given in the following sum-
mary were planned with the aim of finding the effect on the efficiency
of the joint and on the tensile strength of the net section of plate, of
increasing the compression per square inch in front of the rivets.
All the specimens were made from the same sheet of boiler plate
of a tensile strength of 68,000 pounds per square inch. The bolts
were of machine steel of 96,300 pounds tensile strength per square
inch. The holes in the plate were drilled and rimmed, and the bolts
were turned so as to be an easy driving fit with a machinist's hammer.
Micrometer readings of the stretch of the joints were taken from
both the top and the bottom sides, there being two sets of measuring
points on each side.
Details and cuts of the first eight joints were printed in the
Technology Quarterly, Vol. IX, 1896, pages 1 71-180 {Results of
Tests, F). Joints 9 and 10 were made with three bolts, joints 1 1 and
12 with two bolts, and joints 13 and 14 with one bolt.
Joints Nos. 2, II, 12, 13, and 14 failed by the shearing of the bolts.
The broken joints are shown by the half-tone cuts, Figures 1-5.
Bolted Joints,
373
SUMMARY OF TESTS.
c
O
E
V
•*
ji
a
m
•*•
*'
o
O
«
Xi
«M
c
o
•
^
V
u
>94
N
*••
••*
CA
cu
H
a
is,
o
JS
c
o
V
V
V
c
J
E
a
E
M
(4
T
;
2 "
•43"
2
3
2 "
2A"
•43"
•43
4
[
2A"
•43"
5
t "
3 "
•44"
6
I "
3; "
•44"
7
ly
4 "
•45 '
8
«*"
4
•45''
9
•i"
4J"
.45
lO
II
:i"
4} "
5| '
•45'
•45
12
i|'
si "
.45
'3
:!'■
a > • •
■ • • •
•'♦5'
.44
6.01"
6.00"
7.69;;
7.70
9.76
12.00
12.00
14.64"
14.64
11.55"
11.55,,
5.54,
5^5'''
>t
I 62
1. 61
2.18
2.18
2.97
2.97
3.88
3-88
4.90
4.90
396
3-97
1.87
1.82
102,000
101,100
137,000
136,000
« 79. 500
180,700
238,500
225,500
292, oco
292,000
194.000
197,700
96,300
96,700
.2 o B
a
g ° •?
H C J
63,100
62,600
62,900
62,300
60,400
60,800
61,500
58,100
59,600
59,600
49,000
49,800
51,400
53.200
-J
E^^
E 2*5
38,500
38,100
38,000
37.700
38,100
38,300
39,900
37,600
39.700
39.700
32,700
.^3.300
32.400
32,600
a
So .
S ° e
B c 3
U fc. u
V a a
2 clx.
u ^^
s n
105,400
<
26%
'4
104,500
121,000
120,500
1?"
136,000
•57
136,900
•5«
158,600
.59"
148,600
>73,«oo
.56"
.68"
173, »oo
.66"
22%
156,700
.68"
160,800
.68"
155.600
.66"
159,800
.66"
t
^c
a
•s
u
292,000
No. 9. TEST ON BOLTED JOINT. (Figure i.)
Date, Februarv' 25, 1897.
North Sidk.
South
Side.
•
c
Top.
Bottom.
c
Top,
Bottom.
V
u
.
Mean.
DifFere
•
s
ti
Differei
A vera
ence.
-o
•0
1
1
I
2
I
2
I
a
"3
5,000
.13*4
•i3«5
.1287
.1287
.1301
.0532
•0532
.0534
•0532
•0532
25,000
.1367
.1365
.1327
.1326
• 1346
.0045
•0532
•0532
.0526
.0526
.0529
.0003
.0021
.0021
45.000
.1420
.1418
.1382
.1380
•'^^
•0054
•0525
•0525
.0521
.0521
.0523
.0006
.0024
.0045
65/xx>
.1502
.1503
.1470
.1470
.i486
.0086
•0523
.0520
.0520
.0520
.0521
.0002
.0042
.0087
Load dropped off for 21 hours.
65,000
.0491
.0491
.0487
•0487
.0489
.1604
.1566
•1585
85,000
.0450
.0450
.0450
•0449
.0450
.0039
.1852
.1852
.1819
.1819
•»835
.0250
.0106
105,000
•0376
.0376
.0376
.0376
.0375
.0075
.2390
.2390
.2352
•2355
.2372
•0537
.0231
125,000
.0370
•0370
.0383
.0384
•0377
.0002
.2647
.2645
.2619
.2620
.2633
.0261
.0132
145,000
.0526
•0524
•0577
•0577
.055 »
.0174
•3325
•3324
•3352
•3350
•3338
.0705
•0439
165,000
.0869
.0869
.0912
.0914
.0891
.0340
.3950
.4846
.3950
.3948
.3948
.4835
•3949
.0611
■0476
185,000
.1520
.1522
•»552
.1552
.1539
.0648
.4845
.4832
.4840
.0891
.0769
Maximum load.
.0193
.0424
.0556
•0995
.1471
.2240
Size of bolts ij"
Pilch of bolts 4l"
Thickness of plate .45'
Width of plate 1464"
Area net section cf plate .... 4^90 s^- in.
Maximum tension per sq. in. on net
section of plate 59.600 lbs.
Maximum shear per sq. in. on bolts . 39,700 lbs.
Maximum compression per sq. in. on
plate 173,100 lbs.
Average thickness of plate in front of
bolts at fracture .68"
Reduction of area net section of plate, 25%
Efl&dency of joint 65.2%
374 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
35.000
105,000
115,000
135,000
135.000
145.000
155,000
165,000
175,000
175,000
185,000
195,000
No. 10. TEST ON BOLTED JOINT. (Figure 2.)
Date, March i, 1897.
NOKTH SiDS.
8
South Sidb.
•
s
k g e differ-
i
Top.
Bottom.
Top.
Bottom.
1
.
•
a
8
5
■
0
Avert
ence.
•0
J
z
2
I
a
1
a
I
a
•3
5,000
•0367
.0365
.0415
.0418
.0391
.0336
.0333
.oa84 1 .0183
.0309
25,000
■0373
■0375
.0378
.0395
.039a
.0384
.0007
.0426
.0428
.0344 \ .0343
.0385
.0076
.0035
45.000
.0379
.0395
.0393
.0388
.0004
.0517
.0519
.0431
.0420
.0469
.0084
.0044
.0079
65,000
•0343
•0344
.0355
.0357
.0350
.0038
.o6ai
.o6aa
■0525
.0536
.0574
.0105
.0034
.0113
85,000
.0341
.0340
.0358
■0357
.0349
.0001
•0724
•o7»7
.0634
.0633
.0680
.0106
.0053
.0166
Load dropped off 17 hours.
.0204
.0268
.0199
.0207
.0198
.0169
.0108
.0075
.0045
.oaoi
.0277
.0279
.0348
.0240
.0824
.0833
.0752
•0753
.0788
.0270
.0349
.0309
.0069
•0953
•0954
.0888
.0890
.0921
.0x33
.oxox
.oaoa
•0277
.0278
.0239
.0070
.1470
.1470
•1404
.1405
•«437
.0516
.0223
.0208
.0285
.0286
.0247
.0008
.1487
.1489
.1422
.1423
■»455
.0018
.0013
.0200
.0277
.0278
.0238
.0009
•1583
.1585
.1522
.1523
•1553
.0098
.0045
.0169
.0247
.0247
.0208
.0030
.1790
.1790
.1728
.1730
.1760
.0307
.0089
.0x10
.0191
.0192
.0150
.0058
.2141
.3140
.208t
.2082
.2111
.035*
.0147
.0076
.0158
.0157
.0117
.0033
.2400
.2400
•»340
.2342
.237*
.0260
.0114
.0046
.0131
.0129
.0088
.0039
.2676
.3674
.2625
.2625
.3650
.0279
.0x25
.0367
.0490
.0503
.0548
.0637
•0784
.0908
.XI23
Load dropped off 3 hoars.
.085 X
.0850
.0850
.0848
0845 i .0842
.0943
•0943
.1040
.0943
.0940
.1042
.0897
.0895
.0942
.0002
.0047
.2922
.3x60
.35*6
.3919
.3160
.3536
.2804
.3047
.34a5
.2803
•3047
*-34a5
.2862
.3104
■3476
.0242
.0372
.0x20
.0330
."43
.X463
392,000 Maximum load.
Size of bolts if
Pitch of bolts 4l"
Thickness of plate .45"
Width of plate 14.64"
Area net section of plate .... 4.90 sq. in.
Maximum tension per sq. in. on net
section of plate 59i6oo lbs.
Maximum shear per sq. in. on bolts . 39,700 lbs.
Maximum compression per sq. in. on
plate i73>ioo lbs.
Average thickness of plate in front of
bolts at fracture .66"
Reduction of area net section of plate, 33%
Effideocy of joint 65.3%
Bolted Joints.
375
No. II. TEST ON BOLTED JOINT. (Figure 3.)
Date, March 3, 1897.
NOKTH SiDB.
South Sidb.
1
•
Top.
Bottom.
•
Top.
Bottom.
■
s
s
•0
•
g
«
jj
(I
•0
I
2
I 2
2
5
I
2
I
a
3
JU
> w
Total
5.000
1
.2657 .2655
2713
.2710
.2684
.0972
.0972
.1021
.1019
.0996
25,000
•»734 1 -2736
.2785
.2782
•a759
•0075
.1000
.1000
.1041
.1039
.1020
.0034
.0055
.0055
45.000
.2907 .2<)04
•a939
.2938
.2922
.0163
.0978
.0976
.1011
.1013
•0995
.0025
.0069
.Ot24
65,000
.3025
.3038
•3"7
.3127
.3077
•0155
•0997
.0797
.1030
.X030
.1014
.0019
.0087
.0211
Load dropped off for 21 hotirs.
65,000
.1090
.1093
.1119
.1448
.11x9
.1x05
.3x28
.3x28
.3148
•3150
.3138
85,000
.1435
.1431
.«449
.X441
.0336
•3i9«
•3194
.3204
.3203
.3198
.0060
.0x98
105,000
-2»73
.2»73
.2159
.2162
.2167
.0726
•3657
■3657
.3664
.3665
.3661
.0463
.0595
125,000
•3325
•33»5
■3316
•3316
.33a »
.1154
.4633
.4635
.4648
.4646
•4391
.0730
.0942
145,000
.4876
.4876
.4900
.4900
.4888
.1567
.6050
.6050
.6100
.6x00
.6075
.X684
.1626
194,000
.0409
.1004
.X946
•357a
Maximum load.
Size of bolts if^'
Pilch of bolts 5}"
Thickness of plate .45"
Width of plate ix.55"
Area xiet section of plate .... 3.96 sq. in.
Majdmum tension per aq. in. on net
section of plate 49i000 lbs.
Maximum shear per sq. in. on bolts . 32,700 lbs.
Maximum compressioa per sq. in. on
plate x56,7oolbs.
Average thickness of plate in front of
bolts at fracture .68"
Reduction of area net section of plate, 6%
Average width of bolt holes at fracture, 1.46"
Average length of bolt holes at fracture, a.23"
Efficiency of joint 55%
376 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
No. 12. TEST ON BOLTED JOINT. (Figure 4.)
Date, March 9, 1897.
North Sidb.
nee.
South Sidb.
ncc.
1
•0
u
c
Top.
Bottom.
Top.
Bottom.
1 K
•
•
s
Mean.
Q
A vera
ence.
•a
1
I
2
.1010
I
2
.1834
I
3
I
2
"3
5,000
.1009
.1837
.1422
1
.1075 .1076
1719
.1719
•>397
25,000
•»o43
.1040
.1807
.1803
.1423
•ooor
.1170
.1172
.1761
.1762
.1466
.0069
.0035
•0035
45,000
.1000
.1000
.1738
•»739
.1369
.0054
•1432
.M32
.1995
•»995
.1713
.0247
.0097
.0132
55.000
.0966
.0968
.i69«;
.1693
.133'
.0038
.1591
.15S9 .2149
.2r46
.1869
.0156
.0059
.0191
65,000
.0929
.0926
.1648
.1648
.12S8
•0043
.1829 .1827 .2376
.2377
.2103
.0233
.0095
.0286
75,000
.0943
.094a
.»655
•1655
.1299
.0011
.1875 .1875 .2403
.2403
.2139
•0037
.0024
.0310
Load
droppc
d off for 3 hours.
75,000
.0922
.0923
.1622
.1620
.1272
.1928 < .1924
.2408
.S410
.2167
85,000
.0935
•0937
.1639
.1640
.1288
.0016
.2148
.2150
.2678
.2674 )
•24»3
.0346
.0131
.0441
95,000
.1020
. 1021
.1716
.1718
.1369
.0081
.2470
.2470
.2993
.2989
•2730
•03*7
•0199
.0640
105,000
.1295
.1296
.1982
.198^)
.1640
.0271
.2883
.2879
•3392
.3390
•3»36
.0406
•0339
.OQ79
115,000
.1790
.1790
.2472
.2469
• 2130
.0490
•3437
•3441
.3937
•3935
.3688
■0552
.0521
.1500
125,000
nf>l
.2345
•3040
•3027
.2693
.0563
■3995
.3980
■4487
•4480
•4235
•0547
•0555
•2055
197,700
Maxin
lum load.
Size of bolts i|"
Pitch of bolts 5}"
Thickness of plate .45"
Width of plate 11.55"
Area net section of plate . . . . 3.97 sq. in.
Maximum tension per sq. in. on net
section of plate 49,800 lbs.
Maximum shear per iq. in. on bolts . 33,300 lbs.
Maximum compresMon per fq. in. on
plate 160,800 lbs.
Average thickness of plate in front of
bolts at fracture .68"
Reduction of area net section of plate, 7%
Average width of bolt holes at fracture, i .45"
Average length of bolt holes at fracture, 2.27"
Efficiency of joint 56%
Kn;. 3, HoLTKD Joint No. i
;. $■ Bolted Joints Nos. 13 a
Wrought Iron Pipe Colu7nfis,
m
Wrought Iron Pipe Columns.
SUMMARY OF TESTS. March, 1896.
Date of Test.
«*4
^
0
!P
'
■
4;
N
•
h
&>
6fl
0
'«
E
^
•iM
E
(t
«M
<e
.2
•0
0
c:
73
&
"• -•
V
♦*
eK.
o'c
•T3
-s
c
T3
3
3
0
Q
March
March
March
March
March
March
March
March
March
March
In.
In.
31, 1896
2.06
30, 1896
2.04
26. 1896
'♦
2.50
27,1896
A
2.48
10, 1896
3.06
12, i8q6
309
24, 1866
i\
3.60
25,1896
i\
3-59
16, 1896
4.07
20, 1896
4.09
In.
2-37
2-39
2.89
2.88
3 44
348
4.00
3-99
4 53
4 50
.pa
B
o «
•o c
5*«
S
M
M
3
o
In.
In.
69
1
5»
69
93
1
li
93
•
86
93
i
86
93l
86
«oS;
100.5
I05I
loo-s
i'7/«
100 5
'«7i
\
100.5
T3
re
E
3
£
M
re
Lbs.
30,000
29,800
34,500
37.000
45.500
51,000
55.000
65,000
80,000
69.000
u
M
N
M
o .
c
re o
<
Sq. in.
1.08
1.22
1.65
1.68
1.94
2.01
2.39
2.39
3 'I
2.76
re
o
£.=■
Eg*
re S.
3
E u
o*"
O
Lbs.
27,800
24,500
20,900
22,000
23.500
25.300
23,000
27,200
25.7tx>
25,000
24,300,000
22,200,000
25,200,000
25,900,000
27,700,000
25,100,000
25,200,000
24,600,000
25,800,000
24,900,000
bfibA
O 3
.S-a a
^ re o
re fc" •—
o
88.8
89.1
98.1
98.4
81.4
80.5
78.2
78.5
77.1
77-3
The above ten columns were tested with ordinary cast iron flange couplings screwed on the ends.
SUMMARY OF TESTS. October and Novkmber, 1896.
Date of Test. "S
Nov. 17,
Nov. 18,
Nov. 16,
Nov. 19,
Nov. 2,
Nov. 20,
Nov. 10,
Nov. II,
Oct. 21,
Oa. 26,
Nov. 25,
Nov. 4,
Nov. 5,
Nov. 9,
Nov. 12,
' »ct. 22,
(kt. 23,
Nov. 25,
^•'kv. 6,
Nov. 7,
t
•a
0
V
V
.2
E
§
M
re
-o
re
•0
V
c
u
•0
E
^
(A
0
M
3
2;
c
0
E
3
"o
So
a
1^*
3 e V
.2 3 W
0 re 3 ^
H = E-'a
O
J
E
3
E
"h
re
Lbs.
5.000- 55,000
5,000- 45,000
5,000- 55,000
5,000- 45,000
5,000- 35,000
5,000- 45,000
5,000- 65,000
5,000- 65,000
5,000- 65,000
5,000- 65,000
o- 80,000
5,000- 45,000
5,000- 55,000
5,000- 85,000
5,000-105,000
5,000- 45,000
5,000- 65,000
25,000- 85,000
5,000- 85,000
20,000- 70,000
Ins.
.0565
.0520
.0687
•0556
.0480
.0719
.0578
.0538
•0545
.0800
.1083
•0437
.0604
.0588
.0791
•0405
.0542
.0618
.0814
•0525
Lbs.
92,000
78,000
85,000
81,700
75,000
77,000
1 18,000
122,000
115,000
103,500
112,000
112,000
116,000
143,000
145,000
145,000
142,000
145,000
132,000
u
M
cn
w
O
s
re o
&
T3
re
_0
E
= c?
.§•-
K C7»
re «a
Sq.
2.
2,
2.
2.
Ins.
96
65
97
96
Lbs.
3«,«oo
29,400
28,700
27,600 I
modu-
cily.
length
of gy-
f" **
•m «
•2 «
c 3
.2^ c
M •'
•« re 0
t'o
2 is
C 3
s^fi
0 —
■k
U
V. Q.
2.77
27,100
2.43
3«,7oo
3.98
29,600
425
28,700
4-15
27,700
3 29
3'. 400
3.f»
31,100
3.85
29,100
3-94
29,400
4.82
29,700
4.73
30,700
4-53
5.22
27,800
463
io,7oo
4.46
32,500
4-43
29,800
23,900,000
23,300,000
24,500,000
24.3*^,000
27,100,000
27,500,000
26,100,000
26,200,000
26,500,000
27,300,000
24,600,000
28,500,000
25,200,000
28,200,000
26,700,000
26,200,000
25,500,000
25,200,000
26,500,000
25,800,000
63 -4
62.7
79.1
79.2
94-7
94.6
54-2
63.9
77.1
75-7
76.4
94.7
95-3
53- 1
53.2
63.6
63.7
63.6
78.9
79-4
The above twenty columns had the ends turned off square in a lathe, and were supported on cast iron caps.
All the above columns were tested in the same manner as the spruce columns already described in Tbchnology
Quarterly, Vol. VIII, 1895, pp. 219-247.
3/8 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
Torsion Tests.
TORSION TESTS ON BURDEN'S BEST WROUGHT IRON, 2'' DIAMETER.
9
mm
Q
•
e
•
M
«*
0
^
^^
e
\
C
«
s
atela
sq. in
i
s
0
«*4
^4
•
■
c
•
r stress
bs. per
M
C
1
0
C
V
• P«
1^
»■
2
V3
27
1
.a
•o.ts
9J0
E":
S c
w
(«
Utsi
Urn
Q
Q
U
w
0
s
?•*
« S c
^Eo
«*! £ E->
•5^ C •
ISIS*
Is id
Js
Sis'?
o-S'S
** c S
fi rt «
§ g o
111
-«?
o ca C k!
C O at •<
"S c
oy
3 a
c
■Si-
CO
Z 1:
J5
t«
s
o
o
hi
= s
ts
at J
.Si
.a «
« M
J.S
I
Oct.
23
a
Oct.
28
.1
Oct.
29
4
Oct.
30
S
Oct.
31
6
Nov.
16
7
Nov.
18
8
Nov.
19
9
Nov.
20
10
Dec.
I
II
Dec.
3
12
Dec.
5
»,^
Dec.
8
14
Dec.
10
15
Dec.
II
16
Dec.
IS
*7
Feb.
26
18
Mar.
2
'9
Mar.
3
20
Mar.
4
21
Mar.
s
22
Mar.
8
23
Mar.
'S
24
Mar.
16
25
Mar.
18
26
Mar.
»9
27
Mar.
25
28
Apr.
6
29
Apr.
12
30
Apr.
13
31
Apr.
M
32
Apr.
22
33
Apr.
28
2.01
63.8
40.0
18,000
11,300
85,050
2.01
59.0
40.0
21,600
13,600
86,400
2.01
53.0
360
21,600
13,600
84,510
2.00
58.8
40.0
18,000
11,500
87,480
2.00
65.5
40.0
18,000
11,500
85,410
2.01
60.2
40.0
18,000
11,300
85,590
2.02
58.5
36.0
21,600
13,400
13,800
85,140
2.00
57.0
36.0
21,600
82,650
2.02
57.8
40.0
21,600
13,400
86,580
2.02
59.5
40.0
18,000
11,100
86,040
2.02
60.0
40.0
19,800
12,200
87,840
2.02
60.0
40.0
21,600
13,400
88,200
2.01
53-3
36.0
21,600
13,600
87,480
2.01
59-5
40.0
19,800
18,000
12,400
83,970
2.01
59.5
40.0
11,400
84,780
2.03
61.0
40.0
19,800
12,100
83,520
2.00
63.0
40.0
19,800
12,600
84,050
2.02
60.3
40.0
19,800
12,200
85,950
2.01
60.0
40.0
18,000
11,300
84,600
2.02
61.0
40.0
19,800
12,200
83,520
2.00
60.5
40.0
19,800
12,600
86,040
2.01
51.0
36.0
23.400
14,700
85,680
2.01
36.8
40.0
21,600
13.600
87,480
2.01
47.8
30.0
21,600
13,600
85,860
2.01
59-4
42.0
19,800
12,400
85,050
2.01
60.9
42.0
21, 600
13,600
86,400
2.00
59-5
40.0
21,600
13.800
86,400
2.01
58.5
40.G
23,100
14,500
85,650
2.00
58.5
40.0
19,800
12,600
84,870
2.01
58.3
40.0
21,600
13,600
87,300
2 01
58.4
40.0
21,600
13,600
86,490
2.01
58.4
40.0
21,600
13,600
87,120
2.00
59.8
40. G
19,800
12,600
84,870
53,300
54,200
53,000
55.700
54,400
53,700
52,600
52,600
53,500
53,200
54,300
54,400
54,900
52.700
53,200
50,900
53,500
53,100
53,»oo
51,600
54,000
53,700
54,900
53,900
53,300
54,200
55,000
53.700
54,200
54,800
54,200
54,600
54,000
3,600-18,000
3,600-21,600
3,600-21,600
3,600-18,000
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,6oo-i4,4cx>
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
3,600-14,400
o ' "
», 44, 00
2, 14, 30
2, 4, 30
-, 48, 30
.21,30
, 23, o
, 12, 20
, 14, 10
, 21, 10
.21, o
, 20, 30
,21, o
, 14, 10
, 21, 40
, 22, 30
, 20, 20
t, 20, 30
, 21, 20
,21, 10
,22,50
, 21,40
, M, o
, 20, 40
, *,30
, 25, o
, 26, 20
, 21, 10
, 20, 40
. »9, 50
tn 40
10
50
50
,20,
, 18,
. 19,
, 20,
1,300,000
9.50
1,500,000
8.62
1,200,000
6.87
1,600,000
8.40
1,600,000
8.S2
1,200,000
8.82
1,300,000
8.05
1,500,000
7.3«
t, 200,000
8.54
1,200,000
8.61
1,300,000
893
1,200,000
8.48
1,300,000
7.85
1,400,000
8.01
1,200,000
8.32
1,100,000
8.9S
1,700,000
924
1,200,000
7-94
1,400.000
8.62
1,000,000
8.50
1,600,000
8.80
1,300,000
7.35
1,500,000
8.66
1,300,000
7 24
1,500,000
8.92
1,300,000
8.75
1,700,000
9.08
1,500,000
1,000,000
8.30
7.87
1 ,500,000
9-45
1,900,000
8.73
1,600,000
809
1,700,000
8.80
■79
1.76
56
7»
.56
•75
.65
•54
-77
•74
'■79
•70
•77
.62
.68
.77
.76
.58
1.72
.67
'•75
1-73
83
1.82
1.80
'•73
.83
•70
61
•94
1.80
..67
•77
30
44
48
39
35
• «
40
40
42
35
40
41
45
33
385
32
39
45
39
55
36
40
39
38
Notes. — After passing the elastic limit the spedmens were all fractured in the following uniform manner: For
5 minutes the slowest speed was used, giving the power-end jaw a rotation at the rate of one turn in about 13.5
minutes; for the next five minutes a medium speed was used at the rate of one turn in about 5.5 minutes; then the
specimen was fractured under the fastest speed at the rate of one turn in about 3.5 minutes.
After the completion of the first sixteen experiments the testing machine was lined up and carefully readjusted.
Specimen No. 18 broke at the scale-end jaw; No. 29 broke near the middle of the spedroen; and all the remais-
ing specimens broke at the power-end jaw.
Torsion Tests.
TORStON TESTS ON HARD BRASS WIRE.
— TlkU win wu of the ume fndv u that upon vl
lU were nude. (See pi
TORSION TESTS ON COMPOSITION.
Proponiors : Copper, 88% ; Zinc, z% ; Tin, 10%. 1" and j" bars.
s
■ti
? =
S3
3 °
i
•3
i
1
1"
5?
•5=-
P
I
r
%
ill
1
s
s
9.0
..OJ
M-j™
^
Apr
;;
SU
X
11114
jj
to
Api. 18
.6jz
9-*
6.8.
••- 1
M
380 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
TORSION TESTS ON J" ROLLED REFINED IRON.
'%
•s
-I
■ ii
\\\
'^\
III
||5
|-
6,6»
>M
sJ'SS
•.t
.8.97
6J.4"
.,jS
.6.0s
tX
'•Ti
TORSION
TESTS ON J
' ROLLEU
REFINED IRO^.
f~
SE
■1=
s
°i
^f
1
= »
i-s
•5
1
1
■z-z
^1
-A
It
1
J
fil
■Ji
Pl
Ji
ri
<
_
Ftb, 1
' ■ 37S
.10
(OS
IJ.'S
S8.s«.
..9
Ml..
.1.8s
639
sw
Mi.,
6
Mar.
».,,
58,600
'.}?»
654
61,701
■j*
I
.J<"J
6o,,oo
'«>
Mar. 1
58,4™
6)«
■■:8s
•'
Apr-
Apr.
.1(K,
I':°
1??
a CO
6o,,«
'""
A^-
^S
8.s»
8j
''
Apr,
1 -S*"
■
q.jD
*'■'"
Torsion Tests.
381
TORSION TESTS ON COMMON IRON WIRE.
Length of specimen between jaws, 12.0 inches.
••*
0
u
i
er 01 cross
n. (Ins.)
um twisting
ent. (In.
r of turns
en jaws at
re.
nt maximum
i fiber stress.
per sq. in.)
e number of
per inch.
s
*m
S.2
fiE^
Numbe
betwe
fractu
«T3 .
Mm
E
<«
Q i
V
Maxi
mo
lbs.
Appai
OUtS]
(Lbs
Avera
turr
I
Nov. 4
194
113. 2
41.0
79,200
3-4
2
Nov. 5
'94 ,
103.9
41-3
72,900
3-4
3
Nov. 6
■»93
iia.5
42.0
80,000
3-5
4
Nov. 1 1
.192
• 112.3
43-5
80,800
3-6
5
Nov. II
»94
1 16.7
iq.5
81,400
1.6
6
Nov. 12
«93
1131
46.8
80,100
3-9
7
Nov. 13
»93
121. 8
38.5
86,300
3.2
8
Nov. 13
193
112. 1
45-5
79,400
3-8
9
Nov. 16
"93
119.1
48.0
84,400
4.0
10
Nov. 16
193
116.2
45-5
82,300
3-8
It
Nov. 18
«93
108.0
48.3
76,500
4.0
13
Nov. 18
19a
1 16. 5
42.8
83,800
3-6
13
Nov. 18
.193
107.7
41.8
76,300
3 5
14
Nov. 18
193
1 19.0
43-5
84,300
36
'5
Nov. 18
.193
«i7-3
46.5
• 83,100
3 9
16
Nov. 18
193
112.2
46.5
79.500
3 9
TORSION TESTS ON COMMON IRON WIRE.
Annealed at a dull red heat for 8 hours. Length of specimen between jaws, I2.cy'.
<
n
5^
•mm "^
s«
1 t^
"3
1
*rf >— '
E C c
«■ 2 •wm
V.S
V
0
h.
■i 1
e
u •
u c
E.5
g
V 1
■;.s
K 0 S
1^1
52£
3
H .!
sa
«Bd2
= .Si
a^J
U 3
Z
Q C
3
S
Z
t°-
<
1
Nov. 23
193
«
110.6
50.0
78,400
4-2
2
Nov. 25
•93
94.6
47-7
67,000
4.0
3
Nov. 25
»94
95-5
53-9
66,600
4-5
4
Nov. 30
•193
95-4
423
67,600
3-5
5
Nov. 30
«93
95.8
47-3
67,900
3-9
6
Dec. I
194
99.0
38.8
69,000
3-2
7
Dec. 2
192
96.0
55-3
69,000
4.6
8
Dec. 4
194
95.2
42-3
66.400
3-5
9
Dec. 5
*94
983
57.8
68,600
4.8
10
Dec. 10
•94
97-5
47.0
68,600
39
NoTB. — This wire was from same coil as that from which the tests at top of page were made.
h
ill
382 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
TORSION TESTS ON Y BESSEMER STEEL WIRE, COPPERED FINISH.
3
1 ^i
Ss
%%-.
"S
•
«
1
e
S-2
-I
«
ee^
lit
III
1
E
9
S5
|i
?*» c
■5 2 s
Er ^
W 9
> ••
<
I
Nov. 24
.250
12.0
242.6
as-o
79,000
z«o
a
Nov. 30
.250
12.0
252.2
22.8
82,200
9
3
Nov. 30
.249
12. 0
a47-5
a7-3
81,700
Z«3
4
Dec. 1
.249
12.0
238.5
«7.5
78,700
^■3
5
Dec. 2
.250
12.0
248.0
»5-3
80,800
2a I
6
Dec, 3
.250
12.0
243.6
18.5
79.400
I, c
7
Dec. 4
.249
12.0
343 0
24.0
80,200
2«0
8
Dec. 5
.250
12.0
a43-3
24.3
79.300
3*0
9
Dec. 7
.250
12.0
246.0
25-3
80,200
2* I
10
Dec. 10
.249
12.0
246.7
25.0
81,400
3« I
II
Dec. 15
.250
12.0
244.7
26.0
79,800
Sa 1
12
Dec. 15
.250
12.0
236.6
21.4
77,100
1*0
»3
Apr. 7
.250
12.0
2490
24.1
81,400
2«0
M
Apr. 12
.249
12.0
248.0
29.7
81,800
3
>5
Apr. 13
.250
9.0
261.0
20.3
85,300
! ^'^
TORSION TESTS ON J" BESSEMER STEEL WIRE, COPPERED FINISH.
Length of specimen between jaws, 1 2.0 inches.
1;.
er of cross
n. (Ins. )
um twisting
ent. (In.
r of turns
ien jaws at
re.
nt maximum
e fiber stress,
per sq. in.)
e number of
per Inch.
8
2
E$
es^
ill
^
Q
5
s
^
<
I
Feb. 25
.376
836.0
21.53
80,000
1.79
2
Feb. 26
.376
769.0
15.00
73.400
1.25
3
Mar. I
•377
849.0
20.00
81,000
1.67
4
Mar. 3
•375
765-5
12.88
73.800
1.07
5
Mar. 4
•377
810.0
20.60
77,200
1.72
6
Mar. 4
•375
776.0
16.00
74,800
1-34
7
Mar. 5
.375
835.0
12.30
80,500
•1
8
Mar. 10
.376
7730
1540
74.300
9
Mar. II
•375
8460
18.92
82,000
1.58
10
Mar. 15
.377
809.1
17.58
77,000
«.47
II
Mar. 22
•377
811. 0
19.15
77.100
1.60
12
Mar. 23
.376
817.0
6.10
78 500
51
13
Mar. 24
.377
829.0
19.36
78.800
1. 61
14
Mar. 24
•375
803.0
21.71
77.300
1.81
'5
Mar. 25
•377
843.0
23.78
80,300
1.98
Torsion Tests.
383
TORSION TESTS ON V' ANNEALED CAST STEEt.
(Usually known as "Too! Steel.")
i
1
i
1.1
1'
1
si
ill
in
III
III
Iji
It
I
vx
Mir
Hill
ll
Mur
i
Apr
2
i
m6
3
1,8
144
L'::
18.04
.15
9(
TORSION TESTS ON STUBES' STEEL WIRE.
1
»l
0.—
n
.IP
llf
II
1
i
ji
III
Jli
111
111
fi
'
384 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
TENSION TESTS ON REFINED IRON.
c
0
cr
0 «>
0
•
!«^
•«.s^
M
C
0
c
w 0
©•O 3
>>
^\
V
<*4
ri
Spbcimbn.
0
c
•M 3
Je^
*s "S err
'"Si
1
c
w
E
t.
(J
*0>-s
<
0
•5 o'C
0- c^
5 c 3 J5
J? c» u 0
E
U
U
Nov. 9
Refined iron.
1.02
.817
lO.O
1,000-13,000
.0054
27,200,000
26,000
Nov. 10
Refined iron.
I.OI
.801
lO.O
1,000-13,000
.0054
27,700,000
26,000
Nov. 12
Refined iron.
1. 01
.801
lO.O
1,000-13,000
.0053
28,300,000
24."»
Nov. 23
Refintd iron.
1.02
.8.7
lO.O
1,000- 9,000
.0037
26,500,000
26,000
Nov. 30
Refined iron.
I.OI
.801
lO.O
1,000-13,000
.0056
26,800,000
24,000
6
Dec. 2
Refined iron.
1.02
.8.7
lO.O
1,000-13,000
.0056
26,200,000
24,000
7
Dec. 7
Refined iron.
I.OI
.801
lO.O
1,000-13,000
.0053
28,300,000
24,000
8
Feb. a6
Refined iron.
1.02
.817
10. 0
1,000-13,000
.0052
28,200,000
9
Mar. 1
Refined iron.
1.02
.817
lO.O
1,000-13,000
.0054
27,200,000
36,000
ID
Apr. 17
Refined iron.
I.OI
.801
lO.O
1,000- 9,000
.0036
27,700,000
24,000
II
Apr. 28
Refined iron.
I.OI
.801
lO.O
1,000-13,000
.0058
25,800,000
24,000
12
Oct. 23
Refined iron.
•77
.466
lO.O
500- 6,500
.0046
28,000,000
12,000
»3
Oct. 24
Refined iron.
•74
•430
to.o
500- 6,500
.0047
29,700,000
12,000
14
Nov. 6
Refined iron.
•74
•430
lO.O
500- 6,500
.0047
29,700,000
11,000
«S
Nov. 9
Refined iron.
•76
•454
lO.O
12,009
16
Nov. 25
Refined iron.
.76
.454
lO.O
500- 6,500
.0048
27,600,000
14,000
TENSION TESTS ON REFINED \ViO^.^ Concluded.
u
V
a
in
U3
^
^-^
^
tf)
*^
%>
..«
««
E
tM
0
w
^^ ^^
%
.a .5
e
3
Js-
S5
u
n
E
3
E
■3
a
IC
3 .
E.S
c
o
O ""
u
cu
(«
u
c
o
-c
•o
V
V
M
M
3
3
c«
(«
bfl
^^
s
c «
•^
s
c
S V
c^
0 u
l« M
M b
— c
c •»
U.Z
vfiU
*rf .-, ■»
ti^
M
M
«
V
Sx
11
1?
"S V
"C «
D
D
Remarks.
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
II
12
>J
14
«5
16
31.800
32.500
30,000
31,800
30,000
29,400
30,000
31,800
30.000
30,000
25,800
27,c)Oo
25,^)00
26,400
30,900
41,100
37.650
40,400
40,560
40,220
41.230
41,190
41,180
42,000
38,550
40,560
22,630
23,250
23.230
22,470
24,280
50,300
47,000
50,400
49,600
50.200
50,500
5',40ti
50,400
50,200
48,100
50,600
48,600
53.900
54,000
49,500
53.500
.679
.636
•595
.622
•541
.568
.568
.650
.694
.541
.581
.221
.264
•353
.264
.302
16.9
20.6
25.8
23.9
32 5
30.6
29.2
20.4
15.1
32.5
27-5
52.6
38.6
18.0
41.8
33-4
1.28
12.8
•75
7.5
1-74
»74
1-74
«7-4
I 05
10.5
2.12
21.2
1.81
18 I
i-3«
«3 I
1.28
12.8
i.27
1.69
2.65
2.57
« 59
2.62
2.41
12.7
16.9
265
25-7
«S9
26.2
24 I
Broke in upper jaw, outside of gauged length.
Broke at flaw.
Broke at punch marks.
Broke at punch marks.
Broke at punch marks.
Broke at punch marks.
Broke outside of gauged length.
Broke outside of gauged length at a flaw.
Broke at punch marks.
Broke at lower punch marks.
Tensiofi Tests.
385
(A
M
<
s
H
(')U93
J9({) -«9Je ]o uoipnps^
(sui bs)
-uop39t pajnpeij jo Teajy
(ui 'bs
c/:
[z3
O
CD
H
C/3
Ui
(•sqi) pw)! utniupct!)!^
(ui
•b« X9d "sqq) 'III"!! 311«kiH
(sqq) jiuiji opsiria
( 'ni 'bs isd
sqi) -Xipi)se|a jdsninpop^
(•suj) -Xipnsep
|o sn(npoui jo uoue(n3[i!3
lit pasn spBO| JO aousjs}
-jip JOj uoijeSuop 3iisei3
(•eqq) Xippsei?
}o s n [ n p o ui )o uoue|
-nojeo JOJ spBoi jo stjiuri
(-suj) 'qiSu9| paSneQ
('SU!
bg) -uoipds 880i3 JO vsiy
aouoas SSOJ9 jo jaisiUTnQ
z
H
X
u
M
a.
(/)
•zegi 'ajBQ
')*9) JO jaqain|i{
GJimm
rt -a
• c c
JJ— «
"Sir
> 0 M
«"5 «
.5 4*
* rt -.
•- « o
I
a
o
u
V
V
4; a
1-2 •«"
M V ^
= •£3
c c 5
ii
E c
2 V
a-i
o -'
S V
ce *■>
-; - R 5 O.
X fc, oj •""
b "^2 « - S
"«■
0
•♦
ID
»
»M
\r\
0^
-o
N
<o
J?
1/^
>g
NO
S
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
i/)^i/)M o O 0 ^t>»0
oooo^o^oOooo
8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
r« in \0 r^ ^ 00 »n
" ^ ^ «" »n 00"
tc <o t^ o ^
t>. yO
o
00
0 O Q O O O O
06 O O - N "rt o>
00 3C CT' C> C* OC 00
I I
8 g g
O
O
o
0
o
00
00
00
s
%
00
• f*>
c*»
fO
•"O
ro
m
to
tn
r*>
q
q
q
q
q
0
0
0
q
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
»n
m
tr\
«n
in
m
m
m
m
tn
ro
fO
to
f^
«*>
ro
r»l
V^
in
k
«n
^
o
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
o
O
O O
O O
m in
O
m
0
m
O
m
0
in
0
00
5*
?
»0
0
^
00
c*>
r<
fO
ro
N
N
fO
N
ON
c
^oooo 9<ooooaooo
00
S
s
5
JJ g J, « ^ t,
•5 i
i "5
:i t
4)
V
B
fiQ
•I
E
4>
0Q
V
V
E
E
E
E
S!
V
CD
*«
V
%i
V
PQ
03
C3
n
«»
M
U
V
E
E
V
E
03
u
E
«
V
OQ
00
00
ON
M
^
ir>
^
a>
■■
0
m*
•«
«
n
ft
r»>
m
!3
k
h
U
•
•
h
u
k
M
f«
(«
rt
(«
««
H
tt
(<
S
s
s
s
*^
s
s
s
2
s
« «
M
00
^86 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
CO
4)
a
o
•J
H
PC
o
c/:
H
:?;
o
H
<
M
0«
(-)a93J9()) -UOltMS
ssolo |o VMS JO aoipnpa'^
('•ut -bs)
'oofpas painpuj }o cojy
(•ai -bs
49d 'sqi) 'P^^I ujnaincc^
('sqq) *p«oi uiniunni|/(
(•ui
'bs 49d 'sqq) ')ittii| opnf^
(•«qq) jiuiH 3iis«ia
(-ai *bs jad
'sqq) '^ippsep JO sninpojf\{
(■«ui) -Xtppseia
JO sninpouj jo uoi)e(n3
-jea JO J pasn tpeo^ jo' 93ua
-iajjip joj uoiieSuoia 3i)ni3[
(•«qi) Xjpii
-ciqa JO sn|npoai jo uoi)
-vin3|e3 JOJ spvof jo siiiuiq
( -ca I ) 'i{;3a9i paSneQ
(*gui
■bg) -uoipas «soJ3 JO eaiy
-UOtlSaS CSOJ3 JO J9)aUIBlQ
z
u
M
B.
C/3
•Z6-9681 "ajisa
')89) JO jaquini^
O s «3
l|g|
••4
•I
s u «
8^
M
I Si
? 8«
■5^3 g;
S
u
9 «
3 ^
^ E
ill
o
O M
M
eo
'*
M
0
0
0
ro
^0
ts
0
<^
IS.
«
in
5^
>6
s
00
•A
tx
>8
Is.
10
w
»n
«*>
»r»
*
N
«n
%
•»)
♦
!3
»»»
M
«
u>
«
0
00
t^
"▼
00
m
IX
>o
«
*
>o
fn
fo
»«
»»>
a
■♦
eo
p
lf»
p
c>
«
tP
M
8
•
8
•
8
8
>8
•
8
«
8
8
•
8
•
8
•
8
8
8
88888S88888888
cS ^ tS ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
n M M
^^ ^^ ^^ CK ^^
tn
00
too i>^tntntx«QO t>rxr<)i/t
tsooooooooeoooao ixoo t^oo rx
00 do 00 00 00
tx 00
m 1*1
00 00
s *?. ^
»H 00
8 %
In In.
28.88^^5.2a8.8.8.2
§§§§§§§§§
88888.888888. 8 gg
•h^M- ____ ___
00
ei
IX
00 00
(1 n
tx IX
CI n
^ 00 00 00 00
ff M N « N
00
N
yl^^^f^ o*^'8'§ll
lA
O
8
o
eo
lA lA
o
m
4 i.
O
•A
o
%n
to
I
O
O O
»o eo
h h
»/» eo
s,
O
irt
O
•A
eo
I
O
•o
0
0
0
w%
in
m
c^
^
10
I
h
&
lA
in
•n
000
tn m in
000
<1 O
o o
in in
8t m
o o P o o
in m m in «n
eo •• 00 00
>o o m m
" do 00
to •«
% % i% 1% "%% %\ 1 %
00 txininO OmO **
000000000
3"
^ 00 eo ••
JO ? "^ "*■
S S d d
I
V
E
0Q
E
I
PQ
«l
■S 'St
S S S C K
% *5 '5 -i ■?
.S: JH
V
E
CQ 0Q
E E
pS n
M
I! § S
E
«l
V
PQ
E E E
oi S S S
V S V «
03 QQ P5 0Q
E
«
pa
V
«l
o
E
PQ 09
00 00
u u u
V V 41
Q Q O
eo
in 00
»2 »2 h I.
(4 (« M S
s s s s s
o
n
m oo
« 0.
S <
*« «
eo
in
00
O M
»o
Tension Tests.
387
i ■i i. i. i i.
■pioi lunannH
I I I I I
(■«n) pwi mnani.H
ad iqi) niun Jiima
1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1
<»qi> ii"ii»f"ia
C I 1; 1; I t I I :
■S -5 'B a
> ■I I, I, I
I I i i J, 5 5
.n|) inSa»|p»*ieo
g 8 t 8 3 8
388 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
'-">■» ■'-'"■"™
i I 2 ^ i s ilU I I ? = s i K s ^ s
U ^s s s 1 H m. f f i ^ s i= i ? € i
J^T^^tl.Z^^,-^
J'SliH^.lS^lsiaE : R :i:i"c
llllilfflllllMiiill
S??3=5IEStS5Sf|||S|f
(«|) uo,.
f5H5f5 = ?? = 1H;? :Ht
'UO>Mt»E> 0«T"
r??*!l!ssl5S*HflfH
■i6B' 'Mia
S?'2&&t»'r&&R-S&?^^^'-»t
lmiim<^l||imm
■«.,o ■«!"■■■«
-™„,-,*^.„£.™-,,^^^«23
P.!
Teftsion Tests,
389
MISCELLANEOUS TENSION TESTS ON METALS.
o
6
3
SPSaMBN.
.
c
c
0
0
*~»
\
M
C
^
t>
>— '
s
«
u
s
•M
0
M
0
C
41
«*. s
•* <<->»
o>s
"0
c a
l« c*
V
bfi
<«H
«C/3
3
•JT'— '
U >— '
rt
Q
<
0
lis
*>«<■<
o'C
3 3«
E <«"t!
.3 U O
B a z JL
« J u «
§^80
— _ i«
« c a
« k
I
2
3
4
5
I
2
3
4
5
I
2
3
4
5
I
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
I
2
3
4
Mar. 3
Mar. 3
Mar. 4
Mar. 4
Mar. 5
Mar. 9
Mar. II
Mar. 16
Mar. 18
Mar. 20
Mar. 30
Apr. 2
Apr. 13
Mar. 22
Mar. 24
Mar. 31
Apr. I
Apr. 7
Apr. 13
Oct. 21
Oct. 22
Dec. 4
Dec. 7
Apr. 27
Apr. 27
Apr. 27
Apr. 37
Stay bolt iron.
Stay bolt iron.
Stay bolt iron.
Stay bolt iron.
Stay bolt iron.
.86
.82
•74
.74
1. 00
.581
.528
.430
•430
•785
lO.O
lOO
1 0.0
lO.O
lO.O
i,ocx>-i5,ooo
1,000-12,000
1,000-11,000
1,000-22,000
.00058
.00080
.00079
.00044
Open hearth steel.
Open hearth steel.
Open hearth steel.
Open hearth steel.
Open hearth steel.
.87
•73
•72
.60
.60
■595
•4«9
.407
.283
.283
lO.O
10,0
lO.O
10 0
lO.O
1,000-13,000
1,000- 9,000
1,000- 9,000
500- 7,000
500- 7,000
.00059
.00080
.00084
.00115
.00118
Soft Bessemer steel.
Soft Bessemer steel,
^oft Bessemer steel.
Soft Kessemer steel.
Soft Bessemer steel.
•73
.86
.61
•73
.60
.419
.58.
.292
.419
.283
lO.O
lO.O
lO.O
10.0
10.0
1,000-12,000
1,000-12,000
3,000- 7,000
1,000- 7,000
500- 8,000
.00081
.00063
.00123
.00085
.00120.
Hull rivet steel.
Hull rivet steel.
Hull rivet steel.
Hull rivet steel.
•74
•72
.85
.85
•43'
.407
.568
.568
10.0
lO.O
1 0.0
10.0
1,000-12,000
1,000-13,000
2,000-15,000
2,000-16,000
.00088
.00087
.00060
.00060
Burden best wrought iron.
Burden best wrought iron.
Burden best wrought iron.
Burden best wrought iron.
•76
.76
•77
.76
•454
•454
.466
•454
lO.O
lO.O
lO.O
10.0
500- 6,500
500- 6,500
500- 6,500
500- 6,500
.OOP73
.00078
.00082
.00073
Composition.
Composition.
Composition.
Composition.
.762
.772
.764
.756
• 456
.468
.458
•449
8.00
800
8.00
8.00
29,700,000
29,100,000
29,400,000
28,900,000
28,500,000
29,900.000
29,200,000
30,800.000
30,000,000
29,500,000
27,300,000
27,900,000
28,100,000
29,500,000
26,400,000
28,300,000
29,400,000
29,400,000
30,060,000
28,140,000
26,300,000
30,060,000
39© Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
MISCELLANEOUS TENSION TESTS ON METALS. — C«)»f/<«£^.
i
I
2
&
*-^
4
•
0«
*«*^
•
Ml
%
■J
"6
N.^
c
i»
•
3
•J
**•
•d
•8
•
s
e
■
1
u
«
1
.a.s
•
6
9
o
•
1?
.5
1^
mate ext
ged length.
mate ext
ged length
s
1?
Is-
•28
— 3
M
M
s
S
<
otf
13
^
Rbmaucs.
15,000
25,800
30,000
14,000
26,500
26,500
12,000
27,900
23,100
11,000
25,600
28,000
21^70
22,000
39,540
13,000
21,900
*I'P°
9,000
21,500
18,810
9,000
22,100
18,840
7,000
24,800
•3,230
7,000
24,800
13,200
12,000
28,700
23.5»o
17,000
29,300
32,940
9,000
30,800
>7,94«
12,000
28,700
23,650
8,000
28,300
17.830
12,000
27,900
24.380
13,000
31,900
24,700
17,000
30,000
33.»8o
16,000
28,200
33.370
12,000
26,400
22,060
11,000
24,306
22,230
12,000
25,800
22,550
12,000
26,400
22,100
» 3.340
14.470
13.650
i3,9»o
51,700
50,200
53.700
49,900
50,300
43,300
44.900
46,300
46.800
46,700
56,200
56,700
61,400
56,500
63,100
56,680
60,700
58,500
58,800
48,600
49,000
48,400
48,700
29,250
30,910
29,780
30,970
.363
37-5
•273
48.2
.238
44-8
.302
29 8
•417
46.6
•«45
75.6
.102
75-7
.105
73.6
.076
73.3
.071
75.0
.132
68.5
.204
64.8
.104
64.4
.126
70.0
.102
64.0
.139
67.8
.139
66.0
.196
654
.189
66.8
.212
53-2
.209
55. 0
238
49.0
221
5'-4
332
27.2
302
35-5
292
362
29a
34.9
2.37
2.41
2-47
'•44
2.88
59
44
42
27
,50
77
03
53
03
67
2.96
325
2.92
301
2.84
2.75
2.94
2.88
»-75
2.30
a.oo
2.22
22.7
24.1
24.7
144
28.8
35-9
344
34-2
327
350
277
30.3
253
30.3
26.7
29.6
32.5
29.2
30.1
28.4
27s
28.8
21.9
28.8
25.0
27.8
Broke at a flaw.
Broke at a flaw. These eompoadoo
specimens were made up as follows: cop-
per, 88%, zinc, 2%, tin, 10%. The same
material was tried in the torsion tests.
Rope Tests.
Rope Tests.
This series of tests upon rope had for its object, first, to deter-
mine the relative holding power of various forms of knots ; and sec-
ond, to ascertain the average stretch of new rope under the applica-
tion of a steadily increasing load. The tests of each kind were all
made upon specimens taken from one coil. The length of specimen be-
tween fastenings was in all cases about 5 feet. The average strength
of the rope used in calculating the efficiency of the knots was taken
as the average of the breaking loads of a number of spliced speci-
mens which gave away at the center. The knots used are shown by
the accompanying cuts (Figures 7 to 12), and the stretches by the
curves on the plot (Figure 6).
fLor or s7N£rc» fiiyMx/ves
TVTAi. toiw- tas.
392 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
Fig. 7.
Plain Slip Knot.
FLiMtSH Loop.
Fig. 9
Timber Hit
Double Half Hitch,
Rope Tests.
393
O
X
S
o
X
fei
o
o
o
X
H
s
0)
c
flu
O
<
<
o
f
»
O
JO }OU^ JO X309p!}}3
('sqi) *t(iSuM)S98ei9AY
( '^m ) 'P^ innojixvi^
<
«
00
k.
O
Z
O
^
5
e
o
k
>
o
«i
«l
"a
CO
V
o
o
e
M
t
6
2'5.
o
c
I
3
O
c
a
§
X t
o
•a
>
o
o
a
.a
•o
c
«
O
n
•o c
xg-
o
u
8
fl
S
SI
o
o
a
«i
0
%
O
OS
I
o
1
.S
e
8
^
•o
m
O
in
to
O
8
lA
M
8^85.^
r«) ro >n ^
in m i/t m
O O O
fn t^ m
O
00
II
i
o o
m * ir»
O
y ^
f^ fO fO
fO fO fO
fi « «
O O O
eo fO ^
♦ mm
z
o
5
z
a
*}oo} jad pucjis
duo JO suiii) |o jsquin ji(
'punod
idd )9a| )o i9qiunj(i{
■^6-9691 *9jBa
.... 5^5 5^5
Ills li^-l S.&S
8S88 l^S '"'"*
^ •« ^
o o o
CCS
9 9.2
.S.2 9
a
000
e c c
^ > ^
000
3 O O
sec
U u b
000
<<<< <<< <<< <<< <<< <<^
a
-8.
8
Q
Q
Q
Q
■ liWi w w
GOOD ^(no ^mm Mrom mmo
m m m
•- •• m M m m m t^oo 00 Ot^9« ^ •* O O »• —
>>>U bk>b bhU u^b
OOOv MttfcC lV<Vl4 2(C(V fviviv rarafv
z^^sQ sss SS2 ass sss sss
b b b
b b
ii
■|S9) |o i9quinj«{
M n m ♦ m<o r^ OOO^O »rt*n ♦ m^o i>«oo 9^
394
Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
c
O
pes
Out
%
K
CO
CO
0<
iz:
o
CO
H
CO
H
S5
O
•-^
CO
:z;
H
&
.5
"B.
6
0
5
e
2
s
0
i
8.
•a
a
1
i
•>
X
V
n
.8.
1
§
h.
•r«
^
a
•<■
JS
0
^
^
0
0
I
H
1
8
1
M
>
0
1
0
s
s
V
1
M
V
a
i
JJ
•S
M
1
41
Jg
e
0.
>
e
Si
&
h
"
'
(10m J9 J) -aDiids
8
00
^
S
m
JO joan JO Xoaapijjs
f;
(*8qq) 't|)Suaj)s aSuoAy
8
M
m
%
0
m
tn
g
>o
lA
m
fO
m
^
-^
(-sq'X) 'P*^! «iniinx«iiv
III. II
iH
•h «. *
8^g.g2
MOO m 0
« « 0 »«
• ■» • *
1
i«>o<c«^
«nm ^
lA ^1/)
* MHO *
€*»♦««»»
K
It
•0
s
•
It
i
i
09
0
III
«l»
0 0 0 2
Case
1
:atiom
6 c c e B
8SSSS
III
ill
9.S 3 S
9
a
s
5
***'*«•«'»<
-<<<<"<
<<<
<<"<
««
<<•<<
S
»•
^
■
B
<3t
2
T3
»
0
Q
> *•
1
Z
•s
0
U
is
g
1-1
Q
^
m
Q
■
•
^*^ 1 IB ■
-]oo| i9d pau)6
auo JO siun) jo jaqainf^
•«»
'punod
isd 199J JO J9qufn|^
r» * ■♦
■ • ■
m ^ "♦
" ° ®,
mm m
0 0 0 m
« • ■ •
q 0 •* n
mmmm
• • • •
•
w^ irt mm
o> ^ o> ^
•Z6-9631 *9iBa
■k ■» A V^
^jjocm
1^ %f%trt
N
f»> en mo
M M N
^^^g.i
%'H.&
> u u
0 S i>
« ■ •
> > > c
0 c 0 0.
gsis
^S5S<<
s<<
:z:qq
S52;2<
TE^ZZ'S
*}«9i JO J9qain|i
w w f*» ^ m
0 to«oo
O>0 M
M M H M
0 ix.ao (>
M M M M
Rope Tests.
395
03
Ti
w
4)
O
Pk
CO
0<
P
MX
<
o
CO
CO
H
o
CO
^
•
•s.
i
1
§
«
9
8
•
SI
Si;
o
4>
•s.
«
«
S
e
0
M
la
1
1
o
.iJ
1!
^
Q
O
>
0
fl
S
s
\
0
1
s
c
jg
S
•0
c
a
'«6
c
a
CO
6
0.
CO
1
(■)a93J»«{) -aonds
8
N
o>
fH
♦
JO )oa^ |0 A9a9i3g3
r«.
r^,
m
i/»
('•qq) -q^Saans oSusAy
1
^
mt
i
0
\r\
M
^
n
M
(•«n) -Fwinnmiprew
» ak »
in ^ m
f*» f»> 10
^ fn ^
882
«
4
M
K
PQ
iii
V • *
^51
0 0 0
^^^
o
h i^ i!
ceo
fl 0 e
a c B
fl C B
555
^^j«
,M,M.:<
j«Jj<
^^ii
o
§§§
W k. k.
9.S 9
b b h
aag
§S3
cuaa
<
9^ 9
3 9 9
9 9^
5
«<*'««
**«<*«
^ <rf 4^
*<*•*«
Z2Z
<<<
iii
<<:<
<<<
5
0
u X:
•0
o
^8.
3
z
9 0
a
'4
•
•
B
•
B
')oo] jad pau)B
—
aao }o BOJii) }o jaqoinf^
trt>C *n
>o<o<o
m\0 «0
>0 m m
>o«o>o
-panod
J9d )39J }0 J9qiUTlJ«j[
• • •
• •
q •* M
« •»> «
« ■ •
to m M
• • •
O" 0* (S
» •« »
•^6-9681 'ajeQ
•* •» »
0 N 0
w « ■*•
« to *
«•♦•>•■
« e» m
KKK
^Si
^^^
iJSS
22s
<<<
QQ<
QQQ
QQQ
•)Wj |OJ3qiiinfi{
•- « f*)
^lO'O
t^oo o»
0 x rt
H M M
10 ^to
M M M
i
1
I
I
t
I
s:
a
3
H
396 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
•S
c
t
u
H
O
<
u
<
Q
P<
<
O
CO
H
CO
M
H
o
CO
;5
o
z
o
•J
o
X
Q
O
E
M
8
o
1
(/3
&
a
9
O
w
&
•a
E
&
a
•««
a
o
o
•s.
o
8
I
1
2
§
CI
•a
a
a
53
>
o
o
c
«
c
o
0Q
I
I
w
<«
>
O
8.
J
JS
-S
E
jO}oai| JO Xoospijis
(tqq) 'iii3aaj}« aScjdAy
8
8^
M
<£
o
o
8.
o
('tqq) ■p«o{ oiniopcvif
<
M
«
0Q
«h
O
X
o
p
o
6
9U0 JO tain) |o jaqmnj){
80000 coo 00 90 000 000
♦ O O O»00 * 0« in ■*'<0 r^ »n O ♦ »^ «0 CO*
8S8S
.S .S «»« 7-^
« a « n
O O
*m U V
(•no
« V M
2 o o
Sac
h I. w
g-JI
©1
O
a
^ c
o
a
k
o
o o
c c
k k
OlSL
3 3
o o o
c c s
^ ^ k
zzz^< <« « << <<< <<<
k
s:
CO t
s.
Q
^ ^
'punod
i9d )99 J JO J a q ui n ji{
tn tnu^
mm
mm
m
m m
mm •
r«. tn ^ lA^
• • • •
0 tsts
• > •
m m
• •
•
:o
; »nao
■^6-9691 'ai«a
!•«) JO aaqain^^
« '•■ * ^ 1^
o o o o S,
m moo
♦" ■• «
• ■ •
k k k
a&a
O'O* tsi rs. ^O O >0 t«.«A
> >
o o
> >
o o
ZZ
> > «j
o o S
ZZQ
• • *
> > tl
o o s
M N tn <r m o rwoo
0» O •• N
m ■***% <C r^oo
Rope Tests.
197
TENSION TESTS ON NO. lo JUTE TWINE. (Three strands.)
•
•0
J
«i
E
•3
^
s
E^
Location op Brsak.
Mbthod of Holding.
3L
• ■•
iSS
'Z 8
E
3
1"
33
I
Oct. 24
88.6
38 s
3'' above lower clamp.
The cord was held by Proctor
2
Oct. 24
88.6
345
2" below upper clamp.
tvrine clamps in this series of tests.
3
Oct. 28
79-5
34-5
At center.
4
Oct. 28
76.7
33S
Near lower clamp.
5
Oct. 28
76.7
340
At center.
6
Oct. 29
78.1
41.0
Near center.
7
Oct. 30
781
350
Near lower clamp.
8
Oct. 30
76.8
41.0
At center.
9
Oct. 31
84.1
32.4
Near center.
ID
Oct. 31
82.9
378
At center.
II
Oct. 31
84.1
34-3
Near lower clamp.
12
Nov. 2
75.2
40.0
At center.-
13
Nov. 2
85.8
40.0
At center.
M
Nov. 16
81.0
350
At center.
»5
Nov 16
81.0
43-5
At center.
i6
Nov. 16
76.6
37-6
At center.
NoTK. — The length of specimen between damps was about 18". All these tests were made upon dry ma-
terial.
TENSION TESTS ON NO. 48 JUTE TWINE. (Four strands.)
u
•
6'-"
t
•a
m
c^
**
*•
0
•« g
M
,
V
^■*
0 S
V
r..
u
0
s
3
2
T
1
•r
Number of f
ounce.
Maximum
(Lbs.)
Total stretch
lure. (Per
•
Location of Brbak.
Method of Holding.
I
Nov. 26
29.8
102 6
2.4
4' ' below upper clamp.
The cord was held by Proc-
2
Nov. 25
28.8
124.0
2.7
4" above lower clamp.
In lower clamp.
tor twine clamps in this series
3
Dec. 2
31-4
97.0
2.8
of tesU.
4
Dec. 2
27.2
97.0
2.5
Near middle.
s
Dec. 2
27.2
96.0
27
At lower clamp.
6
Dec 7
298
lOI.O
3-7
Near center.
7
Dec 8
31.2
103.5
2-5
Near center.
8
Dec. 8
31-2
99-5
2.6
Near center.
9
Mar. 9
27.6
91.0
At center.
10
Mar. 9
32.8
1 18.3
At center.
II
Mar. II
32.7
103.8
At upper clamp.
12
Mar. II
257
95.0
98.5
Near upper clamp.
2" below upper clamp.
13
Mar. 18
29.7
Notb. — The stretch was measured in a gauged length of 8" or 10". The length of specimen between clamps
was about x8". These tests were made upon dry materiaL
M
i
I
\
39^ Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
TENSION TESTS ON NO. i6 FLAX BOOT THREAD. (Six strands.)
■
1
1
S
•
1
3
2
1
•3
W .
s§
9 0
9
Location op Bsbak.
Method of Holding.
I
Nov. i6
140.4
49.0
At lower clamp.
The cord was held by Prooior
2
Nov. i6
140.4
43.3
4" above lower clamp.
twine clamps in this series of tests.
3
Nov. i6
i35>
48.0
At center.
4
Nov. 17
136.8
Near center.
s
Nov. 17
128.7
43-6
Near center.
6
Nov. 17
136.8
40.0
Near lower clamp.
7
Nov. 17
136.8
39-3
At center.
8
Nov. 17
136.8
40.1
At lower clamp.
9
Nov. 17
1368
40.0
Near lower clamp.
lO
Nov. 17
136.8
40.5
Near center.
II
Nov. 17
125.0
44.0
At lower clamp.
12
Nov. 19
136.7
40.3
At center.
13
Nov. 19
136.7
40 0
At center.
U
Nov. 19
141. 1
46.2
At center.
J5
Nov. 19
118.2
396
At center.
i6
Nov. 19
136.7
39.7
38.7
At center:
"7
Nov. 19
136.7
At center.
i8
Nov. 19
1 18.2
43.7
At center.
»9
Nov. 25
133.6
37-9
Near center.
20
Nov. 30
J34.3
42.0
Tust below upper damp.
Near center.
21
Nov. 30
134.6
47.0
32
Nov. 30
128.7
45-3
Near center.
23
Nov. 30
128.7
40.0
At center.
24
Nov. 30
»34.6
44.0
Near center.
NoTB. — The length of specimen between clamps was about 28". These tests were made upon dry matcrisL
TENSION TESTS ON NO. 3* BRAIDED CURTAIN CORD.
s
8
E
9
E^
^
Location op Brbak.
Mbthod op Holding.
^
M
.ss
•S i
E
9
55
i
5
1°
I
Feb. 15
10.7
109.0
2" below upper clamp.
The cord was held by Prodor
2
Feb. 26
10.8
107.5
Near lower clamp.
twine clamps in this series of teitBi
3
Feb. 26
• • ■ ■
107.5
Near lower clamp.
4
Mar. I
10.9
1 10 0
Near center.
S
Mar. 3
9.8
114.9
At center.
6
Mar. 4
10.8
99.0
Just below upper clamp.
7
Mar. 5
10.9
1 16.9
At center.
8
Mar. 5
10.7
105.6
At upper damp.
9
Mar. 9
■ • • •
105.0
At center.
10
Mar. 9
10.9
I03.4
At center.
II
Mar. II
10.7
108 3
At center.
12
Mar. II
10.7
102.5
Near center.
»3
Mar. II
II.O
98.7
Near lower damp.
14
Mar. 18
10.7
108.5
In lower damp.
«5
Mar. 18
10.3
112.2
Near lower clamp.
Notbs. — This cord was made of white braided cotton,
threads, braided over a core of four threads.
The length between damps was about 18".
These tests were made upon dry material.
It was compMed of nine strands, each of four
Rope Tests.
399
TENSION TESTS ON No. 8 SAMSON BRAIDED SASH CORD.
•
1
1
E
"o
•
"S
9
Location op Brbak.
Mbthod op Holding.
w
h «:
E^
E
3
i
^ 0
53
z
Q
Z
S""
I
Feb. 19
2.32
284.0
4" below upper clamp.
In tests No. i to 13 inclusive the
cord was held by Proctor twine
2
Feb. a6
a. 28
280.0
Near center.
3
Mar. I
2-33
282.0
Near center.
clamps.
4
Mar. 3
2.30
298.0
At center.
5
Mar. 4
2.32
282.0
Just below upper clamp.
6
Mar. s
»-35
280.0
At center.
7
Mar. 5
a.33
»<)9-5
In upper damp.
S
Mar. 11
>-35
292.0
At center.
9
Mar. 18
2.25
303- 5
At center.
lO
Mar. 20
2.32
304.0
Near center.
11
Mar. 25
2.33
286.5
At center.
la
Mar. 25
••33
291.0
Near upper clamp.
13
Mar. 29
2.32
285.8
At upper clamp.
14
Mar. 29
2.31
291.0
Near upper knot.
Timber hitch knots.
»5
Mar. 29
2.32
281.0
In upper knot.
Slip knot*.
16
Mar. 29
2.32
271.0
In upner knot.
Kowline knots.
17
Mar. 29
»-34
229 0
In upper knot.
Flemish loop knots.
NoTss. — This cord was made of drab braided cotton. It was composed of twelve strands, each of nine
threads, braided over a core of ten threads.
The knot holdings were made over Proctor clamps, which were 2!" in diameter. The last four tests may be
compared with similar ones upon rope, to show the relative efficiency of the knots used.
The length of cord between clamps was 18".
All the tests were made upon dry material.
>
\
J
400 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
TENSION TESTS ON No. 9 SAMSON BRAIDED SASH CORD.
•
et per
J
(ngth.
not or
com-
tota)
spcci-
cent. )
1
•8
Mbthod op Holding
LOCATIOK OP BrBAK.
k* .
- *
V
CT3^ C •
E
s
|i
HA
ta-3
>d
|i is 1
"^
Q
2
a"' •
<
Apr. 9
2.21
Proctor clamps.
35*
At center.
Apr. 13
2.03
Proctor clamps.
344
At center.
Apr. 17
2.20
Proctor clamps.
359
Near lower damp.
Apr. 27
2.23
Timber hitches.
356
350
100
Near center.
Apr. 27
2.28
Timber hitches.
350
At center.
6
Apr. 27
2.14
Timber hitches.
348
Near lower knot
7
Apr. 28
2.26
Timber hitches.
342
Near center.
8
Apr. 13
2.22
Bowline knots.
300
Lower knot.
9
Apr. 13
2.23
Bowline Icnots.
295
Lower knot
10
Apr. 17
2. II
Bowline knots.
320
y^
88
Lower knot
II
Apr. 27
2.23
Bowline knots.
320
Lower knot.
12
Apr. 9
2.23
Flemish loop knots.
276
Lower knot.
X3
Apr. 17
2.02
Flemish loop knots.
2^5
280
80
Lower knot.
14
Apr. 27
2.28
Flemish loop knots.
Lower knot.
15
Apr. 27
2.22
Timber hitches with square
291
In square knot
16
Apr. 27
• • • •
knot at center of speci-
290.
290
83
Fn square knot.
17
Apr. 27
2.29
men.
290
In square knot.
18
Apr. 27
2.21
Timber hitches and open-
258
At open-hand knot
»9
Apr. 27
2.22
hand knot at center of
259
368
77
At open-hand knot.
20
Apr. 28
2.43
specimen.
289
At open-hand knot
NoTBs. — The length of specimen between clamps was 18".
This cord was made of drab braided cotton, and consisted of fifteen strands of eight threads each, braided orer
a core of ten threads.
The knots were tied over a Proctor clamp which was 2|" in diameter.
These tests were made upon dry material.
TENSION TESTS ON A" FABER LINEN SASH CORD.
I
1
n
1
E
9
"Z
1
*S
Location of Break.
Mkthod op Holding.
k>
h -:
E^
^
M
£t
■" fi
E
s
2
*J
HJQ
Feb. 19
1.70
671
2" above lower damp.
The cord was held by Proctor
Feb. 26
1 70
582
In upper clamp.
clamps in this series of tests.
Mar. I
1. 71
625
In upper damp.
Near lower clamp.
Mar. 3
1. 71
639
Mar. 4
• . • .
606
In u )pcr clamp.
6
Mar. 5
1. 71
685
In upper clamp.
7
Mar. 10
168
690
In upp^^ clamp.
8
Mar. 13
1.72
660
At lower clamp.
The cord was dry in thb series of
9
Mar. 25
»-73
7»3
At center.
tests.
10
Mar. 26
1.69
6.3
At lower clamp.
II
Mar. 29
1. 91
687
At center.
Notes — The length of spedmeti between damps w^as 18".
This cord was made of twisted linen, and consisted of four strands of three threads each, twisted aroand
a core of six threads.
The core was of Russian hemp.
The number of twists of one strand was about twelve per foot.
The Proctor clamp did not prove as good a holding for this as for the smaller cord, since most of the sped
mens broke in or near the damp.
Belts,
401
TENSION TESTS ON f BELT LACINGS.
•5
•0
§J=
sion
gih
.
k
?
1
8
•Stfi
tft
>.
ho
c a
c s
r^
U
s
*»;u
V V
0
-A
MO
•0
a
3
late ext
auged ]
r cent.)
E
3
... 3
MjQ
E "iCS
B «i3
«o
• **
MU
•s =^
*s cOu
Z
Q
^-
0
S^
-..^
-.-w
I
Nov. 20
.78
8.00
224
2.52
3« 5
2
Nov. 21
49
8.00
177
2 18
273
3
Nov. 21
I.
23
8.00
245
2.10
26.3
4
Nov. 23
73
8.00
207
..58
19.8
5
Nov. 23
67
8.00
215
3.00
37-5
6
Nov. 23
50
8.00
203
1.78
22.2
7
Nov. 23
7»
800
221
2.25
28.1
8
D.c- 15
53
8.00
.85
1.25
15.6
9
Dec. 15
77
8.00
220
1.40
»7-5
10
Mar. 30
69
■ • • •
205
• • • ■
• • • ■
II
Mar. 30
72
• • • a
274
....
• • • •
12
Mar. 31
61
• • " •
237
....
■ • • a
»3
Mar. 31
74
• • . •
210
....
• • • *
M
Apr. 7
•47
• • • >
162
• • . •
• • ■ •
NoTB. — The lacings were held by Proctor twine damps. The material was ordinary " split raw hide.
^^
TENSION TESTS ON LEATHER KELTS.
E
s
i
Ow
a
.2 c
£.2
1^
Q
<s
"d
•O^-v
n
3
g.s
« c
•
C
M '.^
2 c?
E
E«'
J*
oco
3
3 «
t3
>*•
0
•
- *
ga
(« 5
K.a
M.O
3 C
V 0
<
i«»J
M-J
«■*
S^
S^
c""
.15
S M
c e
E «*S
*S MB
« w e
.5 c!
Kind op Belt.
1 Mar. 17
2 I Mar. 17
3 I Mar. 17
4 Mar. 17
5 I Mar. 17
.32 X 2.96
.34 X 2.50
•34x2.53
.34x2 48
.34 X 3.42
.947
6,440
6,800
6.00
.850
3.400
4,000
2.00
.860
3.250
3.780
• •. .
.843
3.700
4.390
2.00
.823
4,050
4,920
2.00
•58
•31
• • a
■31
•3»
26.3
15-5
• • • •
«5-5
15-5
Indian tanned leather.
Schieren electric.
Schieren electric.
Schieren electric.
Schieren electric.
i
402 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
in
<
PQ
U
O
H
O
iz:
a:
H
>
<
c
ST
o
0)
-a
o
(A
M
M
<
<
M
«
OQ
th
o
as
H
X
(m 'bi i9d 'sqi)
*i«9t{8 leuipmi^Suoi
^ui 'bs J9d 'sqq)
'ainiani p sninpoji^
(•sqq) uiraq JO iq3»^
(■Bqq) peoi San^cug
•a
9
cr
I
>
m
Sg
CUCL,
a
"S
D
as
• ■ ■ •
0 e c B
M
S a
5 S
B C 9
V 0 V
s
-a
a
e
e s
C 9 9 9
B
•■^
9
sec
oooooo*io.5.ts.tj .s ooo
BBCBBSBCBSC B S = C
«UVV««Q«ICQQ Q vvv
B
e
1
«
s
w
B
B a
B C
%t C
('su]) 'Minimis
|0 sn[npoai }o uopej
•n3[V3 ut p9sn speof ]0
93U9j9j^'ip joj noipsysQ
(•sqq") 'Xipnsvpio
sninpoiu jo uoi)e|n3
-{V3 JO} spcoi ]o's)iiu|i
(sui) qidap ptre qjpiAv
')S9) JO 49qainfi|
rt « « ft «
•«k«>« MMfl »«■«»«
Ofi.fi.OQOOQCOC OOOOQQ
00O*AOO0Q00<n •'« ooo<no
in •#> ^ m m o fr<o i/imw •• OOmMfo
iAwimtnmmw»o«n*A>n m OOC>to
♦<0 m »n •« 00 ♦« c i« r» ^ r>.oo »»» ix
COO «00 »OI«»^»"O'0 0« 0»rtm«tn
•«>■•• M »• MM VMMM
llijj.llllli llllll
♦o « ^ »• •»» r<«<o mOrHt> m t^M»«s r>»ao
N ~ n ^ M H O»oo •o«0 * "**r»>0«-
0<OOab<ia<onOON^ O «r**aQi'>M
88888888888 8 88888
M ♦ «n f* fO i*:0 »»i •« r»5 ^ O '♦o' rC ^, ^
^8§8^S8888^ 8 %\\l\
* M •* * ♦ r^QO M^f»>« 0 -M--M
XMMXMMKMMXM M MKMMM
O r^QO o» O
fO !*> ^ f^ ♦
m m tn ui i/t I
itf)i/»i/>«/>m lO in i/t *n m m
S.
Beams.
403
0)
t3
O
C
c«
CO
s
•a
C/3
^
>
<
:0
w
All
Urn
PQ
0
Cu
0.
3
::>
j;
oe:
S
cu
^
c/:
♦^
Eb
£
0
■s
CJ
K
E-
'A
C
>^
^
rt
3
a*
f-
•VJ
X
•p^
u
0
C/3
0
>
Irt
U1
>
<
•>^
cc
H
3
(A
s
M
o
<
H
«
PQ
Ob
o
at
ta
z
X
<
('Of 'bs jad sqq)
'jvaq« [vaipnii9uo|
}0 X)icu9)U| 'uiniiiixe)^
'unidnj* JO sninpof^
en
•5
3
cr
o
I-}
(-«n) -uiBaq JO iqSwAV
(•«<n) "p^oi ^"ii^'ja
(•ui "bs j»d "sqT)
'X)pi)se|a )o sninpoj^
(-CUI) 'X)pi}sep
)o sninptioi }o' uot)C[
-nofeo 111 pasn speo| jo
90U9ja|jip JO} aon39i|3Q
(•«qq) *X)pi)te|9 jo
sninpoin j6 \io\}V\no
-\to Mj speo| jo'siiiuiq
(-)99j) SJiOd
-dns a9a4&|9q 93av)siQ
(SOI) qjdappireqjpiAv
*)t9) JO iaqiunji^
8
;S
c
-o .
eccccBcsc
OOOOOCO.t'O
• «« av^ •■« •^- a^ ••^ ap* ••^ "^
CBflCSCSBC
VVVUVVVOV
HHHHHHHJH
•S
c
CC
J5
«
C
9
O p« 00 00 o trt ^<0 t-
c to ^ d> o ^ *oo ^
o
0
N
»^00000«A0»'>
«ri f»i ^ ^ ro "TO ^ ft
0
2 g»;C:g:^:&^cgs*
O It 00 O ^»<0 O C <* "O
tN. !>. ♦ «*i ♦ mO fo ^ «
888888S88 8
8888888SS 8
KMMMMKMKK M
ro«OfO'0^f*>*«rrO *
404 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
CO
.C
«.•
Mn
(C
0
wtf
s
• ^«
c
(«
a.
tn
bD
»-
m
-^
Vi
>
S
^
<
V}
W
PC
0
a.
u
3
u
tn
t3
g
u
u
p.
b
w
4iJ
4;
JD
(X,
TJ
0
4)
0
d:
H
tf)
0
.*•%
:z:
rt
u
3
;^
u
H
tn
C/2
c
• mm
(i2
0
Urn
3
u
0
•4^
>
^
m
V
2
>
0
<
H
3
.a
=1
9
cr
4>
T3
M
M
<
M
06
Poor quality.
V ery poor quality.
Very poor quality.
0
z
<
u
as
CQ
0
K
&a
z
z
<
Tension.
Tcn»«icn.
longitudinal shear.
L.on>!itudinal shear.
Longitudinal shear and tension.
longitudinal shear and tension.
Tension.
Longitudinal shear.
Tension.
I ension.
Tension.
Tension.
Tension.
Tension.
Tension.
(•ai -bs jad •sq'])
-jeaqs icaipmii(<iui
}0 X)isaa)ui uinutixej^
5C ■^ m m N «A o> o»oo •* o» c» o^« c^
l-ui 'bs jad "sqi)
-ajnianj }o « n { n p 0 f ^
vO_oo C '^l'*"'^ '2'^'?"' ^T'C'2
(sqq) oieaq JO ui3iaA\
>oOOOO>AQmO«nOOOOO
(«n) pTOi SuiJieaJH
CCtnuiOt'tCQu^tmnocOO
q^ « r^ -_ •♦ - roaC^ -^ q^ o;oo >o ■♦ »JJ
NrCiC'fO* ▼O'"^"* foocT in ^ rC 0
(•u| -bs jad sm)
'X)pi)sv{a JO sninpiij^
(••ui) 'Xipi)sep
JO sn[np<)ai jo uoi)ei
-no\TO u\ pasn speoj jo
aouajajg^p joj aoiioayaQ
(••qq) Xipperp
JO snfnpoiu jo uopvino
'•\v^ JOJ speoi p'oiuiiq
8888S8g88S88888
>0'0^^^<> >o <o >o'o^<r«o <c" "T^
^^8^^8888^88^
-dns uaaiHipq aaueisiQ
(•«ui) -qidappuvqipiAi
M-MnN-NMMniNnnriN
KMM MMMKMKMMMMM
t»9\ JO jaquinf^
lommiotninMinintniAtniAMin
(■BlIUJXi-Bn)
TS
■Mnntoj ;o tninpon
!i
(■.q^) mBqioi^lpAl
:S
(■Hn) •p«,»i.pi«ia
II
(ai'btwl'iqn)
r.
-IE. loj ip»| JO ti|iim
n
(mj) luoil
?s
I-.UIJ •■ndippnqip.M
'mi)Ol>quil>M
Ss
i
1
1 4
'St
m
(Tiib.jsd*n)
II
<«n) aiBqiOHiSpa'
-1
(Hn) -pBtlanniH
il-
llBiM»|» JO "inpoH
}i
■n^BBlpMn^pS^'jo
111
(■«n) iipfHt^
JO tninpon jo soimoo
■Xa Jo( «pmi jD nmn
us
-d« UM.»q iHinia
^^^
<«I) qidapiHnqipiA
■»"}«»q™N
I
ls \
406 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories,
NEAT CEMENT. (Tension.)
Date of Test
Kind of Cement.
Brand.
water
ng.
*-*
1
•
1
•
It
••4
?
l1 .
« 9
0
1
a
2
a«
(3
PB
30
99
30
119
30
laS
30
«3a
30
93
30
loa
30
9a
30
93
30
9S
30
103
30
«■
9$
30
lOI
30
109
as
383
780
as
383
780
«S
383
864
as
384
83a
as
384
8S5
as
384
856
as
384
858
as
4i«
788
as
4"
8.4
as
4"
874
as
417
816
as
4*7
83a
as
4«8
8*7
a4
S
406
a4
s
4"
a4
s
408
a4
s
440
as
7
48a
23
7
450
a4
7
474
a4
7
489
a4
7
Soo
a4
7
S40
a4
7
460
a4
7
465
a4
7
46a
a4
7
47a
a4
7
4«o
a4
7
488
a4
7
474
a4
7
510
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Dec.
Dec.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar,
Mar.
Mar.
16.1896
16,1896
16, 1896
16, 1896
17, 1896 .
17,1896
18, 1896
18,1896
18, 1896
18,1896
30,1896 .
1,1896
1, 1896 .
13,1896 .
13,1896
13.1896 .
13. i«96 .
13, 1896 .
13. 1896 .
13,1896 .
2, 1896
2, 1896
2.1896 .
8,1896 .
9.1896 .
8,1896
4,1896 .
4,1896 .
4,1896
4.1896
28.1896
29,1896
30, 1896 .
30, 1896
a, 1896
4.1896
13, 1896 .
13,1896 .
8, 1897 ■
8,1897 .
8,1897 .
8, 1897 .
4,1897 .
4.1897
Rosendale.
Roaendale.
Roeendale.
Roaendale.
Rosendale.
Rosendale.
Rosendale.
Rosendale.
Rosendale.
Rosendale.
Rosendale.
Rosendale.
Rosendale.
Portland.
Portland. I
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Portland.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
Hoffman.
B. S. & Co.
S. &Co.
S. & Co.
S. & Co.
S. & Co.
S. & Co.
B. S. & Co.
B. S. & Co.
ft Co.
ft Co.
ftCo.
ftCo.
ft Co.
B
B
B
B
B
B.
B.
B.
S
S
s
B. S
B. S
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Anchor.
Neat Cement.
407
NEAT CEMENT. (Tension.) — CVw<:/«</^</.
water
;ing.
1
•
Date of Test.
Kind of Cement.
Brand.
i
1
8.0
0
E
\
a<
H
n
Mar. 8, 1897 . . .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
•
520
Mar. 8, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
536
Mar. 8. 1S97
Portland.
Anchor.
24
542
Mar. 8, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
578
Mar. 8. 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
607
Mar. 8, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
502
Mar. 9, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
34
495
Mar. 9f "897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
34
57 «
Mar. 9, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
580
Mar. 10, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
482
Mar. 10, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
484
Mar. 10, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
5SO
Mar. 10, 1897
Portland.
Anchor.
24
492
Mar. 10. 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
566
Mar. II, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
484
Mar. 29, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
642
Mar. 29, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
680
Mar. 20, 1897
Apr. 8. 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
680
Portland.
Anchor.
24
660
Apr. 8, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
728
Apr. 15, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
686
Apr. 13, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
191
Apr. 13, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
192
Apr. 15, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
308
Apr. 15, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
338
Mar. 24, 1897
Portland. .
Atlas.
18
530
Mar. 24, 1897
Ponland.
Atlas.
18
552
Mar. 24, 1897
Portland.
AtUs.
18
530
Mar. 25, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
540
Mar. 25, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
548
Mar. 25, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
583
Mar. 25, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
667
Mar. 29, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
560
Apr. 22, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
15
565
Apr. 22, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
:i
710
Apr. 22, 1897
Portland.
Adas.
768
Apr. 22, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
815
Apr. 22, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
756
Apr. 22, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
785
Apr. 28, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
960
Apr. 12, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
800
Apr. 12, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
800
Apr. 12, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
840
408 Results of Tests Made in the Engineering Laboratories.
SAND TESTS. (Tension.)
Dim iA Tot
SAND TESTS. (Compreuion.)
i
!l
1
1
1-
"
|i
is
g
*6"
PonbH
Audio.
"■
Neat Cement,
409
NEAT CEMENT. (Compression.)
u
^■^
t
•
■5
««
M
Q
C
as
ol
'-^
1
Date of Test
Kind of Cement.
Brand.
*4
\
M
M
8-0
■%
0
3
k 9
«i
I
a<
P
03
Nov, 16, 1896 . .
Roaendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,600
Nov. 16, i8g6 .
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2f755
Nov. 16, 1896
Rotendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,900
Nov. 16, 1896
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,970
Nov. 17, 1896 .
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,280
Nov. 17, 1896
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2>440
Nov. 18, 1896
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2 1490
Nov. 18, 1896
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,520
Nov. 18, 1896
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2>590
Nov. 30, 1896 .
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,300
Nov. 30, 1896
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,580
Nov. 30. 1896 .
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,700
Nov. 30, 1896
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
3,010
Dec. I, 1896
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,230
Dec. I, 1896 .
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,320
Dec. I, 1896 .
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2t390
Dec. I, 1896 .
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,450
2.580
Dec. 1, 1896 .
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
Dec. I, 1896 .
Rosendale.
Hoffman.
30
2,630
Nov. 4, 1896 ,
Portland.
Anchor.
24
1 1 ,830
Nov. 4. 1S96 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
12,000
Ni>v. 4, 1896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
12,320
Nov. 4, 1896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
»3,840
Oct. 28, 1896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
25
14,700
Oct. 28, 1896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
25
14,780
Oct. 28, 1896
Portland.
Anchor.
25
i5>330
Oct. 28, 1896
Portland.
Anchor.
25
>5i330
Oct. 29, 1896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
23
15,040
Oct. 29, 1896
Portland.
Anchor.
23
15,480
Oct. 29, 1896
Portland.
Anchor.
23
17,030
Nov. 2, 1896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
14,150
Nov. 2, i8g6 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
14,250
Nov. 2, 1896
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,800
Nov. 4, '896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
14,400
Nov. 4« iSg6 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,200
Nov. 4, 1896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
16,350
Nov. 4, 1896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
»7.«5o
Nov. 6, 1896 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
«4i3«>
Nov. 6. 1896 ,
Portland.
Anchor.
24
14,890
Mar. 8, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
« 5,470
Mar. 8, 1897 •
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,540
Mar. 4. «897 ■
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,000
Mar. 4, 1897
Portland.
Anchor.
34
15,190
Mar. 4, «897 •
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,450
M.ir. 4, 1897
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,830
Mar. 4, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,900
Mar. 4, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,980
Mar. 8, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
«5,700
Mar. 10, 1897 ,
Portland.
Anchor.
>4
»4,75o
Mar. 10, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,400
Mar. 10, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
I4>430
Mar. 10, 1897
Portland.
Anchor.
24
«4,55o
Mar. 10, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
15,020
Mar. 29, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
27
19,160
Mar. 29, 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
'7
20,000
Apr. 8. 1897 .
Portland.
Anchor.
24
35
«9.975
Apr. 15, 1897
Portland.
Anchor.
24
49
24>47S
Apr. 15, 1897
Portland.
Anchor.
24
49
25,500
Apr. 13, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
3,500
Apr. 13, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
■8
3,950
Apr. 13. 1897 •
Mar. 24, 1897 .
Portland.
Atlas.
18
4,100
Portland.
Atlas.
20
14,760
Mar. 24, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
21,330
Mar. 24, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
21,600
Mar. 24, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
22,900
Mar. 24, 1897
Portbnd.
Atlas.
18
23,560
Apr. 28, 1897
Portland.
Atlas.
18
15
29,600
Apr. 28, 1897 .
Portland.
Atlas.
18
15
31,060
NoTB. — These tests were all on 2-inch cubes.
4IO D, D, Jackson and J, IV. Ellms,
ON ODORS AND TASTES OF SURFACE WATERS, WITH
SPECIAL REFERENCE TO ANAB^NA, A MICRO-
SCOPICAL ORGANISM FOUND IN CERTAIN WATER
SUPPLIES OF MASSACHUSETTS,
By D. D. JACKSON, Assistant Biologist, and J. W. ELLMS, Assistant Chemist,
OF THE Massachusetts State Board of Health.
It is commonly believed by those who have not investigated the
subject, that disagreeable odors and tastes in drinking waters are due
to the decomposition of organic matter, and are either dangerous or
indicative of danger to the public health. Biological investigations
already published have sufficed to show that this is not always the
case.^
There is no longer any doubt that in many cases — perhaps
most cases — the peculiar odors and tastes of surface waters are
due, not to decay, but to the presence of living or undecomposed
microscopical organisms, either animal or vegetable, in the water
affected. This conclusion rests upon various facts, one of which is
that in many instances the intensity of the odor keeps pace with the
growth of the organisms, while bacteriological examinations prove the
absence of conditions of organic putrefaction or decay. The fact that
certain microscopical organisms possess peculiar and characteristic
odors during life is not surprising, when we consider how character-
istic are the odors of some of the larger plants and animals with
which we are all familiar.
Several of the microscopic forms^ have been found to contain oily
products in considerable quantities at a certain stage of their growth,
and in the case of Uroglena an oil has been shown to be the cause
of the disagreeable odor and taste which usually accompany the or-
' "Odors in Drinking Waters." Report Mass. State Board of Health, 1892, p. 353.
'On Uroglena. Report Mass. S. B. H., 1891, p. 645. — Synura. 18th Annual Report
Boston Water Works, 1893.
Odors and Tastes of Surface Waters, 411
ganism. By a series of experiments recently undertaken, we are able
not only to add to the evidence upon this point by showing that the
natural odor of Anabaena is due to a similar oily product, but also to
draw a sharp distinction between the natural odors of the microscopi-
cal organisms found in surface waters and the odors produced by their
decay.
The following is a list of the microscopical organisms which have
up to the present time been known to give to surface waters a dis-
agreeable odor and taste. The genera in italics are those which have
been thus far the most prominent in this respect.
The list of natural odors given are all odors of growth, and are
products of the life of the organisms and not of their decomposition.
It is only in the case of the Cyanophyceae (so far as we are aware)
that we have a decided odor both of growth and of decay. Beggiatoa^
and some species of Chara ^ give off odors resembling that of hydro-
gen sulphide, which may be considered odors of decomposition. It will
be seen later that these odors of decay are due to the peculiar chemical
composition of the organisms.
' Proc. Am. Soc. of Microscopists (1884), p. 90.
St Thomas's Hospital Reports, Vol. xx (1890), p. 51.
St. Thomas's Hospital Reports, Vol. xiii (1883), p. 39.
Comptes Rendus, xcv (1882), p. 846.
Comptes Rendus, ii (1879), P- 1078.
The Lancet, January 7, 1893, P- 22.
* Jour, of the New England Water Works Association, June, 1896.
412
D, D, Jackson and J. IV, Ellms.
MicroOriSaniBois.
DiATOMACBiE :
Asterionella
Tabellaria
Meridion
CvANOPHYCKiK. (Bluc-grecii Algae.)
AfuilMsna
Rivularia
Clathrocystis
Coelosphaerium
Aphanizomenon ......
CHLOROPHYCEi« :
Volvox
Eudorina
Pandorina
Infusoria :
Uroglena
Synura
Dinobryon
Bursaria
I'eridinium
Cryptomonas
Mallomonas
Natond Odor.
Odor of Decay.
Aromatic to fishy.
Aromatic.
Aromatic.
Mouldy, grassy.
Mouldy, grassy.
Sweet, grassy.
Sweet, grassy.
Faintly grassy.
Fishy.
Faintly fishy.
Faintly fishy.
Fishy and oily.
Ripe cucumbers.
Fishy, like rockweed.
Irish moss or salt marsh.
Fishy, like clam shells.
Candied violets.
Faintly fishy.
Pig pen.
Pig pen.
Pig pen.
Pig pen.
Pig pen.
Few surface waters are ever found to be entirely free from odor,
but, as a rule, these odors are so faint as to be perceptible only when
taken after shaking a considerable quantity of the water in a closed
vessel. A description of the manner of taking odors and of the com-
mon terms employed to designate them, is given in a paper on "The
Odor and Color of Surface Waters," by Dr. T. M. Drown.^
There is a decided difference in the strength of the natural odors
produced by the various genera, and even by different species of the
'Jour. New England Water Works Association, March, 1888.
ASTEBIOKELLA.
SVNURA.
CLATHHOCYSTIS.
The five microscojiical organisms which most commonly produce disagreeable odors and
(astes in drinking walers.
Odors and Tastes of Surface Waters.
413
same genus. Asterionella produces much the strongest odor yet ob-
served among the Diatomaceae, giving the aromatic odor and taste of
geranium, and often when in very large numbers a disagreeable fishy
odor. This change in the character of the odor is due to concentra-
tion. In the majority of cases when Asterionella has caused a dis-
agreeable taste and odor, the growth has occurred in an open distribut-
ing reservoir, the source of supply of which has been wholly or in part
a ground water. The difficulty may be overcome by pumping directly
into the system, or by covering the distributing reservoir to exclude
the light. Tabellaria gives a much less pronounced odor. Meridion ^
has not been found in large numbers in Massachusetts, and none of
the other diatoms have yet been known to produce a disagreeable
odor in water, although many genera have often occurred in enormous
numbers.
The odor of growth of Anabsena is stronger in water than that of
any of the other Cyanophyceae yet observed, and some species of Ana-
baena are much stronger than others.
Rarely has Rivularia been found in large quantities in Massachu-
setts, but when so occurring it is hardly less offensive than Anabaena.
Among the Chlorophyceae only the Volvocineae are known to give a
disagreeable odor of growth to drinking water, and Volvox ^ is the only
genus which has yet caused much trouble.
Uroglena heads the list of disagreeable infusoria, with a taste and
odor of fish oil. Synura is probably the next in strength, giving a
taste and odor something like ripe cucumbers. The odor from Dino-
bryon is faintly fishy, or like rockweed. Peridinium also gives a
slightly fishy odor resembling clam shells. Cryptomonas gives an odor
of candied violets.
The number of organisms per cubic centimeter necessary to pro-
duce a noticeable odor differs greatly with the various genera, and
often with different species of the same genus. The odor is, as a
rule, more pronounced when the organism is in a mature stage of
growth. It would be convenient for reference if an approximate figure
could be set for each objectionable species, showing the point where it
•Sporadic Growth of Ceitain Diatoms. By J. D. Hyatt. Proc. of American Soc. of
Microscopists, 1882.
' The data in regard to the odor of this organism are confined to observations made at
Hemlock Lake, Rochester, N. Y. See Trans. Am. Soc. Civil Engineers, Vol. xxi, Dec, 1889,
p. 483.
414 D. D. Jackson and J, W, Ellms,
would begin to cause trouble in a water supply. This, however, in the
present state of our knowledge, cannot be done. A paper on " The
Relative Taste and Odor Imparted to Water by Some Algae and In-
fusoria," by F. F. Forbes,^ bears upon this point.
The odors of growth of the diatoms and of the infusoria have been
fairly well established to be due to oily compounds, although the oil
itself has been actually isolated from the organisms only in the case
of Uroglena, as before mentioned. The odors produced by the Vol-
vocineae are so like those of the infusoria that there is little doubt
that they also may be ascribed to oily products.
The nature of the grassy odor of growth of the Cyanophyceae has
never heretofore been experimented upon, to our knowledge, and, in-
asmuch as this class of organisms also gives an extremely disagreeable
odor of decomposition, the cause for which was not well established, it
was decided to make Anabaena, which is the most troublesome of the
Cyanophyceae, the object of special study.
ANABiENA. Odor of Growth.
Odor-producing organisms have been concentrated by precipitat-
ing them with aluminum hydrate in a tall cylindrical galvanized iron
tank of a capacity of about forty gallons.
We have also found that the various tastes and odors produced by
the living organisms may be preserved for reference for a very consid-
able period of time by putting the concentrated organisms into pure
glycerine.
In the case of Anabaena a great many fruitless experiments were
performed to obtain the odor-giving principle in a concentrated state.
The water containing the organisms was filtered through absorbent
cotton and filter paper, and many extractions and distillations were
made without avail. During the fall of 1895 the growth in certain
parts of Ludlow Reservoir, Springfield, was very luxurious, and in the
sheltered coves where the water was shallow the growth was enor-
mous, and was found to be a practically pure culture of AnabcBfia cir-
cinalis?^ An excellent opportunity was therefore afforded to study
this particular species.
'Jour. New England Water Works Association, Vol. iv, December, 1891.
'Tableau synoptique des Nostochacees filamenteuses. M^m. de la Soc. des Sc nat
de Cherbourg (1889), Bd. xxvi, pp. 138-152.
Odors and Tastes of Surface Waters, 415
The odor of the organisms when fresh resembles the odor of
mouldy grass, and reasoning from analogy with the other organisms in
water already mentioned, it was inferred that the odor might be due
to the presence of oily products. Accordingly, large quantities of the
fresh organisms were treated with various reagents which would be
capable of dissolving any oil which might be present in the cells.
After several weeks of extraction the various samples were examined.
It was found that the spores remained unacted upon, while the con-
tents of the cells were in every case extracted. The spores and the
extracted cells settled to the bottom of the flasks. The solutions
above the precipitates were of a light yellowish color in the acetone,
alcohol, and ether extracts. With gasolene the gelatinous material
floated upon the water present, which was colored a deep blue from
the extraction of the cyanophyll.
The liquid above the precipitates in the several extracts was filtered
off and evaporated upon watch glasses. The odors from these residues
were in all instances, with the exception of the residue from the gaso-
lene, entirely unlike the original odor of the Anabaena. In the case of
all the residues, except that from the gasolene, a large amount of or-
ganic material had been extracted, and this material gave a very dis-
tinct odor of its own, which may have covered up or changed the odor
of any oily product present.
The gasolene used had been especially prepared for the purpose by
allowing it to stand over concentrated sulphuric acid for nearly a year.
It was then neutralized and carefully washed. This gasolene, of itself,
gave no odor whatever upon evaporation. It also had the advantage
over the other solvents in extracting nothing but the essential oil, in
evaporating very rapidly, and in not being miscible with water.
On examination, the extracted material from the gasolene was
found to consist of minute oil globules of exactly the same appear-
ance as the essential oils, and giving the natural odor of fresh Ana-
baena very strongly and distinctly. The odor disappeared in a few
days and only a resinous material remained. A microscopical exami-
nation of the extracts, which had previously been placed in a closed
air cell, showed in one or two cases the presence of minute needle-like
crystals which projected from the oil globules in all directions. It is
a well-known fact that the essential oils often form needle-like crystals
upon oxidation in the air. This explains the difficulty in isolating the
minute oily products found in many of the microscopical growths in
41 6 D, D.Jackson and J, IV, Ellms,
water. When concentrated by most methods they are oxidized or
changed before the final product can be obtained. In most cases,
when the odor due to an essential oil begins to diminish and finally
to disappear, it has been found that an oxidation of the hydrocarbon
has occurred, and the oil has become a resinous body which is quite
inodorous.
Beilstein ^ says, regarding essential oils, that they are commonly
terpenes or polymeric derivatives of them, and that only very rarely
are they entirely without terpenes in their composition. These bodies
are rapidly oxidized by moisture and air to resinous compounds.
In using ether, alcohol, or acetone, we have compounds all of which
contain oxygen and all of which are more or less miscible with water.
This makes the chance of oxidation much greater than in the case of
gasolene, which contains no oxygen in its composition and is not
miscible with water. It may well be that the odor had disappeared
from the ether, alcohol, and acetone extracts because of the oxidation
of the oil, whereas, in the case of the gasolene, the oxidation had not
taken place at all, or at least, had not gone so far.
Upon examination of the gasolene extract of Anabaena, after
standing eighteen months, the characteristic grassy odor was still
readily recognizable upon evaporation of the gasolene. The odor soon
disappeared, however, after the gasolene had evaporated, showing the
probable rapid oxidation of the odor-giving oil. •
It is not surprising that the extremely minute quantity of oily mat-
ter which is present in Anabaena, and which is suflScient to produce an
odor, should be so difficult to isolate, when we consider the instability
of compounds of this nature, and the opportunities for oxidation under
the artificial conditions imposed.
The foregoing experiments, in connection with what has already
been recorded in regard to the odors of growth of the Diatomaceae and
of the infusoria, point to the conclusion that the odors produced by
the undecomposed microscopical* organisms in drinking water are all
due to compounds of the nature of essential oils.
' Handb. d. organischen Chemic. 2 Aufl., 3, 303.
* Report Mass. State Board of Health, Part II, page 797.
Odors and Tastes of Surface Waters, 417
ANABiENA. Odor of Decay.
At Ludlow Reservoir, in the latter part of October, 1895, a con-
siderable quantity of the Anabaena, which had been left upon the edges
of the reservoir after the water had been drawn down, was in varying
stages of decay. In a cove sheltered from the wind, the water in sev-
eral places near the shore was covered with a greenish scum or slime.
Portions of this scum were streaked with yellow and brown matter,
while in various places the water appeared to be covered with a light
blue coating of a gelatinous nature. Deposited upon the edge of the
reservoir in the hollows of the ground were masses of a blue-green
jelly which gave off a decidedly offensive odor. Large lumps of this
jelly floated near the shore upon the surface of the water.
Several large bottles of the fresher material were collected and
brought to the laboratory. Analysis of the green gelatinous Ana-
baena at a stage just before decay sets in shows it to contain, when
dry, 9.66 per cent, of nitrogen. This very high percentage of nitrogen
is undoubtedly one of the reasons for the production of an offensive
odor during decomposition. The analysis is of a pure culture of Ana-
bcena circinalis. Dr. T. M. Drown^ made an analysis of the growth
from Ludlow Reservoir in 1889, and obtained 7.42 per cent, of nitro-
gen, but at that time the growth was mixed with Clathrocystis and
other organisms. Previous to that time Professor W. R. Nichols*
analyzed the growth in Ludlow Reservoir and obtained 1 1.18 per cent,
of nitrogen. This was also a mixed growth.
The material in the bottles immediately began to form a gas which
forced the gelatinous matter up to the neck of the bottle in the form
of froth. One of these bottles was sealed, and the gas evolved was
collected in a flask inverted over mercury. The evolution of the gas
ceased after four or five days, and during that time several complete
analyses were made of the gas which was collected. This work was
also duplickted with samples of Anabaena collected subsequently.
The gas given off from the decomposing Anabaena contained the
merest trace of hydrogen sulphide, but gave a strong test for sulphate
after being passed through bromine water. This shows that there
were volatile sulphur compounds in the gas which were only partially
'The Chemical Examination of Waters, Mass. State Board of Health (1890), p. 549.
Examination of Water Supplies.
'Ninth Annua] Report Mass. State Board of Health (1878), p. 157.
41 8 D, D. Jackson and J, IV, Ellms,
m
decomposed, and yet were in a state to produce a highly offensive
odor.
The following table gives the average results of the analyses of
several samples of this gas taken at different times :
Analysis of Gas Evolved from the Bacterial Decomposition of ANABiCNA.
Marsh gas 8%
Carbonic acid 1.5%
Oxygen 2.9%
Nitrogen 12.4%
Hydrogen 82.4%
The large percentage of hydrogen given off suggests a number of
interesting questions. The gas which remained dissolved in the liquid
contained in the bottle, and which was consequently not evolved, was
practically all carbonic acid and represented a very high percentage of
the total gas produced.
The decomposing organisms in the bottles brought to the labora-
tory passed through several stages of decay. After the evolution of
gas ceased, the green jelly-like mass became brownish in color, and
floated upon the surface of the water. The water was highly colored
by the cyanophyll which had been dissolved out of the cells of the
Anabaena. The color of this water was a deep blue by transmitted
light, and a blood red by reflected light. After several weeks the blue
color disappeared, and the brown gelatinous mass containing the living
spores of the Anabaena settled to the bottom of the bottle. An analo-
gous state of affairs doubtless exists in reservoirs infested with Ana-
baena. The spores are set free in a similar manner by the decomposi-
tion of the organisms, and settle to the bottom of the reservoir to be
revived when the conditions are again favorable for their growth.
The extremely disagreeable odor of the decomposing organisms,
together with the presence of a considerable amount of sulphur in
the gas evolved, led us to suspect the presence of a large amount of
sulphur in the organism itself. It is well known that the mercaptans,
and other organic compounds containing sulphur, give off very offen-
sive odors, and it was thought that some such compounds might be
formed by the bacterial decomposition of Anabaena. While we did not
isolate any specific compound, analyses of the gelatinous material re-
sulting from the decomposition of Anabaena showed the presence of a
Odors and Tastes of Surface Waters. 419
large amount of sulphur and a considerable amount of phosphorus.
A sample of Aphanizomenon flos-aquce from Lake Cochituate which
was collected by G. C. Whipple, Biologist of the Boston Water Works,
produced the " pig pen " odor upon decomposition, and also showed
a high per cent, of sulphur upon analysis. Etard and Olivier^ have
shown that in case of Oscillaria this sulphur is obtained by the organ-
ism from the sulphates dissolved in the water.
The odor of decomposing Anabaena is evidently not due, to any
extent, to the production of hydrogen sulphide, but to the partial
breaking-down of highly organized compounds of sulphur and phos-
phorus. The odor is undoubtedly more offensive on account of the
high per cent, of nitrogen present. It is true of the whole organic
world that those products which give the most offensive odors of
decay are partially decomposed, highly nitrogenous compounds, con-
taining sulphur or phosphorus.
In conclusion, we wish to draw a marked distinction between the
odors of growth and the odors of decay of the organisms occurring in
surface waters.
The usual cause for the disagreeable odors and tastes occurring
in potable water is found in the presence of large numbers of certain
microscopical organisms which secrete compounds of the nature of
essential oils.
These odors and tastes are caused by living, or undecomposed
organisms ; and although they are often very disagreeable, the com-
pounds which produce them are as harmless as those which give odors
and tastes to fresh vegetables or fish.
On the other hand, the *' pig pen " odor of the Cynophyceae (blue-
green algae) is produced by the decay of highly nitrogenous organic
matter in which partially decomposed sulphur and phosphorus com-
pounds play the leading part. The sanitary significance of these par-
tially decomposed compounds in drinking water is yet to be deter-
mined, but analysis would indicate that their effect upon the general
health would be unfavorable were it not for the fact that they occur in
such minute quantities.
In the case of the odors of growth, the ready oxidation of the odor-
giving principle to form a non-odorous compound is of practical signifi-
cance. It is possible that by the selection of filtering materials which
' Comptes Rendus de TAcademie des Sciences, Paris. Vol. 95, 1882, 846-849.
420 D, D, Jackson and J, tV. Ellms.
t
wDuld liberate and subsequently either oxidize or absorb the oily prod-
ucts, we might be able during the season when these growths are
most abundant, to materially improve many of our public water sup-
plies which are periodically infested with disagreeable organisms.
There, is a wide field open for the investigation of the growth and
decay of micro-organisms from a chemical standpoint. A better
knowledge of the chemical composition of the organisms themselves,
and of the organic and mineral contents of the waters which the vari-
ous genera infest, would undoubtedly better enable an expert to j.udge
whether this or that proposed water supply is likely to be favorable or
unfavorable to the growth of any of the objectionable micro-organisms
occurring in surface waters.
We wish to express our obligations to Professor W. T. Sedgwick,
Mrs. E. H. Richards, and Professor A. H. Gill, for valuable sugges-
tions in the preparation of this paper.
ADVERTISEMENTS.
THE EDWARD P. ALLIS COMPANY,
MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN.
® Reynolds Corliss Engines,
EITIEII COmiENSIKB, COIPDUND, OR TRIPLE EJPtNSIDK,
For Any Kind of Service. Highest Effldenoy Goaranteed.
HIGH DUTY PUMPING ENGINES.
HEAyr HOISTING ENGINES.
BIXWING ENGINES.
/IIR COMPRESSORS.
ROLLING MILL ENGINES.
yERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL BOILERS.
A D VERTISEMENTS.
Life and Letters of William Barton Rogers.
The Editor of the Technology Quarterly is authorized
to receive subscriptions £or the "Life and Letters" of
President Rogers at {3.00 per copy (a reduction of twenty-
five per cent).
It is hoped that these volumes may be widely read
and known by the Institute public.
Everyone who knows this work appreciates its unique
value, not only as containing the history of the early years
of the Institute, but as giving an account of the formative
period of American science.
Address Edttor Technology Quarterly,
Masaachuietta Institute «( Technolo^,
BOSTON, MASS.
CROSBV
SOLE MANUFACTURERS
CffOSBY POP AAPBTV VALVES, LocoinotlTe, Me
CROSbV water REUBP VAUVBS. for Pump.,
CROSBY KBVOLUTION COUNTBRS, Poddvt, >ith<r
RoUry or RMprocl Molion.
CROSBY IMPROVED 9TBAM PRESSURE OAOBB,
mDiE accuntt >nd durable than in^ tHher Diakc,
CK05BY STEAM BNOINE IMHCAItHt. with Ba^
KmK'» eicctrlMl AttKhnint. by which any num-
r of du|T3ins nay bt laktn >LniiilianEaiuly.
BOSWORTtI PEED WATBK REQULATORS. lor
■niinuinlng an cTEn water line in fut Keanuag bnilcn.
BRANDEN PATENT PUMP VALVES, mbber, with
CROSBV SPRING SEAT Qt^BE AND AINQLE >■
VALVES, with removable seilianddiju. Wairanted
CROSBY PATENT QAOB rsSTERS. A okmiIit •here nuny prcHor* gnH ttt \ati.
CROABY PRESSURE RECOKBBRS, in Circular Cua, Are perfectly reUable and ■ccunle frvRimUoi
any Wind or A'-^nt of preBUrt.
ORIOINAL SINGLE BELL CHIMB WHISTLHS, and other Wandaid tiiedidaH iu*d on BoUm, Kn,li»,
".•.'."wSyiiS'lBOSTOII, IISS., U. S. I .To-s I'^siJni.SSi.
REVIEW
OF-
American Chemical Research.
VOL. III. 1897.
Contributed by Members of the Instructing StaflE of
the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Arthur A. Noyes, Editor.
Henry P. Talbot, Associate Editor.
REVIEWERS.
Analytical Chemistry H. P. Talbot
Biological Chemistry W. R. Whitney
Carbohydrates G. W. Rolfe
General Chemistry A. A. Noyes
Geological AND Mineralogical Chemistry — W. O. Crosby
Inorganic Chemistry H. Fay
Metallurgical Chemistry and Assaying H. O. Hofman
Organic Chemistry J. F. Norris
Physical Chemistry H. M. Goodwin
Sanitary Chemistry E. H. Richards
Technical Chemistry A. H. Gill and F. H. Thorp
EA8TON, PA.:
CBBMICAL PUBUSHING CO.
1897.
A
[Contribution prom the Massachusetts Institute of Technow)gy.]
REVIEW OF AMERICAN CHEMICAL RESEARCH.'
Voi,. III. No. I.
Arthur A. Noyes, Editor ; Henry P. Talbot, Associate Editor.
Reviewers: Analytical Chemistry, H. P. Talbot; Biological Chemis-
try, W. R. Whitney ; Carbohydrates, G. W. Rolfe ; General Chemistry,
A. A. Noyes ; Geological and Mineralogical Chemistry, W. O. Crosby ;
Inorganic Chemistry, Henr^ Pay ; Metallurgical Chemistry and Assay-
ing, H. O. Hofman ; Organic Chemistry, J. F. Norris ; Physical Chemis-
try, H.M.Goodwin; Sanitary Chemistry, E. H. Richards; Technical
Chemistry, A. H. Gill and F. H. Thorp.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
Bv Henry Pay, Reviewer.
On the Diffusion of Sulpliides throus:h Steel. By £. D.
Campbbli.. Am. Chem.J,^ i8, 707-719. — In a previous paper
{Am, Inst, Min, Eng,, 23, 621), the author has described the
rapidity with which sulphide of iron diffused through steel at a
bright red heat. Bars of soft steel of the dimensions 2.5 X 5 X
15 cm., and the ordinary fused sulphide of iron were used.
Holes 12 mm. in diameter and 30 mm. deep were filled with 10
grams iron sulphide, and an iron plug was driven in. After
heating to a bright red heat in a muffle, the bar was allowed to
cool slowly. The hole was then found nearly empty, and drill-
ings taken near the hole showed on analysis no increase in
sulphur, while the scale formed at the suriace by oxidation
showed 2.6 per cent, of sulphur. These experiments were taken
up later, but a different specimen of iron sulphide was used.
Though carried out in exactly the same manner, no diffusion
was found to take place. A Hoskins muffle furnace was
arranged so that the sulphide in the hole could be watched dur-
ing the heating. Using the normal sulphide of iron, FeS, in
both open and plugged holes, the sulphide was seen to melt, but
no diffusion took place. A subsulphide, approximately of the
composition, Fe,S, was next made, and a bar 5 cm. long was
prepared with two holes equally distant from the center and
ends ; each hole was filled with 12 grams of the sulphide. The
bar was placed in the furnace on platinum covered supports, and
heated to a bright red heat in an oxidizing atmosphere for about
two hours. No diffusion was noticed. An oxysulphide of iron
was then prepared and found to diffuse quite rapidly. In from
10-15 seconds from the time the sulphide was observed to begin
iThis Review, which for two years past has appeared in the Technology Q%arterly
and as a separate publication, will hereafter be published only in this journal and in the
Technology Quarterly. Copies of the two preceding volumes may be obtained by address-
ing the Librarian of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston, Mass.
2 Review of American Chemical Research.
diffusing, diffusion appeared to be complete and the greater part
of the sulphur had been oxidized in the air at the temperature
of the experiment. To show that the oxysulphide diffuses the
whole length of the bar, a bar lo cm. long was prepared, and a
hole was drilled 12 mm. from the end. At the further end a
strip of asbestos was placed, held in position by a wire passing
around the bar. The temperature was brought to a bright red
heat, and after cooling the portions of asbestos in contact with
top and bottom were found black from oxide of Iron, due to the
complete diffusion. Cuprous sulphide was found not to diffuse
at all, but mixed with oxysulphide of iron it was carried along
with it. Nickel sulphide does not diffuse alone, nor when mixed
with iron oxysulphide. The author explains the phenomenon
by assuming that oxysulphide of iron is an extremely mobile
liquid at the temperature of the experiment, and that steel is
probably porous at the high temperature, so that diffusion can
take place ; the diffusing substance would readily be absorbed
by any porous absorbent material, such as asbestos or scale.
Cuprous sulphide he considers is not suflftciently mobile to be
drawn through the fine pores of the steel. Gravity affects the
diffusion, showing that the diffusion takes place in the liquid,
and not in the gaseous state.
On the Influence of Heat Treatment and Carbon upon the
Solubility of Phosphorus in Steels. By £. D. Campbell and
S. C. Babcock. Am, Chem, /., 18, 719-723. — This work was
undertaken to see whether heat treatment and carbon influence
the solubility of phosphorus, and to determine whether chemical
evidence could be obtained to prove the existence of phosphorus
in steels in different modifications. For this purpose samples
were taken containing varying percentages of carbon, and sub-
jected to different heat treatments. The phosphorus was deter-
mined in each in an annealed sample, in a hardened one, and in a
normal portion, as it came from the mill. In each sample a
determination was made of the total phosphorus, of the phos-
phorus soluble and insoluble in neutral mercuric chloride, and of
that insoluble in neutral mercuric chloride but soluble in 4 per
cent, hydrochloric acid. The phosphorus soluble in mercuric
chloride was determined by shaking 5 grams of steel with 35
grams of mercuric chloride and 130 cc. of water. The filtrate was
examined for phosphorus by adding 10 cc. of ferric chloride solu-
tion, in which the phosphorus had been previously determined,
and 4 grams sodium acetate, precipitating as basic acetate, dis-
solving and reprecipitating with ammonium molybdate. The
portion insoluble in mercuric chloride was placed, together with
the mercury, in a boat in a combustion tube, and after the mer-
cury had been volatilized, the phosphorus was determined in the
residue. From the table of results given, the following conclu-
i
Inorganic Chemistry, 3
sions are drawn : i. With very low percentage of carbon, the
effect of heat treatment upon the solubility of phosphorus is
slight. Probably if carbon were entirely absent there would be
no effect. 2. With increase of carbon the effect of hardening is
to decrease the solubility of the phosphorus. 3. With a high per-
centage of carbon the solubility is increased by slow cooling.
The author considers that these facts indicate the probable for-
mation at a high temperature of a difficultly soluble compound of
iron with carbon and phosphorus, which on slow cooling passes
into an easily soluble one.
A Pure Carbide of Iron. By E. D. Campbeli.. Am, Chem,
/., 18, 836-847. — The investigation was undertaken to see
whether a purer carbide of iron than any heretofore isolated
could be obtained, and to determine whether a formula as sim-
ple as CFe, should be assigned to it. The steel used in the work
was one containing 1.29 percent, of carbon. It was cut into bars
and the bars carefully annealed by packing between layers of
sheet asbestos; below these was a layer of crushed charcoal, and
above a mixture of one part of charcoal to five of wood ashes. The
muffle in which the whole was placed, was brought to a bright
red heat, the fires banked, and allowed to cool slowly. After
cooling, the scale was removed by grinding on an emery wheel,
and the bars were cut into strips 15 cm. long, 15 mm. wide, and 5
mm. thick. Twelveof these bars were hung on a ring of copper wire
in a 4 per cent, solution of hydrochloric acid and connected with
the positive pole of four storage batteries. The negative pole
was a platinum cylinder suspended in a porous cup placed in the
center of the circle of bars. A current of one ampere was
allowed to act over night, and in the morning the residue adher-
ing to the bars was removed with a brush of aluminum wires.
The carbide was washed with potassium hydroxide and water,
and the lighter portions decanted off. The carbide remaining
was washed with alcohol and ether, the dried product consisting
of a bright steel gray powder made up of thin plates or scales of
specific gravity 6.944. After 29 electrolyses 575.8 grams of steel
were dissolved and 55.1 grams of carbide obtained. On analy-
sis the substance gave 6.646 and 6.625 P^r cent, carbon, 93.25
per cent, iron, and 0.026 per cent, phosphorus. The carbide
is slowly but completely converted into ferric oxide by oxida-
tion in moist air, and is completely soluble in moderately con-
centrated hydrochloric acid. An examination of the gases
evolved on treatment with acid showed them to be hydrogen,
ethane, and the unsaturated hydrocarbon butylene, probably
mixed with a little dibutylene. Butane probably remained in
the solution in the generating flask. The author considers it
not improbable that iron and carbon may form a series of ferro-
carbons of the general formula CnFe,n, analogous to the hydro-
4 Review of American Chemical Research,
carbons CnH,Q, in which a group of three bivalent iron atoms
would replace two hydrogen atoms of the unsaturated hydrocar-
bon. On treatment with acids the corresponding hydrocarbon
would be set free, and would be partly converted into the cor-
responding saturated hydrocarbon by secondary reactions.
The Alkali Trihalides. By Charles H. Herty and Homer
V. Black. Am, Chem. /., i8, 847^849. — It has been pre-
viously shown by Herty that the so-called compounds PblCl,
PbI,.2PbCl„ and PbI,.5PbCl, are isomorphous mixtures of lead
iodide and lead chloride. To determine whether the alkali tri-
halides are of the same nature, rubidium dibromiodide was pre-
pared by adding bromine to rubidium diiodide. On evaporation
three separate crops of crystals, similar in appearance, were ob-
tained, and each crop was analyzed, giving results which indi-
cated that they were all of the same composition, namely, that
represented by the formula RbBr,I. They are therefore not iso-
morphous mixtures.
On Trimetaphosphlmic Acid and its Decomposition Prod-
ucts. By H. N. Stokes. Am, Chem, /., 18, 629-663. — In a
previous paper the author has shown that by shaking with water
an ethereal solution of Liebig's phosphorus chloronitride,
P,N,Cle, an acid is obtained which has the empirical formula
P,N,0,Hg, and to which he gave the name trimetaphosphimic
acid. He regarded the acid as a metaphosphoric acid (HPO,)n,
in which one-third of the oxygen is replaced bj' an equivalent
number of imido (NH) groups. The acid is best prepared by
agitating 30 grams of phosphorus chloronitride dissolved in 150
cc. alcohol-free ether with a solution of no grams of sodium
acetate in 200 cc. of water. After 15 hours well formed crystals
of the sodium salt appear, and after 70-80 hours the reaction is
complete. The constitution of trimetaphosphimic acid depends
upon that of the phosphorus chloronitride. The structural for-
mula of the latter has not been definitely established, but it is
reasonably certain that the phosphorus atoms are joined by
nitrogen, otherwise the formation of hydrazine might be ex-
pected. It is quite likely, also, that chlorine is not united to
nitrogen : for in this case hydroxylamine might be expected.
The simplest formula meeting the requirements is one in which
the nucleus consists of a symmetrical ring of three phosphorus
and three nitrogen atoms. Direct replacement of chlorine would
give an acid in which the grouping — (OH),P = N — is repeated
three times in the ring, but the author considers that the labile
nature of the hydrogen, as observed in many organic substances
containing nitrogen, makes it not improbable that the grouping
may take the tautomeric form — (OH)PO — NH. This assump-
tion is in accordance with the facts, and explains the formation
and decomposition of trimetaphosphimic acid. The acid is
Inorganic Chemistry. 5
extremely soluble, uncrystalHzable, and undergoes rapid spon-
taneous decomposition. The final decomposition products are
phosphoric acid and ammonia, but the intermediate products,
diimidotriphosphoric acid, imidodiphosphoric acid, and pyro-
phosphoric acid have been isolated. Assuming the symmet-
rical ring formula referred to above :
NH— PO(OH)— NH
PO(OH)— NH— PO(OH),
the decomposition with water takes place with the formation of
ammonia and diimidotriphosphoric acid :
NH— PO(OH),
PO.OH— NH— PO(OH)„
this again reacting with water to form ammonia and imidodi-
phosphoric acid : ^H<CpQ/QTTx% and phosphoric acid. The
imidodiphosphoric acid then reacts with water to form pyrophos-
phoric acid and ammonia ; this reaction is shown to take place
by heating the free acid with dilute acetic acid, when about 15
per cent, pyrophosphoric acid is obtained. The sodium salt of
trimetaphosphimic acid, P,N,0.H,Na,.4H,0, was prepared by
treating an ethereal solution of phosphorus chloronitride with
sodium acetate. When crystallized above 80** C. it contains
only one molecule of water. The ammonium salt,
P.NAH.(NHJ..H,0,
and the silver salt, PjN.O.H^Ag, are characteristic, and serve to
identify the acid. The silver salt, PjN.O.Ag, exists in two well
defined forms. Its analysis serves to establish the empirical
composition of the acid. One of these silver salts is white,
amorphous, and soluble in ammonium nitrate, and is easily con-
verted by this reagent into the other, which is red, crystalline,
and insoluble in it. By crystallizing the tertiary sodium salt
from an excess of sodium hydroxide a salt containing four atoms
of sodium is obtained. The author considers it as an amido
derivative of diimidotriphosphoric acid, assuming that sodium
hydroxide is added directly to the molecule of the trisodium salt
in this way :
NH— POONa— NH NH— POONa— NH,
I I +NaOH= I
POONa— NH— POONa POONa— NH-PO(ONa),.
Silver nitrate precipitates a salt from the tetra sodium salt,
but it decomposes so readily that satisfactory analytical results
could not be obtained. Diimidotriphosphoric acid forms two
series of salts, in which three and five atoms, respectively, of
6 Review of American Chemical Research,
hydrogen are replaced. The alkali salts with three atoms of
metal are neutral ; those with five atoms have an alkaline reac-
tion. The two remaining hydrogen atoms have not been
replaced by metal. Imidodiphosphamic acid is probably iden-
tical with Gladstone's pyrophosphamic acid. It forms a tri and a
tetra silver salt, the latter existing in two distinct forms. The
acid can be distinguished from amidodiimidotriphosphoric acid
by the insolubility of its magnesium salt, by its syrupy tertiary
sodium salt, and by the yellow precipitate which its ammoniacal
solution gives with silver nitrate.
OnTetrametaphosphimic Acid. By H.N. Stokes. Am.Chem,
/., i8, 780-789. — Tetrametaphosphimic acid can be obtained
by agitating tetraphosphonitrilic chloride, P^N^Clg, dissolved
in 15 volumes of alcohol-free ether with five volumes of water.
Chlorhydrines are formed as intermediate products, but remain
dissolved in the ether, while the free acid separates in crystalline
condition. From one of the chlorhydrines an acid was obtained,
but in too small amount to determine its composition. Tetra-
metaphosphimic acid can also be obtained in the form of its am-
monium salt by agitating the chloride with aqueous ammonia or
ammonium acetate. In the latter case the yield is theoretical.
The free acid crystallizes with two molecules of water,
P^N^08Hg.2H,0, which are not given off in vacuo. At 100** C.
it loses weight at first rapidly, and then slowly, but the total loss
never reaches the theoretical. Heated rapidly to 130-140® C.
the loss is soon replaced by a gain, and after 30 hours at this
temperature an increase of 11. 15 per cent, was observed. The
product consisted of unchanged acid, with ammonium phosphate
and apparently pyrophosphoric acid. One hundred parts of
water at 20° C. dissolve 0.64 parts of the crystallized acid. Boil-
ing alkaline solutions cause no evolution of ammonia. It is ex-
tremely stable towards acids. Experimental data are lacking
for a discussion of the constitution of this acid, as the decompo-
sition products are extremely unstable. Presumably the phos-
phorus atoms in the nucleus P^N^ are united by nitrogen atoms,
but whether they constitute a ring of eight atoms cannot be
decided. Three series of salts are formed, P^N^O.H.M',,
P,N,0,H,M'„ and P^N^O^M',. The dipotassium, tetrasodium,
di- and tetra- ammonium, dibarium, and tetrasilver salts are de-
scribed. If an ammoniacal solution of a salt containing four
atoms of metal is added to an excess of silver nitrate, a yellow
flocculent precipitate forms which is insoluble in ammonium
nitrate. When, however, a neutral tetrametaphosphimate is
added to silver nitrate containing a slight excess of ammonia, a
small amount of a nearly white flocculent precipitate forms
which is soluble in ammonium nitrate on gently warming ; from
this solution an orange yellow crystalline substance is thrown
Inorganic Chemistry, 7
out on boiling for a moment. From the original filtrate a large
quantity of the same salt is obtained by boiling. Each salt con-
tains eight atoms of silver, and the crystalline salt is apparently
a modification of the yellow precipitate formed in the first case.
The author suggests that these salts may be regarded as corres-
ponding to the tautomeric forms of the acid (PN(OH),)^ and
(PO.NH.OH),.
Mercuric Chlorthlocyanate. By Charles H. Herty and
J. G. Smith. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 18, 906-908. — By fractional
crystallization and analysis of the different crops of crystals, the
authors conclude that mercuric chlorthlocyanate is a true chemi-
cal compound, and not an isomorphous mixture of mercuric
chloride and mercuric thiocyanate. ^
Nickelo-Nickelic Hydrate, Ni.O^.aH^O. By William I,.
Dudley. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 18, 901-903. — Nickelo-nickelic
hydrate, Ni,0^.2H,0, was obtained in crystals by fusing metal-
lic nickel with sodium peroxide.
Contribution to tlie Knowledge of the Rutiienocyanides. By
James Lewis Howe. J, Am, Chem, Soc, 10, 981-987. — The
author has tried many methods for the preparation of rutheno-
cyanide to ascertain the efiiciency of each, has given some quali-
tative reactions, and has prepared and analyzed the potassium
and barium salts.
Some New Compounds of Thallium. By L. M. Dennis and
Martha Doan, with Crystallographic Notes, by A. C. Gill.
/. Am, Chem. Soc, 18, 970-977. — The authors have prepared
the compounds thallous trinitride, TIN,, thallous-thallic trini-
tride, T1N,.T1N,. thallous tellurate, Tl,TeO„ and thallous cyan-
platinite, TlPt(CN),. The author calls the acid HN, hydro-
nitric acid and its salts trinitrides. Owing to the fact that other
nitrides besides those derived from this acid exist, it is far pref-
erable in the reviewer's opinion to name the acid hydrazoic acid,
in accordance with the proposal of its discoverer, and to call its
salts azides.
Reduction of Concentrated Sulphuric Acid by Copper. By
Charles Baskerville. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 18, 942-947. —
The author refutes the statement of Andrews {this Rev,, 2, 6,)
that copper is not acted upon at o** C, and not until 86° C. has
been reached, which is above the point of dissociation of sul-
phuric acid. The previous work of the author has been
repeated and confirmed. He also shows that, when air is
absent, sulphuric acid is reduced by copper at a temperature far
below 86° C. with formation of cupric sulphate, cuprous sul-
phide and sulphur dioxide.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
J. p. NORRIS, RbVIBWBR.
The Action of Sodium on Aldehyde. By Paul C. Freer.
Am. Chem, /., i8, 552-562. — When aldehyde, diluted with ether,
was treated with sodium, hydrogen was evolved and a white -
crystalline sodium derivative, believed to have the structure |
CH, : CHONa, was formed. The compound could not be ana- I
lyzed, as it soon changed into a brown, sticky mass. Sodium
reacted with an ethereal solution of aldehyde and benzoyl chlo-
ride. After the reaction was completed, the solvent was washed
with potassium hydroxide to remove benzoic acid, dried, and
evaporated in a vacuum. A thick, slightly yellow syrup, which
soon became permeated with a mass of prismatic crystals, was
obtained. Th^ latter melted at 86°-87'', had the composition
Cj.HigO^, and were soluble in alcohol, ligroin, benzene, and
chloroform. By treatment with water at 100** in a closed tube,
the compound was decomposed into benzoic acid, aldol, and
aldehyde. Destructive distillation, decomposition at 100** with
hydrochloric acid, and heating the pure compound at 150** in a
sealed tube, yielded, in each case, the same products : benzoic
acid, crotonic aldehyde, and acetic aldehyde. When warmed
with alkali, solution takes place and aldehyde resin is formed.
The compound does not react with dilute alkalies, bromine, cold
potassium permanganate, or phenylhydrazine. From the beha-
vior of the compound, the author concludes that it is aldehydo-
aldolbenzoate,
^'^'^^> CHCH,CH <^>CHCH..
In the preparation of the substance, sodium acetaldehyde,
which is first formed, condenses to a derivative of aldol, which,
in turn, reacts with the benzoyl chloride present. As the ben-
zoyl group in the resulting compound is joined to oxygen, the
structure of sodium acetaldehyde is CH, : CHONa. The liquid
product of the action of sodium on aldehyde and benzoyl
chloride was shown to be aldol benzoate by comparing its
behavior, when subjected to destructive distillation, with that of
a similar compound prepared from aldol, benzoyl chloride, and
sodium.
On the Constitution of Some Derivatives of Formic Add.
By Paui. C. Freer and P. L. Sherman, Jr. Am, Chem. /.,
18, 562-584. — As the physical and chemical properties of formic
acid are not in accord with the constitutional formula assigned
to it, the authors undertook an investigation of formylphenyl-
hydrazine^ formamide, and formic ester, in order to throw some
light on the structure of the formyl group — CHO. When
formylphenylhydrazine was dissolved in a concentrated alcoholic
Organic Chemistry, 9
solution of sodium ethylate and the solution diluted with ether,
a mono-sodium salt crystallized out. To determine the position
of the sodium atom, the substance was treated with ethyl iodide
under different conditions. When suspended in dry ether, mono-
ethylformylphenylhydrazine was obtained, which melted at 106®
and crystallized in rhombohedra. As the compound was not
saponified by sodium hydroxide, and its reduction products
were aniline and ethylamine, it follows that its structure is
C.H.NH— N(C,H.)— CHO. It did not react with ethyl iodide
and sodium ethylate or with sodium. When the sodium salt of
formylphenylhydrazine was dissolved in absolute alcohol, a mono-
ethyl derivative, melting at 78^-79°, and crystallizing in needles,
was obtained. Its constitution, as shown by its reduction-
products, unsymmetricalethylphenylhydrazine, ethylaniline, and
ammonia, is C,H.NC,H.— NH— CHO. When treated with ethyl
iodide and sodium ethylate, diethylformylphenylhydrazine was
formed. The latter compound did not react with sodium, and
gave as reduction-products ethylamine and ethyl aniline. The
formation of the two mono- ethyl derivatives excludes the possi-
bility that the sodium atom is attached to oxygen because, were
addition of ethyl iodide to take place at the unsaturated nitrogen-
linking, with a subsequent splitting off of sodium iodide or
hydriodic acid, but one ethyl derivative, with the structure
C.H.NH— NC,H,— CHO, could be obtained. Acetic anhydride
reacted with formylphenylhydrazine, forming a compound in
which the acetyl group was joined to nitrogen. Benzoyl chlo-
ride and sodium ethylate gave a mono- and dibenzoylformyl-
phenylhydrazine. The sodium derivative of the latter was pre-
pared. Chlorcarbonic ester and formanilide reacted with the
formation of ethylisoformanilide, C^H^N = CHO.C,H,, and
diphenylformamidine, C.H^N = CH — NH — C.H^. Sodium re-
acted with formic ester in the cold, yielding hydrogen, carbon
monoxide, and sodium ethylate. When amyl formate was used,
the reaction was slower ; sodium amyl formate was first formed
and then broke down. The authors conclude that the above
reactions prove that the sodium in sodium formylphenylhydra-
zine is attached to nitrogen and that, therefore, no hydroxyl
group is present. They do not furnish any evidence of the
presence of an aldehyde group and, consequently, a structural
formula according to the present theories is not possible. On
the other hand, there is evidence of a hydroxyl grouping in the
salts of formanilide. No explanation can be given of the fact
that diethylformylphenylhydrazine, in which there is a grouping
similar to that in formic ester, does not react with sodium,
whereas the ester reacts with sodium readily.
On Certain Derivatives of Triclilordinitrobenzol. By C.
LoRiNG Jackson and W. R. Lamar. Am, Chem, /., 18, 664-
lo Review of American Chemical Research.
685. — For several years the behavior of tribromdinitrobenzene,
melting at 192°, with various reagents, has been studied by
Jackson and his pupils. The action of the analogous chlorine
derivative with aniline, sodium ethylate, and sodium malonic
ester is described in the present paper. When heated with ani-
line, trichlordinitrobenzene, melting at 129**. 5, gives the same
trianilidodinitrobenzene which was obtained from tribromdini-
trobenzene. With sodium ethylate in the cold, trichlordinitro-
benzene lost two of its atoms of chlorine, which were replaced
by two ethoxy groups, forming chlordinitroresorcine diethyl
ether, which melts at 160''. The reaction is analogous to that
with the bromine derivative. A hot solution of sodium ethylate
changed tribromdinitrobenzene into dinitroresorcine diethyl
ether, while, under the same conditions, the chlorine compound
was converted into a mixture of dinitrophloroglucine triethyl
ether, C,H(NOJ,(OC,HJ„ which melts at I04**-I05^ and its
diethyl ether, C.H(NO,),(OC,H,),OH, melting at 166°. When
treated with sodium malonic ester, two bromine atoms are re-
moved and bromdinitrophenylmalonic ester,
C.H,Br(NO.),CH(COOC.HJ„
is formed. Trichlordinitrobenzene gives with the same reagent
dichlordinitrophenylmalouic ester,
C,HCl,(NO,),CH(COOC,HJ,.
Both substituted malonic esters are saponified by boiling with
sulphuric acid, forming the corresponding phenylacetic acids,
but the dichlordinitrophenylacetic acid,
C,HC1, ( NO,) ,CH,COOH ,
differs from the bromdinitrophenylacetic acid in that the latter
is so unstable that five crystallizations from alcohol convert it
into bromdinitrotoluene, whereas the former can be crystallized
from water without change. When boiled some hours with alco-
hol, dichlordinitrophenylacetic acid is converted into its ethyl
ester. Both substituted malonic esters give red sodium salts,
and are converted into nitrites by the action of nitric acid.
Bromdinitrophenylacetic acid gives an intense green coloration
with sodium hydroxide. Dichlordinitrophenylacetic acid is
changed by the same reagent to a red compound, which soon
fades to white.
Camphoric Acid. By W. A. Noyks. Am. Chem, /., 18,
685-692. — In this paper, the fourth contributed by the author
on the subject of camphoric acid, evidence is brought forward
which disproves the formula of camphor proposed by Tiemann.
In a previous paper {Am, Chem, /., 17, 421), several reasons
were given for believing that camphoric acid is a derivative of
succinic rather than glutaric acid. This opinion has received
Organic Chemistry. 1 1
additional support from the work described in the present paper,
and it follows, therefore, that Bredt^s formula for camphor is also
incorrect. As it has been shown by the author {loc, cit,) thatdihy-
drohydroxycampholytic acid contains a tertiary hydroxyl group,
it follows that the carboxyl of aminolauronic acid is also ter-
tiary. Independent investigations of Walker (/. Chem, Soc, 63,
506) and the author {Am. Chem. /., 16, 509; and loc. cit.)
prove that the carboxyl in dihydroaminocampholytic acid is
secondary. There should, accordingly, be a marked difference
in the rate of esterifieation of the two acids. Ten times as much
ester was obtained from the latter as from the former. The
result disproves Tiemann*s formula, for according to it the rate
of esterifieation should be identical in both cases. The ethyl
ester of aminolauronic acid is a mobile, strongly basic liquid
with an ammoniacal, aromatic odor, and forms a sulphate diffi-
cultly soluble in water, which crystallizes in pearly-white plates.
When the sulphate of the ester of aminolauronic acid is treated
with a strong solution of sodium nitrite, it is decomposed with
the formation of the ethyl ester of >^-lauronic acid and a small
amount of the ester of a new hydroxy lauronic acid. The two
acids are separated by distillation with steam, after saponifica-
tion of the esters. The hydroxy acid, which is non- volatile, is
extracted with ether and is left, after evaporation of the solvent,
as a viscous, hygroscopic liquid, which forms an insoluble cop-
per salt, ( C,H,^<C!qttJ,Cu + H,0. The acid was shown to
have a secondary hydroxyl group by the actioji of Beckmann's
chromic acid mixture, which transformed it into the /^-ketonic
acid, which immediately decomposed into a ketone and car-
bon dioxide. Dihydro-cis-campholytic acid was prepared
by reducing cis-campholytic acid with amyl alcohol and
sodium. It melts at 244°, has the specific gravity 0.9833 at
20**, and is stable toward a cold solution of potassium perman-
ganate. The amide melts at 161®. a-bromdihydro-cis-cam-
pholytic acid was prepared by treating the acid with phosphorus
pentachloride and bromine. It melts at 129^-130'', and when
treated with cold alcoholic potash, hydrobromic acid is removed
and cis-campholytic acid is regenerated. This furnishes a new
proof that the double union of cis-campholytic acid is in the a- ft
position and gives additional support to the view that the two
campholytic acids are stereoisomers. Attempts to reduce the
cis-trans-campholytic acid were unsuccessful. According to
Armstrong's formula for camphor, cis-campholytic acid must be
-J'-tetrahydroxylylic acid. The reduction of xylylic acid,
C.H,(CH,),(i, 3)COOH(4), wouldgivefour stereoisomers, cor-
responding to which there would be four a-bromhexahy droxylylic
acids. Two of these, supposing Armstrong's formula to be cor-
rect, would give ciscampholytic acid when treated with alcoholic
12 Review of American Chemical Research.
potash ; and two would give either cis-trans-campholy tic acid or
^•-tetrahydroxylylic acid. From the hexahydro acid, obtained
by the reduction of xylylic acid, the a-brom derivative was
prepared and, on treatment with alcoholic potash, did not yield
any of the above products. The formula of Armstrong cannot,
therefore, be the correct one.
Derivatives of Dihydro-cis-campliol3rtic Acid. By E. B.
Harris. Am, Chem,/,, i8, 692-695. — From the amide of di-
hydro-cis-campholytic acid prepared by Noyes (see preceding
abstract), an amine, C.Hj.NH,, was prepared by the action of
potassium hypobromite. It is slightly soluble in water, boils at
156''. 5, and has the specific gravity 0.8431 at 20**. The chloride,
sulphate, and chlorplatinate are described. In order to obtain
the alcohol corresponding to the amine, the latter was converted
into the sulphate and treated with sodium nitrite. The greenish-
yellow oil obtained was separated by distillation with steam into
an oil which boiled at 122 , probably the hydrocarbon C.H,^ ; a
small quantity of a white crystalline substance, which was not
identified ; and an oil which contained the alcohol C,H„OH.
The latter was treated with Beckmann*s mixture of sulphuric
acid and potassium bichromate and the resulting ketone, after
purification, converted into theoxime, which melted at ii2**-ii3**.
The properties of the oxime agree closely with those of the one
prepared by Kipping (/. Chem. Soc, 67, 357) from dimethyl —
(i, 3) — cyclohexenone— (2). If the oximes are identical, cam-
pholytic acid is ^'-tetrahydro — (1,2,3) — xylylic acid.
•
On Diacid Anilides. By H. L. Wheeler. Am. Chem J,,
i8> 695-703. — In recent papers {^Am, Chem. /., 18, 381 ; 18, 540)
the author has shown that by the action of benzoyl chloride on
the silver and mercury salts of the anilides, mixed diacid anilides
can be obtained. In the present paper it is shown that the ac-
tion of aliphatic chlorides is analogous to that of benzoyl chlo-
ride, and that the resulting diacid anilides react with alkali with
the separation of the lower acid radical and the formation of the
anilide of the higher acid. From this reaction it appears that
the diacid anilides are nitrogen derivatives. The method of
preparation was as follows : Silver formanilide or mercury acet-
amide was suspended in dry ether or benzene and one molecular
proportion of acid chloride added. The action began imme-
diately and was complete, in the case of the lower acid chlorides,
in a few minutes. After filtering from the silver chloride or the
halogen mercuric compound, the filtrates were shaken with water,
and on evaporation of the solvent the diacid anilides were ob-
tained as oils, which were purified by fractionation under dimin-
ished pressure. The reaction is as follows :
Organic Chemistry. 13
CH,CO.C,H,N^^„ I pio-R — p TT ■hj.e-'COCH, I
CH,CO.C,H.N->"S + <-l"K _ C,il.w <^coR ^
C.H.N<^OCH..
The following compounds were prepared : Acetylacetanilide,
formylacetanilide, formylpropionanilide, formyl-«-butyranilide,
formylstearanilide, acetylpropionanilide, acetyl- «-butyranilide,
acetylisovaleranilide, and acetylpalmitanilide. Formylpropion-
anilide and formylstearanilide are easily decomposed by heat,
the former giving propionanilide, and the latter phenylisocyan-
ide and stearic acid. Diacid amides are not formed by the ac-
tion of acid chlorides on benzamide, the chief product being ben-
zonitrile. From this fact it follows that different structures must
be assigned to amides and anilides, if the action of acid chlo-
rides is a direct double decomposition in both cases. The author
suggests the possibility of the formation of unstable addition-
products in one case, which break down into simple bodies.
On Malonic Nitrite and Some of its Derivatives. By B. C.
Hesse. Am. Chem. /., 18, 723-751. — In order to determine
whether the metal is joined to nitrogen or to carbon in the salts
of malonic nitrile, the silver and sodium derivatives were pre-
pared and their reactions with a number of reagents studied.
Dry cyanacetamide, suspended in ether, does not react with so-
dium unless alcohol is present, when the mono-sodium salt is ob-
tained. Dibromcyanacetamide is found by the action of one mo-
lecular proportion of bromine on cyanacetamide in aqueous so-
lution. Malonic nitrile was prepared by fractionating the prod-
uct obtained by heating equal weights of phosphorus pentachlo-
ride and cyanacetamide at 90° until the evolution of hydrochloric
acid ceased. It is a white, ice-like solid, which melts at 29"*
and boils at 2i9°-22o°. By the action of bromine on malonic
nitrile, fused or in aqueous solution, a mixture of oils and
amorphous and cr>^stalline solids is produced. The latter bodies
alone were studied, and proved to be the brom- and dibromderiv-
atives of the nitrile. Brommalonic nitrile melts at 65°-66* and
does not form a nitro compound with silver nitrite. Dibrom-
malonic nitrile melts at 123°. 5-124**. The silver salt, formed by
precipitating a cold aqueous solution of malonic nitrile (one
molecule) with a cold solution of ammoniacal silver nitrate (two
molecules) , is a mixture of the mono- and disilver derivatives.
This mixture gives with ethyl iodide, besides amorphous sub-
stances, diethyl malonic nitrile and ethyl isocyanide. The for-
mation of the latter bodies is best explained if the structure as-
signed to the silver salt is AgN : C : C : C : NAg. The addition
of alkyl iodide to the double bonds between the carbon atoms
and subsequent elimination of silver iodide would give dialkyl
malonic nitrile. The formation of an isocyanide is explained
14 Review of American Chemical Research,
by the direct replacement of the silver by alkyl. The fact that
no isocyanide is formed when the sodium salt of malonic nitrile
is used is in accord with the above structure, as it is well known
that sodium salts do not act by direct replacement as readily as
silver salts. A mixture, probably of sodium malonic nitrile
and sodium ethylate, was obtained in an attempt to prepare a
disodium derivative of the nitrile. With methyl and ethyl
iodides this mixture gave, when heated in sealed tubes for eight
hours at 100**, dimethyl and diethyl malonic nitrile, melting at
32® and 44°, respectively. By the action of sodium ethylate on
a mixture of malonic nitrile and ethyl chlorformate, sodium di-
cyanacetic acid ethyl ester was prepared. Malonic nitrile, so-
dium methylate, and methyl iodide gave a mixture of dimethyl
malonic nitrile and dimethyl cyanacetimidomethyl ether,
rCH ^ !> C"~C V OCH • ^^^ presence of the latter compound
was proved by dissolving the mixture in water and precipitating
methyl dimethylcyanacetate, ^^^•^>C.COOCH„ with hydro-
chloric acid. Analogous ethyl compounds were prepared. Di-
ethylcyanacetamide, ^ ' ^^>C.CONH„ was formed in the prep-
aration of diethylmalonic nitrile, and when the latter compound
was boiled with absolute alcohol containing 1.3 per cent, of so-
dium. Diethylcyanacetic acid was prepared from the amide
and, when heated in concentrated hydrochloric acid in a sealed
tube at 160® for eight hours, was transformed into diethylacetic
acid.
On the •'Bechmann Rearrangement." By Julius Stihg-
LiTz. Am, Chem.J,, 18, 751-762. — The author offers the fol-
lowing explanation of the transformation of acid bromamides
into isocyanates in the presence of an alkali. The alkali causes
a direct loss of hydrobromic acid, producing the body RCO.N<
with a univalent nitrogen atom, whose reactivity is great enough
to take away the alkyl group from the carbon atom. The fact
that acid dibromamides, RCO.NBr,, chloranilides, and analogous
bodies, RCO.NCIR, do not suffer a similar rearrangement with
alkali is in accord with this view. A number of the reactions of
N
the acid azides RCO.N<C || , can be explained in thesameway.
N
Two atoms of nitrogen are liberated, leaving the group RCO.N<,
which suffers a molecular rearrangement, forming an isocyanate.
In the presence of reducing agents in alkaline solution, two
groups might unite forming diacyl, RCO.N = N.COR, which,
by taking up two hydrogen atoms, would give the diacylhydra-
zine RCONH.NHCOR actually obtained. When reduced in
Organic Chemistry, 15
acid solution, two atoms of hydrogen are added to the unsatura-
ted group, RCO.N<C» forming an acid amide. As it has not been
determined whether the salts of the acid bromamides, which are
formed before the transformation to the isocyanate takes place,
have the structure RC(NBr)OMe or RCO(NBrMe), the author
has investigated a number of compounds with analogous compo-
sition having alkyl groups in place of the metallic atoms. No
rearrangement has been observed. Chlorimidoethylbenzoate,
C,H,C(NCl)OC,H,, prepared by the action of sodium hypochlo-
rite and hypochlorous acid on benzimidoethylether hydrochloride,
is a colorless oil, insoluble in water, which boils at 131**-- 132° at
16 mm. pressure. An alcoholic solution evolves chlorine with
hydrochloric acid and nitrogen with ammonia. When chlorim-
idoethyl benzoate was heated, decomposition took place, with
violent boiling, in part according to the equation,
C.H.C ( NCI) OC,H, = C.H.CN + CIOC.H..
Benzamide and a trace of an aniline derivative were secondary
products of the reaction. Bromimidoethyl benzoate was much
less stable than the chlorine compound.
rienthene Nitro5ochloride and Some of Its Derivatives. By
W. O. RiCHTMANN AND Edward Kremers. Ant, Chem. /.,
18, 762-780. — Menthene, prepared by heating menthol with
anhydrous copper sulphate for ten hours, after six fractiona-
tions, boiled from 165** to 169°. A 15 per cent, yield of the
fraction boiling at i67**-i67**.5 was obtained and had the specific
gravity 0.8103 and the rotary power [a]i>= +29'*.63. Men-
thene nitrosochloride was prepared from the different fractions
of the menthene and purified by fractional crystallization.
Products were obtained which melted from 106*' to 117" and whose
rotary power varied from— 2°.4o8to4-i6°. 715. The menthene nitro-
benzylamine prepared from the different specimens of the nitroso-
chloride melted at io5°.5-io6°.5, and was inactive. The pur-
est sample of nitrosomenthene obtained, melted at 64'*-65*' and
had the rotary power — 4^.683. The ketone prepared from the
nitrosomenthene boiled from 205® to 218°. The fraction boiling
at 207*^-208'' was obtained to the extent of 40 per cent, and had
the specific gravity 0.9163 and the rotary power — i°.3i89. A
sample of inactive nitrosomenthane gave a ketone which had
the rotary power +o*'.4299. By the action of hydrogen sul-
phide on an alcoholic solution of the ketone, a hydrosulphide,
C,.H,g0.2H,S, was formed. With phenylhydrazine, a very un-
stable hydrazone, which melts at 72®. 5-73®, was obtained. The
product obtained by reducing the ketone consisted mainly of
unchanged ketone. By the dehydration of the alcohol Cj^H^gO,
a hydrocarbon was not obtained, but a compound which formed
an oxime and a hydrosulphide.
On the Non-Existence of Two Orthophthalic Acids. By H.
1 6 Review of American Chemical Research,
L. Wheeler. Am, Chem, /., 18, 829-836. — W. T. Howe
{Am, Chem, /., 18, 390) recently published an account of a new
orthophthalic acid and a number of its derivatives. The author
has endeavored, in a series of eight experiments, to obtain the
new acid by following the directions given. In every case ordi-
nary phthalic acid was obtained. The author further shows
that the analyses of the aniline salts of the two acids, although
they agree with one another and the calculated figures as given,
do not agpree with the true values. The analyses of the brucine
salts do not agree with either the calculated values given or
the true ones.
The Action of Sulphuric Acid on Anisol. By W. B. Shober.
A7n, Chem./., 18, 858-865. — Anisol was treated with sulphuric
acid, the amount of acid, the temperature at which the mixture
was heated, and the time of heating, varying with each experi-
ment. In order to separate the resulting acids, they were trans-
formed into amides. Anisoldisulphonic acid was formed in
every case when the mixture was heated on the water-bath to
92**, the proportion of the acid increasing with the increase in the
proportion of the sulphuric acid, and with the increase in the
time of heating. It is not formed at a temperature of 125".
When 10 grams of anisol and 80 grams of sulphuric acid were
heated at 91® for 30 minutes, 97.6 per cent, of the resulting
amides was anisoldisulphonamide. Paranisolmonosulphonic
acid was formed in every experiment, the amount decreasing
with increase of temperature, time of heating, and excess of sul-
phuric acid. 80 grams of sulphuric acid and 40 grams of ani-
sol, heated at 92° for 35 minutes, gave a mixture containing 91.6
per cent, paramide. Orthoanisolmonosulphuric acid was formed
in greatest quantity when anisol and sulphuric acid reacted at
ordinary temperatures. 54.6 grams of sulphuric acid and 28.1
grams of anisol yielded a mixture containing 12.5 per cent, of the
orthoaroide.
Dipyridine Methylene Iodide and the Non-Formation of the
Corresponding ilonopyridine Products. By S. H. Baer and
A. B. Prescott. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 18, 988-989. — Dipyridine
CH
methylene iodide, C^H^N<Ct j'^NC^H^, was prepared by
boiling for one hour molecular proportions of pyridine and
methylene iodide, diluted with an equal volume of alcohol.
The compound crystallizes in yellow needles, which decompose
at 220°, and is soluble in water and in hot alcohol, and insoluble
in ether, chloroform, and benzene. Dipyridine methylene bro-
mide was obtained by digesting pyridine and methylene bro-
mide in a sealed tube for two weeks. It melts at 295° and crys-
tallizes in colorless plates. It was impossible to make mono-
pyridine products.
GENERAL AND PHYSICAL CHEHISTRY.
A. A. NOYBS, Rbvibwbk.
Determination of Atomic Masses of Silver, flercury and
Cadmium by the Electrol3rtic Method. By Wii^lhtt Lkplky
Hardin. /. Am, Chem. Soc.^ i8, 990-1026. — All the success-
ful determinations described in this article were made by electro-
lyzing in a platinum dish potassium cyanide solutions of weighed
quantities of various salts of the three metals, and by weighing
the amount of metal deposited. Separate series, each consisting
of ten experiments, were made in this way with silver nitrate,
acetate, and benzoate ; mercuric chloride, bromide, and cyan-
ide ; cadmium chloride and bromide. The final values of the
atomic weights so obtained are 107.928 for silver, 199.99 ^^r
mercury, and 112.05 for cadmium, in close agreement with the
values derived by Clarke from the work of previous investigators
(107.92, 200.0 and 1 1 1.93.)
The Atomic Weight of Nitrogen and Arsenic By Joseph
Gii^LiNGHAM HiBBS. /. Am. Chem, Soc, 18, 1044-1050. — The
author has determined the atomic weights of nitrogen and arse-
nic by passing hydrochloric acid gas over weighed quantities of
potassium and sodium nitrates and over sodium pyroarsenate,
and weighing the residual sodium chloride. The values ob-
tained are 14.01 17 and 74.916 respectively. Those selected as
most probable by Clarke in his last year's report are 14.04 and
75-09.
Chemistry and Its Laws. ByF. Wajld. /. Phys. Chem., i,
21-33. As this article is by a foreign author, and as the sub-
stance of it has already appeared in a more extended form in a
foreign journal (Ztschr. phys. Chem., 18, 357), a reference to its
title will answer the purposes of this review.
On Ternary flixtures. By Wilder D. Bancroft. /.
Phys. Chem., i, 34-50. — This article is a continuation of a pre-
vious one on the same subject {see Tech. Quart., 8, 306). The
author shows that the solubility of salts in mixturesof water and
alcohol can be expressed by the equation: {x-^ A^y^=.C, in
which X represents the quantity of alcohol, and y the quantity
of the salt, in a definite quantity of water, and in which A,n and
C are constants determined from the experiments themselves.
.He shows further that the solubility jr of a salt in an aqueous
solution containing the quantity j^ of another salt can be expressed
by the equation: (;r-|-/i) (^-(-i?)«= C, an equation which
contains four empirical constants. The reviewer has already
pointed out (^Tech. Quart., 8, 306), that no physical significance
whatever can be attached to such results, a fact which will be
evident to any one acquainted with the properties of empirical
equations; for, if the introduction of so many arbitrary constants
1 8 Review of American Chemical Research,
be permitted, a great variety of mathematical functions could be
found which would represent the experimental results with a
practically equal degree of accuracy. The agreement is, in other
words, almost a mathematical necessity, and is therefore no evi-
dence of the correctness of the author's application of the mass-
action law to the phenomenon in question.
Precipitation of Salts. By H. A.Bathrick. J.Phys.Chem.,
I, 157-169. — The author has determined the solubility of potas-
sium, sodium and ammonium chlorides, and of potassium and
sodium nitrates, in various mixtures of water and alcohol, and
of the last two salts in mixtures of water and acetone. He shows
that his own results and also those of Nicol on the solubility of
salts in the presence of one another can be expressed by the for-
mulas proposed by Bancroft. He also discusses the criticism of
the reviewer (see preceding review), in regard to the use of so
many arbitrary constants, and points out that one of them, A,
has the same value for a definite salt, whatever be the other sub-
stance by which it is precipitated. But strangely enough,
according to the author's own calculations, this statement is not
correct. And, if it were, it is not to be doubted that the three
remaining arbitrary constants would suffice to make almost any
form of function express the results satisfactorily.
Solution and Fusion. By Wilder D. Bancroft. /. Phys.
Chem.^ I, 137-148. — This article contains no new experimental
data, but presents the opinions of the author on certain subjects f
related to those named in the title.
Nascent Hydrogen. By R. Franchot. /. Phys. Chem., i,
75-80. — The author finds that a neutral ferric sulphate solution
is reduced by metallic zinc, cadmium and copper, and concludes
that in acid solutions this direct reduction takes place simultan-
eously with that caused by the nascent hydrogen.
Speed of Esterification, as Compared with Theory. By Rob-
ert B. Warder. /. Phys. Chem., i, 149-156. — ^The authorshows
that the rate of esterification of alcohol and the three chlotacetic
acids, as determined by Lichty {Tech. Quart. ^ 8, 99), does not
conform to the requirements of the laws of mass-action in the
form applicable to a reversible reaction of the second order, and
he suggests four possible causes of the deviations.
H. M. Goodwin, Rbvibwbr.
The Specific Heat of Metals. By F. A. Waterman. Phys.
Rev., 4, 161-191. — The author has perfected Hesehus' method
of determining specific heats, and shows by numerous examples
that it is capable of a high degree of accuracy. In this method
General and Physical Chemistry. 19
the calorimeter is placed in the bulb of an air thermometer with
an attached manometer, and the rise of temperature, due to the
introduction of the hot substance, is exactly compensated by the
addition of ice- water drop by drop until the manometer registers
the original pressure within the air thermometer. An electric
heater is provided for heating the substance to any initial tem-
perature. This swings over the calorimeter for the introduction
of the hot substance through a trap in the bottom of the heater.
Without moving the calorimeter, the ice- water reservoir may be
swung around in place of the heater, for the final operation. The
apparatus described seems a model of convenience. The metals
used were of a high degree of purity. The following results
(the mean of a number differing by less than o.i percent.) of the
mean specific heat between 100® and 20"* were obtained : Bis-
muth, 0.03035; tin, 0.05453; aluminum, 0.021946; copper,
0.09471 ; gold, 0.03068; zinc, 0.09547. The article contains in ad-
dition a compilation of the literature , and the results of all the more
reliable specific heat determinations by different investigators ;
also a table of the most probable values of the mean specific heat
of the metals, the determinations by different methods and
observers being carefully weighted and combined. From a chemi-
cal standpoint the article is of especial interest as a presentation
of the most accurately determined atomic heat values, illus-
trating the degree of validity of the Principle of Dulong and
Petit. The author adopts 6.24+ as the most probable average
value of the atomic heat.
On the Viscosity of Mercury Vapor. By A. A. Noyes and
H. M. Goodwin. Phys. Rev,, 4, 207-217. — The authors have
determined the relative weights of mercury vapor, carbon diox-
ide and hydrogen, which were transpired under like conditions
of temperature, (that of boiling mercury, 357**) and of pressure
difference through the same capillaries in equal times, from
which the relative viscosity and relative cross-section of the
molecules of these gases could be computed. Experiments
made at different pressures conformed to O. E. Meyer's pressure
formula completely. For the more reliable capillary (74 cm. long
and 0.34 mm. internal diameter), the values found for the relative
viscosity tf were : 7hr : 7co,= 2.08 ; ^Hg : ^h, = 404 ; Vco, : Vu^
= 1.94. The corresponding values of the relative mean cross- •
sections q were: ^Hg : ^co, = 1.02 ; qn^ : ^h, = 2.48 ; that is,
the mean cross-section of the monatomic mercury molecule is
nearly the same as the tri-atomic carbon dioxide molecule, and
2.5 times greater than that of the hydrogen molecule. These
results indicate that atoms and molecules are of the same order
of magnitude, and therefore that the interatomic spaces within
molecules are not large in comparison with the size of the atoms.
20 Review of American Chemical Research.
Properties like viscosity which depend on the size or form of
molecules are therefore not well adapted for distinguishing be-
tween monatomic and polyatomic molecules.
On the Specific Gravity and Electrical Conductivity of the
Normal Solutions of Sodium and Potassium Hydroxides and
Hydrochloric* Sulphuric, Nitric and Oxalic Acids. By
E. H.I/DOMis. Phys, Rev,, 4, 252-255. — The following results
were obtained by the usual py knometer and conductivity methods
for normal solutions, which had been prepared with special care
as to the purity of the substances used :
Compound.
Sp. gr. J^.
K.10T
NaOH
1. 0418
148
KOH
1. 048 1
170
HCl
1. 01 65
279
HNO,
1 .0324
278
H.SO,
1.0306
183
(COOH).
I.OI99
55
Note on the Theory of the Voltaic Cell. By H. M. Good-
win. Phys. Rev., 4, 241-246. — ^This is a reply to certain criti-
cisms of Mr. Bancroft of an article by the author on the theory
of the voltaic cell and its application to the calculation of the
solubility of depolarizers of electrodes of the second kind. The
author shows by experiments that the electromotive force of
elements of the form Zn, o.inZnCl,, o.inZnBr,, Zn is practically
zero exactly as is required by Nemst*s theory, according to
which the potential difference between a metal and an electro-
lyte is primarily determined by the kaiion concentration of the
solution and not by that of the anions. Mr. Bancroft predicted
for cells of this type very considerable electromotive forces, be-
cause according to his views, the potential difference between
a metal and ^electrolyte is primarily determined by the anions .
Moreover, experiments on similar reversible cadmium cells de-
monstrate with what certainty one may predict results from the
osmotic theory, when the kation concentration of the metals
used as electrodes is known. Experiments made with the ab-
normally dissociated halogen salts of cadmium and its nitrate,
completely confirmed the conclusion derived by other methods
that the nitrate, chloride, bromide and iodide are very unequally
dissociated with respect to the cadmium ion, the nitrate being
the most, and the iodide the least dissociated.
On Irreversible Cells. By A. E. Taylor. /. Phys, Chem,,
X, 1-2 1, 81-91. — This investigation is a continuation of that of
Bancroft on the chemical potential of the metals. The author
General and Physical Chemistry, 21
finds in the good agreement of independent measurements of the
electromotive force of non-reversible cells, reason for accepting
Bancroft's view that such cells are limiting cases of reversible
cells and possess a definite electromotive force. Further experi-
ments, however, force him to reverse the Bancroft radical opin-
ions regarding the influence of the anion. The main conclu-
sions of his paper are namely : first, that the potential differ-
ence between a metal and an electrolyte is not a function of the
negative ion of the salt solution; and second, that in certain
cases dropping mercury electrodes do not give correct values for
the single potential differences measured by that method.
Purification of Water by Distillation. By G. A. Hui^ktt.
/. Phys, Chem.y i, 91-95. — The still used was an ordinary retort
of two liters capacity with a platinum condenser so arranged
that only the vapor condensed within this tube was collected.
Water distilled with potassium permanganate gave after one-
fourth had been rejected, a distillate of nearly constant conduc-
tivity of the value : K X 10'® = 0.77. Ordinary distilled water
first distilled from an acid solution of potassium bichromate, and
afterwards from barium hydrate gave equally good if not better
results: /fX 10'® =0.76-0.71. It is also found that the quality
of the water was independent of the rate of distillation when
barium hydrate was employed. Free sulphuric acid should not
be used as it passes over into the distillate.
Viscosity of Mixtures of Liquids. By C. E. Linbbargbr.
Am. J. Sci.y 152, 331-341. — Continuing his researches on the
properties of mixtures of *' Normal *'' liquids, the author has in
this paper extended his experiments to their viscosity. Ostwald's
well known form of apparatus was used and all measurements were
made at 25^. Sixteen different mixtures were investigated, and
in no case was a maximum of viscosity observed ; the origin of
the maximum observed by other investigators is to be sought in
their use of associated liquids. In most mixtures investigated,
the observed viscosities are less than those calculated by the
rule of mixtures. In certain mixtures, however, as those of
benzene, with toluene, carbon disulphide and chloroform the
differences are less than the experimental errors.
The Spectra of Argon. By John Trowbridge and Thbo-
DORB William Richards. Am. J, Sci., 153, 15-20. — With the
unusual facilities for investigating vacuum tube spectra afforded
by a Plant6 battery of 5000 cells, the authors have made some
very interesting experiments on the conditions necessary for the
production of the **red " and **blue '* spectra of argon, with a
sample furnished by Lord Rayleigh. It was found that with a
tube of large capillary and 15 cm. in length containing argon
22 Review of American Chemical Research.
under a pressure of one millimeter, 2000 volts were sufficient to
produce the red glow, a very much lower potential than that
(27,600 volts) estimated by Crookes. The introduction of aeon-
denser and spark gap between the terminal of the Geissler tube
caused the red glow to disappear, and the peculiar blue glow to
take its place. The potential necessary was estimated at not
over 2000 volts. By a number of other experiments it was
shown that the blue glow is produced by an oscillatory dis-
charge, while the red glow is the result of an unidirectional dis-
cbarge. So sensitive is argon to electrical oscillations in this
respect that the authors propose to call an argon tube fitted for
the study of electrical waves, for which it seems peculiarly
adapted, a talantoscope.
On the Hydrolysis of Ferric Ciiloride. By H. M. Good-
win. Tech, Quart,, 9, 254-271. The gradual change which a
neutral ferric chloride solution undergoes when a concentrated
solution is suddenly diluted, which is indicated by a gradual
change in its color from a light yellow to a deep reddish brown,
was investigated by measuring the simultaneous increase in the
electrical conductivity (at25**F. of solutions varying from o.i
to o.oooi molecular normal). The measurements showed:
First, that the molecular conductivity of dilute solutions in-
creases with the time. Second, that the rate of increase increases
very rapidly with the dilution. Third, that the increase in the
conductivity does not begin at once on dilution, but only after
the lapse of a certain time. Fourth, that the time elapsing be-
fore the reaction apparently begins, increases very rapidly with
the concentration ; thus the reaction as indicated by change
of color and increase of conductivity begins after about one min-
ute for a 0.0006 normal solution, 15 minutes for a 0.0012 normal
solution, 4 days for a 0.015 normal solution. Fifth, that the
time required for the completion of the reaction increases enor-
mously with the concentration ; for example, it is 3 hours for a
0.0001 normal solution, but over a week for a six times stronger
solution. And sixth, that the reaction when once started pro-
gresses slowly at first, then more and more rapidly up to a max-
imum, after which the velocity decreases, until a condition
of equilibrium is finally reached. The explanation sug-
gested to account for this remarkable behavior is that, on first
diluting a ferric chloride solution, the hydrolytic reaction
+++ + + +
Fe + H,0 = FeOH + H instantly takes place, whereby the
conductivity is increased by an amount proportional to the dif-
ference of the migration velocities of the hydrogen and ferric
ions. This is in agreement with the fact that the initial con-
ductivity increases more rapidly than can be accounted for
by electrolytic dissociation alone. The subsequent progressive
General and Physical Chemistry. 23
change of color and of the conductivity of the solution is due to the
gradual formation of undissociated deeply colored colloidal hy-
drate, according to the reaction ;rFeOH+ ;r20H = (PeO,H,);r.
A calculation under this assumption of the tnte initial hydrolyUc
dissociation from a combination of conductivity and freezing-
point determinations makes it probable that the hydrol3rtic dis-
sociation increases very rapidly with the dilution, being about
2 per cent, for a o.i to 0.2 normal solution, and 90 per cent, for a
0.0015 normal solution.
The Freezing-Points of Dilute Aqueous Solutions, III. By K.
H. LooMis. Phys. Rev.y 4, 273-297. — In this paper the author
has extended his well known work on freezing-points to solu-
tions of the following compounds : I<iCl, CaCl,, SeCl,, SnCl^,
HNO., KOH. NaOH, KH.PO,, Na,HPO„ Na(NHj.HPO„
Na,PO^, Na,SiO„ and acetic, oxalic, succinic, tartaric, and
citric acids. By working in a room at about 3^C., the tempera-
ture variations of which did not exceed 0.5^ C, the experimen-
tal error previously estimated at o.ooi** C. has been reduced one-
half . Among the important relations brought to light by a con-
sideration of the results may be mentioned the following : The
molecular depression of the freezing-point of all chlorides reaches
a minimum value which is especially pronounced in the case of
the chlorides of the alkali earths. Stannic chloride exhibits an
abnormally large molecular lowering, 12.61 for m = o.oi, which
is probably to be explained by its being highly hydrolyzed in
dilute solution. A study of the phosphates indicates that salts
of the type KH,PO^ are dissociated into two ions, K and H,PO^^
salts of the type K,HPO^ into three ions, K, K, andHPO^ ; while
the neutral phosphate K.PO^ is dissociated into four ions. Phos-
phoric acid itself is, as has been long known, but little dissoci-
ated, only one hydrogen ion being probably split off from the
molecule. Sodium silicate also gave abnormal lowerings, the
higher values observed being undoubtedly due to an hydrolysis
of the salt. Acetic, tartaric and succinnic acids, and also the
chlorides of lithium and calcium gave results in complete agree-
ment with those oi electrical conductivity measurements. Nitric
acid, and potassium and sodium hydroxide, on the other hand,
gave results for the dissociation deviating as much as 8 to 1 1 per
cent, from conductivity values. The reason for this discrepancy
is not known. It seems to the reviewer that much weight should
be given to the results of this investigator, in view of the clear-
ness with which he has discussed the precision side of this prob-
lem and his thorough appreciation of the nature and magnitude
of the errors affecting his measurements.
On the Formation of Lead Sulphate in Alternating Current
24 Review of American Chemical Research.
Electrolysis with Lead Electrodes. By Samukl Shbldon and
Marcus B. Waterman. /'A^^.^^z;., 4, 324-327. — The formation
of lead sulphate by the passage of an alternating current through
a sulphuric acid solution between lead electrodes was found to
diminish with rise of temperature, to increase very rapidly with
the number of alternations up to twenty per second, after which
It decreases, and to increase rapidly to a constant value with in-
creasing current density.
Polarization and Internal Resistance of a Galvanic Cell. By
B. E. Moore and H. V. Carpenter. Phys. Rev,, 4, 329-336.
— The authors have studied the polarization at each electrode of
a I^clanche cell, by combining each successively with a third
non-polarized carbon electrode kept on open circuit. Both elec-
trodes were found to be polarized, the larger part of the total
?>larization of the cell being at the carbon electrode however,
hat zinc in ammonium chloride would by the passage of any
considerable current become polarized might have been predicted
from Nemst's theory of the cell, since it is a non-reversible
electrode with respect to the l^ation. The rapid recovery of the
electromotive force of the cell on open circuit was found to be
largely due to recovery from polarization at the zinc electrode,
the recovery at the carbon electrode being much slower.
ANALYTICAL CHEillSTRY.
UI.TIMATE ANALYSIS.
H. P. Talbot, Rbvzewrr.
Table of Factors. By Edmund H. Millkr and J. A. Math-
ews. J. Am, Chem, Soc, 18,903-904. — The table presents
about fifty factors, commonly required for analytical work.
They are calculated from the atomic weights published in
Clarke's table (/. Am. Chem, Soc, 18, 213). The use of seven-
place logorithmSi and six decimal places in the values of the
factors is somewhat misleading and involves unnecessary labor.
Five-place logorithms suffice for the highest accuracy in chem-
ical analysis, and even four-place logarithms and four places of
decimals in the factors are sufficiently accurate, except in a few
extreme cases.
Some Anal3rtical Methods Involving the Use of Hydrogen
Dioxide. By B. B. Ross. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 18, 91S-923. —
The author proposed to determine iron by a procedure in which
an excess of potassium bichromate is added, which is allowed to
react with hydrogen peroxide, and, from the volume of oxygen
liberated, the excess of bichromate is estimated. A similar
Analytical Chemistry, 25
procedure is proposed for the determination of sugar, wherein
cuprous oxide is to be oxidized by potassium bichromate,
and the excess of the latter estimated from the oxygen evolved
on contact with hydrogen peroxide. The article leaves the
reader in doubt whether or not the processes proposed have any
real value.
The Separation of Thorium from the Other Rare Earths by
Means of Potassium Trinitride. By L. M. Dennis. /. Am.
Ckem. Soc.y 18, 947-952. — The author shows that thorium is
quantitatively precipitated as hydroxide by potassium trinitride,
and that its separation from cerium, lanthanum, and didymium
may be promptly and completely effected by means of this
reagent.
Notes on Reinsch's Test for Arsenic and Antimony. By
Jas. Lewis Howe and Paui. S. Mertins.— /• -^^- Ckem. Soc.y
18, 953-955. — The authors find that a confusion of antimony with
arsenic in this test is not likely to occur, since on heating the
copper upon which the deposition has taken place, the arsenic
forms well defined octrahedral Crystals of the oxide, while
the antimonious oxide shows no trace of crystallization. The
deposition in the case of the arseniates is slow, and it fails alto-
gether in the presence of nitric acid or chlorates. Organic mat-
ter does not interfere with the test. The antimony deposits
more slowly than arsenic on the copper and shows a violet tint.
Notes on the Determination of Phosphorus in Steel and
Cast iron. By George Auchy. /. Am. Ckem. Soc, 18, 955-
970. — From the experiments cited, the author concludes that in
order to insure a complete reduction of the molybdic acid to
Mo,0, dilution must be absolutely avoided after the solution
has passed the reductor ; that it is not necessary to wash out the
reductor with acid, except after long standing ; that when the
zinc for reduction is placed in the liquid and the excess removed
by filtration, the molybdic acid is reduced only to Mo„0„ ; that
dilute solutions of this oxide are less stable than concentrated
solutions ; that a boiling temperature must be avoided during
reduction and solution of the zinc, and that air must be excluded
while cooling the solution before filtration ; that cotton wool is
preferable to paper as a filtering medium ; that a considerable
excess of sulphuric acid increases the stability of the reduced
solution ; and that the reduction by means of zinc within the
solution, the excess of which is removed by filtration through
cotton, is the most desirable method for phosphorus determina-
tions. He also finds that sugar may be used to reduce and dis-
solve the manganese dioxide from the permanganate added to
oxidize the phosphorus.
26 Review of American Chemical Research,
fletal Separations by Means of Hydrochloric Acid Qas. By
J. Bird Moybr. /. Am. Chem, Soc, i8, 1029-1044. — ^The
author's results may be briefly summarized as follows : Anti-
mony trioxide was completely volatilized when treated in an
atmosphere of dry hydrochloric acid ; lead oxide changed to
chloride, volatile at 225** C. ; bismuth oxide completely vola-
tilized ; copper oxide changed to chloride, if first moistened
with hydrochloric acid and dried. By means of these reactions
the separation of lead from antimony, lead from bismuth, anti-
mony from copper, and bismuth from copper may be effected.
The arsenic may be volatilized from the arseniates of sodium,
copper, silver, cadmium, cobalt, and nickel. The separation of
the arsenic from iron and zinc is difficult. The arsenic and
nickel in niccolite were separated after solution in nitric acid
and evaporation to dryness.
The Separation of Vanadium from Arsenic. By Charlbs
FiEi^D, 3RD, AND Edgar F. Smith. /. Am. Chem. Sac., 18,
1051-1052. — Arsenic sulphide is completely volatilized from its
mixture with vanadium sulpliide without change of the latter,
if treated in an atmosphere of dry hydrochloric acid, below 250**
C. The separation may be utilized for quantitative analysis.
The Separation of ilanganese from Tungstic Acid. By Wai«-
TKR T. Taggart and Edgar F. Smith. /. Am. Chem. Soc.,
18, 1053-1054. — The authors* results are entirely negative, sim-
ply showing that neither yellow ammonium sulphide nor potas-
sium carbonate are suitable reagents to effect the separation of
the elements named. They make the independent statement
that molybdic sulphide may be easily converted to oxide by igni-
tion with anhydrous oxalic acid, after drying.
The Separation of Bismuth from Lead. By Arthur I^.
Benkert and Edgar F. Smith. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 18,
1055-1056. — The authors find that a quantitative separation can
be effected by double precipitation of the bismuth as a basic
formate, from a formic acid solution.
The Determination of Sulphur in Cast Iron. By Francis
C. Phii^lips. /. Am. Chem. Soc.y 18, 1079-1086. — ^The author
finds that white iron may be completely oxidized, with the con-
version of the sulphur to sulphates, by fusion of the finely divided
iron with sodium peroxide or a mixture of sodium carbonate
and sodium nitrate. Ferromanganese may be successfully
oxidized by sodium carbonate and sodium nitrate. The
percentages of sulphur determined by this method are apparently
higher than by oxidation with nitric acid.
Carbon Determinations in Pig Iron. By Bertrand S. Sum-
Analytical Chemistry. 27
HERS. y. Am. Chem. Sac, 18, 1087-1091. — The paper describes
several devices to expedite the burning of large residues, for
use in connection with the combustion apparatus, by means of
which the most refractory residues may be burned in an hour
and a half. The author finds the chromic acid method unrelia-
ble.
Notes on the Solubility of Bismuth Sulphide in Alkaline
Sulphides. By George C. Stone. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 18,
109. — The author finds that bismuth sulphide, which has been
precipitated from acid solution, is not soluble in potassium or
ammonium sulphide. Compare/. Am. Chem. Soc.y 18, 683.
The Analysis of Coke. By George C. Davis. Am'^^anu-
/aeturer, 59, 804. — The author claims that the foundryman does
not need to know the percentage of phosphorus in the coke used,
but should know the percentage of ash and of sulphur. The
usual proximate analysis of coke, and the Eschka method for
sulphur determinations are imperfectly described, but the paper
presents no new facts.
On the Chemistry of the Cyanide Copper Assay. By J. J.
Beringer and H. W. Hutchin. Bn^". Min.J., 6a, 390-391.
— The authors show that if potassium cyanide is addded to a
solution of copper sulphate, until the precipitate which first
forms is just redissolved, and ammonia is then added, a blue
solution slowly forms. The color is intensified by the addition
of ammonium nitrate. Increased quantities of ammonia, or am-
monium salts do not necessarily intensify the reaction. A simi-
lar result was obtained if cupric cyanide is shaken with ammo-
nia or ammonium nitrate. This may be decolorized by the
addition of cyanide, but ammonia again restores the blue. The
maximum quantity of cyanide was used in one case when only
ammonia was present, in another where three-eighths of the
ammonia was neutralized by hydrochloric acid. The reaction
between the cupric cyanide and ammonia the authors express by
the equation: 2Cu(CN). + 6NH, + 2H,0 = 4NH,.Cu(OH). +
(NHJ,Cu(CN)^, and they believe that their experiments and
the general experience with the cyanide process suggest a
•'reversible reaction with a slowly attained state of equilib-
rium.'*
On the Application of Certain Organic Acids to the Esti-
mation of Vanadium. By Phii^ip E. Browning and Richard
J. Goodman. Am. J. Sci.^ 152, 355-360. — The possibility of
the estimation of vanadic acid by means of a standard iodine so-
lution, (reduction having been effected by boiling with tartaric
acid) , is confirmed, and it is further shown that neither tungstic nor
28 Review of American Chemical Research.
molybdic acids are reduced by tartaric acid in cold solution, and
that tungstic acid is unaffected by either oxalic, tartaric, or citric
acids in boiling solution, while citric acid reduces vanadium
under these conditions. The general procedure is as follows: To a
solution of vanadium, which may contain also a molybdate, or
tungstate, add approximately one gram of acid (either tartaric,
oxalate, or citric) , for each one-tenth gram of substance. Heat
the solution to boiling, unless tartaric acid is used in the presence
of molybdates ; in this case digest in the cold from fifteen to
twenty hours. Add to the cold liquid five grams of potassium
bicarbonate for each gram of acid used, add iodine solution and
set aside until no further bleaching action is evident. Titrate
for the excess of iodine with arsenious acid solution.
The Determination of Oxygen in Air and in Aqueous
Solution. By D. Albert Kreider. Am. J, Sci., 152, 361-367.
— The author adapts for these determinations a procedure
already described by him (Am./. Sci.^ 150, 287), wherein oxy-
gen is allowed to act upon a concentrated solution of hydriodic
acid, in the presence of nitric oxide. The excess of the acid is
neutralized by potassium bicarbonate and the liberated iodine
titrated with arsenious oxide. For these determinations the
author uses special forms of apparatus, which are described in
detail in the original article, together with all necessary precau-
tions.
W. H. Walkbr, Rbvibwbr.
The Separation and Determination of Potassium and Sodium.
By D. Albert Kreider and J. E. Breckenridge. Am. J.
Sci.f 152, 263-268. — The paper presents a quMitative method
for the separation and detection of potassium and sodium based
on the relative solubilities of the perchlorates. It has been
shown that, while sodium perchlorate is readily soluble in 97
per cent, alcohol, the potassium salt is, on the contrary, insolu-
ble in that menstruum. This paper provides a method by which
sodium may be detected after it has been separated from the
potassium, which is essentially as follows: To the filtrate from
which all the bases, including ammonia, have been removed,
0.5 cc. of pure perchloric acid (sp. gr. 1.70) is added, and the
solution is evaporated on the steam- bath until white fumes of
perchloric acid appear. When the quantity of sodium is large
it is safer to evaporate several times to secure complete conver-
sion to the perchlorate. Upon treating with 97 per cent, alco-
hol, the presence of potassium is revealed by the existence of an
insoluble residue, which is collected on a dry filter. When the
filtrate is saturated with gaseous hydrochloric acid, sodium, if
present in amounts greater than 0.0005 gram, will appear as a
Analytical Chemistry, 29
granular precipitate. The authors think the method is all that
can be desired for qualitative determinations. Perchloric acid
free from sodium was made by distilling (under a pressure of
from 3 to 5 mm. of mercury) acid prepared according to the pro-
cedure described by Kreider, Am, J. Sci,, 149, 443). This
must be done very slowly and in a specially prepared apparatus.
Estimation of Cadmium as tlie Oxide. By P. E. Browning
AND If' C. JoNBS. Am, J, Sci,y 152, 269-270. — The authors
demonstrate the ease and accuracy with which cadmium car-
bonate may be ignited in a Gooch crucible and weighed as
oxide, eliminating all danger of the reduction and subsequent
volatilization of the cadmium. The precipitation is made in a hot
aqueous solution by means of a ten per cent, potassium carbonate
solution, and the liquid is boiled for ten or fifteen minutes until
the precipitate becomes granular. It is then filtered upon
asbestos, washed thoroughly, and ignited at a red heat to a
constant weight. The results show a very small plus error,
which the authors prove to be due to slight inclusions of the
alkaline carbonate.
Tlie Determination of Tellurium by Precipitation as the
Iodide. By F. A. Gooch and W. C. Morgan. Am, J, Sci,,
152, 271-272. — It has been already shown that when hydriodic
acid and tellurious acid interact there is formed a tellurium
tetraiodide which is converted by water into an oxyiodide, and
by excess of an alkaline iodide into a soluble double salt. The au-
thors show that this reaction takes place according to the equation :
H.TeO, + 4H.SO, + 4KI = Tel, + 4KHSO, + 3H,0,
and this is made the basis of a volumetric method for the direct
determination of small amounts of tellurium. By shaking the
flask the precipitate of tellurium tetraiodide, which at first sepa-
rates in a finely divided condition, is made to gather into a curdy
mass and so leave a clear supernatant liquid. Advantage is
taken of this behavior, and the point at which the precipitation
of all the tellurium is complete is not difficult to determine. In
the test experiments, the tellurium dioxide was dissolved in
potassium hydrate, and sulphuric acid of half strength was
added in such an amount that at the end of the titration the
solution should contain one-fourth its volume of strong sulphuric
acid. This solution is then titrated with a decinormal potas-
sium iodide solution, until a further addition gives no precipi-
tate. Using 127 as the atomic weight of tellurium, the authors
find this method satisfactory.
flethod for the Separation of Aluminum from iron. By
F. A. Gooch and F. S. Havens. Am, J. Sci,, 15a, 416-420. —
30 Review of American Chemical Research,
When a cooled concentrated acid solution of aluminum and iron
chlorides is saturated with gaseous hydrochloric acid, almost all
the aluminum separates in fine white crystals of hydrated alumi-
num chloride, A1C1,.6H,0, while all the iron remains in solu-
tion. On this difference in solubility is based a method of sepa-
ration. The solubility of aluminum chloride in concentrated
aqueous hydrochloric acid is very small, and is, moreover, greatly
reduced by the addition of an equal volume of anhydrous ether.
A complete separation seems to be most easily secured by mix-
ing the concentrated aqueous solution of the chlorides with
enough concentrated hydrochloric acid to make the entire vol-
ume 15-25 cc, cooling to about 15® C. and passing into the
solution gaseous hydrochloric acid. When completely saturated,
the solution is mixed with an equal volume of anhydrous ether;
and this mixture again saturated with gaseous hydrochloric
acid. The crystalline precipitate of hydrous aluminum chloride
is collected on asbestos in a perforated crucible and washed with
a mixture of equal parts of acqueous hydrochloric acid and an-
hydrous ether saturated with the gas. When the precipitate is
ignited directly, the mechanical loss occasioned by the rapid
volatilization of the acid and water of crystallization is so great that
it was found expedient either to dissolve in water and reprecipi-
tate as hydroxide, or to cover the chloride with some volatile
oxidizing agent before ignition. Mercuric oxide was found to
serve the purpose well. The precipitate is dried for one-half
hour at 150'' C., covered with about one gram of mercuric oxide,
first gently heated under a ventilating flue, and then freely over
the blast lamp. The results seem to be satisfactory.
PROXIMATE ANAI^YSIS.
A. H. Gill, Rbvibwbr.
On the Determination of Stearic Acid in Fat. By O. Hbh-
NER AND C. A. Mitchell. /. Am, Chem, Sac, 19, 32-51. —
The method prepared by the authors is a quantitative one,
unlike the classical method of Heintz ; it consists in dissolving
out at o* the other fatty acids by alcohol saturated with stearic
acid, and in weighing the residue consisting of stearic acid.
The Determination of Solid Fats in Compound Lards. By
G. F. Tennille. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 19, 51-54. — The author
shows that Wainwright's method at best cannot be depended
upon for results closer than 1.5 per cent., and that, if the condi-
tions are at all varied, the results may be] 7 or 8 per cent, too
high or too low.
p. H. Thorp, Rbvxswbr.
Volumetric Determination of Acetone. By Edward R.
Analytical Chemistry. 31
Squibb. /. Am. Chem. Soc.^ i8, 1068-1079 ; Squibb' s EphemeriSy
4, 1759-1770. — ^This is a description of certain improvements in
the process of J. Robineau and G. Rollin {Moniieur Scientijiquey
41, 272-274), whereby greater simplicity, rapidity and ease of
manipulation are secured, with sufficient accuracy for most pur-
poses. The method is applicable to the determination of acetone
in the presence of ethyl alcohol, and is especially recommended
for use in testing the dilute solutions of acetone which are
recovered by distillation in manufacturing operations, or in the
making of acetone itself. For the details of the process refer-
ence must be made to the original article.
G. W. ROLPB, Revibwbr.
On the Conditions Affecting the Volumetric Determination
of Starch by ileans of a Solution of iodine. By P. T. Little-
ton. Am. Chem. /., 19, 44-49. — The author has made an
investigation of the colorimetric method proposed by Dermstedt
and Voig^lander, (abstracted in The Analyst^ 20, p. 210) and
finds that the process has very little analytical value, owing to
the varying composition of the iodide of starch, possibly due to
dissociation, under different conditions of temperature, sol-
vents, etc.
W. R. Whitney, Reviewer.
A Modification of the Ounning ilethod for Nitrates. By
John Fields. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 18, 1102-1104. — The author
claims to avoid the trouble caused by frothing in the Gunning
method by gently heating the mixture of the sample with the
sulphuric and salicylic acids, and then gradually adding 6-7
grams of potassium sulphide with shaking. The whole is boiled ;
and the digestion is usually complete in an hour. Distillation
is then proceeded with as usual. Results have shown the modi-
fication to be as accurate as the Gunning method itself.
Notes on the Estimation of Caffein. By W. A. Pucknbr.
J. Chem.Soc.y 18, 978-981. — This is an experimental study of
the extraction of caffein from dilute acid solutions by means of
chloroform.
E. H. Richards, Reviewer.
Methods for the Determination of Organic Matter in Air. By
David He ndricks Bergey. Smithsonian MiscellaneousCollection ,
1037, 1-28. This publication is a critical compendium of the va-
rious methods proposed for the estimation of the organic impuri-
ties in air. The results lead to the conclusion that the dust in the
air is the chief source of organic matter. The use of pumice has
found greater favor with the author than the experience of the
reviewer would warrant. Moreover, no notice is taken of the
effect of the presence of nitrites in using permanganate.
32 Review of American Chemical Research,
A Modification of the Babcock ilethod, and Apparatus for
Testing iliik and Cream. By J. M. Bartlett. Me. State
College Agr, Expt, Sta., Bull. 31, 1-8. — ^The author recom-
mends adding hot water five minutes after mixing the sulphuric
acid and milk or cream together, and claims that once whirling
is then sufficient to cause the separation of the fat. The acid
used (20 cc.) should have at 60° F. a specific gravity of 1.820-
1.825, and the milk or cream (18 cc.) should be at a tempera-
ture of 70°-8o** F., when it is mixed with the acid. A modified
form of the graduated milk and cream bottles is also described.
TECHNICAL CHErtlSTRY.
p. H. THOB.P, Rbvibwer.
The Manufacture and Use of Thomas Slag. ByF. E. Thomp-
son. Iron AgCf 59, 9. — The author first describes the treat-
ment of the slag as made in the basic Bessemer process. Its
value as a fertilizer is increased, if it is exposed to the weather
several years before grinding ; but it may be ground as soon as
cold. It is prepared by grinding in a ** ball-milP* until 90 per
cent of it will pass a lOO-mesh sieve. A series of sieving tests
is given. The fertilizer value depends on the quantity of phos-
phoric acid present, and on its condition. In Thomas slag the
phosphoric acid is present as tetracalcic phosphate, which is not
so soluble in neutral ammonium citrate, as is '* reverted" phos-
phate or dicalcic phosphate ; but it is much less stable than tri-
calcic phosphate. The author then considers the causes of
irregularities in the composition of the slag, which he charges
to the method of running the convertor. The methods of analy-
sis of this slag are then discussed. From his investigations he
concludes that neutral ammonium citrate does not give a correct
estimate of the fertilizer value of the phosphoric acid ; for it
appears to dissolve the slag as a whole, and the per cent, of
phosphoric acid dissolved bears a direct ratio to the total quan-
tity of slag dissolved. Moreover, there is no evidence to show
any difference between the phosphoric acid which it leaves in
the slag and that which it dissolves out. Weathering appears
to increase the solubility of the phosphoric acid in neutral am-
monium citrate. The author considers Thomas slag to be a mix-
ture of chemical compounds ; for, if cooled slowly, several bodies
separate as distinct crystals. According to recent reports, the
slag is but slightly inferior as a fertilizer to dissolved bone or
phosphate rock, and is superior to all insoluble phosphates.
American Utilization Processes of Oarbage Disposal. By
W. E. Garrigues. Trans. Eng. Soc. Western^ Pa.y la, 266-
Technical Chemistry. 33
276. — This is a condensed review of the system of garbage dis-
posal in several large cities. The destructive processes are not
discussed. The useful products obtained from garbage are
grease and tankage. Grease is chiefly used for glycerine and
candle stock. It will make only a very poor soap. Three sys-
tems of grease extraction are considered : with steam ; by
means of sulphuric acid ; and by the use of naphtha. Tankage
is used by the fertilizer manufacturers.
Composition of American Kaolins. By Charles P. Ma-
BERY AND OtisT. K1.00Z. /. Am, Chem. Soc, 18, 909-915. —
This article consists chiefly of analyses of clays from various
places in the United States. Two analyses of the kaolin used
at the Royal Berlin porcelain works at Charlottcnburg are
included for comparison. Several of the American clays
approach very nearly the composition of the German article.
Ctirome Tannage Patent. By Geo. W. Alder. U. S,
Pat, No, 5^36^1, (Abstract, Leather Manufacturer^ 7, 19). —
The chrome solution is prepared by dissolving potassium or
sodium bichromate in an excess of sulphuric acid diluted with
two volumes of water, reducing the chromium salt by the addi-
tion of sugar or alcohol, then neutralizing and precipitating
chromium hydrate and '* chromium oxycarbonate'' by the addi-
tion of sodium carbonate, and finally dissolving the precipitate,
without filtering, by the addition of hydrochloric acid to the
mixture. The resulting liquor is supposed to contain chromium
chloride, chromium sulphate, sodium and potassium sulphates,
sodium chloride, and either formates or acetates of these metals.
Chrome Tannage Patent. By Hugo Schweitzer. (Ab-
stract Leather Manufacturer, 7, 20.) — The process consists in
the '* reduction on the animal fiber of bichromate of potash by
means of hydroxylamine compounds, such as hydroxylamine,
its sulpho acids and salts, in the presence or absence of any of
the nitrogen-sulphone acids, which are formed to some extent in
the reaction, which produces sulpho acids of hydroxylamine,
thereby permitting the use of neutral, weakly acid or weakly
alkaline solutions for the second bath.''
Chrome Tannage Patent. By Robert Wagner and J. J.
Maier. U, S, Pat, No, §^4014., (Abstract Leather Manufac-
turer^ 7, 19.) — This is a one-bath chrome tannage process. It
is proposed to take ten pounds of chrome alum, three pounds of
saltpeter, six pounds of muriatic acid, fifteen pounds of salt, and
ten pounds of whiting, and mix them with fifteen gallons of
water. The whiting and salt are first mixed together (dry?) at
a temperature of 70** (F?), and then the other ingredients are
added and the whole stirred into the water.
34 Review of American Chemical Research.
Manufacture and Development of Carborundum at Niag^
ara Falls. By Francis A. Fitzgerald. /. Franklin InsL,
143, 81-96. — After a discussion of the early forms of furnace,
the author takes up the subject of the manufacture at Niagara.
The materials used are sand» coke, sawdust, and salt. These
are properly mixed and filled into an oblong brick furnace i6x
5x15 feet, in the ends of which are the terminals consisting of
60 carbon rods 30 inches long and 3 inches in diameter. Con-
nection between each carbon and the end plate is made with |
inch copper rod. The side walls of the furnace are built up
each time a charge is introduced. The current used in the fur-
nace at first is about 1200 amperes; but after the charge
becomes hot the resistance decreases, and at the end of an hour
the current is such that 746 kilowatts (or 1000 horse-power) are
being used in heating the furnace. As the current increases,
the electromotive force is reduced, until finally the resistance
becomes constant. No apparent change is observed for half an
hour ; but then inflammable gases begin to escape from the fur-
nace. After three or four hours the top of the furnace is cov-
ered by blue flames of carbon monoxide, which escapes in great
quantities. After twenty-four hours the current is cut off, and
the furnace cools. The side walls are removed ; and the
unchanged, loose mixture is raked off. The core is crystalline
at the center ; and about 4000 pounds of crystalline carborundum
are obtained from one furnace. The carborundum is crushed,
treated with dilute sulphuric acid, washed, and dried. After
sifting it is ready for use. Carborundum is infusible, decom-
posing without melting ; it is insoluble in water and acids ; it
has a hardness near 10; and its specific gravity is. 3.23. It is
replacing emery for many purposes.
ilanufacture of Oxygen. By Mr. Linton. Proc. Eng. Soc.
Western Pa,, 12, 222-231. — This is a review of the commercial
methods of making oxygen, with special reference to the process
of £. B. Stuart, of Chicago. It is similar to the Tessie du
Motay process ; but it is claimed that it avoids some of the diffi-
culties of that method. A mixture of caustic soda and black
oxide of manganese is heated to 50o**-6oo° F., and the air is
blown through it, by which process sodium manganate is
formed. Steam is then blown through the mass, which disso-
ciates the manganate, forming caustic soda, manganese binoxide
and oxygen. The air is blown in for ten minutes and the steam
for five minutes. The manganate mass obtained consists of one
part manganate to two of caustic soda. It fuses to a liquid at
the temperature of the reaction, which is carried on in cast iron
retorts, set vertically. Each retort is charged with 1500 pounds
of the mixture, and the two retorts yield 76,000 cubic feet of gas
in twenty-four hours, at a cost of 7 cents per 1000 cubic feet.
Technical Chemistry, 35
Second International Consrress of Applied Chemistry.
By H. W. Wilky. /. Am, Chem, Soc.y 18, 923. — This is a re-
view of the proceedings of the meeting held at Paris, in July and
August, 1896.
A. H. GILL, RBVIBWBR.
Some Facts about Acetylene Oas. By J. C. M'Mynn.
Eledr, Eng., ai, 197-198. — This is a concise statement of the
present knowledge of the subject.
Fuels. By A. V. Abbott and F. J. Dommerquk. Eledr.
-^«^.. 9t 1-186. — This article deals succinctly with the origin,
distribution, production and composition of the various fuels —
wood, peat, coal, petroleum and gas, and discusses the advant-
ages of each. A special and valuable feature of the treatise is
the numerous tables and plots which it contains. The methods
of proximate fuel analysis and of manipulating the Carpenter
calorimeter, the Mahler bomb, and the Elliott gas apparatus are
also given — in some cases, however, with insufficient detail as to
their execution. As the article does not present original mate-
rial, this reference to it will suffice.
The Testing of Coals. By Arthur Winslow. /. Assoc.
En^. SoCf 17, 84. — The paper is the outline of a plan of the
author to study the North American coals, considering their
adaptability for : (i) Steaming; (2) Coke making; (3) Domes-
tic use ; (4) Gas making; and (5) Blacksmithing. This arti-
cle gives the properties of coals adapted to each of these uses.
The investigation will be an interesting and exceedingly im-
portant one — one almost beyond the power of any one man to
execute. A comparison of the calorific power as obtained by
the calorimeter and by the Dulong formula would be very
instructive. It is to be regretted that the Barms calorimeter is
to be used for the determination of the calorific power, as its
results may vary as much as three per cent, from those obtained
by the Mahler apparatus.
G. W. ROLPB, Rbvxbwbk.
A 5tudy of the Clarification of Sugar Cane Juices. By J.
If. Bbbson. /. Am. Chem. Soc, ig, 56-61. — This paper is
related to those previously published {La. Sta., BtUl. 38;
this Rev. y 2, no.). In an investigation of the commercial pro-
cess of clarification (** defecation,'*) as applied to cane juices,
the author finds that the gums and albuminoids of the juice fall
into three classes : (a) those which form insoluble compounds
with lime ; (h) those which are precipitated by heat ; and {c)
those which are not rendered insoluble by either lime or heat.
The latter class, however, can be precipitated by suitable
reagents, and are found to comprise nearly one-half of the total
amount of gums and albuminoids.
BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY.
W. R. Whititbt, Rbvxbwer.
The Tannin of Some Acorns. By Henry Trimble. Am.
/. Pkarm., 68, 601-604. — The authorhasdetermined the tannin,
moisture, and ash in different parts of the chestnut-oak acorn
{Quercus Prinus) during the month of September when ripen-
ing occurs. As few comparative results are given, no important
conclusions can be drawn as to the change in the quantity of
tannin in different parts of the fruit during growth. The great-
est amount of tannin comes from the testa, where over 48 per
cent, was found. A comparison of the tannin of the cupule
with that from many samples of oak bark was made, and analy-
ses of both were carried out. The two are evidently identical.
The article concludes with the results of the analyses of six dif-
ferent samples of acorn cupules.
Alfalfa. By William P. Headden. CoL Agr, Expt. Star,
Bull. 35, 1-92. — The author gives the results of his study of
the plant, embracing analyses of each of the three cuttings of a
season, and showing the amount and composition of the ash of
the whole plant above ground at different degrees of maturity.
Analyses were also made of the separate parts of the plant, the
soil, etc. The analyses included determinations of moisture,
ash, ether extract, crude protein, crude fiber, nitrogen-free
extract, and amide nitrogen. Complete analyses of the ash are
also given. In an appendix the methods of analysis and of the
preparation of the samples are described, and a compilation of
fodder analyses is given.
Rectification of Turpentine Oil. By Edward Krembrs.
Pharm. Rev.^ 15, 7. — The author has carefully fractionated the
commercial product after treating it with milk of lime. Tables
giving the specific gravity and rotatory power of the fractions
are given. He notes also that the rectified product undergoes
the so-called resinification on standing.
The Caffein Compounds of Kola. By James W. T. Knox
AND Albert B. Prescott. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 63-90;
Am. Pharm. Assoc. Proc, 1896. -^This article gives an ab-
stract of the existing chemical literature on kola, describes in
detail methods for the determination of its free and combined
alkaloids (chiefly caffein), presents analytical results obtained
with different samples, and describes the separation, properties,
composition, and artificial preparation of the glucoside present in
kola.
The Chemistry of the Cotton Plant. By J. B. McBride and
W. H. Beal. U. S. Dept. Agr., Bull. 33, 81-142.— This article
Biological Chemistry. 37
shows the fertilizing and proximate constituents of all parts of
the cotton plant — the roots, stems, leaves, bolls, lint, seeds, etc.
Tables containing the results of hundreds of analyses are given,
the entire subject having been very thoroughly* treated.
Purification of Natural Cumarin. By Edo Claassbn.
Pharm. Rev., 15, 28. — ^The crude cumarin is treated with hot
benzine (sp. gr. 0.71), from which it crystallizes on cool-
ing. The final portion of cumarin is separated from the ben-
zine solution by shaking this with a five per cent, sodium
hydrate solution.
On the Occurrence of Sulphur Derivatives in American
Peppermint Oil. By Clemens Kleber. Pharm. Rev,, 14,
269. — The author shows the presence of dimethyl sulphide in
American peppermint oil.
Terpin Hydrate. By Edward T. Hahn. Am. J. Pharm.,
69, 73-75. — This short article contains a resum6 of the methods
for the production of terpin hydrate from turpentine. The author
finds that by using oil of turpentine, methyl alcohol (sp. gr.
0.801) and nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.35) in the volume proportions
4 : I : I, a satisfactory yield of the crystalline product is most
quickly obtained. The crystallization is hastened by the addi-
tion of one volume of water after the reaction is complete.
A Contribution to the Knowledge of Some North Ameri-
can Coniferae. By Edgar S. Bastin and Henry Trimble.
Am, J, Pharm,, 69, 90. — This portion of the work treats of the
hemlock ( Tsuga Canadensis) . Samples of the bark were analyzed
by fractional extraction, and the tannin also determined. Pure
hemlock tannin was isolated and analyzed ; the results show it
to be unexpectedly high in carbon and hydrogen and are not in
agreement with the formula proposed by Boettinger, C„H„Oi,.
The authors found nearly half a per cent, more carbon in the
hemlock tannin than in any one of ten oak tannins examined.
Chemical Analysis of the Bark of Honey Locust (Qled-
ItschiaTriacanthos). By Louis P. Carstens. Am, J. Pharm,,
69, 40-41 . — This article contains the results of the analysis by the
usual extraction methods of a sample of the bark mentioned in
the title. The alkaloid extracted with 95 per cent, alcohol was
removed from the solution by chloroform, and crystallized from
absolute alcohol.
Assay of Johore Qambier. By W. O. Richtmann.
Pharm, Rev., 15, 27-28. — Results of analyses of six different
samples are given, showing the amounts of moisture, ash, tan-
nin, and catechin present. The author suggests that possibly a
definite relation exists between the amounts of catechin and tan-
38 Review of American Chemical Research.
nin in different gambiers ; for a low quantity of the one seems
to occur where there is a relatively large quantity of the other.
The conversion of one into the other may be brought about, he
believes, by some vegetable organism.
Concerning Preperties Belonging to tlie Alcohol Soluble Pro-
teid of Wheat and of Certain Other Cereal Grains. By G. L.
Teller. Am, Chem.J., 19, 59^61 ; Ark, Agr, Expt, Sta., Bull.
4^1 75-104- — III working with the proteids in wheat, the author,
observed that some nitrogen-containing substance was soluble
both in dilute salt solution and in the 75 per cent, alcohol
usually employed. This substance was shown to be a proteid
by the usual reactions. Analyses of twenty different samples of
wheat and other mill products showed that the nitrogen-content
of this soluble proteid was practically the same in each case,
while the other nitrogenous constituents varied considerably.
The author believes the proteid to be gliadin. It has many of
the properties of proteoses ; but it is readily soluble in 75 per
cent, alcohol, and from this solution it is not precipitated by
common salt. I'he same or a similar body was found in the
alcohol extracts of oats, rye, and barley. The experiments are
more fully described, and detailed methods for the quantitative
separation of the proteid are given in the Bulletin.
The Action of Enzymic Ferments upon Starches of Different
Origins. By Winthrop E. Stone. U. S. Dept. Agr,, Bull.
34, 29-44. — The author's belief that starches from different
sources are not identical, but that there are isomeric starches
as there are isomeric sugars, is supported by experiments on the
relative rates of decomposition of maize, wheat, rice, potato, and
sweet potato starches, usually in the gelatinized state, by the
enzymic ferments — malt diastase, ptyalin from human saliva, and
pancreatin from beeves and swine. It was found that the time
required for the complete decomposition of the different starches
as determined by the failure of the iodine test, varied greatly
with the source of the starch in the case of each of the ferments,
and that the orders of susceptibility of the different starches to
the various enzymes were also widely different.
G. W. ROLPB, Rbvxbwbk.
The Carbohydrates of Wheat, Maize, Flour and Bread. By
W. E. Stone. U, S, Dept, Agr., Office of Exp, Sta,, Bull. 34,
7-28. — A large amount of analytical data is given comprising
estimations not only of the carbohydrates — the more common
polysaccharides, hexoses and pentose derivatives — ^but also of
ash, fat, fiber, and proteids. The change of composition, due to
milling and baking, are discussed in considerable detail, the
views in general conforming to the opinions usually accepted.
>i
Biological Chemistry, 39
The most extraordinary feature of the paper is the remarkable
starch showing. The author finds by his analyses that the
starch-content of the cereals are from 20-30 per cent, lower than
the figures generally given. What is yet more strange is that
the figures of the other components show a practical agreement
with the results of other investigators, so that a deficit of over
20 per cent, is left to be accounted for. This fact the author
does not explain, but leaves us to infer that this large fraction of
the grain is in reality totally overlooked in our usual methods of
investigation, the discrepancy presumably being marked by the
too high results of faulty starch determinations. Aside
from an opinion that this missing material is not carbohydrate
nor indeed food, the author gives no hint as to its nature, not
even attempting a separation by solvents or other rough method
of classification to throw light upon the mystery. It is certainly
most remarkable if we are to believe that in the present state
of the science practically a quarter of our common cereals con-
sists of material in regard to whose nature we have not
the most primitive ideas ! In consideration of the importance
of the matter and of the disagreement of the results with those
of previous investigators, the reviewer suggests that a more com-
plete and detailed explanation of the author's method of starch
determination would have been most acceptable to his readers.
Confidence in the results would have been greatly increased by
statements in regard to the amount of reducible carbohydrates
produced by the presence of the malt infusion, apparently no
inconsiderable fraction of the whole ; in regard to the methods
of correction, the details of the Fehling test, the precautions
taken by the author to satisfy himself that the final acid hydrol-
ysis actually converted the carbohydrate to dextrose ; and in
regard to other minor points.
F. H. Thorp, Rrvibwbr.
flineral Constituents of the Watermelon. By G. P. Paynk.
/. Am. Chem, Soc, 18, 1061-1063. — ^The Ash Analysis of the
Watermelon, giving the Mineral Substances It Takes from
the 5oil. By G. P. Payne. Ga. Dept, Agr. Bull, No. 32,
29-31. Two melons gave, on analysis, 0.33 per cent, of ash,
which was itself analyzed. The author concludes that a crop of
39,766 pounds per acre (which is three times the average yield
per acre) takes from the soil 81.09 pounds of potash and 13.59
pounds of phosphoric acid.
The Use of Arsenites on Tobacco. By H. Garman. Ky.
Sia Bull. 63, 68-80. — This investigation is a study of the effect
of spraying tobacco with Paris green. Samples of the dry
tobacco were analyzed ; and arsenic was found in all of them in
amounts ranging from ** traces'* to 0.0139 per cent. As,0,. The
40 Review of American Chemical Research.
question of danger to the consumer is not settled, but it is
thought that no serious injury can result from the use of arse-
nites. Data as to the best time for spraying, the amount to use,
and the quantity received by each plant, are also g^ven.
Report of the Section on Agriculture and Chemistry.
Proc. Ninth Ann, Convention Assoc. Am, Agr, Coll, Exp, Sta.,
U, S, Dept. Agr., Bull. 30, 10-14. — ^This bulletin gives a short
summary of the work of the several experiment stations, during
the year 1896, in agricultural and chemical studies.
Bordeaux Mixture, Its Chemistry, Physical Properties, and
Toxic Effects on Fungi and Algae. By W. T. Swingle.
U. S, Dept. Agr., Div. Vegetable Physiology and Pathology , Bull,
9. — Bordeaux mixture is said to be a mixture of calcium sul-
phate and cupric hydroxide, suspended in an aqueous solution
of calcium sulphate and calcium hydrate. When freshly made,
the cupric hydrate is of a colloidal nature, but on standing it
becomes crystalline. The copper, even when in a very dilute
condition, exerts a very destructive action on the germinating
power of fungus spores and upon algae.
The Real Value of •• Natural Plant Food/* By L. L. Van
Slyke. N. Y. Agr. Exp. Sta., Bull. 108.— The article is a
warning against a certain fertilizer manufactured by the Natural
Plant Food Co., of Washington, D. C. Analysis of the material
shows it to be a very inferior article.
Analyses of Commercial Fertilizers. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull.,
Ga. Dept. Agr., No. 32 ; Ky., Nos, 60 and 64 ; Mass. Hatch
Sta., No. 42 ; Me., Nos. 22 and 30 ; N. C, Special Bull. Nos.
37 and 38 ; also Bull. 124 ; N./., No, 113 ; N. V., Nos. 96 and
107; Pa, Dept, Agr,, No, 11; Purdue Univ,, Special Bulls,,
May and August, i8g6 ; R, I,, No, 34 ; W, Va,, No. 40 ; Md.,
No. 40.
W. R. Whitney, Reviewer.
Reduction of Nitrates by Bacteria and Consequent Loss
of Nitrogen. By Ei.len H. Richards and George Wil-
liam RoLFE. Tech. Quart., 9, 40-59. The authors found that '
the nitrogen of potassium nitrate, in water containing a tenth of
a per cent, of milk was in some way lost in the cycle of changes :
nitrate, albuminoid ammonia, free ammonia, nitrite, nitrate,
after entering the nitrite stage. Investigation showed that the
organisms growing in the solution generated nitrogen gas dur-
ing their growth, and that practically all of the previously miss-
ing nitrogen of the nitrate was thus accounted for. The article
concludes with some interesting suggestions concerning the
storage of nitrogen in soils and waters.
Biological Chemistry, 41
The Excretion of iletabolized Nitrogen by Animals* By C.
F. Lanoworthy. U. S. Dept. Agr, Exp, Sia. Record, 7, 817-825.
— This article is a summary of the principal results of other
experimenters upon the part played by nitrogen in the nutrition
of animals.
On the Behavior of Coal-Tar Colors toward the Process of
Digestion. By H. A. Weber. /. Am. Chem. Sac, 18, 1092-
1097. — ^^^ digestive actions of pepsin and pancreatin when act-
ing upon fibrin, in the presence of oroline yellow, saffoline,
magenta, and methyl orange, were separately studied. Of these
colors only oroline yellow retarded the action of the pep-
sin ; but sa£foline, magenta, and methyl orange interiered very
seriously with the fermenting action of pancreatin. The use of
such colors in articles of food and drink is therefore objectionable.
The Formation of Fat In the Animal Body. By Selik
SosKiN. U, S. Expt. Sta. Record, 18, 179-192. — This article
gives a historical account of investigation since 1742, made to
discover the source of the fat in the animal body. It concludes
with the acceptance of Pfltiger's results and conclusions as
opposed to those of Pettenkoffer and Voit, who believed that fat
could be produced in the animal system from proteids alone.
K. H. Richards, Rbvibwbr.
Food and Nutrition investigations in New Jersey in 1895
and 1896. By Edward B. Voorhees. U, S, Dept, Agr,
Exp, Sta,y Bull, 35, 7-40. — This report deals mainly with the
composition and cost of bread and of milk. Analyses are given
of 139 samples of fresh bread and of 108 samples of milk. The
work done on bread shows that while wheat and wheat flour
may be considered as standard articles, bread made from the
same flour may have a varying nutritive value. The results of
a dietary study of a mechanic's family are also recorded.
nillc Fat and Cheese Yield. By L. L. van Si.yke.— A^. Y,
Agr, Expt, Sta,, Btdl, no, 251-280. — The author presents the
results of a very large number of determinations of the relation
of the amount of fat to the amount of casein in milk and to the
yield of cheese obtained from it. Milk from fifty different herds
of cows was examined during a period of six months. The
experiments show that in general milk fat and casein increase
simultaneously ; but that the increase of the former is usually
relatively greater than that of the latter. This is shown by the
following table, in which are given the general averages for
milks containing 3 and 4 per cent, of fat, respectively :
Ratio of
cheese yield
to fat.
2.85
2.60
Per cent
fat
Per cent
casein.
Ratio of
casein to
fat
Percentage
yield of
cheese.
3.00
2.10
0.70
8.55
4.00
2.40
0.60
10.40
42 Remew of American Chemical Research.
Although the ratio of cheese yield to fat is somewhat greater
in the case of the milks poorer in fat, yet the quality of cheese
produced is proportionately poorer, so that the author concludes
from these results that milk fat forms the fairest practicable
basis to use in paying for milk for cheese making — ^that in no
case should it be paid for by weight of milk alone, and that pay-
ment by cheese yield gives an unfair advantage to poor milk.
Analyses of Some Substances Sold as Cream of Tartar.
ByG. p. Payne. Ga, Dept, Agr,, Bull, 32, 24-28. — Of ten
samples purchased and analyzed, five contained no cream of
tartar, two contained less than 57 per cent., and one less than
80 per cent.
The Study of Human Foods and Practical Dietetics. By
M. E. Jaffa. Univ. Cal, Agr. Expt, Sta., Bull, no, 3-19. —
The title is sufficiently descriptive of the general character of
this bulletin. It is for the most part based upon previously
published work ; but it contains the following valuable results,
expressed in per cent., calculated from original analyses of Cali-
fornia fruit, nuts, and bread stu£Fs.
Pnel valae
Total Carbo- Mineral of one
Water, nutrients. Protein. Pats, hydrates, matters, ounce.
Wheat flour... 12.5 ,87.5 8.0 i.i 77.9 0.5 102
Graham flour . 12. i 87.9 8.5 1.9 75.8 1.5 103
Bread 32.3 67.7 6.4 1.7 58.7 0.9 80
83. J
Oranges 88.0 12.0 0.8 11. 2 .. 14
Apples 83.2 16.8 0.2 0.4 15.9 0.3 20
Prunes (all) . . 80.0 20.0 0.8 18.7 0.5 2^
Apricots 85.0 15.0 i.o 13.5 0.5 18
Pigs 79.0 21.0 1.5 18.9 0.6 24
Grapes 80.0 20.0 1.3 18.2 0.5
Olives 58.0 42.0 I.I 27.6 11.6 1.7
Walnuts 2.5 97.5 14.3 65.9 16.3 1.0 202
Almonds 5.3 94.7 i7.o 56.2 19.1 1.8 191
Peanuts 8.0 92.0 aS.o 40.0 23.0 2.0 104
APPARATUS.
A. H. Gill, Rbvibwek.
A New Form of Potash Bulb. By M. Gombkrg. /. Am.
Chem. Soc, 18, 941. The bulb is shaped like a small Erlen-
meyer flask and divided into three compartments. It is much
less fragile than the usual form ; and it will stand upon the bal-
ance pan. It is, however, difficult to manufacture ; and whether
it presents a sufficient surface for absorption is questionable.
A Rapid Measuring Pipette. By £. L. Smith. /. Am.
Chem. Soc, 18, 905. — The apparatus described seems to be
fairly accurate, to admit of rapid work and to be easily made.
Apparatus, 43
A Simple and Convenient Extraction Apparatus lor Pood
Stuff Analysis. By J. L. Bkeson. /. Am, Chem. Soc, 18,
744-745. The apparatus is an adaptation of the Johnston ex-
tractor, this being provided with a ground-glass stopper, which
is closed with a rubber cap while weighing. The stopper is
funnel shaped, and during the extraction it is inverted in the
extraction tube, thus directing the solvent to the center of the
sample and preventing loss by spattering.
On a Simple Automatic Sprengel Pump* By B. B. Bolt-
wood. Am. Chem, J., 19, 77-78. — The apparatus makes use of
a water jet pump to draw the mercury through the Sprengel
tube. In course of ten minutes operation vacua suitable for the
display of electrical phenomena are obtained.
On 5ome New Forms of Qas Qenerators. By T. H. Nor-
ton. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 18, 1057-1061. — The article shows
how common laboratory apparatus may be utilized for this pur-
pose.
A Modified Form of the Ebullioscope. By H. W. Wiley.
/. Am, Chem.Soc, i8, 1063-1067.
A New Electrol3rtic Qenetator for Oxygen and Hydrogen.
By W. S. Franklin. Phys, Rev., 4, 61. — The generator con-
sists of a number of massive frames of an alloy of lead with four
per cent, of antimony, bolted together and insulated from each
other by rubber diaphragms. The gases are prevented from
mixing by glass strips. The generator requires 19 volts per cell,
the current through each cell being 24.6 amperes. The maxi-
mum purity of the hydrogen was 94.8 per cent. ; that of the
oxygen 86.2 per cent. The efficiency of the generator is about
36 per cent. It gives 660 liters of hydrogen and 330 liters of
oxygen per hour, at a cost of about 80 cents, which is 8 cents
per cubic foot of oxygen.
Tlie Practical Use in tlie Cliemical Lal>oratory of tlie
Electric Arc Olrtained from tlie L^w Potential Alternating
Current. By M. S. Walker. Am. Chem, /., 18, 323-328. —
The arc may be used : (i) To show the effect of high tempera-
tures upon difficultly fusible and volatile substances; (2) for the
reduction of metallic oxides ; (3) blowpipe analysis ; and (4)
for the preparation of some compounds of carbon from the ele-
ments. The article describes the apparatus and methods to be
employed in these various applications.
A New Form of Pyknometer. By J. C. Boot. /. Am,
Chem, Soc, 19, 61-62. — The usual bottle form is vacuum jack-
eted to prevent the troublesome expansion of the liquid during
weighing and its outflow through the capillary.
44 Review of American Chemical Research,
Apparatus tor the BlectrolysU of Hydnx:hlorlc Add. By
Geo. O. H1GI.EY AND B. T. Howard. Am. Chem,J., 18, 587.
The apparatus is a modification of that of Hofmann, so arranged
that the hydrogen and chlorine are generated in separate vessels
and traverse but a small layer of liquid. It is said to be very
simple and accurate.
Apparatus for Distillation in a Vacuum. By P. C. Freer.
Am, Chem, /., 18, 584. — A modification of the Kahlbaum
receiver, so arranged that the entire top can be covered with
mercury, thus effectually preventing leakage.
Apparatus for Showing the Composition of Water. By
P. C. Freer. Am, Chem, /., 18, 584. — A modification of the
Hofmann apparatus so arranged that the explosion can take
place under diminished pressure and prevent the shattering of
the tube.
MBTALLURaiCAL CHEillSTRY.
M. O. MOFMA.M, RBVIKWBR.
A Hot-Blast System for Copper Matting and 5ilver-Ljead
Furnaces. By J. A. Nesmith. Min. Sa, Press, 73, 318.—
The air on its way from the blower to the blast furnace passes
through a chamber in which a jet of oil or gas is kept burning.
The products of combustion become mixed with the air, super-
heat it, and pass off with it. The reason for allowing a mix-
ture of carbon dioxide and air to enter the furnace is that the
air having been superheated is more active and less of it is
required in the blast furnace for oxidizing the fuel ; hence dilu-
tion with carbon dioxide has no bad effect. On the other hand
superheated air of such a composition will not have the tendency
to localize the heat as would superheated pure air, but will distrib-
ute it. It seems to the reviewer that this method of working is not
based upon correct principles. If the blast is to be superheated
by the combustion of extraneous fuel, why undo the good effect
by diluting with carbon dioxide ? If the effect of the air super-
heated in the usual way is too strong, cut down the coke in the
blast furnace, and this will weaken it in an economical way.
Blowing large volumes of weak air through a furnace can only
have the effect of making the heat creep up and give a hot top.
While perhaps desirable in pyritic smelting, this is fatal to lead
smelting. It would appear as if the relative prices of coke and
of bituminous coal, oil, or gas would have to decide whether the
blast is to be superheated or not ; but if superheated, the pro-
ducts of combustion must be kept separate from the blast fur-
nace air.
Metallurgical Chemistry, 45
The Percentage of Zinc in SXslzs. By E. A. Weinberg.
£ng, Min.J,, 57, 580. — The paper gives some facts obtained by
the author in smelting roasted sulphide lead ore, rich in zinc, in
/ a small water-jacket blast furnace. The best slag made con-
tained : SiO„ 32 percent., FeO, 31 ; CaO, 7 ; A1,0„ 8.5, ZnO,
18.5 ; the rest being lead, copper, sulphur, and alkali ; the
matte assayed as high as 22 per cent, of zinc and was very rich
in lead and copper.
Granulating ilatte. By S. E. Bretherton. Eng.Min.J.,
^3> 43- — This is a short note outlining the method of granulat-
ing blast furnace matte at the works of the American Smelting
Co., I/Cadville, Col. Granulated matte appears to roast more
easily than when it has been crushed, rolled and screened, as is
the common practice ; further, granulating is much cheaper than
any other method of comminuting.
Wall Accretions of L.ead Blast Furnaces. By M. W. Iles.
School Mines Quart., 18, 18-23. — This is a brief discussion of
how wall accretions are formed in the lead blast furnace, what
their general character is, and how their formation may be les-
sened, as it is not possible to avoid them entirely. An average
analysis gave the following figures : SiO„ 17.26; Fe, 13.26; Mn,
1.60; CaO, 3.20; 8,10.90; Zn, 18.42; Cu, 0.80; an average of
all the assays made at the works under the author's charge in
seventeen years : Pb 24.06 per cent., Ag 29.74 ounces and Au
0.197 ounce per ton. Wall accretions are formed mainly by the
volatilization and condensation of metallic sulphides ; these are
often oxidized to some extent after deposition. The other
constituents are particles of the charge that have during the
descent become mechanically lodged in the accretion and may
have undergone a chemical change later. For the practical
details the reader is referred to the paper.
The Calculation of Copper^Matte Blast Furnace Charges.
By H. Van F. Furman. School Mines Quart., 18, 1-13. — As in
a previous paper on a calculation of lead blast furnace charges,
((^. cit.y 14, 134-148,) the author discusses first the general
principles ai)d then illustrates them by carrying out calculations
in detail. The leading principles are that (i) the slag pro-
duced shall be good from a metallurgical and economical point
of view, the range of composition being: SiO,, 26-45; Al,0„o-2o;
FeO, 28-65; CaO, 0-28; ZnO, 0-14; and of specific gravity 3.50-
3-75 'i (2) the different ores shall be used up in about the same
proportions as they are received ; (3) the matte shall be of a
proper grade for further treatment, 50 per cent, of copper being a
common figure ; (4) the percentage of sulphur, arsenic, and
antimony volatilized in the blast furnace, from 8 per cent, in ordi-
46 Review of American Chemical Research,
nary matting to 90 per cent, in true pyritic smelting, shall be
taken into consideration ; (5) the chemical composition of the
matte shall be ascertained; for, besides all the copper, three-fourths
of the lead and one-half of the zinc enter it, the rest of the
available sulphur combining with iron ; (6) the total weight of
the charge shall bear a certain relation to the size and working
of the blast furnace, the figures varying from 2000 to 4000
pounds; (7) the percentage of fuel shall be correctly appor-
tioned, ifrom ID to 15 per cent, of coke, (12 per cent, ash), if
little sulphur is oxidized, the percentage being on the sum of
ore and nux ; (8) the loss in gold, silver and copper shall not
exceed permissible amounts, viz., loss in gold nil, in silver 95
percent.; with 40-50 per cent, matte the slag shall not contain
over 0.6 per cent, copper. Three examples show how these
general considerations are followed under special conditions.
Improvements in the Electrol3rtic Refining of Copper.
By T. Ulkb. Eng. Min,J., 62, 464-565. The author states
that it is generally conceded now that the Parmer or Hayden
process (arranging the plates in series without separate cathodes)
is less satisfactory than the common multiple process and that
the former is no longer used to any extent except at the works
of the Baltimore Electric Refining Co. He further describes
the method of circulating the electrolyte in use at the copper
refining works of M. Guggenheim's Sons, at Perth Amboy, N. J.,
which is a slight modification by Schneider and Szontag of
the one used for many years by Borchers Bros., Goslar, Prussia
(see Borchers, Hlectrometallurgie, 1895, p. 185).
Present Method of Treating 5times from Copper Refiner-
ies. By T. Ulke. Eng, Min.J,^ 62, 512. — The slimes from
electrolytic copper refineries, amounting to about 4 per cent, of
the weight of the anode, contain, after the scrap copper has been
screened off, 15-30 per cent, copper, 45-50 per cent, silver, less
than I per cent, gold, and 20-35 per cent, of impurities, made up
of lead, bismuth, arsenic, antimony, and tellurium. In some
works, which have a lead plant in addition to a copper plant, the
slimes are added either to the softening furnaces treating com-
paratively low-grade blast furnace lead or to the cupelling fur-
naces working the enriched lead. In other plants the slimes are
first refined in the wet way and then in the dry way. Thus, at
the Baltimore Electric Refining Co's works the screened slimes
are boiled for three or four hours in dilute sulphuric acid (1:4)
using a Korting injector, dried, melted down, and refined in a
cupelling furnace. In the furnace at first a brownish slag with
20 per cent, lead arid 10 per cent, antimony forms on the sur-
face; it is drawn, cooled, picked over for prills of silver, and
worked off with lead in a separate cupelling furnace. Then niter
Metallurgical Chemistry. 47
is spread over the precious-metal bath in* the furnace, which
refines the metal, forming a second slag, to be dxawn off, con-
taining as much as 20 per cent, tellurium. The dor^ silver is
now ready to be cast into bars for parting.
The Separation of Nickel and Copper in Matte and the Re-
covery of the Contained Precious Jletals. By T. Ulkb. Eng.
Min.J. , 63, T 13-1 14. — The author gives a brief review of a number
of processes for treating nickel-copper matte in the wet way,
and a short outline of an electrolysis method of his own.
Electrolytic refining of matte has so far always been a failure,
and the method proposed does not show, as far as can be judged
from the details given, why it should not share the same fate as
its predecessors.
The Brown Patent Automatic Pulp Distributor. By H. P.
Brown. Eng, Min. /., 6a, 512-513. — This article refers to a
simple mechanical devise for distributing the pulp cheaply,
evenly, and loosely in the large leaching tanks (diameter 24-26
feet, depth 5-6 feet) of gold and silver mills.
Purification of Sodium Hyposulphite Solutions. By A.
R. P. Eng. Min.J.y 63, 63. — ^The author calls attention to the
good results obtained in leaching silver ores with sodium hypo-
sulphite after having freed this solvent from sodium sulphate by
acidulating and over-precipitating with calcium sulphide. In
regular work he uses sodium sulphide to precipitate the metals,
and at the same time to convert sodium tetrathionate (formed in
making Russell solution) into hyposulphite, he then follows this
up by using calcium sulphide to eliminate obnoxious sodium sul-
phate as harmless calcium sulphate. It may be recalled in this
connection that Ottokar Hofmann has always advocated the use
of sodium hyposulphite as a solvent in combination with calcium
sulphide as precipitant.
The Cyanide Process. By A. D. Nordhoff. Min. Sci.
Press, 73, 441. — A complete list of the books and papers on the
subject contained in the library of the University of California.
The Cyanide Process for the Treatment of Qold Ores. By
J. W. Richards. /. Franklin Inst., 143, 96-109. — ^This paper
is a short review of the MacArthur-Forrest process, giving its
development and chemistry, and describing some of the work
that is being done in treating telluride ores in Colorado and
native gold ores in Utah and the Transvaal.
The Cyanide Process. By R. P. Rothwell. Eng. Min.
/., 63, 386. — In this country the cyanide process was first suc-
cessfully carried out at the Mercer Mine, Camp Floyd district,
48 Review of American Chemical Research,
Utah. The gold occurs there in limestone and a high extrac-
tion is readily obtained with coarse ore. Usually ore has to be
crushed through a 40-mesh screen, with the after-result that
fully 50 per cent, of it can be passed through a lOO-mesh
sieve and such fine ore leaches slowly. If the pulp shows, in
panning, particles of gold as coarse as the mesh-aperture, an
exposure of a week to the solvent action of potassium cyanide
has been found necessary to effect a satisfactory extraction.
The ore best suited for cyaniding is one that is neutral or
slightly alkaline and free from or very low in copper. Leach-
ing telluride ores raw has not been satisfactory, the results vary-
ing greatly without any apparent cause. The reason is proba-
bly to be found in the different behavior of the tellurium miner-
als, sylvanite, petzite, calaverite, and hessite with potassium
cyanide. At present tellurides are roasted before leaching;
roasting can be carried on without any appreciable loss of gold
by volatilization, but the gold is liable to be left in the form of
smooth globules not readily attacked by cyanide ; further, the
ore must be dead-roasted, as neutralizing the ore with a wash
of caustic soda has been found in many cases to reduce the ex-
traction. In making laboratory experiments to serve as a basis
for planning a mill, chemical tests ought to be supplemented by
sizing-tests, to show the sub-division of the gold in the pulp, and
by microscopical examination « to show the form in which it is
present.
Electrolytic Precipitation of Qold from Cyanide Solutions.
By S. Croasdale. Bng. Min,J,, 62, 57. — The paper is a rec-
ord of a number of experiments carried out on a sufficiently
large scale to allow the results to serve as a basis for industrial
work. Amalgamated zinc, the most positive of the available
metals, was used as the electro-positive, sheet lead as the electro-
negative pole. The current ranged from 0.04-0.05 amperes per
square foot, the voltage was low, and the flow of solution such that
the gold from half a pound of solution was deposited in 30 sec-
onds on each square foot of depositing surface. A standard solu-
tion with 12.787 milligrams gold per liter gave up 98 .04 per cent, of
the gold ; with a dilute solution of 1.84 grams gold per liter, the
capacity had to be doubled to obtain an extraction of 93.48 per
cent., the loss of cyanide from the 0.65 per cent, solution was
only 2.845 P^r cent., and the solution from the precipitating vat
was very active in dissolving gold. In using lead anodes as
well as cathodes, the current had to be raised from 0.04 to 0.2
ampere per square foot, when much gas was set free and the
solution, as it came from precipitating vat, was inactive though
it became active after standing. The recovery of gold was 94.34
per cent., and the loss in cyanide 5.15 per cent.
Metallurgical Chemistry, 49
A New Qold-5aving Process. By P. Langhammkr. Min,
Set. Press, 73, 316. — ^The innovation consists in drying, sizing,
and stirring the ore, which is said to detach the films of gold
and make them amenable to the solvent, potassitim cyanide,
which is to be applied separately to each size.
The Value of the Pyrometer in the Down Comer. By E.
A. Uehling. Am. Manufacturer and Iron World, 60, 115-117.
— The writer calls attention to the importance of measuring in
an iron blast furnace not only the temperature of the blast, but
also that of the gas passing off through the down comer, which
corresponds to from 5 to 8 tons for every ton of pig made and
carries with it from 40 to 75 per cent, of the total heat energy con-
tained in the fuel. Two temperature charts autographically re-
corded by the Uehling and Steinbart pneumatic pyrometer are
given, each showing the temperatures of blast and of gas. One
record represents the furnace in good condition, making 146
gross tons of good foundry iron with 147 gross tons of coke, the
blast temperature ranging from 1000'' to iioo® F. (average 1050**),
and the gas temperature from 300** to 500** F. (average 400**).
The other record of the furnace when working unsatisfactorily
shows 129.5 gross tons of iron of inferior quality, with 171 gross
tons of coke, blast temperature iooo®-i20o** F. gas temperature
70o'*-8oo*' F. By calculation the author finds that in the case
given 50 per cent, more gas was evolved with the higher than
with the lower temperatures, which corresponds to 730 and 296
pounds of carbon per ton of iron made.
[Contribution prom the Massachusetts Institute of Technoi,ogy.]
REVIEW OF AMERICAN CHEMICAL RESEARCH.
Vol, III. No. 4.
Arthur A. Noyes, Editor ; Henry P. Tai^bot, Associate Editor.
Reviewers: Analytical Chemistry, H. P. Talbot and W. H. Walker;
Biological Chemistry, W. R. Whitney; Carbohydrates, G. W. Rolfe ;
General Chemistry, A. A. Noyes ; Geological and Mineralogical Chem-
istry, W. O. Crosby ; Inorganic Chemistry, Henry Fay ; Metallurgical
Chemistry and Assaying, H. O. Hofman ; Organic Chemistry, J. F. Nor-
ris ; Physical Chemistry, H. M. Goodwin ; Sanitary Chemistry, E. H.
Richards; Technical Chemistry, A. H. Gill and P. H. Thorp.
INORGANIC CHEHISTRY.
Henry Pay, Rb viewer.
Action of Water of the Hubb Coal fline upon Cast Iron. By
Frank W. Durkee. Am, Chem,/,, 18, 849-858. — The author
has examined samples of cast iron which had lain twenty-three
years under water in the Hubb Coal Mine in Cape Breton, Nova
Scotia, and has found that, while retaining its shape, it had
materially altered in properties. The pieces were soft enough
to be easily cut with a knife, and very brittle. A cross section
showed an inner, softer part, lighter in color than the outer part.
The transformed cast iron was magnetic, porous, and several
times lighter than the same bulk of cast iron. Wrought iron
which had been used in the mine was deeply corroded on the
surface, but the interior was unaffected. The following figures,
representing the average composition of the altered portion,
were obtained by analysis : SiO„ 12.25 ; Si, 1.67 ; C, 13.33 ;
H,0 mechanically held, 3.53 ; H,0 combined, 5.21 ; PeS, 0.38;
SO,, 2.73; P.O., 1.65; CaO, 1.25; MgO, 0.35; MnO, 0.30;
FeO, 34.29 ; Fe as metallic iron and in the carbide Fe,C, 23.06.
Specific gravity, 2.5 The water in the mine was examined and
found to contain in grams per liter : free and combined H,SO^,
0.4551 ; free H.SO^, 0.0230 ; Ca, 0.0419 ; Mg, 0.0222 ; SiO„
0-OI53 ; CI, 0.0284; As, 0.00005 \ F^» A.1, and Mg, 0.0096.
Experiment with Gold. By M. Carby Lka. Am./, Set.,
I53> 64. — On reducing some gold solutions with sodium hypo-
phosphite the author noticed in special cases an emerald green
color. This color is best produced by bringing together 15 cc. of
a ten per cent, sodium hypophosphite solution, one cc. of gold
chloride solution containing o. 10 gram of metallic gold and one
52 Review of American Chemical Research.
drop of sulphuric acid. When the solution begins to darken %o
cc. of water are added. The solution now assumes a green
transparent color, gradually becoming cloudy. If it is now fil-
tered, it again becomes green and cloudy. This process can
be repeated several times. The green color is due to a very
small quantity of finely divided bluish-black metallic gold sus-
pended in the yellow liquid.
Silver Hydride. By Edwin J. Barti^ett and Wm. F.
RiCB. Am. Chem.J., 19, 49-52. — Silver hydride, AgH, was
prepared by precipitating a dilute solution of silver nitrate with
dilute hypophosphorous acid in excess. The solution becomes
wine-colored at first, changing to black, and after a few minutes
black, spongy flakes are precipitated, which are filtered at once.
The filtrate, on long standing or boiling, deposits metallic sil-
ver. Silver hydride is not decomposed by water.
suicide of Cliromittm. By G. de Chalmot. Am. Chem.J.,
X9f 69-70. — Chromium silicide, Si,Cr, was obtained by heating
together in an electric furnace silica, charcoal, and chromium
sesquioxide. It crystallizes in long, gray needles having a
metallic luster ; it is not attacked by cold hydrochloric acid or
aqua regia, but dissolves in hydrofluoric acid. A sufficient
quantity of pure crystals was not obtained for analysis, but the
composition was determined in two specimens, to which some
free silicon adhered. The specific gravity is 4.393.
Action of Ferric Cliloride on Metallic Qold. By Parker C.
McIlhiney. Am. J. Sci., 152, 293-294. — The author, in test-
ing the solubility of metallic gold, found that it is not soluble
in concentrated hydrochloric acid when heated in a pressure
tube at 150** C, nor in ferric chloride in absence of oxygen;
but in presence of oxygen ferric chloride acts as a chlorine car-
rier, and dissolves appreciable quantities of gold.
suicides of Copper and iron. By G. db Chalmot. Am.
Chem.J., 19, 1 18-123. — In a former article {This Rev., a, 7) the
author described a copper silicide of the formula Cu,Si,. Vigoureux
has already made it appear improbable that any other copper
silicide than Cu,Si exists. The author has repeated his work,
and concludes that while some crystals analyzed by him seem
to have the composition represented by the formula Cu,Si, there
are present in these crystals both free silicon and free copper, and
that the silicide present has in reality the formula Cu,Si. This is,
the author thinks, a case of chemical equilibrium between
copper silicide and its decomposition products, copper and sili-
con. Contrary to the statement of Vigoureux, it is shown that
copper silicon alloys containing up to 20 per cent, of silicon do
i
Inorganic Chemistry, 53
contain free silicon. The author has established the existence
of an iron silicide having the composition represented by the
formula PeSi,. By treating an iron silicon alloy containing
about 39 per cent, of silicon with cold hydrofluoric acid, to
which water was added, from time to time, there was left a
residue of gray metallic crystals, which had the composition
FeSi,. The silicide is completely soluble in cold hydrofluoric
acid, especially if the acid is concentrated, but is less soluble
than the iron silicides containing less silicon.
Drying and Deliquescence of Certain Salts. By P. W.
Smithkr. Am, Chem,/,^ 19, 227-232. — Definite quantities of
lithium, calcium, and magnesium chlorides, and of calcium and
magnesium nitrates were mixed with powdered glass and dried
at a temperature of Qy^^-gS** C. during six hours a day for thirty
days, weighings being made daily. Each portion was dried in a
desiccator over night, and in some cases moisture was absorbed
from the calcium chloride of the desiccator, so that comparable
results were not obtained ; furthermore the magnesium salts lost
acid after heating for some days. To test the abisorption of water
by the same salts dried quantities were placed in beakers
together with a piece of lamp wick, which helped to expose the
salt to a greater surface. The beakers were placed in a bell- jar
containing water and were weighed almost daily for seven weeks
and thereafter weekly for five weeks. The results are tabulated
together with calculations of the number of molecules of water
absorbed, from which it appears that no definite degree of
hydration took place.
iletal Separations by Means of Hydrochloric Acid Qas. By
G. Bird Moyer. /. Am. Chem, Sac, 18, 1029-1044. — The
author has converted the oxides of antimony, bismuth, copper
and lead quantitatively into chlorides by heating them in a current
of hydrochloric acid gas. With ferric oxide some reduction
took place. By the volatility of the chlorides of bismuth and
antimony he has separated them from copper and lead, and by
the volatility of arsenic trichloride he has separated the arsenic
from the arsenates of silver, copper, cadmium, cobalt and nickel.
The mineral niccolite, dissolved in nitric acid and evaporated to
dryness, is readily freed from arsenic by this method.
The Action of Acid Vapors on Metallic Sulphides. By
Jerome Kei^ley, Jr. and Edgar P. Smith. /. Am, Ckem,
Soc.,18, 1096-1098. — Arsenic, antimony, and stannic sulphides
are converted into the chlorides by heating in a current of hy-
drochloric acid gas ; stannous sulphide is also converted into the
chloride, but cannot be volatilized. The dry sulphides of arse-
nic and antimony are completely volatilized when exposed to
hydrobromic acid gas.
54 Review of American Chemical Research,
Tungsten Hexabromide. By Hbrbbrt A. Schabppbr and
Edgar F. Smith. /. Am. Chem. Soc., i8, 1098-1100. — ^Tung-
sten hexabromide, consisting of blue black crystals, was pre-
pared by heating tungsten in a current of bromine diluted with
nitrogen. It fumes in the air, and is decomposed by water into
a blue oxide.
Note on the Ferrocyanides of Zinc and Manj^anese. By Ed-
mund H. MiLLBR. /. Am, Chem, Soc.y 18, 1100-1102. — This
paper is a preliminary note relating to the composition of these
salts.
Analysis of an Iron Rail Taken from a Gallery of an Unused
Coal Mine. By Hbnry P. Talbot and A. G. Woodman. /.
Am, Chem, Soc,y xg, 9-12. — ^This article gives the results of the
analysis of a cast iron rail which had lain twenty-three years
under water in the Hub Mine, at Glace Bay, Cape Breton. It
was composed of an inner and outer portion, the densities of
which seemed to increase with length of exposure to the air.
The results are compared with those of Herting {Chem. Ztg,^
20, 54), who analyzed a similar rail. (See also above, thisi?^.,
3, 51.)
The Oxalates of Zirconium. By F. P. Venablb and
Chari^bs Baskbrvillb. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 19, 12-18. — Basic
oxalates of zirconium were formed by precipitation. It was
found impossible to obtain the neutral oxalate. The acid
oxalate Zr(C,0,),.H,C,0,.8H,0, and the following double
oxalates were prepared :
Zr(CA)..3Na,C.O,.H.CA.5H.O,
[Zr(C.O,).]..(KAO,),.H.C,0,.8H.O,
Zr(CA)..2(NH,).CA.
Preparation of Sodium Nitroprusside. By P. S. Hydb. /.
Am. Chem. Sac., 19, 23-24. — Detailed directions for the prepara-
tion of pure sodium nitroprusside are given in this paper.
Some Peculiar Forms of Iron. By T. H. Norton. /. Am,
Chem, Sac, 19, 108-110. — A mass of pig iron which had been in
the molten condition for over a year was analyzed and found to
be practically pure iron, except for a high percentage of phos-
phorus— 0.828. It was extremely hard, malleable, and crys-
talline, showing rectangular cleavage. — The support for the
mantle of a Welsbach burner was found to be extremely brittle,
crumbling easily. Analysis showed 0.097 per cent, carbon,
while the original steel contained 0.642 percent.
A Tungsten-iron Alloy. By T. H. Norton. /. Am. Chem.
Sac., 19, no. — Analysis of a hard and brittle tungsten-iron alloy
Inorganic Chemistry. 55
of specific gravity 14.55, showed 93.43 per cent, tungsten and
6.18 per cent. iron.
Our Present Knowledge of Argon. By C. LeRoy Parker../.
Am. Chem, Soc., 19, 124-138. — This paper contains nothing
original, bat is a review of our knowledge of argon, to which is
added a valuable bibliography.
On the Volatility of Certain inorganic Salts. By T. H.
Norton and D. M. Roth. /. Am. Chem. Soc.y 19, 155-166. —
The authors have examined the volatility of borax, of sodium
and potassium fluorides, and of barium chloride. The results
are tabulated and compared with the time it takes to volatilize
o.oi gram sodium chloride in the hottest part of the Bunsen
flame.
H. p. Talbot, Rbvibwbr.
On the Volatility of Ferric Chloride. By Henry P. Tai,-
BOT. Am. Chem. J. ^ 19, 52-59. — The experimental data show
that no loss of ferric chloride occurs, when its solutions (whether
neutral or acidified with hydrochloric acid) are evaporated to
dryness on the water-bath or upon the hot plate, provided in the
latter case they are not too strongly overheated. The residues
so obtained were subjected to the temperature usually employed
to dehydrate silicic acid (130** C.) for two hours, but suffered no
loss of iron. Prolonged heating of these residues over a free
flame occasioned but a slight loss (0.4 per cent.) of the iron
present. Concentrated acid solutions of the chloride, when
boiled in a distilling flask, allowed ferric chloride to pass into
the receiver only when a slight separation of the solid had taken
place on the side of the flask, which, in the acid atmosphere,
was volatilized by the overheating of the glass. When ferric
chloride solutions are evaporated with exposure to the air, a
loss of chlorine ensues, and the basic ferric salt formed
prevents loss of the iron as chloride. The presence of ammo-
nium chloride with the ferric chloride occasioned no loss of the
latter, even at 130® C. The residues, when heated over a free
flame, suffered a loss of iron, as would be expected. The pres-
ence of aqua regia with the ferric chloride solution tends to oc-
casion a slight loss of iron during evaporation. The maximum
loss was 0.6 per cent, of the iron present, but in other cases very
little or no loss could be detected. Vogel's experiments (-A^.
Rep. Pharm., 18, 157) were repeated, and it was found that a
slight volatilization of iron seems to take place from an ethereal
solution at the temperatures of the laboratory, but, on the other
hand, the presence of ether or its vapor does not promote the
volatilization of the ferric chloride from its boiling, concentrated,
aqueous solutions.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
J. P. NORRIS, RBVIBWBR.
Investigations on tlie Two Isomeric Chlorides of Orthosul-
phobenzoic Acid. By Ira Rbmsbn. IV. Purification of the
Chlorides and Action of Various Reagents upon Them. By
Ira Remsen and S. R. McKee. V. The Relation of the Ani-
lides. By Ira Remsen and J. R. Hunter. VI. Orthocyan-
benzenesulphonic Acid. By Ira Remsen and W. J. Kars-
LAKE. Am, Chetn,/,^ i8, 791-829. — In earlier articles {Am,
Chem,/., 17, 309-347; Tech. Quart., 8, 194) the preparation
and properties of the two isomeric chlorides of orthosulphoben-
zoic acid were described, and evidence was presented which
shows that the chloride melting at 79-79^*. 5 has the structure
COCl
C, H^ "^^so cr '^^^ reactions of the carefully purified chlo-
rides with various reagents and the restflting compounds have
been studied, and additional evidence in favor of the unsym-
metrical structure forthe low-melting chloride furnished. (IV.)
To obtain the high melting chloride in pure condition, an ethereal
solution of the mixed chlorides is evaporated to crystallization,
after being shaken with dilute ammonia, which transforms the
low-melting chloride into the ammonium salt of cyanbenzene-
sulphonic acid. The pure low-melting chloride (m. pt. 2i''.5-
22''.5) is obtained by fractional crystallization at o"* of the mixed
chlorides from carefully purified ligroin boiling at 90^-125**.
Water decomposes the low-melting chloride about three
times as fast as the high-melting chloride. 65 per cent, of the
former was changed to acid after standing four days at the
ordinary temperature. Both chlorides give the same products
when heated with phenol ; viz., the diphenyl ester of orthosul-
phobenzoic acid and a compound, probably of the structure
C,H^<gQ pj • •, which is changed by dilute ammonia into
phenyl orthosulphaminebenzoate,C,H^<;;«Q ^VV *. The di-
phenyl ester was saponified when heated at 200^, with concen-
trated hydrochloric acid, and was transformed into the am-
CO
monium salt of benzoic sulphinide, C,H^<;qq >N.NH^, when
heated at 125^ for four hours with ammonia. With resorcinol
both chlorides gave the same sulphonfluorescein. When the
high-melting chloride was treated with aniline, only the fusible
anilide, C.H,<|2'nHC H *' ^™- P^' ^94'*-i95') was obtained.
The low-melting chloride yielded a mixture of equal amounts of
Organic Chemistry. 57
C(NHC.H.).
the above compound and the infusible anilide, C,H^ ^ ^O
which melts at 250**-270® with decomposition. With ammonia the
high-melting chloride gives the ammonium salt of benzoic sul-
phinide, while the low-melting chloride gives the ammonium
salt of orthocyanbenzenesulphonic acid. The latter transforma-
tion is additional evidence in favor of the unsymmetrical struc-
CCl.
ture for the low- melting chloride, C.H^v >0. When the
latter compound was dissolved in ether and shaken with dilute
ammonia, it was in part, changed into the high-melting chlo-
ride. By the action of benzene and aluminum chloride on
the low-melting chloride the same compounds were formed
which had been obtained by Remsen and Saunders {loc. cii.)
from the high-melting chloride; namely, orthobenzoylbenzene-
sulphonchloride and orthobenzoyldiphenylsulphone. It was
impossible to change the low-melting chloride into its isomer by
heating in a sealed tube at 90**, or by shaking with water for half
an hour. (V.) The two anilides of orthosulphobenzoic acid
were prepared by the action of an ethereal solution of aniline on
the mixed chlorides. By crystallization from alcohol the two
isomers can be separated, as the fusible anilide crystallizes in
thin white needles, while the infusible variety crystallizes in
short thick prisms. Phosphorus oxychloride and phosphorus
pentoxide removed one molecule of water from both compounds
C =NC.H.
forming the dianil, C,H^^ >NC,H^, which had already been
^SO,
obtained by Jesurin {Ber. d. chem. Ges., 26, 2292) by the action
of aniline on orthocyanbenzenesulphonchloride. The compound
crystallizes in yellow monoclinic prisms, is changed by boiling
acetic acid or alcoholic potash into the infusible anilide, and is
decomposed into the anil C,H^SO,.CO.NC,H. and aniline by
boiling hydrochloric acid. The infusible anilide reacts with ben-
zoyl chloride, forming the anil and benzanilide. Since the above
facts show that the two aniline residues are intact in the infusi-
ble anilide, and since the latter compound is obtained only from
the unsymmetrical chloride, it follows that the structure of the
C = (NHC.H,).
anilide is C,H,C >0 . (VI.) The mixed chlo-
^SO,
rides of orthosulphobenzoic acid were dissolved in ether and
shaken with ice-cold dilute ammonia. Prom the water solution
the ammonium salt of orthocyanbenzenesulphonic acid crystal-
lized in botryoidal masses of transparent needles. The sodium,
58 Review of American Chemical Research.
potassium, and barium salts were prepared, and from the latter
CONH
orthobenzaminesulphonic acid, C,H^<Cqq qtj + H,0, was ob-
tained in an endeavor to get the free cyan acid, C,H^.CN.SO,OH.
The ammonium salt of the former acid was obtained by boiling
the ammonium salt of the latter with dilute hydrochloric acid for
eight hours. The potassium, sodium, and barium salts of benz-
aminesulphonic acid were formed by tx)iling the ammonium salt
of cyanbenzenesulphonic acid with an excess of the respective
hydroxides.
On Parabromdimetanitrotoluol and Some of Its Derivatives.
By C. Loring Jackson and Martin H. Ittner. Am. Chem,
y., 19, 1-37. — The work described was undertaken in order to
find out whether a bromine atom in the ortho position between
two nitro groups, but not exposed to the loosening action of a
third negative group in the para position, could be removed
easily, and be replaced by a hydrogen atom under the influ-
ence of sodium malonic ester, as has been frequently observed
by Jackson and his pupils in the study of more highly substi-
tuted aromatic compounds. The compound selected for investi-
gation, parabromdimetanitrotoluene, proved to be not very reac-
tive ; but this was probably due to the influence of the methyl
group. It was prepared from dinitrotoluidine, melting at 166**,
and was converted by warm aniline into anilidodinitrotoluene
(m. pt. 169**), which gave a nitroso derivative, which melts at
123''. Although sodium malonic ester did not act upon brom-
dinitrotoluene under a variety of conditions, sodium ethylate
gave striking color reactions, which are to be described in
another paper. The bromine was not replaced, as no dinitro-
toluene was found. With ammonia, bromdinitrotoluene gives
dinitrotoluidine, and with sodium hydroxide, dinitrocresol.
Parabromdimetanitrobenzoic acid was made by oxidizing the
corresponding toluene. It melts at 181°, and is more reactive
than parabromdinitrotoluene, since the bromine atom is affected
by the carboxyl group in the para position. Sodium hydroxide
in the cold converts it into oxydinitrobenzoic acid (m. pt. 245®-
246°) . Bromdinitrobenzoic acid gives, with ammonium hydroxide,
chrysanisic acid ; with aniline, anilidodinitrobenzoic acid ; and
with sodium, malonic ester, at ordinary temperatures, dinitro-
carboxylphenylmalonicester,C,H,CH(COOC,H,),(NO,)aCOOH
(m. pt. 176^*.) A number of the salts and the ethyl esters of the
acids were prepared. An attempt was made to build up very
complex molecules from some of the substances described, in
order to study the effect of complexity of structure on physical
properties. The resulting compounds soon ceased to be crystalline,
and the work was therefore abandoned. By the action of pyridine
Organic Chemistry. 59
on bromdinitrobenzoic acid two compounds were obtained : a
white body, probably a simple salt of the acid ; and a very un-
stable yellow compound whose reactions pointed to the structure,
C,H,NBrC,H,(NO,)COOHNC,H,. Some preliminary work on
the action of hydrochloric acid on bromdinitrobenzoic acid showed
that the products were dinitrophenol (OH, i, (NOJ,2,6) and
oxydinitrobenzoic acid.
Aluminum Ethylate. By H. W. Hillyer and O. E.
Crookkr. Am, Chem, /., 19, 37-44. — In a previous paper
{Am, Chem, /., 18, 621 ; this Rev,, 2, 80), Hillyer has shown
that aluminum reacts with alcohol in which mercuric or stannic
chloride is dissolved, liberating hydrogen and forming a gelati-
nous mass. During the reaction the metallic chlorides are
reduced. The reaction has been studied further ; and the
authors are of the opinion that it is due to the joint influence of
the aluminum-mercury couple and the aluminum chloride
formed in the reduction of the mercuric chloride. The product
of the reaction when distilled under a pressure of 23 mm.
boiled at 235°-245'', and solidified to a gummy mass which melted
at 135''. A mixture of one cc. of stannic chloride, 5 grams of
chipped aluminum, and 50 cc. of absolute alcohol gives the best
results. The authors consider that the chlorine found in the dis-
tillate, even after a number of distillations, shows the presence of
aluminum chloride. The compound was analyzed for chlorine
and aluminum, and, deducting the amount of the latter equiva-
lent to the chlorine, the analyses give results closely approxi-
mating those required for aluminum ethylate, Al(OC,Hj),. The
properties of the compound agree with those of the ethylate pre-
pared by Gladstone and Tribe (J, Chem, Soc,, 39, i) by the
action of aluminum and iodine on alcohol.
Paraisobutylphenoxyacetic Acid. By W. P. Bradley and
F. Kniffen. Am, Chem, /., 19, 70-76. — Paraisobutyl-
phenoxyacetic acid was prepared by heating paraisobutylphenol
and chloracetic acid dissolved in sodium hydroxide. The
mixture was neutralized with sulphuric acid, treated with an
excess of sodium carbonate, and extracted with ether to remove
any excess of phenol. The resulting liquid was then evapo-
rated to a small bulk, acidified, and the acid extracted with
ether. The compound is a cream white solid, melts at SS^'.s,
and crystallizes from ligroin in radial crystals. The barium
and magnesium salts crystallize well. The amide, prepared
from the methyl ester, crystallizes from ligroin in white plates,
which melt at 134°. The anilide, metanitranilide, ortho-
and paratoluides, and hydrazide are described. A tetranitro
derivative of the anilide was formed by the action of fuming
nitric acid. The fact that the four nitro groups are divided
6o Review of American Chemical Research,
equally between the two benzene rings was proved by the action
of potassium hydroxide, which decomposed the compound into
the ortho- and paradinitraniline.
Formation of Diacetylenyl (Butadiine) from Copper Acety-
lene. By a. a. Noyes and C. W. Tucker. Am. Chem. /.,
19, 123-129. — The object of the investigation was to establish
the constitution and to explain the formation of the crystalline
compound of the formula C^H,Br„ obtained by Sebanejeff,
{Ber.d. Chem. Ges., 22c, 249) by passing acetylene, from copper
acetylene, into boiling bromine. The attempts to prepare the body
by the action, upon boiling bromine, of acetylene generated from
calcium carbide, were unsuccessful. The gas obtained by the
action of hydrochloric acid on the copper compound prepared
from acetylene generated from calcium carbide was passed into
boiling bromine. A 4 per cent, yield of crystals, identical in
properties with those of Sebanejeff, was obtained. Substitu-
tion of potassium cyanide for hydrochloric acid, and varying
the condition of combination of the gas with bromine did
not aSect the result. As the addition of strips of metallic
copper to the copper acetylene during decomposition pre-
vented the formation of the compound, it seemed probable
that its formation was due to the oxidizing action of the cupric
chloride formed by the contact of the decomposing mixture
with the air. Copper acetylene was decomposed in the presence
of cupric chloride, and the yield was increased to 9 per cent.
When molecular quantities of copper acetylene and cupric
chloride were heated for 3 hours, the latter was entirely reduced.
Analyses and molecular weight determinations of the bromide
showed that its formula is C^H.Br,. It melts at i83**.5 (corr.),
crystallizes in colorless orthorhombic plates, evolves bromine
when heated above its melting-point, and furnishes a distillate,
which partially recombines with the bromine vapors, when
heated at 220'' under a pressure of 40 mm. That the body is not
a derivative of the hydrocarbon (CH)^ is shown by the facts,
that it is obtained from the oxidation-products of acetylene or
its copper compound, and that the gas evolved from copper
acetylene is completely absorbed by ammoniacal cuprous chlo-
ride, thus showing it to consist only of triple-bonded compounds.
The only explanation is that the bromide is formed by the union
with bromine of the hydrocarbon C^H„ diacetylenyl or butadiine,
obtained from its copper compound, which is formed according
to the reaction 2C,Cu, + CuCl, = C,Cu, + 2Cu,Cl,. That the
hydrocarbon combines with only six atoms of bromine is
explained by the principle that unsaturated compounds contain-
ing a large proportion of halogen often do not become com-
pletely saturated. From the gases evolved from copper acety-
Organic Chemistry. 6i
lene a liquid was condensed, which boiled at 40^ to 50° and gave
with bromine diacetylenyl hexabromide. The crude product
was not the pure hydrocarbon, for it contained a large propor-
tion of chlorine.
On the Action of Acid Chlorides on the imido Esters and
Ifloanilides, and on the Structure of the Silver Salts of the
Anilides. By H. L. Whbbi.BR and P. T. Wai^dbn. Am.
Ckem.J.y 19, 129-139. — As the silver salts of the anilides react
with acid chlorides as if the metal were joined to nitrogen, and
with alkyl halides as if the metal were joined to oxygen, it fol-
lows that both reactions cannot be direct double decompositions.
It seems probable that addition first takes place, and that this
is followed by separation of silver halide. In order to show
which of the two possible structures of the silver salts of the
anilides RC^f q^'^^ or RC^q^' is correct, the action of acid
chlorides was studied on the isoanilides and imido esters, which, it
is probable, contain the grouping RC/QT>ff. With the iso-
anilides an unstable addition-product is first formed, which
breaks down with evolution of alkyl chloride and formation of a
mixed diacid anilide. As the reaction takes place readily and
is analogous to that between the acid chlorides and the silv^
salts of the anilides, it follows that the metal is joined to oxy-
gen in the latter compounds. This is in accord with the con-
clusion of Comstock and Kleeburg {^Am. Chem. /., 12, 495).
Acid chlorides react with imido esters forming an addition-prod-
uct from which hydrochloric acid is eliminated. The acid re-
acts with the excess of the imido ester :
2C.H.C( J^H, + CICOCH. = C.H.C^<;gCOCH. ^
When the acyl imido esters are treated with acids they react
with water to form diacid amides and alcohol. The decomposi-
tion is analogous to the action of the silver salts of the amides
and anilides with acids, and is evidence, therefore, that the
diacid amides have both acid groups joined to nitrogen. The
action of bromine and iodine on the imido esters is similar to
that of the acid chlorides. The new compounds described are
formylbenzenesulphonanilide, C,H.N(CHO)SO,C.H^, benzoyl-
imidoethylbenzoate, C,H,C (NCOC.HJ OC.H., acetylimido-
methylbenzoate, bromimidomethylbenzoate, C,H,C(NBr)OCH„
and iodimidomethylbenzoate.
On the Effect of Light on the Displacement of Bromine and
Iodine from Organic Bromides and Iodides. By J. H. Kasti«b
62 Review of American Chemical Research,
AND W. A. Bkatty. Am, Chem,/., 19, 139-149. — ^The authors
have found that chlorine liberated from dichlorsulphonamide by
the action of light can displace bromine and iodine from their
most stable compounds, and that the bromine of dibromsulphon-
amide, when liberated, can displace iodine from the benzene
ring. In the dark there is no liberation of chlorine from the
amide and, consequently, no displacement of bromine or iodine
from organic halides, except from unstable compounds like
iodoform, where a direct reaction takes place. Chlorine water
caused a similar decomposition. Experiments showed that up
to 50** the reaction is more dependent upon light than heat. At
i4°-i8® a mixture of dibrombenzene and chlorine water, after
six hours exposure to direct sunlight, gave a good test for bro-
mine, while a similar mixture, heated for five hours in the dark
at 50®, suffered no change. Above 50*" the reaction takes place
in the dark. When /-dibrombenzene and chlorine water were
exposed to the sunlight for a number of days, a large proportion
of the bromine was liberated and a substance, probably a mix-
ture of ^-chlorbenzene and /-brombenzene or /-chlorbromben-
zene, was formed.
The Constitution of Benzanilide. By N. Knight. Am,
Chem, y.,. 19, 152-154. — If the formula of benzanilide is
y NHC H
C.HjC. Q • *, the same product should result when ben-
zenesulphanilide is treated with benzoyl chloride, or when benz-
anilide is treated with benzenesulphonchloride. > If the formula
/OH
is C.HjC ^ j^p TT , the reaction-product should be different.
_ 6 6
The above reactions were studied, but, as in both cases there
was a complete breaking down, and a number of substances
were formed, no conclusion as to the structure could be drawn.
The chief products of the reaction were dibenzoyl anilide and
the aniline salt of benzenesulphonic acid.
On the Decomposition of Diazo Compounds. IX. On the
Reactions of Ethyl and ilethyl Alcohols with Paradiazometa-
toluenesulphonic Acid in the Presence of Various Substances.
By John J. Griffin. Am, Chem, J,, 19, 163-183. — The work
described in this communication, the ninth from the laboratory
of the Johns Hopkins University on the subject of diazo com-
pounds, is in accord with the results already published. It has
been found that, when paradiazometatoluenesulphonic acid is
decomposed below 45° in methyl or ethyl alcohol in the pres-
ence of sodium methylate, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide,
or zinc dust, only the hydrogen reaction takes place. The
yield of the resulting acid was determined by converting it into
the amide. The best yield (50 grams amide from 100 g^ams
Organic Chemistry, 63
diazo compound) was obtained by effecting the decomposition
in ethyl alcohol in presence of zinc dust, treeing the resulting
mass with phosphorus trichloride and then with ammonia. It
is remarkable that the product obtained by decomposing the
diazo compound in presence of sodium carbonate did not react
with phosphorus trichloride, but was changed into the sulphon-
chloride by the pentachloride. The diazo compound was not
decomposed when treated at 45'' with alcohol and calcium car-
bonate. When decomposition takes place in alcohol saturated
with ammonia, the ammonium salt of paratoluidinemetasul-
phonic acid is formed. Metatoluenesulphonamide melts at ids'",
and crystallizes from concentrated solutions in brilliant hex-
agonal scales and from dilute solutions in large fern-like growths.
The amide was oxidized to metasulphaminebenzoic acid, from
which the barium and silver salts were made.
On rietatoluenesulphonic Acid. By John J. Griffin. Am.
Chem,J,y 19, 183-198. — From a study of the literature of meta-
toluenesulphonic acid, a review of which is given by the author,
it is evident that the properties of the acid and its salts are not
definitely known. A large amount of pure metatoluenesulphon-
amide, which was obtained in the work described in the previ-
ous review, was converted into the acid, from which the barium,
lead, calcium, sodium, potassium, silver, magnesium, manga-
nese, zinc, and copper salts were prepared. These are described
in detail. From the study of the acid and its salts it is evident
that the compounds described by Miiller {Ann, Chem,^ 169, 47)
and by others who have employed analogous methods of prep-
aration were impure products.
The Preparation of Dietliyl ilalonic Ester. By W. A.
NoYES. /. Am, Chem, Sac,, 18, 1105. — The time required for
the preparation of malonic ester is much reduced by heating the
reacting substance with sulphuric acid for an hour instead of
treating with dry hydrochloric acid gas. The yield of the ester
is equal to the weight of the chloracetic acid taken. This is 10
to 15 per cent, better than by the old method.
Color Reactions of Nitric and Cliloric Acids witli Certain
Aromatic Bodies. By E. C. Woodruff. /. Am. Chem, Sac,
19, 156-169. — The color reactions of nitric and chloric acids
with a large number of aromatic compounds were studied, in
order to find some new practical tests for the two. acids both sepa-
rately and in mixtures. The procedure was to treat the test
solution, generally as a mixture of 10 grams of aromatic body
and 100 cc. sulphuric acid, with a drop of a nitrate or a chlorate
or a mixture of the two. After standing a short time, potassium
hydroxide or ammonium hydroxide is added and the solution is
diluted. The color is noted at three stages, before and after
64 Review of American Chemical Research.
neutralization, and after dilution. The results with twenty
hydroxyl and amido derivatives are tabulated. Phenol serves
to distinguish between the two acids, as nitrates give a strong
picrate-colored solution, while chlorates give a brownish-yellow
color. Nitrates can be detected in the presence of chlorates,
bromates, and iodates, as they give a strong blood-red color with
a mixture of dimethylaniline, paratoluidine, and sulphuric acid.
Reference must be made to the original article for a number of
other interesting observations.
QEOLOQiCAL AND MINERALOOICAL CHEHISTRY.
W. O. Crosby, Rbviswer.
Italian Petrological Sketches, II. The Viterbo Region. By
Henry S. Washington. /. GeoL, 4« 826-849. — Lavas of two
distinct types, obtained from the Viterbo region, which lies a
few kilometers southeast of the volcanic district of Lake Bolsena,
are described, the trachytic lavas under the names vulsinite,
ciminite and peperino, and leucitic lavas, under the name of
leucite-trachyte. One original analysis of ciminite is given, and
three earlier ones are quoted for comparison. These show that
while as regards the silica, alumina, lime or iron the rock
approaches the andesites rather than the trachytes, yet that
the potash is largely in excess of the soda, and that the rock is
far richer in total alkalies than is the case with the true andesites.
On the other hand, the magnesia is also abnormally high for a
trachyte. Analyses are also given of the vulsinite, leucite-
trachyte, and a phonolite, which occurs very sparingly, as dikes
and enclosed masses.
Italian Petrological Sketches, III. The Bracciano, Cerveteri
and Tolfa Regions. By Henry S. Washington. /. Geol., 5,
34-49. — As in the Viterbo region, the rocks embrace both non-
leucitic and leucitic tjrpes ; but these are regarded as specifically
distinct from the Viterbo rocks, and are described, the former
under the name toscanite, and the latter under the names leuci-
tite, leucite-tephrite, and leucite-phonolite. Original analyses
of all these are given in tabular form ; and the distinctive
chemical features are briefly indicated.
The Principles of Rock Weathering. By George P. Mer-
rill. /. Geol,, 4, 704-724 ; 850-871. — This is an able and com-
prehensive summary of our knowledge of the subject, and must
prove of great value to students. Both the chemical and phys-
ical aspects of the problem are discussed; and no more important
results are presented than those derived from the author's earlier
contribution to the literature of rock decay.
Geological and Mineralogical Chentisiry. 65
The Anorthosites of the Rainy Lake Reg^ion. By A. P.
Coleman. /. GeoL^ 4, 907-911. — In the vicinity of Rainy and
Bad Vermilion Lakes very basic and very acid igneous rocks —
anorthosites and quartzose granites — are found associated. One
analysis of each is given, and an analysis of anorthosite from
Quebec is quoted for comparison. It appears that the anortho-
site from the Rainy Lake region is one of the most basic of the
massive rocks, having about eight per cent, less silica than the
typical anorthosites of Eastern Canada. A suggestion for a
binomial nomenclature of these rocks is. followed by a brief dis-
cussion of their age and petrologic relations.
The «* Augen"->Qneiss Area, PegtnJatite Veins and Diorite
Dikes at Bedford, N. V. By Lea McL. Luquer and Hein-
RiCH RiES. Am, GeoL, 18, 239-261. — Two analyses of the
feldspar in the pegmalite veins show that it is a normal ortho-
clase.
A New and Important Source of Phosphate Rock in Tennes-
see, By James M. Safford. Am, Geol,^ 18, 261-264. — The
Trenton limestone of the region about Nashville, and especially
the member of it known as the Capitol limestone, is normally
more or less phosphatic, the richer parts showing upon analysis
from 15 to 25 per cent, of phosphate. The true phosphate rock
is a residuum after the leaching by meteoric waters of the phos-
phatic limestone. It is found immediately beneath the soil in
layers from three to eight feet thick, and is in every respect of a
distinctly residuary character. An analysis by J. M. McCand-
less, of Atlanta, gave: Calcium phosphate (bone phosphate),
77.54 ; iron and alumina, 1.50 ; calcium carbonate, 6.83. Other
analyses made in Nashville show the calcium phosphate to range
from 60 to 81 per cent.
The Arlington Iron, ilinnesota No. a. By N. H. Win-
CHELi.. Am, GeoL, 18, 267-271. — This iron, weighing 19^
pounds, was found two and a half miles northeast of Arlington,
Minn., in March, 1894. It proved on examination to be a typ-
ical metallic meteorite, and an analysis by F. F. Sharpless, gave
the following results: Pe, 90.781; Ni, 8.605; Co, 1.023; P,
0.045 ; total, 100.454. It yielded no sulphur, silicon, or manga-
nese, and only traces of chromium, copper and combined carbon.
nissourite, a New Leucite Rock from the Highwood iloun-
tains of Montana. By Walter H. Weed and Louis V.
PiRSSON. Am, /. Sci, 152, 315-323. — The Highwood Mountains
form an isolated group consisting of extinct, greatly eroded
volcanoes. Forming the core of one of these denuded volcanoes
is a granular rock of a new type and of exceptionally interesting
petrologic character to which the authors have given the name
66 Review of American Chemical Research.
Missourite. The microscope shows the following minerals :
apatite, iron ore, olivine, augite, biotite, leucite, and some zeo-
litic products. As the presence of leucite in a granular plutonic
rock was before unknown, particular pains were taken to place
its identification beyond doubt. It was isolated by means of a
heavy solution, and found to have the specific gravity, optical
characters, and composition (KAl(SiOJ,) of leucite. With one
exception, this is the first analysis of a leucite from other than
an Italian locality. The zeolitic products were similarly iso-
lated and analyzed, and proved to be analcite and a natrolite in
which potash and lime have replaced soda. A mass analysis of
the rock by E. B. Hurlburt is also given. This brings out
strongly the leading characteristics of the rock, its very high
lime, iron, and magnesia, which have compelled the formation
of large quantities of pyroxene and olivine ; the predominance
of potash over soda, which with the low silica have conditioned
the formation of the leucite, and which explains why no feld-
spars have formed. The mineralogical composition is believed
to be: iron ore, 5; augite, 50; olivine, 15; biotite, 6; leucite,
16 ; analcite, 4 ; and zeolites, 4 per cent. Analyses of absaro-
kite, shonkinite, and a leucite basalt are quoted for comparison ;
and it is shown that this rock fills a place which has hitherto
been vacant in all systems of rock classification. It is the mas-
sive, granular, plutonic representative of the leucite basalts and
bears the same relation to them that gabbro bears to the ordi-
nary plagioclase basalts or granite to rhyolite.
Chemical Composition of Hawaiian Soils and of the Rocks
from Which They Have Been Derived. By A. B. Lyons. Am,
J, Set,, 152, 421-429. — The author states that the relation in
chemical composition of soils to the rocks from which they are
definitely derived, can be studied most easily and profitably in
a volcanic country, where disintegration of the rock is rapid and
is attended by great chemical changes. The chemical compo-
sition of these volcanic soils is peculiarly interesting and full of
surprises to one unaccustomed to their vagaries. Ten original
analyses of the soils are given, classified as follows : New soils
from lapilli (recent fragmental lava) ; new soils from lava only
partially disintegrated ; old soils from thoroughly disintegrated
ancient lava. The new soils are of a sandy character, contain-
ing but little clay ; and yet the mineral constituents requisite for
plant food — ^potash and phosphoric acid — are present in extraor-
dinary abundance. Two of the lapilli soils are almost incredi-
bly rich in phosphate, containing respectively 2.92 and 6.47 per
cent. PjO^. The old soils are clayey, of a deep red color, and
relatively poor in phosphate, though comparing very favorably
in potash with the new soils. The lavas are highly basic rocks,
Geological and Mineralogical Chemistry, 67
the more recent forms running as low in silica as 35.86 per cent.,
the average of the nine analyses given being 47.86 per cent.
The ultra-basic recent lavas, especially, are rapidly decomposed
by acids with separation of gelatinous silica and evolution of
hj'drogen sulphide. The variations are 0.17 to 2.75 per cent.
K,0, and 0.26 to 1.25 per cent. P^O^; the averages are 1.07 per
cent. K,0 and 0.65 per cent. P,Oj. A third table of analyses
gives the composition of lavas altered by exposure to the
weather. There has been a notable loss of silica, the average
being reduced to 21.32 per cent., with a minimum of 4.54 per
cent. ; while the alkalies and alkaline earths have almost wholly
disappeared. A fourth table compares the averages of all the
analyses of sound lava, rotten lava, and soil.
Some Queries on Rock Differentiation. By Geo. P. Becker.
Am. J, Sci., 153, 21-40. — This paper is an able and timely criti-
cism of the general theory of magmatic differentiation, and es-
pecially of the attractive phase of this theory that was first distinctly
formulated by Iddings, which regards molten magmas as com-
plex solutions, and hence, in accordance with Soret's principle,
subject to differentiation by molecular diffusion when the tem-
perature is not uniform. The author does not deny that diffu-
sion plays some part in lithogenesis, recognizing its operation
in the formation of phenocrysts and in the '* diffusion aureoles''
surrounding eroded crystals. But his criticism is aimed at the
view that masses of rock hundreds of meters in thickness cQuld
be thus separated, even if the time allowed for completion of the
process were equal to an entire geological period. The results
of experiments are cited to show that even under the most
favorable conditions molecular diffusion is an exceedingly slow
process. For example, it is calculated that at the expiration of
a million years water would be just sensibly discolored by cop-
per sulphate at a distance of 350 meters from the point of con-
tact with a saturated solution and that semi-saturation would
have reached only a distance of some 84 meters. It is assumed
that for a typical lava these periods would be at least 50 times
greater. Probably a mass of lava of a volume of one cubic kilo-
meter would not have had time to segregate into distinctly dif-
ferent rocks by molecular flow if it had been kept melted since
the close of the Archaean, even if the temperature of the top
could have been kept sensibly above the temperature of the
bottom, a highly improbable condition. If the bottom were
more highly heated than the top, convection currents would
effectually prevent any segregation in accordance with Soret*s
principle. Convection is regarded as inevitable in every instance
and as constantly and completely neutralizing any possible
effect of diffusion. The author next examines the theory that
68 Review of American Chemical Research.
rock differentiation is due to the separation of the magmas dur-
ing cooling into two or more immiscible fluids, citing the ex-
periments of Alexejew, Pfeiffer, Sorby, Braun, and others. The
conclusion reached is that while such a breaking up of magmas
. probably occurs under favorable conditions, no known causes
are adequate to the segregation of the immiscible fluids. The
author thus virtually abandons the whole theory of rock differ-
entiation, and for an explanation of the great diversity of
igneous rocks falls back upon the view that the differences be-
tween well-defined rock types are due to original and persistent
heterogeneity in the composition of the globe.
On Igneous Rocks from 5mymaand Pergamon. By Henry
S. Washington. Am, /. 5W., 153, 41-50. — This paper con-
tains detailed descriptions and chemical analyses of two rock
types, augite-andesite and biotite-dacite.
Notes on the Artesian Well Sunk at Key West, Florida, in
1895- By Edward Otis Hovey. Bull, Museum Camp, ZooL, 28,
No. 3, 65-91. — In 1895 an artesian well was sunk at Key West,
Florida, to the depth of 2,000 feet. Samples of the borings were
taken every 25 feet from the surface to the bottom ; and this
paper embodies the results of a microscopic and chemical exami-
nation of these. The material is throughout an almost perfectly
pure lime-rock, loosely compacted in the main, and varying from
sandy to oolitic in texture, indicating a shallow water origin for a
large part of it. Nearly all the samples contain a small propor-
tion of quartz in the form of a fine grained angular sand. Thir-
teen samples from as many different depths were analyzed.
These are seen to be all slightly magnesian, the MgO varying
from 0.29 to 6.70 per cent. The silica (chiefly quartz) varies
from 0,03 to 5.10 per cent. All the samples contain some phos-
phoric acid, but this together with the iron and alumina
amounted at the most to only 0.40 per cent.
The Genesis of the Talc Deposits of 5t. Lawrence County,
N,Y. By C. H. Smyth, Jr. School Mines Quart., 17, 333-341. —
The crystalline limestones of St. Lawrence County are fre-
quently tremolitic, and pass into tr<emolite and enstatite schist.
The talc is clearly due to the alteration of these anhydrous sili-
cates. Its secondary origin is proved in most cases by its pseu-
domorphic character, retaining perfectly the form and structure
of the original minerals, and showing every gradation in the
process of alteration. The so-called veins of talc are, therefore,
simply altered beds of tremolite and enstatite schist. The chem-
istry of the conversion of enstatite and tremolite into talc is ex-
pressed by the following equations :
Geological and Mineralogical Chemistry. 69
4MgSiO.(enstatite) + H.O + CO, = H,Mg.SiA.(talc), +
MgCO. ;
CaMg,Si,0„, (tremolite) + H.O +C0, = H,Mg.Si,0„(talc)
+ CaCO..
The substitution of hydrogen for calcium in the latter reaction
is quite in harmony with the generally accepted view that talc
is an acid metasilicate, Mg,H,(SiO,),. The essential agents of
alteration are evidently provided by circulating water holding
CO, in solution, and many occurrences of talc pseudomorphs
show that the change may occur under ordinary conditions of
pressure and temperature. Considering its origin, the compo-
sition of the talc is surprisingly close to that demanded by
theory, as is shown by the analyses which are given.
Notes on the Ecloite of the Bavarian Flchtelgebirge. By
David Halb Newland. Trans. N, Y. Acad. Set., 16, 24-29.
— This fragmentary petrographic sketch is accompanied by
analyses of the rock and of certain of its component minerals.
The discussion is brief and develops no points of general
interest.
The Qeology of Point Sal. By Haroi^d W. Fairbanks.
Bull. Dept. GeoL Univ. Cal.j 2, 1-9 1. — This is a detailed
study of a limited area of Cretaceous and Tertiary strata with
associated volcanic rocks in the north-western part of Santa
Barbara County, California. The petrographic descriptions are
freely supplemented by chemical analyses of the various rocks,
both sedimentary and igneous. The bituminous shales of the
Miocene series embrace a white porcelain-like variety which
gave: SiO„ 86.92; A1,0„ 4.27 ; CaO, 1.60; K,0 + Na,0, 2.48;
loss on ignition, 5.13; total, 100.40. This agrees closely with an
analysis by Lawson and Posada of the bituminous shale at Mon-
terey. Two analyses of flint are also quoted for comparison.
The author rejects the view that this rock is an acid soda rhyo-
lite, and regards it as essentially of organic origin, a consolidated
tripolite. The volcanic ash interstratified with the Miocene
strata is proved by analysis to be an acid rhyolite, containing
74.841 per cent, of SiO,. Augite-teschenite, previously described
by the author as analcite dialase, forms large dikes in the g3rp.
siferous Miocene strata. This rock is of especial interest on ac-
count of the abundant occurrence of analcite in it. The author
is confident that the analcite is. secondary after some soda-
rich original silicate, like nepheline. Analyses are given for
the rock as a whole and for its chief constituents — augite, feld-
70 Review of American Chemical Research,
spar, and analcite. From the analyses the proportions of the
component minerals are computed and found to agree very
closely with the results of a mechanical separation by means of
a heavy solution and magnet. An elaborate discussion of the
composition and a comparison with European teschenites bring
the author to the conclusion already stated that the analcite was
derived from nepheline, although not a recognizable trace of
nepheline now remains. Analyses are also given of gabbro,
andesite, and spheroidal basalt. The paper concludes with a
discussion of magmatic variation, the author's view being that
the rocks in question have come up from a deep basic zone in
the earth's crust — ^a wide-spread body of basic magma of nearly
homogeneous composition. This primitive basic magma has
experienced both primary and secondary differentiation in the
chimneys subsequent to its eruption, through a variety of
causes, Rosenbusch's theory of segregation in obedience to
chemical affinity being regarded as the most generally applica-
ble.
Notes on the Occurrence of a Rich Silver and Gold Mineral
Containing Tellurium, In the Griffith Lode, near Georgetown,
Clear Creek County, Colorado. By Richard Pearce. Proc,
Col. Sci, Soc.y Oct. 5, 1896. — The mineral occurs only in small
quantities, associated with pyrite, galenite and chalcopyrite, in
a feldspathic matrix containing small quantities of magnesite.
The color is dark gray with a bright metallic luster ; hardness
about 3. An analysis by F. C. Knight of approximately pure
material gave : Ag, 50.65 ; Te, 18.80 ; Pb, 9.34 ; Cu, 4.65; Fe,
4.00; Bi, 1. 16; S, 8.06; MgCO,, 1.95; alloy of Au and Ag,
0.48; insoluble residue, 1.07; total, 100.16. The author refers
the gold wholly to the alloy, which he found to be 725 fine, and
regards the mineral as an intimate mixture made up as follows :
Hessite, 51.22; argentite, 20.93; Cu.S, 5.82; FeS. 6.28; PbS,
10.78 ; Bi,S,, 1.45 ; Au and Ag alloy, 0.48 ; MgCO,, 1.95 ; in-
soluble residue, 1.07 ; total, 99.95. The Cu,S and FeS are sup-
posed to be combined as chalcopyrite ; and it is noted that the
relation between the hessite and argentite corresponds closely
to the formula 2Ag,Te + Ag,S.
Notes on the Occurrence of Tellurium in an Oxidized Form In
riontana. By Richard Pearce. Proc, Col, Sci, Soc.y Novem-
ber 2, 1896. — No complete analyses are given ; but the author
concludes that below the zone of oxidation sylvanite occurs with
rich silver minerals.
Sepiolite. By E. Hei^mhacker. Eng, Min,/,, 62, 80-82.
This paper discusses the mode of occurrence of sepiolite in Asia
Minor and other regions, its derivation from serpentine, and the
varieties based upon differences of composition.
Geological and Mineralogical Chemistry. 71
Wolfram Ore. By E. Hei^mhacker. Eng. Min. /., 62,
I53~i54- — The author describes the occurrence of the mineral
wolfram with the tin ores of the Erzgebirge and other districts,
discusses its influence in the manufacture of steel, gives analy-
ses of the three grades obtained by concentration, and discusses
the method of analysis.
The Geology of the Fox Islands, Maine. By George Otis
Smith. Dissertation at Johns Hopkins Univ.^ 1-76. — This
thorough and every way admirable petrologic study embodies
original analyses of several of the igneous rocks, including an
andesite and an aporhyolite.
General Geology of the Cripple Creek District, Colorado.
By Whitman Cross. Anji. Rep, U, 5. GeoL Survey ^ 16, {part
2)y 13-109. — The rocks of the Cripple Creek District include the
pre-Cambrian granites, gneisses and schists, and the tertiary
volcanics. The most characteristic product of the Cripple Creek
volcano is the phonolite. This is chiefly composed of alkali
feldspar and nepheline, with sodalite and nosean, and a pyroxene
rich in alkali and iron. Four closely accordant analyses by Dr.
Hillebrand are given, and three others are quoted for compar-
ison. The proportions of SO, and CI prove sodalite to be more
abundant than nosean ; the aegirine augite varies with the pro-
portion of lime ; zircon crystals are exceedingly rare, and the
zirconia disclosed by the analysis is attributed to the rare min-
eral levenite. From 25 to 40 per cent, of the rock is soluble in
HCl, indicating a large amount of nepheline. A trachytic
phonolite is next described, with a single analysis, which shows
that it differs chiefly from the typical phonolites in the increased
percentage of lime. The solubility test indicates a much smaller
proportion of nepheline. A nepheline syenite occurring at one
point is regarded as a granular representative of the phonolites.
The analysis shows that although more basic it is very closely
related to the phonolite magmas. The other volcanic rocks
described are augite-syenite-porphyry, andesite, plagioclase-
basalt and nepheline-basalt, tuff and breccia and rhyolite.
These lithologic descriptions are introductory to a detailed
structural study of the Cripple Creek volcano, chiefly as exposed
in the numerous mines.
nining Geology of the Cripple Creek District, Colorado.
By R. a. F. Penrose, Jr. An?t, Rep. U. S. Geol. Survey^ 16,
{part 2), 111-209. — No part of the work of the United States
Geological Survey deserves higher commendation than its splen-
did series of timely monographs on the economic geology of the
country. The unique character of the Cripple Creek district
makes the present contribution especially noteworthy and valu-
72 Review of American Chemical Research,
able. The brief introductory and historical sections are fol-
lowed by a chapter on the ores. The gold occurs chiefly in
combination with tellurium ; but near the surface the tellurium
occurs chiefly in oxidized forms, and the gold is mainly free.
That this free gold has come chiefly from the oxidation of the
telluride is proved by the angular shape of the pieces of gold,
their pseudomorphic striation, their porosity and the presence
of oxidized tellurium materials in the rusty coating of the gold.
Hillebrand has proved the gold telluride to be calaverite, the
proportion of silver being much too low for sylvanite. Aurifer-
ous pyrite also occurs, but is not deemed an important source
of gold. Among the oxidation products of the pyritic ores is a
mineral which Hillebrand has shown to be a hydrated ferric sil-
icate related to chloropal. The analysis gave: SiO„ 41,80;
Fe,0„ 37.0; H,0, 19.90; CaO, i.io; total, 100.00. The widely
distributed manganese oxide is supposed to be derived chiefly
from the carbonate or silicate. In a few mines silver occurs in
notable amounts, as shown by several analyses and assays ; but
these do not indicate clearly its mineralogical relations. Lead
occurs only very sparingly, as galena or its oxidation products.
Zinc also occurs sparingly as the sulphide, sphalerite, and a sin-
gle analysis is given. Copper is one of the rarest metals in the
district ; but one occurrence of tetrahedrite containing 11. 19 per
cent, of silver is noted. Among the gangue minerals a purple
fluorite is most characteristic. Besides quartz, there are hydrous
forms of silica, including hyalite. The so-called jasper is proved
by analysis to be a highly ferruginous opal. Along the line of
the veins, especially, the feldspathic constituents of the rocks
are extensively kaolinized, and three analyses are given to show
that the composition of the kaolin is essentially the same whether
derived from the granite, phonolite, or andesite. Calcite and
gypsum are rather rare secondary minerals. The next chapters
are devoted to the mode of occurrence of the ores, and the source
and mode of deposition of the ores. The ores have been derived
from the country rocks, both granitic and volcanic, at a consid-
erable depth, and have been deposited largely through fumarole
action, in fissures or fissured zones, with extensive replacement
of the rocks.
Economic Geology of the Mercur Mining District, Utah.
By J. Edward Spurr. Ann, Rep. U. S. GeoL Survey, x6, (part
^)y 343"455- — This latest of the economic monographs of the
Survey describes the most recently developed of all the great
mining camps of the West. Like Cripple Creek, this is now
distinctively a gold-mining camp, and one of a suflBiciently
unique character, for the gold ores remained undiscovered for
many years within 100 feet of the now long abandoned silver mines.
Geological and Minerahgical Chemistfy. 73
There are two ore-bearing horizons about 100 feet apart near
the middle of a great series of limestone strata , each occurring
as an impregnation or replacement of limestone along the lower
contact of an intrusive sheet of porphyry. The principal vein
materials of the lower or Silver Ledge are silica, barium, anti-
mony, copper, and silver; and of the upper or Gold Ledge, are
realgar, cinnabar, pyrite, and gold. Very careful assays of the
unaltered limestones, shales and porphyries show that the pre-
cious metals are very generally present in appreciable amounts ;
but the Silver Ledge contains only a trace of gold and the Gold
Ledge practically no silver. The silver ores are especially dis-
tinguished by the fact that they do not contain a trace of lead.
Complete analyses by Dr. Hillebrand, embracing over twenty
determinations in each case, are given for the silver ore and for
both the unoxidized and oxidized gold ores. The chapters on
the origin of the ores are replete with interest for the student of
chemical geology. The silver ores are regarded as aqueous de-
posits, but not as the product of a general aqueous circulation.
The water which was intimately combined with the porphyry at
the time of its eruption and was perhaps the motive cause of the
eruption was separated from the lava at the moment of cooling
and found its way into the adjoining rock. Being still intensely
heated, and carrying in solution many of the chief elements of
the eruptive mass, it exerted for a brief period a powerful alter-
ing force on the easily soluble limestone, and in the course of
this alteration the ores were deposited. The mineralization of
the Gold Ledge took place at a distinctly later period than that
of the Silver Ledge, and the general nature of the phenomena
indicates that the agents were gaseous rather than liquid ; that
they ascended along the open vertical fissures, probably from
some uncooled body of igneous rock below, and impregnated the
zone at the lower contact of the porphyry sheet, which was
already altered and porous from the effects of the earlier Silver
Ledge mineralization, with arsenic, mercury, and gold. The
fact that the chief associated minerals of the gold are realgar
and cinnabar, and that the gold itself was probably first depos-
ited as the telluride, is regarded as a striking confirmation of
this view.
On the Occurrence of Vanadium in Scandinavian Rutile.
By B. Hasselberg. Astro-Phys, /., 5, 194-198. — The pres-
ence of vanadium was unexpectedly discovered in samples of the
mineral rutile, from both Norway and Sweden, from a careful
study of the spectrum obtained by the volatilization of the above
mineral in the arc. Whether the amount present is sufficient
for analytical determination remains an open question.
QENERAL AND PHYSICAL CHEniSTRY.
A. A. NOYBS, Revibwbr.
A Revision of the Atomic Weisrht of flagnesium. By Theo-
dore Wii^WAM Richards and Harry George Parker.
Proc. Am, Acad. Arts and Set,, 32, 55-73. — Three samples of
magnesium ammonium chloride were prepared by somewhat
different processes, great care being used to remove all im-
purity. Portions of this salt were then gradually heated
to redness in a platinum boat in a combustion tube in a current
of dry hydrochloric acid, and the residual magnesium chloride
was allowed to cool either in that gas or in dry nitrogen, which
was then displaced by dry air. The apparatus was so arranged
that the platinum boat could be pushed into a weighing tube
and the glass stopper of the latter inserted within the combus-
tion tube without exposing the salt to the air. The salt, after
weighing, was dissolved in water. In one series of experiments
an excess of silver nitrate was added, and the precipitated sil-
ver chloride was collected and weighed. In three other more
reliable series the ratio, MgCl, : 2Ag, was determined by adding
to the salt a nearly equivalent weighed amount of pure silver
dissolved in nitric acid and estimating the slight excess of silver
or chlorine in the liquid after allowing the precipitate to settle
by comparative measurements of the degree of opalescence pro-
duced by adding to separate portions of it minute quantities of
silver nitrate and ammonium chloride. The first three series of
experiments consisting respectively of five, three, and five de-
terminations gave 24.369, 24.380, and 24.365 as the atomic
weight referred to oxygen as 16. The fourth series, consisting
of six determinations, was made with even greater precautions
than the preceding ones, two distinct samples of magnesium
chloride and three of silver being employed. The results ob-
tained are 24.360, 24.364, 24.362, 24.362, 24.363, and 24.363.
giving as a mean 24.362, which the authors adopt as the final
value of the atomic weight. This brief summary of the results
is a sufficient comment on the wonderful accuracy of the work.
The Velocity of the Reaction lietween Ferrous Chloride,
Potassium Chlorate, and Hydrochloric Acid. By A. A. Noyes
and R. S. Wason. /. Am. Chem, Soc, 19, 199-210. — The
authors present nine series of measurements which show that the
reaction is one of the third order ^ its velocity being directly pro-
portional to the concentration of each of the three substances ;
also six series on the effect of varying the temperature between
0° and 50°. It is shown that the latter effect can be expressed
by the thermodynamical logarithmic equation of van*t Hoff,
whose applicability to several other reactions has already been
i
General and Physical Chemistry. 75
demonstrated by Arrhenius. The effect is one of the same or-
der of magnitude as that in the case of other actions already in-
vestigated.
A Recalculation of the Atomic Weights. By Prank W^g-
Gi«KSWORTH Ci«ARKK. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections^
1075, 1-370. — This valuable publication is a presentation and
critical discussion of all the existing data relating to the com-
bining weights of the elements.
Mercuric Chloride. By D. McIntosh. /. Phys. Chem., 1,
298-300. — In explanation of the observation of Etard that the
solubility of mercuric chloride in methyl alcohol is represented by
two distinct curves intersecting at about 38**, the author has in-
vestigated the nature of the salt separating from the solution
above 40° and below 35**. Above the former temperature small
compact crystals consisting of the pure salt separate ; while
below 35** needle-like crystals form, which are shown, by analy-
sis and by determining whether heat is produced or absorbed by
the successive addition of varying quantities of alcohol to the salt,
to have the composition HgCl,.CH,OH. The transition tem-
peratures in pure methyl alcohol and in mixtures of it with
water were determined by observing with the eye the point at
which the needle-like crystals first make their appearance, and
by noting the point during the cooling of the solution at which
the thermometer reading remains constant for an appreciable
interval of time. The results are tabulated.
riass Law Studies, I. By S. F. Taylor. /. Phys. Chem.,
I, 301-303. — The author has determined at 20°, 25**, and 35* the
quantities of water which can be added to various mixtures of
alcohol and benzene, and the quantities of benzene which can be
added to mixtures of alcohol and water, before separation into
two layers takes place. The results differ widely from those
previously obtained by Bancroft at 20**. The publication of two
such discordant series of results from the same laboratory with-
out any attempt to explain the discrepancy seems to the re-
viewer unjustifiable.
Quintuple Points. By Wii^der D. Bancroft. /. Phys.
Chem., I, 337-343.
5olids and Vapors, II. By Wii^der D. Bancroft. /. Phys.
Chem., I, 344-348. — Compare this Rev., 2, 36.
Distillation with Vapor. By C. H. Benedikt. /. Phys.
Chem.y I, 397-402. — ^The author cites numerous previous obser-
vations showing that non-volatile substances are present in
vapors in much larger amounts than would correspond to their
76 Review of American Chemical Research.
vapor pressures, and he describes an experiment of his own in
which he distilled a saturated solution of naphthalene in ether
in contact with solid naphthalene, analyzed the distillate, and
found it to contain a proportion of naphthalene corresponding to
a partial vapor pressure of 37 mm., which is more than four
times greater than the vapor pressure of pure naphthalene. The
author suggests that this may be due to an increase in the vapor
pressure of the dissolved substance by the solvent or to a solu-
bility of it in the vapor. The result of the author's experi-
ment seemed so improbable, considering its discordance with the
established laws of the vapor pressure of solutions, that the re-
viewer was led to repeat it ; and he was not surprised to find
that the distillate passing over between 62** and 82® (the ther-
mometer-bulb being in the liquid) from a concentrated solution
of naphthalene in ether left on evaporation at the ordinary tem-
perature about o. I per cent, of the former substance instead of
8.8 per cent, as found by the author.
Two Liquid Phases, 1. By Wii^der D. Bancroft. /. Phys.
Chem.y I, 414-425.
A Triangular Diagram. By Wii^der D. Bancroft. /.
Phys. Chem.y i, 403-410. — ^The author discusses the plan pro-
posed by Roozeboom for representing, by means of an equilat-
eral triangle the variations in composition of a phase consisting of
three components.
Cuprous Clilorid. By J. K. Haywood. J. Phys. Chem., i,
411-413. — I^scoeur has previously shown that cuprous chloride
is partially decomposed by water into cuprous oxide and hydro-
chloric acid, and that successive portions of wash water contain
equal quantities of hydrochloric acid until the chloride is com-
pletely converted into the oxide, a result in complete accord
with the laws of equilibrium. The author has repeated the ex-
periments ; and he concludes from his own results that those of
Lescoeur were purely accidental and due to the fact that the
conditions under which the successive treatments of the chlo-
ride with water were made were so nearly identical. It is diflS-
cult to see how this could have been the case ; for Lescoeur
continued the washing until the chloride was entirely decom-
posed, so that the amount of it in contact with the water must
have steadily diminished.
A Contribution to the Study of Water Solutions of Some of
the Alums. By Harry C. Jonbs and E. Mackay. Am.
Chem.J., 19, 83-118. — The article begins with a brief summary
of the previous work relating to the composition of double salts
in solution. The authors next describe, as preliminaries to their
General and Physical Chemistry, 77
investigations, a convenient apparatus for the preparation of
pure water for conductivity measurements, and a volumetric
method of determining aluminum. To prepare the pure water
ordinary distilled water, to which potassium permanganate and
sulphuric acid are added, is distilled from a large flask into a
tubulated retort turned upwards containing an alkaline perman-
ganate solution which is itself kept boiling, so that a continuous
distillation occurs ; joints are made with asbestos paper and a
tin tube serves as a condenser. The authors determined the
molecular conductivity of potassium, aluminum, and chromium
sulphates and of six of the aluminum, chromium, and iron alums,
at dilutions varying from 3 to 4000 liters. It was found that in
dilute solutions the alums have a conductivity which is almost
exactly the mean of the conductivities of their constituents ;
but that in more concentrated solutions (0.2 — 0.025 molecular
weight per liter) the conductivity is somewhat less (9.2 per
cent, in one case) than the mean. The authors have also deter-
mined the freezing-points of the solutions of the same salts, and
find that the lowerings caused by the alums are in the more con-
centrated solutions 10- 1 1 per cent, less than the sum of those of
their constituents. The authors consider the differences both
of conductivity and freezing-point to be greater than can reas-
onably be accounted for by the change in electrolytic dissocia-
tion of the salts on mixing, and conclude therefore that undis-
sociated alum molecules probably exist to some extent in the
more concentrated solutions, but that they are completely broken
up in the more dilute solutions. Incidentally the authors have
found that the very dilute solutions of the alums increase in
electrical conductivity with time, a phenomenon already observed
and discussed by Goodwin {this Rev., 3, 22) in the case of ferric
chloride.
H. M. Goodwin, Rbvibwbr.
The riultlple Spectra of Oases. By John Trowbridge and
Theodore Wii^uam Richards. Am, J. Sci., 153, 11 7-1 10. —
The interesting investigations of the authors on the dual spec-
tra of argon under the influence of a continuous and oscillatory
discharge are extended in this paper to nitrogen, hydrogen, the
halogens, and helium. The method employed is that previously
described {this Rev., 3, 22). A continuous discharge in nitro-
gen caused the gas to glow with a delicate pink light, and gave
rise to a channelled spectrum. Introduction of a gap across which
a brush discharge took place caused the glow in the capillary
to become more blue, and the red lines in the spectrum to dis-
appear. Introduction of a condenser, whereby the unidirectional
was changed to an oscillatory discharge, caused a complete
change in the appearance of the discharge ; the glow became
78 Review of American Chemical Research,
bluish green, and the spectrum changed to the well-known bright-
line spectrum of nitrogen. By gradually damping the oscilla-
tions by the introduction of a resistance or inductance in the cir-
cuit, the first spectrum gradually reappeared. The same was
true of hydrogen ; the usual four line spectrum is produced only
by an oscillatory discharge ; a continuous discharge causes the
red glow in the capillary to change to white, and the spectrum
to change to one composed of very many fine lines among which
are the four characteristic hydrogen lines, by no means especially
prominent however. The halogens likewise give two spectra
according to the nature of the discharge producing them. With
helium the difference of the two spectra is less marked. The
bearing of the results on astro-physical problems is pointed out.
The work is being extended to other gases under varying con-
ditions of temperature and pressure.
The Temperature and Ohmic Re5istanceof Oases During the
Oscillatory Electric Discharge. By John Trowbridge and
Theodore William Richards. Am. J. Sci., 153, 327-342. —
The resistance which a rarified gas offers to the passage of an
oscillatory discharge is very much less than that which it offers
to a unidirectional one. The authors have determined the re-
sistance of a Pliicker's tube to an oscillatory discharge in the
following way. Many hundred photographs of the oscillatory
sparks of condensers of different capacities discharged through
variable known resistances were taken as viewed in a very rap-
idly revolving mirror. A curve was then constructed with
resistances as abscissae and the corresponding number of half
oscillations determined from the photographs as ordinates.
Pliicker tubes were then substituted for the known resistances,
and the spark again photographed. From the number of oscil-
lations thus determined, the corresponding resistance of the tube
was interpolated from the plot. The results of a large number
of experiments with nitrogen and hydrogen are summarized as
follows : I . The resistance of a gas at low pressure to the oscilla-
tory discharge is ver>' small (5 to 10 ohms). 2. The resistance
is in general greater, the less the quantity of electricity. 3.
Down to a very small pressure this resistance decreases with the
tension of the gas. 4. The form of the tube has an important
effect on the resistance of the gas. 5. With the oscillatory dis-
charge it is evident that the electrodes produce far less effect
than with the continuous discharge. — The authors then discuss
the cause of the different types of spectra produced by direct and
oscillatory currents, favoring the view that the continuous dis-
charge is the result of a * 'polarized condition in which the molecules
are in some way bound together by the electric energy striving
to force itself through them,** while the oscillatory discharge is
General and Physical Chemislry, 79
accompanied by dissociation of the molecules. For the produc-
tion of such dissociation an enormously high temperature is
required, which, however, is entirely outside the bounds of
measurement, owing to the brief period of the discharge. Bolo-
metric measurements in a vacuum tube gave no indication of
what this may be, as in such measurements only the mean tem-
perature of the gas in the neighborhood of the bolometer is
measured. The reviewer would raise the question whether the
color and spectrum of a discharge may not be the result of a trans-
formation of electrical energy into radiant energy, either directly
or perhaps intermediately through chemical energy, rather than
of a very high temperature arising from the transformation of the
energy of the discharge into heat, especially in view of Prings-
heim's experiments on heated gases and vapors, which go to
show that gases cannot be brought to incandescence by heat
alone.
Does a Vacuum Conduct Electricity ? By John Trow-
bridge. Am, J, Set,, 153, 343. — This question, which was
answered affirmatively by Edlund, and more recently negatively
t>y J- J- Thomson, is again considered in the light of the
author's recent experiments on vacuum discharges. The prin-
cipal resistance encountered in a high vacuum discharge
resides at the boundary of the electrodes and the medium.
When once this resistance is overcome and a discharge passes
through the tube, the resistance of the tube to subsequent
oscillations is equivalent to only a few ohms. The author con-
cludes that the resistance of the Crookes' tube to a disruptive dis-
charge diminishes as a perfect vacuum is approached. It should
be remembered, however, that the actual resistance offered by a
so-called ** absolute vacuum** to the initial discharge increases
almost indefinitely with the vacuum, and that only after a dis-
charge has once passed and broken down the medium, thus
presumably modifying in some way the residual gas in the
tube, is the resistance reduced for succeeding discharges to the
low value measured by Prof. Trowbridge.
Tiie Influence of a Static Charge of Electricity upon the Sur^
face Tension of Water. By E. L. Nichols andT. A. Clark.
Phys, Rev,, 4, 375-388.— -The surface tension of water was de-
termined under different states of electrification by the method
of drops. The potential to which the water was raised was
measured by means of a mpdified form of Henley electrometer ;
and the temperature of the drops as they fell from the dropper
measured by means of a thermo-element. It was found that the
surface tension diminished — at first slowly, but above 6000 volts
rapidly — with increasing voltage. This result was found to be
independent of the sign of the charge; and preliminary experi-
8o Review of American Chemical Research,
ments indicate that the same relations hold true for other liquids
than water.
The Lead Cell. By B. E. Moork. Phys, Rev., 4, 353-374.—
The theory of accumulators as given by Le Blanc in his Lehr-
bttch der Electrochemie is accepted by the author and reproduced
in some detail. A number of experiments on the electromotive
force of accumulators during charge and discharge were made
at noted intervals of time, particularly immediately after the
closing of the circuit, the results being represented graphically.
A very rapid change of the electromotive force was noticed dur-
ing the first few seconds of each run, which is probably due to
changes in concentration at the electrodes. The currents used
ranged from 10 to 20 amperes, but the current density is not stated.
For further discussion of the results, which the author con-
siders to be in agreement with the theory, the reader is re-
ferred to the original article. The reviewer would remark that
in the valuable paper by Tower on Peroxide Electrodes
(Ztschr, Phys, Chem,, 18, 17), which has evidently been
overlooked by the author, we have the most satisfactory theory
yet offered of the positive (peroxide) electrode of the cell while
the negative electrode consisting of Pb and PbSO^ in H,SO^
is simply a reversible electrode of the second kind, the theory
of which is also well established (Goodwin, Ztschr^ Phys, Chem,,
13, 621).
Empirical Formulae for Viscosity as a Function of Tempera-
ture. By a. Wii^mer Duff. Phys, Rev,, 4, 404-410. — To ob-
tain a formula expressing the dependence of viscosity on tem-
perature for wide ranges of temperature the author integrates
the equation: — 7— = a -+- bt + ct* (the equation of the * 'sub-
sidiary curve of subtangents'')i and obtains the following
formulae containing four constants * 7= c( j^ ^j and 7 =
c a-t*na(t+5). These formulas are tested with the data of
Thorpe and Rodger and those of others. That the agreement
should be better than can be obtained with a three-constant for-
mula is self-evident.
Sulfur and Toluene. By J. K. Haywood. /. Phys, Chem,,
I, 232-233. — The boiling-points of toluene and of xylene were
found to be raised about 2 and 4**, respectively, by the addition
of an excess of sulphur.
An Examination of the Abegg Method of Measuring Freer-
ing-Point Depressions. By E. H. Loomis. /. Phys, Chem,, i,
221-232. — The examination consists for the most part of a com-
General and Physical Chemistry. 8i
parison of the author's method and results with those recently
published by Abegg. Abegg's method is regarded as en-
tirely free from objections in principle and ''marks a positive
advance in freezing-point methods :" but that it may be used to
better advantage, the author emphasizes the necessity of ma-
king a larger number of independent determinations of each solu-
tion than Abegg has done in order to eliminate the indeterminate
errors which a consideration of his results shows to be present.
It is pointed out that the apparent constancy of Abegg's freez-
ing temperatures as indicated by the constancy of his thermome-
ter within G.oooi* for hours at a time, is undoubtedly due to the
*' inertia" of the mercury thread in the thermometer, and not to
an actual constancy of temperature to this amount ; for from the
experience of the author the most sensitive thermometers do not
respond to temperature changes of several ten-thousandths of a
degree, when once the thread has become stationary.
Osmotic Pressure and Variance. By J. K. Trbvor. /.
Phys, Chem., i, 349-366. — In this paper Gibbs* Phase rule ex-
pressed in the form v = n + 2 — r, where n is the number of in-
dependent substances present, r the number of phases, and
hence v the degree of freedom or ** variance" (according to the
terminology of the author) of the system, is extended to sys-
tems containing any number of semi-permeable walls, or in other
words, any number of phases in which the osmotic pressure
varies from phase to phase. The general criterion is arrived at
by the specific consideration of a number of simple and rather
complicated systems, and may be formulated as follows : v=n4-
2H-xH-y — r , where v, n and r have the same significance as
above, x is the number of additional pressures due to the intro-
duction of X osmotic walls, and y the number of separations of
a component by a wall impermeable to it. For example in the
system : solution, vapor, solvent, we have two independent
chemical substances n, three phases r, one wall x, and no '*sepa-
ration," as the dissolved substance is present on but one side of
the wall ; hence the system has two degrees of freedom, or is
divariant, since v=2-|-2+i+o — 3=2. Again, in the system :
solution, solid salt, vapor, solution ; we have n=2, r=4, x=i,
and y=i, since the wall is impermeable to salt and it is present
on both sides. This system is therefore divariant, since v= 2+
2-|-i+i — ^4=2.
A New Formula for tlie Wave-Lengths of Spectral Lines.
By J. J. Balmkr. Asiro-Phys, /., 5, 199-209. — ^The author
proposes the formula: A. = a^i^^^-, or r.=A- .-^^
^ ^ (n + c)* — b (n+c)'
for representing the line series of different spectra where a, b, c.
82 Review of American Chemical Research,
A, B are constants, A.„ the wave length, and r„ its reciprocal.
The claims made for the new formula are its simplicity and the
fact that it is a closed function and not an abridged series (Kay*
serand Runge) , and therefore that it more probably (?) represents
the natural law underlying spectral phenomena. The formula
is tested on the helium lines. The proposed formula is nearly
identical with that proposed by Rydberg several years ago, as
noted in an appendix.
Inner Thermodynamic Equilibria. By J. £. Trevor. /.
Phys. Chem,y i, 206-221. — The author discusses at some length
the interpretation to be given to the several terms in the inte-
gral expression: £'= \,rf — pv'4" ^/<ni' for the energy of a phase
and to the terras resulting from its complete differential ; d« =
\Arf — pdv + 2/^m -(- ^dt — vdp + ^md/i. While the first
three terms of this equation refer to external energy changes
involved by a change in the system, the last three refer to internal
energy changes alone and for all reversible changes of state their
sum is equal to zero. The article presents in a clear manner the
relation to one another of the various forms of thermodynamic
potential functions used by different writers. The views set
forth are stated to be substantially the same as those published
by Iv. Natanson in 1891 ( Wied, Ann,, 42, 178).
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.
UWIMATE ANAI.YSIS.
H. P. Talbot, Rbvibwbr.
The Mechanical Analysis of Basic Phosphatic Slags. Bv H.
W. Wiley. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 19, 19-22. — The paper opens
with a short sketch of the earlier literature relating to basic
slags and the methods of their valuation. To bring about a
mechanical analysis of the slags, the author proposes to agitate
them vigorously with ninety per cent, alcohol. The particles
remaining suspended for five minutes are separated, then those
after a further interval of two and a half minutes, and the resi-
due is sifted, using sieves with meshes one-tenth and one-quarter
of a millimeter. The first two ''separates" contain both the
highest total and the highest available phosphoric acid. The
data suggest that a partial separation, might advantageously
be made by the manufacturers of basic slags, for the purpose of
obtaining a more concentrated fertilizing material.
Improvements in the Colorimetric Tests lor Copper. By
George ly. Heath. /. Am. Chem. Sac, 19, 24-31. — Standard
ammoniacal copper solutions which are permanent for long
AnaiyHcal Chemistry. 83
periods, may be prepared by replacing nitric acid by sulphuric
acid after the solution of the pure copper in the former, provided
a considerable excess of ammonia is added and the solution pre-
served in bottles with stoppers sufficiently tight to prevent any
escape of ammonia. In the analysis of lean material for cop-
per, a double precipitation of the iron and alumina by ammonia
is found to yield better results, and in less time than either the
precipitation by aluminum, or a single precipitation by ammo-
nia.
Some Present Possibilities in the Analysis of Iron and Steel.
By C. B. Dudi^ey. /. Am, Chem, Soc., 19, 93-108. — The paper
gives a concise statement of the present attainments, both with
respect to rapidity and accuracy, in the determination of car-
bon, graphite, silicon, sulphur, manganese and phosphorus in
irons and steels. Valuable suggestions are also made respecting
those points wherein these methods are still unsatisfactory, and
upon which more research is desirable.
The Determination of Sulphur in Pig Iron. By A. A.
Blair. /, Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 114-115. — The author finds
four kinds of sulphur in pig iron, the fourth being of a sort un-
acted upon by aqua regia, but oxidized by a fusion of the resi-
due from the aqua regia with potassium nitrate. Bamber's
method (/. Iron Steel Inst.^ i, 319) is recommended for the
determination of sulphur in pig irons.
A Rapid Method for the Determination of Silicon in Silico-
Spiegel and Ferro-Silicon. By C. B. Murray and G. P.
Maury. /. Am. Chem. Sac, 19, 138-139. — The finely crushed
and sifted sample is dissolved in hydrochloric and sulphuric
acids, the solution evaporated until only sulphuric acid remains,
the ferric sulphate dissolved in hydrochloric acid. The silica
is removed by filtration and tested with hydrofluoric acid. The
operation may be completed in thirty minutes.
A flethod for the Complete Analysis of Iron Ores, with Notes
on Samstrom's Method of Determining Manganese. By
Georgb Auchy. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 139-153. — The author
makes suggestions as to the principles involved in the Sarn-
strom method of separating iron and manganese, and proposes
certain modifications. A procedure for an analysis of an iron
ore involving the Samstrom separation is given in detail, and
additional comments are made on the determination of phos-
phorus in steel and cast iron. Compare also/. Am. Chem. Soc.^
17, 943 ; 18, 228 ; 18, 385 ; 18, 498.
Standard Iodine for Sulphur Determinations. By Edward
K. Landis. J. Am. Chem,. Soc.^ 19, 261. — The author work
84 Review of American Chemical Research.
out a simple stoichiometrical calculation (such as could be
made by any intelligent chemist) , to find the quantity of a
potassium permanganate solution necessary to liberate such an
amount of iodine as will react with 0.5 gram of sulphur in the
form of sulphuretted hydrogen.
W. H. Walker, Rbviewrr.
Is Alcohol a Source of Error in Volumetric Analysis ? By
Lyman F. Kebi.br. Am. J. Pharm., 68, 667-675. — The
answer to this question is of considerable importance when the
value of alkaloids and alkaloidal residues is to be determined
volumetrically . The ' * commercial alcohol ' * used by the author
in this investigation was colorless, free from residue and foreign
odor and of specific gravity 0.8179 at 15**. Solutions of Brazil
wood, cochineal, haematoxylin, iodo-eosin, fluorescein, lacmoid,
litmus, methyl orange, tropaeolin OO, phenolphthalein and
rosolic acid were prepared in the usual manner, and five drops
were taken as indicator for each titration. A tenth-normal sul-
phuric acid and a fiftieth normal potassium hydroxide solution
were then prepared, using haematoxylin as incUcator, and after
establishing the end-reaction with the other indicators, a set of
experiments was carried out to determine the volume of the
alkali solution required to neutralize a given volume of the acid
solution when mixed with 50 cc. of water with diluted commer-
cial alcohol, and with 94.5 per cent, commercial alcohol. The
tabulated results conclusively show that with all the above in-
dicators the commercial alcohol exerts a disturbing influence.
This alcohol was then purified by fractionation, after treating suc-
cessively with potassium hydroxide, tartaric acid, and silver
nitrate; and its influence was investigated. The results show
that in the experiments made with the commercial alcohol
the disturbing action was due to some impurity ; for the data
obtained with the pure alcohol vary so little from those obtained
from pure water, that, except with the indicators tropaeolin
and methyl orange, the difference may be attributed to experi-
mental errors. In the case of tropaeolin and methyl orange
the stronger alcoholic solutions so interiere with the delicacy
of the end-reaction as to render the results unreliable. lodo-
eosin and fluorescein also appear to be affected, but their
end-reactions are so indistinct at best that little importance is
attached to these variations. With the exception of the four indi-
cators last named, the author thinks it safe to conclude that pure
alcohol does not vitiate the accuracy of the volumetric determi-
nations, but that commercial alcohol must be rigidly excluded.
Analytical Chemistry, 85
The Determination of Copper and Nickel in Smelter Matte.
By Titus Ulke. Eng. Min /., 63, 164. — The sample is dis-
solved in a mixture of sulphuric and hydrochloric acids with the
subsequent addition ol a little nitric acid, and, after one evapo-
ration to dryness, is redissolved in water and the copper deter-
mined by electrolysis with a current of one-fourth of an ampere.
For the determination of nickel, the iron is separated by re-
peated precipitations with ammonia, and the nickel thrown out
of the strongly ammoniacal solution at a temperature of 70^, by
a current of two amperes.
Blast Furnace Cinders and Their Analysis. By J. M. Camp.
PracEng. Soc. Western Pa., 13, 18. — This paper, though very
comprehensive, does not claim to contain anything that has not
already appeared in chemical literature.
A Rapid and Practical iletliod for Determining: Carbon in
Iron. By J. George Heid. Eng, Min, /., 63, 64. — The
sample is treated with copper ammonium chloride in the usual
manner, and the separated carbon is collected on an asbestos filter,
where it is washed successively with water, alcohol, and ether;
it is then transferred to a Rose crucible, dried at 120'', and
weighed. A stream of oxygen is led into the crucible which is
heated over a Bunsen flame, and the carbon is thus burned off in
from three to five minutes ; the difference in weight is the ** total
carbon.'* The ** graphitic carbon*' is obtained by dissolving
the iron in dilute hydrochloric acid and determining the sepa-
rated carbon as before.
PROXIMATE ANAI.YSIS.
P. H. Thorp, Revirwes..
Improvements on Dr. Squibb's Volumetric Method for Esti-
mating Acetone. By Lyman F. Kkblkr. /. Am, Ckem. Soc,
i9» 316. — The author found Squibb's method (/. Am. Chem. Soc,
18, 1068) unsatisfactory in two ways : a pure acetone must be
used, which is not readily obtainable ; and the end-reaction is
too slow. After explaining his modified process, the author
gives a table of comparative results by the methods of Messinger,
Squibb, and himself, showing that Squibb's method gives re-
sults lower than his own.
G. W. ROLFB, RBVIBWBR.
The Quantitative Determination ol Carbohydrates in Pood-
Stuffs. By W. E. Stone. / Am. Chem. Soc., 19, 183-197. —
The author gives a detailed account of his method of separation
and determination of the various carbohydrates in our common
86 Review of American Chemical Research.
cereals and their products. The separations are all made in one
sample, and the author claims an advantage of rapidity and conve-
nience over previous methods. Many of the descriptions of pro-
cesses, especially that of starch determination, are somewhat
vague. The omitted details of the discrimination between in-
vert sugar and other sugars, dextrin and ''soluble starch,"
would not have been so trite as to be devoid of interest. Much
of the subject-matter given has been previously published.
The Quantitative Determination of Carbohydrates in Food-
Stuffs, II. By W. E. Stone. /. Am. Chem, Soc, 19, 347-349.
— The author draws attention to the obvious error in the starch
estimations of his previous publications already referred to in
these pages. He still finds a noticeable weight of the grain un-
accounted for in his corrected analyses. The reviewer trusts
that he will not be misunderstood when he reiterates that a more
complete explanation of methods and more data should be given
in the description of starch analyses. In no class of analyses
does there exist more confusion, not only in methods of manipu-
lation but of calculation, than in that of starch and starch prod-
ucts. Thousands of analyses become valueless simply from lack
of published data that are absolutely necessary as a basis of
comparison and correction. In the interests of science no space
should be begrudged to this end.
Notes on an Analytical Investigation of the Hydrolysis of
Starch. By G. W. R01.FE and Geo. Defren. /. Am. Chem.
Soc, 19, 261-262. — The authors call attention to important
errors of calculation and misprints in recently published papers.
They also give a few additional deductions from the original
data.
A. H. Gill, Rbvibwbr.
A Technical Analysis of Hydrocarbons, Vapors, and Oases
in Literature and Laboratory. By W. H. Birchmore. Am.
Gas Lt. /., 66, 445-446 and 478-480. — The author reviews
briefly the various methods for gas analysis in use from 1875 to
the present time, and states that the best description of these
methods is given in Thorpe's Dictionary of Applied Chemistry.
Heat of Bromination as a Means of Identifying Fats and
Oils. By Bromwei^l and Mayer. Am.f. Phartn., 69, 145. —
The authors have applied the method of Hehner and Mitchell,
modified by Wiley, to many different oils. They use a tube
jacketed with cotton and calcined magnesia, and use the oils
and bromine in chloroform solution.
Technical Chemistry. 87
A Brief Resume of Acetic Anhydride in Oil Analysis and a
ilodification of tlie ilethod for Estimatins: ilenthol in Oil of
Peppermint. By L. F. Kbbi.er. Am, J. Pharm., 69, 189-195.
— The determination of the combined menthol is effected by sub-
mitting 10-12 grams of the oil to the Koettstorfer test. Each
cubic centimeter of normal sodium hydroxide solution is equiva-
lent to 0.156 grams of menthol in combination as an ester. For
the total menthol, 10-12 grams of oil are subjected to the usual
acetylating process, and treated as above. By deducting the
amount of menthol in the form of esters from the total quantity
found, the amount of free menthol is obtained. The process
can be easily carried out in three hours. The author states
that in the examination of oil of peppermint the following points
should be taken into consideration :
(i) Specific gravity at 15° C, which in the eight samples ex-
amined varied from 0.9065 to 0.9147 ; (2) the boiling-point,
which varied from a little below 200" C. to about 230** C. ; (3)
amount of menthol. The combined menthol varied from 3 to
16 per cent., the total from 30 to 80 per cent. These data, to-
gether with the aroma and identity tests, will show the character
of almost any sample.
TECHNICAL CHEMISTRY.
p. H. Thorp, Reviewer.
Manufacture of Albumen at Chinkiang. By A. C. Jones.
U. S. Consular Rep,, 53, 386. — This deals with the prepa-
ration of albumen from ducks' eggs. The eggs are broken and
the yolks separated from the whites. The whites are then stirred
until uniformly mixed, and then dried in shallow tin pans, at
a temperature of 40" to 50° C. The drying occupies about 70
hours. Sometimes the albumen is put into vats and allowed to
ferment, the process being hastened by the addition of some
chemical, the nature of which is not revealed. The impurities
rise in the froth, or settle to the bottom, and the clear albumen
is drawn off and dried as above. The yolks are stirred through
sieves and then mixed with salt, borax, and other chemicals.
The thick, orange-colored liquid is filled into barrels and shipped.
Its chief use is in the leather industry, for dressing. The chem-
icals used in preparing the albumen and yolk are said to be salt,
borax, acetic acid, ammonia, boracic acid, and calcium chloride,
but the quantities used and the methods of their employment are
not stated.
Asphalt and Asphalt Pavements. By Gko. W. Tillson.
Prac. Am. Sac. Civil Eng.^ 23, 179-199. — Regarding the compo-
sition of asphalt, the author quotes Peckham, Boussingault, and
88 Review of American Chemical Research,
Endemann. The geographical distribution of asphalt deposits
is also shown, followed by an account of the methods of
obtaining and refining Trinidad, California, Bermudez, Utah,
Kentucky, Indian Territory, and European asphalts; their phys-
ical properties are given, and in most cases also the chemical
composition, but no authorities are quoted for the analyses.
The greater part of the paper is devoted to the use of asphalt for
pavements, and this is treated from the engineering and not
from the chemical point. The author holds that a chemical
analysis is of no particular assistance in forming an opinion of
the suitability of an asphalt for a given pavement ; it may how-
ever be of value in determining the amount of flux to be added
for any given purpose. The refined asphalt should contain 50
to 60 per cbnt. of bitumen, which should be composed of about
75 per cent, petrolene, and 25 per cent, asphaltene.
Notes on Portland Cement Concrete. Bv Andreas I^und-
TBiGBN. Prac. Am, Soc, Civil Eng,, 23, 135. — The author dis-
cusses the advantages derived from the addition of finely pow-
dered siliceous material to Portland cement for concrete. He
quotes Michaelis to the effect that a large part of the lime in
Portland cement is set free during the hardening, and also con-
cludes from his own observations that this is true. The lime
thus set free, may take up carbon dioxide from the air and is then
rendered non-injurious, or it may be dissolved away by water,
leaving the concrete porous, or in case sea-water reaches the
concrete, the salts it contains will combine with the calcium
hydrate to form double salts, which crystallize, or swell, and
cause disintegration of the concrete. The author recommends
the addition of a siliceous material which he calls sil. It is a
volcanic ash from Nebraska, Colorado, and other places. Analy-
sis shows its percentage composition to be : Silica, 71.78 ; titanic
acid, 0.80; alumina, 12.71 ; iron oxide, 2.29; magnesia, 0.35 ;
lime, 1. 01 ; water of constitution, 4.52 ; alkalies (by difference),
6.54. Ash containing a large amount of water of constitution,
is considered best for this use. The siliceous material combines
with the free lime. Numerous tables showing the effect of such
additions are given. The ultimate strength appears to be con-
siderably increased.
European Portland Cement Industry. By Frederick H.
I^EWiS. Eng. Record, 35, 312, 334, 378, 403, 444, 466.— This
paper gives a description of several pianufacturing establish-
ments visited by the author while traveling abroad.
A. H. Gill, Rbviewbr.
Analysis of Popo Agie, Lander and Shoshone Petroleum.
By E. E. Si^osson. Univ, Wyom, Bull,, 2, 21-34. — About 60
Technical Chemisiry. 89
kilograms of the Popo Agie oil were distilled, and collected in 52
fractions, the flashing and burning points, and the specific grav-
ity of each of which were determined. Another sample was
treated similarly, except that superheated steam was intro-
duced after the kerosene had distilled off, which produced a
larger proportion of products similar to lubricating oils. The
results of the experiments seem to indicate that the commercial
products would be, in percentages, about as follows : Naphtha,
2-5 ; kerosene, 30-40 ; lubricating oil, 35-50 ; paraffin, 3-5 ;
coke, 7-10; and gas, 10-12. Lander petroleum is much lighter
than the usual Wyoming oils, while Shoshone petroleum is
very heavy, and, Uke the Popo Agie, contains sulphur.
The Presence of Hydrogen, Hydrocarbons, and Nitrogen Per-
oxide in Boiler Furnace Oases. By R. S. Hai.e. Eng. News,
37, 107. — The author points out the fact that the absence of
carbon monoxide is not a proof of the absence of free hydrogen
or hydrocarbons. He shows that oxygen has a greater attrac-
tion for carbon than hydrogen at temperatures about 600^ C.
In calculating the distribution of the oxygen entering the grate
nearly 0.8 per cent, frequently remained unaccounted for. It
was thought this might be due to the presence of oxides of nitro-
gen, and upon examination it was found that in one case 0.9
per cent, of oxides of nitrogen was actually formed.
Tlie Calorific Value of Certain Coals as Determined l>y tlie
Maiiler Calorimeter. By N. W. I<ord and F. Haas. Eng.
News, 37, 188-189. — The authors give the ultimate chemical
analysis and heating value of forty samples of Ohio and Penn-
sylvania coals. The varieties were Upper Freeport, Ohio,
Pittsburgh, Darlington, Hocking Valley, Thacker, West Va.,
Pocahontas, and Mahoning. To prevent portions of coal from
being blown away by the oxygen, it was compressed into cylin-
ders. The agreement of the calculated results by Dulong's for-
mula with the calorimetric results is remarkable, the maximum
difference being 2 per cent., and the minimum o.i per cent.
This is a trifle greater than the results of which ultimate
analysis would yield, the possible error of the latter being
for hydrogen 0.5 per cent., for carbon 0.2 per cent. This
would cause an error in substitution in the formula of i .4 per
cent. They could find no relation between the ** fixed carbon**
and the heating value, but they found that the coal from a given
seam extending over considerable areas, may be regarded as
essentially of uniform heating value.
Calorimetry. By C. D. Jenkins. Am. Gas Lt. /., 66,
442. — The article gives the results of tests made with the Junker
Gas Calorimeter on various gases, both coal and water. It
90 Review of American Chemical Research,
suggests that the proper standard for comparison is gas satu-
rated with moisture at 60** F. and 30 inches barometric pressure.
The apparatus gave with hydrogen 326.8 B.T.U., as against
328.8 obtained by Berthelot.
Calorimetry and Heat Unit Value of Oases. By P. 6.
Wheblkr. Am, Gas Lt,J,, 66, 518. — The author compares
the calorific power of various gases obtained by calculation with
those obtained by direct determination with a calorimeter. He
uses for the theoretical calculation Thomson's figures expressed
in English units (B.T. U.) as follows :
CO, 348; H, 349 ; ( C,H„ 1673 I Usually figured as **Illu-
CH^, 1065 ; C,H„ 4010; ( C,H„ 2509 ) minants*' = 20ooB.T.U.
At 32** F. and 29.92 inches. To reduce the heat units thus
found to the standard adopted in calorimetric work, viz,^ gas
saturated with moisture at 60° F. and 30 inches, multiply by
0.9298. It was found that the theoretical results agreed with
the practical within about one per cent.
Comparative Tests of Light Secured and Operating Expense
of the Welsbach Lights and Oil Lamps. By H. D. Walbridgb.
Am. Gas Lt, /., 66, 405. — It was found that the Welsbach
burner gave 84.6 candle power per hour, at a cost of 0.3 cent
for gas and o. i cent for mantles. A good oil lamp, with round
wick with central draft, gave 30 candle power and cost 0.48 cents
per hour ; while the B. & H. oil lamp gave 37.5 candle power
and cost 0.54 cent per hour. Gas was reckoned at one dollar
per 1000 cubic feet, and kerosene 12 cents per gallon.
BIOLOOICAL CHEMISTRY.
W. R. Whitney, Rbvibwbr.
The Gelatin from White Fibrous Connective Tissue. By
WiLi^ARD G. Van Name. /. Expt, Medicine, 2, 11 7-1 29. —
The aim of the author has been to obtain a pure sample of one
of the several probably distinct compounds known as gelatins,
and to determine its chemical composition and properties, so that
the exact relationship between gelatin and albumin may be
made clear. As source of the gelatin the author chose the col-
lagen of tendons from oxen. After extraction with water the
finely ground material was treated with alkaline pancreatic
juice. By this treatment tissue elements other than the colla-
gen were dissolved. This was filtered from the solution, washed
with water, and finally dissolved in boiling water. The concen-
trated gelatin solution was poured into a large volume of 95 per
cent, alcohol and the precipitated product washed with absolute
alcohol and with ether until it became brittle. It was then pul-
Biological Chemistry, 91
verized and extracted with ether to retaove fat, dissolved in
water, and again precipitated by alcohol, washed, etc., as be-
fore. The dried product was then analyzed. Samples were
also prepared from ox tendons by three ways differing somewhat
from the above. The results of the analyses of the different
samples agree very well with one another, the average composi-
tion of the ash-free gelatin being : Carbon = 50. 1 1 , hydrogen =
6.56, nitrogen = 17.81, sulphur = 0.256, oxygen = 25.24, ash
=0.325. The chemical properties of the foursamples were found
to be identical. Many of the characteristic reactions of pure
gelatin are given, including a study of its precipitability by
many acids and salts.
The Relative Strens^th of Antiseptics. By Louis Kahi^bn-
BBRG. Pharm, Rev, , 15, 68-70. — After a brief historical account
of the advance of the theories of solution, the author summa-
rizes the valuable and instructive work of himself and True
{Botanical Gazette, 22, 181), and of Heald (Botanical Gazette ^ aa,
125), upon the connection between the toxic action of aqueous
acid , basic, and salt solutions upon various plants, and the condition
of dissociation of these substances. The recently published work
of Paul and Kronig {Zeit, phys, Chem,, Dec, '96), on the action
of chemical reagents on bacteria is carefully reviewed. The
author finds in this last, a confirmation of the views pre-
viously advanced by himself and True regarding the connec-
tion between electrolytic dissociation of compounds and their
toxic or antiseptic action.
Formic Aldehyde ; its Practical Use. By P. C. Robinson.
Maine State Board of Health, gth Report, 1-24. — In 1893, a
German chemical manufactory put upon the market a 40 per
cent, aqueous solution of formic aldehyde, which they called
formalin, and for which very valuable disinfectant properties
were claimed. It seemed possible that this new germicide
might soon replace all others, both because of its powerful
germicidal effect and of the safety to the ordinary furnishings
of rooms, paintings, fabrics, etc., accompanying its use.
Mr. Robinson has given the gaseous aldehyde a practical trial
and ingeniously devised an effective form of lamp which produces
the aldehyde in the room where its use is desired. The alcohol
vapor is changed to aldehyde by glowing platinum-black
deposited upon a perforated asbestos disk, which partly covers
the vessel containing the alcohol. He states among other
important facts, that the aldehyde from two liters of alcohol, in
a room of 3000 cubic feet capacity, destroyed typhoid and diph-
theria cultures even when these ** were rolled up in a mattress
and the whole tied into as compact a bundle as possible."
Experiments with the aqueous solutions were also made, but
92 Review of American Chemical Research,
the vaporizing treatment was more successful. The article
contains two illustrations showing the construction of the lamp
above mentioned.
A Chemical Study of the Secretion of the Anal Glands of
Mephitis Jlephitica (Common Skunk), with Remarks on the
Physiological Properties of this Secretion. Bv Thomas B. Al-
DRiCH. /. Expt, Medicine, i, 323-340. — The secretion was sub-
jected to fractional distillation. The distillate of which the boil-
ing-point was loo^'-iio** contained about 35 per cent, of sulphur
and the author analyzed the mercaptides produced by addition
of lead acetate, mercuric chloride, and mercuric oxide to alco-
holic or ethereal solutions of this distillate. The results show
the probable presence of primary normal butyl mercaptan,
together with small quantities of higher mercaptans. That por-
tion of the secretion boiling above 130° contains no mercaptans.
The sulphur which it contains is thought to be combined with
some basic nitrogen radical.
The Occurrence of Raffinose in American Sugar Beets. By
W. E. Stone and W. H. Baird. /. Am, Chem, Soc,^ 19, 116-
124. — As the result of investigation of the non-crystallizing
sirups from a Nebraska beet sugar refinery, the authors con-
clude that raffinose occurs in the juices of the American sugar
beet in appreciable quantities. Photographic reproductions of
crystals of pure sucrose, raffinose, and a mixture of the two
show the marked effect of the presence of even a small propor-
tion of the latter in causing the mixture to crystallize in elon-
gated, sharp-pointed crystals, much more like those of pure raffi-
nose than sucrose.
Marrubiin and Its Dichlorine Derivative. By Harry
Matusow. Am, J, Pharm.y 69, 201-209. — The author reviews
the work already done by Harms, Kromayer, Hertel, and Mor-
rison, and then describes his own investigations. He details
carefully the isolation and purification of marrubiin and de-
scribes its properties, both physical and chemical. Results of
analyses made by him are given, which show that marrubiin is
not a glucoside, as was formerly believed. He also describes
his preparation of the dichlorine derivative of marrubiin, gives
its composition as derived by analyses, and states its physical
properties.
The Phenol-Content of the Oil of the Monarda Fistulosa (L).
By E. J. Melznkr. Pharm, Rev,, 15, 86-87. — This article,
which is a further contribution of the author's work on the
Wild Bergamot oil, contains three tables of results. These
show the percentage of phenol in a dozen samples, as determined
Biological Chemistry. 93
volumetrically and by titration with iodine solution, also the
yields of oil from given weights of stems, leaves, flowers, and
fruit of the plant, together with the specific gravities of the oils
obtained. Comparisons with results of previous years are also
given.
The Presence of Starch and Strontium Sulphate in Opium
and their influence on Assaying. By Lyman F. Kkbler and
Chari^ks H. La Wall,. Am. J, Pharm., 69, 244-250. — ^The
authors have found these ingredients in samples of commercial
opium and the fact that all cases examined in one consignment
showed practically the same quantities of impurity, leads them
to conclude that a '* manipulation'' of large quantities of opium
occurs before it is packed in the cases. As the morphine pres-
ent is always well above the legal requirements it would be in-
teresting to know the reason for the adulteration, if such it is.
Qeisemium. By L. E. Sayre. Am, J. Pkarm., 69, 234-235.
— This may be considered as a conclusion of the author's pre-
vious article on the subject (ibid,^ 69, 8-13). Analyses of the
rhizomes, roots, and stems are given, showing that the gelse-
mine alkaloid, and gelsemic acid do not occur in the stem but
only in rhizome and roots, so that admixture of the stems with
the commercial roots is to be considered an adulteration.
Qelsemic Acid. By Virgii, Cobi^kntz. Am. J. Pharm., 69,
228-231. — The author, after giving the brief history of this vege-
table acid, points out an important source of error in previous
analyses of the substance. He finds that a part of the carbon
always separates in the combustion tube, in an incombustible
graphitic form. Five different methods of combustion were
tried and in none was the oxidation complete. A description of
the wet combustion method using chromic acid in sulphuric
acid, as employed by him, is then given, although this method
also failed when gelsemic acid was analyzed. The analyses of
bromo and acetyl derivatives, which were more successful, the
author does not give, as he intends to study their molecular
weights with an aim to determining their formulas.
Note on Phospho Cereal. By T. H. Norton. Pharm. Rev.,
15, 46. — Results of analyses of the so-called phospho cereal and
its decoction are given. The sample contained 5.18 per cent, of
phosphorus, calculated as P,Oj. Of this about one-quarter was
extracted by fifteen minutes' boiling with water and less than
one-half in two hours. Phosphites and hypophosphites were
not present in the decoction, all the phosphorus being present as
phosphoric acid. By this latter expression is doubtless meant
phosphate instead of free acid.
94 Review of American Chemical Research,
The Proteose of Wheat. By Thomas B. Osborne. Am.
Chem.J., 19, 236-237. Exceptions are taken to the statement
of Teller {ihid,^ 19, 65) that the proteose and proteose-like body
discovered in saline extracts of wheat flonr by Osborne and
Voorhees is gliadin. The author repeats the statement of the
original article (ibid,^ 15,404) that the proteids of the extract
were separated from the gliadin by ammonium sulphate solu-
tion, in which this body is insoluble. He believes that the pro-
teose which was found in this salt solution cannot be gliadin.
Proximate Analysis of Orris Root. By S. Ali^en Tucker.
Am.J.Pharm,, 69, 199-200. — The author gives the results of
his experiments upon the granular substance, which was ground
fine and extracted with petroleum ether, ethyl ether, alcohol,
water, etc. His results for moisture and ash determinations, as
well as of the qualitative analysis of the ash, are also given.
Unfortunately, as no descriptions and details of the processes he
employed accompany the article, the numerical values must be
accepted with caution.
Parthenium Hysterophorous. By H. V. Arny. Am. J.
Pharm., 69, 169-180. — This is a continuation of work done by
the author on this ** common weed of Jamaica." Following a
description of the plant, its blossoms, etc., the author states that
besides starch, wax, gum, and mineral salts, there is also present
an active principle to which the bitterness of the plant is due.
This is obtained from the alcoholic extract of the drug by evapo-
ration, solution in water, and extraction with chloroform. An
improved process of extraction is also given. A well crystal-
lized body was obtained, and its melting-point found to be 168-
169° C. Its solubility in various reagents is given. The author
is led to reject the belief that the body is either an alkaloid
or glucoside, but considers it probably similar to santonin.
The Rotary Properties of Some Vegetable Proteids. By
Arthur C. Alexander. /. Expt. Medicine, i, 304-323; — The
author has determined the specific rotary powers of the globu-
lins of hempseed, flaxseed, and Brazil nuts, in aqueous solutions
of salts, acids, and alkalies. The specific rotary powers differed
with different salt solutions, decreased in general with the per-
centage of the proteid in solution, and changed but slightly with
the temperature.
Changes in and Additions to Methods of Analyses Adopted
at the 13th Annual fleeting of the Association of Official Agri-
cultural Chemists. By H. W. Wiley. U, S. DepL Agr,
Circular No. 2, 1-6. — This pamphlet is a supplement to the offi-
cial methods of Bulletin No. 46, consisting of corrections and
Biological Chemistry, 95
substitutions to be interlineated into that report. The methods
for analysis of fertilizers, soils, foods, and feeding-stuffs, tanning
materials, and fermented liquors have all been improved. These
corrections are many of them very important.
B. H. RXCHA&X>8, RBVISWER.
California Walnuts, Almonds, and Chestnuts ; thejr Com-
position and Draft upon the Soil. Bv E. W. Hilgard. Cal.
Expt, Sta, Bull., 113, 1-15. — Nuts are a concentrated form of
food. The walnut and almond kernels contain respectively 65
and 58 per cent, of oil, and 17 and 25 per cent, of proteids, while
the chestnut yields about 1 1 per cent, of oil and of proteid, and
75 per cent, of carbohydrates, or nearly as much as prunes and
apricots. The chestnut may, therefore, take the place of cereals,
and the wahiut and almond that of meats, under certain condi-
tions.
Chemical Survey of the Water Supplies of Illinois. By A.
W. Palmer. Preliminary Rep., published by the Univ. of III.,
1-98. — This report is a valuable addition to our knowledge of the
character of water suppliesoftheUnited States, and will well repay
close study. ** The aims of the survey include the determina-
tion of the present sanitary condition of the supplies drawn from
the lakes, the streams, and the wells of the State ; the deter-
mination of the normal condition of the contaminated waters ;
the formulation of local standards of purity based upon the re-
sults of analyses of water derived from unpolluted sources ; the
provision of such means as shall afford to citizens of the State
opportunity to obtain immediate information regarding the
wholesomeness of the potable waters in which they are directly
interested ; and the prevention and dissemination of disease
from the use of impure water.'' Although the conditions of
work in a State university demand the analysis of miscellaneous
samples, collected under unknown conditions by untrained per-
sons, and consequently render the results obtained from this class
of water somewhat uncertain, the information given by the fig-
ures tabulated for 802 samples of such water is most interesting
to all who have to do with the sanitary conditions of the Middle
West. Of far more interest to the chemical and sanitary engi-
neer are the results of the periodic examinations of wells in
various parts of the State for the purpose of determining the
character of the normal ground water of the State. The
importance of this part of the work is evident from the
statement that more than half the inhabitants of the State de-
pend upon wells for their water supply. A comparison of the
figures tabulated for the comparatively shallow wells shows
a greater proportion of nitrates to chlorine than is usual in
96 Review of American Chemical Research,
the waters of the East. Even in the deep drift wells the nitrates
vary very much more than the chlorine. This is possibly due
to the passage of the water through the rich prairie soil, pre-
sumably higher in nitrates than the poorer soils of the East, or
to a lessened use of salt in the ordinary household operations.
It would seem rather premature to establish standards before de-
termining some of the causes of the unusual variations observed
even in the best waters. The periodic analyses of the several
surface waters are of great interest for reference and comparison.
The plans of work and the methods of analysis used are, for the
most part, taken from those published in the reports of the
Mass. State Board of Health.
Dietary Studies at the ilaine State College in 1895. By
Whitman S. Jordan. U, S. Agr. ExpL Sta, BtdL, 37, 1-57.
— ^This Bulletin contains the records of a large number of analy-
ses of food materials and gives other data for the calculation of
dietaries. The conclusions in regard to the use of milk in place
of meat are somewhat influenced by the fact that a new mana-
ger, during the first weeks of service, would naturally use more
meat than in the later time when he had gained experience. Milk
may be a cheap food when the whole ration is a somewhat ex-
pensive one, when the milk can be bought at the low price of 4
cents per quart, and when the meat used costs 10 to 20 cents per
pound ; but when the daily expense must be limited to an out-
lay of 9 to 15 cents and milk costs 5 to 6 cents per quart, while beef
may be had at 6 cents per pound, the conclusion does not hold.
More data are needed before we can accept, as settled, the state-
ment that the free use of milk lessens the use of other foods.
■
Sand Filtration of a Public Water Supply. By James O.
Handy. Proc, Eng. Soc, Western Pa,, 18^7, 1-57. — The records
of a year's working of an experimental filter used in connection
with the city water supply of Pittsburg, Pa., are given in detail,
together with a considerable number of chemical and bacterio-
logical results.
Brief Comments on the ilateria Medica, Pharmacy, and
Therapeutics of the Year Ending October i, i^96. By £. H.
Squibb. Squibb' s Ephemeris^ 4, 1776-1923.
AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY.
p. H. Thorp. Rbvtbwbr.
Analyses of Fertilizers. Agr, Ex, Sta. Bull, Ky, No, 65 ;
Me, No, 33 ; Md, No, 45 ; Mo, No, 34 ; N,J. No, 117 ; Vi, No,
57 ; Wis, No, 57.
Apparatus, 97
Basic Slag as a Fertilizer. By F. E. Thompson. Scientific
Am, Supp'l.y 43, 17659. — The author gives a resum^ of the pub-
lished reports of the various State Agricultural Experiment
Stations of the United States on the use of basic slag as iertilizer.
Effect of Bisulphide of CariM>n on the Vitality of Seeds and
Plants. By M. H. Beckwith. Del. Agr. Exp. Sta, Rep., i8gs,
152. — The germination of wheat treated with carbon bisulphide
before planting, was not affected to any extent. Strawberry
plants were injured by exposure to the fumes before planting,
but when growing no injury was noticed.
The Bleaching of Nuts by Dipping. By E. W. Hilgard.
Col. Agr, Col. Bid. No. iij. — This paper gives an account of
the use of sodium hypochlorite and bisulphite solutions, for
bleaching the shells of nuts.
Ammoniacal Solutions of Copper CartM>nate. By C. L.
Penny. Del. Agr. Sta. Rep., iSg^, 206. — The author finds that
dilute ammonia will dissolve more copper carbonate than
stronger solutions. For the preparation of fungicides, the am-
monia should be diluted nine-fold before dissolving copper car-
bonate in it, and this solution is further diluted one hundred-fold
before use.
G. W. ROLPB, Revibwbr.
The insoluble CartM>hydrates of Wheat. By H. C. Sher-
man. J. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 291-316. — This is an important
paper giving in much detail the preparation of many of these
carbohydrates, their characteristic reactions, and the more
approved methods for their determination. A brief review is
given of the work done to solve the much discussed question of
the food value of the celluloses and pentosans.
E. H. RiCHARDd, Reviewer.
Sorghum as a Forage Crop. ByThomas A. Wilwams. U.S.
Dept. Agr. Farmers BulL, 50, 1-20. — Beside the discussion
relating to the cultivation of sorghum, there are given tables
showing the results of chemical analyses of the plant and seeds,
and a comparison with analyses of corn.
APPARATUS.
A. H. GiLI., Rbvibwbs..
Note upon an Improved Specific Gravity Bottle. By E. R.
Squibb. Squibb's Ephemeris, 4, 1771-1775. — The usual form
of bottle with the neck ground in, is modified by graduating and
calibrating this neck, so that the bottle may be used for tempera-
tures from o** to 25**.
98 Review of American Chemical Research,
Some ApiMiratus for the Technical Laboratory. By B. S.
Johnson. /. Am, Chem. Soc, 19, 281. — The article describes
apparatus for the measuring of reagents, filtration, and solution
with the aid of heat. For details reference must be made to the
illustrations in the original paper.
A New Calibrated Weighing Flask. By G. L. Heath.
J, Am, Chem, Soc, I9» 198. — The improvement consists of a
collar ground upon the ordinary flask and a cap to fit it. This
flask has the advantage that it can be stoppered without danger
of sticking.
The Use of Aluminum for Condensers. By T. H. Norton.
/, Am, Chem, Sac,, 19, 155. — It was found that aluminum pos-
sesses the same advantages over glass as tin, but is much lighter
and a better conductor of heat ; hence it is better adopted for
use with low boiling substances.
A New Laboratory Grinder. By C. A. Buck. /. Frank,
Inst, , 18^7 y 194. — It has been in use in the laboratory of the Bethle-
hem Iron Co. for five hours a day for three years and given sat-
isfaction. It will grind a charge of 30 grams of refractory mag-
netite from 80 mesh to an impalpable powder in fifteen minutes.
METALLURQICAL CHEMISTRY.
H. O. HOFMAN, RBVIBWBR.
The Smelting of Zinc-Lead Sulphides. ByL.Kloz. Eng,Min,
/•» 63» 358- — III smelting zinc-bearing lead ores the zinc is car-
ried off by the gases, the slag, and the matte, little of it entering
the lead. The zinc carried off by the gases forms wall ac-
cretions to some extent which interrupt the descent of the
charges ; zinc oxide or silicate being difficult of fusion makes
the slag less fusible and causes particles of matte to remain sus-
pended in it, thus enriching it. In the large Rhodes' reverbera-
tory furnace of Leadville, Colo., matte and slag tapped from
the blast-furnace are given time to separate. In this way waste
slag with one per cent, lead and 0.5 ounce silver per ton is
obtained from slags running as high as six per cent, lead and 10
ounces silver.
The Distribution of the Precious iletals and Impurities in
Copper, and Suggestions for a Rational flode of Sampling.
By E. KEiyi^ER. J, Am, Chem, Sac., 19, 243-258. — ^This paper
is the first systematic investigation of the subject that has
appeared in print. Experience teaches that precious metals
and impurities are unevenly distributed in metallic cop-
per. A careful investigation of blast-furnace, reverbera-
Metallurgical Chemistry, 99
tory-furnace, and converter coppers of different degrees of
purity, shows that there is little regularity in the uneven
distribution. In some cases the foreign elements concentrate
toward the center of solidification (which lies above the
geometrical center, as the metallic mold draws off more heat
from the bottom than the air at the top), in others they concen-
trate toward the outside. Hence, ordinary methods of sam-
pling bars or pigs give unsatisfactory results. What is required
is a form of sample bar in which the distribution shall be even,
and in pouring the ladle must be hot enough to prevent any
sculling, as the liquid part is sure to show a different percentage
of precious metal from that which solidifies on the ladle. A sam-
ple bar (or plate), the thickness of which is small in comparison
with the length and width, has the desired form, as the concen-
tration from side to center cannot go farther than a distance
equal to the thickness of the plate, because at that moment the
entire plate has solidified. The border of the plate for a dis-
tance equal to the thickness of it will show an irregular distri-
bution, within the border, concentration having taken place in
one direction only; a correct sample will result, if the plate be
punched or drilled through. The tests were made on plates 15
inches square and one inch thick. In trying to give an expla-
nation of the irregular distribution of impurities, the author
first ascertained by experiment that a charge of molten copper
remained uniform in composition, when it had once been made
so by thorough agitation and mixing. The different elements
show different degrees of concentration. This, in a general
way, excepting sulphur, corresponds with their melting-points,
the more readily fusible the metal, the greater is the unevenness
of distribution. Atomic weight and specific gravity do not ap-
pear individually to have any bearing upon the subject, but if
the concentration is compared with the atomic volumes of the
elements, there appears to be a correspondence, the concentra-
tion being the largest, where the difference in atomic volume is
greatest.
Phosphor Bronze. By M. H. Wickhorst. Foundry, 10, 53-
57; Iron Age, 59, No. 12, 2-3. — This paper, read before the Western
Foundrymen's Association, treats, in a general way, of bronzes,
their properties and manufacture. Of special interest is a
bronze with six per cent, phosphorus made by the Chicago, Bur-
lington, and Quincy Railroad Company's brass foundry at Au-
rora, 111., in order to have phosphorus in convenient form for
the preparation of phosphor bronze. The method of its man-
ufacture is described in detail.
loo Review of American Chemical Research.
A New Process for Separating: Nickel and Copper. By R.
P. RoTHWKLL. Eng, Min,J., 63, 328. — N. V. Hybinette and
A. R. I<edoux have tested, on a large scale, at the Balbach
works, Newark, N. J., a new process for separating nickel and
copper sulphides. It consists in smelting nickel-copper matte
with oxide of manganese and cooling, when the mixture will
separate into two parts, the **top*' containing most of the copper
and manganese sulphide, the ** bottom" most of the nickel sul-
phide. By repeating the operation the separation becomes per-
fect. The manganese can be used over again (how is not
stated) or a manganese bronze made of the top.
Practical Treatment of Pyritic Qold Ores at Qibbonsville,
nont. By C. C. Burger. Min, Sci, Press, 74, 282-285. — This
is a detailed description of the process in use, viz. : (i) Amal-
gamation in the battery and saving of concentrates ; (2) roast-
ing in twenty- four hours from 12 to 15 tons of concentrates with
from 33 to 40 per cent, sulphur, in a two-hearth Pearce turret
furnace, supplemented by a small hand reverberatory furnace
holding two i^-tou charges, to insure dead-roasting without
diminishing the capacity of the mechanical furnace ; (3) Chlori-
nating in a i^-ton Thies barrel ; (4) Filtering with compressed
air in steel lead-lined cylinders swung on trunnions; (5) Set-
tling any slimes that passed the filter cloth ; (6) Precipitating
with ferrous sulphate. The cost of chlorinating is less than $5
per ton. The ore is low-grade ($10 per ton), thegangue con-
sists of quartz and magnesian slate, the concentrates are mainly
pyrite, contain some arsenopyrite, and show from 0.5 to i per
cent, copper.
Applications of the Cyanide Process in South Africa. By C.
Butters. Eng. Min, /., 63, 233-234. — This is a lecture deliv-
ered before the Chemistry Section of the Science Association of
the University of California, Berkeley, Cal. It contains an
account of the development of the process in South Africa, and
gives the details of the present practice, which are of much in-
terest to the metallurgist.
Sodium Dioxide in Cyaniding Ores. By J. H. Burpkind.
Eng. Min. /., 63, 399-400. — The author does not accept the
statement that in cyaniding ores containing alkali earth sul-
phates, the extraction of precious metal is increased, and the con-
sumption of cyanide diminished, by the use of sodium dioxide.
He believes that alkali earth sulphates are in part converted
into cyanides, which are solvents for gold, and an equivalent
amount of potash into sulphate. Taking, e. g., an ore with
gypsum, some of it will be converted into calcium cyanide. In
dissolving gold, the double cyanide of gold and calcium will be
Metallurgical Chemistry, loi
formed in addition to the double cyanide of potassium and gold.
If such a solution is treated with zinc shavings, the products
will be gold, calcium and potassium hydroxides, zinc cyanide,
and* hydrogen ; potassium hydroxide and zinc cyanide will com-
bine to a soluble double salt, while from the calcium hydroxide
there will be precipitated calcium carbonate by potassium car-
bonate in the solution and by carbonic acid taken up from the
air. This explains the fact that the precipitated gold is often
rich in calcium carbonate. While the formation of calcium car-
bonate can be avoided by the use of sodium dioxide, it is prac-
tically non-available on account of its cost, and the removal of
calcium carbonate from the gold precipitate is easy and costs next
to nothing.
Separation of Qold and Silver from Low-Qrade Bullion. Bv
F. GuTZKOW. Eng, Min.J,, 63, 380-381. — The sulphuric acid
process being suited only for high-grade dor6 silver, millmen
ship their low-grade bullion, of say 500 thousandths fineness, to
lead refineries where the copper is removed by cupelling with lead.
This involves a great expense to the millman who pays for trans-
portation of the copper in his bullion east, and of the blue vit-
riol west, in addition to a high refining charge based on the gross
ounce of bullion. The process in question aims to separate
silver, gold and copper at the mill, producing fine silver, gold of
greater or less purity, and blue vitriol. In the process the low-
grade alloy is dissolved in a cast-iron vessel in sulphuric acid
that is lighter than 66'* Beaum6. When dissolved, heating is con-
tinued until the water is drawn off and the solution becomes so
concentrated that anhydrous cupric sulphate is formed and sepa-
rates. Now the clear silver solution is siphoned off, diluted and
cooled, when silver sulphate crystallizes out and is treated in
the usual way, while the mother-liquor of about 62° Beaum£ is
strengthened with fresh acid, and is ready to be used for a new
charge. The gold and copper sulphates remaining with some
silver sulphate and impurities in the iron vessel, are removed
to a pan and boiled in water in the presence of some metallic
copper, when the cupric sulphate will behydrated and dissolved,
and the silver sulphate decomposed. The blue vitriol solution
is concentrated and crystallized, and the gold, contaminated with
some silver and insoluble impurities, treated by one of the usual
methods.
Chemical Hintsto Foundrymen. By G. R. Johnson. Foundry,
10, 71-73 ; Iron Age, 59, No. 10, 5-8. — The paper is a study
of the effect of carbon, silicon, sulphur, phosphorus, and manga-
nese upon foundry iron. Many analyses of pig irons from the
Embreville Iron Co., Embreville, Tenn., are brought together
I02 Review of American Chemical Research,
in tables, and the relations of chemical composition and phys-
ical properties shown.
The Bertrand-Thiel Open Hearth Process. By J. Hartshorj^e.
Iron Age ^ 59, No. 12, 2-4. — This article contains a discussion
of a paper read by P. C. Gilchrist, before the Cleveland (Eng-
land) Institute of Engineers.
W. H. Walker, Rbvibwbr.
An Alloy Composed of Two-thirds Aluminum and One-third
Zinc. By W. F. Durand. Science^ 5, 396. — Of the alloys of
zinc and aluminum, one having the above proportions gives the
best results, showing itself equal to good cast iron in strength,
and superior in many other qualities. It melts at about 800** F.,
does not readily oxidize, takes a fine finish, and perfectly fills
the smallest parts of a mould. Like cast iron, it is brittle, but
it is recommended when lightness and strength, combined with
good finish and resistance to corrosion, are among the desiderata.
[Contribution prom the Massachusbtts Instititte of Technology.]
REVIEW OF AMERICAN CHEMICAL RESEARCH.
Voi,. III. No. 7.
Arthur A. Noybs, Editor ; Henry P. Tai^bot, Associate Editor.
RBYibwbrs: Analytical Chemistry, H. P. Talbot and W. H. Walker ;
Biological Chemistry, W. R. Whitney; Carbohydrates, G. W. Rolfe ;
General Chemistry, A. A. Noyes ; Geological and Mineralogical Chem-
istry, W. O. Crosby ; Inorganic Chemistry, Henry Fay ; Metallurgical
Chemistrjr and Assaying, H. O. Hofman ; Organic Chemistry, J. P. Nor-
ris ; Physical Chemistry, H. M. Goodwin ; Sanitary Chemistry, E. H.
Richards; Technical Chemistry, A. H. Gill and P. H. Thorp.
INORQANIC CHEMISTRY.
Henry Pay, Rbvibwbr.
On flydrocobaltocolialticyanic Acid and Its Salts. By C.
LoRiNG Jackson and A. M. Comey. Am, Chem, /., 19,
271-281. — With the hope of preparing from potassium cobalti-
cyanide compounds analogous to the nitroprussides, a strong
solution of potassium cobalticyanide was boiled with strong
nitric acid. In less than five minutes the liquid turned red, and
the color increased in intensity as the boiling was continued.
After boiling about two hours the red solution was converted
into a semi-solid gelatinous mass. This product was purified by
heating with more nitric acid and washing with water, but as
the impurities were removed it began to pass into solution.
Essentially all of the cobalt remained in the precipitate, and in
the filtrate there was found nitric and hydrocyanic acids, and po-
tassium nitrate. The insoluble jelly was dried mvo^vi^ for analysis,
when it changed in color from red to a grayish green, but was very
hygroscopic, absorbing water readily, at the same time regaining
its red color. The solubility seems to vary with the preparation.
It usually dissolves slowly, and to a limited extent in cold water,
but digestion at 60^ C. brings it completely into solution. The
composition corresponds to the formula KH,Co,(CN)„.H,0.
The solution is strongl}^ acid and gives colored precipitates with
metallic salts. By mixing a solution of the salt with potassium
acetate and alcohol, there is thrown down a pink, flocculent
precipitate, which is the dipotassium cobaltocobalticya-
nide, K,HCo,(CN)„.2H,0. Barium cobaltocobalticyanide,
BaHCo,(CN)„iiH,0, retains its waterof crystallization at iSoX.,
and is decomposed ^t225**C. The silver salt, Ag,Oo,(CN)„.H,0,
is made by adding an excess of silver nitrate to the solution of
the monopotassiumsalt. Thezincsalt, ZnHCo,(CN),,.3H,0, and
copper sdt, Cu,[Co,(CN),J,.4H,0, are also described. Free
I04 Review of American Chemical Research,
hydrocobaltocobalticyanic acid was obtained by treating hydro-
cobalticyanic acid with nitric acid, precisely as was done with
the potassium cobalticyanide in making the monopotassiumsalt,
which it closely resembles, except that it is less stable and gives
off hydrocyanic acid when dried. When potassium hydroxide
was added to the solution of the monopotassium salt, it turned
dark brown in the cold, and when the liquid was warmed the
color deepened to a black, but nothing was precipitated until
the solution was boiled. A precipitate of cobaltic hydrate was
then formed, but the separation was slow and gradual. If the
solution is filtered before precipitation is complete, the yellowish
filtrate gives a further precipitate of cobaltic hydroxide on boil-
ing again. Acetic acid added to this solution does not set free
hydrocyanic acid. If, after the acetic acid, alcohol be added,
it throws out fine white needles, which, on analysis, are shown to
be identical with potassium cobalticyanide, but of entirely dif-
ferent crystal habit. A secondary oily product was formed in
this reaction, which, on drying, was converted into a yellow
solid, the nature of which has not been established. There is a
general analogy between these substances and Prussian blue,
but they differ essentially, in that in the cobalt compounds all
of the cobalt is in the basic portion of the salt.
On the Analogies in Composition of the Salts of Calcium,
Strontium, and Barium. By J. H. Kastle. Am. Chem.J,,
19, 281-290. — The author has found that of 280 acids described
in chemical literature, 252 show analogies in the composition of
their calcium, strontium, and barium salts. Of these acids, the
calcium, strontium, and barium salts of 141 have been described.
Prom this number, 34 salts are entirely analogous for the three
elements, and 79 show analogies between two of the salts. Of the
latter, the analogy existing between the calcium and strontium
salts is shown in 30 instances, between the calcium and barium
salts in 25, and between the strontium and barium salts in 30
cases. In addition, 139 acids have been found, of which the
salt of only two of these metals have been described> but all are
stated to be analogous. Prom these observations the author
comes to the general conclusion th^Xofthe calcium ^ strontium^ and
barium salts of any ctcid, all or two of the salts of these metals ttnll
be found to be analogous in composition. This is in opposition to
the statement of Lenssen, that there is closer relationship
between the strontium and barium than the calcium salts.
On the Action of Ammonia upon Cupriammonium Aceto-
bromide. By Theodore William Richards and Robert
Jay Porsythe. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sci., 3a, 239-241. —
By passing ammonia gas over cupriammonium acetobromide in
a glass tube, placed in a freezing mixture, the substance takes
Inorganic Chemistry, 105
up ammonia corresponding in amount to 3NH,. The new sub-
stance, CuBrC,H,0,.5NH„ dissolves in water to a deep blue
solution, and loses ammonia on exposure to the air passing over
into a green compound, CuBr,.6NH,. This changeof color is
taken as proof that the ammonia decomposed the original cupri-
ammonium acetobromide, and the decomposition of the addition
product may be represented in this way :
2Cu(NH,),Br.C,H,0,.3NH,=CuBr,.6NH.+Cu(C,H.O,),.4NH,
The first of these compounds was already known, and the
second was synthesized by passing ammonia over cupriammo-
nium acetate. The analytical data are not exact, owing both to the
ease with which the substances lose ammonia, and to their great
hygroscopic power.
On Certain I>ouble Halogen Salts of Caesium and Rubidium.
By H. L. Wells and H. W. Foote. Am, /. Sci., 153, 461-
465. — The authors have repeated the work of Remsen and
Saunders and Remsen and Brigham, to see whether, by working
under widely varying conditions, they could obtain several
simpler salts by recrystallizing the complex rubidium antimony
chloride, 23RbCl.ioSbCl,. No variation of composition was de-
tected, although the salt was crystallized from dilute, concentra-
ted and alcoholic hydrochloric acid . The analytical process used in
the determination of antimony was checked against the pure
salt, Cs.Sb.Clg, containing nearly the same percentage of anti-
mony. The method gave results about 0.25 per cent, too high,
and the authors believe that by subtracting this constant error
from the amount of antimony found in the analyses of the rubid-
ium salt, it will give results nearer the truth. The results thus
obtained agree more closely with the simpler formula,
7RbC1.3SbCl„ and this formula is proposed for this salt as well as
for the other salts of analogous composition, described by Remsen
and Brigham, Herty, and Wheeler. While there is much to be
said in favor of the simple formula, it would seem advisable to
offer evidence as to the accuracy of the determination of rubid-
ium and chlorine in the salts as well as antimony. In recrys-
tallizing this complex rubidium antimony chloride from very
dilute hydrochloric acid, just enough to prevent the precipita-
tion of antimony oxychloride, a new salt having the composition
2RbCl.SbCl,.SbOCl was formed. It crystallizes in sharp, color-
less prisms, and can be recrystallized from dilute hydrochloric
acid. The work of Remsen and Brigham on the caesium bis-
muth chlorides was confirmed, and the new salt, 3CsI.2BiI„
described. For analysis this salt was dissolved in dilute hydro-
chloric acid, the bismuth precipitated as sulphide, digested with
nitric acid until decomposed, the free sulphur removed by fil-
io6 Review of American Chemical Research,
tration, and the bismuth reprecipitated as carbonate. The cae-
sium was determined as sulphate.
On the Double Fluorides of Zirconium with Lithium, Sodium,
and Thallium. By H. L. WELi,a and H. W. Foote. Am. /.
Sci, , 153, 466-47 1 . — It has been found by a comparison of the double
fluorides of zirconium with ammonia, potassium, and caesium,
that the types of double salts formed varied with the molecular
weights of the alkaline fluorides. A relatively large number of
molecules of small molecular weight enter into combination,
while those fluorides of higher molecular weight combine
with more zirconium fluoride than the others. This was
found to be true also in double fluorides of zirconium and lith-
ium. Salts of the 4 : i and 2 : i type were prepared, but the
3 : 1 tjrpe could not be made. The following table shows the
symmetrical gradation of types, according to the atomic weight
of the alkali metals :
Potassium salt.
Type. Lithium salts. (Mariflrnac.) Caesium salts.
4:1 4LiF.ZrF4.fH,0
3:* 3KF.ZrF4
2 : I 2LiF.ZrF4 aKF.ZrF^ iCsF.ZrF^
1:1 KF.ZrF* C8F.ZrF4.H,0
2:3 2CsF.3ZrF|.2H,0
The double fluorides of sodium and thallium with zirconium
fluoride do not form a symmetrical series which will fall into line
with the known other salts. The salt sNaF.ZrF^ was prepared
by bringing together two parts sodium fluoride with fourteen
parts zirconium fluoride. The following double fluorides of
thallium and zirconium were prepared : TlF.ZrF^.H,0, 5TIF.
3ZrF,.H,0, and 3TlF.ZrF,. The first salt separates without
water of crystallization if the solution is evaporated until crystals
begin to form , and then cooled . Two of these thallous salts corres-
pond to re90gnized types of alkali salts, whilethe5:3typeisnew.
The Oxides of Tungsten. By En, D. Dksi. /. Am. Chem,
Sqc, 19, 213-241. — By treating tungstic acid or metallic tung-
sten with sulphuric and sulphurous acids at various temperatures,
under atmospheric pressure and in sealed tubes, oxides of tung-
sten were isolated corresponding to the formulas WO, W^0„
W,0„ WjO,„ W,0„ W.O,^. By heating ammonium tungstate
to a white heat the oxide, W^O. was formed, and it was also ob-
tained by fusing tungstic acid with potassium iodide. Upon fusing
tungstic acid with potassium chloride, potassium bromide, me-
tallic sodium or potassium, metallic tungsten was formed.
Different oxynitrides of tungsten were prepared by acting upon
tungstic acid with ammonium chloride, potassium cyanide, and
cyanogen. Tungstic acid can be separated from molybdic acid
by dissolving the latter in sulphuric acid, while the former is
entirely insoluble.
Organic Chemistry. 107
Recovery of Waste Platinum Chloride.— By H. W. Wiley.
/. Am, Chem. Soc,, 19, 258-261. — Aluminum turnings are sug-
gested for the reduction of potassium platinochloride to metallic
platinum.
Compounds of iletallic Hydroxides with Iodine. By Thbo-
DORB Rettie. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 333-339. — The author
has examined the brown precipitate formed when magnesium
sulphate is treated with iodine and potassium hydroxide, and
finds that it is not of constant composition, being principally
magnesium hydroxide with a variable quantity of iodine. Col-
ored precipitates are formed with zinc and cadmium salts. Glu-
cinum sulphate, and calcium and strontium salts, give precipi-
tates which dissolve on standing.
Variations in the Composition of Red Lead. By Durand
Woodman. /. Am. Chem. Sac, 19, 339-341. — If commercial
red lead is treated with a saturated solution of lead acetate the
lead monoxide is dissolved, leaving the true red lead. The
percentage of Pb,0^ found in this way varies from 41 to 92 per
cent.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
J. p. NOS.RI8, Rbvibwbii.
On the Colored Compounds Obtained from Sodic Ethylate
and Certain Aromatic Nitro Compounds. By C. Loring
Jackson and Martin H. Ittner. Am. Chem./., 19, 199-
217. — By the action of sodium ethylate on fourteen compounds
of the general structure CH,(orCOOH)(i)NO,(3)X(4)NO,(5)
colored bodies analogous to those obtained by Victor Meyer
{Ber., 27, 3153) and Lobry de Bruyn {Rec. Trav. Chim.
Pays. Bas., 14, 89) from j-dinitrobenzoic acid and j-trini-
trobenzene have been prepared. The colors formed from the
toluene derivatives lasted but a few seconds, while those from
the benzoic acids were stable for several hours. The colored
compound from dinitranisic acid was isolated by precipitation
from an alcoholic solution with ligroin and, after drying in
vacuo, had the composition C,H,.OCH,.(NO,),.COONa.
CjHjONa. When heated at 1 10** it was decomposed and lost a
weight nearly corresponding to one molecule of alcohol. The
authors offer no structural formulae for the compounds, but show
that the explanation of Victor Meyer, that they are formed by
the replacement of one atom of h3'drogen in the benzene ring by
an atom of sodium, and the addition of a molecule of alcohol of
crystallization is rendered improbable by the work of Lobry de
Bruyn. The latter proved that 5-trinitrobenzene is not acted on
by sodium in boiling xylene and that its colored derivative has
the composition C,H,(NO,),.CH,OK:.^H,0, in which, if Meyer's
io8 Review of American Chemical Research,
explanation is correct, there are both alcohol and water of crys-
tallization. This latter assumption is highly improbable.
On the Action of Chlorcarbonic Ethyl Ester on Formanilide.
By H. I<. WheeIvER and H. F. Metcalp. Am, Chem.J., 19,
217-227. — The authors have studied the action of chlorcarbonic
ethyl ester on formanilide, and find that the explanations of the
reaction given by Lellmann {Ber,, 14, 2512), and Freer and
Sherman (Am. Chem. /., 18, 579), are in part incorrect.
The following substances were obtained as final reaction-
products : Diphenylformamidine hydrochloride, formylphenyl-
urethane, phenylurethane, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide,
and ethyl chloride. The reaction can be explained whether
formanilide is, as its name implies, an anilide with the structure
HCO.NHC.H,, or whether it has the imido structure and is
phenylimidoformic acid. Its structure cannot, therefore, be de-
termined by the final reaction-products. The oil obtained by
Freer and Sherman (loc, cit,), and which they state is ethyliso-
formanilide, proved to be a mixture of formphenylurethane,
phenylurethane, and unaltered formanilide. It is also shown that
Claisen's argument (Ann. Chem, (Liebig), 287, 360) for the
amide structure of formanilide, based on the relation of its boil-
ing-point and that of its oxygen ester, is not well taken. Fomi^l-
phenylurethane, C.H^N.CHO.CO.CjH^, was prepared by the
action of chlorcarbonic ethyl ester on ethylisoformanilide. It
boils from 149" to 151* at 15 mm. pressure. The above struc-
ture was shown to be correct by the action of alkali and of
phenyl hydrazine. With the former there was a separation of the
lower acid, giving phenylurethane ; with the latter, a-formphenyl-
hydrazine was formed.
Naphthalene Tetrabromide, C,,H.Br,. By W. R. Orndorfp
AND C. B. Mover. Am. Chem, J., 19, 262-270. — But one of
the three possible stereochemical modifications of naphthalene
tetrabromide was formed by the action of naphthalene on bro-
mine. This was made by cautiously treating naphthalene cov-
ered with an ice-cold four per cent, solution of sodium hydrox-
ide with bromine, and allowing the mixture to stand in the cold
for several hours. Of the pure product, which melted at 111°,
with decomposition after crystallization from chloroform, 7 grams
were obtained from 100 grams of naphthalene. A large quan-
tity of a-monobromnaphthalene and i : 4 dibromnaphthalene
were obtained at the same time. The tetrabromide is insoluble
in water, ether, glacial acetic acid, and cold alcohol ; soluble in
hot water, carbon bisulphide, ligroin, hot chloroform, and hot
benzene. It crystallizes in transparent monoclinic prisms, which
become opaque on standing. A full crystallographic study of
the compound is given. As the tetrabromide decomposed in
Organic Chemistry. 109
all boiling solvents, its molecular weight could not be deter-
mined. A determination of the molecular weight of the analo-
gous chloride gave results corresponding to the formula C„H,C1^.
Action of riercaptides on Quinones. By H. S. Grindlby
AND J. ly. Sammis. Am. Chem.J., ig, 290-295. — By the action
of sodium mercaptide on dichlordiphenoxyquinone, a compound
was obtained analogous to the hemiacetals prepared by Jackson
and Grindley {Am. Chem. /., 17, 577) from quinones and
sodium alcoholates. The yellow sodium salt formed when six
molecules of the mercaptide and one of the quinone were used
was so unstable that it could not be analyzed . It decomposed read-
ily in the presence of water forming tetrathioethylquinone,
C,(SC,H J^O„ which melts at 90**-9i®, and gives a hydroquinone
melting at 58**. The tetrathioethylquinone, when treated with two
equivalents of sodium mercaptide, gives the unstable yellow salt
which, in turn, gives the compound tetrathioethylquinone diben-
zoyl-dithiobenzoylacetalC.(S.C,H.),(O.CO.C,H,),(S.CO.C.H,),
when treated with benzoyl chloride in alcoholic solution. The
substance is not affected by either zinc dust and glacial
acetic acid or hydroxylamine hydrochloride.
The Hydrolysis of Acid Amides. By Ira Rkmsbn. Am.
Chem. J., 19, 319-322. — In a preliminary note which announces
that the author has undertaken an extensive investigation of the
speed of hydrolysis of the acid amides, the rate of decomposi-
tion of the three nitrobenzamides with half normal hydrochloric
acid is reported. At the end of 3 hours 3.3 per cent, of the
o-amide, 80.5 per cent, of the m-amide, and 84.5 per cent, of the
^-amide were hydrolyzed. At the end of 6 hours 6.2 per cent.,
94.2 per cent., and 96.9 per cent, of the ortho, meta, and para
amides, respectively, were changed.
On Uretlianes. By Otto Folin. Atk. Chem. J., 19,323-
352. — From the study of the action of sodium methylate on a
number of acid bromamides the author deduces the following
conclusion : The reaction
RCONHBr + NaOCH, = RNHCOOCH, + NaBr,
is quite as general as the analogous reaction of alkalies on acid
bromamides, and should be as useful in the preparation of ureth-
anes, as is the reaction of Hofmann for the amines. The in-
troduction of negative groups into the radical R does not pre-
vent the **Beckmann rearrangement,** and in no case was direct
substitution of the bromine effected even to a slight extent. The
introduction of a positive group in one case had no more influ-
ence than that of a negative group. The following compounds
were prepared from the corresponding bromamides and are de-
no Review of American Chemiccd Research.
scribed in detail : Methylphenyl carbamate ; methyl-m-nitro-
phenyl carbamate, crystallizing in well-formed octahedra which
melt at I47**-I49®; methyl-<?-nitrophenyl carbamate, greenish-yel-
low crystals, which melt at 53° ; methyl-»>-bromphenyl carbam-
ate, white crystals melting at 84.5**-85.5**. The yield in all
cases was nearly quantitative. As it was found impossible to
obtain an acid bromamide containing the amido or dialkylamido
group in the benzene ring, an analogous amide in the aliphatic
series was prepared, carbomethoxy-/^-amidopropionbromamide,
CH,O.CNHCH,CH,CONHBr, from which the corresponding
urethane was formed by the action of sodium methylate. The
study of the action of phosphorus pentachloride on a number of
aromatic urethanes leads to the following equation, which is
general .
RNHCO.CH. + PCI, = RNHCOCl + CH.Cl + POCl,.
This reaction and the one given above furnish easy methods for
the preparation of chlorformanilides and isocyanates. With
free urethane phosphorus pentachloride splits off ethyl chloride
and a carbamide chloride is formed, but the reaction is not so
simple as with the aromatic urethanes. A simple method of
preparation of urethane from potassium cyanate and alcohol is
described. Phosgene and urethane, when brought together in
molecular proportions, reacted simultaneously in the different
' ways :
1. NH,CO,C,H, + COCl, = C1C0NHC0.C,H. + HCl.
2. CICONHCO.C.H, + NH,CO,C,H. = CO(NHCOAH.),
+ HC1.
3. 2NH,CO,C.H. + COCl, = NH,CONHCO,C,H, -f C.H.Cl
+ CO. + HCl.
The products of the reaction are fully described.
Action of Phosphorus Pentachloride on Aniline and its Salts.
By J. Eluott Gilpin. Am, Chem,/,, 19,352-363. — Trichlor-
phosphanil, PCl,(NC,Hj), was obtained by subliming phos-
phorus pentachloride and aniline hydrochloride at 170° for six
hours. The compound condensed in the cooler part of the ves-
sel as a white coating. It cannot be purified by crystallization,
as all solvents decompose it. Concentrated sulphuric acid,
alcohol, and ether, cause an evolution of hydrochloric acid ;
sodium hydroxide changes it to a hard, brittle mass ; and water
decomposes it into aniline hydrochloride and phosphoric acid.
Neither the sulphate nor the nitrate of aniline gave the com-
pound when heated with phosphorus pentachloride. Aniline
and phosphorus pentachloride react readily with evolution of
hydrochloric acid. The cooled mass is extracted with water,
Organic Chemistry, iii
then with small portions of hot alcohol, until, on evaporation, one
kind of crystals is obtained, and finally crystallized from boil-
ing alcohol. The resulting compound, chlorphostetranilide,
PC1(NHC,H,)^, is very stable. It is not decomposed when
boiled with water, concentrated alkali, or hydrochloric acid ;
but when heated with water in a sealed tube at i8o°, aniline,
aniline hydrochloride, and phosphoric acid are formed. Only a
small amount was decomposed when heated in a porcelain tube
in a current of oxygen over the blast-lamp for several hours. A
compound of the structure P(OH) (NHC,H,SO,H)„ was formed
by the action of concentrated sulphuric acid on chlorphostetrani-
lide. Acid lead and barium salts were formed by the replace-
ment of six hydrogen atoms in two molecules of the acid. The
three toluidines reacted with phosphorus pentachloride and
formed compounds of analogous composition.
On the PrefHiration of Metabrom benzoic Acid and of Meta-
brom nitrobenzene. By H. L. Whkkler and B. W. McFar-
LAND. Am, Chem,J,, 19, 363-367. — The authors offer the fol-
lowing much improved method for the preparation of metabrom-
benzoic acid : 20 grams of benzoic acid and 6 grams of iron
wire are heated in a flask, connected with a return condenser, to
170**, when 48 grams of bromine are added, drop by drop, while
the temperature of the bath is allowed to rise slowly to 260®.
After purification and distillation, 20 grams of the pure acid
were obtained. Perbrombenzene, C,Br,, was formed when 5
grams of benzoic acid, 2 grams of iron, and 37.4 grams of bro-
mine were heated in a tube to 225** for 5 hours. Metabrom-
nitrobenzene was prepared as follows : 30 grams of nitrobenzene
and 3 grams of iron were heated to 120**, when 60 grams of bro-
mine were added gradually. A 75 percent, yield was obtained.
Paradichlorbenzene reacts readily with bromine in the presence
of iron, giving probably i,4-dichlor-2,5-dibrombenzene, which
melts at 148^.
On the Non-Exi5tenceof FourMethenylphenylparatolylami-
dines. By H. L. Wheeler. Am. Chem, /., 19, 367-374. —
Walther (/. prakt. Chem,, 55, 41) has described the prepa-
ration of four isomeric methenylphenylparatolylamidines. The
author has examined the various methods carefully, and comes
to the conclusion that they all give the same body, which melts
at i03**.5-i04°.5.
The Action of Certain Alcohols on Asym-iletadiazoxylene-
aulphonic Acid. By W. B. Shober and H. E. Kiefer. Am.
Chem. y., 19, 381-393. — a-metaxylidinesulphonic acid, pre-
pared by the method of Jacobson and Ledderboge {Ber, , 16, 193) ,
was diazotized with nitrous fumes. The yield of the diazo com-
112 Review of American Chemical Research,
pound was 94 per cent, of the theoretical amount. Different por-
tions of the diazo compound were decomposed with methyl,
ethyl, and propyl alcohols under varying pressures. In all
cases both the hydrogen and the alkoxy reaction took place,
the latter to a much larger extent, which increased with
increased pressure, a-metamethoxyxylenesulphonic acid crys-
tallizes from benzene in needles, and forms potassium, barium,
copper, zinc, and sodium salts. Its amide melts at 190^.
a-propoxyxylenesulphonic acid crystallizes from alcohol in
needles, and forms well characterized barium, potassium, and
zinc salts. Its amide melts at 146^. By the oxidation of
a-metamethoxy xylene sulphonamide, an acid of the probable
structure C,H,CH,(i)COOH(3)OCH,(4)SO,NH,(6)H-H.O was
obtained. The barium and calcium salts were prepared, but did
not crystallize well.
The Preparation of Zinc Ethyl. By Arthur I<achman.
Am. Chem.J,^ 19, 410-41 1. — By using an improved zinc-copper
couple in the preparation of zinc ethyl by the process of Glad-
stone and Tribe (/. Chem. Sac., 1879, 570), the author obtained
a yield of 70-90 per cent, in half the time required by the old
method. The couple is prepared by passing a stream of hydro-
gen for 20 minutes over a mixture of 100 parts of zinc dust and
12 parts of copper oxide heated to redness in a combustion tube.
A Simple Test for the Halogens in Organic Halides. By J.
H. KASTI.E AND W. A. Bkatty. Am. Chem. /., 19, 412-413.
— To test for halogens in non-volatile substances about i gram
is heated with 5 grams of a mixture of equal weights of copper
nitrate and silver nitrate until the latter are reduced to oxides.
The resulting mixture is treated with a little water, dilute sulphuric
acid, and zinc for 5 minutes, filtered, and tested for halogen with
silver nitrate. Volatile substances are heated in an S-shaped tube
closed at one end, and the vapors passed over a mixture of the
nitrates heated to redness. The method was tested with a large
number of substances and was successful in every case.
Notes on Caffein. By G. ly. Spencer. /. Am. Chem. Soc.,
19, 279-281. — The author compares a gravimetric method for
the estimation of caffein proposed by himself (/. AnaJ. Chem.^
4> 390) with the volumetric method of Gomberg (/. Am. Chem.
Soc, 18, 331), and finds that both give the same result. The
volumetric method is to be preferred on account of its wider ap-
plicability.
Periodides of Pyridine. By P. F. Trowbridge. /. Am.
Chem. Soc, 19, 322-331. — From a series of experiments on the
formation of periodides of pyridine methyl iodide, the author
Geological and Mineralogical Chemistry, 113
concludes that at ordinary temperatures and with small amounts
of iodine, the triiodide is usually formed, and with larger
amounts of iodine the pentiodide. When hot saturated solu-
tions were used a heptiodide resulted. Two forms of pyridine
hydroiodide are described, C^H^N.HI and C^H^N.HI.H,0, and
periodides containing two, five, and seven iodine atoms. A
molecular weight determination in phenol of the unusual per-
iodide containing two atoms of iodine showed that its formula is
C,H,N.HI.I.
Modification of the Thalleoquin Test for Quinine. By P. S.
Hydk. J, Am, Chem, Soc.^ 19, 331-332. — It is recommended that
very dilute solutions be used in the above test, and a filtered solu-
tion of calcium hypochlorite instead of chlorine or bromine water.
G. W. ROLPB, Reviswbr.
Allotropy of Sucrose. By F. G. Wiechmann. /. Phys. Chem,,
I, 69-74. — The paper records a series of experiments made by
the author on an amorphous modification of cane sugar, made
by rapidly heating the sugar to boiling, covering the vessel and
boiling ten minutes, raising the solution to 176'' C, the mass
then being rapidly cooled by pouring it on a copper slab. The
results point to the conclusion that very minute traces of dis-
solved inorganic matter tend to cause the sugar to revert to the
crystalline form, while, if the sugar is absolutely pure, the
amorphous state persists indefinitely.
QEOLOOiCAL AND HiNERALXKilCAL CHEni5TRY.
A. H. Gill., Rbvibwbr.
On the Butanes and Octanes in American (Ohio) Petroleum.
By C. F. Mabbry and E. T. Hudson. Proc, Am, Acad, Arts
and Sci,, 32, 101-118; Am, Chem, J,, 19, 243-262. — Hitherto it
has been assumed that the butane in petroleum was the normal
compound ; but the results of this investigation show it to be
isobutane, and that its boiling-point is o"" instead of — 17^ ; iso-
pentane of boiling-point 29'*-30 was also present. Two octanes
were obtained, having a boiling-point of 119.5* and i24**-i25®,
respectively, and specific gravities at 20** of 0.7243 and 0.7134,
respectively. The latter is assumed to be the normal compound,
but enough could not be obtained to determine its composition.
Diisobutyl could not be detected. Attention is called to the
fact that the specific gravity of hydrocarbons from this source is
greater than that of the same hydrocarbons synthetically pre-
pared, owing probably to the presence of naphthenes.
1 14 Review of American Chemical Research,
The Constituents of Pennsylvania, Oliio» and
Petroleum l>etween 150* and aao*. By C. F. Mabbry. Proc.
Am, Acad, Arts and Sci,, 32, 121 -176. — The author calls atten-
tion to the conflicting statements regarding the constituents of
the fractions of American petroleums boiling between 150° and
220°. Some believe them to be naphthenes, while others,on the basis
of Pelouze and Cahours' work, consider that they are members
of the fatty series ; the author's opinion that the higher portions
belonged to the C„Han series was not sustained. The separation
of these bodies presents greater difficulties than those of the
lighter portions, as they must be fractionated in vacuo. As it was
found that cracking did not begin with the Pennsylvania oils
until a temperature above 225° was reached, refinery distil-
lates of a gravity of 48^-50° Baume were used as the initial ma-
terial. These were fractionated many times — mention is made
of forty-five and fifty distillations — and the distillates treated in
some cases with fuming sulphuric acid to remove mesitylene.
The Ohio and Canadian distillates were obtained from the crude
oils by distillation in vacuo. The Pennsylvania petroleum con-
tains a decane of b. pt. i63°-i64° and sp. gr. 0.7684, another
decane, probably the normal, of b. pt. 173°-! 74°, sp. gr. 0.7486,
an hendecane of b. pt. 186^-197°, sp. gr. 0.7662, and a dodecane
of b. pt. 2i4°-2i6°, sp. gr. 0.7684. Mesitylene, cumol, pseudo-
cumol, cymol, isocymol, durol, isodurol are probably present in
small quantities. Ohio Trenton petroleum, within the same
limits, contains the same members ; the higher specific gravity
of the distillates being caused by a larger proportion of aromatic
hydrocarbons. The fractions of Canadian comiferous petro-
leum from Petrolica, boiling between 163° and 173° contain the
same constituents. The hydrocarbons collecting between 196*
and 214° aie of the CnHan series. The proportion of aromatic
hydrocarbons is greater in Canadian than in Ohio petroleum.
Refractive Power of the HydrocariM>ns and Clilorine I>eriva-
tives Descrilied in tlie Preceding Paper. By C. P. Mabbry
AND E. T. Hudson. Proc, Am. Acad. Arts and Sci., 32, 179-
182. — A comparison of the compounds from Pennsylvania petro-
leum shows a lower refractive index than the same compound
from Ohio and Canadian petroleum, as well as a lower specific
gravity. The effect of the second chlorine atom in raising the
refractive index is also well illustrated.
On the Composition of a South American Petroleum. By
C. F. Mabery and a. S. Kittelberger. Proc. Am. Acad.
Arts and Set., 32, 185-191 ; Am. Chem. /., 19, 374-381. — The
oil came from the Magdalena river, in the United States of
Columbia, and was dark and thick, and of 0.948 sp. gr. at 20^.
It contained a small quantity of sulphur and was peculiar in the
Geological and Mineralogical Chemistry, 115
instability of its least volatile portions, that boiling from 310°-
345^ cracking badly on distillation. It may contain naphthenes
and possibly some of the benzene series. It resembles the Rus-
sian oils.
W. O. Crosby, Rbvxbwer.
A Relatively Acid Dike in the Connecticut Triassic Area.
By Edward Otis Hovey. Am, J, Sci,, 153, 287-292. — One of
the striking features of the Triassic igneous rocks of the Atlantic
border, from Nova Scotia to North Carolina, is their uniformity
in appearance and in mineralogical and chemical composition.
The only previously, noted variations from the monotony of the
diabase traps have been rocks of slightly more basic character.
But the author has discovered in the Triassic strata near New
Haven, and in intimate association with dikes of the normal
diabase, two small dikes of distinctly more acid character. One
complete analysis (SiO, = 60.13) is given, and an analysis of
the normal Triassic diabase (SiO, = 51.78) is quoted for com-
parison. The composition of the new rock indicates that it be-
longs to the group of keratophyres.
The Granitic Roclcs of the i>ynimid Pealc District, Sierra
Nevada, California. By Waldemar Lindgren. Am, J, Sci,,
153, 301-314. — The granitic rocks include granitite, granodio-
rite, and diorite. The granodiorite is an intermediate or tran-
sition type, and the diorite varies in the other direction to au-
gite porphyrite. Complete bulk analyses of the granitite and
granodiorite are given, and partial analyses of both these and
the other types. From these analyses the proportions of the
component minerals are calculated, the potash, soda, and lime
feldspars being distinguished. The paper closes with a brief
discussion of the general relations and succession of the rocks,
which leaves much to be desired as regards the definiteness of
the conclusions stated.
On Roeblingite, a New Silicate from Franklin Furnace, N.
J., Containing Sulphur Dioxide and Lead. By S. L. Pen-
field AND H. W. Foote. Am, J, Sci,, 153, 413-415. — This
new species, from a depth of a thousand feet in the great deposit
of zinc ores at Franklin Furnace, is of peculiar interest, from
the facts that silicates containing lead are very rare, and that
this is the first time that a sulphite has been ob^rved in nature.
Although the mineral occurs in dense, white, compact masses,
it is definitely known that it cannot be a mixture. The average
of two very accordant analyses is : SiO,, 23.58 ; SO,, 9.00 ;
PbO, 31.03 ; MnO, 2.48 ; CaO, 25.95 ; SrO, 1.40 ; K,0, 0.13 ;
Na,0, 0.40 ; H,0, 6.35 = 100.32 per cent. The nearest ap-
proach to a simple ratio is believed to be SiO, : SO, : PbO : RO
ii6 Review of American Chemical Research.
H,0 = 5:2:2:7:5, giving the rather complicated formula
H„Ca,Pb,SijS,0„. The water is driven o£f at a rather high
temperature and is therefore regarded as hydroxyl.
Bacteria and the Decomposition of Rocks. By John C.
Brannbr. Am. J, Sci,, 153, 438-442. — The author reviews the
various published statements concerning the occurrence of bac-
teria in rocks and soils and their influence upon the decay of
rocks, and finds the following conclusions to be more or less
probable. The bacteria found in decayed rocks are chiefly the
nitrifying forms, which reduce nitrogenous matter to nitric acid.
These are not absolutely dependent upon organic food ; that is,
they may live in wholly inorganic media, but, in common with
all bacteria, they require carbon and nitrogen. They are in-
capable of separating these elements from the air or water, but
can obtain them only from organic bodies and certain salts
which occur but rarely, if at all, in ordinary rock formations.
Living bacteria are, therefore, practically limited to points near
the surface, and to the decayed rocks ; they cannot, then, be a
primary or important cause of rock decay.
On Wellsite, a New Hineral. By J. H. Pratt and H. W.
FooTE. Am. J. Sci.y 153, 443-448. — This new species occurs in
the Buck Creek Corundum Mine, Clay County, N. C, inti-
mately associated with corundum, albite, and hornblende. The
crystallographic and physical features of the mineral show it to
be closely related to the phillipsite and harmotome group of
zeolites, and this view is fully corroborated by the chemical com-
position. The average of the two accordant analyses gives :
SiO„ 43-86; A1,0„ 24.96 ; BaO, 5.07 ; SrO, 1.15 ; CaO, 5.80;
MgO, 0.62 ; K,0, 3.40; Na,0, 1.80; H,0, 13.35— 100.01. The
ratio of SiO, : A1,0, : RO (alkalies and earths) : H,0 is approxi-
mately 3:1:1:3, giving the formula R"Al,Si,0„.3H,0. Only
one molecule of water is given off below 200* C., and regarding
this alone as water of crystallization leads to the formula
H^R"Al,Si,0„.H,0. A comparison with the other minerals of the
phillipsite group, places it at the beginning of the series :
Wellsite RAl,Si,0„.3H,0.
Phillipsite RAl,Si,0„.4iH,0.
Harmotome RAl,Si.0.,.5H,0.
Stilbite RAl,Si,0,..6H,0.
The analyses of phillipsite vary considerably, and the authors
regard 4 : 4 as the most probable normal ratio of SiO, : H,0.
The minerals then form a regular series in which this ratio is
constantly unity. The relations of these minerals to the feld-
spars are discussed, and the discovery of another member of
the series with the SiO, : H,0 = 2 : 2, is predicted.
Geological and Mineralogical Chemistry, 117
Italian Petroloicical Sketches, I V. The Rocca flonf Ina Rei[:ion.
By Henry S. Washington. /. GeoL, 5, 241-256. — Rocca
Monfina is another one of the extinct and composite Italian vol-
canoes, but in comparison with those previously described by
this author, the order of succession of the lavas is reversed : ( i ) ,
the leucitic, the oldest, which is subdivided into two sub-phases
characterized by leucitites and leucite tephrites ; (2), the
trachytic ; (3) , the basaltic, which is the youngest. This is
also the order of abundance, the leucitic lavas largely predomi-
nating. The petrographic descriptions are in several instances
accompanied by chemical analyses. These include : ( i ) leucite
tephrite, of which a widely different analysis by vom Rath is
also quoted, the two agreeing closely only in the alumina and
soda; and (2), biotite vulsinite, a trachytic rock of which two
other analyses are quoted for comparison.
The Bauxite Deposits of Arkansas. By J. C. Brannbr. /.
GeoL, 5, 263-289. — This is a full and systematic account of these
deposits, which are of great extent, and have a large prospective
value. Under the head of composition are given, first, four
analyses of ferruginous bauxite, the percentage of iron ranging
from 54.2 to 66.83, showing that the bauxites grade into impure
iron ores. Two analyses of siliceous bauxite are then com-
pared with an analysis of typical kaolin, to show that kaolin is
practically another limit of variation. Finally ten analyses of
Arkansas, and three of foreign bauxites are given in tabular
form for comparison, the purest Arkansas sample yielding SiO„
2.00, and Fe,0„ 1.66 per cent. The origin of the bauxite
deposits is discussed at some length, the author's view being
that they are genetically connected with the eruptive syenite
of that region.
Hornblende Basalt in Northern California. By J. S. Diller.
Am, Geal,, 19, 253-255. — This is a study of a water-worn cob-
ble stone, the rock not having been found in place. A complete
analysis by L. G. Eakins is given, and three other analyses of
hornblende-basalts are quoted for comparison.
On the Genesis of Clay Stones. By H. W. Nichols. Am.
Geol,, 19, 324-329. — This paper is an application of the modern
theories of saturated solutions, to the problem of the clay stone
the segregation of mineral substances in the rocks being in gen-
eral a passage from a more soluble to a less soluble form. Calcium
carbonate, for example, changes from aragonite to calcite in
the formation of clay stones.
The Anorthosites of the Rainy Lake Region. By A. P.
CoLBMAN. Can. Record Sci.^ 7, 230-235. — Reprinted from/.
Geol. See this Rev., 3, No. 4.
ii8 Review of American Chemical Research,
On the Chemical Composition of Some Kansas Qypsum
Rocks. By E. H. S. Bailey and W. M. Whitten. Kan.
Univ, Quart., 6, 29-34. — Twelve anal3'ses of gypsum from four
different counties are given, and the proportions of the
various constituents as they probably exist in the rock are cal-
culated from each analysis. These show that the material is
in the main of a high degree of purity, the majority of the
analyses closely approximating the theoretical composition of
gypsum. The chief impurities are the calcium and magnesium
carbonates.
The L^ucite Hills of Wyoming. By J. F. Kemp. Bull.
Geol. Soc. Am.^ 8, 169-182. — The Leucite Hills, situated in
southwestern Wyoming, are surface flows of a highly vesicular
leucitic lava. Two analyses are given, one original, and the
other quoted from Zirkel, and seven analyses of the leucitic
rocks from other regions are also quoted for comparison. The
author concludes from the composition and the petrographic fea-
tures that the rock is best described as leucite phonolite, which
shades into leucitites and related types.
Dialiase Pitchstone and Mud Enclosures of the Triassic
Trap of New England. By B. K. Emerson. Bull. Geol. Soc.
Am., 8, 59-86. — The absorption of large volumes of water and
mud by the submarine lava flows has caused the mass to cool as
a spherulitic glass, with a minute crackling, which gives it a
pitchy luster and a large content of water (4.72 per cent.), thus
forming a basic pitchstone, which does not seem to have been
described before. A single very complete analysis of the pitch-
stone, by H. N. Stokes, is given, and this shows that the rock
is somewhat more basic (SiO,= 46.86 per cent.) than the nor-
mal diabase.
Erosion at Base-level. By Marius R. Campbell. Bull.
Geol. Soc. Am., 8, 221-226. — This paper supplements the pre-
ceding one, being an attempt to apply the principle that silica
and aluminous silicates (quartz and clay) are readily soluble in
swamp waters, in explaining the sharp line of demarcation ob-
served in many Appalachian valleys between the base-leveled
bottoms and the lateral slopes.
•« riineral Soap." By W. C. Knight. Eng. Min. f., 63,
600-601. — This mineral, which it is proposed to call Tay-
lorite, occurs in the Fort Benton shales of southwestern Wyo-
ming. It is a soft, unctuous clay, with a marked soapy feeling in
water, and is associated with gypsum and mirabilite. Four
analyses are given, which show it to be essentially a siliceous
kaolin, the chief impurities other than silica being ferric oxide
and magnesia.
Geological and Mineralogical Chemistry, 119
Analysis of a Variety of llmenite. By George M. Peek.
Am, Chem,/., 19, 232. — The material analyzed is from Bedford
County. Virginia. It yielded : TiO„ 63.31 ; FeO, 35.99; MgO,
0.82; SiO„ 1.25= 101.37. This composition affords approxi-
mately the formula Fe,Ti,Og, which lies between that of typical
ilmenite (Fe,Ti,0,) and that of iserite (Fe,Ti,0„).
•* riineral Tallow" from Danby, Vermont. By L. E. Smoot.
Am, Chem,/,, 19, 233. — This peculiar substance forms a layer
two to three inches thick on the walls of a limestone cavern. It
is of a soft, smooth, putty-like consistency, and entirely devoid
of crystalline structure. Analysis gave 85.38 percent, of water;
and the dried material yielded : CaO, 52.19 ; MgO, 0.27 ; CO,,
41.31 ; SiO„ 3.57; org. mat. (bydiff.), 2.66; nitrogen, 0.053 =
100.00. The organic matter, which forms about the same pro-
portion as in an oyster shell, is regarded as an essential part of
the deposit, the conclusion being that this large amount of cal-
cium carbonate has been secreted by some minute form of life.
Analysis of Dolomitic Marble from Texas, fid. By George
C. Buck. Am, Chem, /., 19, 234. — The analysis shows that
this valuable marble approximates fairly to a true dolomite.
Analysis of an Alum Water from Lee Co., Va. By L. K.
Smoot. Am. Chem. J,, 19, 234-235. — This water has a strong
alum taste, and yielded 3.715 grams per liter of aluminum, iron,
and sodium sulphates, the first largely predominating.
Analyses of Infusorial Earth. By F. W. Smither. Am.
Chem, y., 19, 235-236. — Three samples were analyzed, from
Richmond and King George Cos., Va., and Calvert Co., Md.
The second is of exceptional purity, containing 65.83 percent,
of amorphous silica. The chief impurities are quartz and clay,
with only traces of lime and magnesia.
Solution of Silica Under Atmospheric Conditions. By C.
Wii^i^ARD Hayes. Bull. Geol. Soc. Am,, 8, 213-220. — The
author states that while it is doubtless true that, considered
in its relations to other rock-forming minerals, quartz is one of the
most insoluble, some recent observations show that under certain
conditions now existing at the earth's surface, quartz is by no means
proof against chemical, as well as mechanical, agents of erosion.
Various observed cases of the solution of silica are then de-
scribed^ including geodes and quartzose conglomerates and
sandstones ; and it is attributed to the agency of the humic
acids. By the oxidation of the vegetable tissues in the process
of decay the humic acids are formed, chiefly humic and crenic.
These absorb varying quantities of free nitrogen from the air
I20 Review of American Chemical Research.
forming the azo-humic acids, which in turn combine with free
silica. The resulting complex acids combine with alkaline car-
bonates, particularly potassium carbonate, to form easily solu-
ble salts. The author regards the presence of potassium car-
bonate as probably an essential factor in the process. Thenard
has shown that the amount of silica dissolved by azo-humic acid
is proportional to the content of nitrogen, varying from 7 to 24
per cent.
GENERAL AND PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.
A. A. NOYB8, Rbvibwbr..
Fourth Annual Report of the Committee on Atomic Weights.
Results Published in iW6. By F. W. Clarke. /. Am. Chem.
Sac., xg, 359-369. — A summary is g^ven of the atomic weight
determinations published during the preceding year. The mean
results referred to oxygen as 16, are given below. The values
adopted by Clarke, in his report of last year, are inserted in
parentheses for the sake of comparison.
Hydrogen (Thomsen, Ztschr. anorg. Chem., 12, 4), 1.0083
(1.0076).
Silver (Hardin, /. Am. Chem. Sac, 18, 990), 107.928
(107.92).
Nitrogen (Hibbs, /. Am. Chem. Sac., 18, 1044), 14.01 17
(14.04).
Arsenic (Hibbs,/. Am. Chem. Sac., 18, 1044), 74.916 (75.09).
Magnesium (Richards and Parker, Ztschr. anarg. Chem.,
i3» 81) 24.362 (24.29).
Cadmium (Hardin, /. Am. Chem, Sac., 18, 990), 112.027
("1.93)-
Mercury (Hardin, /. Am. Chem. Sac, 18, 990), 199.989
(200.0).
Tellurium (Chikashige, /. Am. Chem. Sac, 69, 881), 127.59
(127.0).
Tungsten (Schneider, /. praki. Chem., 53, 288), 184.01
(184.84).
Tungsten (Shinn, Dissertalian) 184.91 (184.84).
The article closes with a revised table of atomic weights.
The Nature of the Chemical Elements. Argon and Helium
in the Periodic Sequence. By Charles Skeele Palmer.
Proc Cal. Sci. Sac, Jan. 4, 1897, i-io. — ^The article is extremely
hypothetical and visionary. Many of the statements are only
verbally intelligible.
Analytical Chemistry, 121
riass Law Studies, II. By S. F. Taylor. /. Phys, Chem.,
1, 461-473. — See this Rev,, 3, 75.
Solubility and Freezing Point. By D. McIntosh. /. Phys.
Chem,, I, 474-492.
On Potassium Lead Iodide. By J. M. Talmadge. /. Phys.
Chetn,, I, 493-498.
H. M. Goodwin, Rbvibwbr.
Surface Tension of Water and of Dilute Aqueous Solutions.
By N. Ernest Dorsey. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ, 16, 44.
— The author employed Lord Rayleigh's method of ** rip-
ples" for determining the surface tension of water and aqueous
solutions of sodium chloride, potassium chloride, sodium carbon-
ate, potassium carbonate and zinc sulphate, of concentrations
varying from 0.05 normal to normal. The method gave results
accurate to about one-seventh per cent. The value found for
pure water was Tw = 75.98 dynes per centimeter, at o"* C. For
the solutions employed it was found that the surface tension was
a linear function of the concentration, and could be expressed
by the formula T. = Tw+ kC. The values found for K are
given below: NaCl, 1.53; KCl, 2.23; |Na,CO„ 2.00; JK,CO„
1.77; ZnSO,, 1.86.
Velocity of Silver Ions in Aqueous and Alcoholic Solutions.
By W. T. Mather. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ, 16, 45-46. —
Experiments upon the effect of temperatures ranging from o^ to
50^ on the transference numbers of silver nitrate and acetate in
aqueous solution, confirmed the law well established by Brin, that
the value approaches 0.5 with rising temperature. (Both of these
salts have already been very carefully investigated by Loeb and
Nemst. ) In absolute alcohol the transference number for the
anion NO. was found about 10 per cent, greater than in water,
while in a 50 per cent, solution the value was the same. The
results are published as preliminary.
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.
UI.TIMATE ANALYSIS.
H. P. Talbot, Rbvibwbk.
Determination of Potash and Phosphoric Acid in Fodders.
By H. W. Wiley. /. Am. Chem. Soc., 19, 320-322. — The pro-
cedure described is a modification of the Lindo-Gladding
method, and provides for the determination of the phosphoric
acid and potash in the same sample, if desired. By this method
ten samples may be examined per day without sacrifice of accu-
racy.
122 Review of American Chemical Research,
Sodium Peroxide as a Third Group Reagent. By S. W.
Parr. /. Am, Chem. Soc,, 19, 341-346. — The peroxide throws
down from a nitric acid solution of the sulphides of the group,
iron, manganese, cobalt and nickel, while the zinc, aluminum
and chromium remain in solution, the latter undergoing oxida-
tion to chromate, thus avoiding interference with the zinc. A
scheme is given for the further separation of these metals. The
procedure proposed in the presence of phosphates, involving the
addition of tin, appears to be less satisfactory.
On the i>etermination of Silica in Blast Furnace 5lag. By
G. H. Meeker. /. Am. Chem, Soc, 19, 370-374. — The dehy-
dration of the silicic acid by means of concentrated sulphuric
acid, instead of by heat, is the essential feature of the pro-
cedure, for which both rapidity and accuracy are claimed. The
filtrate from the silica thus obtained cannot, however, be util-
ized for the determination of either aluminum or calcium. The
method yields satisfactory results in the presence of spinel.
The Determination of Lead in Lead Ores. By Richard R.
Meade. /. Am. Chem, Sac,, 19, 374-377; -£'«^. Min. /., 63,
313. — It is proposed to treat the ore in a platinum vessel with
nitric and sulphuric acids, and after the removal of the former,
to add hydrochloric acid and expel the excess. The remaining
lead sulphate is then filtered and ignited as usual. Other metals
forming insoluble sulphates must be absent.
Note on the 5e|>aration of Silicic and Tungstic Acids. By
James S. de Bennevii^le. /. Am. Chem, Soc, 19, 377-379. —
The author points out that silica is not insoluble in ammonia
and that the volatilization method, recommended by Arnold
{Steel Works Analysis) , is unquestionably preferable for the sep-
aration of these acids.
The Electrolytic Determination of Cadmium. By S. Avery
and Benton Dales. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 379-382 and 513.
— The authors find that the double oxalate and acetic acid
methods for the determination of cadmium are unsatisfactory ;
the cyanide method yields fair results with relatively large amounts
of cadmium, and the formate method yields satisfactory results,
provided certain conditions, which they prescribe, are rigidly
maintained.
Note on the Volatility of Boric Acid ; Se|iaration of Boric and
Phosphoric Acid ; Estimation of Boric Acid in Foods. By L.
DE KoNiNGH. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 385-388. — Experimental
evidence is offered to show that boric acid is not appreciably
volatile with steam, until the solution is evaporated nearly to
dryness. Calcium chloride is employed to throw down phos-
Analytical Chemistry, 123
phoric acid, when present, before the titration of boric acid. The
use of zinc oxide in food analysis to remove the phosphoric acid
is proposed. Its efficiency has not been fully established.
The Volumetric Determination of Lead. By J. II. Wain-
WRIGHT. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 19,389-393. — The procedure pro-
posed is a modification of one already given in Crookes' Select
Methods. The lead is precipitated by means of potassium
bichromate, from an acetic acid solution, using a solution of
silver nitrate as an outside indicator. The author claims that
the method is rapid and of moderate accuracy. The paper is
somewhat confused by the unfortunate use of carbonate for chro-
^a/^ on pages 390 and 392.
Analysis of Phosphor Bronze, Phosphor Copper, Phosphor
Tin, Etc. By Max Wickhorst. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 396-
398. — The paper presents detailed procedures for the determi-
nation of phosphorus in any of the alloys named, and for the
complete analysis of phosphor bronze.
Notes on the Estimation of Cyanogen by Silver Nitrate,
Using Potassium Iodide and Ammonia as Indicators. By
William J. Sharwood. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 400-434. —
The paper presents the results of an exhaustive study of the re-
action between the cyanide and the nitrate under varying con-
ditions. The results can hardly be briefly summarized ; refer-
ence must therefore be made to the original article.
Qualitative Separations with Sodium Nitrite in Absence of
Phosphates, Etc. By GillettWynkoop. /. Am. Chem. Soc,
19, 434-436. — The author finds that iron, chromium and alumi-
num are precipitated completely by sodium nitrite from a boiling
solution containing a small quantity of free acid, while nickel,
cobalt, zinc and manganese are not thrown down. The separa-
tion seems to be more complete than that effected by the use of
barium carbonate.
Table for the Calculation of Analyses. By Edward Barton
AND John Navarre Marcomb, Jr. Kansas Univ. Quart. ^ 6,
59-60.
W. H. Walkbr, Reviewer.
Determination of Arsenic in Copper and Cupriferous Solu-
tions. By Titus Ulke. Eng. Min, /., 63, 454. — About ten
grams of the sample are treated with a mixture made up of
equal parts of strong hydrochloric acid and a saturated solution
of ferric chloride, and repeatedly distilled. All the arsenic is
then found in the colorless distillate as arsenious chloride,
and may be determined either by titration with standard iodine
solution, or gravimetrically as arsenious sulphide.
124 Review of American Chemical Research,
W. H. WALtKBK., Rbvibwbr.
The Complete Analysis of Chrome Ore. By A. G. McKknna.
Proc, Eng. Soc. Western Pa., 63, 180-182. — The dried sample is
fused in a nickel crucible (platinum is very easily attacked by
this reagent) with an excess of sodium peroxide for a few min-
utes. This ensures complete decomposition of the ore, after which
the sodium chromate formed is dissolved and determined vol-
umetrically with a standard solution of a ferrous salt. The other
constituents of the ore are separated and determined by the usual
quantitative methods.
PROXIMATE ANAI^YSIS.
G. W. Rolfs, Rbvikwrk.
A Recalculation of Wein's Table of Starch Equivalent to
Copper Found Based on the Factor 0.9a. By Wii«i«iam H.
Krug. /. Am, Chem. Sac,, 19, 452. — This factor, 0.92, is that
suggested by Wiley as the mean between Nageli's, 0.918, and
0.925 of Ost.
An Anal3rtical Investigation of the Hydrolysis of Starch by
Acids. By G. W. R01.FE and Geo. Defrkn. Tech, Quart,, 10,
133-166. — A revision of an earlier article in the same journal.
The Determination of Reducing Sugars in Terms of Cupric
Oxide. By Geo. Defren. lech. Quart., 10, 167-182. — A revi-
sion of an earlier paper.
Improved Method for the Determination of the Specific
Gravity of Molasses. By J. C. Boor. La. Planter and Sugar
Mfr., 18, 415. — The author suggests a modification of Sider-
sky's method {Ztschr. fur Rubenzucker Indus,, 1881, 192) in
which a potassium carbonate solution of approximately the same
specific gravity as the molasses is used to dilute the latter to the
required volume. This obviates the necessity of determining the
exact volume of the molasses itself by a separate weighing. The
author shows that the error introduced under ordinary condi-
tions is not over one one- thousandth.
p. H. Thorp, Rbvibwbr.
Method of Drying Sensitive Organic Substances. By C. C.
Parsons. /. Am, Chem,, Soc,, 19, 388. — The moisture in such
substances as soap, wood pulp, and the like, may be determined
by dividing the material into small, thin pieces and introducing
these directly into a known weight of paraffine oil, which has
been heated for some time to 250® C, before using. The mix-
ture is put into a hot closet at 240"" C. , for a few minutes, and then
weighed. The loss is called moisture. The operation seldom
Analytical Chemistry, 125
requires more than twenty minutes, and no decomposition of the
substance takes place under the oil.
W. R. Whitnbt, Reviewer.
Riegler's Method for Estimating Susrar in Urine. By Henry
C. C. Maisch. Am. /. Fharm,, 69, 294-296. — The author
gives reasons for his adverse criticism of the method for the de-
termination of sugar in urine by means of Pehling solution,
pointing out the fact, confirmed by his own experimental inves-
tigation, that other reducing bodies than sugars may, by their
presence, introduce errors. He recommends the method of Riib-
ner, or Penzoldt's modification. This is a colorimetric test, the
sugar being estimated by the depth of color in the precipitate
which ammonia produces in the urine after it has been treated
with lead acetate solution, and filtered.
Notes on Opium Assaying. By Frank X. Mobrk. Am. /.
Pharm,, 69, 343-350. — These notes are valuable additions to the
methods for the assaying of opium. The author recognizes
the imperfections of all existing methods, and points to the need
of more exact processes. Tables are given showing some re-
sults and exhibiting variations which are inconsistent with per-
fect methods, but which make evident the comparative value
of the lime-water method.
Analytical Processes and Laboratory Notes. By Chas. La-
Wai.1.. Am. J, Pharm., 69, 350-352. — Directions for a rapid and
accurate method for the determination of caffeine in kola, guarana,
cofiFee, etc., are given. The material is treated with dilute am-
monia and shaken out with chloroform. The filtered solution,
on evaporation, leaves the fat and alkaloid, from which the fat is
extracted with ether and the dried residue weighed. A note
concerning the estimation of alkaloids in white hellebore follows,
and the article concludes with a discussion of the purity of so-
called "C. P.*' chemicals. The reviewer cannot agree with the
author in his opinion concerning the use of ** C. P.,*' and would
deprecate the advancement of the idea that the " U. S. P." re-
quirements represent a higher degree of purity than our older
well-known •* C. P.*' should. The mark ** C. P." ought to in-
dicate such a degree of purity of a preparation that present
chemical methods can show no appreciable impurity, and the
consequent and necessarily infrequent use of the term '*chem-
ically pure* * should then be an evidence of its strict propriety.
The Estimation of flenthol in Oil of Peppermint. By Ci^bm-
BNS Ki^BBBR. Pharm. Rev,, 15, 135. — This paper presents a
brief comparison of the author's method for the determination of
126 Review of American Chemical Research,
menthol with that of Kebler, and concludes with a rapid, ap-
proximate method, in which a comparison is made of the titra-
tion value (in terms of sodium hydrate) of a definite quantity
of acetic anhydride with the value of the same quantity after
boiling 30 minutes with the oil containing menthol.
TECHNICAL CHEMISTRY.
p. H. Thorp, Reviewer.
Artificial Silk in Qennany. By Georgb Sawter. U. S.
Consular Rep., 54, 10.7- no. — The paper gives a brief description
of the Lehner process for the production of artificial silk from
wood pulp (see U. S. Consular Rep,, 48, 266), and also of the
Seyfert process for its production from cotton yam. The cotton
is treated with a cold solution of caustic soda of 30° B6,, and
then dried on a stretcher reel, under strong tension. The yam
is afterwards thoroughly washed, and dyed. The new artificial
silk is very strong, non-infiammable, and it is claimed that washing
does not injure its lustre.
Quebracho Tanning in Uruguay. By Edgar Schramm.
LI, S, Consular Rep., 53, 495. — The advantages of quebracho
wood as a tanning material and as lumber, are well presented.
For use in tanning, the entire log is chipped up to a coarse sawdust
and leached in much the same manner that oak bark is treated.
It is claimed to be richer in tannins than oak bark.
Photography in Natural Colors. By Frank H. Mason.
LI, S, Consular Rep,, 53, 518-521. — This is a popular account of
a new process, invented by M. Chassagne. An ordinary dry
plate is treated with an unnamed colorless solution, and then
exposed, developed, and fixed in the usual manner, producing a
monochromatic negative. Sensitized paper or gelatine film is
also treated with the colorless solution and printed by contact,
in the usual way. The print appears like an ordinary one, but
is said to have acquired the power of selective absorption for
dyes, so that if it is pa^ed successively through solutions of red,
green, and blue dyes, a proportionate amount of each color is
taken up locally, to reproduce the colors of the natural object.
No information is givien as to the nature of the liquids used.
ilanufacture of Phosphor Bronze. By Max H. Wickhorst.
/. Am, Chem. Soc, , 19, 393-395. — The phosphorus added to bronze
to deoxidize the metal may be introduced as phosphorus or as
a high phosphorus alloy, called *' hardener.** This contains
six per cent, of phosphorus, with copper and tin in the ratio of
eight to one. The * 'hardener** is made by melting 90 pounds of
Technical Chemistry, 127
copper and adding 1 1 pounds of tin. Seven pounds of phos-
phorus are put into a dilute solution of blue vitriol, until coated
with metallic copper. This protects the phosphorus when it is
dried in the air. After drying, the sticks of copper-plated phos-
phorus are introduced into the melted bronze, two or three at a
time, and held below the surface of the metal by a cup-shaped
tool. The phosphorus melts and combines with the metal at
once, to form ** hardener.**
On the Manufacture of Dynamite. By G. E. Barton. /.
Am, Chem, Soc., 19, 500-509. — This paper presents a descrip-
tion of the plant and the method used in the manufacture of
dynamite. Two classes of dynamite are recognized : that con-
sisting of nitroglycerol absorbed in wood pulp, or kieselguhr,
with various fillers, such as sodium nitrate, etc. ; and those called
gelatin dynamites, consisting of nitroglycerol, gelatinized with
nitrated cellulose. The first class is discussed in this article.
The numerous precautions to be taken in arranging and in
operating the plant, the tests of materials and yields obtained,
are all shown. The treatment of the spent acids is also con-
sidered, and recovery by running through a Glover tower is ad-
vised. The mixing of the nitroglycerol with the absorbent is
best done in a wheel-mill with wooden wheels. For packing
the dynamite in the cartridge papers, wooden pack-sticks are
best.
The Commercial PrefMiration of Nitronaphthalenes. By
WiLUAM H. Krug AND J. E. BtOM^N. /. Am. Chem. Sac.,
'9» 532-538. — Nitronaphthalenes are chiefly used in nitroglyc-
erol explosives, to reduce sensitiveness to concussion and to
prevent freezing of the dynamite. It also increases the solvent
action of nitroglycerol on nitrated cellulose. The nitronaph-
thalenes used should be as highly nitrated as possible. In order
to determine the conditions necessary for the best yield, the
authors tried nitrating naphthalene-sulphonic acid under various
conditions, and also nitrating naphthalene directly. It was
found that the yield of nitronaphthalene decreased proportion-
ally to the degree of sulphonation in the case of or-naphthalene-
sulphonic acid. Direct nitration of naphthalene gave better
yields, and the best results were obtained by using a mixture of
nitric acid 26^ B6., and sulphuric acid, the quantity of the lat-
ter depending on the degree of nitration desired. For low melt-
ing products, four parts of nitric to one of sulphuric were used ;
for high melting products, three parts to two. An excess of
sulphuric acid chars the product, producing much tar.
128 Review of American Chemical Research.
BIOLXKilCAL CHEHISTRY.
9. H. RiCHARDSf RJEVIBWRR.
Dietary Studies. The Pood of tlie Ne^rro in Alabama. By
W. O. Atwater and Chas. D. Woods. U. S. ExpL Sta,
Bui. No. 38, 1-69. — This report gives in detail the food con-
sumed by eighteen families living in the neighborhood of Tuske-
gee, Ala., and is by far the most comprehensive contribution to
this vital question for the whole race. The cost per man per
day ranged from two and one-quarter to nineteen and three-
quarters cents. Ten dietaries cost less than eight cents and seven
less than six cents per day, yet only five gave an abnormally low
fuel value. As might have been predicted from the experience
of employers, the nitrogenous substances were uniformly low.
Fourteen of the twenty dietaries (two families were tested in both
winter and summer) contained from one-fourth to one-half the
required proportion.
Dietaries of the Public institutions of the City of Boston.
By E. H. Richards and S. E. Wbntworth. Rep. of the In-
stitutions\ Dept., City Document /^, iSgj, 206-219. — The
authors make a statement of the facts established by their
investigation, and recommend certain standards for the different
classes of public institutions.
Dietary Studies in New Mexico. By Arthur Goss. U. S.
Agr. Expt. Sta. BuU., No. 40, 1-23. — This Bulletin contains im-
portant data not elsewhere found, in the form of analyses of food
materials used in the Central American regions, and the dieta-
ries are of more than usual interest in view of our limited knowl-
edge of the food of the Mexicans, both as to quality and cost.
Here, as elsewhere, sufficient food seems to be procurable at a
cost of from six to nine cents per person daily.
The Fruit Soils of Oregon and the Composition of Oregon
Prunes. By G. W. Shaw. Reprint from Ore. Expt. Sta. Bull ,
No. 45, 1-98.
Removal of Iron from Ground Waters. By H. W. Ci^arkk.
/. A^. E. Water Works Assoc, 11, 277-284. — The author sug-
gests the use of coke as a more efficient filtering material than
sand for the removal of iron from certain classes of waters, and
in support of this view gives the results of experiments at Prov-
incetown, Mass.
The Iron Removal Plant at Reading, Mass. By Lewis M.
Bancroft. /. N. E. Water Works Assoc., 11,294-300. — The
use of lime and alum for the removal of iron from a water which
Biological Chemistry. 129
does not yield to simple aeration and filtration, is described, and
a table of analyses given.
W. R. Whitnbt, Rbvxkwbk.
Internal Secretion Considered from a Clieniico-pliysioio|s:ical
Standpoint. By R. H. Chittenden. Science, 5, 967-977. —
The author treats exhaustively a single internal secretion, that
of the rudimentary gland of the neck, the thyroid, known as the
seat of the goitre. The effects on the metabolism of persons
and animals (both normal and thyroidectomized), brought about
by the administration of the gland, or its extracts, are pointed
out. These, together with the recognized change produced in
the blood and upon the quantity of mucus in different parts of
the body, afford sufficient evidence that this vestigial gland pro-
duces one or more secretions necessary to the animal body.
Concerning the chemical and physiological nature of the princi-
pal product, which the author calls *' a proteid of peculiar con-
stitution," not much is known. It is peculiar in that *' it tends
to hold a certain amount of iodine in combination," and yields
on decomposition by acids or gastric juices, iodothyrin, a non-
proteid, difficultly decomposable compound containing phos-
phorus and iodine. The physiological action of iodothyrin is
further considered, as well as the presence of a relatively high
percentage of iodine in the material of the gland.
Tlie Nitrogen-free Extract of Piants and Feeding Stuffs.
By B. T0LI.ENS. U. S, ExpL Sta, Rec, 8, 641-661.— This
article is introduced by a detailed consideration of the constitu-
ents of the so-called carbohydrates of food material, and atten-
tion is called to the fact :that other substances which are not
strictly carbohydrates are here classed as such. Uncertainties
regarding the proper method of analysis of crude fiber are also
pointed out, and some erroneous notions regarding the food value
of these constituents are corrected. The author properly recog-
nizes the true value of the well-known Wende extraction method
and points out the need for more exact and discriminating pro-
cedures.
The Root of Phytolacca Decandra. Part 11. By S. B.
Frankporter and F. Ramaley. Am, /. Pharm., 69, 281-
290. — The paper opens with abstracts of the literature concern-
ing the chemical composition of the root. Of the results of their
own investigations, the authors give the percentages of substance
extracted by common solvents ; a summary of analyses showing
the amount of wax, resin, proteids, starch, acid (formic), etc.,
present ; and the results of the study of the sugar extracted.
No body of a glucosidal or alkaloidal nature was detected.
130 Review of American Chemical Research,
On the Occurrence of Strontium in Plants. By Henry
Trimbi«k. Am, J. Pharm., 69, 296-297. — The author has
demonstrated the presence of strontium in several samples of
bark and points to the fact that little or no attention has been
given to its possible presence in the ashes of plants other than
sea plants. '
Alfalfa or Lucem ; its Chemical Life History. By John A.
WiDTSOE. Bull. Utah Agr, College, 48, 1-73. — The paper pre-
sents a thorough discussion of the subject, and is so arranged as
to show the composition of successive crops of the lucem. It is
supplemented by a discussion of the connection between the ana-
lytical results and the value of the material as a fodder.
The Normal Urine. By Charles Platt. /. Am, Chem. Soc,,
i9» 382-384. — This paper presents a table showing the mean
results of many urine analyses made by the author and by
others, and gives the extremes of composition between which
the normal urine may lie, including practically all of its constitu-
ents.
The Proteids of l^pin Seeds. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 454-
482 ; The Proteids of the Sunflower Seed, /did, 487-493 ; The
Proteidsof the Cow Pea. 7^494-500; The Proteid of the
White Podded Adzuici Bean, /did, 509-512. By T. B. Os-
borne AND G. P. CaMPBEI«L.
AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY.
p. H. TaORP, RBVIBWB&.
Alkali. By B. C. Bupfum. IVy. Sia. Bull., No. 29, 219-253.—
In this paper are given the details of a study of alkali in soil
and its effects upon plants. '' White alkali" consists principally
of sulphates of sodium and magnesium ; one per cent, of these
salts in the first two inches of surface soil renders it unproduc-
tive, except for plants which can inhabit alkali soils. These are
sugar-beets, white clover, sages, and alfalfa. A comparison of the
temperatures of alkaline and non-alkaline soils was made, but no
difference was detected.
The Value of Manure from Animals Fed on Linseed ileal.
By H. Snyder. Minn. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull., No. 47, 23. — Pigs
were fed on linseed meal and potatoes, and produced daily six
pounds of urine and two pounds of dung. The total quantity of
nitrogen in the two was 0.09 pound, while that in the food was
o.io pound. A very large part of the nitrogen was thus re-
turned to the soil when the linseed cake was used as feed.
Agricultural Chemistry. 131
The So-called ««Natural Plant Food" a Soft Phosphate. By
A. D. Selby. OhioAgr. Expt, Sta, Bull., No. 71, 178-184. — An
analysis showed '* natural plant food," (see this ^^z/., 3, 41,)
to be, in part at least, Florida or Tennessee soft phosphate. A
comparison between it and other standard fertilizers with refer-
ence to its action in hastening or retarding germination, showed
that it retards germination as compared with unfertilized soil,
although some of the standard fertilizers exert a still greater
retarding action.
Ammonium Thiocyanate as an Impurity in Ammonium
Sulphate. By H. J. Wheeler and B. L. Hartwell. -/?. /.
Agr. Expt. Sta. Rep., iSg^, 281-286. — This is a record of ex-
periments with pure ammonium sulphate, and that containing
ammonium thiocyanate, on oats. The results demonstrate the
poisonous action of the thiocyanate on such plants.
Analyses of Commercial Fertilizers. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull.,
Vt. , 58 and 59, and 9th Ann. Rep. , i8g6 ; Mass. Hatch Sta, , No. 45 ;
Ky. , No. G^; R.I. Sta. Rep. , iSg^, 39, 287-293 ; Mich., No. 135 ; S.
C. Sta. Rep., 1895, 54~^3 J Mass. Hatch Sta., gth Ann. Rep,, 202-
223 ; Penn. Dept. Agr. Bull., 19 ; Cal. Sta. Rep., i8g^, 135-139 ;
La., Series 2, No. 45, 56-80 ; Penn. Sta. Rep.,i8g^, 227-236 ; R. I.
No. 40, 71-79 ; Wis., No. 53; Canada Expt. Farms Rep., i8gs,
206-219.
The Fertilization of Land. ByE. W.Hilgard. Cal.Agr.Expt.
Sta. Rep.,i8g^, 123-135. — The effect of crops on the fertility of the
soil in California is considered, and the fertilizer requirements
studied. The general conclusions reached show that, with the
exception of a few localities, the soils of the state contain an
abundance of lime, and that acid soils are rare. There is also
sufficient potash in most localities, and often an excess. The rain-
fall being generally deficient, this ingredient is not washed
away ; but the greater part of California soils are deficient in
phosphoric acid, and phosphates are the chief fertilizers now re-
^quired by the farmers. Nitrogen is generally present, but in
some localities may need to be supplied. Next to phosphates,
nitrogenous fertilizers are probably most in demand, except in
the alkali regions, where an excess of nitrogen is present.
Analysis of Paris Oreen. E. W. Hilgard. Cal. Agr. Expt.
Sta, Rep., i8gs, 137. — The percentage of arsenious acid is stated
for two samples.
Experiments with Soluble, Reverted, and Insoluble Phosphoric
Acid. By E. H. Hess. Penn. Agr. Expt.Sta. Rep., i8gs, 157-210.
— The author concludes that soluble phosphates are too expen-
132 Review of American Chemical Research,
sive to use on lime soils, where equally good results are ob-
tained with insoluble phosphates ; also that ground bone is su-
perior to ground Carolina phosphate rock.
Composition of Wood Ashes Sold in Pennsylvania. By W.
pRBAR. Penn, Agr, Expt, Sta, Rep,, iSg^, 224-226. — Analy-
ses of fifteen samples are given, with comments.
Some Pennsylvania Peats. By W. Frkar and E. J.
Hai,ey. Penn, Agr, Expt, Sta, Rep,, iSg^, 148-156. — ^The
value of peat as a fertilizer is shown by the analyses of thirteen
samples. Although bulky, it offers a fertilizer well worth con-
sideration ; some varieties, however, need composting with lime
or with stable manure.
Origin, Value, and Reclalmation of Alkali Soils. By E. W.
Hii^GARD. U, S, Dept, Agr, Yearbook, i8g^, 103-122. — Among
other subjects discussed in this article are *' the influence of
irrigation on the movement of alkali," and the *' composition of
alkali salts."
inspection of Paris Qreen. By W. C. Stubbs. La. Agr,
Expt, Sta, Bull,, No, 45 {2nd Ser,), — Analyses of eight samples
are given.
Investigation on the Foraging Powers of Some Agricultural
Plants for Phosphoric Acid. By L. H. Merrill and W. H.
Jordan. Maine Sta. Rep,, iSg^, 10-18. — This paper is a con-
tinuation of the study of the fertilizing value of insoluble, as com-
pared with soluble phosphates. Among other conclusions it is
stated that young plants feed chiefly on soluble phosphates,
while with older plants the insoluble forms are assimilated. The
solubility of phosphate in ammonium citrate is not considered a
true measure of the availability of phosphoric acid to the plants.
Certain varieties of plants appear better able to assimilate insol-
uble phosphates than do others.
G. W. R01.FK, Rbvibwbr.
The Occurrence of Rafflnose In American Sugar-Beets. By
W. E. Stone and W. H. Baird. /. Am, Chem, Soc,, 19, 115-
124. — The paper presents a discussion bearing upon the occur-
rence of raffinose m beet-sugar, in which are given the results
of the researches of the authors on Nebraska beet-root molasses.
They find by a modification of the Kodyl-Sheibler method that
raffinose is present. The authors also note the remarkable fact
that raffinose in very small amounts changes the character of
cane-sugar crystals, so that they closely resemble those of pure
raffinose. They illustrate this by photo-micrographs.
Agricultural Chemistry, 133
The Susar-Beet. By H. W. Wiley. Farmers* BuU. U, 5.
Dept. ofAgr,^No, 52, 1-47. — The paper is intended to give concise
information in a popular way on the raising of sugar-beets, a
comparison of the different varieties, and the effect of climate,
soil, fertilizers, irrigation, etc., on the quality of the beets.
Methods of cultivation and manufacture, as well as data on the
cost are also given. A number of statistical tables on the
world's sugar production are added.
[Contribution prom thic Massachusetts Institute op Technoi«ogy.]
REVIEW OF AMERICAN CHEMICAL RESEARCH.
Voi«. III. No. id.
Arthur A. Noybs, Editor ; Hbnry P. Talbot, Associate Editor.
Revibwbrs: Analytical Chemistry, H. P. Talbot and W. H. Walker;
Biological Chemistry, W. R. Whitney; Carbohydrates, G. W. Rolfe ;
General Chemistry, A. A. Noyes ; Qeological ana Mineralogical Chem-
istry, W. O. Crosby ; Inorganic Chemistry, Henry Pay ; Metallurgical
Chemistry and Assaying, H. O. Hofman ; Organic Chemistry, J. P. Nor-
ris ; Physical Chemistry, H. M. Goodwin ; Sanitary Chemistry, B. H.
Richards; Technical Chemistry, A. H. Gill and P. H. Thorp.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
Hbnry Pat, Rbviewbk.
A 5tudy of Ferric Hydroxide in Precipitation. By Vbrnon
J. Hall. Am. Chem./,, 19, 512-525. — To ascertain whether
the reaction between ferric chloride, potassium hydroxide and
potassium sulphate takes place according to the equation
Fe,Cl, + 6KOH + 4K.SO, = Fe,(OH), + 6KC1 + 4K,SO„
and to learn whether the precipitation is affected by occlusion,
solutions of each of these compounds were prepared and care-
fully standardized. Precipitation of the ferric hydroxide from
solutions, each containing the same amount of iron, were made
with eight, six, five, four, three, and two molecules of potassium
hydroxide, and the resulting precipitate and filtrate analyzed for
potassium and sulphuric acid. All of the potassium and sul-
phuric acid should appear in the filtrate if the reaction proceeds
according to the equation. Using six molecules of potassium
hydroxide none of the sulphuric acid was found in the precipi-
tate, but 0.48 per cent, of the potassium (K,0) was carried
down. On diminishing the amount of potassium hydroxide below
six molecules none of the potassium was found in the precipi-
tate. On the other hand, 11 percent, of sulphuric acid (SO,)
appeared in the precipitate at five molecules, 11.5 per cent, at
four, and 9.53 per cent, and 5.52 per cent, at three and two
molecules, respectively. When the amount of potassium hy-
droxide was increased to eight molecules, more potassium was
carried down in the precipitate, while all of the sulphuric acid
appeared in the filtrate. It appears from these results that
potassium sulphate as such is not carried down in the precipi-
1
136 Review of American Chemical Research.
tate» but that the ferric hydroxide has the power of decomposing
it. In a second series the reaction
2FeCl, + 6KOH = 2Fe(OH), + 6KC1
was tested in the same way, by analyzing the precipitate and fil-
trate for potassium and chlorine to see what effect the potassium
chloride had upon the precipitation of ferric hydroxide. With
six molecules the chlorine was undisturbed ; at points short of
complete precipitation the amount of chlorine in the precipitate
decreases as the amount of the hydroxide passes from five and
one- half molecules to five, and so on. In a third series the same
reaction as in the first series containing potassium sulphate was
tested, to see how much chlorine was carried down. Prom the
results it appears that the ferric hydroxide acts on the potassium
sulphate in preference to the potassium chloride. The author
concludes that the facts observed are inconsistent with the theory
of adhesion, but that they are characteristic of chemical action.
Corrosive Sublimate in Calomel. By Lyman P. Kbblbr.
Am. J. Pharm.y 69, 338-340. — The author has found that calo-
mel occasionally contains corrosive sublimate, but according to
the most rigid tests all calomel, with a single exception, exam-
ined during several years, has not contained over o.ooooi per
cent, of corrosive sublimate.
Notes on Lucium. By Wai^dron Shapwigh. /. Franklin
Inst., 144, 68-70. — The author has shown that the precipitate
with sodium thiosulphate, on which great stress is laid as a re-
action for "lucium," can be produced by heating a concentrated
solution of the double sulphates of the yttrite group and potas-
sium, and that the precipitate is due to the heat alone and not
to the presence of the thiosulphate. One kilogram of monazite
sand was worked over, following the directions set forth in the
patent of M. Barri^re without obtaining any earth correspond-
ing to the reactions of " lucium.''
The Action of Iodine on Solutions of Stannous Chloride. By
S. W. Young and Maxwki.1* Adams. /. Am. Chem. Soc., 19,
515-525. — By treating iodine with excess of stannous chloride
solution, there is formed stannic iodide with subsequent forma-
tion of stannous iodide, and other products, probably producing
a state of equilibrium, which varies with the quantities used and
the temperature of the reaction.
The Ferrocyanidesof Zinc and ilanganese. By G. C. Stonb
AND D. A. Van Ingen. /. Am. Chem. Soc., 19, 542-547. —
Both zinc and manganese form different salts in neutral and acid
solutions, the composition of the salts varying according as the
ferrocyanide or the metallic salt is in excess. It was found im-
Metallurgical Chemtsiry, 137
possible to titrate the excess of ferrocyftnide unless the condi-
tions are always maintained absolutely the same. Among the
indicators cobalt gave the best results.
On the Ferrocyanides of Zinc and Manganese. By Edmund
H. MiLi«ER AND J. A. Mathews. /. Am, Cketn. Soc, 19, 547-
558. — The precipitates formed by potassium ferrocyanide and
zinc or manganese chlorides are double ferrocyanides, the* com-
position of which varies with the increase or decrease of one of
the constituents. The precipitate formed in a dilute hydrochloric
acid solution of zinc chloride by potassium ferrocyanide has the
composition represented by the formula Zn,K,(Fe(CN),)^, which
confirms the accuracy of the ordinary method for the quantita-
tive determination of zinc and manganese.
nETALLURQlCAL CHEMISTRY.
H. O. HOFM AN, RBVIBWBR.
Heat Requirement of the Silver-Lead Blast Furnace. By
L. S. Austin. Eng. Min,J,, ^, 634-635. — The author starts
with a certain charge consisting of foul slag, bedded ore» sili-
ceous ore, roasted ore, fine dust, oxidized lead ore, and lime-
stone, to be melted with 15 per cent, coke, calculates the result-
ing products, slag, matte and speiss and base bullion, assumes
the composition and temperature of the escaping gases and cal-
culates how the coke charged will be used up. He finds that
nearly 82 per cent, of the heat value of the fuel is consumed in
the formation of the slag and the reduction of carbon dioxide to
monoxide.
Standard Practice in Bessemerizing Copper Mattes. By C.
W. Parsons. Eng, Min, J,, 63, 481-483. — This is the first
article on the subject giving full practical details of the manner
of working.
^ The Present Status of Pyritic ' Smelting. By H. Lang.
Eng, Min.J,, 64, 37-38. — This is a defense of the work done by
the author at Keswick, Cal. The points of interest in the
lengthy article are that in the absence of alumina the single
silicate of iron forms the most desirable slag ; that the concen-
tration of copper in matte is governed principally by the amount
of silica present ; and that an excess of silica causes accretions
to form and particles of quartz to be mechanically suspended in
the slag, while a lack results in the production of a low-grade
matte. While in the absence of alumina, slags with about 30
per cent, silica were satisfactory, with alumina the percentage of
silica ran from 20 to 40 per cent. The author claims, as a result
of his work : (i) Charges with not more than 33 percent, of
X38 Review of American Chemical Research.
sulphide can be smelted with 2\ per cent, coke, making a high
concentration ; (2) the slags can be made as clean as those from
matting copper ores; and (3), as stated above, silica governs, to
a great extent, the degree of concentration.
The Peletan-Clerici Process at the De Lamar Mill, Idaho.
By D. B. Hunti^by. Eng, Min.J,, 64, 155-153. — This is an
illustrated description of a plant and process which aims to extract
by electro-amalgamation, gold and silver from ore to which a
small amount of potassium cyanide has been added. The es-
sential parts of the plant are two classes of agitators, 5 upper
ones, 8 feet in diameter and 8| feet deep, receiving through a
launder the pulp from the stamp batteries and Huntington mills,
and discharging at intervals into 10 lower ones, 8 feet 8 inches
in diameter and 4 feet deep, and holding 2} tons of ore, into
which the thick pulp is discharged to be electro-amalgamated.
A lower agitator has on the wooden bottom a copper plate form-
ing the cathode, while the vertical shaft, geared from above and
having 4 arms bearing sheet-iron plates (4 feet long, 14 inches
wide, and \ inch thick) forms the anode. The pulp in the
amalgamator (which has been charged with 600 pounds quick-
silver, covering the bottom \ inch) receives from 2^ to 3 pounds
potassium cyanide and 6 pounds of salt per ton of ore and is
treated for ii\ hours, the shaft making 20 revolutions per min-
ute, the current being of 10 volts (amperage not given). The
amalgam formed is removed twice a month and worked in the
usual way. The ore is a decomposed quartz porphyry carrying
from 0.25 to 0.50 per cent, concentrates, the valuable mineral is
partly oxidized gold- and silver-bearing iron sulphide, from }
to ^ of the value of which is gold. By raw amalgamation it
yields from 40 to 50 per cent, precious metal, the use of salt and
blue stone somewhat increases the extraction and the new pro-
cess takes out about 80 per cent, of the values.
Roasting Previous to Cyaniding. By W. MacGrbgor.
Eng. Min,/,, 64, 187-188. — The author advocates that, in treat-
ing gold ores by the cyanide process, the question of roasting
should receive more consideration than it does at present, as
there would be a higher extraction of gold, a lower consumption of
cyanide, the ores would filter more rapidly, the solutions be-
come less charged with soluble salts, and the use of lime or soda
ash as neutralizer would become unnecessary. In experimenting,
laboratory tests should be supplemented by small working tests,
with from i to 10 tons of ore. Stress is laid on roasting the ore
absolutely dead. In order to see if an ore has been dead-roasted
in large scale work the author recommends the following pro-
cedure : Take from 100 to 250 grams of ore, place it in a beaker
with some 200 cc. of water, stir and filter, and add slowly to the
Metallurgical Chemistry, 139
•
filtrate cyanide solution of the same strength as the working
solution. If no cloudiness appears, the ore is fitted for cyanide
treatment; if a brown coloration results, the cyanide con-
sumption will be high ; if a blue coloration soon becoming a blu-
ish-green precipitate, the ore is badly roasted.
A Plant lor Parting Low-Qrade Bullion. By P. Gutzkow.
Eng, Min.J,, 64, 218. — This paper gives an illustrated descrip-
tion of a plant and an outline of the practical details for carrying
out the author's new process noticed in this Rev,, 3, loi.
Changes in Cyanide ilill Solutions. By Ph. Argai^i,.
Biennial Rep. Colo, School Min., through Eng, Min, y., 64, 246.
The subjoined analyses show how little change a mill solution
from roasted ore undergoes, if carefully handled, the normal
strength being kept up by the addition of fresh cyanide.
Solution.
Before pre- After pre- After six After eighteen
clpitation. cipitation. months' use. months' use.
KCN 0.501 0.451 0.555 0.410
HCN 0.061 0.079 0.017 0.021
Total simple cyanides 1.302 i>335 i-47o i«445
* KyFe(CN\ 0.098 o.i 17 0.018 0.026
KCNS 0.212 0.207 0.058 ^-^$7
Zn 0.316 0.360 0.368 0.388
CaO 0.085 0.082 0.172 0.172
Au (oz.) 1. 15 0.037 i.8i 0.03
During the six months 11,000 tons of ore were treated, during
eighteen months, 26,000 tons.
Limitation of the Cyanide Process. By Ph. Argali.. Bi-
ennial Rep, Colo, State School Min,, through Eng, Min, /., 64,
246. — The cyanide process is used only for oxidized ores con-
taining gold in a fine state of division ; if coarse gold is present,
this has to be recovered by amalgamation either before or after
cyanide treatment. Copper ores are soluble in dilute cyanide
solutions, the copper accumulating up to a certain point when it
is thrown down in the zinc boxes. Skey proved the solubility
of chalcopyrite and copper glance, as well as that of sulphide of
antimony. He believes that very small amounts of sulphur de-
crease the dissolving power of cyanide for gold ; the author did
not find this to be the case in working on a large scale. Galena
is soluble in cyanide, but does not interfere with the solution of
gold ; blende and pyrite are insoluble.
Tlie Accumulation of Amalgam on Copper Plates. By R. T.
Baguss. Trans, Am, Inst, Min, Eng,, a6, 33-38, 1039-1051.
— ^The paper calls attention to the differing quantities of gold
and silver found in the amalgam daily collected, the hard amal-
gam accumulating on the copper plates and the copper plates
140 Review of American Chemical Research,
themselves at the gold mill of the Montana Mining Co., Marys-
ville, Mont. The ore treated has a quartz ore gangue, contains
argentiferous native gold in a very fine state of division, active
silver in wire and leaf form, sulphides of iron and copper, and
traces of lead, arsenic, antimony, and zinc; it assays one-half
ounce gold and from 7 to 12 ounces silver per ton. The ore is
stamped in a battery through a 30-mesh sieve, amalgamated on
apron plates and passed over a Prue Vanner having an amalga-
mated distributor ; the tailings are subsequently amalgamated
in pans. An apron plate, of one-eighth inch rolled copperplate
and electroplated with one ounce of silver to the square foot,
was taken out after being in constant use for three years and ten
months, the amalgam scale (ranging in thickness from sixteen-
hundredths to one-sixteenth inch) removed by striking back and
front and by scraping with a chisel. The amalgam recovered
from the plate (8 feet long and 54 inches wide) weighed 160
pounds avoirdupois, yielded 38 per cent, bullion of 993.9 fine-
ness, viz,, gold 431.4 and silver 562.5, representing a value of
$8,340.54. In another case a plate yielded $11,000.00. The
retorted amalgam from the daily clean-ups was 985.4 fine, viz,,
gold 541.5 and silver 443.9; that from the accumulated scale
993-9i ^*<^M gol<l 431-4 ^^^ silver 562.5 ; that from the amalga-
mated copper plate on the Frue Vanner 982.5, viz, gold 380.5
and silver 602.0 ; the cleaned apron plate, when run into a bar,
had absorbed 8.96 ounces gold and 9.62 ounces silver. Thus in
regard to total fineness, the order of the amalgams was : ac-
cumulated scale (993.9), daily clean-up (985.4), Vanner plate
(982.5) , and in regard to the ratio of gold and silver, daily clean-
up (123 : 100), absorbed by copper plate (93 : 100), accumula-
ted scale (76 : 100), and Vanner plate (63 : 100). The author
believes that chemical and not mechanical causes, as suggested
in the discussion, must furnish the explanation for the excessive
accumulation of scale and for the variations in the values of the
different amalgams.
Notes on the Handling of Slags and ilattes at Western
Works. By W. Br ADEN. Trans, Am, Inst, Min, Eng,,7l^j
38-53. — The paper is an illustrated description of the different
methods in use for separating the increasing amounts of matte
formed in the treatment of silver-lead ores, and of disposing of
the slag produced by blast furnaces, the capacity of which has
been nearly doubled in the last five years.
The Volatilization of Silver in Chlorodizing Roasting. By
L. D. GoDSHAi^L. Trans, Am, Inst. Min, Eng,, 26, 53-62. —
This paper is a reply to Mr. C. A. Stetefeldt's criticism {this
R^', If 331) of the author's ** A Review of the Russell Pro-
cess," which appeared in Prac, Colo. Sci. Soc, 4, 306-322.
Metallurgical Chemistry. 141
Notes on the Walrand-Legenisel 5teel-Castin|f Process. By
H. L. HoLLis. Trans, Am, Inst, Min, Eng,, 26, 134-138. — In
making steel for casting, open- hearth metal must be employed if
sound castings are to be obtained. The process in question sup-
plements the Bessemer operation in such a way as to permit the
making of castings directly from the converter. It does this by
adding ferro-silicon, containing from 10 to 12 per cent, silicon,
to the converter at approximately the time when the flame drops
and then making an after-blow. The result is a steel strongly
superheated (on account of the high calorific power of silicon),
free from blowholes (as the product of combustion is a slag and
not a gas) , very fluid and one which permits the making of intricate
castings down to a fraction of a pound in weight. The paper
outlines the mode of working used at the Leg6nisel and Cruizot
works in Prance, at the works of Hagen, Prussia, and those of
the Potter and HoUis Foundry Co., Chicago, 111. The advan-
tages of the process are that, the converter being small (600-
1500 pound charges), the cost of installation is low, that, being
heated up in about one hour, the plant need not be working con-
tinuously, that the process is cheap, that it furnishes cheaply
small quantities of steel of the desired composition of such fluid-
ity that small intricate castings can be made and that green sand
can be used, if the castings are not to be machined. It is claimed
that the same results can be obtained in a basic converter by
substituting high-phosphorus iron for ferro-silicon.
The Effect of Additions of Titaniferous to Phosphoric iron
Ores in the Blast Furnace. By A. J. Rossi. Trans, Am. Inst.
Min, Eng., 26, 144-149. — The author shows by a number of
fusions carried on in graphite crucibles that the tendency of
titanium to throw the carbon in pig iron into the combined state
is modified by the presence of phosphorus, the effect being the
greater the larger the percentage of phosphoiic acid in the mix-
ture. He believes that by mixing titaniferous and phosphoric
ores in the correct proportions, two classes of ores, of little value
at present, can be smelted in the blast furnace, furnishing a
foundry iron sufficiently strong for most purposes.
The Sulphuric Acid Process of Treating Lixiviation Sul-
phides. By p. p. Dewey. Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng., a6,
242-263. — This paper, which was read simultaneously before the
American Chemical Society and the American Institute of Mi-
ning Engineers, was discussed in this Rev., 2, 99.
Action of Blast Furnace Qases upon Various Iron Ores. By
O. O. Laudig. Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng., a6, 269-278.
Discussion by F. E. Bachman and R. H. Sweetser. Ibid,
1061-1071. — These experiments were undertaken to find out if
142 Review of American Chemical Research.
it is possible to determine by laboratory experiment what pro-
cesses go on in the blast furnace. Different iron ores, thirty-
three in number, representing magnetite, different kinds of
hematite, limonite, iron and steel scale, flue and puddle cinder
were tested in sizes ranging from one-eighth inch to that pass-
ing through a loo-mesh sieve. The samples were separately
heated in a small iron vessel for three hours to a temperature of
about 432^ C, first in a current of air that had been passed
through caustic potash, pyrogallate of potash, and sulphuric
acid, and then in a current of blast furnace gas, the composition
of which [CO^ 7.4, CO 31.0, and CO^ 7.8, CO 27.0] gave the pro-
portions of one CO^ to 4. iQand 3. 16 CO, respectively. Thedepos-
ited carbon in the gas-heated sample having been determined,
the weight of the air-heated ore deducted from the gas-heated
ore (minus its carbon) gave the weight of the oxygen lost. Pull
details of the manner of experimenting are given. Nearly all
the ores, with the exception of scales, cinders, and magnetites,
after treatment showed a considerable increase in bulk, those de-
positing the most carbon showing the greatest. Thus Mesabi
ores deposited 21.61 per cent, carbon, soft hematites 13.82, hard
hematites 7.52, blue ores 3.08, cinders and scales 0.38, and
magnetites hardly any. Carbon deposition and reduction bore
no direct relation to each other, as was expected, except that when
there was a large carbon deposition, there was also a large
amount of oxygen lost The mechanical effect of deposited car-
bon is to disintegrate the ore, thus opening the pores for the
action of the carbonic oxide, and work in the blast furnace
showed that ores absorbing the largest amount of carbon re-
quired the least amount of fuel per ton of iron. Ores that are
easily reduced without carbon deposition must be very porous.
The carbon-deposition has little to do with the carbon contents
of the pig iron. Mr. Bachman, in his discussion, attributes the
troubles occasioned by the use of fine Mesabi ores to their great
increase in bulk, viz,^ twice the original volume after the carbon
has been burned off and four or five times taking carbon and ore
together, as they choke up the interstices between the lumpy
coke and limestone. In order to do satisfactory work, he says,
it is necessary to have a charge which would make enough slag
to give a regular-working furnace and take up all the sulphur
without giving more than 2 per cent, in the cinder, and an ore-
mixture which will give up its oxygen rapidly and uniformly at
the lowest temperature, each ore to deposit enough carbon to
thoroughly disintegrate it, to convert all the carbon dioxide of the
flux to carbon monoxide and to remove all the oxygen from the
ore that is not taken up by the carbon monoxide.
Metallurgical Chemistry, 143
The Occurrence and Behavior of Tellurium in Qold Ores,
more Particularly with Reference to the Potsdam Ores of the
Black Hills, South Dakota. By Frank Ci«bmes Smith.
Trans, Am, Inst, Min, Eng,, 26, 485-515, 1103-1108. — The
chemical part of this paper refers to the assay, the roasting, and
metallurgical treatment of tellurium gold-silver ores. In assay-
ing, the author found that work in the crucible gave higher re-
sults than that in the scorifier, the charge — ore 0.25, sodium bi-
carbonate 1,00, litharge 2.00, argol o.io, assay tons — giving the
highest results with the Blue and Red Potsdam ore of the Black
Hills, analysis of which gave : Blue ore, SiO, 68.748, A1,0,
3.072, Fe 13.289, S 11.728, CaSO, 2H,0 0.833, CaP, 0.784, P,0,
0.842, and in ounces per ton Te 4.03, Au 0.325, Ag 1.055. Red
ore, SiO, 84.45, A1,0, 4.07, Fe,0, 7.28, CaO 0.85, MgO 0.25,
SO, 3.71, and in ounces per ton Te 8.426, Au 0.576, Ag 2.875.
The tellurium mineral, which is sylvanite, was found to be very
evenly distributed in both classes of ore.
In cupelling, it was found that the loss by absorption and
volatilization increased with the percentage of tellurium. Sele-
nium had an effect similar to that of tellurium.
In roasting, very rich tellurium gold ore assaying as high as
180.66 ounces gold and 2041 ounces silver per ton, losses of 14.06
ounces gold and 29.46 ounces silver per ton were encountered,
while with Potsdam ore (22.80 ounces gold and 3.16 ounces sil-
ver per ton), the loss was 0.04 ounces gold and 0.32 ounces sil-
ver per ton, and with Cripple Creek (Colo.) ore (109.6 ounces
gold and 667.71 ounces silver per ton) it was 3.60 ounces gold
and 38.21 ounces silver per ton. The average loss in roasting
Potsdam ores, ranging from 0.72 to 5.20 ounces gold and from
0.87 to 58.52 ounces silver per ton, was after 20 minutes, 5.281
per cent, gold and 4.074 per cent, silver, and after 60 minutes
11.446 per cent, gold and 8.438 per cent, silver.
The author suggests that the treatment of the gold precipitate
obtained in chlorinating works might be modified and the tellu-
rium saved. Ordinarily the precipitate is roasted and then
melted with fluxes, causing loss of all the tellurium and a con-
siderable percentage of gold. By treating the slimes with nitric
acid, all loss may be avoided and the tellurium recovered from
the solution.
The Use of the Tremain Steam Stamp with Amalgamation.
By E. a. SpeRRY. Trans, Am, Inst. Min, Eng,, 26, 545-553.
— A description of the results obtained at the Cross mill, Gunni-
son County, Colo., with the stamp, the use of which is very lim-
ited in milling gold ores.
The Cyanide Process in the United States. By G. A. Pack-
ard. Trans, Am, Inst, Min, Eng,^ 26, 709-721. — The author,
144 Review of American ChetniecU Research,
who has had considerable experience in the cyaniding of ores
visited the leading works of the country, and reviews the pres-
ent state of the process. The gold ores treated are low-grade,
have with a few exceptions a siliceous gangue, and contain small
percentages of base metal. With silver ores some good results
have been obtained, although the time required and the large
consumption of cyanide, as a rule, exclude this class of ores.
Chlorination is a rival of cyaniding, and on account of the higher
extraction of gold is more used, where proximity to a railroad
permits the transportation of the large amount of chemicals re-
quired, e. g,, at the Golden Reward Mill, Deadwood, S. D., 35
versus 2^ pounds per ton. Amalgamation can compete with the
cyanide process only when very finely divided gold ores are to
be worked in pans. Then follow the practical details of the
method of leaching, the manner of precipitating, the consump-
tion of reagents, and the cost.
Solution and Precipitation of tiie Cyanide of Gold. By S. B.
Christy. Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng., 26, 735-772. — ^This
paper is a systematic study of the subject embodying a summary
of the researches made by the author since 1891, and requires an
extended review. As to the solution of gold in potassium cya-
nide, MacArthur held that Eisner's equation was wrong, while
MacLaurin's investigations proved it to be correct and further
showed that the rate of solubility went through a maximum in
passing from concentrated to dilute solutions, which fact is ex-
plained by the decrease of solubility of oxygen in cyanide with
the concentration of the latter. The author verified the neces-
sity of the presence of oxygen, showing that with a limited air
supply the solution stopped when the oxygen had been ex-
hausted, and began again when it was supplied. He reasons
that in the cyanide solution the oxygen and potassium cyanide
may be present without acting one upon another until the gold
is introduced, starting the reaction, when nascent cyanogen at-
tacks the gold. The necessity of the presence of oxygen being
proved, experiments were made with other oxidizing agents
than the oxygen of the air, such as potassium chlorate, nitrate,
permanganate, and fenicyanide as well as with the peroxides of
barium, manganese, lead, and sodium. They all proved effect-
ive, potassium ferricyanide and the peroxides of sodium and
manganese more so than the others. If cyanogen bromide be
added to potassium cyanide, there are formed potassium bromide
^nd cyanogen and this in the presence of gold and an excess of
potassium cyanide gives potassium aurocyanide. It was found
more convenient to add dilute bromine water to a cyanide solu-
tion than to use cyanogen bromide. It is essential in the use of
these reagents that in the presence of an excess of potassium
Metallurgical Chemistry, 145
cyanide, they shall not be added faster than the cyanogen set
free can combine with the gold ; if this rule is not observed, the
free cyanogen will be converted into paracyanogen and oxidized
products which, being ineffective, simply diminish the amount
of active reagent. Bromine and cyanogen bromide can be re-
placed by chlorine and iodine and their respective cyanogen
compounds. Comparing chlorine, bromine and oxygen, weight
for weight, 1 gram chlorine causes the solution of 2.45 grams
gold, I bromine 5.52 gold, and i oxygen 24.5 gold ; experi-
ments proved that oxygen gave as good, if not better, results
than chlorine and bromine, if properly applied, although the
latter was more convenient, being more readily soluble in water.
With low-grade ores and dilute solutions no additional oxidiz-
iiig agent is required, if the solution be well aerated, unless the
ore or the water contains some reducing agent ; with rich ores
and correspondingly stronger solutions, an artificial oxidizer
may be of distinct advantage. The author experimented upon
the solubility of sulphide, telluride, and antimonide of gold.
As the sulphide cannot be produced in the dry way, sulphide
prepared in the wet way served as a basis of the experiments.
It was found to dissolve readily, more quickly in a concentra-
ted than in a dilute solution. In the solution there was always
found to be present potassium sulphide and sulphocyanate and
in most cases suspended sulphur, which makes it probable that
beside the potassium aurocyanide, there are formed in the solu-
tion potassium sulphide and free sulphur, the former acting upon
the gold sulphide gives potassium aurosulphide and the sulphur
set free from both reactions combines wholly or in part with
potassium cyanide to sulphocyanate. Tellurides of gold and
silver dissolve with the greatest diflBculty, the probable reason
for this being that the affinity of potassium for tellurium is
much smaller than that of sulphur and that the tendency of
tellurium to form tellurous acid retards the oxidation and
thereby the solution. Antimonide of gold behaved in a way sim-
ilar to telluride, white oxide forming in solution. In the study
of the precipitation of gold from cyanide solutions the author
found that the generally accepted statement that upon acidi-
fying a solution of potassium aurocyanide with sulphuric
acid a yellow precipitate of aurocyanide separated was only
true when the solution had been evaporated down and be-
come concentrated and that metallic gold was separated from
this salt only by the strongest hot sulphuric acid. He believes
that a compound HAuCy,, aurocyanhydric acid, similar to the
ferro- and ferri-cyanhydric acids is formed. Before accepting
the existence of the new gold compound, he had thought that in
an acidified cyanide solution the gold was kept dissolved by the
liberated hydrocyanic acid and experimented to find, whether in
146 Review of American ChemiccU Research.
driving off the hydrocyanic acid the gold could not be separated
and at the same time the acid be recovered by passing over pot-
ash or lime, which readily absorb it. Upon acidifying a one
per cent, solution no trace of hydrocyanic acid appeared, yet,
when it was kept for weeks near caustic potash, this was found
to have absorbed nearly all the acid. In order to accelerate the
process, air and then the steam with air were blown through the
solution, the hydrocyanic acid of which was reduced in 3 hours
from I to 0.003 pci* cent. By using absorption towers, steam
can be dispensed with in large scale work and if sufficient time
be given, the absorption towers may not be necessary. From 80
to 90 per cent, of the acid was recovered in the laboratory ex-
periment. In case a stock solution contained alkaline sulphides,
these would have to be removed previous to acidifying by treat-
ment with lead carbonate or sulphate. But even when the
hydrocyanic acid had been reduced to o.oi per cent., the solu-
tion containing as much as o.i per cent, of gold remained clear
and the usual precipitants, oxalic acid, sulphurous acid, hydro-
gen sulphide, etc., failed to throw down any gold. An excess
of silver nitrate, however, precipitated the gold completely, while
lead and quicksilver nitrates did it only in part. Oxidizing
agents, such as potassium permanganate, peroxides of manga-
nese, and lead in acid solution facilitated the precipitation. In
precipitating gold by filtering through charcoal, the author
found that its power was very limited, as it took up not more than
0.2 per cent, gold, although within this limit it acted completely
and promptly, but the presence of free potassium cyanide lowered
the capacity ; acidification raised it. The difficulty of recover-
ing the gold from the charcoal puts it out of consideration for
practical use. Precipitation with mercuric chloride was satis-
factory only in the absence of free potassium cyanide and when
the solution was brought to a boil, then a yellow cyanide of gold
fell out which at a low red heat turned to pure gold. The mer-
cury can be recovered from the filtrate by adding the requisite
amount of potassium sulphide, and thus the cyanide in solution
regenerated. Under-precipitation does no harm, as the solvent
is used over again. For the reasons stated above, this precipi-
tant can come into play only under very limited circumstances.
As one of the requisites of all ore to be suited for the cyanide
process is that it shall contain little or no soluble copper com-
pounds, it seemed to the author that they might be used as pre-
cipitants. In immersing sheet-copper in a solution with 0.33
gram of gold, a light-yellow precipitate began to form in the
liquid and only very little of it on the copper ; after 3 days 75
per cent, of the gold had been precipitated, and after 1 1 days
only o.oi I gram remained in solution. This, of course, was too
slow for practical work. Experiments with copper sulphide
Metallurgical Chemistry. 147
stirred into the solution showed that if this was neutral and
alkaline, two-thirds, and if acidulated with sulphuric acid, the
whole of the gold was thrown down in a few hours. Cupric
sulphide obtained in the wet way, precipitating one-fifth of its
weight of gold, acted better than cuprous sulphide prepared in
the dry way. Removal of free hydrocyanic acid, if in excess
of 0.1 percent., assisted the precipitation. From the precipi-
tate the gold sulphide was dissolved with potassium sulphide
after making alkaline. The gold from the solution could be
recovered by electrolysis and the cupric sulphide freed from gold
be ready to be used over again. Instead of stirring the copper
sulphide into the solution this may be filtered through the sul-
phide ; the author prefers the first procedure. Preparing cupric
sulphide in the acidified solution by adding cupric sulphate and
then hydrogen sulphide worked as satisfactorily as stirring in the
sulphide. Provided the free hydrocyanic acid had been re-
moved, I pound of copper as sulphate will precipitate 3. 1 1 pounds
of gold. In precipitating with copper compounds it was found
that no copper whatever went into solution ; this pointed to the
solution that the precipitate was mainly a salt of the aurocyan-
hydric acid, either cuprous aurocyanide or the corresponding
sulpho salt. The author then experimented with cuprous chlo-
ride and found that a white precipitate containing all the gold
formed at once, the metallic copper present as cuprous chloride
precipitating twice its weight of gold. All the cuprous salts
were found to be effective, even cuprous cyanide. As the pre-
cipitate obtained by cuprous hyposulphite is soluble both in
potassium cyanide and sodium hyposulphite, a complete precip-
itation can only be had from an acidified solution. The method
employed by the author was to add sulphuric acid to the solu-
tion, to remove the hydrocyanic acid by aeration after, or by fine
sulphate before acidifying, and then to precipitate with cuprous
chloride prepared by adding salt to a cuprous sulphate solution
and saturating with sulphurous acid. The precipitate, CuAuCy,,
is insoluble in dilute acids, readily so in potassium cyanide ; the
gold is easily extracted. The author then criticizes the de
Wilde process. This consists (i) in leaching the ore with a
0.05 per cent, potassium cyanide solution containing about the
same amount of soda or lime, (2) in recovering the excess of
alkaline cyanide by neutralizing the free alkali and precipitating
with ferrous sulphate, and (3) in precipitating the gold as
aurous cyanide with cuprous cyanide, formed by introducing sul-
phurous acid and adding cupric sulphate. He found that the
precipitate of ferrous cyanide was very bulky, took weeks to fil-
ter, and was constantly changing in composition, and argues
that it is not an easy matter to extract the cyanide from the pre-
cipitate. While the precipitation of gold is sharp and complete,
148 Review of American Chemical Research,
it takes a long time to form and to settle. He, therefore, prefers
his method of making the cuprous salt outside of the solution
with concentrated reagents, which works more quickly. In re-
viewing the precipitation of gold, by means of electricity, from a
dilute solution with insoluble anode, the author argues that the
great resistance can only be overcome by very large electrode
surfaces and energetic artificial circulatioti, and that if all the
gold is to be precipitated, this cannot be done without destroy-
ing most of the cyanide. Another disadvantage observed by the
author is that gold is not only deposited on the cathode but also
on the anode, and that a gold-bearing precipitate settles out
from the electrolyte. An acidulated solution worked better than
one that was neutral or alkaline, but the cyanide was destroyed
unless special precautions were taken. The difficulties can be
overcome, as in South Africa (see this Rev.^ 2» 102) but it
requires great technical skill. The method in common use for
precipitating gold is by means of metallic zinc, although it has
the disadvantage of great consumption of zinc, unnecessary
destruction of cyanide, loss in working the precipitate and
the failure of the zinc in certain cases to throw down any gold
at all. The excess of the consumption of zinc in practice over
what is required theoretically (i oz. Zn : \-^i oz. Au vs. i oz.
Zn : 6.2 oz. Au) is explained by the solvent effect of the free
alkali, the excess of potassium cyanide and the oxygen dissolved
in the water ; the failure of zinc sometimes to precipitate gold
is attributed to polarization and to the formation of a film of zinc
cyanide in the absence of free potassium cyanide. The ordi-
narily accepted reaction,
2AuKCy, + Zn = K,ZnCy, + 2Au,
does not explain the different phenomena. The author sug-
gests that in the absence of free potassium cyanide the reaction
is
4KAuCy, -f 4Zn + 2H,0 = 2ZnCy, + ZnCy,.2KCy + ZnK,0, +
4H + 4AU,
and in the presence of free potassium cyanide,
2KAuCy, + 3Zn + 4KCy + 2H,0 = 2Au+ 2(ZnCy,.2KCy) +
ZnK,0. + 4H.
He then discusses the recovery of potassium cyanide from strong
solutions of zinc sulphate, the precipitation of aurous cyanide by
means of zinc chloride and oxychloride, gives the advantages of
the method with cuprous salts and outlines the mode of opera-
tion. He concludes his splendid paper with some satisfactory
results that he obtained in treating high-grade ores, while pre-
violisly the process had been applied only to those of a low tenor
and predicts a far greater field for the process than it occupies
to-day.
Metallurgical Chemistry. 149
Notes on the Cyanide Process. By J. E. ClennblIv. Univ.
Sci. Press, 74, 256. This is an open letter addressed to Professor
Christy reviewing the paper just abstracted, the criticisms being
based on large-scale work and laboratory experiments made in
South Africa.
Laboratory-Tests in Connection with the Extraction of Gold
from Ores by the Cyanide Process. By H. Van F. Furman.
Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng., 26, 721-734. — The paper gives full
details of the methods in common use to determine by prelimi-
nary treatment, whether an ore is suitable for the process or not,
and to control the work in the mill. It embraces the character
of ore ; size to which it should be crushed ; question of prelim-
inary roasting ; strength of solution ; time of leaching ; rate of
percolation ; testing of water to be used in the mill ; determina-
tion of acidity ; test for the consumption of cyanide ; test for
percentage of extraction ; determination of the cause of cyanide-
consumption ; of the free potassium cyanide in solution ; of the
free hydrocyanic acid in solution; of the total simple cyanides in
solution ; of the ferro-, the ferri-, and the sulpho-cyanides in so-
lution ; of the zinc and lime in solution and of the gold and sil-
ver in solution. A useful abstract can not be made without
reproducing nearly the entire paper.
The Value and Use of Aluminum, Manganese, and Silicon in
the Brass Foundry. By F. J. Davis. Aluminum World, 3,
141-142. — The alloy of copper with from 10 to 11 percent, alum-
inum is one of the strangest known, its tensile strength ranging
from 80,000 to 90,000 pounds per square inch. It also has a high
elastic limit, but a low percentage of elongation (5 per cent, in
one inch). The presence of silicon increases its strength and
hardness, but decreases its ductility. Of the brasses the one
containing 3.50 per cent, aluminum, 33.3 percent, zinc, the rest
being copper, is the best and strongest, having a tensile strength
of from 75,000 to 85,000 pounds per square inch. The addition
of o. I per cent, silicon to melted copper before pouring makes
the bath more fluid and gives clean and solid castings free from
blow-holes. Silicon acts in a similar way upon brass and tin
bronze mixtures. Two silicon-copper alloys (bronzes) are com-
monly used to-day, viz., the alloy of 5 per cent, silicon and 95
per cent, copper, which is strong and tough, having a tensile
strength of 75,000 pounds per square inch and 8 per cent, duc-
tility, and the alloy of 3 per cent, silicon and 97 per cent, cop-
per, which has a tensile strength of about 55,000 pounds per
square inch and from 50 to 60 per cent, ductility. If more than
from 5 to 5J per cent, silicon be added to the copper it becomes
brittle. Of the manganese bronzes free from iron, the one hav-
I50 Review of American Chemical Research.
ing the composition Cu 53, Zn 42, Mn 3.75, Al 1.25, makes a
very strong and tough alloy, suited for propeller wheels, gears,
etc., and for mining screens, as it is not attacked by acid mine
waters. The alloy, Cu 67,25, Mn 18.50, Zn 13.00, Al 1.25 forms
a good substitute for German silver.
Notes on Malleable Cast iron. By G. C. Davis. Am. Manuf.,
60, 728, and Iron Age, 59, No. 19, 5. — From the examination of
a large number of malleable castings the author comes to the
following conclusions as to what their composition should be.
Silicon should range from 0.60 to 0.90 per cent. ; if it runs be-
low 0.50 per cent, the casting will be too tough ; if above i per
cent., too brittle ; sulphur from 0.04 to 0.12 per cent. ; phos-
phorus from 0.15 to 0.22 per cent., a higher percentage making
the casting brittle ; manganese from 0.20 to 0.40 per cent. ; the
percentage of carbon varies with the cross-section of the casting
and the time of annealing — ^thus, castings one-eighth inch thick
to show o. 15 per cent, carbon, three-sixteenths — 0.64 carbon, five-
sixteenths — 1.03 carbon, nine-sixteenths — 1.58 carbon. Thecar-
bon is sometimes more completely removed than these figures
indicate. The author obtained his samples for the determina-
tion of carbon by breaking the casting, filing across the fracture
and collecting the filings on a sheet of paper.
ASSAYING.
H. O. HoPMAN, Reviewer.
An improved iluffle. By A. S. Dwight. Trans. Am. Inst.
Min. Eng.y 26, 992-994. — This muffle, devised by Mr. H. F.
Wierum, assayer of the Colorado Smelting Co., Pueblo, Colo.,
has two sets of horizontal ribs on the inner sides, running from
front to back, which serve to support a loose slab of burned fire-
clay used to regulate the heat of the different parts of the muf-
fle.
Silver Losses in Cupellation. By L. D. Godshali.. Trans.
Am. Inst. Min. Eng., 26, 473-484. — The silver losses in cupel-
lation are due to absorption by the cupel and volatilization.
The author has determined the combined loss from these two
sources and studied the effects of a variable quantity of silver, of
the weight of the lead button and the nature of the cupel.
While the investigation is of much value as far as the commer-
cial assay is concerned, it would have been of greater scientific
interest if the temperatures had been measured and the speed of
the air-current passing through the muffle determined.
General and Physical Chemistry, 151
QENERAL AND PHYSICAL CHEHISTRY.
A. A. N0YB8. Reviewer.
On the Permeation of Hot Platinum by Oases. By Wyatt
W. Randall. Am, Chem, /., 19, 682-691. — After giving a
brief review of the previous work done on the permeation of
metals by gases, the author describes the apparatus used in his
own experiments. This consists of a platinum tube closed at
one end, fitted into a hard-glass tube, and connected at its pro-
truding open end with a Topler pump and a sparking tube for
examining the spectrum. The hard-glass tube and the plati-
num tube within it are heated to a white heat, a high vacuum is
produced in the latter, and carefully dried hydrogen or other
gas to be tested is passed through the outer tube. It was found
that hydrogen passed through the platinum, though only very
slowly, the pressure within the tube (total volume 100 cc.) in-
creasing at the rate of a millimeter in 3-5 minutes. The spec-
trum indicated that the hydrogen which had passed through the
platinum was perfectly pure. On the other hand, when the
platinum tube was surrounded with dry air, the vacuum within
could be maintained indefinitely. I^ike oxygen and nitrogen,
methane seemed to have no power whatever of permeating the
metal.
The Atomic flass of Tungsten. By Willet Lepley Har-
din, y. Am, Chem, Soc,^ 19, 657-676. — The author has inves-
tigated the methods commonly employed in determining the
atomic weight of tungsten, consisting in the reduction of its tri-
oxide by hydrogen, and in the reoxidation of the metal by ignition
in the air. The results are given of sixty-four determinations
made with the material from different sources. From the dis-
cordant results obtained, the author concludes that the method is
unsatisfactory, and that this may be due to the action of the
substance on the vessel in which it is ignited, to loss mechanic-
ally or by volatilization, or to the presence of nitrogen as im-
purity, all of which sources of error were demonstrated to be
actually present.
riass Law Studies, ill. By S. F. Taylor. /. Phys, Chem,,
^f 542-546. — See thts Rev,, 3, 75, 122.
•
Solubility of 5olids in Vapors. By J. M. Talmadge. /.
Phys. Chem,, i, 547-554. — The author has determined at differ-
ent temperatures the partial vapor-pressures of naphthalene and
camphor in their saturated solutions in ether, acetone, methyl
alcohol, and ethyl alcohol. He concludes from his experi-
ments that the partial pressures are different for the diffei^nt
152 Review of American Chemical Research,
solvents, and that in the case of camphor at least the values are
greater than those belonging to the pure substance at the same
temperatures. However, as no check determinations are given,
it is impossible to judge of the accuracy of the results. Those
in the case of naphthalene in ether differ enormously from those
of Benedict, previously obtained in the same laboratory. See
this Rev., 3, 75.
Comment on the Note of R. Franchot Entitled •« Nascent
Hydrogen.'* By D. Tommasi. /. Phys. Chem., i, 555. — A
claim for priority.
Note, By Wilder D. Bancroft. /. Phys, Chem,, 1,556. —
Remarks on the preceding note.
On the Speed of Reduction of Ferric Alum by Sugar. By J,
H. Long. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 19, 683-698. — The author deter-
mines the rate at which sugar reduces ferric alum by measuring
the increase in electrical conductivity which the mixed solutions
undergo, and comparing this with that of solutions containing
the reaction-products at known concentrations. The results
show that the velocity of the reaction is proportional to the
amount of sugar present. The author assumes that very little
sugar is used up by the reduction, and that therefore its amount
remains practically constant during each series of experiments,
so that the concentration of the ferric salt alone varies ; and he
calculates accordingly the constants of the first order. These
are found to increase with the progress of the reaction, the ac-
celeration being attributed to the free acid gradually produced
by the reaction. The theoretical equation which should ex-
press this effect is not that given by the author, but the foUow-
dx
ingone: -3^ = {^'\- J^'x){A — x), in which IT' is a second
constant representing the increase in the reaction-constant A^,
caused by acid of unit concentration.
Early American Chemical Societies. By H. Carrington
Bolton. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 19, 717-732. — The article is a de-
scription of three chemical societies founded in the United States
in 1792, 181 1, and 1821, respectively.
OIWANIC CHEfllSTRY.
J. p. NO&RI8, Rbviewrr.
The Action of Ethylic Oxalate on Camphor (if). By J.
Bishop Tingle. Am, Chem, /., 19, 393-410. — In order to
Organic Chemistry. 153
throw some light on the structure of the i, 3-diketones andketo-
acids, the author has undertaken a further study of ethyl cam-
phoroxalate, which was prepared by him a few years ago (/.
Chem. Soc, 57, 652). Although the results.do not establish the
correctness of the carbonyl or hydroxyl formula, they are pub-
lished in order to reserve the field. Ethyl camphoroxalate,
/CH.CO.COOC.H,
CO
is best prepared by the action of sodium on a mixture of cam-
phor and ethyl oxalate dissolved in ligroin. It does not form a
copper salt, is quickly decomposed when heated, and in pres-
ence of alkali is rapidly hydrolyzed. A hydrazone is readily
formed which loses water and gives ethyl camphylphenylpyraz-
olecarboxylate,
<CH.C.COOC.H, /C— C.COOC.H.
I II =C.H,/|| II +H.O.
20 N.NH.C.H. ^C N
NC.H.
From the latter ester the acid can be easily formed. Camphor-
oxalic acid can be boiled with concentrated alkali without de-
composition. With hydroxylamine at ordinary temperature, in
presence of acid sodium carbonate, it yields an addition-product,
C„Hj,O^.NH,OH. The formation of this favors the hydroxyl
formula for the free acid since it is scarcely to be expected thit
hydroxylamine would yield an addition-product with a substance
containing two carbonyl groups. The formula of the compound
I:h.c.oh.cooh
is, consequently, C,H,^^ | . The correctness of
X:0 NH.OH
this view is further established by the production of camphyl-
yC.CH
isoxazole, C.Hj^^ || || , when the compound containing hy-
^CN
V
o
droxylamine is heated. The preparation and properties of the
above bodies are described in detail.
On the Molecular Rearrangement of the Oximes by Means of
Certain iletallic Salts. By Wii^uam J. Comstock. Am.
Chem./., xg, 485-492. — Cuprous chloride, cuprous bromide, and
antimony trichloride effect the Beckmann rearrangement of the
oximes. When a cold concentrated solution of benzaldox-
154 Review of American Chemical Research.
ime in dry benzene was treated with cuprous chloride, the latter
dissolved and an addition-product separated, crystallizing in
colorless needles. Its formula was (C,H^CH.NOH),CuCl, but
the antioxime was changed into its stereoisomer. When a ben-
zene solution of the addition-product was boiled, cuprous chlo-
ride precipitated and benzamide was obtained from the filtrate.
By a study of the action of cuprous chloride and bromide on.
benzaldoxime, cinnamaldoxime, oenanthaldoxime, acetoxime,
acetophenoneoxime, and benzophenoneoxime, it was shown that
the formation of addition-products of the formula, (Oxime), +
CuCl or CuBr, is general. The rearrangement into amide, or
substituted amide, by boiling a solution of the cuprous-halide-
oxime is not, however, a general reaction and when effected is
not a smooth one. When the solution is boiled, there is usually,
to some extent, a regeneration of aldehyde or ketone. When a
saturated aqueous solution of benzaldoxime or acetoxime was
treated with a solution of cupric chloride, the cuprous addition-
product separated. A part of the apetoxime was split into ace-
tone and hydroxylamine, which was oxidized to nitrous acid by
the cupric chloride. Benzophenoneoxime was changed to benz-
anilide by antimony trichloride.
The Action of Urea and Primary Amines on Maleic Anliy-
drides. By Frederic L. Dunlap and Isaac Phelps. Am.
Chem, /., 19, 492-496. — In a former article {Am, Chem.J,, 18,
333) a method was described for the preparation of imides by the
action of urea on the anhydrides of dibasic acids. It was shown
that the formation was to be explained by the addition of urea
to the anhydride to form an acid which, when heated, decom-
posed, yielding an imide, carbon dioxide, and ammonia. Mal-
etiric acid, HOOC.CH=CH.CO.NH.CO.NH„ has now been
prepared in this way, but when heated it did not yield sufficient
imide for identification. Following the method of Anschiitz
{Ber, d. chem Ges,, 20, 3214) the following compounds have
been prepared by the action of primary amines on maleic anhy-
dride : p' and <7-tolylmaleamic acids HOOC.CH=CH.CO.-
NHC,H,CH„ and a- and yS-naphthylmaleamic acids, HOOC.
CH=CH.CO.NHC„H,.
On the Isomeric Clilorides of ^-nitro-^-Sulphobenzoic Acids.
By Ira Remsen and G. W. Gray. Am. Chem. /., 19, 496-
512. — The results obtained in the investigation of the chlorides
of orthosulphobenzoic acids {Am. Chem. /,, 17, 309, 311, 330,
347 ; and 18, 791, 794, 809, 818) have led the authors to under-
take a study of the corresponding chlorides of /-nitro-<^sulpho-
benzoic acid. With the latter acid the separation of the isomeric
Organic Chemistry. 155
chlorides is easier. This is effected as follows : A chloroform
solution of the mixed chlorides, prepared by the action of phos-
phorus pentachloride on the acid potassium salt, is allowed to
evaporate spontaneously, when the symmetrical chloride,
<COCl
SO CI' c^s^^^^iz^^ ^^ monoclinic (?) pinacoids and
basal planes. When no more crystals can be obtained, the solvent
is evaporated off and the resulting oil dissolved in petroleum ether,
from which the unsymmetrical chloride, C,H,NO,^ qq *>0,
crystallizes in fine white needles or plates. The action of am-
monia is analogous to that on the chlorides of orthosulphoben-
zoic acid. The symmetrical yields the ammonium salt of the
/CO
imide, C,H,NO,^ qq >N.NH^, and the unsymmetrical the am-
/CN
monium salt of a cyan acid, C,H,NO,^ ^q. ONH * P^^™ these
ammonium salts the corresponding silver, potassium, barium,
calcium, magnesium, and zinc salts were prepared. The methyl
and ethyl salts of the sulphinide and the free paracyanbenzene-
sulphonic acid, with its chloride and amide are described.
A Study of the Action of the Nitrate and Sulphate of Para-
diazotoluene on Methyl Alcohol under Various Conditions. B v
Wii.i,iAM E. Chamberlain. Am, Chem. /., 19, 531-547. —
Prom a study of the action of methyl alcohol on the sulphate
and nitrate of paradiazotoluene the conclusion is drawn that un-
der atmospheric pressure the alkoxy reaction takes place almost
entirely. With the nitrate, lowering of temperature and pressure
favors the hydrogen reaction, whereas, under the same condi-
tions, the sulphate gives a better yield of the alkoxy product.
When the decompositions were effected in the presence of sodium
methylate, potassium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, or zinc
dust, the hydrogen reaction alone took place. When zinc oxide
was used the temperature of reaction was higher and both hy-
drogen and the methoxy group were introduced. It follows,
therefore, that the presence of alkaline substance to neutralize
the acid set free and a low temperature favor the hydrogen reac-
tion. When paradiazotoluene was decomposed with methyl
alcohol some dinitroparacresol was formed. This was shown to
be due to the action of the nitric acid set free upon the chief re-
action-product, paracresol methyl ether, nitration and saponifi-
cation taking place at the same time. This saponifying action
of dilute nitric acid is unusual and took place only during nitra-
tion, as dinitrocresol ethyl ether was not saponified by long boil-
ing with dilute nitric acid.
156 Review of American ChemiccU Research,
The Reaction of the Salts of Nitrodiazobenzene and the
Dlazobenzoic Acids with flethyl Alcohoi. By Gborgb F.
Weida. Am, Chem, /., 19, 547-561. — The following facts were
established by a study of the decomposition with methyl alcohol
of the diazo compounds obtained from the three nitranilines and
the three aminobenzoic acids. Orthonitrodiazobenzene sul-
phate yields nitrobenzene as the only reaction-product that can be
isolated ; para- and metanitrodiazobenzene nitrates yield mostly
nitrobenzene, and some nitranisol. The vSalts of the diazoben-
zoic acids all yielded as the principal product of reaction the
ethereal salts of the corresponding methoxy acids; with the
nitrate of the ortho acid some nitrosalicylic acid, with the sul-
phate of the ortho acid some methyl benzoate, and with the ni-
trate of the para acid some free anisic acid are obtained.
A Study of the Action of Methyl Alcohol on the Sulphate of
Orthodiazotoluene. By Wii^uam Bromwell. Am. Chem.J.,
19, 561-578. — The author comes to the following conclusions
from a study of the action of methyl alcohol on the sulphate of
orthodiazotoluene : ( i ) Orthodiazotoluene sulphate is decom-
posed by methyl alcohol at a lower temperature than the corres-
ponding para compound. (2) When decomposed under atmos-
pheric pressure it gives almost exclusively the alkoxy reaction.
(3) Whether decomposition takes place slowly at the tempera-
ture of the room or rapidly at a temperature near the boiling-
point of the alcohol, the yield of the methoxy product is the
same. (4) When orthomethoxytoluene is treated with cold
concentrated sulphuric acid, only one sulphonic acid is formed,
which has the formula CH,C,H,^ qq xx, and which forms well-
characterized barium, calcium, magnesium, zinc, copper, lead,
sodium, and potassium salts. (5) Methoxytoluenesulphonic
acid forms a chloride and an amide which is oxidized by potas-
slum permanganate to the acid CH.OC.H,^ qq ^^t •
On the Action of Potassium Hydroxide on Orthomethoxy-
sulphaminebenzoic Acid. By Charles Walker. Am.Chem.J.,
'9» 578"5Si- — '^^^ methoxysulphaminebenzoic acid, CH,0.
C,H,^QQ ^jx , obtained by Bromwell (preceding review) was
fused with potassium hydroxide, in order to establish its con-
stitution. This was not determined, as the sulphamine g^up re-
mained intact, the resulting compound being orthoxysulph-
<COOH
SO NH * ^^ barium, calcium,
Organic Chemistry. 157
sodium, and silver salts were prepared. When heated with
hydrochloric acid in a sealed tube salicylic acid was obtained.
Aluminum Alcoholates. By H. W. Hii^i^yer. Am, Chem.
/•» ^9» 597~^3- — In a former paper the author showed (Am.
Chem. J. y 19, 37) that aluminum alcoholates were formed by the
action of aluminum on alcohols in the presence of certain anhy-
drous chlorides. When absolute alcohol is poured on chipped
aluminum and either platinic, mercuric, or stannic chloride
added, hydrogen is evolved and a. rapid deposition of metal
takes place with rise in temperature. A large amount of alu-
minum is dissolved, and a pasty reaction-product, an alcoholate,
is formed. The addition of a saturated solution of hydrochloric
acid in alcohol produces the same effect as the metallic chloride.
The best yields are obtained when a small amount of an alco-
holic solution of stannic chloride is added to the absolute alco-
hol containing the aluminum. Methyl alcohol acted as above,
but the resulting compound could not be isolated, as it decom-
posed on distillation. Considering the fact of the evolution o(
hydrogen rather than a hydrocarbon, and the presence of alumi-
num in solution in a form not the chloride, the reaction can best
be explained as follows : 2AI + 6CH,OH = 2AI (OCHJ, +
3H,. Aluminum propylate was isolated by fractional distilla-
tion and analyzed. Amyl alcohol also furnished a volatile com-
pound, but aluminum isopropylate decomposed before distilla-
tion. The nascent hydrogen formed in this reaction furnishes
a method of reduction in the entire absence of water.
Behavior of Chloral Hydrate with Ammonium Sulphide.
By Joseph I^esinsky and Charles Gunduch. Am. Chem.
/., 19, 603-606. — A precipitate of unknown composition was
formed by the action of yellow ammonium sulphide on a solu-
tion of chloral. By varying the concentrations of the solutions
the color of the precipitate varies from pink to yellow and
changes to brown or black on heating. The time required for
precipitation decreases as the temperature increases. The au-
thors propose to study the reaction more carefully and to use it
in testing the purity of chloral hydrate.
On Halogen Addition-Products of the Anilides. By H. I/.
Wheeler, Bayard Barnes, and J. H. Pratt. Am. Chem.
/., i9» 672-682. — Wheeler and Walden {Am. Chem. /., 18, 85)
showed that the anilides form perhalides, and it was concluded
that the compounds are analogous to the perhalides of caesium
and ammonium. In order to test the correctness of this view a
crystallographic study of some organic and inorganic perhalides
1
158 Review of American Chemical Research,
has been made. As ammonium triiodide is analogous to the
perhalides of the alkali metals and shows no crystallographic
analogy to the derivatives of the anilides it is concluded that it
differs from the latter in structure. The view is strengthened
by the fact that all of the organic perhalides are formed from
salts containing two molecules of the anilide and one of the halo-
gen acid. Perhalides from the i : i salts have not been pre-
pared. The most probable structure of the salt (CH.CO.
H.N(COCH,)C,H.
NHC.H,),.HC1 is I . The perhalides are
HClN(COCH,)C,H.
thought to be addition-products of compounds with this di-
ammonium structure. Another striking difference between the
alkali and anilide perhalides is the ease with which the latter
can be obtained containing two halogens. A large number of
salts and mixed perhalides of acetaniline and methyl metanitro-
acetanilide were prepared and studied crystallographically. It
is shown incidentally that formanilide forms the salt (HCO.
NHC,Hj),.HCl, and therefore acts like a true anilide, whereas,
if it had the imido structure, the hydrochloride should be a i : 2
salt.
On Some flalonic Acid Derivatives. By Richard S. Cur-
Tiss. Am, Chem, /., 19, 691-702. — Bthylanilido malonate,
C.H,NH.CH(COOC,Hp,. was formed when bromethyl malon-
ate was treated with aniline. It gives a crystalline compound
with hydrochloric acid gas, a sodium salt with sodium ethylate,
a bromine addition-product, and reduces ammoniacal silver ni-
trate in the cold. When oxidized with mercuric oxide ethyldi-
anilido malonate, (C,H,NH),C(CO,C,H,)„ is formed. The same
compound was prepared from dibromethyl malonate and aniline.
Sodium ethylate and dibromethyl malonate gave a complex
mixture from which ethyl diethoxymalonate (C,HjO),C-
(CO,C,HJ, was isolated by fractional distillation.
Tlie Action of Nitric Acid on Triplienylmetliane. By £. S.
Smith. Am, Chem,/,^ 19, 702. — In an attempt to make trini-
trotriphenylmethane by the action of fuming nitric acid on tri-
phenylmethane, triphenylcarbinol was obtained. It was impos-
sible to discover the exact conditions necessary, as repetition of
the work always yielded the usual nitro derivatives.
Haiides and Perlialides of Pyridine. By P. P. Trowbridgk
AND O. C. DiEHi,. /. Am. Chem, Sac,, 19, 558-574. — ^This is a
continuation of a paper recently reviewed {this Rev,, 3, 112).
Reference must be made to the original article for a description
of the large number of compounds prepared.
Analytical Chemistry, 159
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.
UI*TIMATK ANAI*YSIS.
H. P. Talbot, Rbvzbwbr.
A Modification of the Permanganate Method for the Determi-
nation of Iron. By Hamii^ton P. Cady and Ai<frbd P. Rubd-
IGBR. /. Am. Chem.Soc., 19, 575-581. The reducing action of
hydrochloric acid upon potassium permanganate during an iron
titration may be prevented by the introduction into the solution
of mercuric sulphate. The mercury ions at once tend to unite with
the chlorine ions of the hydrochloric acid to form mercuric chlo-
ride, and this slightly ionized compound does not influence the
permanganate. The results which the authors obtained by this
modification of the permanganate process are satisfactory.
Notes on the Determination of Insoluble Phosphorus in Iron
Ores. By Charlbs T. Mixbr and Howard W. Dubois. /.
Am. Chem. Sac., 19, 614-619. — The authors determine the solu-
ble phosphorus in a solution of the ore obtained by treatment
with hydrochl9ric acid (sp. gr. i . 10) . The insoluble residue is
filtered, dried, and ignited for a short time at a red heat, after
which the remaining phosphorus may be readily extracted by
dilute acid. Analyses of the insoluble residues indicate that the
phosphorus is probably in combination with alumina.
A Further Communication on the Estimation of Phosphoric
Acid by Titration of the Ammonium Phosphomolybdate Pre-
cipitate with Standard Allcali. By B. W. Kii^gorb. /. Am.
Chem. Sac., 19, 703-711. — Two main objections have been raised
to the adoption of this method as an official procedure ;
viz., insufficient proof of its applicability to various sorts of fer-
tilizer material, and the difficulty in removing all the acid from
the precipitate. The first objection the author meets by pre-
senting satisfactory analyses of a wide variety of materials, made
by this procedure ; the supposed difficulty in washing the precipi-
tate the author believes to be apparent rather than real.
The Exact Dilution of Liquids by Formula. By Chas. D.
Howard. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19,587.
W. H. Walker, Rbvibwbr.
A New and Rapid Jlethod for the Qualitative Separation of
Iron, Aluminum, Chromium, Manganese, Zinc, Nickel, and
Colmlt. By Albxandbr Ramsay Cushman. Am. Chem. /.,
19, 606-607. — This separation is based upon the behavior of the
i6o Review of American Chemical Research.
above metals with bromine water, first in the presence of strong
aqueous ammonia, by which the iron, manganese, chromium,
and aluminum are separated from the zinc, nickel, and cobalt,
and later in the presence of an excess of potassium hydrate,
which separates the iron and manganese from the aluminum and
chromium. The further separation and identification of the
metals is carried out in the main according to well-known pro-
cedures. No provision is made for the detection of the alkaline
earth phosphates, which may be thrown down with the ammo-
nium sulphide precipitate, and this the reviewer thinks must
seriously limit the general application of the method.
The Actual Accuracy of Chemical Analyses. By P. P.
Dewky. Trans, Am, Inst, Min, Eng,, a6, 370-379. — This paper
does not consider ways and means for the increase of analytical
accuracy, nor the question of what could or should be attained
in this direction ; it is an extensive r6sum6 of the results
exhibited in actual every day practice, and does not admit of a
brief review.
Titration of Sodium Thiosulphate with iodic Add. By
Ci<AUDE P. WAI.KER. Am, J Sci,, 154, 235-242. — The nature
of the reaction between thiosulphuric acid and iodic acid is here
studied to determine the expediency of using one acid in stan-
dard solution for the direct titration of the other. It has been
stated that when sodium thiosulphate is titrated with iodic acid,
the reaction takes place according to the equation :
6Na.S,0, + 6HI0, = 3Na,S,0, + sNalO, + Nal + 3H,0.
Under these conditions no free iodine will be liberated until all
the thiosulphate has been oxidized ; the first drop of iodic acid
in excess, however, wiU liberate iodine according to the equa-
tion :
SNal + 6HI0. = sNalO, + 3H.O + 3I..
thus furnishing an end-point. The results of many titrations
made during this investigation are tabulated and show that the
reaction does not always take place according to the above equa-
tions, but that ** it is so indefinite in its nature and so depend-
ent for its completeness on conditions of time, dilution, and mass
that its direct application as a means of standardizing solutions
must remain impracticable.''
Geological and Mineralogical Chemistry. i6i
ASSAYING.
H. O. HOFMAN, RBVIBWSlt.
The Assay by Prospectors for Auriferous Ores and Qravels
by Means of Amalg^amation and the Blow-Pipe. By W. H.
MerriTT. Trans, Am, Inst, Min, Eng,, 26, 187-192. — The
method recommended by the author is similar to that used by
Leonard {this Rev,, 2, 75) ; it is the one taught in the prospec-
tor-classes of the School of Mines, Kingston, Ont. The ore
having been sampled down to 2 pounds is ground to pass a 40 or
60-mesh sieve, transferred to a mortar which has been charged
with water, i ounce quicksilver, and a small amount of sodium
amalgam, and rubbed with a wooden pestle. The pulp is trans-
ferred to a pan, and quicksilver concentrates and tailings are
sepa rated . The amalgam is retorted in a small cup-shaped vessel of
Russia-iron, the quicksilver condensed in a hollowed-out potato,
the spongy bullion from the cup mixed with lead, fused on char-
coal and cupelled on a clay pipe, and the relative proportion of
gold and silver estimated by the color. The balance used is one
with a sliding weight weighing from o.i to 0.5 grain and cost-
ing $3.00. By taking as much as 2 pounds of ore for a test, the
values of ores running as low as $3.60 in free-milling gold can
thus be approximately determined. The paper closes with a de-
tailed description of the apparatus required and its cost.
QEOLOQICAL AND niNERALOQlCAL CHBniSTRY.
L.W. O. Ckosbt, Rbvibwbr.
On the identity of Chaicostibite (Wolfsbergite) and Queja-
rite, and on Chaicostibite from Huanchaca, Boiivia. By S. L.
Penpiki^d and a. Frenzei<. Am, /, Sci,, 154, 27-35. — This
paper is the record of an elaborate chemical and crystaUographic
investigation based upon all the available material from various
sources ; and the authors have conclusively demonstrated that
we have in this rare sulphide of antimony and copper but one
mineral species, for which the chemically descriptive name chai-
costibite has priority.
Native iron in the Coai Measures of ilissouri. By E. T.
Ai*i,EN. Am, f, Sci,, 154, 99-104. — ^Three occurrences of the
native iron, in as many different counties, are described. It was
found in each instance in drilling through the Coal Measure
sandstone, at depths of 35, 37, and 51 feet. The iron appears to
occur in more or less continuous masses in the solid rock, offer-
i62 Review of American Chemical Research.
ing great resistance to the drill, and the samples obtained con-
sist chiefly of fragments detached from these masses in drilling,
the largest weighing 45 grams. The analyses show : iron,
97.10 to 99.39; silica (originally from the sandstone), 0.31 to
1.65 ; phosphorus, 0.13 to 0.207 J ^^^ traces of carbon. These
irons are undoubtedly of terrestrial origin, and were certainly
not derived from the drills. They are characterized by excep-
tional softness, and are attributed to the reducing action of the
carbonaceous matter of the enclosing formation. The complete
absence of nickel, so characteristic of meteoric irons, confirms
this theory of their origin.
On Bixbyite, a New Mineral, and Notes on the Associated
Topaz. By S. L. Penpisld and H. W. Foote. Am. J, Sci.,
^M» 105-108. — The bixbyite, named after the discoverer, occurs
sparingly on the border of the desert in Utah, and is attributed
to fumarole action. The mineral is isometric, metallic, brilliant-
black, with black streak, hardness 6 to 6.5, and specific gravity
4.945. The average of two analyses gave : SiO„ 1.21 ; A1,0„
2.53; Pe,0„ 4798; TiO„ 1.70; MnO, 4205; MgO, o.io;
available oxygen, 4.38 ; total, 99.95. The silica and alumina
are regarded as impurities. Neglecting these, two formulas are
possible : R,0„ where R = Pe, Mn, and a little Ti ; or PeO.
MnO,. The latter best accords with the isometric crystalliza-
tion, and suggests relationship to the isometric species perofskite,
CaO.TiO,, and after further discussion of the analyses the con-
clusion is reached that the mineral really is FeO.MnO,, in which
small quantities of MgO and MnO are isomorphous with PeO
and a little TiO, with MnO,. In other words, it is a ferrous salt
of manganous acid, H,MnO„ corresponding to braunite,
Mn.MnO,. The associated topaz is described crystallograph-
ically, but was not analyzed.
Note Concerning the Composition of llmenite. By S. L.
PENPIE1.D AND H. W. FooTE. Am. J. Sci., 154, 108-110. —
The existence of a molecule R"O.R'^0, in bixbyite and perof-
skite brings to mind the views concerning the composition of
ilmenite. One of these is that the mineral is RO.TiO, (R = Fe
and Mg) ; the other, that it is R,0„ or an isomorphous mixture
of Pe,0, and Ti,0,. Crystallographically, ilmenite is not inter-
mediate between hematite and artificial Ti,0„ as the second for-
mula would require ; and the formula fails to account for the
MgO in almost all the ilmenites that have been analyzed. Ram-
melsberg found 13.71 per cent. MgO in an ilmenite from War-
wick, N. Y. ; and this high value having been questioned, the
analysis was repeated by Foote, and 15.97 per cent. MgO ob-
General and Physical Chemistry, 163
tained. In the two analyses the ratio of RO, : RO is very close
to I : I, thus indicating the existence of the molecule RO.TiO,,
where R = Pe and Mg.
Igneous Rocks of the Leucite Hills and Pilot Butte* Wyo-
ming. By Whitman Cross. Am. J. Sci,, 154, 115-141. — This
paper is a detailed petrographic description of leucitic lavas oc-
curring in the forms of plugs or volcanic necks and surface
flows, and the author differentiates what has hitherto been re-
garded as one tjrpe under the names Wyomingite^ Orendilesmd Ma-
dupite. Chemical analyses of these types, together with analy-
ses of some of their constituent minerals, and of the leucitic lavas
of Montana (leucitite and missourite), are given in tabular form
and are remarkable for their complexity, more than twenty-five
elements occurring in determinable amounts. In the discussion
of the analyses it is noted that TiO„ Cr,0„ BaO, and PI are
found chiefly in the phlogopite, that the sulphuric acid indi-
cates the occurrence of noselite in the rock, and that these lavas
are exceptionally rich in P,0^. The most striking fact revealed
by the analyses is the almost identical chemical* constitution of
two rocks, one rich in leucite and free from sanidine {wyoming-
ite), the other with predominant sanidine (orendite). The con-
clusion that the chemical composition of a magma does not alone
determine whether leucite or sanidine shall be formed, but that
this is controlled by conditions of consolidation* Is unavoidable.
Prom the analyses the proportions of the component minerals in
each rock are computed ; and after a discussion of the classifica-
tion, nomenclature, and magmatic relations of these lavas, the
paper concludes with an account of some interesting inclusions,
and the action of the magma upon them « A rather unique,
though quite incidental, mineralogical feature of these masses of
lava is the occurrence in sheltered cavities and recesses of nota-
ble developments of nitre, which proves, on analysis, to be potas-
sium nitrate in some cases and sodium nitrate in others. Al-
though the nitric acid is most probably of organic origin, the
potash and soda are supposed to have been derived directly from
the adjacent volcanic rock.
GENERAL AND PHYSICAL CHEfllSTRY.
H. M. Goodwin, Rkvxbwbr.
Relations between the Meltlng-Points and the Latent
Heats of Fusion of the fletals. By Joseph W. Richards.
y. Franklin Inst., 143, 379-383. — In 1893 the author pointed out
that the latent heat of fusion of most metals is approximately one-
164 Review of American Chemical Research,
third of the total heat required to heat them from — 273® to their
melting-points. As more recent observations have confirmed this
relation, the author has collected all data bearing on this sub-
ject, and he points out the limits within which the rule appar-
ently holds true. With the exception of bismuth, tin, gallium,
and alulninum, the agreement is striking. The first two of
these metals Pictet also found to be exceptions to his rule that
the absolute melting-point of an element is inversely propor-
tional to its coefficient of expansion, a, and to the cube root of
its atomic volume, V\ that is, 7^= . — Aluminum, too, is
af^V
known to be anomalous in many of its properties.
If the specific heat be assumed nearly constant from — 273** to
100^, then the total heat contained in an atomic weight of any
metal at its melting-point will be approximately 6.47^ (Dulong
and Petit's Law). Hence, according to the author's relation
between latent heat and total heat, the latent heat of fusion {L)
of one atomic weight of a metal will be 2.1 71 Combining this
with Pictet's formula given above, we get L = 1 . Using
Pictet's values oia f^V^ the agreement between the computed
and observed values of L is (with the exception of aluminum)
within the limits of error of the data used for comparison.
On the Second Differential Coefficients of Qibb's Functions
^. Tiie Vapor Tensions, Freezing- and Boiling-Points of
Ternary Mixtures. By W. Lash M11.1.ER. /. Phys. Chem., i,
633-642. — The author discusses the physical interpretations
which II may have in the equations
/_^\ =(^\ =etc..
these equations being delivered by partial differentiation of
Gibbs Z function, the order of differentiation being immaterial.
The phenomena with ternary mixtures, observed by Mclntosch,
Bancroft, and others, are shown to be in agreement with con.
elusions to be drawn from the above relations.
Tlie Specific Gravities of Water Solutions of Formic Add.
By Geo. M. Richardson and Pierre Allaire. Am. Chem,
/., 19, 149-15 1. — A table is given showing the specific gravity
of seventy-one formic acid solutions varying in concentration
from pure acid to a 0.6 per cent, solution. The determinations
were made with a picnometer at 20° C. Special attention was
given to the purity of the acid.
General and Physical Chemistry, 165
Some Boiling^Point Determinations. By H. J. Stbubbr.
y. Phys, Chem., i, 643-646. — The efiFect of the addition of sodium
chloride and of sugar on the boiling-point of mixtures of alco-
hol and water was studied . In all cases a rise of boiling-point was
observed, but this was less than that observed in water alone.
The effect of the presence of alcohol was less, the greater the
concentration of the solution with respect to the dissolved salt.
A New iletliod of Determining tlie Specific Heat of Liquids.
By Robert L. Litch. Phys. Rev,, 5, 182-185. — The rise of
temperature produced by a coil of wire placed in the liquid in
the calorimeter is exactly compensated by the addition of a
quantity m of cooler liquid of known temperature 7^ (approxi-
mately o°C.). This is easily affected in a slightly modified
form of Waterman's Calorimeter (see this Rev., 3, 19). The heat
/T generated in the calorimeter is determined from measurements
of the current, resistance, and time. The specific heat is then
calculated from the equation S = — r^; — =-r, where T—T^ is
the difference between the temperature of the added liquid and
that of the calorimeter. Preliminary results on water are given.
These indicate a slight decrease in the specific heat between
18.8* and 21.2'. Further experiments are to be made with two
calorimeters containing heating coils in series, the first calorim-
eter containing a liquid of known specific heat, and the second
the liquid under examination. This latter method has the ad-
vantage of eliminating measurements of current and time.
Radiation in a Hagnetic Field. By A. A. Michklson.
Astra-Phys. /., 6, 48-55. — The author has examined the phe-
nomenon discovered by Zeeman with his very sensitive interfer-
ometer, and finds that in general the effect of the magnetic field
is to separate rather than broaden the lines, and that the phe-
nomenon is not of the nature ot a reversal. Thus with sodium,
the lines are doubled in a field up to about 2,000 C. G. S. units,
the separation being nearly proportional to the strength of field.
Beyond this point the components become broadened as well as
separated with increased strength of field. The broadening ef-
fect was noticeable only when the pencil of light was at right
angles to the field. The red cadmium line gave similar but even
more pronounced results. The green and blue cadmium lines,
and the green line of mercury, on the other hand, were both
separated and broadened. The hydrogen, lithium, and thal-
lium lines were but slightly affected by the magnetic field.
Clianges in tlie Wave-Prequencies of the Lines of Emission-
Spectra of Elements, Their Dependence upon the Elements
i66 Review of American Chemical Research.
Themselves and upon the Physical Conditions under which
They are Produced. By W. J. Humphreys. Astro-Phys./.,
6, 169-233. — The principal results of this interesting investiga-
tion, carried out with the exceptional facilities for spectroscopic
research of Prof. Rowland's laboratory, are embodied in the fol-
lowing summary: ''i. Increase of pressure causes all isolated
lines to shift towards the red end of the spectrum. 2. This shift-
ing is directly proportional to the increase of pressure. 3. It
does not depend upon the partial presence of the gas or vapor
producing the lines but upon the total pressure. 4. The shift of
the lines seems to be nearly or quite independent of temperature.
5. The lines of bands (at least of certain cyanogen and alumi-
num oxide bands) , are not appreciably shifted. 6. The shifts
of similar lines of a given element are proportional to the wave
length of the lines themselves. 7. Different series of lines (as
described by Kay sen and Runge) of a given element are shifted
to different extents. When reduced to the same wave-length
these shifts are to each other approximately as i : 2 : 4, respect-
ively, for the principal first and second subordinate series. 8.
Similar lines of an element, though not belonging to a recog-
nized series, are shifted equally (when reduced to the same
wave-length), but to a different extent than those unlike them.
9. Shifts of similar lines of differentsubstances are to each other,
in such cases, as the absolute temperature of the melting-points
of the elements that produced them. 10. The shifts of similar
lines of different elements are to each other approximately as the
products of the coefficients of linear expansion and cube roots of
the atomic volumes of the respective elements (in the solid state)
to which they are due. 11. Analogous or similar lines of ele-
ments belonging to the same half of a Mendelejeff group, shift
proportionally to the cube roots of their respective atomic
weights. 12. The lines of these substances, which in the solid
form have the greatest coefficients of linear expansion, have the
greatest shifts. The converse is also true. 13. The shift of
similar lines is a periodic function of atomic weight, and conse-
quently may be compared with any other property of the ele-
ments, which itself is a periodic function of their atomic weights. ' '
These conclusions are drawn from a careful study of a great
many photographs of the arc spectra of the metals taken under
varying conditions. The arc was enclosed in an air-tight box,
the pressure in which could be varied and measured. A six-
inch concave grating of twenty-one and a half feet focal length,
ruled with 20,000 lines to the inch, was used. The author sug-
gests several hypotheses of a kinetic nature to account for the
shifting of the lines observed.
Technical Chemistry. 167
On the Conditions Required for Attaining ilaximum Accu-
racy in the Determination of Specific Heat by the Method of
Mixtures. By F. L. O. Wadsworth. Am, J. Set., 154, 265-
283. — This author gives a precision discussion of the formula for
^calculating specific heat by the method of mixtures, with special
reference to the cooling correction as determined by the methods
of Rumford, Jamin, Regnault, and Holman. This is followed
by the description of a method by which the correction for radia-
tion is wholly eliminated. It is essentially a perfection of Rum-
ford's method, in which the temperature of the surroundings is
so determined and adjusted before the experiment that the max-
imum temperature reached is that which the calorimeter would
have attained had no loss by radiation occurred. Two prelim-
inary series of measurements on the rate of cooling are neces-
sary for the determination of the proper initial temperature of
the surroundings. A modification of Regnault's apparatus is
also described, by which the hot body is transferred in a little car
sliding upon rails from the heater to the calorimeter, where it is
dropped in by means of an ingeniously contrived trap. A con-
venient method of filling an ice calorimeter with water is de-
scribed, and the advantage is pointed out of placing thecalorim-
eter in a bottle containing partially frozen distilled water.
TECHNICAL CHEMISTRY.
p. H. Thorp, Bicvibwbr.
System of Tanning in India. By K. E. Tai^ati. Leather
Manufacturer^ 8, 43. — This short article describes the crude
process as carried on near Bombay. The hides are ** limed,**
but not ** bated." Ten days or more are required for liming,
unhairing, and fleshing the skins. The tanning proper is done
with a decoction of accu:ia aurunUata, or turwar bark. The ex-
tract, at 12° Bk., is made with cold water, and the skins lie in
the liquor ten days. They are then treated with stronger liquor
for twelve days more. After removal from the bark solution,
the hides are steeped four days in myrabolans liquor, made with
hot water. They are then wrung and oiled with sesame oil or
ground-nut oil; and are dried in the air.
New Metliod of Clirome Tanning. By Wm. M. Norrts.
Leather Manufacturer, 8, 38-39. — The article is an abstract by
the inventor of U. S. Patent No. 588,874. Metallic zinc is added
to the reducing bath of sodium thiosulphate or sodium bisul-
phite. The free acid in the bath attacks the zinc and the hydro-
gen liberated converts the sulphurous acid into hyposulphur-
ous acid, a more powerful reducing body.
1 68 Review of American Chemical Research,
Producing Fancy Leathers. By H. C. Standagb. Leather
Manufaciurer, 8, 22-23, 44""45- — This is a general description of
the process of making Morocco and imitation Morocco leathers.
The Influence of the Gravity of Glycerine on the Yield of
Nitroglycerine. By W. E. Garrigues. Proc. Eng. Soc. West-
ern Pa.y 13, 265. — The author wished to determine whether
variations of two or three units in the third decimal place of the
specific gravity of glycerine, has any effect on the yield of nitro-
glycerine, when calculated from the actual quantity of glycerine
nitrated. A series of experiments on four samples of glycerine
of 1.2623, 1. 2613, 1.2600, and 1.2572 sp.gr., respectively, where
the percentage of glycerine varies from 99 to 97, show that the
small quantity of water present has no practical effect on the
yield of nitroglycerine. All samples were nitrated with the same
acid mixture and under exactly similar circumstances. He con-
cludes that with commercial glycerine above 1.257 sp. gr. or 97
per cent, glycerine, the value is exactiy according to its per-
centage of strength. The details of the experiment are fully
explained. The author also demonstrates that the yield maybe
influenced by the method of separating the acid and nitroglycer-
ine. If separated by settling only, the yield is less than if the
charge is *' drowned" in an excess of water. But since the lat-
ter method gives a milky product, he intimates that the apparent
increase may be due to absorbed water. The method of deter-
mining the specific gravity of glycerine by the use of the pic-
nometer is also explained.
Softening Agents for the Production of Asphalt Cement for
Paving and other Purposes. Chemical Constitution of Residu-
ums and Malthas* and Its Relation to Water Action. Solubil-
ity of the Asphalt Hydrocarbons in Heavy Petroleum Oil. By
CwFPORD Richardson. Municipal Eng.^ 12, 343; 13,1, 67. —
These papers form a series of popular articles, containing some
tables of the properties and composition of asphalts, malthas, and
residuums.
How to Analyze Clay. By Hoi^dbn M. Ashby. Brick^ 7,
57, 1 13, 148.— This is a series of illustrated articles on the meth-
ods of analysis employed for clay. The articles are copyrighted
and appear to be abstracts from notes prepared by the author for
the use of students or others desiring instruction in chemical
analysis as applied to clay alone.
Nitrosylized Blast Furnace Slag as an Addition to Hydraulic
Cement. By A. D. Elbers. Eng. Min.J,, ^, 661, 364, 454.
— To make *' nitrosylized*' slag, finely ground slag is moistened
with weak nitric acid, water is added after the acid has become
Technical Chemistry. 169
neutralized, and tlie leached mass is dried. Each 100 pounds
of slag requires one-half pound of 60 per cent. (N,OJ acid and
30 pounds of water. The object is the removal of calcium sul-
phide from the slag. The ** nitrosyl" (NO ? ) set free by the
action of the acid on the slag, is absorbed by the ferrous silicate
in the slag, thus, it is supposed* rendering its silica more *' dis-
posed to sever its connection with the ferrous oxide and to be-
come gelatinous when acted upon by the dissolved lime." It
also prevents the formation of ferric hydrate, since the iron is
rendered soluble and is washed away, while gelatinous silica de-
posits on the surface of the slag particles. Briquettes of slag,
which had been treated thus, were tested in various ways ; the
author concludes, from the results, that ordinary and inferior
Portland cements may be mixed with such slag, without dimin-
ishing their strength, but only small quantities should be added
to high grade cements.
Composition and Formation of Tanic Residues in Electrolytic
Copper Refineries. By Edward Kbi^lbr. /. Am. Chem. Soc.,
19, 778-7S2.
Tiie Chemistry of the Pottery Industry. By Karl Lang-
BNBBCK. /. Franklin Inst.^ 143, 321. — The article represents
a lecture given before the Institute. A few analyses are tabu-
lated.
W. R. Wbitnbt, RBVIBW BR.
The Manufacture and Applications of Lactic Acid. By A.
A. Claflin. Am. J. Pharm., 69, 599--604. — The paper con-
tains extracts from the note-book of a chemist engaged in the
manufacture of lactic acid. The process is the fermentation of
glucose by the bacillus acidi lacti, which the author, by inad-
vertently omitting the prefix micro, describes as ** averaging in
length 2-2.5 millimeters." A saccharine solution containing
7.5 to II per cent, saccharine matter, of which 10-15 percent, is
advantageously cane sugar, is employed. The solution should
also contain albuminoid matter and preferably a quantity equal
to about 8 per cent, of the saccharine matter. After sterilization
the solution is impregnated with the bacillus at 45^, below which
temperature the fermentation takes place. Milk of lime is added
from time to time to counteract the increasing acidity of the solu-
tion. To obtain the purest lactic acid, the calcium lactate
is crystallized from the solution after the glucose is almost com-
pletely fermented, and the acid is obtained by distilling the salt
with sulphuric acid.
Formaldehyde. By O. I. Afpeldbr. Proc. Eng. Soc.
Western Pa., 13, 350-362. — This paper is divided into three
170 Review of American Chemical Research,
parts entitled preparation, reactions, and determination. In the
first part modifications of the method of Tollens are described.
The methyl alcohol vaporized with air was passed through a
heated iron pipe instead of glass, as described by Tollens. A
table is given showing the effect of varying the rate of the air
current which passes through the methyl alcohol. The maxi-
mum yield of aldehyde occurred when 0.7 cubic foot of air
passed per hour. The effect of various temperatures of the iron
pipe was also studied. It was found that below 250** C. little or
no aldehyde is formed. At 350" a maximum is reached. A de-
scription of lamps to be used in forming aldehyde by combustion
of the alcohol, with or without the use of gas, is given. The
article is concluded with a very complete collection of the quali-
tative tests and methods of quantitative analysis of formalde-
hyde.
A. H. GlLI., Rbvibwbr.
Certain Phenomena of Qas Explosions. By W. H. Birch-
more. Am. Gas Light J., 67, 563-565. — The article deals with
the explosion or combustion of mixtures of air and hydrogen,
air and detonating gas, and air and acetylene. The experi-
ments took place in a tube instead of a bulb ; and in the case
of the acetylene they are instructive as showing how the Paris
explosion may have taken place. The article is written in a
popular style and gives no experimental data.
Anhydrous Ammonia for Ice ilachines. By H. Paurot.
Am, Gas Light J,, 66, 728. — The author recommends the testing
of the liquid ammonia used for refrigeration. The common gas-
eous impurities are air and the constituents of illuminating gas.
These can be detected by discharging the ammonia into water
and analyzing the insoluble gases. The liquid impurities are
water and oils ; these are detected by allowing 50 cc. of the
liquid to evaporate in a tube with a narrow graduated bottom,
the volume of the residual liquid being noted. The boiling-
point of commercial ammonia should not be higher than
—28.6*^ P.
G. W. ROLFB, RBVIBWBS..
Spontaneous Combustion of Molasses. By J. T. Crawlby.
/. Am, Chem, Soc,^ 19, 538-542. — An account is given of an in-
vestigation into a curious case of spontaneous combustion of a
tank of molasses at an Hawaiian sugar- house. The author found
that fully eighty per cent, of the sugars in the molasses, besides
most of the gums and mucilages, had been destroyed. He can
give no satisfactory explanation of the cause of combustion, but
is inclined to believe that the decomposition of the non-sugars
may have much to do with it.
Biological Chemistry, 171
On the Use of Silico-Pluorides in Sugar Refiningf. By Wai«-
TER M11.LS. La. Planter and Sugar Mfgr,, 19, 188-189. — The
author attributes the failure of hydrofluosilicic acid as a refining
agent to its inverting action ; and he recommends the use of the
ammonium salt, which is free from this drawback and which, more-
over, precipitates lime salts as well as the alkalies. The ex-
periments of the author show that 34.8 per cent, of the ash is re-
moved by this agent.
BIOLOGICAL CHBniSTRY.
W. R. Whitney, Rbvibwbr.
The Action of Certain Bodies on the Digestive Ferments.
By Frank D. Simons. /. Am, Chem, Sac., 19, 744-754. — The
bodies referred to are the common coloring matters, flavoring
extracts, and preservatives. Among the most interesting re-
sults may be mentioned the discovery that peptic digestion is
greatly retarded by picric acid, tropaeolin 000, and metanil yel-
low, less so by salicylic acid and oil of wintergreen, and that
pancreatic digestion is retarded by Bismarck brown, cinnamon,
and formol.
The Amount and Properties of the Proteids of the Maize
Kernel. By Thomas B. Osborne. /. Am, Chem. Soc, xg, 525-
532. — This is a continuation of the work of Chittenden and Os-
borne on the maize kernel. The article contains descriptions
and analyses of the four fractions into which they had divided
the proteid matter.
The Caffein Compounds of Kola. By J. W. T. Knox and
A. B. Prkscott. Pharm. Rev., 15, 172-176; i9i-i96.-The recent
literature of oak tannins is considered at length, after which ade-
scription of the methods used in preparing the free kola tannin,
and of some of its chemical properties, is given. The
second part of the paper contains the results of analyses of the
kola tannin, its bromine and acetyl derivatives, and its several
anhydrides. The methods of preparation of these compounds
and their properties are given.
The Tannin of Castanopsis. By Henry Trimble. Am. J.
Pharm., 69, 406-408. — This relates to the nature of the tannin
in the bark of a group of trees intermediate between oaks and
chestnuts in character. The tannin of the American Quercus
densiflora and the Castanopsis chrysophylla of this group were
shown to be identical with the oak tannin. As the chestnut tan-
nin differs from these, and is identical with galltannin, the above
intermediate group partakes of the nature of oaks. A table giv-
172 Review of American Chemical Research.
ing the analyses of ten of these barks accompanies the arti-
cle.
Aralia Nudicaulis. By W. C. Ai^pkrs and B. J. Murray.
Am J. Pharm,^ 69, 534-543. — This paper is a treatise on the wild
sarsaparilla. Qualitative tests for tannin, sugar, alkaloids, etc.,
are described. Alkaloids and glucosides were not found. Tan-
nin, starch, a volatile oil, and a resin were found. The results
of a proximate quantitative analysis of the drug are given.
The Important Constituents of Taraxacum Root. By L. E.
Sayrb. Am. J. Pkarm.^ 69, 543-546. — ^This portion of the
author's continued work on Taraxacum is devoted to the bitter
principle and to the analysis of the drug and of its ash.
The Tannin of Ceriops Candolleana. By Henry Trimbi^b.
Am. J. Pharm.^ 69, 505-506. — This tree is common in India,
being a small evergreen of the mangrove genus. Its bark is
unusually rich in tannin, one dried sample containing 31.56 per
cent. The tannin was shown to belong to the same class as
the oak bark tannins.
Some Products of the Tui>erculosis Bacillus. By E. A. db
ScHWBiNiTZ AND M. DORSET. /. Am. Ckem. Soc.y 10, 782-785.
— Prom bacillus cultures the authors have isolated a crystalline
compound of melting-point 161^-164^. It is an acid soluble
in ether, alcohol, and in water, and its analysis corresponds
nearly to that of teraconic acid (C,H,^OJ. It is evidently that
product of the tuberculosis germ which produces the necrosis
peculiar to these bacilli.
On the Presence of Amylol3rtic Ferment and its Zymogen in
the Salivary Qland. By C. W. Latimbr and J. W. Warrbn.
/. Exptal. Mtdicine^ a, 465-273. — Chloroform water and sodium
fluoride solutions were used to extract the salivary glands of
dogs, cats, rats, mice, oxen, sheep, and opossums. The ex-
tract was tested for amylolytic power ; it was then acidified with
acetic acid, and after ten minutes neutralized. The resulting
solution was tested with starch paste for the zymogen. Many
of the extracts contained the active ferment (ptyalin) , many also
the ptyalinogen, but no classification seems possible. No quan-
titative work was attempted.
On the Presence of ilillc-Curdling Ferment (Pexin) in the
Gastric Mucous Hembrane of Vertebrates. By J. W. Warrbn.
J. Exptal. Medicine^ 2,476-492. — With chloroform water extracts
the presence of a milk-curdling ferment in the stomachs of many
vertebrates has been shown. This the writer calls pexin audits
forerunner pexinogen. Active ferments were found by him in
Biological Chemistry, 173
the extract from the ox and calf only. Fifty-three stomachs
from thirteen different vertebrates gave pexinogen, which was
made active as a ferment by acidification of the extract by acetic
acid and subsequent neutralization.
Note on the Influence of «< Peptone*' on the Clotting of Milk
by Rennet. By P. S. Locks. /. ExptaL Medicine, 2, 492-
499. — The previous work on this subject has been done with
peptones having an alkaline reaction. To this alkalinity the
author thinks the action of the peptone, in delaying the coagu-
lation by rennet, should be ascribed, although attempts to obtain
a peptone which did not cause this delay were futile.
Algae and Antiseptics. By R. H. True. Pharm. Rev,, 15,
152-153. — This is practically a continuation of work done by
Kahlenberg and True on the connection between the toxic ac-
tion of acids, bases, and salts, and the condition of electrolytic
dissociation of the agent. In this case the author has under-
taken a study of the effects of acids and phenols upon the com-
mon spirogyra, and has determined the maximum dilutions fatal
to this algae. With hydrochloric and sulphuric acids this dilu-
tion was found to be 800 and 1600 liters per gram-molecule, re-
spectively, which seems to confirm the opinion that the toxic
action of the acids is to be accredited to the hydrogen ions.
With hydrochinone the toxic power was greatly increased by the
^ontaneous alteration in this phenol in its dilute solutions.
This is to be further investigated.
G. W. ROLFB, RBVIBWBR.
The Distribution of Qalactan. By J. B. Lindshy and E. B.
Hoi^i^AND. Mass, Agr, Coll. Ann, Rep., 34, 192-196. — The
authors describe their method, which is that perfected by Tol-
lens and others, based on the estimation of the derived mucic
acid, and publish a large number of results, which show that
galactan, while extensively distributed, is present in considera-
ble quantity only in the leguminous plants. The greatest per-
centage was found in clover and lupin seeds, the amount in the
latter exceeding 14 per cent.
SANITARY CHEMISTRY.
B. H. RICHAKD8, Rrvirwbr.
The Filtration of Water. By Edmund B. Weston. Munic-
ipal Eng., 13, 199-207. — The author considers the ** American
system of filtration'' to be '* mechanical filtration aided by the
application of chemicals," in distinction from sand filtration, a
process which was imported from Europe. He estimates the
174 Review of American Chemical Research,
cost of the latter to be considerably more than that of the for-
mer, and questions the expediency of incurring this extra cost
to obtain the increase of 1.5 percent, of efficiency in the removal
of bacteria which he concedes to the best European practice.
Mechanical Filtration of the Public Water Supply of Lorain,
Ohio. By C. O. Probst. Ohio Sanitary Bull,, i, 100-120. —
This report gives the conditions under which were made the
tests of the Jewell filters, in purifying the water of Lake
Erie, which is contaminated at the intake by the water from
Black River. The results show that the use of 2.5 grams of
alum per gallon and a rate of 100,000,000 gallons per acre per
24 hours appears to affect a sufficient purification.
. nilk : Its Value as a Food and Studies which Suggest a
Different Method of Sale. By E. B. Voorhebs and C. B.
Lane. N,J. Agr, Sta.BulL, 123, 1-19. — The authors give the
results of a year's study of the composition of the milk of a herd
and of individual cows as affected by food and external condi-
tions, and show that uniformity can be maintained, and suggest
that consumers should be educated to consider that a definite re-
lation between price and food value can be established.
The Composition of Prepared Cereal Poods. By £. £. Slos-
son. Wyoming Expt, Sta, Bull., 33, 71-84. — Analyses of
twenty-one of the common ** Breakfast Foods'* are given. The
results with thirteen preparations of wheat are shown in the fol-
lowing table :
Pat Protein. Calories Coat
Per cent Per cent per srram.
Maximum • 3.72 16.60 4689 15.8
Minimum 1.20 9.37 3993 4.3
Average 1.85 12.44 4215 9-5
The author concludes that ** there is more variation in price
than in composition." He might have added that the cost bore
no relation to the food value or the palatability. In the six
samples of preparations from oats, there is even less variation in
composition, but more in price. Oatmeal, in bulk, is bought for
2.5 cents per pound, while 12.8 cents is paid for a brand very
slightly richer. Another supposed advantage of the package
foods is taken away by the author's statement " that the claims
for quick cooking are generally fallacious.**
Soy Beans as Food for Man. By C. F. Langworthy. U.
S, Dept, Agr. Farmers' Bull., 58, 20-23. — I" addition to a table
giving nineteen selected analyses of the soy bean grown in dif-
ferent countries, the author describes ten modes of preparing
Biological Chemistry. 175
it for food, mostly by fermentation, and gives the composi-
tion of the products. It is claimed that the soy bean contains no
starch, and that when the cellulose is broken down by bacterial
action, the nitrogen is well assimilated ; it is also stated that
these products replace meat in the Japanese dietary.
Human Food Investigations. By Harry Snydbr. Univ.
Minn. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull., 54, 37-90. — The author summa-
rizes valuable work on the character and composition of the nitrog-
enous constituents of wheat as affecting the light porous loaf of
the bread made from the different varieties, and shows that the
prolonged fermentation of the dough causes certain losses in
both the starchy and nitrogenous constituents. He does not,
however, discuss the most important corollary : Is not the bread
so much improved in flavor as to offset this small loss ? Digesti-
bility experiments were made with bread from whole wheat,
bakers' flour, and patent spring wheat flour. The results showed
that all were well assimilated. In the case of potatoes, the
starch is the most perfectly digested, while the nitrogenous por-
tion is less available than in most vegetable substances. Ex-
periments were also made in regard to the loss of food value by
the different ways of cooking. Potatoes lose a large per cent, of
the nitrogen when pared and soaked in cold water before cook-
ing ; but, as might have been predicted, very little of the starch
is lost (except in the parings, which, however, may amount to
30 per cent, by weight, as has been determined repeatedly in the
New England Kitchen). As the author has shown that the
nitrogen is of small moment in the potato, one is puzzled to dis-
cover why so much stress is laid on this loss. The escape of the
mineral salts is a more serious matter. The losses incurred in
the cooking of carrots and cabbages are next considered, and ^
shown to be very large, amounting to some 30 per cent, of the
total food value , and the conclusion is that only by the use of
the water in which the vegetables are cooked can all this value
be recovered. The rest of the Bulletin gives in a concise form
a summary of the main facts upon which the ** Rational Feeding
of Men^' may be based. Tables of composition of food sub-
stances are reprinted from the U. S. Dept. Agr. Bulletins.
The Value of a Bacteriological Examination of Water from
a Sanitary Point of View. By E. K. Dunham. /. Am. Chem.
Soc.y 19, 591-605. — The author discusses both the methods of
determining the presence of pathogenic forms of bacteria in
potable water, and the interpretation of the results. He con-
cludes that the method proposed is capable of giving informa-
tion of value, especially when supplemented by the determina-
176 Review of American Chemical Resean^.
tion of the presence or absence of sufficient organic matter to fur-
nish food for the continued growth of the organisms.
W. R. Whttivbt, Rsvibwbr.
The Constitution of Milk with Special Reference to Cheese
Production. By S. M. Babcock. Wis, Agr. Expt. Sta,BuU.,
61, 1-2 1. — This is a comprehensive treatment of the subject, but
it contains little that is really new.
Tainted or Defective illlks : Their Causes and Methods of
Prevention. By H. L. Russel. Wis, Agr. Expt. Sta. BuU.,
6a, 1-27. — The sources of contamination are considered, the
effects on the value of the milk for various purposes are pointed
out, and methods for preventing or remedying the evils are sug-
gested.
Composition of Full Cream Cheese. By Wm. Prbar. Pa.
State College^ School Agr. ^ Bull. 2, 1-16. — This paper summa-
rizes experiments made in several states to determine the average
composition of full cream cheese, and the variation in composi-
tion likely to arise from differences in the quality of the milk
from which it is made. Briefly, the results are as follows :
Green cheese of less than 32 per cent, fat is seldom produced
from average factory milk ; a green cheese loses about 5 per
cent, in weight during one month's curing ; and a reduction in
the fat-content of the cheese is not likely to occur from the minor
accidental variations in processes of manufacture or in differ-
ences of composition of unskimmed factory milk.
AGRICUWURAI. CHEMISTRY.
W. R. Whitnrt, Rbvxrwbx..
On the Influence of Vegetable flouldon the Nitrogenous Con-
tent of Oats. By H. W. Wii,ey. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 605-
614. — The author concludes from the investigation of the effects
of various soils on the composition of oats grown in them, that
humus soils greatly increase the nitrogen content of the cereal,
this increase being chiefly in amid nitrogen. Three forms of
fertilizers employed on humus soils caused about an equal in-
crease in the quantity and alteration of the quality of the crop.
Physical Effects of Various 5alts and Fertilizer Ingredients
upon a Soil as Modifying the Factors which Control its Sup-
ply of rioisture. By J. L. Bbkson. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19,
620-649. — This article contains descriptions of apparatus and
methods employed in studying, under varying conditions of
composition, etc., the rate of percolation of water through soils,
Biological Chemistry, 177
its evaporation from them, their water-holding capacity, and
their rate of saturation.
The Composition of Humus. By Harry Snydbr. /. Am.
Chan. Sac, 19, 738-744. — Analyses of different kinds of humus
made by the decomposition in soils of various kinds of organic
matter are given. The results make evident the fact that the
chemical similarity between the different varieties is no greater
than a consideration of their derivations would warrant ; and
they make necessary the indefinite postponement of an accurate
chemical classification of these different forms of humus.
A Study of Alfalfa and Some Qtlier Hays. By W. P. Hb ad-
don. Col. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull., 39, 1-34. — ^This contains
comparative analyses of alfalfa crops of different years and dif-
ferent cuttings of the same year, together with their relative
digestibilities, as measured by acid pepsin solutions. Clover, pea
vines, and upland hays are also subjected to the same methods of
investigation. The results are well summarized on the conclu-
ding page, and the paper must be recognized as an important con-
tribution to our knowledge of fodders. The author's remarks
concerning criticisms adverse to the class of investigations of
which this paper is a good example, may have considerable sig-
nificance in Colorado ; but the value of scientific study in the
comparatively fertile field of agricultural chemistry is elsewhere
rapidly receiving the appreciation due to it.
Burdock as a Vegetable. By Ikazo Nitobk. Am. /.
Pharm., 69, 416-420. — The author discusses the use of the luppa
or burdock root as an article of food and gives a table in which
its composition is compared with that of other vegetables. In
Japan, in 1888, about 36,000 tons of this root were produced for
home consumption.
p. H. Thorp, Rbvibwbr.
Electrical ilethod of Determining the floisture Content of
Arable 5oils. Electrical ilethod of Determining the Tempera-
ture of Soil. Electrical ilethod of Determining the Soluble
Salt Content of Soil. U. S. Dept. Agr. {Division of Soils)
Bulls. , 6, 7, 8.
Fertilizers. Hatch Expt. Sta. Bull., 48 ; Purdue Univ. Spe-
cial Bull., May, iSgy ; N. H. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull., 43 ; N. Y.
Agr. Expt. Sta. Rep., iSgs, 156-229; N. Y. Agr. Expt. Sta.
Bull., 116 ; N. C. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull., 136.
Some Notes Concerning the Nitrogen Content of Soils and
Humus. By E. Fui^mer. Wash. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull., 23.
— This bulletin contains determinations of nitrogen, phosphoric
178 Review of American Chemical Research,
acid, potash, lime, iron oxide, and organic matter, in 53 soil
samples.
G. W. ROLPB, RBV1KWK&.
Sugar Beets. By W. W. Cooke and Wiluam P. Hkad-
DON. CoL State Agr, CoU, Bull,, 36, 1-23.
A Review of Oregon Sugar Beets. By G. W. Shaw. Ore.
Agr. Expt. Sta, Bull,, 44, 1-49. — These bulletins are excellent
examples of the work which many of the official experiment sta-
tions are doing out of deference to a generally awakened interest
in the possibilities of beet sugar manufactured in this country.
The experimental results of the investigations on the production
and yield of the sugar beet in Colorado and Oregon are, as far
as they go, favorable to the industry. Both reports give much
practical information of a general nature as to cultivation. The
Oregon report also goes into the manufacture and cost of pro-
duction of the sugar, and will doubtless be of value in correct-
ing the fallacious ideas so prevalent as to the conditions requi-
site for success from a business standpoint.
ANALYTICAL CHEfllSTRY.
PROXIMATE ANAI^YSIS.
A. H. Gill, Rbvibwbr.
The Detection of Foreign Fats in Lard and Butter. By
C. B. Cochran. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 19, 796-799. — Two cubic
centimeters of the melted fat are introduced into 22 cc. of fusel
oil contained in a glass-stoppered graduate, and the mixture is
warmed to about 40** C. and allowed to cool slowly to 16® or 17**
C. for two or three hours. A crystalline deposit forms, which is
filtered off, recrystallized from ether, and examined microscopic-
ally. The method is capable of detecting five per cent, of beef
fat. The amount of deposit which is formed and the melting-
point of the sample may furnish a basis of estimation of the
quantity of admixture.
Volatile Oils and Their Assay. By E. Krembrs. Pharm,
Rev,, 15, 196-198. — The article is an introductory one dealing
with the changes produced in the oils upon standing and by dis-
tillation.
Notes on Several Fatty Oils. By F. A. Sieker. Pharm.
Rev,, 15, 112-113. — The oils described are those of the Saw pal-
metto, pumpkin seed, and croton oil. Saw palmetto oil is solu-
ble in alcohol as well as ether and petroleum ether ; it has a
specific gravity of 0.9138 at 15° C, and a cold test of 14**. The
iodine value is 42-43, and the saponification numbers are 212.5
Anafyftcal Chemisiry, 179
to 217 ; it does not solidify when subjected to elaidin test.
Pumpkin seed oil is of a reddish-yellow color, soluble in ether,
petroleum ether, and carbon disulphide, but insoluble in alcohol.
Its specific gravity is 0.9231 at 15"* C ; its iodine value, 118-119;
and its saponification number 195. It is not solidified by the
elaidin test. Croton oil is of a yellow color and is soluble in the
usual solvents. Its specific gravity at 15** C. is 0.9445 ; its
iodine value, 107-108 ; and its saponification number, 192-196.
The Chemistry of Pood Adulteration. By Henry Lhpf-
MANN. /. Franklin Inst,, 144, 133-137.— This paper is an ab-
stract of an address on the methods of expressing analytical re-
sults in food analysis.
G. W. RoLFB» Reviewer.
The Exact Estimation of Total Carbohydrates in Acid
Hydrolyzed Starch Products. By Geo.W. Rolfe and W.
A. Faxon. J, Am, Chem. Soc, 19, 698-703. — ^The authors
compute by a graphical method from the specific gravity factors
for hydrolyzed starch products of all possible specific rotatory
powers. The actual specific gravity factors of sixteen hydro-
lyzed starch samples were obtained by evaporation to dryness,
by method of I^obray de Bruynand Van Laent. They were found
as a whol^ to agree closely with the calculated values. A for-
mula is given by which the total carbohydrates in any solution
of the kind can be quickly estimated, when the specific rotatory
power, obtained by the factor 386, is known.
The Phloroglucin Method for the Estimation of Pentsoans.
By J. B. LiNDSEY AND E. B. Hoiyi^AND. Mass, Agr, College Ann,
Rep,, 34, 197-199. — The authors describe the method devised by
Councler and perfected by Kruger and Tollens, and give six de-
terminations of seeds and fodders, together with six parallel de-
terminations by the usual phenyl hydrazin method. The re-
sults are concordant, and the authors recommend the phloro-
glucin process on account of its greater simplicity.
p. H. Thorp, Reviewer.
A Comparison of the Methods for Determination of Glyc-
erol. With Notes on the Standardizing of 5odium Thio-
Sulphate. By W. E. Garrigues. Proc, Eng, Sac. Western
Pa,, 13, 271. — Minute directions are given for the three stand-
ard methods of analyzing spent soap lyes, with certain modifica-
tions, by the author. The processes examined were (a) Bene-
dikt and Zsig^ondy's oxidation process, with alkaline perman-
ganate ; {b) Benedikt and Cantor's acetin process ; {c) Heh-
ner's oxidation process with acid bichromate solution. The
i8o Review of American Chemical Research,
author concludes that crude glycerol is best determined by the
acetin process, and soap lyes by the bichromate method. The
proper conditions must be observed in standardizing the thio-
sulphate and in determining chromic acid ; the pfocess recom-
mended is as follows : '25 cc. of chromic acid solution are mixed
with 10 cc. of a ten per cent, potassium iodide solution and five
cc. of strong hydrochloric acid. Let the mixture stand ten
minutes and then dilute with 150 cc. of water, and titrate the
iodine, stoppering and shaking violently between the addition of
the last few drops of thiosulphate, to dissolve any iodine in the
precipitated iodide of starch. This is essential to accurate
work. There is no benefit to be obtained in using lead acetate
with lyes or crude glycerine, since the sulphuric acid is sufficient
to clarify them. But in candle glycerine, a little lead may be
used to precipitate organic matter.
Asphalt Examination. By H. Bndbmann. Municipal
JSng., 13, 6.— This is a short article on a method of analysis
proposed by the author for the separation of petrolene and
asphaltene. A number of analyses are given ; and a method of
calculating the amounts of asphalts of different quality, which
must be combined to produce a standard grade is fully ex-
plained.
Determination of Potash and Phosphoric Acid i» Fodders.
By H. W. Wilky. /. Am. Chem. Soc,^ 19, 320-322. — This arti-
cle describes an improvement on the usual method, whereby
time is saved.
W. R. Whitnbt, Rbvikwbk.
The Rapid Estimation of Uric Acid in Urine. By K. H.
Bartlky. /. Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 649-656. — ^After a compre-
hensive review of many methods employed for uric acid deter-
mination, the author describes one of his own. This consists of
a titration with silver nitrate solution in the warmed urine after
the addition of ammonium and magnesia mixture. The end-
point is determined by testing a drop of the solution for silver by
sodium sulphide, from time to time, during the titration. Com-
parative results obtained by I^udwig's and by the author's
method are given.
APPARATUS.
A. H. Giix, Rbvibwbr.
A Recent Assay Balance. By L. S. Austin. Proc. Col.
Sci. Soc, iSgy, 1-6. — The article describes what would seem to
be an unusually delicate balance.
Metallurgical Chemistry. i8i
Some New Forms of Apfmratus. By A. K. Knorr. /.
Am. Chem.Soc.^ 19, 817.
An Electrical Laboratory Stove. By M. D. Sohon. /.
Am. Chem. Soc, 19, 790.
riechanical Arrans^ement for Fat Extraction Apparatus.
ByG. J. VoLCKBNiNG. /. Am. Chem. Sac., 19, 735.
Method of Drying: Sensitive Ors^anic Substances. By. C.
C. Parsons. /. Am. Chem. Sac., 19, 388.
A New Form of Condenser for the IMstiilation of Liquids
bavins: Low Boilinsr-Points. By E. E. Ewbll. /. Am. Chem.
Sac., 19, 398. .
A New Apparatus for Sulphur Determinations in Iron and
Steel, and a Useful Form of Wash.Bottle. By R. K. Mbadb.
/. Am. Chem. Sac,, 19, 581.
A Simple Fat Extractor. By V. J. Hai.l. /. Am. Chem.
Sac, 19, 586.
An Apparatus for Collectins: Samples of Water. By
Gborgb C. Whipplb. JEng-. Record, 35, 515. — The apparatus is
designed to collect water from considerable depths. For the
method of operation reference must be made to the original article.
A Simple and Efficient Boiling-Point Apparatus for Use
with Ljow- and with High-Boiling Solvents. By Harry C.
JoNBS. Am. Chem. J., 19, 581-597. — The author discusses the
various forms of apparatus in use, and suggests a modification
of Hite's apparatus, in which the condensed solvent is not re-
turned directly into the boiling solution. The apparatus con-
sists of a tube about one-fourth filled with glass beads, on which
rests a platinum cylinder. The thermometer is immersed in the
solvent inside the cylinder, which serves to separate the con-
densed solvent and boiling solution. The results obtained seem
to be very satisfactory.
METALLURGICAL CHEMISTRY.
H. O. HOFMANN, RBVIBWBX..
Ferric Sulphate in nine Waters and Its Action upon
Metals. By L. J. W. Jones. Prac. Cal. Sci. Sac, June 15,
1897. — The author analyzed a muddy mine water, which strongly
corroded the pumps and other iron parts. The filtered mud
gave: Fe,0„ 53.57 ; A1,0„ 2.87; SiO„ 10.85; SO,. 11.46 ;
H,0, 21.14. The filtered water in 1,000 parts : SiO„ 0.043800;
NaCl, 0.013450; Na,SO„ 0.31 1720; K,SO^, 0.155480; A1,(S0,)„
0.019787; ZnSO^, 0.122440; MnSO^, 0.427140; MgSO^,
0.467460; CaSO^, 0.636290; Fe,(SOJ„ 0.603360; FeSO^,
1 82 Review of American Chemical Research.
0.009337; CuSO^, 0.1918010; total, 3.002065. Free sulphuric
acid was absent ; the corrosive action on iron was due, in part,
to cupric sulphate, and the solvent power for copper to ferric
sulphate. As a result of a number of experiments, bronze pipe
was used in the mine and this has stood for over two years.
Composition and Formation of Tank Residues in Electro-
lytic i^efineries. By E. Keller. /. Am, Chem, Soc, 19,
778-782. — The author compares the composition of anode cop-
pers with that of the tank residues obtained during a given time
at one of the leading electrolytic copper refineries of the coun-
try, and draws deductions as to the degree of concentration of
silver (gold) in the residue, and the amount of the original con-
tents of the anodes which went into solution and remained in the
residue. He also calls attention to the fact that selenium is
present in Montana coppers to a much greater extent than is
generally believed.
Practical Workinj:s of Chlorination. By T. G. Taylor.
Afin, Sci, Press, 75, 48. — The article is a description of the work
done at the Champion mine, Nevada City, Cal.
Apparatus for Extracting Qold and Silver from Ores by
the Cyanide Process. By A. S. Cooper. Afin. Sci. Press,
74, 542-543. — A sheet-iron conical drum, closed at both ends
and having spiral blades, revolves on a horizontal axis. It re-
ceives ores and solutions at the larger end and discharges them
at the smaller one.
Notes on the Action of Potassium Zinc Cyanide Solutions
on Qold. By W. J. Sharwood. £ng. Min. /., 64, 396, 426,
460, 461. — The author gives a summary of what has been pub-
lished on the subject with all the necessary references, discusses
the value of the different equations proposed from a thermo-
chemical point of view, and describes in detail his own experi-
ments, embodying over two hundred and fifty observations, to
which the reader is referred for details. The conclusions ar-
rived at are: (i) The gold-dissolving power of a solution of
potassium zinc cyanide increases rapidly with increased excess
of oxygen, presence of oxygen being the most essential condi-
tion. (2) It increases somewhat with strength of solution, but
this effect is small. (3) It increases with a rise of temperature.
(4) Gold dissolves in the solutions without forming any precipi-
tate at first, but after a certain proportion of gold has dissolved,
a white precipitate begins and continues to form, gradually
coating the metal and retarding further action. The amount of
precipitate is not proportional to that of the gold dissolved, be-
ing relatively less when the amount of solvent is large ; it con-
sists of a somewhat variable mixture of cyanide and oxide of
Metallurgical Chemisiry. 183
zinc. (5) The solvent action of the double cyanide solution is
less than that of a solution of simple potassium cyanide contain-
ing the same amount, or half the amount, of cyanogen in equal
volumes. (6) It is increased by addition of caustic alkali,
other conditions remaining the same, and the increase is great-
est in solutions to which oxygen has the freest access. (7) The
considerable increase in solvent power observed when caustic
potash is added (always provided that oxygen is accessible),
coupled with the superior effect of free potassium cyanide, is
good evidence that some free potassium cyanide is formed upon
such addition, and, therefore, that in dilute solutions (such as
0.3 to 0.6 per cent, or 0.80 to 0.40 gram molecule per liter)
potassium zinc cyanide is partially decomposed by caustic
alkali, in accordance with the principles of chemical equilibrium
between substances in solution.
Cyanide Mill Solutions. By Ph. Kkgmj,. Eng. Min.J.,
^> 393- — This note is a correction of a typographical error in a
previous paper {this Rev., 3, 139). In the table there given, in
place of: KCy 0.501, 0.451, 0.535, 0.410; read KCy 0.501,
0.491, 0.505, 0.505.
The Edison Concentrating Works. By C. Kirckhopp. Iron
Age, No. 18, 60, 1-8. — The larger part of this paper is an illustra-
ted description of the magnetic concentration plant of Edison at
the Ogden Mines, N. J. The magnetite concentrates are con-
verted into briquettes containing : Fe 67-768, SiO, 2-3, A1,0,
0.4-0.8, Mn 0.05-0.10, CaO, MgO, S traces, P 0.028-0.033,
resinous binder 0.78, H,0 none. In trial runs made in the
blast furnace of the Crane Works, Catasauqua, Pa., the nor-
mal product of loo-iio tons of pig was increased to 138.5 tons.
This was due to the richness of the ore, which, however, caused
not only an increased output of pig but a decrease in the
amount of limestone required and a larger number of charges.
It was also found that the fuel consumption was lowered. The
following analyses give the character of the pig produced :
Si.
2.750
3.6ao
2.572
1.844
1.712
The Value of Physical Tests. By S. S. Knight. Am. Man-
ufadurer, 61, 585-586. — The paper is a strong plea that chem-
ical work in the iron foundry shall'be on the same footing with
physical testing, which is so frequently made the sole standard. In
his arguments the author brings forward several facts of general
Percentagre
Tons
Date.
briquette
on charg^e.
ofpi«
produce
Jan. 5 .
... 25
104
** 6.
••• 37.5
124.5
" V
... 50
138.5
" 8.
••• 75
119
" 9-
••• 100
138.5
P.
8.
Mn.
0.830
0.018
0.500
0.740
0.018
0.350
0.580
0.015
0.200
0.264
0.022
0.200
0.147
0.038
0.185
1 84 ReTntw of American Chemical Research.
interest. He shows by analyses and physical tests that the adage
*' the shrinkage in iron varies inversely as the silicon " is abso-
lutely wrong, the fact being that it varies directly as the sul-
phur, manganese, combined carbon and titanium and inversely
as the silicon and phosphorus. How absolutely necessary
chemical work is in a foundry is illustrated by an interesting set
of determinations, showing that the first tap of a day from the
cupola was uniformly softer than that of any others made later
during the day ; e, g. : Silicon in metal from first tap was 2.739,
2.891, 2.624 per cent., and from the fourth tap, 2.102, 2.007,
1.992 per cent.
A Preliminary Tliermo-Cliemical Study of iron and
Steei. By E. D. Campbeli* and P. Thompson. /. Am,
Chem, Soc, 19, 754-766. — This paper comprises the results ob-
tained by the authors in trying to determine whether carbon
was the sole cause for the variations in the heat of solution of
steels subjected to different heat treatments. They summarize
the work done by Troost and Hautefeuille in 1875, and Osmond
in 1885, and give the results of their own work, which is brought
together in four tables representing the influence on the heat of
solution of chemical composition, annealing, quenching, tem-
pering, and reheating, and of reheating on Sie teosile strength
of cold-drawn wire.
Semi-5teel. ByC. Kirckhofp. Iron Age, No. 3, 60, 13. — The
basis of this metal is a low-carbon steel to which are added
special irons which make the product homogeneous, solid, strong,
and tough. It has twice the strength and elasticity of cast iron,
can be used in seventy-five per cent, of the work for which steel
castings are commonly used, and costs about half the price.
ASSAYING.
H. O. HOFMAN, RBVIBWBR.
A ilodified ilethod of Fine Siiver Assay. By A. E. Knorr.
/. Am. Chem, Soc,, 19, 814-816. — The author has combined the
Gay-Lussac and Volhard methods of assaying fine silver, by
precipitating the bulk of the silver with a standard salt solution
in the usual way and finishing the assay with potassium sulpho-
cyanate, of which i cc. will precipitate i mg. silver. As indi-
cator he uses 5 cc. of a solution of ferric ammonic alum.
Assaying Qold and Silver. By J. B. Kckpbi,dt. Mm.
Set. Press, 75, 4, 29, 49. — These articles give an outline of the
modes of procedure at the United States Mint at Philadelphia.
Review of American Chemical Researcli.
INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
.CBTANII^IDBS, perhalidea 158
Acetic anhydride in oil analysis 87
Acetone « yolnmetric determination 3it86
Aceiylene ....• 35
Acetylimidomethylbenzoate ••• • 61
Acid chlorides, action on imido esters 60
Acorns, tannin of 36
Agricnltural analysis, official methods • 95
Asriicnltnre, report 41
Air: determination of orgranic matter in, 32 ; determination of oxygen is a8
Albnmen, manufacture 87
Alcohol, e£Fectin volumetric analysis « 84
Aldehyde, action of sodiumon 8
Aldehsrdoaldolbenzoate 8
Alfalfa: analysis and value as a fodder, 131; analysis 37
Algae and antiseptics • • 174
Alkali : influence on soils, 131; soils, reclamation 133
Aluminum : alloy with sine, loa ; alcoholates, 157 : ethylate, 58 ; qualitative sepa-
ration, 160 ; use for condensers, 98 ; value and use in brass, 149 ; separa-
tion from iron 30
Alum water, analysis • iso
Alums, conductivity and freesing-point of solutions 76
Amalgam, accumulation on copper plates in refining gold 139
Amides, hydrolysis .. •••.• 109
Amines, primary, action on malelc anhydride. 154
Aminolauronic acid, ethyl ester iz
Ammonia for ice machines • 17a
Ammonium : phosphomolybdate, titration with alkali, 159 : thiocyanate, action on
plants ..*•• 133
Analyses : accuracy of, 160; table for calculation, 124 ; agricultural, official meth-
ods 95
Anllides : diacid, preparation and structure, Z3, 13 ; halogen addition-products,
158; structure of silver salts 60
Aniline and its salts, action of phosphorus pentachloride on no
Anisol, action of sulphuric acid on 16
Anorthosite of the Rainy I^ke Region 64, 117
Antimony : Reinsch's test for, 35 ; sulphide, action of acid vapors on, 53 ; separa-
tion from lead and copper s6
Antiseptics ; and algae, 174; relative strength of 91
Apparatus : for boiling-point determinations, 183 ; for collecting samples of wa-
ter, Z83 ; for extracting gold and silver in the cyanide process, 184 ; for
sulphur determination in iron, 182 ; for technical laboratories, 98 ; new
forms of z8a
Aralia nudicaulis 173
Argon: in the periodic sequence, lai ; spectrum, 33, 77 : present knowledge of.. 54
Arseniates, action of hydrochloric acid gas on 36
Arsenic : atomic weight, 17 ; determination in copper, 134 ; Reinsch's test for, 35 ;
separation from vanadium, 36 ; sulphide , action of acid vapors on 53
Arscnites, useon tobacco 40
Artesian well, notes on 68
Asphalt : analysis, 181 ; cements, 170 ; methods of obtaining and refining 88
1 86 Review of American Chemical Research.
Atomic welirbt of arsenic, cadmiuiii, mercury, nitrogen, and aiWer, 17 ; magne-
sium, 74: tungsten 151
Atomic weights : recalculation, 75 ; results published in 1896 131
Augen-gneiss area at Bedford, N. Y ^
Augite-teschenite ^ 69
13ABCOCK method for milk and cream, modification of 33
Bacillus, tuberculosis, products of 174
Bacteria : reduction of nitrates by, 41 ; and the decomposition of rocks 1 16
Balance, an assay i8a
Barium salts, analogies, with those of calcium and strontium 104
Basalt, hornblende, in California 117
Bauxite deposits of Arkansas 117
Beans, soy, as food 176
Bechmann rearrangement, explanation of 14
Beets : occurrence of raillnose in, 134; sugar, cultivation i34i X79
o*Bensaminesttlphonic acid 57
Bensanilide, constitution of 6a
Bensoylformylphenylhydrasine v 9
Bensoylimidoethylbensoate • ....• 61
Bertrand-Thiel open hearth process loa
Bismuth : separation from lead and copper, a6 ; separation from lead, 37; sul-
phide, solubility in alkaline sulphides 37
Bixbyite x6s
Bleaching of nuts 97
Boiling-point : apparatus, 183. of mixtures of alcohol and water x66
Boiling-points of ternary mixtures. xd6
Bordeaux mixture 41
Boric acid : estimation in foods, 133 ; separation from phosphoric acid, 133 ; vola-
tiUty x^
Bread, carbohydrates of 39
st-Brombenxoic acid, preparation iix
a-Bromdihydix>-cis-campholytic acid xi
/•Bromdimetanitrobensoic acid • 58
>-Bromdimctanitrotoluene audits derivatives 58
Bromdinitrophenylacetic acid xo
Bromdlxdtrophenylmalonic ester 10
Bromimidomethylbensoate 61
Bromine, removal from organic compounds by light, 6x ; M-Bromnitrobencene,
preparation iix
Bronxe, phosphor. xoo, X38
Bullion, low-grade, a plant for parting X39
Burdock as a vegetable..... X79
Butadiine, formation from copper acetylene 59
Butanes in Ohio petroleum 1x3
Butter, detection of foreign fats in , x8o
OADMIUM : atomic weight, 17 ; determination as oxide, 39 ; electrolytic deter-
mination X33
Caesium, double haUdes with antimony X05
Caffein compounds of Kola 37, 173
Caffein : determination, ia6, 33 ; volumetric determination xis
Calcium salts, analogies with those of barium and strontium « X04
Calomel, corrosive subhmate in 136
Calorimetry of coal and water gas 90
Camphor : action of ethyl oxalate on, 153; partial vapor pressure of, in saturated
solutions 153
Camphoric acid, constitution • ••• xo
Camphylisoxasole X54
Index of Subjects.
187
Carbide of iron 3
Carbohydrates : of wheat, maiae, flour, and bread, 39; determination in food-ttuffi,
86 ; determination in acid hydrolysed starch, 180 ; of wheat, the insoluble 97
Carbon : determination in iron, ay, 85; influence upon solubility of phosphorus in
steels, 2; bisulphide, effect on vitality of seeds 97
Carborundum, manufacture 34
Cell : galvanic, polarisation and internal resistance, 24 ; voltaic, theory ao
Cells, irreversible ax
Cement : hydraulic, effect of blast-f umace slag on, 170; Portland, 88 ; Portland,
European industry in... • 89
Chalcostibite x6x
Cheese : cream, composition, 177 ; production, 177 ; yield and milk fat 4a
Chemical societies, early American 153
Chemistry and its laws • 17
Chloralhydrate, behavior with ammonium sulphide..... 157
Chlorcarbonic ethyl ester, action on formanilide xo6
Chloric acid, color reactions with certain aromatic bodies 63
Chlorimidoethylbensoate tS
Chlorination, practical workings of 184
Chlorpbostetranilide xxx
Chrome ore, complete analysis xas
Chrome tannage, patent 34
Chromium: qualitative separation, 160; sihcide 5a
dminite 64
Cinders, blast furnace, analysis >• 85
Clay: analysis, 170 ; stone, genesis 1x7
Coals: calorific value of , 89 ; testing of 36
Cobalt, qualitative separation x6o
Coke, analysis • 27
Colored compounds from sodium ethylate and nitro compounds X07
Condenser for low-boiling liquids •• i8a
Conductivity. See Electrical conductivity.
Congress of applied chemistry 35
Conlferae, Americsn 38
Copper : action on concentrated sulphuric acid, 7; cyanide assay, chemistry of,
27 ; carbonate, ammoniacal solutions, 97 ; calorimetric test for, 89 ; deter-
mination in smelter mattes, 85 ; distribution of precious metals and impur-
ities in, 99 ; improved electrolytic refining, 47 ; mode of sampling, 99 ; mat-
ting, hot-blast system for, 45 ; matte furnace charges, calculation, 46 ;
mattes, Bessemer process for, 137 ; refining, electrolytic, 183 ; separation
from antimony and bismuth, 26 ; separation from nickel in matte, 48 ; sep-
aration from nickel, xoo; silicides, 52 ; slimes, method of treating 47
Cotton plant, chemistry of 37
Cumarin, purification 38
Cupellation, losses of silver in 150
Cupriammonium acetobromide, action of ammonia on X04
Cuprous chloride, action of water on 76
0-Cyanbenzenesulphonic acid 155
>-Cyanbenxenesulphonic acid, chloride and amide 155
Cyanide copper assay, chemistry of, 27 ; mill solutions 39< 185
Cyanide process : 144, 149 ; applications in South Africa, loi; for gold ores, 48, 49 ;
in the United States, 143 ; limitations, 139 ; use of sodium dioxide in, xoi ;
value of roasting in, X38.
Cjranogen, determination by silver nitrate \ 124
X>EU12nESCBNCB of certain salta 52
Diabase pitchstone of New England triassio trap x x8
Diacetylenyl : forxnation from copper acetylene, 59 ; bromide 60
i88
Review of American Chemical Research,
Diagtmm, a triangular 76
Diasobcnxolc acids, reactions of salts with methyl alcohol 156
Diaso compounds, decomposition 6a, 155, 156
>-Dfaxometatolnene sulphonic acid, decomposition with methyl and ethyl alco-
hols 63
^Diasotolnenc, action of sulphate on methyl alcohol 156
/•Dlasotoluene, action of nitrate and sulphate on methyl alcohol 155
o-M-Diasosylenesulphonic acid, action of alcohols on. . • » iix
Dibensoylformylphenylhydrasine 9
Dibromcyanacctamide 13
X4-I>ichlor-a,5-dibrombensene iix
Dichlordinitrophenylacetic acid to
Dichlordinitrophenylmalonic ester xo
Diethylcyanacetamide 14
Diethylcyanacetic acid 14
Diethylformylphenylhydraxine 9
Dietaty studies 96, 199
Diffusion of sulphides through steel x
Digestion, action of coal-tar colors on 43
Dihydro-cis-camphol3rtic acid,xi; derivatives xa
Dihydroxycampholytic acid xx
Diimidotriphosphoric acid 5
Dike, acid, in the Connecticut tiiassic area X15
Dilution of liquids by formula..... 160
Dimethylcyanacetimidomethyl ether X4
Dinitrocarbozylphenylmalonic ester 58
Dlnitrophloroff lucine triethyl ether, xo ; diethyl ether 10
Diorite dikes at Bedford, N. Y 65
Diphenylformamidine 9
Dipyridine methylene bromide x6
Distillation: in a vacuum, apparatus for, 45; with vapor 75
Drying : certain salts, 52; sensitive substances, ia6 ; organic compounds. i8a
Dynamite, manufacture xag
XIARTH, infusorial, analysis iso
Ebul lioscope , modified form 44
Kcloite 69
Bdison concentrating works i^
Hlectric : arc, use in laboratory, 44 ; discharge through gases, 78; charge, influ-
ence on surf ace tension of water 79
Slectrical conductivity of solutions of some acids and bases ao
Hlectricity in a vacuum.... • 79
Klectrolsrtic : determination of cadmium, 123; generator for oxygen and hydrogen,
44 ; precipitation of gold from cyanide solutions, 50 ; refining of copper,
improvements in 47
Electrolysis of hydrochloric acid, apparatus for 45
Elements, nature of isi
Equilibria, inner thermodynamic 8a
Erosion at base-level 119
]$sterification, speed 19
Ethyl anilidomalonate, 158; camphoroxalate, 153 ; camphorphenylpyrasolcar-
boxylate, 153; dianilidomalonate, 158; diethoxymalonate, X58; fbrmyl-
phenylhydrasine, 9 ; isoformanilide 9
Explosions, gas, phenomena of 171
Extraction apparatus for food analysis 44
3B*ACTORS, table for analytical work ^
Pat : determination in stearic acid, 31 ; formation in the animal body, 4a : ex-
tractor x83, x93
Index of Subjects. 189
PaU : MUd, detemiiiiAtion in compound lards, 31 ; Identification by heat of brom-
ination 87
Perment : amylolytic, in the salivary gland, 174 ; milk-cnrdling, in the gastric
mncons membrane 174
Perments : digestive, action of certain bodies on, 17a; enzymic, action on starches 39
Perric : alum, speed of reduction by sugar, 153; chloride, action on metallic gold,
53 : chloride, hydrolysis, 22 ; chloride, volatility, 55 ; hydroxide, precipi-
tation in presence of salts, 135 ; sulphate in mine waters 18
Pertilization of land 132
Pertiliser, basic slag as a 97
PertiUsers, analyses 47. 97i 132, 179
Piber, analysis 131
Piltration, use of sand for, in water supply 96
Plask, a calibrated weighing 98
Plour, carbohydrates of 39
Podders, determination of potash and phosphoric add isa, 18a
Pood : adulteration, x8o : analyses, 96 ; analysis, extraction apparatus for, 44 ; In-
vestigations in New Jersey, 49 ; human investigations 43f 176
Poods, prepared cereal, composition 176
Pood-stuffs : determination of carbohydrates in, 86 ; determination of boric acid
in 123
Pormaldehyde : preparation, reactions, and determination, 171; practical use..* . 91
Pormalin, value as a germicide 91
Pormanilide, action of chlorcarbonic ethyl ester on xo8
Pormic acid : constitution, 8; specific gravities of water solutions • x66
Pormylbensenesulphonanilide 61
Pormylphenylurethane... 108
Preecing-p<rittt, At>egg's method of measuring 80
Preesing-points : of ^lute aqueous solutions, 23 ; of ternary mixtures* 166
Pruitsoilof Oregon 130
Puels 36
Pnmace : blast, heat requirement of, 137 ; gases, action on various iron ores, 141;
gases, occurrence of hydrogen, hydrocarbons, and nitrogen peroxide in. 89
Pumaces: silver-lead, hol-blast system for, 45 ; lead-blast, wall accretions of ... . 46
Pnsion x8
CI^AI^ACTAN, distribution 175
Gas : generator, new forms, 44 ; explosions, phenomena of 171
Gases : multiple spectra, 77; technical analysis, 83 ; temperature during electric
discharge through 78
Garbage disposal, American utilisation processes 33
Gelatin, preparation and analysis 90
Gelsemlc acid, analysis 93
Gelsemium 93
Geol<^ry of : Cripple Creek district, 71 ; Pox Islands, 71 ; Mecur mining district,
72; Point Sal 69
Gibb's function x66
Gland, salivary, presence of amylolytic ferment in 174
Glycerine, determination 181
Gold: action of potassium sine cyanide on, 184 ; action of ferric chloride on, 52 ;
apparatus for extracting in cyanide process, 184 ; assay in U. S. mint, 186;
cyanide, 144 ; electrolytic precipitation from cyanide solutions, 50 ; min-
eral containing tellurium, 70 ; ores, assay by prospectors, x6i ; ores, cya-
nide process for, 48, 49 ; ores, pyritic, treatment of, xoo ; separation from
low-grade bullion, 102 ; solutions, action of hypophosphite on 51
Gold-saving process 50
Grinder, a laboratory 98
Guejarite *. i6x
Gumiing method for nitrates, modification of 32
IQO Review of American Chemical Research.
Gypsum rocks of Kansas, compositioti •• ii8
lYS, analysis and measurements of digestibility 178
Halogens: test for in onrauic compounds, 112; spectra • 77
Heat : latent, of metals, relation between, and melting-points, 165 ; specific, an
improved method of determining, 19 ; specific, of bismuth, tin, aluminum,
copper, gold, and sine, 19 ; specific, determination by method of mixtures.
168 ; specific, of liquids, new method of determining, x66 ; requirement of
silver-lead blast furnace 137
Helium in the periodic sequence lax
Humus, composition 176
Hydrobromic acid gas, action on sulphides of arsenic and antimony 53
Hydrocarbons, technical analysis 87
Hydrochloric add : apparatus for electrolysis, 45 ; gas, metal separation by, 53,
a6; electrical conductivity so
Hydrocobaltocobalticyanicacid i«3
Hydrogen : atomic weight ; X3X ; electrolytic generator for, 44 ; nascent, x8, 15a ;
occurrence in boiler furnace gases, 89 ; spectrum, 77 ; dioxide, analytical
methods using • 35
Hydrolysis: of acid amides, X09; ferric chloride 22
Hydroxylauronic acid xi
XLMBNITH ii9«i^
Imidop hosphoric acid • 5
Imido esters, actionof acid chlorideson 60
Iodic acid, titration with sodium thiosulphate x6o
lodimidomethylbensoate 61
Iodine : action on stannous chloride, X36; compounds of metallic hydroxides with,
107 ; removal from organic compounds by light, 61 : standard solution for
sulphur determinations 83
lodothyrin. physiological action 130
Iron : a pure carbide of. 3 : alloy with tungsten, 54 ; analysis, 83 ; cast, action of
water on, 5X, 54 ; cast, determination of phosphorus in, 26 : thermo-chem-
ical study, x86 ; determination of carbon in, 37, 85 ; determination of sul-
phur in, 27, 83 ; determination by means of potassium bichromate and
hydrogen dioxide, 25 ; effect of various substances on, X02 ; malleable
cast, composition of. 150 ; meteoric, found at Arlington, Minn., 65 ; modi-
fication of permanganate method for, 159 ; native, in sandstone, 163 ; ores,
determination of insoluble phosphorus in, X59 ; peculiar forms of, 54 ; pig,
determination of sulphur in, 83 ; qualitative separation, 160 ; removal from
water, 130 ; separation from aluminum, 30 ; silicide, 52 ; value of phys-
ical and chemical tests of 185
/-Isobutylphenoxyacetic add, 59; anilide, nitranilide, toluides 59
7OHORB GAMBISH assay 38
LAOI^INS, American, composition 34
Kola, caffdn compound of 37i I73
XjACTIC add, manufacture and application X7X
l<ard : determination of fordgn fats in, x8o ; determination of solid fats in 31
Lead : determitiation in ores, 123 ; red, composition, 107 ; separation from anti-
mony and bismuth, 26 ; separation from bismuth, 27 ; volumetric deter-
mination, X24 ; blast furnaces, wall accretions of, 46 ; cell, 80 ; sulphate,
formation in alternating current electrolysis 24
Leather. Morocco and imitation Morocco 169
Leudte hills of Wyoming xi8
Light, effect on organic bromides and iodides 6x
Linseed meal, value of manure from animals fed on 132
Liquid phases, two 1 * 76
Lithium, double fluorides with xirconium 105
Index of Subjects, 191
l«ocust,- hoaey, analysis of bark of. • 3^
Irucium, precipitation with aodinm thiosulphate • 136
AAA6NBSIUM, atomic weisrbt 74. x«
Maice: carbohydrates of, 39; kernel, proteids 173
Maleic anhydride, action of urea and primary amines on 154
Malefiricacid > 154
Malonic : acid, derivatiyes, 158 ; ester, preparation, 63 ; nltrile, constitution of
salts of, 13; nitrile, bromine derivatiyes 13
Malthas, composition and properties- • 170
Manganese : ferrocyanides, 53, 136, 137; qualitative separation, x6o ; SSmstr5m'8
method for, 83 ; separation from tungstic acid, a6 ; value and use in
brass ; • • X49
Marble, dolomitic, analysis 1x9
Marrubiin audits dichlorine derivative 99
Mass law, X2a; studies 75» 153
Materia medica, work in, during 1895-96 • 97
Matte, granulated 46
Mattes, handling .» 140
Melting-points, relation between, and latent heat of fusion of metals X65
Menthene : nitrosochloride, 15; benzylamlne 15
Menthol, determination in oil of peppermint 87, 127
'Mercaptides, action on quinones X09
Mercuric : chloride, solubility in methyl alcohol, 75 ; chlorthiocyanate 7
Mercury: atomic weight, 17 ; viscosity of, vapor 19
Metals, separation by hydrochloric acid gas a6
Meteorite found in Arlington, Minn 65
Methenylphenylparatolylamidines iix
<^-Methoxysulphatninebenzoic acid, action of potassium hydroxide on 157
Methojcytoluenesulphonic acid 156
a-M-Methoxyxylene : sulphonamide, 112; sulphonic acid iii
Methyl M-bromphenyl carbamate, no; dimethylcyanacetate, 14; m-nitroacetani-
lide, perhalides of, 158; o-nitrophenyl carbamate, ixo; M-nitrophenyl
carbamate, iio ; phenyl carbamate iio
Milk : cheese production fxom, 177 ; clotting by peptone, 174 ; fat and cheese
yield, 42 ; modification of the Babcock method for, 32 ; value as a food. . . . 175
Missourite 65
Mixtures, ternary • x66
Molasses : determination of specific gravity, 125 ; spontaneous combustion 172
Monarda fistulosa. phenol content of oil of 93
Muffle, an improved 150
^^ ZUATURAi; plant food," value 41, 139
Naphthalene : tetrabromide, xo8 ; partial vapor-pressure in saturated solutions. . X52
a- and d-Naphthylmale&mic acids 155
Nickel : determination in smelter matte, 85 ; qualitative separation, x6o; separa-
tion from copper, xoo ; separation from copper in matte 48
Nickelo-nickelic hydrate • 7
Nitrates : modification of the Gniming method for, 32 ; reduction by bacteria 41
Nitric acid : color reactions, 63 ; electrical conductivity 90
Nltro compounds, action with sodium ethylate 107
Nitrodiazobenzenes, reaction of salts of, with methyl alcohol 156
Nitrogen : atomic weight, 17; metabolized, excreted by animal, 41; spectrum, 77 ;
-free extracts of plants, 130; peroxide, occurrence in boiler furnace gases 89
Nitroglycerine, preparation 169
Nitronaphthalene, commercial preparation 128
Nitrosomenthene, 15 ; ketone, hydrosulphide, and hydrazone 13
*-Nitro-o-sttlphobenzoic acid : isomeric chlorides, 155 ; imide 155
Nutrition investigations in New Jersey >. • 42
192 Ranew of American Chemical Research,
Nntfl, compodtion of.
tegdWcteiil aoils on nitrogenoas content •••.• 176
Octanes in Ohio petroleum • % 113
Oil : analysia, use of acetic hydride in, 87 ; croton, 180; lamps, cost of opera-
ting, 90; pumpkin seed, 180 ; saw palmetto x8o
Oils : identification by heat of bromination, 87; volatile, assay 180
Opium : assaying, ia6; presence of starch and strontium sulphate in 93
Osmotic pressure and variance • 81
Orris root, prozimaie analysis 94
Oxalic acid, electrical conductivity so
Ozimes, rearrangement by metallic salts 154
Oxygen : determination in air and aqueous solutions, a8; electroljrtic generator
for, 44: manufacture 35
4>-Oxysnlphaniinebenxoic acid, saltsof 157
^ARIS green, analysis 133
Parthenium hysterophorous 94
Peat, value as a fertiliser 133
Peletan-Clerici process for gold and silver 138
Pentosans, phloroglncine method for determination of i8x
Peperino 64
Peppermint : determination of menthol in. 127. 87 ; oil, American, occurrence of
sulphur derivatives in 38
Peptone, influence on clotting of milk 174
Periodides of pyridine xia
Petrographical sketches, Italian 64, 1x7
Petroleums : analyses of various. 89; butanes and octanes in, X13 ; Pennsylvania,
Ohio, and Canadian, constituents of, 1x4 ; South American, composition .. 1x4
Pharmacy, work in, during 1895-96 97
Phosphate rock, new source in Tennessee 65
Phospho cereal, analysis •^ 94
Phosphor : bronxe, loo; bronse, analysis, 124 ; bronxe, manufacture, 128; copper,
analysis, 134; tin, analysis 124
Phosphoric acid : determination in fodder, 122, 182 ; determination by titration of
ammonium phosphomolybdate with alkali, 159: separation from boric
acid, 123 ; value of different forms in fertilisers 133
Phosphorus: determination in cast iron, 26; determination in steel, X26; insoluble
determinations in iron ores, xs9 ; chloronitride, action of water on, 4 ; in
steels, influence of heat treatment and carbon upon the solubility 2
Photography in natural colors 127
o-Phthalic acids, non-existence of two x6
Phsrtolaccadecandra, therootof 131
Pipette, a rapid measuring 43
Plants : effect of carbon bisulphide on, 97 ; nitrogen-free extract of, 130 ; occur-
rence of strontium in 13X
Platinum : permeation by gases, 151 ; chloride, recovery 106
Polarisation of a Galvanic cell 24
Potash: determination in fodders, X2a, 182; bulb, new form. 43
Potassium : determination, 29 ; hydroxide, electrical conductivity, 20; separation
from sodium, 29 ; lead iodide, X22 ; sine cyanide, action on gold 184
Pottery, chemistry of 170
Precipitation of salts x8
Proteidof wheat, properties of alcohol soluble 39
Proteids: vegetable, rotary power, 95; of various seeds 13X
Prunes, composition 130
Pulp distributor. Brown patent automatic 48
Pump, automatic Sprengle 44
Pyridine: halides and perhalides, 159; periodides 1x2
Index 9f Smfy'ecfs. 193
Pyknometer, new form • ^•^•' « 44
Pyritic smelting.. • ijf
Pyrometer, value in the down cMner • •••• 50
Pyropboophamic acid 6
^^UININS, thalleoquin test for X13
Quinones, action of mercaptid es on X09
Quintuple p<dntfl 75
.ADIATIONinamaflrneticfield 167
Raffinose, occurrence in American su^ar-heets 93, 134
Reinach's test for arsenic and antimony 25
Roasting before cyaniding 138
Rock : differentiation, 67 ; weathering, principles of, 64; granitic, of the Pyramid
Peak district, X15 ; igneous, from Smyrna and Pergamon, 6B ; igneous, of
Wjroming 163
Roeblingite IY5
Rubidium : double halides with antimony, 105 ; dibromiodide 4
Ruthenocsranides 7
IBlAI/TS : certain inorganic, volatility of, 54; drying and deliquescence of 53
Secretion, internal, chemico-physiological study of 130
Seeds, effect of carbon bisulphideon 97
Semi-steel 186
Separations, metal, by means of hydrochloric acid gas 53
SepioHte 70
Silica : determination in slag, 133; solution under atmospheric conditions xi8
Silicic acid, sei>aration fromtungstic acid 193
Silicide : of iron, 53; of chromium 5s
Silicides of copper 5a
Silicon : determination in silico-spiegel and f erro-silicon, 83 ; value and use in
brass • 149
Silk, artificial 137
Silver : apparatus for extracting, in cyanide process, 184; assay, z86 ; assay, in U.
S. mint, 186 ; atomic weight, 17 ; hydride, 51 ; ions, velocity, xaa ; losses in
cupellation, 150 ; mineral containing tellurium, 70 ; ores, leaching with
sodium thiosulphate, 48 ; separation from low-grade bullion, loa : volatili-
sation in chlorodizing roasting 140
Skunk, composition of the secretion of anal glands 93
Slag : basic, as a fertilizer, 97 ; blast furnace, determination of silica in, 133 ;
Thomas, manufacture and use 33
Slags : handling, 140 ; percentage of sine in, 46 ; phosphatic analysis, 83; as an
addition to hydraulic cement 170
Soap, mineral i 1x9
Sodium : determination, 39 ; double fluorides with zirconium, 105 ; dioxide, in
C3raniding ores, zoi ; ethylate action on nitro compounds, 107 ; hydroxide,
electrical conductivity, 30; nitrite, qualitative separations with, X34;
nitroprusside, preparation, 54; peroxide, use in analytical chemistry,
X33 ; separation from potassium, 39 ; thiosulphate, standardization against
chromic acid. x8i ; thiosulphate, titration with iodic acid, 160 ; thiosul-
phate, use in leaching silver ores 48
Soils : alkali, reclamation, X33 ; effect of salts on, 178 ; determination of xnoisture
content, salt content, and temperature, X79; Hawaiian, composition, 66;
nitrogen content 179
Solids: solubility in vapors, 153; and vapors 75
Solubility and freezing-point X33
Solution x8
Solutions, aqueous surface tension of i X33
Sorghum as a forage crop • 97
194
Review of American Chemical Research.
specific gravity : of molasses, Z3ts ; of normal solutions of hydrochloric, sul-
phuric, nitric, and oxalic acids, ao ; of normal solutions of sodium and
potassium hydroxide, ao ; bottle 98
Specific Beat See Heat, specific.
Spectra : multiple, of gases, 77 ; emission of elements, 167; of argon aa
Spectral lines, formula for wave-lengths 8x
Speed of esterification 19
Sprengel pump, an automatic 44
Stannic sulphide, action of hydrochloric acid gas on 53
Stannous chloride, action of iodineon .'. 136
Starch : acid hydrolyzed, determination of total carbohydrates in, 180; hydrolysis
of, 86, ia5 ; volumetric determination, 32; equivalent, Wein's table, recalcu-
lation of \7^
Starches, action of enzymic ferments on 39
Stearic acid, determination in fat 31
Steel : analysis, 83 ; determination of phosphorus in, 36 ; diffusion of sulphides
through I
Stove, electrical laboratory i8a
Strontium : salts, analogies with those of barium and calcium, 104; occurrence in
planU [31
Sucrose, allotropy of 1x3
Sugar : determination with hydrogen dioxide, as; beet, raising, 134 ; cane juices,
clarification, 36 : in urine, determination, ia6 ; refining, use of silico-fiuo-
ridesin 173
Sugars, reducing, determination in terms of cupric oxide xas
Sulphides : sulphuric acid process for lixiviation of, 141; metallic, action of acid
vaporson • 53
a-Sulphobensoic acid : anilides, 55 ; dianilides, 57 ; diphenyl ester, 56 ; isomeric
chlorides 55
Sulphon fiuorescein 56
Sulphur : determination in pig iron, 83 ; determination in cast iron, 37; determi-
nation in iron, apparatus for 182
Sulphuric acid : reduction by copper, 7 ; electrical conductivity • ao
Surface-tension: of water, infiuence of electricity upon, 79 ; of water and of dilute
solutions .'. laa
Q^ALC deposits, geneaisof 68
Tallow, mine ral , from Vermont x 19
Tannin : of acorns, 36 of castanopsis, 173 ; of ceriops candolleana 173
Tanning : chrome, 34, X69 ; Quebracho, 137; in India... 169
Taraxacum root X73
Tartar, cream of, analysis 43
Taylorite XX9
Telluride ores, leaching of 49
Tellurium : atomic weight, lax ; determination as iodide, 30 ; occurrence and be-
havior in gold ores, 143 ; occurrence in silver and gold minerals, 70 ; oc-
currence in oxidised form 70
Ternary mixture 18
Terpin hydrate 38
Tetrametaphosphimic acid 6
Tetraphosphonitrilic chloride, action of water on 6
Tetrathioethylquinone, X09 ; dibenzoy 1-dithiobenzoylacetal 109
Thallium, double fiuorides with sirconium 105
Thallous : trinitride, 7 ; thallic triidtride, 7 ; tellurate, 7 ; cyanplatixiite 7
Therapeutics, work in, during 1895-96 97
Thermodynamic equilibria 83
Thyroid glands, physiological action of 130
Titaniferous iron ores, effect on phosphoric ores 141
Index of Subjects, 195
Tobacco, use of arsenites on 40
Toluene, effect of sulphur on boiling-point 80
M<Tolueneaulphonic acid and its salts 63
<^-and/-Tolylmalettmic acids 155
Toscanite • 64
Tremain steam stamp 143
Trichlofdinitrobensene, action of aniline, sodium etbylate, and sodium malonic
ester on 10
Trichlorphosphanil ixo
Trihalldes of the alkalies 4
Trimetaphosphimic acid « 4
Triphenylmethane, action of nitric acid on 159
Tuberculosis bacillus, some products of 174
Tungsten : atomic weight, lax, 151 ; oxides, 106 ; hezabromide, 53 ; iron alloy .... 54
Tnngstic acid : separation from silicic acid, 133 ; separation from manganese. ... a6
Turpentine oil, rectification 37
XTRBA, action on maleic anhydride 154
U rethane , preparation x 10
Urethanes 109
Uric acid, rapid determination in urine i8a
Urine : determination of sugar in, 126 ; the normal, 131 ; rapid determination of
uricacidin x8a
^C^ACUUM : apparatus for distillation in, 45 ; as a conductor of electricity 79
Vanadium : determination by means of certain organic acids, a8 ; occurrence in
Scandinavian mtile, 73 ; separation from arsenic s6
Vaporsand solids 75
Vapor tension of ternary mixtures x66
Velocity : of reaction between ferrous chloride, potassium chlorate, and hydro-
chloric acid, 74 ; of silver ions xas
Viscosity : as functions of temperature, 80; of mercury vapor, 19 ; of mixtures of
liquids ax
Volatility : of certain inorganic salt8,54; of ferric chloride 55
Voltaic cell, theory of ao
Volumetric analysis : effect of alcohol in, 84 ; of acetone, 31 ; of starch 3a
Vulsinite 64
IDi^AI^RAND-LEGENISEL steel casting process X4X
Water, action on cast iron • 5X, 54
Water : an alum, from Virginia, lao; apparatus for collecting samples, 183; appa-
ratus for showing composition, 45 ; filtration, X75 ; removal of iron from,
X30 ; purification by distillation, ax ; surface tension, \ri ; value of bacte-
xiological examination, 177 ; supplies of Illinois, chemical survey, 95 ;
supply of Lorain. O., X75; supply, sand filtration of 96
Watermelon, mineral constituents of 40
Wellsite xi6
Welsbach lights, costof operating 90
Wheat : alcohol-soluble proteid, 39 ; carbohydrates, 39; insoluble carbohydrates,
97 ; proteose 94
Wood ashes, composition X33
Wolfram ore 71
Wolfsbergite x6x
SBlVLHNBf effectof sulphur on boiUng-point 80
IBINC : alloy with aluminum, loa ; ethyl, preparation, xxa; ferrocyanide, 53, X36,
137; percentage in slags, 46 ; qualitative separation x6o
Zinc-lead sulphides, smeltingof. • 98
Zirconium : double fluorides, xqs; oxalates 54
INDEX OF AUTHORS.
jBL-^BOTTy A. V. and P. J. Dommerque, fuels 36
Adams, M. See Young S. W.
Affelder, O. L, formaldehyde 171
Alder, G. W., chrome tannage patent 34
Aldrich, T. B.. chemical and physiological study of the secretion of the anal
glands of Mephitis Mephitica (common skunk) 93
Alexander, A. C, rotary properties of some vegetable proteids 95
Allen, E. T., native iron in the coal measures of Missouri i6a
Allaire, P. See Richardson, G. M.
Alpers, W. C. and B. J. Murray, AraUa Medicaulis 173
Argall, P., limitation of the cyanide process, 139; changes in cyanide mill solu-
tions, 139; cyanide mill solutions 185
Amy, H. V., parthetdum hysterophorous 94
Ashby, H. M., clay analysis 170
Atwater, W. O. and C. D. Woods, dietary studies : food of the negro in Alabama. . 129
Auchy, G., determination of phosphorus in steel and cast-iron, a6; complete
analysis of iron ores, with notes on Samstrom's method of determining
manganese 83
Austin, L. S., heat requirement of silver-lead blast furnaces, 137 ; recent assay
balance ' iSa
Avery 8. and B. Dales, electrolytic determination of cadmium 123
(ABCOCK, S. M., constitution of milk with reference to cheese production. ... 177
Babcock, S. C. See Campbell, E. D.
Baer, 8. H. and A. B. Prescott, dipyridine methylene iodide 16
Bagliss, R. T., accumulation of amalgam on copper plates 139
Bailey, B. H. S. and W. M. Whitten, composition of some Ejunsas gypsum rocks. xi8
Baird, W. H. See Stone, W. E.
Balmer, J. J. , new formula for the wave-lengths of spectral lines 8x
Bancroft, L. M., iron removal plant at Reading, Mass 130
Bancroft, W. D., ternary mixtures, 18 ; solution and fusion, 18 ; soUds and vapors,
U, 75', quintuple points, 75; two liquid phases, I, 76; a triangular dia-
gram, 76; note 153
Barnes, B. See Wheeler, H. h.
Barton, E. and J. N. Marcomb, Jr., table for calculation of analysis 124
Barton, G. E.. manufacture of dynamite •' xa6
Bartley, E. H., rapid determination of uric acid in urine xSs
Bartlett, E. J. and W. P.Rice, silver hydride 51
Bartlett, J. M., modification of the Babcock method, and apparatus for testing
milk and cream 3a
Baskendlle, C, reduction of concentrated sulphuric acid by copper 7
See Venable, P. P.
Bastin, E< S. and H. Trimble, some North American coniferae 38
Bathrick, H. A., precipitation of salts x8
Beal, W. H. See McBride, J. B.
Beatty, W. A. See Kastle, J. H.
Becker, G. P., some queries on rock differentiation 67
Beckwith, M. H., effect of bisulphide of carbon on the vitality of seeds and
plants... 97
Beeson, J. L., clarification sugar cane juice, 36; extraction apparatus for food-
stuff analysis, 44 ; physical effects of various salts and fertiliser ingre-
dients upon soils 178
Benedikt. C. H., distillation with vapor 75
Benkert, A. I^. and E* P- Smith, separation of bismuth from lead 37
Bergey. D. H., determination of organic matter in air •.••>. 33
• Index of Authors, 197
Beringer, J. J. and H. W. Hutchin, the chemiBtry of the cyanide copper assay* . • vj
Birchmore, W. H., technical analysis of hydrocarbons, vapors, and gases in liter-
ature and laboratory, 87 ; certain phenomena of gas explosions 171
Black, H. V. See Herty, C. H.
Blair. A. A., determination of sulphur in pig iron « 83
Blomfn, J. B. See Krug, W. H.
Bolton, H. C, early American chemical societies 153
Boltwood, B. B., simple automatic Sprengel pump 44
Boot, J. C, new form of pyknometer, 44 ; determination of the specific gravity of
molasses zaj
Braden, W., handling of slags and mattes at Western works 140
Bradley, W. P. and P. Kniffen, paraisobntylphenoxyacetic acid 59
Branner, J. C, bacteria and the decomposition of rocks, 116 ; bauxite, deposits of
Arkansas 117
Breckenridge, J. E- See Kreider. D. A.
Bretherton, S. B., granvlating 46
Bromwell, W., action of methyl alcohol on the sulphate of orthodiasotoluene .... 156
Bromwell and Mayer, heat of bromination as a means of identifying fats and oils 87
Brown, H. P., the Brown patent automatic pulp distributor 48
Browning, P. B- and R. J. Goodman, the application of certain organic acids to
the estimation of vanadium 38
Browning, P. B. and I«. C. Jones, estimation of cadmium as oxide 29
Buck, C. A., new laboratory grinder 98
Buck, G. C, analysis of dolomitic marble from Texas, Md 119
Buffum, B. C, alkali 131
Burger, C. C, treatment of pyritic gold ores at Gibbonsville, Mont zoo
Burfeind, J. H., sodium dioxide in cyaniding ores loz
Butters, C, the cyanide process in South Africa xoz
OADY, H. P. and A. P. Ruediger, modification of the permanganate method for
iron 159
Camp, J. M., blast furnace cinders and their analysis 85
Campbell, B. D. diffusion of sulphides through steel, x : a pure carbide of iron.. 3
Campbell, B. D. and S. C. Babcock, influence of heat treatment and carbon upon
the solubility of phosphorus in steel a
Campbell, B. D. and P. Thompson, a prelizninary thermochemical study of iron
and steel z86
Campbell, G. P. See Osborne, T. B.
Campbell, M. R., erosion at base-level Z19
Carpenter, H. V. See Moore, B. B.
Carstens, I/. P., chemical analysis of the bark of honey locust 38
Chamberlain, W. B.. action of the nitrate and sulphate of paradiaxotoluene on
methyl alcohol 155
Chittenden, R. H., internal secretion from a chemico-physiological standpoint. . . Z30
Christy, S. B., solution and precipitation of the cyanide of gold 144
Claasen, Bm purification of natural cumarin 38
Claflin, A. A., manufacture and applications of lactic acid Z7z
Clennell, J. B'. the cyanide process Z49
Clarke, P. W., a recalculation of the atomic weights, 75 ; fourth annual report of
the committee on atomic weights zaz
Clarke, H. W., removal of iron from ground waters Z30
Coblentz, V., gelsemic acid 93
Cochran, C. B., detection of foreign fats in lard and butter 180
Coleman, A. P., anorthosites of the Rainy I«ake region 64, XZ7
Comey, A. M. See Jackson, C. 1,.
Comstock, W. J., molecular rearrangement of oximes by certain metallic salts . . Z54
Cooke, W. W. and W. P. Headdon, sugar beets Z79
Cooper, A. 8., apparatus for extracting gold and silver from ores by the cyanide
process • Z84
198 Review of American Chemical Research.
Crawley* J. T., spontaneons combustioii of molaMes 172
CroaBdale, 8. « electrolytic precipitation of gold from cyanide solutions 50
Crooker, O. E. See Hillyer, H. W.
Cross, W., general geology of Cripple Creek District* Colorado, 71 ; igneous rocks
of the Leucite Hills and Pilot Butte, Wyoming 163
Curtiss, R. 8., some malonic acid derivatives 158
Cushman, A. R., rapid method for the qualitative separation of iron, aluminum,
chromium, manganese, sine, nickel, and cobalt 160
3DAI«BS, B. See Avery, 8.
Davis, P. J., value and use of aluminum, manganese, and silicon in the brass
foundry • 149
Davis, G. C, analysis of coke, ^ ; malleable cast iron 150
De Benneville, J. 3., separation of silicic and tungstic acids 123
De Chalmot, G. , silicides of copper and iron, 5a ; silicide of chromium^ 5a
Def ren, G., determination of reducing sugars in terms of cupric oxide 125
See Rolfe, G. W.
De Koningh, I«., volatility of boric acid, separation of boric and phosphoric acid ;
estimation of boric acid in foods jq
Dennis. Xr. M., M. Doan, and A. C. Gill, some new compounds of thallium with
crystallographic notes 7
Dennis, I«. M., the separation of thorium from the other rara earths by means of
potassium trinitride* 25
De Schweinitz. B. A. and M. Dorset, some products of the tuberculosis bacillus. 174
Desi, B* D., oaddes of tungsten - 106
Dewey, P. P., sulphuric acid process of treating iiziviation sulphides, 141 ; actual
accuracy of chemical analysis x6o
Diller, J. 8m hornblende basalt in northern California 1x7
Doan, M. See Dennis, I#. M.
Dommerque, P. J. See Abbott, A. V.
Dorset, M. See De Schweinits, B. A.
Dorsey, N. Bm surface tension of water and of dilute aqueous solutions xaa
DuBois. H. W. See Mixer, C. T.
Dudley, C. B., some present possibilities in the analysis of iron and steel 83
Dudley, W. J., nickelo-nickelic hydrate 7
Duff. A. W., empirical formula for viscosity as a function of temperature 80
Dunham, B. K., value of a bacteriological examination of water from a sanitary
point of view X77
Dunlap, P. 1,. and I. Phelps, action of urea and primary amines on maleic anhy-
dride X54
Durand, W. P., an alloy composed of aluminum and sine xoa
Durkee, P. W. , action of water of the Hubb coal mine upon cast iron 51
Dwight, A. 8., an improved muffle 150
XICKPBI#DT, J. B., Assaying gold and silver x86
Blbers. A. D., nitrosylixed blast furnace slags as an addition to hydraulic ce-
ment X70
Bmerson, B. K., diabase pitchstone and mud enclosures of the triassic trap of
NewBngland xx8
Bndemann, H., asphalt examination x8x
Bwell, B. Bm new form of condenser for the distillation of low-boiling liquids. ... x8a
^FAIRBANKS, H. W., geology of Point Sal 69
Paurot, H., anhydrous ammonia for ice machines 17a
Paxon, W. A. See Rolfe, G. W.
Pield, C. , 3rd, and B. P. Smith, separation of vanadium from arsenic a6
Pields, J., modification of the Guiming method for nitrates 3a
Pitzgerald, P. A<, manufacture and development of carborundum at Niagara
Palls 34
Polin, O., urethanes 109
Index of Authors. 199
Foote, H. W. See Penfield, S. 1,,
See Wells, H. I«.
See Pratt, J. H.
Porsythe, R. J. See Richards, T. W.
Pranchot, R., nascent hydrogren •* i8
Pranklin, W. S., electrolytic venerator lor oxygen and hydrogen 44
Prankforter, S. B. and P. Ramaley, root of Phytolacca decandra 131
Prear, W.. composition of wood ashes sold in Pennsylvania, X33 ; composition of
full cream cheese 177
Prear, W. and B. J. Haley, some Pennsylvania Peats 233
Preer, P. C, action of sodium on aldehyde, 8 ; apparatus for distillation in a
vacuum, 45 ; apparatus for showing the composition of water 45
Preer, P. C. and P. L. Sherman, Jr., constitution of some derivatives of formic
acid 8
Pulmer. E.. the nitrogencontentof soils and humus 179
Purman, H. Van P., calculation of copper matte blast furnace charges, 46 ;
laboratory tests of the extraction of gold from ores by the cyanide process 149
Ok-ARMAN, H., useof arsenitesin tobacco 40
Garrigues, W. B.« American utilization processes of garbage disposal, 33 ; influ-
ence of the gravity of glycerine on the jrield of nitroglycerine, 169 ; com-
parison of the methods for determination of glycerol, with notes on the
standardization of sodium thiosulphate i8x
Gill, A. C. See Dennis, 1,. M.
Gilpin, J. Bm action of phosphorus pentachloride on aniline and its salts no
Godshall, I/. D., silver losses in cupellation, 150 ; volatilization of silver in chloro-
dizing roasting 140
Gomberg, M., new form of potash bulb 43
Goodman, R. J. See Browning, P. E.
Gooch, P. A. and P. S. Havens, separation of aluminum from iron 30
Gooch, P. A. and W. C. Morgan, determination of tellurium by precipitation as
the iodide 30
Goodwin, H. M., theory of the voltaic cell, ao ; hydrolysis of ferric chloride 2.2
See Noyes, A. A.
Gross, A., dietary studies in New Mexico 139
Gray, G. W. See Remsen, I.
Griffin, J. J., the reactions of ethyl and methyl alcohols with paradiazometatolu-
enesulphonic acid, 63 ; metetoluenesulphonic acid 63
Grindley, H. S. and J. I«. Sammis. action of mercaptides on qninoues Z09
Gmndlich, C. See I«esinsky, J.
Gutzkow, P., separation of gold and silver from low-g^rade bullion, zoa ; plant for
parting low-grade bullion 139
JSCAAS, P. See I«ord, N. W.
Hahn, E.T., terpin hydrate 38
Hale, R. S., presence of hydrogen, hydrocarbons, and nitrogen peroxide in boiler
furnace gases 89
Haley, E. J. See Prear, W.
Hall, V. J., ferric hydroxide in precipitation, 135 ; simple fat extractor 183
Handy, J. O.. sand filtration of a public water supply 96
Harris, E. B., derivatives of the dihydro-cis-campholjrtic acid xa
Hardin, W. L., determination of atomic masses of silver, mercury, and cadmium
by the electrolsrtic method, 17 ; atomic mass of tungsten 151
Hartsbome, J., Bertrand-Thiel hearth process zoa
Hartwell, B. I/. See Wheeler, H. J.
Hasselberg, B., occurrence of vanadium in Scandinavian rutile 73
Havens, P. S. See Gooch, P. A.
Hayes, C. W., solution of silica under atmospheric conditions •. zz8
Haywood, J. K., cuprous chloride, 76 ; sulphur and tolueue 80
200 Review of American Chemical Research.
Headden, W. P., alfalfa, 37 ; alfalfa and some other hays 178
Hesdden, W. P. See Cooke, W. W.
Heath, G. I,., improvements in the colorimetric tests for copper, 82 ; new cali-
brated weighing^ flask 98
Hehner, O. and C. A. Mitchell, determination of stearic acid in fat 31
Heid, J. G., rapid method for determining carbon in iron 85
Helmhacker, B., sepiolite, 70 ; wolfram ore 71
Herty.C.H. and H.V. Black, alkali trihalides 4
Herty, C. H. and J. G. Smith, mercuric chlorthiocyanate 7
Hess, E. H., experiments with soluble, reverted, and insoluble phosphoric acid 133
Hesse, B. C, malonic nicrile and some of its derivatives 13
Hibbs, J. G., atomic weight of nitrogen and arsenic 17
Hilgard, E- W.,composition and draft upon the soil, of California walnuts, almonds
and chestnuts, 95 ; bleaching of nuts by dipping, 97 ; fertilization of land,
13a ; origin, value, and reclamation of alkali soils, 133 ; analysis of Paris
green 133
Higley. G. O. and B. T. Howard, apparatus for the electrolysis of hydrochloric
acid 45
Hillyer, H. W., aluminum alcoholates 157
Hillyer H. W. and O. E. Crooker, aluminum ethylate 58
Holland, E. B. See Undsey, J. B.
Hollis, H. \,.^ Walrand-I^egemisel steel-casting process 141
Howe, J. ly., on ruthenocyanides 7
Howe, J. I/, and P. S. Mertins, Reinsch's test for arsenic and antimony 25
Hovey, E. O., the artesian well sunk at Key West, Florida in 1895, 68 ; relatively
acid dike in the Connecticut triassic area 115
Howard, B. T. See Higley, G. O.
Howard, C. D., exact dilution of liquids by formula 160
Hudson, E. T. See Mabery, C. P.
Hulett,G. A., purification of water by distillation ai
Humphreys, W. J., changes in the wave-frequencies of the lines of emission-
spectra of elements 167
Hunter, J. R. See Remsen, I.
Huntley, D. B . Peletan-Clerici process at De I^amar mill, Idaho 138
Hutchin, H. W. See Beringer, J. J.
Hyde, P. S., preparation of sodium nitroprusside, 54 ; modification of the thal-
leoquin test for quinine • 113
Zl^ES, M. W., wall accretions of lead blast-furnaces 46
Ittner, M. H. See Jackson, C. I/.
^TACKSON, C. L. and A. M. Comey, on hydrocobalticyanic acid and its salts. ... 103
Jackson, C. L. and M. H. Ittner, colored compounds obtained from sodic ethylate
and certain aromatic nitro compounds 107
Jackson, C. I«, and M. H. Ittner, parabromdimetanitrotoluol and some of its de-
rivatives 58
Jackson, C. L. and W. R. I^amar, certain derivatives of trichlordinitrobensene. . . 9
Jaffa, M. B-, human foods and practical dietetics. 43
Jenkins, C. D., calorimetry 90
Johnson, E. S. , some apparatus for the technical laboratory * 98
Johnson, G. R., chemical hints to foundry men 102
Jones, A. C, manufacture of albumen at Chinkiang 87
Jones, H. C, boiling-point apparatus for use with low- and with high-boiling sol-
vents 183
Jones, H. C. and E. Mackay , water solutions of some of the alums 76
Jones, I,. C. See Browning, P. E.
Jones, L. J. W., ferric sulphate in mine waters and its action upon metals 183
Jordan, W. S., dietary studies at the Maine State College in 1895 96
Joxxlan, W. H. See Merrill, L. H.
Index of Authors. 201
lAHI^KNBHRG, I«., relative strength of antiseptics 91
Karslake, W. J. See Remsen, I.
Kastle, J. H., the analogies in composition of the salts of calcium, strontium, and
barium • 104
Kastle, J. H. and W. A. Beatty, effect of light on the displacement of bromine and
iodine from organic compounds 61
Kastle, J. H. and W. A. Beatty, simple test for the halogens in organic halides .. ixa
Kebler, L. P., is alcohol a source of error in volumetric analysis ? 84 ; improve-
ment on Dr. Squibb's volumetric method for estimating acetone, 86 ; re-
sum£ of acetic anhydride in oil analysis and the estimation of menthol in
oil of peppermint, 87 ; corrosive sublimate in calomel 136
Kebler, X,. F. and C. I^aWall, presence of starch and strontium sulphate in
opinm and their influence on assaying 93
Keller, Km distribution of the precious metals, the impurities in copper, and sug-
gestions for a rational mode of sampling, 99 ; composition and formation
of tank residues in electrolytic copper refineries 183
Kelley, J., Jr., and B. F. Smith, action of acid vapors on metallic sulphides. ..... 53
Kemp, J. F., leucite hills of Wyoming • 1x8
Kiefer. H. E. See Shober, W. B.
Kilgore, B. W., the estimation of phosphoric acid by titration of the ammonium
phosphomolybdate precipitate with alkali 159
Kirckhoff , C, the Bdison concentrating works, 185 ; semi-steel z86
Kittelberger, A. S. See Mabery, C. F.
Kleber, C, occurrence of sulphur derivatives in American peppermint oil, 38 ;
estimation of menthol in oil of peppermint 127
Klooz, O. T. See Mabery, C. F.
Kloz, I«., smelting of zinc-lead sulphides 98
Kniffen, F. See Bradley, W. P.
Knight, N., constitution of benzanilide 6a
Knight, S. S., the value of physical tests 185
Knight, W. C, mineral soap 1x9
Knorr, A. B., some new forms of apparatus, X83 ; modified method of fine silver
assay 186
Knox, J. W. T. and A. B. Prescott, caffein compounds of kola 37i ^73
Kreider, D. A., determination of oxygen in air and in aqueous solutions 38
Kreider, D. A. and J. B. Breckenridge, separation and determination of potas-
sium and sodium a9
Kremers, B., rectification of turpentine oils, 37 ; volatile oils and their assay .... 180
See Richtmann, W. O.
Krug, W. H., recalculation of Wein's table of starch equivalent 125
Krug, W. H. and J. B. Blom^n, commercial preparation of nitronaphthalenes. . . 138
XjiACHMAN, a., preparation of zinc ethyl iia
Lamar, W. R. See Jackson, C. I^.
Landis, B. K. , standard iodine for sulphur determinations 83
Lane, C. B. See Voorhees, B. B.
Lang, H., present status of pyritic smelting 137
Langenbeck, K., chemistry of the pottery industry 170
Langharamer, P., a new gold-saving process 50
Laugworthy, C. F., excretion of metabolized nitrogen by animals, 41 ; soy beans
as food for man 176
Latimer, C. W. and J. W. Warren, ,the presence of amylolytic ferment and its
zymogen in the salivary gland X74
Laudig. O. O. , action of blast furnace gases upon various iron ores 141
La Wall, C, analytical processes and laboratory notes X36
La Wall, C. H. See Kebler, L. P.
Lea, M. C, experiment with gold 51
Lefimann, H., chemistry of food adulteration 180
202 Review of American Chemical Research.
I«esingky, J. and C. Gundllch, behavior of chloral hydrate with ammonium sul-
phide IS7
Lewis, P. H., Buropean Portland cement industry 89
I4ndgren, W., granitic rocks of Pyramid Peak district, California X15
Lindsey, J. B. andfi. B. Holland, distribution of galactan 173
I4ndsey, J. B. and B. B. Holland, phloroglucin method for the estimation of pen-
tosans i8x
Liuebarger, C. H.. viscosity of mixtures of liquids • ai
l4nton, manufacture of oxygen • 33
Litch, R. I^., new method of determining the specific heat of liquids x66
I^ittleton, F. Tm conditions effecting the volumetric determination of starch by
means of iodine 33
Locke, P. 8., the influence of ** peptone" on the clotting of milk by rennets 174
Long, J. H., speed of reduction of ferric alum by sugar 159
Loomis, B- H., the specific gravity and electrical conductivity of normal solutions
of some bases and acids, so : freesing-points of dilute aqueous solutions,
S3 ; . the Abegg method of measuring f reesing-point depressions 80
Lord, N. W. and P. Haas, value of certain coals as determined by the Mahler
calorimeter > 89
Lundieigen, A., Portland cement concrete 88
Luquer, L. McL. and H. Ries, the '* augen "-gneiss area, pegmatite veins, and
dioriie dikes at Bedford, N. Y 65
Lyons, A. B., chemical composition of Hawaiian soils and of the rocks from which
they have been derived 6b
SiCABBRY, C. p., constituents of Pennsylvania, Ohio, and Canadian petro-
leum between X5o*and3ao* 114
Mabery, C. P. and B. T. Hudson, butanes and octanes in American (Ohio) petro-
leum • XZ3
Mabery, C. P. and B. T. Hudson, refractive power of Pennsylvania, Ohio and
Canadian petroleums and their chlorine derivatives 1x4
Mabery, C. P. and A. S. Kittelberger, composition of South American petro-
leum XX4
Mabery, C. P. and O. T. Kloos, composition of American kaolins 34
Mackay, B' See Jones. H. C.
Maier, J. J. See Wagner, R.
Maisch, H. C. C Riegler's method of estimating sugar in urine xa6
Marcomb, J. N., Jr. See Barton, B.
Mason, P. H., photography in natural colors 137
Mather, W. T., velocity of silver ions in aqueous and alcoholic solutions xas
Mathews, J. A. See Miller. B. H.
Maury, G. P. See Murray, C. B.
Mayer. See Bromwell.
McBride, J. B. and W. H. Beal, chemistry of the cotton plant 37
McParland, B. W. See Wheeler, H. L>
MacGregor, W., roasting previous to cyaniding 138
Mcllhincy, P. C. action of ferric chloride on gold 53
Mcintosh , D. , mercuric chloride, 75 ; solubility and f reexing-p<dnt xss
McKee, S. R. See Remsen, I.
McKenna, A. G., complete analysis of chrome ore • 135
Meade, R. K., determination of lead in lead ores, 133 ; new apparatus for sulphur
determinations in iron and steel, and a useful form of wash-bottle xSs
Meeker, G. H., determihation of silica in blast furnace slag 133
Meltzner, B. J., the phenol-content of the oil of Monarda Pistulosa (L) 93
Merrill, G. P., principles of rock weatherings 64
Merrill, L. H. and W. H. Jordan, foraging powers of some plants for phosphoric
acid 133
Merritt, W. H. , assay by prospectors for auriferous ores and gravels 161
Index of Authors. 203
Mertlns, P. S. See Howe, J. t,.
Metcalf , H. P. See Wheeler, H. L.
Mlchelson, A. A., tadiadon is a magnetic field 167
Miller, B. H., ferrocyanide of sine and manganese 53
Miller, B. H. and J. A. Mathews, table of factors 35
Miller, B. H. and J. A. Mathews, ferrocyanides of zinc and manganese 137
Miller, W. L., the second differential coefficients of Gibbs' function g. The
vapor tensions, freezing- and boiling-points of ternary mixtures 166
Mills, W., use of silico-fluorides in sugar refining 172
Mitchell, C. A. See Hehner, O.
Mixter, C. T. and H. W. DuBois, determination of insoluble phosphorus in iron
ores XS9
M'Mynn, J. C, acetylene gas 35
Moerk, P. X., opium assaying 126
Moore, B. B., the lead cell • 80
Moore, B. B. and H. V. Carpenter, polarization and internal resistance of a gal-
vanic cell ^
Morgan, W. C. See Gooch, P. A.
Moyer, G. B., metal separations by means of hydrochloric acid Z'^^ ^i 53
Murray. B. J. See Alpers, W. C.
Murray, C. B. and G. P. Maury, rapid method for the determination of silicon in
silico-spiegel and ferro-silicon < 83
Mutusow, H., marrubiin and its dichlorine derivative 9^
ZHirBSMITH. J. A., hot-blast system for copper matting and silver lead furnaces 45
Newland, D. H. , the ecloite of the Bavarian Pichtelgebirge 69
Nichols, B. If. and T. A. Clark, influence of a static charge of electricity upon
the surf ace tension of water. .• . 79
Nichols, H. W., genesis of clay stones 117
Nitobe,'Q., burdock as a vegetable 179
Nordhoff, A. D., the cyanide process 48
Norris, W. M., new method of chrome tanning 169
Norton, T. H., new forms of gas generators. 44 ; peculiar forms of iron, 54 ; a
tungsten iron alloy, 54 ; phospho cereal, 94 ; use of aluminum for con-
densers 98
Norton', T. H. and D. M. Roth, volatility of certain inorganic salts 54
Noyes, A. A. and H. M. Goodwin, viscosity of mercury vapor 19
Noyes, A. A. and C. W. Tucker, formation of diacetylenyl (butadiine) from cop-
per acetylene « 59
Noyes, A. A. and R. S. Wason, velocity of the reaction between ferrous chloride,
potassium chlorate and hydrochloric acid 74
Noyes, W. A., camphoric add, 10 ; preparation of diethyl malonic ester 63
ORNDORPP, W. R., naphthalene tetrabromide 108
Osborne, T. B., proteose of wheat 94 ; amount and properties of the proteids of
the maize kernel 173
Osborne, T. B. and G. P. Campbell, proteids of lupin seeds, sunflower seeds, cow
pea, and the white podded adzuki bean 131
PACKARD, G. A., cyanide process in the United States 143
Palmer, A. W., chemical survey of the water supplies of Illinois 95
Palmer, C. S., nature of the chemical elements : argon and helium in the periodic
sequence xai
Parker. C. I«eR., present knowledgeof argon 54
Parker, H. G. See Richards, T. W.
Parr, S. W., sodium peroxide as a third group reagent 123
Parsons, C. C, method of drying sensitive organic substances 126, i8a
Parsons, C. W. , standard practice in Bessemerizing copper matte 137
Payne, G. P.. mineral constituents of the watermelon, 40 ; ash analysis of the
watermelon, 40 ; analysis of some substances sold as cream of tartar 43
204 Review of American Chemical Research,
Pearce, R., rich silver and g^old mineral containing telluriam in Colorado, 70 ; oc-
currence of tellurium in an oxidised form 70
Peek, G. M., analysis of a variety of illmenite X19
Penfield, S. L. and A. Prenzel, identity of chalcostibite and guejarite i6x
Penfield, S. L. and H. W. Poote, bixbyite, and notes on associated topaz 162
Penfield, S. 1^. and H. W. Poote, composition of illmenite 163
Penfield, S. L. and H. W. Poote, roeblingite, a new silicate containing sulphur
dioxide and lead 115
Penny, C. I«., ammoniacal solutions of copper carbonate 97
Penrose, R. A. P., Jr., mining geology of the Cripple Creek District, Colorado. ... 71
Phelps, I. See Dunlap, P. L.
Phillips, P. C, determination of sulphur in cast-iron 27
Pirsson, I*. V. See Weed, W. H.
Piatt, C, the normal urine 131
Pratt, J. H. and H. W. Poote, wellsite xi6
See Wheeler, H. L.
Prescott, A. B. See Baer, S. H.
See Knox, J. W. T.
Probst, C. O., mechanical filtration of the public water supply of I«orain, Ohio .. 175
Puckner, W. A., estimation of caffein 32
ZU^MAI^EY, P. See Prankforter, S. B.
Randall, W. W., permeation of hot platinum by gases 151
Remsen, I., investigations on the isomeric chlorides of orthosulphobenzoic acid,
55 ; hydrolysis of acid amides X09
Remsen, I. and G. W. Gray, isomeric chlorides of >-nitro-a-sulphobenzoic acid... 155
Remsen, I. and J. R. Hunter, the relation of the anilides of orthosulphobenzoic
acid 55
Remsen, I. and W. J. Karslake, orthocyanbenzenesulphonic acid 55
Remsen, I. and S. R. McKee, purification of, and action of various reagents on,
the chlorides of orthosulphobenzoic acid 55
Rettie, T., compounds of metallic hydroxides with iodine 107
Rice, W. P. See Bartlett, B. J.
Richards, H. H. and G. W. Rolfe, reduction of nitrates by bacteria and conse-
quent loss of nitrogen 41
Richards, E. H. and S. E. Wentworth, dietaries of the public institutions of Bos-
ton 139
Richards, J. W., cyanide process for the treatment of gold ores, 48 ; relations be-
tween the melting-points and the latent heats of fusion of the metals 165
Richards, T. W. and R. J. Porsythe, action of ammonia upon cupriammonium
acetobromide 104
Richards, T. W. and H. G. Parker, a revision of the atomic weight of magnesium 74
See Trowbridge, J.
Richardson, C, softening agents for the production of asphalt cement, chemical
constitution of residuums and malthos, solubility of the asphalt hydrocar-
bons in heavy petroleum oils 170
Richardson, G. M. and P. Allaire, specific gravities of water solutions of formic
acid x66
Richtmann, W. O., assay of Johore gambler 38
Richtmann, W. O. and E. Kremers, menthene nitrosochloride and some of its de-
rivatives • X5
Ries, H. See I«uquer, I«. NcX/.
Robinson, P. C, practical use of formic aldehyde 91
Rolfe, G. W. and G. Defren. analytical investigation of the hydrolysis of starch
byacids 86, 125
Rolfe, G. W. and W. A. Paxon, exact estimation of total carbohydrates in acid
hydrolyzed starch products • x8o
See Richards, E. H.
Index of Authors, 205
R088, B. B.f some analytical methods involving the use of hydrogen dioxide. • • - • 25
RoAsif A. J., effect of additions of titaniferous to phosphoric iron ores in the
blastfurnace 141
Roth, D. M. See Norton, T. H.
Roth well, R. P., process for separating nickel and copper, 100; the cyanide pro-
cess. 49
Ruediger, A. P. See Cady, H. P.
Russel, H. I^, tainted or defective milks, their causes and methods of prevention 177
ISAPPORD, J. M., new and important source of phosphate rock in Tennessee. • 65
Sammis, J. I<. See Grindley, H. S.
Sawter, G., artificial silkin Germany 137
Sayre, I^. E., gelsemium, 93 ; important constituents of taraxacum root 173
Schaeffer, H. A. andK- P. Smith, tungsten hexabromide 53
Schramm, E., Quebracho tanning in Uruguay 127
Schweitzer, H., chrome tannage patent 34
Selby, A. D., so-called " natural plant food," a soft phosphate 132
Shapleigh, W., lucium 136
Sharwood, W. J., estimation of cyanogen by silver nitrate, using potassium iodide
and ammonia as indicators, 124 ; action of potassium sine cjranide solutions
upon gold 184
Shaw, G. W., fruit soils in Oregon and the composition of Oregon prunes, 130 ;
Oregon sugar beets 179
Sheldon, S, and M. B. Waterman, formation of lead sulphate in alternating cur-
rent electrolysis with lead electrodes 24
Sherman, H. C, insoluble carbohydrates of wheat 97
Sherman, P. L.. Jr. See Freer, P. C.
Shober, W. B., action of sulphuric acidonanisol 16
Shober, W. B. and H. E. Kiefer, action of certain alcohols on asym-metadiazo-
xylene sul phonic acid xiz
Sieker, P. A., several fatty oils 180
Simons, P. D., action of certain bodies on the digestive ferments 173
Slosson, E- 1^, analysis of Popo Agie, Lander, and Shoshone petroleum, 89 ; com-
position of prepared cereal foods 176
Smith, E. P. See Benkert, A. I/.
See Field C, 3rd.
See Kelley, J., Jr.
See Schaeffer, H. A.
See Taggart, W. T.
Smith, E. L., rapid measuring pipette 43
Smith, E- S., action of nitric acid on triphenyl methane 159
Smith, P. C, occurrence of tellurium in gold ores 143
Smith, G. O., geology of Pox Island, Maine 71
Smith, J. G. See Herty, C. H.
Smither, P. W., drying and deliquescence of certain salts, 5a : analysis of infu-
sorial earth zao
Smoot, L. Em mineral tallow from Danby, Vermont, 1x9 ; analysis of an alum
water 120
Smyth, C. H. Jr., genesis of the talk deposits of St Lawrence County, N. Y 68
Snyder, H., value of manure from animals fed on linseed meal, 132 ; human food
investigation, 176 ; composition of humus 176
Sohon, M. D., an electrical laboratory stove i8a
Soskin, S., formation of fat in the animal body 4a
Spencer, G. L., caffein zia
Sperry, E. A., use of the Tremain steam stamp with amalgamation 143
Spurr, J. E., economic geology of the Hercur mining district, Utah 73
Squibb, E. R., volumetric determination of acetone, 31 ; improved specific gravity
bottle, 98 ; materia medica, pharmacy, and therapeutics of the year end-
ing October y, 1896 97
2o6 Review of American Chemical Research.
/
Standage, H. C, producingr fancy leathers i^
Steuber, H. J., ■ome boiliiv-point determinations • i66
StleglitB, J., on the ** Bechmann rearrangement" X4
Stokes, H. N., trimetaphosphimic acid and its decomposition products, 4 ; tetra-
metaphosphimic acid 6
Stone, G. C, solubility of bismuth sulphide in alkaline sulphides vj
Stone, G. C. and D. A. Vanlngen, f errocyanide of sine and manganese 136
Stone, W. Bm action of enzymic ferments upon starches of different origins, 39 ;
the carbohydrates of wheat, flour, maise, and bread, 39 ; quantitative de-
termination of carbohydrates in food-stuffs 86
Stone, W. B. and W. H. Baird. occurrence of rafinose in American sugar beets.. 9a, 134
Stubbs, W. C, inspection of Paris green 133
Summers, B. S., carbon determinations in cast-iron 27
Swingle, W. T., Bordeaux mixture, its chemistry, physical properties, and toxic
effects on fungi and algae 4^
TAGGART, W. T. and B. P. Smith, separation of manganese from tungstic acid a6
Talati, K. B., tanning in India 169
Talbot, H. P., volatility of ferric chloride 55
Talbot, H. P. and A. G. Woodman, analysis of an iron rail taken from an unused
coal mine 54
Talmadge, J. M., potassium lead iodide, 123 ; solubility of solids in vapors 151
Taylor, A. B., irreversible cells ai
Taylor, T. G., practical workings of chlorination XS4
Taylor, S. P., mass law studies 75. m, 153
Teller, G. L., properties of the alcohol-soluble proieid of wheat and of other
cereal grains 39
Tennille, G . P., determination of solid fats in compound lards 31
Thompson, P. See Campbell, B. D.
Thompson, P. B.. manufacture and use of Thomas slag, 33 ; basic slag as a fer-
tilizer 97
Tillson, G. W., asphalt and asphalt pavements 88
Tingle, J. B., action of ethylic oxalate on camphor 153
Tollens, B. , nitrogen-free extract of plants and feeding stuffs 130
Tommasi, D., comment on the note of R. Pranchot entitled " nascent hydrogen". 152
Trevor, J. B., osmotic pressure and variance, 81 ; inner thermodjrnamic equilib-
ria 83
Trimble, H., tannin of some acorns, 36 ; occurrence of strontium in plants, 131 ;
tannin of ceriops candolleana, 173 ; tannin of castanopsis 173
See Bastin, B. S.
Trowbridge, J., does a vacuum conduct electricity ? 79
Trowbridge, J. andT. W. Richards, the spectra of argon aa
Trowbridge, J. andT. W. Richards, multiple spectra of gases 77
Trowbridge, J. and T. W. Richards, temperature and ohmic resistance of gases
during the oscillatory electric discharge • 78
Trowbridge, P. P., periodldes of pyridine, xi3 : halides and perhalides of psrri-
dine 159
True, R. H., algae and antiseptics 174
Tucker, C. W. See Noyes, A. A.
Tucker, S. A., proximate analysis of orris root • 94
TTBHLING. A., value of the psrrometer in the down comer 50
Ulke, T., improvements in the electrolytic refining of copper, 47 ; present method
of treating slimes from copper refineries, 47 ; separation of nickel and
copper in matte, and the recovery of the contained metals. 48 ; determina-
tion of copper and nickel in smelter matte, 85 ; determination of copper
and cupriferous solutions 124
Index of Authors. 1207
^T'ANINGEN, D. A. See Stone, G. C.
VanKame, W. G., the srclatin from white fibrous connective tissues 90
VanSlyke, I^. I/., real value of "natural food plant/' 41 ; milk fat and cheese
jrield 42
Venable, P. P. andC. Baskerville, oxalates of zirconium 54
Volckenin^, G. J., mechanical arrangement of fat extraction apparatus 182
Voorhees, B- B., food and nutrition investigations in New Jersey in 1895 and 1896. 43
Voorhees, B. B. and C. B. Lane, milk, its value as a food and a different method
of sale • X75
XTCT ADS WORTH, P. L. O., maximum accuracy in the determination of specific
heat by the method of mixtures 168
Wagner, R. and J. J. Maier, chrome tannage patent 34
Wainwright, J. H., volumetric determination of lead 124
Walbridge, H. D., light secured and operating exi>enses of Welsbach lights and
oil lamps ;..... 90
Wald, P., chemistry and its laws • 17
Walden, P. T. See Wheeler, H. L.
Walker, C, action of potassium hydroxide on orthomethox3r8ulphaminebenzoic
acid • 157
Walker, C. P., titration of sodium thiosulphate with iodic acid 160
Walker, M. S., practical use in the chemical laboratory of the electric arc 44
Warder,' R. B., speed of esterification as compared with theory 19
Warren, J. W., the presence of milk-curdling ferment (pexin) in the gastric mu-
cous membrane of vertebrates 174
See I«atimer, C. W.
Washington, H. S., the Viterbo region, 64 ; the Bracciano Cerveteri, and Tolfa re-
gions, 64 ; the Rocca Monfina region, ZI7; igneous rocks from Smyrna and
Pergamon • 68
Wason, R. S. See Noyes. A. A.
Waterman, P. A., specific heat of metals 19
Waterman, M. B. See Sheldon, S.
Weber, H. A., behavior of coal-tar colors toward the process of digestion 42
Weed, W. U. andl«. V. Pirsson, missourite, a new leucite rock 65
Weida, G. P., reactions of the salts of nitrodiazobensenes and the diazobenzoic
acids with methyl alcohol 156
Weinberg, B. A., percentage of zinc in slags \ 46
Wells, H. Ir. and H. W. Poote, double halogen salts of caesium and rubidium. ... 105
Wells, H. I«. and H. W. Poote, double fluorides of zirconium with lithium, sodium
and thallium 105
Wentworth, S. B. See Richards, E. H.
Weston, B. B., filtration of water 175
Wheeler, P. B., calorimetry and heat unit value of gases 90
Wheeler, H. J. and B. L. Hartwell, ammonium thiocyanate as an impurity in am-
monium sulphate 132
Wheeler, H. L., diacid anilides, 12 ; non-existence of two orthophthalic acids, 15;
non-existence of four methenylphenylparatolylamidines iix
Wheeler, H. L. and B. W. McParland, preparation of metabrombenzoic acid and
of metabromnitrobenzene ixi
W1ieeler» H. I«., B. Barnes and J. H. Pratt, halogen addition-products of the ani-
lides 158
Wheeler, H. I«. and P. T. Walden, the action of acid chlorides on imido esters and
isoanilides, and on the structure of the silver salts of the anilides 60
Wbeeler, H. L. and H. P. Metcalf , action of chlorcarbonic ethyl ester on formani-
lide 108
Whipple, G. C, apparatus for collecting samples of water 183
Whitten, W. M. See Bailey, B. H. S.
Wickhorst, M. H., phosphor bronze, 100; analysis of phosphor bronze, phosphor
copper, phosphor tin. etc., 124 ; manufacture of phosphor bronze 128
-<r.
208 Review of American Chemical Research,
Widtsoe, J. A., chemical life histoxy of alfalfa or lucem 131
Wiechmana, F. G., allotrophy of sucrose 1x3
Wiley, H. W., second international conarress of applied chemistry, 35 ; modified
form of the ebuUioscope, 44 ; mechanical analysis of basic phosphatic
slas^s, 8a ; recovery of waste platinum chloride, xo6 ; determination of pot-
ash and phosphoric acid in fodders, 122, i8a ; sug^ar beet, 134 ; influence of
vegetable mould on the nitrogenous content of oats, 178 ; changes in meth-
ods of analysis adopted by the Association of Official Agricultural Chem-
ists 95
Winchell, N. H., the Arling^ton iron, Minnesota, No. 2 65
Williams, T. A., sorghum as a forage crop 97
Winslow, A., the testing of coals 36
Woodman, A. G. See Talbot, H. P.
Woodman, D.. variations in the composition of red lead 107
Woodrufif, B. C, color reaction of nitric and chloric acids with certain aromatic
bodies 63
Woods, C. D. See Atwater, W. O.
Wynkoop, G., qualitative separations with sodium nitrate in absence of phos-
phates 124
OUNG, S. W. and M. Adams, action of iodine on solutions of stannous cholride 136
/
4
/
1
r
3 2044 048 671 093
L
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11